JUT Syllabus & Regulation 1st To 6th Sem

JHARKHAND UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY
(Established by State Act No. ……. of 2017)

Ranchi, Jharkhand, India
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS FOR B.TECH.
REGULAR STUDENTS
With effect from
ACADEMIC YEAR 2018-19
Page 1 of 18
Contents
Sl. No. Topic Page No.
1 INTRODUCTION 3
2 ACADEMIC CALENDAR 3
3 ADMISSION 4
4 ATTENDANCE 5
5 COURSE STRUCTURE 5
6 REGISTRATION 6
7 EXAMINATION 8
8 GRADING OF PERFORMANCE IN EXAMINATIONS 9
9 RECORDS OF ACADEMIC PROGRESS 10
10 GRADUATION REQUIREMENT 11
11 AWARD OF DEGREE 11
12 GRADE AFTER COMPLETION OF COURSE 12
13 GUIDELINES FOR ASSIGNMENT 12
14 CHANGE OF BRANCH 12
15 RE-ADMISSION 13
16 ANNEXURE I 14
17 ANNEXURE II 17
18 ANNEXURE III 18
Page 2 of 18
1. INTRODUCTION
The provisions contained in these regulations govern the conditions for imparting courses of
instruction, conducting examinations and evaluation of students’ performance leading to the
Degree of Bachelor of Technology (B. Tech.). These are applicable to the new batches with
approval of the JHARKHAND UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY from time to time.
1.1. Disciplines: The disciplines in which the courses of study are available and Degrees will be
offered are:
1. Civil Engineering (CE)

2. Electrical Engineering (EE)
3. Mechanical Engineering (ME)
4. Electronics and Communication Engineering (ECE)
5. Electrical and Electronics Engineering (EEE)
6. Computer Science and Engineering (CSE)
7. Information Technology (IT)
8. Metallurgical Engineering
9. Production Engineering
10. Chemical Engineering
11. Mining Engineering
12. App. Electr. & Instr. Engg.
New disciplines may be added in future with approval of Jharkhand University of Technology,
Ranchi and the Department of Higher, Technical Education & Skill Development, Government
of Jharkhand.
1.2. The provisions of these regulations shall also be applicable to any new disciplines that will
be introduced from time to time and added to the list in Section 1.1.
1.3. Any regulation, as and when required, may be changed on the recommendation of the
Academic council of the University.
2. ACADEMIC CALENDAR
2.1. The academic session is divided into two semesters each of approximately 90 days duration:
having a Monsoon semester and a Spring Semester.
2.2. The Jharkhand University of Technology, Ranchi will approve the academic calendar
consisting of schedule of activities for a session inclusive of dates for registration, Mid-Semester
and End-Semester Examinations; inter-semester breaks. It will be announced at the beginning of
the semester. The academic calendar shall usually provide for at least 90 working days
(including examination dates) in each semester, excluding holidays and days when classes are
suspended.
2.3. All subjects/ courses are to be registered by the student in a semester to earn credits which
shall be assigned to each subject/ course in an L: T: P: C (lecture periods: tutorial periods:
practical periods: credits) structure based on the following general pattern.
 One credit for one hour/ week/ semester for theory/ lecture (L) courses.
Page 3 of 18
 One credit for one hour/ week/ semester for theory/ Tutorial (T) courses.
 One credit for two hours/ week/ semester for laboratory/ practical (P) courses
Courses like Environmental Science, Professional Ethics, Gender Sensitization lab and other
student activities like NCC/NSO and NSS are identified as mandatory non -credit courses.
3. ADMISSION
3.1. Admission to all courses will be made in the Monsoon Semester of each session at the First
Year 1st semester/ Second year 3rd semester (lateral entry) level through the entrance examination
conducted by JCECEB. However, private Engineering Colleges will follow the
AICTE/Government policy for the admission. Basic qualification for entry in both levels will be
as per AICTE norms.
3.1. i. Basic qualification for admission to all B. Tech. Courses in First year –
I. Sc. /10+ 2 or equivalent exam passed with Physics, Mathematics as compulsory subjects along
with Chemistry and he/she has minimum of 45% marks (40% for reserved category) in above
subjects taken together. Norms of AICTE will always be applicable.
ii. Basic Qualification for admission to all B. Tech. Courses in second year through lateral
entry-
(a) Three years diploma course passed with 40% marks (reserved category) and 45% marks
(general category). Norms of AICTE will always be applicable.
(b) Passed B.Sc. with Math. Norms of AICTE will always be applicable.
3.2. There is no provision of Inter-College transfer of students.
3.3. The Institute reserves the right to cancel the admission of any student at any stage of his
career on grounds of unsatisfactory academic performance, irregular attendance in classes or
indiscipline (Annexure I).
3.4. At the time of admission, the student is required to provide the following documents:
(a) A certificate for proof of age (Birth certificate or Board certificate).
(b) Pass certificate of the qualifying examination.
(c) College/ School leaving certificate.[CLC/SLC]
(d) Migration certificate (If applicable)
(e) 02 recent passport size colour photographs.
(f) Allotment letter of seat from JCECEB, Board, Ranchi
(g) Other relevant category certificate, if any.
3.5. The student is also required to fill up prescribed forms for semester registration in the
Jharkhand University of Technology, Ranchi.
3.6. A provisional admission may be permitted if any of the certificates is not produced, except
CLC/SLC and the rest has to be submitted on any other date to be fixed by institute.
Page 4 of 18
4. ATTENDANCE
4.1. Every student is required to attend all the lectures, tutorials, practical/ sessional & other
prescribed curricular & co-curricular activities. A student having at least 75% attendance
(excluding attendance in mandatory non-credit courses Environmental Science, Professional
Ethics, Gender Sensitization Lab, NCC/NSO and NSS for that semester) will be allowed to
appear in end semester examination.
4.2. The attendance shall be counted from the date of admission in the college or start of
academic session, whichever is later.
4.3. Attendance sheet will be provided to each and every Teacher for maintaining the monthly
attendance of the students and same will be documented in centralized manner by the Academic
office of the respective Institute. The Principal of the concerned Engineering Institute will look
after the whole process. Failing which admission will be cancelled and all fees deposited will be
forfeited.
The credit for the attendance will be calculated as follows:
Number of classes attended in a course

% attendance = --------------------------------------------------------- X 100
Total number of classes taken in that course
and the weightage of attendance would be as:
Attendance % 75 – 79 % 80 – 85 % 86 – 90 % 91 – 95 % 96-100%
Weightage 01 02 03 04 05
5. COURSE STRUCTURE
5.1. The curricula for the different degree programmes as proposed by the respective
departments and recommended by the Under-graduate Programme and Evaluation Committee
(UGPEC) shall have the approval of the Academic Council of JUT. The departments will also
prepare the syllabus of each subject containing the scope of studies and instructions to be
imparted which must have the approval of the JUT.
5.2.
i. All subjects will have Lecture- Tutorial-Laboratory/ Design components (L-T-P) to indicate
the contact hours. Theory courses will have 3-0-0 (3 credits) or 3-1-0 (4 credits) structure.
Design or laboratory courses will be offered as distinct (0-0-P) courses without being mixed with
lecture components.
ii. Normally, subjects based on engineering or scientific principles or on thought-provoking

information, where it is possible to conduct a closed book examination, will be taught as theory
Page 5 of 18
courses, whereas those based on applications and practice (conceptual, computational or
experimental) will be covered under Design or Practical Courses/ Sessional Courses.
iii. All subjects will have credit count. Teaching will be reckoned in terms of credits.
5.3. The prescribed coursework shall be grouped under heads –Humanities courses, Basic
Science courses, Professional core courses, Elective courses & Mandatory courses.
5.4. The curricula to be followed in the first two semesters by the students of all disciplines.
5.5. The curricula for B. Tech. course will include a programme of “Short term Industrial or
Research Experience (SIRE)” of 08 weeks duration after the 6 th semester. The experience may be
obtained in any reputed industry, research organization, and any other organization of
comparable repute. The place of work has to get prior approval of the Department/Training &
Placement. On completion of the programme, the student shall submit a report to the department,
which will earn 2 credits after evaluation and viva-voce examination in the 7th semester.
Detailed procedure for administration of SIRE is given in Annexure-II.
5.6. In addition to regular course work, a B. Tech. student must carry out a major project in final
year under the guidance of one or two supervisors. The project work (Annexure-III) will carry a
total of 12 credits between 7th and 8th Semesters, the distribution being 4 and 8 credits
respectively.
5.7. Every programme shall provide a “Seminar and Technical Writing” course during the 8th
semesters where the students shall learn and practice The Training and Placement cell of the
respective College will coordinate with the reputed organization/industry for Short term
Industrial training of the students. Each student will also do 1 or 2 seminars and/or poster
presentations before the class. Evaluation will be based on attendance in departmental and
Institute seminars, presentation in seminars, poster presentations and technical writing supervised
by the course teacher.
6. REGISTRATION
6.1. Every student in undergraduate programme is required to be present and register for each
semester on the date fixed and notified in the Academic Calendar.
The registration process will have 3 components:

(a) Physical presence of the student on the campus on the first day of semester,
(b) Payment of semester fees including any unpaid dues of past semesters and
(c) Selection of courses/subjects papers to be studied during the semester.
6.2. Registration of students in each semester will be organized by the Academic Section. The
subject details will be verified by the faculty members of respective Institute. Payment of dues
will be verified by the Academic Section and Account Section. An appropriate semester
registration form will be used for the purpose.
Page 6 of 18
6.3. A student who does not register on the day announced for the purpose may be permitted by
Principals, in consideration of any compelling reason, late registration within next 5 working
days on payment of an additional fee as prescribed by the Institute. Normally no late registration
shall be permitted after the fifth working day from the scheduled date, except in special cases, a
serious medical problem, a family calamity, etc. to be approved by the Principals. However,
under no circumstances late registration after 15 calendar days from the scheduled date of
registration is allowed.
6.4. Only those students will be permitted to register who have
(i) Cleared all Institute and Hostel dues of the previous semesters,
(ii) Paid all required prescribed fees for the current semester,
(iii) Not been debarred from registering for a specified period on disciplinary or any other
ground
(iv) Satisfied the academic requirements and not been struck off from the rolls of the Institute.
6.5. To be able to register in the semester a student must
(i) Secure ‘P’ [Pass grade point].
(ii)To pass a subject a student must obtain minimum 21 marks (30%) out of 70 in End Semester
Examination and a total of 35% marks with addition of internal marks.
(iii) Pass marks in practical examinations and projects - 50% of the total marks.
(iv) Obtain a Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) of not lower than 5 (considering all
courses including those in which the student has secured an F (Fail) grade. The method for
calculating SGPA and CGPA is illustrated in Clause 9. If the CGPA at the end of the 2nd
semester class is less than 5, the student will not be allowed to register in 3rd semester and
resume it in the following year along with the next batch of students. In the repeat year, he must
attend classes and be treated at par with fresh students. The B. Tech. programme must be
completed within 7 years (i.e. 14 semesters) while for students admitted through lateral entry it is
5 years (i.e. 10 semesters).
(v) A candidate may be awarded grace marks upto a maximum of total 10 marks, in maximum
four subjects but not more than three marks in any subject including theory papers,
practicals, project, seminar, industrial training and/ or aggregate marks in each academic year
provided he/she can be declared to have passed the academic year by the award of these marks.
The grace marks shall not be added to the aggregate marks.
6.6. While registering for 3rd, 5th or 7th semester, a student may register for backlog papers of
1st, 3rd or 5th semester respectively and while registering for 4th, 6th, or 8th semester, he/she
may register for backlog papers of 2nd, 4th or 6 th semester respectively. A student need not
attend classes in papers registered as “backlog papers”. He has to sit for end-semester
examinations only and the grade will be awarded based on the scores of the latest examinations
and previous mid semester Examination. The registration for backlog papers must be done at the
time of semester registration. In all such cases of “backlog paper”, the grade awarded will be one
step lower than what the student actually obtained, provided CGPA should not be less than 5
except for the grade ‘P’ which remains unchanged. If a student has completed 8 semesters of
study but has a few F grades in 7th semester he/she must clear backlog papers of 7th semester
within maximum stipulated time to complete the course.
6.7. For registration in 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th and 8th semester, a student must obtain CGPA not less
than 5 in 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th semester respectively.
Page 7 of 18
6.8. The classes of all semesters will start from the day following the registration, or any other
date decided by the Principals.
6.9. A student who has been debarred from appearing at an examination either
(i) As a measure of disciplinary action or
(ii) For adopting malpractice at an examination, may register for the subject (s) as backlog papers
in the following semester. Those who have been awarded grade X (“debarred”) because of poor
attendance or for any other reason need to register for the course and attend classes as per rules.
(Expect for 1st semester as per 6.3). Grade at the end of First Year (2nd Semester) CGPA >= 5 to
register in 3rd semester with full suite of courses. To register in higher semester with full suite of
course CGPA should also not be less than 5.
6.10. For appearing at any semester examination a student must attain minimum 75% of lecture
delivered in each theory and in each sessional/ practical paper. Condonation of 10% of
attendance on serious medical ground may be allowed by college authority.
7. EXAMINATIONS:
End Semester Examination 70 Marks

Internal 30 Marks
7.1. The examination office of the Jharkhand University of Technology will conduct the End
Semester Examinations (ESE).
 The end semester examinations will be of 70 marks. It will comprise of seven

questions (answer any five) and carry 14 marks each. Questions will be set from
the entire syllabus, at least one question from each module (wherever possible).
7.2. Two mid semester examination of 20 marks each (out of total internal marks 30) will be
conducted by respective institute. The first mid-term examination shall be conducted on 50% of the
syllabus and the second mid-term examination shall be conducted on the remaining 50% of the
syllabus.
 The mid semester examinations will comprise of seven questions (answer any
five) and carry 4 marks each. Questions will be set from the syllabus as mention
in clause 7.2, at least one question from each module (wherever possible).
Page 8 of 18
Internal Marks
Two Mid Semester Exam each of 20 marks (Consider Best of two) 20

Teacher assessment (through tutorials, Assignment, Quizzes etc) 05
Attendance 05
Total 30
7.3. Practical / Viva – Voce examination marks (Total 50 marks)
 External examiner viva-voce examination marks 20 Marks

 Practical performed during lab period 20 Marks
 Attendance 05 Marks
 Lab record / lab file maintenance up to the mark 05 Marks
7.5. Marks for Seminar
 Minor project in 7th semester 50 marks (distribution of marks as in clause 7.3)

 Major Project in 8th semester 100 Marks
 External examiner evaluation 30 Marks
 Internal evaluation by project incharge 70 Marks
All necessary Charts, Tables, Codes and Data book, drawing board will be provided by JUT/
respective Institute as per requirement.
8. GRADING OF PERFORMANCE IN EXAMINATIONS

As a measure of student’s performance, an 8-scale grading system using the following letter
grades and corresponding grade points per credit shall be followed:
8.1. Performance Letter grade Grade point per credit
Excellent A+ 10
Very good A 9
Good B+ 8
Fair B 7
Average C+ 6
Pass C 5
Fail F 0
Page 9 of 18
8.2. Method of Converting percentage marks to grades. The absolute grading system will be used
as under.
% of marks obtained with Letter Grade

90% and above A+
80% to 89% A
70% to 79% B+
60% to 69% B
50% to 59 % C+
35% to 49% C
≤ 35 % F
To earn academic credit in a subject, a student should get a grading of “C” or above. Where
prerequisite is specified for a course, a grading of C, or above shall be deemed as satisfying the
prerequisite requirement.
9. RECORDS OF ACADEMIC PROGRESS

9.1. Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA) shall be calculated as under:
∑Semester (Course credits x Grade point) for all courses
SGPA = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
∑Semester (Course credits)
9.2. The academic progress of the students in each semester shall be maintained in a grade card
or transcript, wherein the grades awarded to students as well as the points secured by the students
in the examinations, shall be entered. The transcript given to the students at the end of their
complete undergraduate program shall indicate the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA)
which shall be calculated as follows:
∑All Semester (Course credits x Grade point) for all courses
CGPA = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
∑All Semester (Course credits) i.e. ∑ (All subjects credits)
The CGPA shall be rounded off to one place of decimal. While calculating CGPA, the ‘F’ shall
be replaced by the better grade earned in these course in the subsequent semester/ Summer
Examination.
9.3. Credit Adjustment for Lateral Entry Programme
For the students entering from 3rd semester through Lateral Entry Scheme from Diploma
institutions will be awarded proportionate and equivalent credits and the calculation of SGPA
and CGPA will be made from 3rd and 4th semester respectively.
Page 10 of 18
9.4. The university shall follow the following conversion between CGPA and % marks.
% marks = (CGPA -0.5) x 10.0
9.5. The summer programme will be scheduled during the long Institute vacations after
completion of regular semester. A student is permitted to register only for three theory papers for
course scheduled in the summer programme, only if, he/she had registered for these courses
earlier in the semester and wishes to repeat them because of failure in the courses.
10. GRADUATION REQUIREMENT

In order to qualify for a B. Tech. degree covered under these Regulations, a student must:
(a) Complete all the credit requirements for the degree, as laid down in the prescribed curriculum
of the discipline, with a minimum grade ‘C’ scored in every subject.
(b) Obtain a CGPA of 5 or higher at the end of the semester in which he/she completes all the
requirements for the degree.
11. AWARD OF DEGREE

Mode of Examination:
The theory and the internal/practical/project components have been bifurcated as follows:
 Theory component
1. TA ( Internal Evaluation) – 30 marks
(a) Attendance – 5 marks
(b) Assignment/Class Test- 5 marks
(c) Mid semester examination- 20 marks (One half hours duration)
2. End semester examination- 70 marks (3 Hours duration)
 Sessional/ Practical/ Minor Project Component: 50 marks

(a) TA(Progressive Evaluation)- 30 marks
(b) End semester external (viva-voce) - 20 marks
 Project ( Total marks 100)

(a) TA (Progressive Evaluation) – 70 marks
(b) Viva-voce examination – 30 marks
Cases of adoption of unfair means in an examination shall be dealt with by the Examination
Disciplinary Committee of Jharkhand University of Technology. If adoption of unfair means is
proved, the punishment may be, depending on the quantum of the offence and prior record,
reduction of grade, de-registration of a course, expulsion for one or more semesters or outright
expulsion from the Institute.
Page 11 of 18
12. GRADES AFTER COMPLETION OF COURSE
70% and above First class with distinction
60% to 69% First class
40% to 59% Second class ( But CGPA not < 5)
13. GUIDELINES FOR ASSIGNMENT
A specific assignment shall be given to each student in every theory course immediately after
registration. This may comprise new problems in emerging areas in the subjects/ design
methodology/ modelling/ software development/ collection of new results and discussion
/analysis etc. The main objective of the assignment is to improve self learning process and
exposure to current literature on the subject. The assignment should be an extension of the
prescribed syllabus and in no case the repetition of the class work or problems. The
assignment should be submitted by the students’ in hand written form after 50% completion of
syllabus in the concerned semester. The grade/marks may be awarded as per the following
norms.
Grade/Marks Explanation
5 upto maximum of 30 % of the total number of students
14. CHANGE OF BRANCH

14.1. Change of branch may be allowed against the vacant seats in the following two stages,
provided criteria at following sub clauses are satisfied:
 In the second year, on the basis of merit in the B. Tech. first year examination for those
who have passed with more than 8.0 CGPI without any carry over paper and
14.2. After change of the branch, number of students in branch (es) shall neither increase over
the intake approved by AICTE nor it will decrease below 75% of intake approved by AICTE
14.3. Change of branch is not applicable to following:

 Students admitted in second year of B.Tech. programs as per clauses of Lateral entry.
14.4. Further change of branch shall not be permitted.
Page 12 of 18
15. RE-ADMISSION IN THE INSTITUTION/ COLLEGE
A student may be allowed for re-admission provided he/she satisfies one of the following
conditions:
 A student is declared fail.
 A student did not appear in a semester examination or he/she was not granted permission
to appear at the examination.
 A student has been detained by the institute and subsequently has been permitted to take
re-admission.
 A student as an ex-student passed the examination of the academic year or qualified for
carryover system.
 A student promoted with carry over subjects and he/she opted for readmission.
Page 13 of 18
ANNEXURE – I
Rules Regarding Conduct And Discipline
Following rules shall be in force to govern the conduct and discipline of all students:
1. Students shall show due respect to the teachers of the Institute, the Wardens and Hostel
Superintendent of the Hostels, the Sports Officers and the Officers of the National Cadet Crops;
proper courtesy should also be extended to the employees of the Institute and of the Hostels .
They shall also pay due attention and courtesy to visitors.
2. Students are required to develop a friendly relationship with fellow students. In particular,
they are expected to show kindness and consideration to the new students admitted to the
Institute every year. Law bans ragging in any form to anybody. Any act of physical or mental
pressurization of junior students, individually or in group, will be considered as an act of
ragging. Ragging also includes forcing junior students to meet seniors outside institute premises,
or in places where a student has no valid reason to be present, asking irrelevant questions or
using abusive language. Ragging will be considered as gross indiscipline and will be severely
dealt with, which may include expulsion from the institute. Any incident of ragging inside or
outside the campus must be reported to a Hostel Superintendent, the chief warden or a faculty
member designated to look after ragging issues by any student, senior or fresher, who has
witnessed an incident. Failure to report a ragging incident will be considered a serious offence,
even if one is not personally involved in it. If a junior student yields to any form of ragging by
senior students and does not inform the Institute or Hostel Superintendents, or willfully
withholds the information in an enquiry of ragging incident, the matter will be treated as
indiscipline on the part of the junior student and invite punishment comparable to those against
ragging itself. Willful withholding of complaint by a junior student does not automatically
exempt a senior from punishment.
3. The following acts of omission and/or commission and comparable offences shall constitute
gross violation of the code of conduct and are liable to invoke disciplinary measures:
Furnishing false statement of any kind in the form of application for admission or for award of
scholarship or prizes etc. Furnishing false statement to the Disciplinary Committee, or willfully
withholding information relevant to an enquiry. Organizing or participating in any activity that
has potential for driving fellow students along lines of religion, caste, home state, and batch of
admission or any other unhealthy criterion.
 Physical or mental harassment of fresher’s through physical contact or oral abuse.
 Getting involved in a brawl or fight with persons outside the Institute, either alone or in a
group, irrespective of whom initiated the conflict.
 Will fully damaging or stealthily removing any property belongings of the Institute,
Hostels or fellow students.
 Adoption of unfair means in the examinations.
 Possession, consumption or distribution of alcoholic drinks or any kind of hallucinogenic
drugs.
 Organizing or participating in any group activity except purely academic and scientific
programmes in company with others in or outside the campus without prior permission of
the Principal of the Institute.
 Mutilation or unauthorized possession of library books.
 Not cooperating with faculty, officers investigating a potential disciplinary issue.
 Resorting to noisy and unseemly behaviour, disturbing studies of fellow students.
Page 14 of 18
 Disturbing in drunken state or otherwise an incident an academic or student function or
any other public event.
 Not obeying traffic rules on campus, not following safety practices or causing potential
danger to oneself or other persons in any way.
 Displaying lack of courtesy and decorum, resorting to indecent behaviour anywhere
within or outside the campus.
 Not intimating his/her absence to the Hostel Superintendent before leaving campus.
 Getting involved in an activity that violates state or national laws.
4. Commensurate with the gravity of the offence, the punishment for indiscipline may be
 Reprimand, impose fine or take any other suitable measure.
 Debarment from medals and prizes.
 For economic offences (either misappropriation of money or damage to Institute
property), the cost to the damage done will be recovered along with a penalty which
may be up to ten times of the cost recovered.
 Partial (one month or one semester) or complete debarment from campus placement,
 Reduction in grade in one or more courses.
 Expulsion from the Hostel.
 Rustication for a specified period, or outright expulsion from the Institute.
5. All major acts of indiscipline, which may have serious repercussion on the students in general
and/or which may warrant a uniform and more formalized nature of investigation, shall be
handled by the Institute Disciplinary Committee appointed by Principal of the Colleges. The
Disciplinary Committee shall investigate complaints; examine available evidence and award
punishment. Recommendation of the committee, which will include the suggested punishment in
case of guilt proven, will be forwarded to the Chairman of the Governing Body of the Colleges
for necessary action.
6. Proof of guilt need not necessarily be at the same level as necessary in a court of law. The
committee, in order to protect the academic rights of a greater body of students, may award
disciplinary measures if it is reasonably satisfied that such measures are in the greater interest of
the students.
7. The Principal of the Colleges, at his discretion may take additional measures keeping in mind
long term issues and impact on other aspects of Institute management. The Principal make minor
changes in the nature of punishment awarded or reduce the level and/or quantum of punishment
if he feels appropriate.
8. Acts which may be classed as ‘crimes’ rather than acts of indiscipline will be reported to the
state authorities; they include such acts as causing serious injury to fellow students or others,
causing major damage to Institute property, being involved in activities prejudicial to national
security or to that maintaining communal harmony etc.
9. Cases of adoption of unfair means in an examination shall be dealt with by the Examination
Disciplinary Committee of Jharkhand University of Technology. If adoption of unfair means is
proved, the punishment may be, depending on the quantum of the offence and prior record,
reduction of grade, de-registration of a course, expulsion for one or more semesters or outright
expulsion from the Institute.
Page 15 of 18
ANNEXURE-II
Procedure for Administration of Short Term Industrial or Research Experience (SIRE
Programme)
1. The SIRE programme shall be of at least 8 weeks duration after 6th semester of B. Tech. The
experience should preferably be earned in an industry of repute, major R & D laboratory, an IIT,
NIT or IISc. The key word is “repute”.
2. While summer work after 6th semester of B.Tech is compulsory, a student may, at his
discretion, acquire experience at the end of the 4th semester of the B. Tech. in addition to the
programme after the 6th semester.
3. The Training and Placement department shall arrange places of work for all students of 6th
semester of B. Tech. It may also assist students of 4th semester of B. Tech. to find work
opportunities at mutual convenience.
4. The work may be carried out either in India or abroad. The Institute shall not bear the cost of
travel or accommodation in any place. Some organizations offer work experience to engineering
students against a fee. The Institute will examine such programmes for their content and spirit
and approve deserving cases. The student shall bear the expenses.
5. Students are encouraged to receive financial support from the organizations where they are
placed or from other sources. Such financial offers will not count as alternative scholarships.
6. Students will not be permitted to enroll in regular, periodic or a periodic courses (e.g.
CAD/CAM course, Oracle course) offered by companies, even if the subject is of interest to the
academic programme. If a subject is of relevance to the Institute’s academic programme, it
should be included in the curriculum instead of requiring the students to study it outside the
institute by paying additional fees.
7. Considering difficulties of accommodation and travel, the Institute shall work out places of
work taking into account the convenience of students. For this to happen, the T & P Centre shall
put up a notice seeking suggestions from students for possible work sites.
8. Sometime around February-March of the year, the T & P department shall finalise the list of
work sites for the students and announce it on the notice boards. The students will then make
railway reservation and take other necessary steps. Students will have no freedom to choose
their own places of work beyond giving suggestions to the T & P Centre. In case a student faces
difficulty with the assigned place, he should bring it to the attention of the Professor T & P so
that he can be given a fresh allotment. Any change of place of work after starting of the summer
vacation must be approved by the Professor T & P on the merit of the case. Any work at a place
not approved in advance will not count towards credit requirement.
9. The T & P Centre shall have the responsibility to inspect the places of work to ensure that the
students are sincere in their assigned responsibility. If it is found that a student is not attending
his work place on full time basis, the student shall get ‘F’ grade and the SIRE programme is to be
repeated at the end of the 8th semester with consequent delay in completion of the students’
academic programme.
Page 16 of 18
10. The SIRE report will be evaluated by the department at the beginning of the 7th semester,
preferably within one month of the starting of the semester. The department will assign one or
two faculty members to coordinate presentation by the students and evaluation of the reports.
The grades must be sent to the examination office before the mid semester examination of the
autumn semester.
11. The T & P Centre shall be the nodal agency for arranging places of industrial experience.
But departments also need to play a strong role. Many faculty members are well known in
industry and the industry honours the requests of faculty members and Heads of Departments.
12. There will be a Training & Placement Advisory Committee headed by the Professor of
Training & placement. Every department shall nominate one faculty member having strong
connection with industry and a strong perception of all aspects of the department’s academic
programmes.
13. SIRE will also include credit for the industrial tours and visits arranged by the Institute
during the first seven semesters of a student’s career. The relative assignment of marks between
the two components shall be: 75% for summer work and 25% for the industrial tours.
Page 17 of 18
ANNEXURE -III
Guidelines for Use of Project Record Book
1. The Project Record Book constitutes the bona fide record of project work carried out by
undergraduate, postgraduate and research students of JUT Ranchi.
2. The book contains day to day record of all conceptual, analytical, Laboratory and
computational activities carried out by a student as a part of his/her project.
3. It is a permanent record of academic activity and contains intellectual property created by the
student and his supervisor.
4. The book should be treated with respect and maintained with care. Pages must not be torn or
used for rough work.
5. The student should record all his thoughts, observations, flow charts, computational steps etc.,
directly on this notebook. Use of second rough book and final copying to this record book is
discouraged.
6. All information recorded here must start with a date on the left margin. The work of the day
must be organized into sections such as objective, experimental or computational methods,
observations, program flow charts, pseudo-codes, conclusion, discussion etc., as relevant to the
problem at hand. Short computer prints, photographs, charts and graphs may be pasted neatly
wherever necessary.
7. The supervisor should examine the progress of the student and record his observations,
comments and suggestions in a regular manner, typically once every week.
8. The student must produce this record book before all Examination Boards for evaluation and
grading of his day to day performance, and for award of medals and prizes. The first evaluation
of the project will be made basing on the record book only.
9. On completion of the project, the student must surrender this book to his supervisor for
archiving. If the same problem is continued by students of the following batch, the supervisor
may choose to give it to those students for the sake of continuity. Projects with supervisor
intellectual material may be sent to Departmental Library for permanent archival.
10. The students who do work worth publishing and/or patenting are advised to proceed with
those activities. The Institute will organize the patenting process.
Page 18 of 18
First Year UG Courses Engg. & Tech. Jharkhand University of Technology
CURRICULUM
FOR
FIRST YEAR
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE COURSES
IN
ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY
Jharkhand University of Technology

Ranchi, India
2018
1
2
3
COURSE STRUCTURE
SEMESTER I (FIRST YEAR]
Table 1: Branch/Course Common to all branches of UG Engineering & Technology

Sl. Category Course Course Title Hours Per Credit Marks
No Code Week
. L T P IA ESE Total
Theory
1 Basic Science BSC101 Physics I 3 1 0 4 30 70 100

Course
2 Basic Science BSC103 Mathematics – I 3 1 0 4 30 70 100
Course
3 Engineering ESC101/ Basic Electrical 3 1 0 4 30 70 100
Science BSC102 Engineering/
Courses/ Basic Chemistry I
Science Course
Total(A) 12 90 210 300
Practical/Drawing/Design
4 Engineering ESC102 Engineering 1 0 4 3 25 25 50

Science Graphics &
Courses Design
5 Basic Science BSC101P Physics Lab 0 0 3 1.5 25 25 50
Course
6 Engineering ESC101P/ Basic Electrical 0 0 2 1 25 25 50
Science BSC102P Engineering
Courses/ Basic Lab / Chemistry
Science Course Lab
Total(B) 5.5 75 75 150
Grand Total(A+B) 17.5 165 285 450
L-Lecture, T-Tutorial, P-Practical
IA- Internal Assessment, ESE-End Semester Examination
4
SEMESTER II (FIRST YEAR]

Table 2: Branch/Course: Common to all branches of UG Engineering & Technology
Sl. Category Course Course Title Hours Per Credit Marks
No Code Week
. L T P IA ESE Total
Theory
1 Basic Science BSC105 Physics II 3 1 0 4 30 70 100

Course
2 Engineering ESC101/ Basic 3 1 0 4 30 70 100
Science Courses/ BSC102 Electrical
Basic Science Engineering/
Course Chemistry I
3 Basic Science BSC104 Mathematics – 3 1 0 4 30 70 100
Course II
4 Engineering ESC103 Programming 3 1 0 4 30 70 100
Science Courses for Problem
Solving
5 Humanities and HSMC101 2 0 2 3 30 70 100
Social Sciences
including English
Management
Courses
Total(A) 19 150 350 500
Practical/Drawing/Design
6 Engineering ESC104 Workshop/ 1 0 4 3 25 25 50
Science Courses Manufacturin
g Practices
7 Engineering ESC101P/ Basic 0 0 2 1 25 25 50
Science BSC102P Electrical
Courses/ Basic Engg. Lab /
Science Course Chemistry
Lab
8 Engineering ESC103P Programming 0 0 2 1 25 25 50
Science Courses for Problem
Solving
Total(B) 5 75 75 150
Grand Total(A+B) 24 225 425 650
L-Lecture, T-Tutorial, P-Practical,
IA- Internal Assessment, ESE-End Semester Examination
5
COMMON BASIC SCIENCES COURSES

Table 3: Physics, Chemistry & Mathematics
Sl. Courses Papers Remark
No.
1. Mathematics(Option 1) For all branches of
Mathematics 1 Engineering except
Mathematics 2 CSE
Mathematics
Mathematics (Option 2)
Mathematics 1 For CSE only
Mathematics 2
2. Physics Physics I
(Theory & Lab.) (i) Introduction to Electromagnetic Theory
(ii) Introduction to Mechanics
(iii) Oscillation, Waves and Optics For all branches of
(iv) Semiconductor Physics Engineering with the
(v) Basics of Electricity Magnetism & combination as
Quantum Physics suggested in the
table 5
Physics II
(i) Semiconductor Optoelectronics
(ii) Mechanics of Solid
(iii) Introduction to Quantum Mechanics for
Engineers
(iv) Optics & Fiber Optics
3. Chemistry Chemistry – I (Concepts in chemistry for For all branches of
(Theory & Lab.) engineering) Engineering
6
ENGINEERING SCIENCE COURSES &

HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES INCLUDING MANAGEMENT COURSES
Table 4: Engineering Science Courses & Humanities and Social Sciences Including Management
Courses
Sl. No. Course Paper
1. ENGINEERING SCIENCE Programming for Problem Solving

COURSES Engineering Graphics & Design
Basic Electrical Engineering
Workshop/ Manufacturing
Practices
2. HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL
SCIENCES INCLUDING English
MANAGEMENT COURSES
Table 5: Physics Papers for different Engineering Discipline

Branch PHYSICS PAPER Preferred
Semester
Civil Engineering (CE) Introduction to Mechanics Semester I
Mechanics of Solid Semester II
Electrical & Electronics Oscillation, Waves and Optics Semester I
Engineering (EEE)/ Introduction to Quantum Mechanics for Semester II
Electrical Engineering (EE) Engineers
Electronics & Communication Semiconductor Physics Semester I
Engineering (ECE)/ Semiconductor Optoelectronics Semester II
App. Electr. & Instr. Engg.
Mechanical Engineering(ME)/ Introduction to Electromagnetic Theory Semester I
Production Engineering(PE)/ Mechanics of Solid Semester II
Mining Engineering
Computer Science Semiconductor Physics Semester I
Engineering (CSE)/ Introduction to Quantum Mechanics for Semester II
Information Technology(IT) Engineers
Chemical Engineering Basics of Electricity Magnetism and Quantum Semester I
Physics
Optics & Fiber Optics Semester II
Metallurgical Engineering & Introduction to Mechanics Semester I
Materials Science (MEMS) Mechanics of Solid Semester II
7
SEMESTER I
COURSE CONTENTS
8
Course Code BSC 103

Category Basic Science Course
Course Title Mathematics - I
Calculus and Linear Algebra (Option 1) for All Branch
excluding CSE
Calculus and Linear Algebra (Option 2) for CSE
Scheme & Credits L T P Credit Semester I
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisites Pre-requisites: High-school education
MATHEMATICS 1
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
CALCULUS AND LINEAR ALGEBRA 40 Lectures
Option 1 (For all branches) excluding CSE
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Calculus-I 6 Lectures

Evolutes and involutes; Evaluation of definite and improper integrals; Beta and Gamma
functions and their properties; Applications of definite integrals to evaluate surface areas and
volumes of revolutions.
Module 2: Calculus-II 6 Lectures

Rolle’s Theorem, Mean value theorems, Taylor’s and Maclaurin theorems with remainders;
indeterminate forms and L'Hospital's rule; Maxima and minima.
Module 3: Sequences and series 10 Lectures

Convergence of sequence and series, tests for convergence; Power series, Taylor's series, series
for exponential, trigonometric and logarithm functions; Fourier series: Half range sine and cosine
series, Parseval’s theorem.
Module 4: Multivariable Calculus (Differentiation) 8 Lectures

Limit continuity and partial derivatives, directional derivatives, total derivative; Tangent plane
and normal line; Maxima, minima and saddle points; Method of Lagrange multipliers; Gradient,
curl and divergence.
9
Module 5: Matrices 10 Lectures

Inverse and rank of a matrix, rank-nullity theorem; System of linear equations; Symmetric, skew
symmetric and orthogonal matrices; Determinants; Eigen values and eigenvectors;
Diagonalization of matrices; Cayley-Hamilton Theorem, and Orthogonal transformation.
Textbooks/References:
 G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9th Edition, Pearson,
Reprint, 2002.
 Erwin kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
2006.
 Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics for first year, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2008.
 Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi,
11thReprint, 2010.
 D. Poole, Linear Algebra: A Modern Introduction, 2nd Edition, Brooks/Cole, 2005.
 N.P. Bali and Manish Goyal, A text book of Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi
Publications, Reprint, 2008.
 B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 36th Edition, 2010.
COURSE OUTCOMES
To introduce the idea of applying differential and integral calculus to notions of curvature and to
improper integrals.
To introduce the fallouts of Rolle’s Theorem that is fundamental to application of analysis to
Engineering problems.
To develop the tool of power series and Fourier series for learning advanced Engineering
Mathematics.
To familiarize the student with functions of several variables that is essential in most branches of
engineering.
To develop the essential tool of matrices and linear algebra in a comprehensive manner.
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
CALCULUS AND LINEAR ALGEBRA Option 2 (for CSE) 40Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Calculus-I 6 Lectures

Evolutes and involutes; Evaluation of definite and improper integrals; Beta and Gamma
functions and their properties; Applications of definite integrals to evaluate surface areas and
volumes of revolutions.
10
Module 2: Calculus-II 6 Lectures

Rolle’s Theorem, Mean value theorems, Taylor’s and Maclaurin theorems with remainders;
indeterminate forms and L' Hospital's rule; Maxima and minima.
Module 3: Matrices 8 Lectures

Matrices, vectors: addition and scalar multiplication, matrix multiplication; Linear systems of
equations, linear Independence, rank of a matrix, determinants, Cramer’s Rule, inverse of a
matrix, Gauss elimination and Gauss-Jordan elimination.
Module 4: Vector spaces-I 10 Lectures

Vector Space, linear dependence of vectors, basis, dimension; Linear transformations (maps),
range and kernel of a linear map, rank and nullity, Inverse of a linear transformation, rank nullity
Theorem, composition of linear maps, Matrix associated with a linear map.
Module 5: Vector spaces-II 10 Lectures

Eigen values, eigenvectors, symmetric, skew-symmetric, and orthogonal Matrices, Eigen bases.
Diagonalization; Inner product spaces, Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization.
 G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9 th Edition, Pearson,
Reprint, 2002.
 Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
2006.
 D. Poole, Linear Algebra: A Modern Introduction, 2nd Edition, Brooks/Cole, 2005.
 Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics for first year, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2008. Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi,
11th Reprint, 2010.
 V. Krishnamurthy, V.P. Mainra and J.L. Arora, An introduction to Linear Algebra,
Affiliated East–West press, Reprint 2005.
COURSE OUTCOMES
The objective of this course is to familiarize the prospective engineers with techniques in
calculus, multivariate analysis and linear algebra. It aims to equip the students with standard
concepts and tools at an intermediate to advanced level that will serve them well towards
tackling more advanced level of mathematics and applications that they would find useful in
their disciplines.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
11
Course Code BSC 101

Course Title Physics-I
(i) Introduction to Electromagnetic Theory – For ME
(ii) Introduction to Mechanics – For Civil, MEMS
(iii) Oscillation, Waves and Optics - For EEE
(iv) Semiconductor Physics – For ECE, CSE
(v) Basics of Electricity, Magnetism & Quantum Mechanics- For Chemical
Engg.
Scheme & L T P Credit Semester I
Credits 3 1 0 4
Pre-requisites Mathematics course with vector calculus, High-school education
Mathematics course on differential equations and linear algebra
PHYSICS- I
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
INTRODUCTION TO ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY For ME
38 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Electrostatics in vacuum 8 Lectures

Electric field and electrostatic potential for a charge distribution; Laplace’s and Poisson’s
equations for electrostatic potential and uniqueness of their solution. Boundary conditions of
electric field and electrostatic potential; method of images; energy of a charge distribution and its
expression in terms of electric field.
Module 2: Electrostatics in a linear dielectric medium 4 Lectures

Electrostatic field and potential of a dipole. Bound charges due to electric polarization; Electric
displacement; boundary conditions on displacement; Solving simple electrostatics problems in
presence of dielectrics – Point charge at the centre of a dielectric sphere, charge in front of a
dielectric slab, dielectric slab and dielectric sphere in uniform electric field.
Module 3: Magneto statics 6 Lectures

Bio-Savart law, Static magnetic field; vector potential and calculating it for a given magnetic
field; the equation for the vector potential and its solution for given current densities.
Module 4: Magneto statics in a linear magnetic medium 4 Lectures

Magnetization and associated bound currents; auxiliary magnetic field; Boundary conditions on
B and H. Solving for magnetic field due to simple magnets like a bar magnet; magnetic
12
susceptibility and ferromagnetic, paramagnetic and diamagnetic materials; Qualitative discussion

of magnetic field in presence of magnetic materials.
Module 5: Faraday’s law and Maxwell’s equations 8 Lectures

Faraday’s law in terms of EMF produced by changing magnetic flux; equivalence of Faraday’s
law and motional EMF; Lenz’s law; Electromagnetic breaking and its applications; Differential
form of Faraday’s law expressing curl of electric field in terms of time-derivative of magnetic
field and calculating electric field due to changing magnetic fields in quasi-static approximation;
energy stored in a magnetic field.
Continuity equation for current densities; Modifying equation for the curl of magnetic field to
satisfy continuity equation; displace current and magnetic field arising from time dependent
electric field; calculating magnetic field due to changing electric fields in quasistatic
approximation. Maxwell’s equation in vacuum and non-conducting medium; Energy in an
electromagnetic field; Flow of energy and Poynting.
Module 6: Electromagnetic waves 8 Lectures

The wave equation; Plane electromagnetic waves in vacuum, their transverse nature and
polarization; relation between electric and magnetic fields of an electromagnetic wave; energy
carried by electromagnetic waves. Momentum carried by electromagnetic waves and resultant
pressure. Reflection and transmission of electromagnetic waves from a non conducting medium-
vacuum interface for normal incidence.
Text Book:
 Introduction to Electrodynamics, D.J. Griffiths, 3rd Edn, 1998, Benjamin Cummings.
Reference books:
 Fundamentals of Physics Electricity and Magnetism, Halliday and Resnick, tenth edition
(published 2013).
 W. Saslow, Electricity, magnetism and light, 1st edition
 Electricity, Magnetism & Electromagnetic Theory, S. Mahajan and Choudhury, 2012, Tata
McGraw
 Elements of Electromagnetics, M.N.O. Sadiku, 2010, Oxford University Press.
COURSE OUTCOMES
To make student understand the basic of electrostatics in vacuum and in material medium.
To make student understand the basic of magneto statics in vacuum and in magnetic material medium.
Students to get familiarized with the Faraday’s Law and Maxwell’s equation leading to the application of
EMW in vacuum and in media.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
13
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
INTRODUCTION TO MECHANICS for Civil, MEMS
38 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Particle motion and Newton’s law 8 Lectures

Transformation of scalars and vectors under Rotation transformation; Forces in Nature;
Newton’s laws and its completeness in describing particle motion; Form invariance of Newton’s
Second Law;
Module 2: Central potential and Kepler’s laws 7 Lectures

Potential energy function; F = - Grad V, equipotential surfaces and meaning of gradient;
Conservative and non-conservative forces, curl of a force field; Central forces; Conservation of
Angular Momentum; Energy equation and energy diagrams; Kepler problem;
Module 3: Rotating coordinate system 5 Lectures

Non-inertial frames of reference; rotating coordinate system: Five-term acceleration formula-
Centripetal and Coriolis accelerations; Foucault pendulum;
Module 4: Harmonic Oscillations 6 Lectures

Harmonic oscillator; Damped harmonic motion – over-damped, critically damped and lightly-
damped oscillators; Forced oscillations and resonance.
Module 5: Planar rigid body mechanics 5 Lectures

Definition and motion of a rigid body in the plane; Rotation in the plane; Kinematics in a
coordinate system rotating and translating in the plane; Angular momentum about a point of a
rigid body in planar motion; Euler’s laws of motion, their independence from Newton’s laws,
and their necessity in describing rigid body motion;
Module 6: Three-dimensional rigid body motion 7 Lectures

Introduction to three-dimensional rigid body motion - in terms of (a) Angular velocity vector,
and its rate of change and (b) Moment of inertia tensor; Three-dimensional motion of a rigid
body: Rod executing conical motion with center of mass fixed - show that this motion looks two-
dimensional but is three-dimensional.
Reference books:
 Engineering Mechanics, 2nd ed. Publisher: Cengage Learning; 2 edition (January 22, 2013) -
MK Harbola
 Introduction to Mechanics, CRC Press - MK Verma
14
 An introduction to mechanics, D. Kleppner, R.J. Kolenkow, 1973, McGraw-Hill

 Principles of Mechanics. by Synge, John. L; Griffith, Byron. A. Publication date Publisher
McGraw-Hill
 Mechanics - JP Den Hartog
 Engineering Mechanics - Dynamics, 7th ed. - JL Meriam
 Mechanical Vibrations - JP Den Hartog
 Theory of Vibrations with Applications - WT Thomson
COURSE OUTCOMES
Students to learn basics of particle dynamics including the rotational motion in central potential
field following Kepler’s laws.
To learn the rotating co-ordinate system and harmonic motion with the effect of damping and
forced oscillation.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
OSCILLATIONS, WAVES AND OPTICS For EEE
38 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Harmonic Oscillation 07 Lectures

Simple harmonic motion, damped and forced simple harmonic oscillator Mechanical and
electrical simple harmonic oscillators, phasor representation of simple harmonic motion, damped
harmonic oscillator – heavy, critical and light damping, energy decay in a damped harmonic
oscillator, quality factor, forced mechanical and electrical oscillators, electrical and mechanical
impedance, steady state motion of forced damped harmonic oscillator.
Module 2: Waves 07 Lectures

Transverse and longitudinal waves in one dimension. Transverse wave on a string, the wave
equation on a string, Harmonic waves, reflection and transmission of waves at a boundary,
impedance matching, standing waves and their eigen frequencies, longitudinal waves and the
wave equation for them, acoustics waves and speed of sound, standing sound waves. Waves with
dispersion, water waves, superposition of waves, wave groups and group velocity.
15
Module 3: Geometric Optics 10 Lectures

Fermat’s principle of stationary time and its applications. Laws of reflection and refraction,
Fresnel equations, reflectance and transmittance, Brewster’s angle, total internal reflection, and
evanescent wave. Mirrors and lenses and optical instruments based on them.
Module 4: Wave Optics 06 Lectures

Huygens’ principle, superposition of waves and interference of light by wave front splitting and
amplitude splitting; Young’s double slit experiment, Newton’s rings, Michelson interferometer,.
Farunhoffer diffraction from a single slit, the Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution;
Diffraction gratings and their resolving power
Module 5: Lasers 08 Lectures

Einstein’s theory of matter radiation interaction, A and B coefficients; amplification of light by
population inversion, different types of lasers: gas lasers (He-Ne), solid-state lasers (ruby);
Properties of laser beams: mono-chromaticity, coherence, directionality and brightness, laser
speckles, applications of lasers.
Reference books:
 Waves: Berkeley Physics Course, vol. 3, Francis Crawford, 2007, Tata McGraw-Hill.
 Fundamentals of Optics, F.A. Jenkins and H.E. White, 1981, McGraw-Hill
 Principles of Optics, Max Born and Emil Wolf, 7th Edn., 1999, Pergamon Press.
 Optics, A. Ghatak, 2008, Tata McGraw Hill
 The Physics of Vibrations and Waves, H. J. Pain, 2013, John Wiley and Sons.
 The Physics of Waves and Oscillations, N.K. Bajaj, 1998, Tata McGraw Hill.
COURSE OUTCOME
Students to learn harmonic oscillations, physical and wave optics.
Students to get familiarize with the knowledge of waves and Lasers.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
16
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS For ECE, CSE
38 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Electronic materials 8 Lectures

Free electron theory, Density of states and energy band diagrams, Kronig-Penny model, Energy
bands in solids, E-k diagram, Direct and indirect band gaps, Types of electronic materials:
metals, semiconductors, and insulators, Density of states, Fermi level, Effective mass.
Module 2: Semiconductors 10 Lectures

Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, Dependence of Fermi level on carrier-concentration and
temperature, Carrier generation and recombination, Carrier transport: diffusion and drift, p-n
junction, Metal-semiconductor junction (Ohmic and Schottky).
Module 3: Light-semiconductor interaction 7 Lectures

Optical transitions in bulk semiconductors: absorption, spontaneous emission, and stimulated
emission; Joint density of states, Density of states for photons, Transition rates (Fermi's golden
rule), Optical loss and gain; Photovoltaic effect.
Module 4: Measurements 7 Lectures

Four-point probe and vander Pauw measurements for carrier density, resistivity, and hall
mobility; Hot-point probe measurement, capacitance-voltage measurements, parameter
extraction from diode I-V characteristics.
Module 5: Engineered semiconductor materials 6 Lectures

Density of states in 2D, 1D and 0D (qualitatively). quantum wells, wires, and dots: design,
fabrication, and characterization techniques. Hetero junctions and associated band-diagrams
References:
 J. Singh, Semiconductor Optoelectronics: Physics and Technology, McGraw-Hill Inc.

(1995).
 B. E. A. Saleh and M. C. Teich, Fundamentals of Photonics, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
(2007).
 S. M. Sze, Semiconductor Devices: Physics and Technology, Wiley (2008).
 Yariv and P. Yeh, Photonics: Optical Electronics in Modern Communications, Oxford
University Press, New York (2007).
 P. Bhattacharya, Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices, Prentice Hall of India (1997).
 Online course: “Semiconductor Optoelectronics” by M R Shenoy on NPTEL
 Online course: "Optoelectronic Materials and Devices" by Monica Katiyar and Deepak
Gupta on NPTEL
17
COURSE OUTCOMES
Students will be exposed to the understanding of semiconductor materials and their importance
in Computer, Electronics and Communication Engineering.
To learn the interaction of light and semiconductor.
To get familiarized with the measurement techniques on semiconductor devices and circuits.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
BASICS OF ELECTRICITY, MAGNETISM AND QUANTUM PHYSICS
For Chemical Engg. 38 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Electromagnetism 8 Lectures

Laws of electrostatics: Coulomb’s and Gauss’s Law, electric current and the continuity equation,
laws of magnetism. Ampere’s Law, Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction: Self and
mutual induction, motional and changing field emf, Displacement current, Maxwell’s equations.
Module 2: Dielectrics 6 Lectures

Dielectric, Polar and non-polar dielectrics, Electric Polarisation, Polarizability, Types of
polarization, Permittivity and dielectric constant, internal fields in a solid, Clausius-Mossotti
equation.
Module 3: Magnetic Substances 7 Lectures

Magnetic moment and Magnetisation, permeability and susceptibility, classification of magnetic
materials, diamagnetic, paramagnetic and ferromagnetic, magnetic domains and hysteresis,
hysteresis loss, applications.
Module 4: Basic Quantum Mechanics 7 Lectures

Inadequacy of Classical Mechanics, Introduction to quantum physics, black body radiation,
explanation using the photon concept, photoelectric effect: Stopping Potential, Work Function,
Compton Effect: Compton Shift.
18
Module 5: Wave particle duality and bound states 10 Lectures

de Broglie hypothesis, Bragg’s Law, wave-particle duality, Born’s interpretation of the wave
function, verification of matter waves, uncertainty principle, Schrodinger wave equation: time
dependent and independent form, eigen value and eigen function, normalization of wave
function, particle in a box, quantum harmonic oscillator, hydrogen atom.
Text Book:
 Introduction to Electrodynamics, D.J. Griffiths, 3rd Edn., 1998, Benjamin Cummings.
 Introduction to Quantum Mechanics, David J. Griffith, 2005, Pearson Education.
Reference books:
 Introduction to Quantum mechanics, Nikhil Ranjan Roy, 2016, Vikash Publishing House Pvt.
Ltd.
 Electricity, Magnetism & Electromagnetic Theory, S. Mahajan and Choudhury, 2012, Tata
McGraw
 Concepts of Modern Physics, Arthur Beiser, 2002, McGraw-Hill.
 Introduction to Modern Physics, Rich Meyer, Kennard, Coop, 2002, Tata McGraw Hill
 Physics for scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics, Jewett and Serway, 2010, Cengage
Learning.
COURSE OUTCOMES
Students to get basic knowledge of Electromagnetism, dielectrics, magnetic materials etc.
Familiarization with the basics of Quantum Mechanics and its application to few bound states.
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
19
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
PHYSICS LABORATORY Code: BSC101P
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Choice of 08-10 experiments from the following:
 Experiments on electromagnetic induction and electromagnetic breaking;

 LC circuit and LCR circuit
 Resonance phenomena in LCR circuits
 Magnetic field from Helmholtz coil
 Measurement of Lorentz force in a vacuum tube
 Coupled oscillators
 Experiments on an air-track
 Experiment on moment of inertia measurement
 Experiments with gyroscope
 Resonance phenomena in mechanical oscillators
 Frank-Hertz experiment
 Photoelectric effect experiment
 Recording hydrogen atom Spectrum
 Diffraction and interference experiments (from ordinary light or laser pointers)
 measurement of speed of light on a table top using modulation
 minimum deviation from a prism
LABROTARY OUTCOMES
Students to have hands on experiences with experiments on the basics laws and principles of
Physics in the field of Mechanics, Optics, Electricity, Magnetism, Modern Physics, etc.
20
Course Code ESC 101

Category Engineering Science Course
Course Title Basic Electrical Engineering
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisites Intermediate level Electricity
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 40 Lectures
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1 : DC Circuits 7 Lectures

Electrical circuit elements (R, L and C), voltage and current sources, Kirchoff current and
voltage laws, analysis of simple circuits with dc excitation. Superposition, Thevenin and Norton
Theorems. Time-domain analysis of first-order RL and RC circuits.
Module 2: AC Circuits 7 Lectures

Representation of sinusoidal waveforms, peak and rms values, phasor representation, real power,
reactive power, apparent power, power factor. Analysis of single-phase ac circuits consisting of
R, L, C, RL, RC, RLC combinations (series and parallel), resonance. Three phase balanced
circuits, voltage and current relations in star and delta connections.
Module 3: Transformers 6 Lectures

Magnetic materials, BH characteristics, ideal and practical transformer, equivalent circuit, losses
in transformers, regulation and efficiency. Auto-transformer and three-phase transformer
connections.
Module 4: Electrical Machines 8 Lectures

Generation of rotating magnetic fields, Construction and working of a three-phase induction
motor, Significance of torque-slip characteristic. Loss components and efficiency, starting and
speed control of induction motor. Single-phase induction motor. Construction, working, torque-
speed characteristic and speed control of separately excited dc motor. Construction and working
of synchronous generators.
Module 5: Power Converters 6 Lectures

DC-DC buck and boost converters, duty ratio control. Single-phase and three-phase voltage
source inverters; sinusoidal modulation.
21
Module 6: Electrical Installations 6 Lectures

Components of LT Switchgear: Switch Fuse Unit (SFU), MCB, ELCB, MCCB, Types of Wires
and Cables, Earthing. Types of Batteries, Important Characteristics for Batteries. Elementary
calculations for energy consumption, power factor improvement and battery backup.
Suggested Text / Reference Books

 D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
 D. C. Kulshreshtha, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 2009.
 L. S. Bobrow, “Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University Press, 2011.
 E. Hughes, “Electrical and Electronics Technology”, Pearson, 2010.
 V. D. Toro, “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Prentice Hall India, 1989.
Course Outcomes
 To understand and analyze basic electric and magnetic circuits.
 To study the working principles of electrical machines and power converters.
 To introduce the components of low voltage electrical installations.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
22
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY Code: ESC101P
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
List of experiments/demonstrations:
 Basic safety precautions. Introduction and use of measuring instruments – voltmeter,
ammeter, multi-meter, oscilloscope. Real-life resistors, capacitors and inductors.
 Measuring the steady-state and transient time-response of R-L, R-C, and R-L-C circuits
to a step change in voltage (transient may be observed on a storage oscilloscope).
Sinusoidal steady state response of R-L, and R-C circuits – impedance calculation and
verification. Observation of phase differences between current and voltage. Resonance in
R-L-C circuits.
 Transformers: Observation of the no-load current waveform on an oscilloscope (non
sinusoidal wave-shape due to B-H curve nonlinearity should be shown along with a
discussion about harmonics). Loading of a transformer: measurement of primary and
secondary voltages and currents, and power.
 Three-phase transformers: Star and Delta connections. Voltage and Current relationships
(line-line voltage, phase-to-neutral voltage, line and phase currents).Phase-shifts between
the primary and secondary side. Cumulative three-phase power in balanced three-phase
circuits.
 Demonstration of cut-out sections of machines: dc machine (commutator-brush
arrangement), induction machine (squirrel cage rotor), synchronous machine (field
winging - slip ring arrangement) and single-phase induction machine.
 Torque Speed Characteristic of separately excited dc motor.
 Synchronous speed of two and four-pole, three-phase induction motors. Direction
reversal by change of phase-sequence of connections. Torque-Slip Characteristic of an
induction motor. Generator operation of an induction machine driven at super
synchronous speed.
 Synchronous Machine operating as a generator: stand-alone operation with a load.
Control of voltage through field excitation.
 Demonstration of (a) dc-dc converters (b) dc-ac converters – PWM waveform (c) the use
of dc-ac converter for speed control of an induction motor and (d) Components of LT
switchgear.
LABORATORY OUTCOMES
Get an exposure to common electrical components and their ratings.
Make electrical connections by wires of appropriate ratings.
Understand the usage of common electrical measuring instruments.
Understand the basic characteristics of transformers and electrical machines.
Get an exposure to the working of power electronic converters.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
23
Course Code ESC 102

Course Title Engineering Graphics & Design
(Theory & Lab)
1 0 4 3
Pre-requisites Basic knowledge of Computer and Solid Geometry
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
ENGINEERING GRAPHICS & DESIGN
Lecture - 10 hours & Lab - 60 hours
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Traditional Engineering and Computer Graphics: 10 Lectures

Principles of Engineering Graphics; Orthographic Projection; Descriptive Geometry; Drawing
Principles; Isometric Projection; Surface Development; Perspective; Reading a Drawing;
Sectional Views; Dimensioning & Tolerances; True Length, Angle; intersection, Shortest
Distance.
Engineering Graphics Software; -Spatial Transformations; Orthographic Projections; Model
Viewing; Co-ordinate Systems; Multi-view Projection; Exploded Assembly; Model Viewing;
Animation; Spatial Manipulation; Surface Modeling; Solid Modeling; Introduction to Building
Information Modeling (BIM)
(Lab modules also include concurrent teaching)
Lab Module 1: Introduction to Engineering Drawing 5 Lectures
Principles of Engineering Graphics and their significance, usage of Drawing instruments,
lettering, Conic sections including the Rectangular Hyperbola (General method only); Cycloid,
Epicycloid, Hypocycloid and Involute; Scales – Plain, Diagonal and Vernier Scales;
Lab Module 2: Orthographic Projections 5 Lectures

Principles of Orthographic Projections-Conventions - Projections of Points and lines inclined to
both planes; Projections of planes inclined Planes - Auxiliary Planes;
Lab Module 3: Projections of Regular Solids 5 Lectures

those inclined to both the Planes- Auxiliary Views; Draw simple annotation, dimensioning and
scale. Floor plans that include: windows, doors, and fixtures such as WC, bath, sink, shower, etc.
Lab Module 4: and Sectional Views of Right Angular Solids 5 Lectures

Prism, Cylinder, Pyramid, Cone – Auxiliary Views; Development of surfaces of Right Regular
Solids - Prism, Pyramid, Cylinder and Cone; Draw the sectional orthographic views of
geometrical solids, objects from industry and dwellings (foundation to slab only)
24
Lab Module 5: Isometric Projections 6 Lectures

Principles of Isometric projection – Isometric Scale, Isometric Views, Conventions; Isometric
Views of lines, Planes, Simple and compound Solids; Conversion of Isometric Views to
Orthographic Views and Vice-versa, Conventions;
Lab Module 6: Overview of Computer Graphics 8 Lectures

listing the computer technologies that impact on graphical communication, Demonstrating
knowledge of the theory of CAD software [such as: The Menu System, Toolbars (Standard,
Object Properties, Draw, Modify and Dimension), Drawing Area (Background, Crosshairs,
Coordinate System), Dialog boxes and windows, Shortcut menus (Button Bars), The Command
Line (where applicable), The Status Bar, Different methods of zoom as used in CAD, Select and
erase objects.; Isometric Views of lines, Planes, Simple and compound Solids];
Lab Module 7: Customization & CAD Drawing 8 Lectures

consisting of set up of the drawing page and the printer, including scale settings, Setting up of
units and drawing limits; ISO and ANSI standards for coordinate dimensioning and tolerancing;
Orthographic constraints, Snap to objects manually and automatically; Producing drawings by
using various coordinate input entry methods to draw straight lines, Applying various ways of
drawing circles;
Lab Module 8: Annotations, layering & other functions 9 Lectures

applying dimensions to objects, applying annotations to drawings; Setting up and use of Layers,
layers to create drawings, Create, edit and use customized layers; Changing line lengths through
modifying existing lines (extend/lengthen); Printing documents to paper using the print ommand;
orthographic projection techniques; Drawing sectional views of composite right regular
geometric solids and project the true shape of the sectioned surface; Drawing annotation,
Computer-aided design (CAD) software modeling of parts and assemblies. Parametric and non-
parametric solid, surface, and wireframe models. Part editing and two-dimensional
documentation of models. Planar projection theory, including sketching of perspective,
isometric, multiview, auxiliary, and section views. Spatial visualization exercises. Dimensioning
guidelines, tolerancing techniques; dimensioning and scale multi views of dwelling;
Lab Module 9: Demonstration of a simple team design project 9 Lectures

Geometry and topology of engineered components: creation of engineering models and their
presentation in standard 2D blueprint form and as 3D wire-frame and shaded solids; meshed
topologies for engineering analysis and tool-path generation for component manufacture;
geometric dimensioning and tolerancing; Use of solid-modeling software for creating associative
models at the component and assembly levels; floor plans that include: windows, doors, and
fixtures such as WC, bath, sink, shower, etc. Applying colour coding according to building
25
drawing practice; Drawing sectional elevation showing foundation to ceiling; Introduction to

Building Information Modelling (BIM).
Suggested Text/Reference Books:

 Bhatt N.D., Panchal V.M. & Ingle P.R., (2014), Engg Drawing, Charotar Pub House
 Shah, M.B. & Rana B.C. (2008), Engg Drawing & Comp. Graphics, Pearson Education
 Agrawal B. & Agrawal C. M. (2012), Engineering Graphics, TMH Publication
 Narayana, K.L. & P Kannaiah (2008), Text book on Engg Drawing, Scitech Publishers
 Corresponding set of CAD Software Theory and User Manuals
COURSE OUTCOMES
All phases of manufacturing or construction require the conversion of new ideas and design
concepts into the basic line language of graphics. Therefore, there are many areas (civil,
mechanical, electrical, architectural and industrial) in which the skills of the CAD technicians
play major roles in the design and development of new products or construction. Students
prepare for actual work situations through practical training in a new state-of-the-art
computer designed CAD laboratory using engineering software. This course is designed to
address:
 To prepare you to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within
realistic constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and
safety, manufacturability, and sustainability
 To prepare you to communicate effectively
 To prepare you to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for
engineering practice The student will learn :
 Introduction to engineering design and its place in society
 Exposure to the visual aspects of engineering design
 Exposure to engineering graphics standards
 Exposure to solid modeling
 Exposure to computer-aided geometric design
 Exposure to creating working drawings
 Exposure to engineering communication
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
26
SEMESTER II
COURSE CONTENTS
27
Course Code BSC 104

Course Title Mathematics – II
Contents
Calculus, Ordinary Differential Equations and
Complex Variable (Option 1) for All branches
excluding CSE
Probability and Statistics (Option I1) for CSE
Scheme & Credits L T P Credit Semester
3 1 0 0 II
Pre-requisites Elementary Knowledge of calculus, Probability and
Statistics
MATHEMATICS - II
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
CALCULUS, ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND COMPLEX VARIABLE
(OPTION 1) for All branches excluding CSE 40 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Multivariable Calculus (Integration): 10 Lectures

Multiple Integration: Double integrals (Cartesian), change of order of integration in double
integrals, Change of variables (Cartesian to polar), Applications: areas and volumes, Center of
mass and Gravity (constant and variable densities);Triple integrals (Cartesian), orthogonal
curvilinear coordinates, Simple applications involving cubes, sphere and rectangular
parallelepipeds; Scalar line integrals, vector line integrals, scalar surface integrals, vector surface
integrals, Theorems of Green, Gauss and Stokes.
Module 2: First order ordinary differential equations: 06 Lectures

Exact, linear and Bernoulli’s equations, Euler’s equations, Equations not of first degree:
equations solvable for p, equations solvable for y, equations solvable for x and Clairaut’s type.
Module 3: Ordinary differential equations of higher orders: 08 Lectures

Second order linear differential equations with variable coefficients, method of variation of
parameters, Cauchy-Euler equation; Power series solutions; Legendre polynomials, Bessel
functions of the first kind and their properties.
Module 4: Complex Variable - Differentiation: 08 Lectures

Differentiation, Cauchy-Riemann equations, analytic functions, harmonic functions, finding
harmonic conjugate; elementary analytic functions (exponential, trigonometric, logarithm) and
their properties; Conformal mappings, Mobius transformations and their properties.
28
Module 5: Complex Variable - Integration: 08 Lectures

Contour integrals, Cauchy-Goursat theorem (without proof), Cauchy Integral formula (without
proof), Liouville’s theorem and Maximum-Modulus theorem (without proof); Taylor’s series,
zeros of analytic functions, singularities, Laurent’s series; Residues, Cauchy Residue theorem
(without proof), Evaluation of definite integral involving sine and cosine, Evaluation of certain
improper integrals using the Bromwich contour.
 G.B. Thomas & R.L. Finney, Calculus & Analytic geometry, Pearson, Reprint, 2002.
 Erwin kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
2006.
 W. E. Boyce and R. C. DiPrima, Elementary Differential Equations and Boundary Value
Problems, 9th Edn., Wiley India, 2009.
 S. L. Ross, Differential Equations, 3rd Ed., Wiley India, 1984.
 E. A. Coddington, An Introduction to Ordinary Differential Equations, PHI, 1995.
 E. L. Ince, Ordinary Differential Equations, Dover Publications, 1958.
 J. W. Brown & R. V. Churchill, Complex Variables & Appln, Mc-Graw Hill, 2004.
 N.P. Bali and Manish Goyal, Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi Pub, Reprint, 2008.
COURSE OUTCOME
To familiarize the prospective engineers with techniques in multivariate integration, ordinary and
partial differential equations and complex variables.
To equip the students to deal with advanced level of mathematics and applications that would be
essential for their disciplines.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS (OPTION 2) FOR CSE ONLY 40 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Basic Probability: 12 Lectures
Probability spaces, conditional probability, independence; Discrete random variables,
Independent random variables, the multinomial distribution, Poisson approximation to the
binomial distribution, infinite sequences of Bernoulli trials, sums of independent random
variables; Expectation of Discrete Random Variables, Moments, Variance of a sum, Correlation
coefficient, Chebyshev's Inequality.
29
Module 2: Continuous Probability Distributions: 04 Lectures

Continuous random variables and their properties, distribution functions and densities, normal,
exponential and gamma densities.
Module 3: Bivariate Distributions: 04 Lectures

Bivariate distributions and their properties, distribution of sums and quotients, conditional
densities, Bayes' rule.
Module 4: Basic Statistics: 08 Lectures

Measures of Central tendency: Moments, skewness and Kurtosis - Probability distributions:
Binomial, Poisson and Normal - evaluation of statistical parameters for these three distributions,
Correlation and regression – Rank correlation
Module 5: Applied Statistics: 08 Lectures

Curve fitting by the method of least squares- fitting of straight lines, second degree parabolas and
more general curves. Test of significance: Large sample test for single proportion, difference of
proportions, single mean, difference of means, and difference of standard deviations.
Module 6: Small samples: 04 Lectures

Test for single mean, difference of means and correlation coefficients, test for ratio of variances -
Chi-square test for goodness of fit and independence of attributes.
 Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
2006.
 P. G. Hoel, S. C. Port and C. J. Stone, Introduction to Probability Theory, Universal Book
Stall, 2003 (Reprint).
 S. Ross, A First Course in Probability, 6th Ed., Pearson Education India, 2002.
 W. Feller, An Introduction to Probability Theory and its Applications, Vol. 1, 3rd Ed.,
Wiley, 1968.
 Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics (for semester III), Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, 2010.
COURSE OUTCOME
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals
and their usage.
 To introduce effective mathematical tools for the solutions of differential equations that
model physical processes.
 To introduce the tools of differentiation and integration of functions of complex variable
that is used in various techniques dealing engineering problems.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
30
Course Code BSC 105
Course Title Course contents in Physics

(i) Introduction to Quantum Mechanics for Engineers – For
EEE, CSE
(ii) Semiconductor Optoelectronics – For ECE
(iii) Mechanics of Solid – For Civil, ME, MEMS
(iv) Optics & Fiber Optics – For Chemical Engineering
Scheme & Credits L T P Credit Semester II
2 1 0 3
Pre-requisites Mathematics course on differential equations and linear algebra
Introduction to Electromagnetic Theory
Semiconductor Physics
Physics-II
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
INTRODUCTION TO QUANTUM MECHANICS FOR ENGINEERS For EEE, CSE
38 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Wave nature of particles and the Schrodinger equation 8 Lectures

Introduction to Quantum mechanics, Wave nature of Particles, Time-dependent and time
independent Schrodinger equation for wave function, Born interpretation, probability current,
Expectation values, Free-particle wave function and wave-packets, Uncertainty principle
Module 2: Mathematical Preliminaries for quantum mechanics 5 Lectures

Complex numbers, Linear vector spaces, inner product, operators, eigenvalue problems,
Hermitian operators.
Module 3: Applying the Schrodinger equation 7 Lectures

Solution of stationary-state Schrodinger equation for one dimensional problems– particle in a
box, square-well potential, linear harmonic oscillator.
31
Module 4: Bound Quantum States 10 Lectures

Numerical solution of stationary-state Schrodinger equation for one dimensional problems for
different potentials Scattering from a potential barrier and tunneling. Three-dimensional
problems: particle in three dimensional box, Angular momentum operator, Rigid Rotor,
Hydrogen atom ground-state, orbitals, interaction with magnetic field.
Module 5: Introduction to solids 8 Lectures

Free electron theory of metals, Fermi level, density of states, Application to white dwarfs and
neutron stars, Bloch’s theorem for particles in a periodic potential, Kronig-Penney model and
origin of energy bands.
Text book:
 Eisberg and Resnick, Introduction to Quantum Physics Publisher New York: Wiley.
Collection printdisabled
Reference Books:
 Introduction to Quantum mechanics, Nikhil Ranjan Roy, 2016, Vikash Publishing House
Pvt. Ltd.
 Introduction to Quantum Mechanics, David J. Griffith, 2005, Pearson Education.
 Quantum Mechanics: Theory & Applications, A.K.Ghatak & S.Lokanathan, 2004,
Macmillan
COURSE OUTCOMES
Students to learn the basics of Quantum mechanics and its application to bound states.
To understand the wave particle duality.
To familiarize with the molecular bonding, free electron theory and periodic potentials in solids.
……....................................................................................................................................................
32
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
SEMICONDUCTOR OPTOELECTRONICS For ECE
36 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Review of semiconductor physics 10 Lectures

E-k diagram, Density of states, Occupation probability, Fermi level; p-n junction, Metal-
semiconductor junction (Ohmic and Schottky); Carrier transport, generation, and recombination;
Semiconductor materials of interest for optoelectronic devices, band gap modification, hetero
structures; Light semiconductor interaction: Rates of optical transitions, joint density of states,
condition for optical amplification.
Module 2: Semiconductor light emitting diodes (LEDs) 06 Lectures

Rate equations for carrier density, Radiative and non-radiative recombination mechanisms in
semiconductors, LED: device structure, materials, characteristics, and figures of merit.
Module 3: Semiconductor lasers 08 Lectures

Rate equations for carrier- and photon-density, and their steady state solutions, Laser dynamics,
Relaxation oscillations, Input-output characteristics of lasers. Semiconductor laser: structure,
materials, device characteristics, and figures of merit.
Module 4: Photo-detectors 06 Lectures

Types of semiconductor photodetectors -p-n junction, PIN, and Avalanche -- and their structure,
materials, working principle, and characteristics, Solar cells.
Module 5: Low-dimensional optoelectronic devices 06 Lectures

Quantum-well, -wire, and -dot based LEDs, lasers, and photo-detectors.
References:
 J. Singh, Semiconductor Optoelectronics: Physics and Tech., McGraw-Hill Inc. (1995).
 B. E. A. Saleh and M. C. Teich, Fundamentals of Photonics, John Wiley & Sons,
 S. M. Sze, Semiconductor Devices: Physics and Technology, Wiley (2008).
 Yariv and P. Yeh, Photonics: Optical Electronics in Mod. Comm, OUP, NY (2007).
 P. Bhattacharya, Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices, Prentice Hall of India (1997).
 Online course: “Semiconductor Optoelectronics” by M R Shenoy on NPTEL
 Online course: "Optoelectronic Materials & Devices" by Monica Katiyar & Deepak
Gupta on NPTEL
COURSE OUTCOME
Students to review the concepts of semiconductor physics.
To learn about the semiconductor LEDs and semiconductor Lasers.
To have the understanding of photo detectors and low dimensional optoelectronic devices.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
33
.…………………………………………………………………………………………………...…
MECHANICS OF SOLIDS For Civil, ME, MEMS
40 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Statics 10 Lectures

Free body diagrams on modelling of typical supports and joints; Condition for equilibrium in
three- and two- dimensions; Friction: limiting and non-limiting cases; Force displacement
relationship; Geometric compatibility for small deformations.
Module 2: Stress and Strain at a point 6 Lectures

Concept of stress at a point; Planet stress: transformation of stresses at a point, principal stresses
and Mohr’s circle; Displacement field; Concept of strain at a point; Planet strain:
transformation of strain at a point, principal strains and Mohr’s circle.
Module 3: Material behavior 7 Lectures

One- dimensional material behaviour; Concepts of elasticity, plasticity, strain hardening, failure
(fracture / yielding); Idealization of one dimensional stress-strain curve; Generalized Hooke’s
law with and without thermal strains for isotropic materials.
Module 4: Force analysis 8 Lectures

Force analysis — axial force, shear force, bending moment and twisting moment diagrams of
slender members (without using singularity functions);; Moment curvature relationship for pure
bending of beams with symmetric cross-section; Bending stress; Shear stress; Cases of combined
stresses;
Module 5: Strain energy 9 Lectures

Concept of strain energy; Yield criteria; Deflection due to bending; Integration of the moment-
curvature relationship for simple boundary conditions; Method of superposition (without using
singularity functions); Strain energy and complementary strain energy for simple structural
elements (i.e. those under axial load, shear force, bending moment and torsion).
Reference books:
 An Introduction to the Mechanics of Solids, 2nd ed. with SI Units - SH Crandall, NC
 Dahl & TJ Lardner
34
 Engineering Mechanics: Statics, 7th ed. — JL Meriam

 Engineering Mechanics of Solids — EP Popov
COURSE OUTCOME
To familiarize students of civil and mechanical engineering with the understanding of the elastic
and plastic behavior of solids.
To understand the importance of stress and strain at a point on solid.
To be able to do force analysis and understand strain energy of solid.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
OPTICS AND FIBER OPTICS For Chemical Engineering
36 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Interference 07 Lectures

Introduction to interference and example, Theory of fringes, Analytical treatment of interference,
Displacement of fringes, Thin film, Newton’s Ring, Wedge shaped film.
Module 2: Diffraction 06 Lectures

concept of diffraction, Fraunhoffer and Fresnel diffraction, Fraunhoffer diffraction at single slit,
double slit, and multiple slits; diffraction grating, characteristics of diffraction grating and its
applications, Limit of Resolution, Resolving power of grating.
Module 3: Polarisation 06 Lectures

Introduction, plane of polarization, plane of vibration, polarisation by reflection: Brewester’s
Law, polarisation by refraction: Malus’ Law, polarisation by double refraction, scattering of
light, circular and elliptical polarisation, optical activity.
Module 4: Fibre Optics 07 Lectures

Introduction, optical fibre as a dielectric wave guide: total internal reflection, numerical aperture
and various fibre parameters, losses associated with optical fibres, step and graded index fibres,
application of optical fibres.
35

Introduction to interaction of radiation with matter, Stimulated and spontaneous emission,
Einstein’s coefficient, principles and working of laser: population inversion, pumping, various
modes, threshold population inversion, three level and four level laser, types of laser: solid state,
semiconductor, gas; application of lasers.
Reference Books
 Waves: Berkeley Physics Course, vol. 3, Francis Crawford, 2007, Tata McGraw-Hill.
 Fundamentals of Optics, F.A. Jenkins and H.E. White, 1981, McGraw-Hill
 Principles of Optics, Max Born and Emil Wolf, 7th Edn., 1999, Pergamon Press.
 Optics, Ajoy Ghatak, 2008, Tata McGraw Hill
COURSE OUTCOMES
To understand the optical phenomenon of interference, diffraction and polarization,
To get familiarize with fiber optics and laser, their basic concept and application in engineering.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
36
Course Code BSC 102

Course Title Chemistry-I
Contents
(i) Chemistry-I (Concepts in chemistry for engineering)
(ii) Chemistry Laboratory
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisites Knowledge of intermediate level chemistry
CHEMISTRY-I
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
CONCEPTS IN CHEMISTRY FOR ENGINEERING 42 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Atomic and molecular structure 12 lectures

Schrodinger equation. Particle in a box solutions and their applications for conjugated molecules
and nanoparticles. Forms of the hydrogen atom wave functions and the plots of these functions to
explore their spatial variations. Molecular orbitals of diatomic molecules and plots of the
multicentre orbitals. Equations for atomic and molecular orbitals. Energy level diagrams of
diatomics. Pi-molecular orbitals of butadiene and benzene and aromaticity. Crystal field theory
and the energy level diagrams for transition metal ions and their magnetic properties. Band
structure of solids and the role of doping on band structures.
Module 2: Spectroscopic techniques and applications 8 lectures

Principles of spectroscopy and selection rules. Electronic spectroscopy. Fluorescence and its
applications in medicine. Vibrational and rotational spectroscopy of diatomic molecules.
Applications. Nuclear magnetic resonance and magnetic resonance imaging, surface
characterisation techniques. Diffraction and scattering.
Module 3: Intermolecular forces and potential energy surfaces 4 lectures

Ionic, dipolar and van Der Waals interactions. Equations of state of real gases and critical
phenomena. Potential energy surfaces of H3, H2F and HCN and trajectories on these surfaces.
Module 4: Use of free energy in chemical equilibria 6 lectures

Thermodynamic functions: energy, entropy and free energy. Estimations of entropy and free
energies. Free energy and emf. Cell potentials, the Nernst equation and applications. Acid base,
oxidation reduction and solubility equilibria. Waterchemistry. Corrosion. Use of free energy
considerations in metallurgy through Ellingham diagrams.
37
Module 5: Periodic properties and Stereochemistry 8 Lectures

Effective nuclear charge, penetration of orbitals, variations of s, p, d and f orbital energies of
atoms in the periodic table, electronic configurations, atomic and ionic sizes, ionization energies,
electron affinity and electronegativity, polarizability, oxidation states, coordination numbers and
geometries, hard soft acids and bases, molecular geometries
Representations of 3 dimensional structures, structural isomers and stereoisomers, configurations
and symmetry and chirality, enantiomers, diastereomers, optical activity, absolute configurations
and conformational analysis. Isomerism in transitional metal compounds
Module 6: Organic reactions and synthesis of a drug molecule 4 lectures

Introduction to reactions involving substitution, addition, elimination, oxidation, reduction,
cyclization and ring openings. Synthesis of a commonly used drug molecule.
Books:
 University chemistry, by B. H. Mahan
 Chemistry: Principles and Applications, by M. J. Sienko and R. A. Plane
 Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, by C. N. Banwell
 Engg Chemistry (NPTEL Web-book), by B. L. Tembe, Kamaluddin and M. S. Krishnan
 Physical Chemistry, by P. W. Atkins
 Organic Chemistry: Structure and Function by K. P. C. Volhardt and N. E. Schore, 5th
Edition http://bcs.whfreeman.com/vollhardtschore5e/default.asp
COURSE OUTCOMES
The concepts developed in this course will aid in quantification of several concepts in chemistry
hat have been introduced at the 10+2 levels in schools. Technology is being increasingly based
on the electronic, atomic and molecular level modifications. Quantum theory is more than 100
years old and to understand phenomena at nanometer levels, one has to base the description of all
chemical processes at molecular levels. The course will enable the student to:
 Analyse microscopic chemistry in terms of atomic and molecular orbitals and
intermolecular forces.
 Rationalise bulk properties and processes using thermodynamic considerations.
 Distinguish the ranges of the electromagnetic spectrum used for exciting different
molecular energy levels in various spectroscopic techniques
 Rationalise periodic properties such as ionization potential, electronegativity, oxidation
states and electronegativity.
 List major chemical reactions that are used in the synthesis of molecules.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
38
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY Code: BSC 102P
………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 Determination of surface tension and viscosity
 Thin layer chromatography
 Ion exchange column for removal of hardness of water
 Determination of chloride content of water
 Colligative properties using freezing point depression
 Determination of the rate constant of a reaction
 Determination of cell constant and conductance of solutions
 Potentiometry - determination of redox potentials and emfs
 Synthesis of a polymer/drug
 Saponification/acid value of an oil
 Chemical analysis of a salt
 Lattice structures and packing of spheres
 Models of potential energy surfaces
 Chemical oscillations- Iodine clock reaction
 Determination of the partition coefficient of a substance between two immiscible liquids
 Adsorption of acetic acid by charcoal
 Use of the capillary visco meters to the demonstrate of the isoelectric point as the pH of
minimum viscosity for gelatin sols and/or coagulation of the white part of egg.
LABORATORY OUTCOMES
 The chemistry laboratory course will consist of experiments illustrating the principles of
chemistry relevant to the study of science and engineering. The students will learn to:
 Estimate rate constants of reactions from concentration of reactants/products as a
function of time
 Measure molecular/system properties such as surface tension, viscosity, conductance of
solutions, redox potentials, chloride content of water, etc
 Synthesize a small drug molecule and analyse a salt sample
39
Course Code ESC 103

Course Title Programming for Problem Solving

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisites Basic Knowledge of Computer and Mathematics
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
PROGRAMMING FOR PROBLEM SOLVING 40 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Introduction to Programming 6 lectures

Introduction to components of a computer system (disks, memory, processor, where a program is
stored and executed, operating system, compilers etc.). Idea of Algorithm: steps to solve logical
and numerical problems. Representation of Algorithm: Flowchart/Pseudo code with examples.
From algorithms to programs; source code, variables (with data types) variables and memory
locations, Syntax and Logical Errors in compilation, object and executable code.
Module 2: Arithmetic expressions and precedence 12 lectures

Conditional Branching and Loops Writing and evaluation of conditionals and consequent
branching, Iteration and loops
Module 3: Arrays 3 Lectures

Arrays (1-D, 2-D), Character arrays and Strings
Module 4: Basic Algorithms, Searching, Basic Sorting Algorithms 4 lectures

(Bubble, Insertion and Selection), Finding roots of equations, notion of order of complexity
through example programs (no formal definition required)
Module 5: Function and Pointers 6 lectures

Functions (including using built in libraries), Parameter passing in functions, call by value,
Passing arrays to functions: idea of call by reference
Idea of pointers, Defining pointers, Use of Pointers in self-referential structures, notion of linked
list (no implementation).
40
Module 6: Recursion and Structure 9 lectures

Recursion, as a different way of solving problems. Example programs, such as Finding,
Factorial, Fibonacci series, Ackerman function etc. Quick sort or Merge sort.
Structures, Defining structures and Array of Structures
Suggested Text Books

 Byron Gottfried, Schaum's Outline of Programming with C, McGraw-Hill
 E. Balaguruswamy, Programming in ANSI C, Tata McGraw-Hill
Suggested Reference Books

 Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie, The C Programming Language, Prentice
Hall of India
COURSE OUTCOMES
The student will learn
To formulate simple algorithms for arithmetic and logical problems.
To translate the algorithms to programs (in C language).
To test and execute the programs and correct syntax and logical errors.
To implement conditional branching, iteration and recursion.
To decompose a problem into functions and synthesize a complete program using divide and
conquer approach.
To use arrays, pointers and structures to formulate algorithms and programs.
To apply programming to solve matrix addition and multiplication problems and searching and
sorting problems.
To apply programming to solve simple numerical method problems, namely rot finding of
function, differentiation of function and simple integration.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
41
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
LABORATORY - PROGRAMMING FOR PROBLEM SOLVING Code: ESC103P
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
[The laboratory should be preceded or followed by a tutorial to explain the approach or
algorithm to be implemented for the problem given.]
Tutorial 1: Problem solving using computers:

Lab1: Familiarization with programming environment
Tutorial 2: Variable types and type conversions:

Lab 2: Simple computational problems using arithmetic expressions
Tutorial 3: Branching and logical expressions:

Lab 3: Problems involving if-then-else structures
Tutorial 4: Loops, while and for loops:

Lab 4: Iterative problems e.g., sum of series
Tutorial 5: 1D Arrays: searching, sorting:

Lab 5: 1D Array manipulation
Tutorial 6: 2D arrays and Strings

Lab 6: Matrix problems, String operations
Tutorial 7: Functions, call by value:

Lab 7: Simple functions
Tutorial 8 & 9: Numerical methods (Root finding, numerical differentiation, numerical

integration):
Lab 8 and 9: Programming for solving Numerical methods problems
Tutorial 10: Recursion, structure of recursive calls

Lab 10: Recursive functions
Tutorial 11: Pointers, structures and dynamic memory allocation

Lab 11: Pointers and structures
Tutorial 12: File handling:

Lab 12: File operations
42
LABORATORY OUTCOMES
To formulate the algorithms for simple problems.
To translate given algorithms to a working and correct program.
To be able to correct syntax errors as reported by the compilers.
To be able to identify and correct logical errors encountered at run time.
To be able to write iterative as well as recursive programs.
To be able to represent data in arrays, strings and structures and manipulate them through a
program.
To be able to declare pointers of different types and use them in defining self referential
structures.
To be able to create, read and write to and from simple text files.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
43
Course Code ESC 104

Course Title Workshop/Manufacturing Practices
(Theory & Lab)
1 0 4 3
Pre-requisites Basic Knowledge of Physics, Chemistry and Mathematics
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
WORKSHOP/MANUFACTURING PRACTICES 10 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
1. Manufacturing Methods- casting, forming, machining, joining, advanced manufacturing

methods (3 lectures)
2. CNC machining, Additive manufacturing (1 lecture)
3. Fitting operations & power tools (1 lecture)
4. Electrical & Electronics (1 lecture)
5. Carpentry (1 lecture)
6. Plastic Moulding, glass cutting (1 lecture)
7. Metal casting (1 lecture)
8. Welding (arc welding & gas welding), brazing (1 lecture)
Suggested Text/Reference Books:

 Hajra Choudhury S.K., Hajra Choudhury A.K. and Nirjhar Roy S.K., “Elements of
Workshop Technology”, Vol. I 2008 and Vol. II 2010, Media promoters and publishers
private limited, Mumbai.
 Kalpakjian S. And Steven S. Schmid, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, 4th
edition, Pearson Education India Edition, 2002.
 Gowri P. Hariharan & A. Suresh Babu, “Mfg. Tech- I” Pearson Education, 2008.
 Roy A. Lindberg, “Processes and Materials of Manufacture”, 4 th edition, PHl, 1998.
 Rao P.N., “Manufacturing Technology”, Vol. I & Vol. II, Tata McGrawHill House, 2017.
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the students will gain knowledge of the different manufacturing
processes which are commonly employed in the industry, to fabricate components using different
materials.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
44
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
WORKSHOP PRACTICE 60 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
1. Machine shop (10 hours)
2. Fitting shop (8 hours)
3. Carpentry (6 hours)
4. Electrical & Electronics (8 hours)
5. Welding shop (8 hours (Arc welding 4 hrs + gas welding 4 hrs))
6. Casting (8 hours)
7. Smithy (6 hours)
8. Plastic Moulding & (6 hours)
Glass Cutting
Examinations could involve the actual fabrication of simple components, utilizing one or more of
the techniques covered above.
LABORATORY OUTCOMES
 Upon completion of this laboratory course, students will be able to fabricate components
with their own hands.
 They will also get practical knowledge of the dimensional accuracies and dimensional
tolerances possible with different manufacturing processes.
 By assembling different components, they will be able to produce small devices of their
interest.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
45
Course Code HSMC 101

Category Humanities and Social Sciences including Management Courses
Course Title English
2 0 2 3
Pre-requisites Basic Knowledge of English grammar and composition
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
ENGLISH 38 Lectures
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Module 1: Vocabulary Building 6 lecture

The concept of Word Formation, Root words from foreign languages and their use in English,
Acquaintance with prefixes and suffixes from foreign languages in English to form derivatives,
Synonyms, antonyms and standard abbreviations.
Module 2: Basic Writing Skills 6 lectures

Sentence Structures, Use of phrases and clauses in sentences, Importance of proper punctuation,
Creating coherence, Organizing principles of paragraphs in documents, Techniques for writing
precisely.
Module 3: Identifying Common Errors in Writing 7 lectures

Subject-verb agreement, Noun-pronoun agreement, Misplaced modifiers, Articles, Prepositions,
Redundancies, Clichés.
Module 4: Nature and Style of sensible Writing 6 lectures

Describing, Defining, Classifying, Providing examples or evidence, Writing introduction and
conclusion
Module 5: Writing Practices 6 lectures

Comprehension, Précis Writing, Essay Writing,
Module 6: Oral Communication 7 lectures

(This unit involves interactive practice sessions in Language Lab)
Listening Comprehension, Pronunciation, Intonation, Stress and Rhythm, Common Everyday,
Situations: Conversations and Dialogues, Communication at Workplace, Interviews, Formal
Presentations.
46
Suggested Readings:
 Practical English Usage. Michael Swan. OUP. 1995.
 Remedial English Grammar. F.T. Wood. Macmillan.2007
 On Writing Well. William Zinsser. Harper Resource Book. 2001
 Study Writing. Liz Hamp-Lyons and Ben Heasly. Cambridge University Press. 2006.
 Communication Skills. Sanjay Kumar and Pushp Lata. Oxford University Press. 2011.
 Exercises in Spoken English. Parts. I-III. CIEFL, Hyderabad. Oxford University Press
COURSE OUTCOMES
The student will acquire basic proficiency in English including reading and listening
comprehension, writing and speaking skills.
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
47
A Guide to Induction Program
1 Introduction
(Induction Program was discussed and approved for all colleges by AICTE in March 2017.It was
discussed and accepted by the Council of IITs for all IITs in August 2016. It was originally
proposed by a Committee of IIT Directors and accepted at the meeting of all IIT Directors in
March 2016. This guide has been prepared based on the Report of the Committee of IIT
Directors and the experience gained through its pilot implementation in July 2016 as accepted by
the Council of IITs. Purpose of this document is to help institutions in understanding the spirit of
the accepted Induction Program and implementing it.)
Engineering colleges were established to train graduates well in the branch/department of

admission, have a holistic outlook, and have a desire to work for national needs and beyond.
The graduating student must have knowledge and skills in the area of his study. However, he
must also have broad understanding of society and relationships. Character needs to be nurtured
as an essential quality by which he would understand and fulfill his responsibility as an engineer,
a citizen and a human being. Besides the above, several meta-skills and underlying values are
needed.
There is a mad rush for engineering today, without the student determining for himself his
interests and his goals. This is a major factor in the current state of demotivation towards studies
that exists among UG students.
The success of gaining admission into a desired institution but failure in getting the desired
branch, with peer pressure generating its own problems, leads to a peer environment that is
demotivating and corrosive. Start of hostel life without close parental supervision at the same
time, further worsens it with also a poor daily routine.
48
To come out of this situation, a multi-pronged approach is needed. One will have to work closely
with the newly joined students in making them feel comfortable, allow them to explore their
academic interests and activities, reduce competition and make them work for excellence,
promote bonding within them, build relations between teachers and students, give a broader view
of life, and build character.
2 Induction Program
When new students enter an institution, they come with diverse thoughts, backgrounds and
preparations. It is important to help them adjust to the new environment and inculcate in them
the ethos of the institution with a sense of larger purpose. Precious little is done by most of the
institutions, except for an orientation program lasting a couple of days.
We propose a 3-week long induction program for the UG students entering the institution, right
at the start. Normal classes start only after the induction program is over. Its purpose is to make
the students feel comfortable in their new environment, open them up, set a healthy daily routine,
create bonding in the batch as well as between faculty and students, develop awareness,
sensitivity and understanding of the self, people around them, society at large, and nature.
The time during the Induction Program is also used to rectify some critical lacunas, for example,
English background, for those students who have deficiency in it. The following are the activities
under the induction program in which the student would be fully engaged throughout the day for
the entire duration of the program.
2.1 Physical Activity
This would involve a daily routine of physical activity with games and sports. It would start with
all students coming to the field at 6 am for light physical exercise or yoga. There would also be
games in the evening or at other suitable times according to the local climate. These would help
develop team work. Each student should pick one game and learn it for three weeks. There could
also be gardening or other suitably designed activity where labour yields fruits from nature.
2.2 Creative Arts
Every student would chose one skill related to the arts whether visual arts or performing arts.
Examples are painting, sculpture, pottery, music, dance etc. The student would pursue it every
day for the duration of the program. These would allow for creative expression. It would develop
a sense of aesthetics and also enhance creativity which would, hopefully, flow into engineering
design later.
49
2.3 Universal Human Values
It gets the student to explore oneself and allows one to experience the joy of learning, stand up to
peer pressure, take decisions with courage, be aware of relationships with colleagues and
supporting staff in the hostel and department, be sensitive to others, etc. Need for character
building has been underlined earlier. A module in Universal Human Values provides the base.
Methodology of teaching this content is extremely important. It must not be through do’s and
don’ts, but get students to explore and think by engaging them in a dialogue. It is best taught
through group discussions and real life activities rather than lecturing. The role of group
discussions, however, with clarity of thought of the teachers cannot be over emphasized. It is
essential for giving exposure, guiding thoughts, and realizing values.
The teachers must come from all the departments rather than only one department like HSS or
from outside of the Institute. Experiments in this direction at IIT (BHU) are noteworthy and one
can learn from them.
Discussions would be conducted in small groups of about 20 students with a faculty mentor each.
It is to open thinking towards the self. Universal Human Values discussions could even continue
for rest of the semester as a normal course, and not stop with the induction program.
Besides drawing the attention of the student to larger issues of life, it would build relationships
between teachers and students which last for their entire 4-year stay and possibly beyond.
2.4 Literary
Literary activity would encompass reading, writing and possibly, debating, enacting a play etc.
2.5 Proficiency Modules
This period can be used to overcome some critical lacunas that students might have, for example,
English, computer familiarity etc. These should run like crash courses, so that when normal
courses start after the induction program, the student has overcome the lacunas substantially. We
hope that problems arising due to lack of English skills, wherein students start lagging behind or
failing in several subjects, for no fault of theirs, would, hopefully, become a thing of the past.
2.6 Lectures by Eminent People
This period can be utilized for lectures by eminent people, say, once a week. It would give the
students exposure to people who are socially active or in public life.
50
2.7 Visits to Local Area
A couple of visits to the landmarks of the city, or a hospital or orphanage could be organized.
This would familiarize them with the area as well as expose them to the under privileged.
2.8 Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations
The students should be told about different method of study compared to coaching that is needed
at IITs. They should be told about what getting into a branch or department means what role it
plays in society, through its technology. They should also be shown the laboratories, workshops
& other facilities.
3 Schedules
The activities during the Induction Program would have an Initial Phase, a Regular Phase and a
Closing Phase. The Initial and Closing Phases would be two days each.
3.1 Initial Phase
3.2 Regular Phase

After two days is the start of the Regular Phase of induction. With this phase there would be
regular program to be followed every day.
51
3.2.1 Daily Schedule
Some of the activities are on a daily basis, while some others are at specified periods within the
Induction Program. We first show a typical daily timetable.
3.2.2 Afternoon Activities (Non-Daily)
The following five activities are scheduled at different times of the Induction Program, and are
not held daily for everyone:
1. Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations
2. Visits to Local Area
3. Lectures by Eminent People
4. Literary
5. Proficiency Modules
Here is the approximate activity schedule for the afternoons (may be changed to suit local
needs):
52
3.3 Closing Phase
3.4 Follow Up after Closure
A question comes up as to what would be the follow up program after the formal 3-week
Induction Program is over? The groups which are formed should function as mentor mentee
network. A student should feel free to approach his faculty mentor or the student guide, when
facing any kind of problem, whether academic or financial or psychological etc. (For every 10
undergraduate first year students, there would be a senior student as a student guide, and for
every 20 students, there would be a faculty mentor.) Such a group should remain for the entire 4-
5 year duration of the stay of the student. Therefore, it would be good to have groups with the
students as well as teachers from the same department/discipline. Here we list some important
suggestions which have come up and which have been experimented with.
3.4.1 Follow Up after Closure – Same Semester
It is suggested that the groups meet with their faculty mentors once a month, within the semester
after the 3-week Induction Program is over. This should be a scheduled meeting shown in the
timetable. (The groups are of course free to meet together on their own more often, for the
student groups to be invited to their faculty mentor’s home for dinner or tea, nature walk, etc.)
3.4.2 Follow Up – Subsequent Semesters
It is extremely important that continuity be maintained in subsequent semesters. It is suggested

that at the start of the subsequent semesters (up to fourth semester), three days be set aside for
three full days of activities related to follow up to Induction Program. The students be shown
inspiring films, do collective art work, and group discussions be conducted. Subsequently, the
groups should meet at least once a month.
53
4 Summary
Engineering institutions were set up to generate well trained manpower in engineering with a
feeling of responsibility towards oneself, one’s family, and society. The incoming undergraduate
students are driven by their parents and society to join engineering without understanding their
own interests and talents. As a result, most students fail to link up with the goals of their own
institution. The graduating student must have values as a human being, and knowledge and met
skills related to his/her profession as an engineer and as a citizen. Most students, who get
demotivated to study engineering or their branch, also lose interest in learning. The Induction
Program is designed to make the newly joined students feel comfortable, sensitize them towards
exploring their academic interests and activities, reducing competition and making them work
for excellence, promote bonding within them, build relations between teachers and students, give
a broader view of life, and building of character. The Universal Human Values component,
which acts as an anchor, develops awareness and sensitivity, feeling of equality, compassion and
oneness, draw attention to society and nature, and character to follow through. It also makes
them reflect on their relationship with their families and extended family in the college (with
hostel staff and others). It also connects students with each other and with teachers so that they
can share any difficulty they might be facing and seek help.
54
Course Code BSC102
Course Title Chemistry-I
Contents
(i)Chemistry-I (Concepts in Chemistry for Engineering)
(ii)Chemistry Laboratory
Scheme& Credits L T P Credit Semester I
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisites Knowledge of Intermediate Level Chemistry
CHEMISTRY-I
CONCEPTS IN CHEMISTRY FOR ENGINEERING 42 Lectures
Module-1: Atomic and molecular structure [10Lectures]

Schrodinger equation. Particle in box solutions and their applications for conjugated
molecules. Molecular orbitals of diatomic molecules and plots of the multicentre orbitals.
Equations for atomic and molecular orbitals. Energy level diagrams of diatomics. Pi-
molecular orbitals of butadiene and benzene and aromaticity. Crystal field theory and the
energy level diagrams for transition metal ions and their magnetic properties. Band
structure of solids and the role of doping on band structures.
Module-2 : Spectroscopic techniques and applications [6 Lectures]
Principles and Applications of Electronic spectroscopy and Nuclear magnetic resonance.

Vibrational and rotational spectroscopy of diatomic molecules and its applications.
Fluorescence and its applications in Medicine. Surface Characterisation Techniques
(Scanning Electron Microscopy and Transmission Electron Microscopy)
Module-3: Intermolecular forces [4 lectures]
Ionic, dipolar and van Der Waals interactions. Measurement of non-covalent interaction,
Hydrogen bond, Equations of state of real gases and critical phenomena.
1 of 4| P a g e
Module: 4: Use of free energy in chemical equilibria [8 Lectures]
Thermodynamic functions: energy, entropy and free energy. Estimations of entropy and
free energies. Free energy and emf. Cell potentials, the Nernst equation and applications.
Acid base, oxidation reduction and solubility equilibria. Corrosion: Introduction, Causes,
consequences, Mechanism, Laws of Dry Corrosion, Wet Corrosion , Factors Influencing
Corrosion, Protective measures against corrosion. Use of free energy considerations in
metallurgy through Ellingham diagrams.
Module-5: Periodic properties and Stereochemistry [8 Lectures]
Effective nuclear charge, penetration of orbitals, variations of s, p, d and f orbital energies

of atoms in the periodic table, electronic configurations, atomic and ionic sizes,
ionization energies, electron affinity and electronegativity, polarizability, oxidation states,
coordination numbers and geometries, hard soft acids and bases.
Representations of 3 dimensional structures, structural isomers and stereoisomers,

configurations and symmetry and chirality, enantiomers, diastereomers, optical activity,
absolute configurations and conformational analysis.
Module-6: Polymer [6 lectures]

Classification of polymers, Mechanism of Polymerisation, structure-property
relationship, conductive polymers.
Books
 University Chemistry, by B.H.Mahan

 Chemistry, Second Edition, By Prasanta Ratha and S. Chakroborty –Cengage pub
 Engineering Chemistry by Jaya Shree Anireddy, Wiley publication
 Text book of Engineering Chemistry , First Ed.2019, By Sashi Chawala, Dhanpat
Rai, publication
 Chemistry: Principles and Applications, by M.J.Sienko and R.A.Plane
 Fundamentals of molecular Spectroscopy, by C.N.Banwell
 Engg Chemistry(NPTEL Web Book),by B.L.Tembe, Kamaluddin and
M.S.Krishnan
 Physical Chemistry, by P.W.Atkins
 Organic Chemistry: Structure and Function by K.P.C. Volhardt and N.E. Schore,
5th Edition http://bcs.whfreeman.com/volhardtschore5e/default.asp
2 of 4| P a g e
COURSE OUTCOMES
The concepts develops in this course will aid in quantification of several concepts in
chemistry that have been introduced at the 10+2 levels in schools. Technology is being
increasing based on the electronic, atomic and molecular level modifications. Quantum
theory is more than 100 years old and to understand phenomena at nanometer levels; one
has to base the description of all chemical processes at molecular levels. The course will
enable the student to:
 Analyse microscope chemistry in terms of atomic and molecular orbitals and

intermolecular forces.
 Rationalise bulk properties and processes using thermodynamics considerations.
 Distinguish the range of the electromagnetic spectrum used for exciting different
molecular energy levels in various spectroscope techniques
 Rationalise periodic properties such as ionization potential, electronegativity,
oxidation states and electronegativity.
 Apply the concept and mechanism of polymerization
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY Code: BSC 102P
Choice of 06-08 experiments from the following
1. Determination of surface tension and viscosity

2. Thin layer chromatography
3. Preparation of a metal complex
4. Determination of chloride content of water
5. Colligative properties using freezing point depression
6. Determination of the rate constant of a reaction
7. Determination of cell constant and conductance of solutions
8. Potentiometry - determination of redox potentials and emfs
9. Synthesis of a polymer/drug
10. Saponification/acid value of an oil
11. Chemical analysis of a salt
12. Lattice structures and packing of spheres
13. Redox-titration (Estimation of Iron using permanganometry)
14. Chemical oscillations- Iodine clock reaction
3 of 4| P a g e
15. Determination of the partition coefficient of a substance between two immiscible
liquids
16. Adsorption of acetic acid by charcoal
17. Use of the capillary viscometers to demonstrate the isoelectric point as the pH of
minimum viscosity for gelatin sols and/ or coagulation of the white part of egg.
LABORATORY OUTCOMES
The chemistry laboratory course will consist of experiments illustrating the

principles of chemistry relevant to the study of science and engineering. The
students will learn to:
 Estimate rate constants of reactions from concentration of reactants/
products as a function of time.
 Measure molecular/ system properties such a surface tension, viscosity,
conductance of solutions, redox potentials, chloride content of water, etc.
 Synthesize a small drug molecule and analyse a salt sample
4 of 4| P a g e
Course Code BSC 101
Course Title Mathematics-I

Credits
3 1 0 4
Mathematics I: New Syllabus JUT for All Branches except CSE and IT
Module1: Function of one variable: Successive Differentiation, Leibnitz Theorem,
Expansion of a function into Taylors and Maclaurin’s Series. Function of two or more
variables: Partial derivatives; Euler’s Theorem; Taylor’s Expansion. Maxima & Minima of a
function of two variables, Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers.
(10 L/ 2.5Q)
Module 2: Reduction formula for integrals. Improper integrals and its convergence; Beta
and Gamma functions and their properties. Differentiation under integral sign. Applications
of integrals as length, area, volume and surface area of revolution. (8 L/ 1.5Q)
Module 3: Matrices- Rank of a matrix (Echelon form and Normal form), System of linear
equations; consistency and inconsistency, Eigen values and eigenvectors; Diagonalization of
square matrices; Cayley-Hamilton Theorem. (8L/ 1Q)
Module 4: First order ordinary Differential Equations: Exact, Linear and Bernoulli’s
equations, Euler’s equations, Equations not of first degree: equations solvable for p,
equations solvable for y, equations solvable for x and Clairaut’s type. (8 L/ 1Q)
Module 5: Infinite Series: Convergence of series; Comparison test, P Test, Cauchy’s nth
Root test, D Alembert’s Ratio Test, Rabies Test, Logarithmic test. (6 L/ 1Q)
Note:- Question no. 1 will be objective type and compulsory comprising of the whole
syllabus with seven sub-parts.
Mathematics I: New Syllabus JUT for CSE and IT Students
Module 1: Functions of one variable: Successive Differentiation, Leibnitz Theorem,
Expansion of function into Taylors and Maclaurin’s Series. Functions of two or more
variable: Partial derivatives; Euler’s Theorem; Taylor’s Expansion. Maxima, minima of
function of two variables. Lagrange method of undetermined multipliers. (10 L/ 2Q)
Module 2: Reduction formula for integrals. Improper integrals and its convergence; Beta
and Gamma functions and their properties. Differentiation under integral sign. Applications
of integrals as length, area, volume and surface area of revolution. (8 L/ 1Q)
Module 3: Vector Space: Vector addition and scalar multiplication, linear dependence and
independence of vectors, basis, dimension; Linear transformations , range and kernel of a
linear mapping, rank and nullity, Inverse of a linear transformation, rank nullity theorem,
composition of linear maps, Matrix associated with a linear mapping. (10 L/ 2Q)
Module 4: Matrices: Rank of a matrix, solution of system of linear equations, consistency

and inconsistency, Eigen values and eigenvectors; Diagonalization of matrices; Cayley-
Hamilton Theorem. Inner product spaces, Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization. (8 L/ 1Q)
Module 5: First order ordinary Differential Equations: Exact, Linear and Bernoulli’s
equations, Euler’s equations, Equations not of first degree: equations solvable for p,
equations solvable for y, equations solvable for x and Clairaut’s type. (6 L/ 1Q)
Note:- Question no. 1 will be objective type and compulsory comprising of the whole
Course Code BSC 202
Course Title Mathematics-II

Scheme & L T P Credit Semester II
Credits
3 1 0 4
Mathematics II: New Syllabus JUT for All Branches except CSE & IT
Module 1: Multivariable Integral Calculus: Double and Triple integrals, Evaluation of double
integrals, change of order of integration, change of variables, Evaluation of Triple integrals,
Simple applications involving areas, volumes. (8 L/ 1Q)
Module 2: Vector Calculus: Scalar and Vector point functions. Directional derivative,
Gradient, divergence and curl. Line integrals, Surface integrals, Volume integrals, Green's
theorem, Stokes theorem and Gauss divergence theorem (without proofs). (10 L/ 2Q)
Module 3: Higher order linear differential equations with constant and variable coefficients,
Method of variation of parameters, Cauchy’s and Legendre’s linear equations, Simultaneous
linear equations, Series solutions of differential equations, Bessel and Legendre’s equations
and its solution(without proof). Elementary properties of Bessel function and Legendre’s
polynomial. (10 L/ 2Q)
Module 4: Complex Variable - Differentiation:

Differentiation, Cauchy-Riemann equations, Analytic functions, Harmonic functions, finding
harmonic conjugate; Conformal mappings, Mobius transformations and their properties.
(6 L/ 1Q)
Module 5: Complex Variable - Integration:

Contour integrals, Cauchy Integral Theorem, Cauchy Integral formula (without proof)and for
derivatives also, zeros of analytic functions, singularities, Taylor’s series, Laurent’s series;
Residues, Cauchy Residue theorem (without proof), Evaluation of definite integral involving
sine and cosine. (8 L/ 1Q)
Note :- Question no. 1 will be objective type and compulsory comprising of the whole
Mathematics II: New Syllabus JUT for CSE and IT Students
Module 1: Multivariable Integral Calculus: Double and Triple integrals, Evaluation of double
integrals, change of order of integration, change of variables, Evaluation of Triple integrals,
Simple applications involving areas, volumes. (8 L/ 1Q)
Module 2: Vector Calculus: Scalar and Vector point functions. Directional derivative,
Gradient, divergence and curl. Line integrals, Surface integrals, Volume integrals, Green's
theorem, Stokes theorem and Gauss divergence theorem (without proofs). (10 L/ 2Q)
Module 3: Ordinary differential equations of higher orders: Higher order linear differential
equations with constant and variable coefficients, Cauchy’s and Legendre’s linear equations.
Method of variation of parameters. Simultaneous linear equations. (6 L/ 1Q)
Module 4: Probability and Statistics: Random variables: Discrete and continuous random
variables, probability mass function, probability density function and commutative
distribution functions. Mathematical expectation, variance, moment and moment generating
function. Binomial, Poisson, Normal and Exponential distributions.
(8 L/ 1.5Q)
L
Module 5: Complex Variable - Differentiation: Differentiation, Cauchy-Riemann equations,
Analytic functions, Harmonic functions, finding harmonic conjugate;
Complex Variable - Integration: Contour integrals, Cauchy Integral Theorem, Cauchy
Integral formula(without proof) and for derivatives also, zeros of analytic functions,
singularities, Taylor’s series, Laurent’s series; Residues, Cauchy Residue theorem (without
proof). (6 L/ 1.5Q)
Note :- Question no. 1 will be objective type and compulsory comprising of the whole
CURRICULUM
FOR
FIRST YEAR
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE COURSES
IN
ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY

Ranchi, India
2020-21 Onwards
Course Code BSC 101
Course Title Physics-I

Credits
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisites Mathematics course with vector calculus, differential equations and linear
algebra; Physics course up to 10+2 level
Module 1:Harmonic Oscillation 6 Lectures

Simple harmonic motion, damped and forced simple harmonic oscillator with examples,
damped harmonic oscillator – heavy, critical and light damping, Amplitude and energy decay
in a damped harmonic oscillator. Forced oscillation and resonance condition.
Module 2: Wave optics 8 Lectures

Superposition of waves, Interference, thin film interference and Newton’s ring, Diffraction of
light, Diffraction due to single slit, double slits, Unpolarized& Polarized light, Polarization of
wave, Production of polarized wave: Brewster’s law, Malus’ law, Double refraction,
Retardation plate, Analysis of polarization.
Module 3: Vector Calculus 6 Lectures

Scalar & Vector field, Gradient of scalar field, Divergence & Curl of Vector field, Gauss’
Divergence theorem, Stokes’ theorem.
Module 4: Electrostatics 7 Lectures

Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations for electrostatic potential, Uniqueness theorem. Electric
polarization; Relation between D, E and P Electric displacement and boundary conditions;
Dielectric sphere in uniform electric field.
Module 5: Magnetostatics 7 Lectures

Biot-Savart’s law and applications, Three magnetic vector B, H and M andrelation between
them; Boundary conditions on B and H. magnetic susceptibility, diamagnetic, paramagnetic
and ferromagnetic materials. Hysteresis loop Hysteresis loss and its application.
Module 6: Maxwell’s equations & EMW 8 Lectures

Continuity equation for current densities; Ampere’s law and its modification, Differential and
integral forms of Maxwell’s equation, Maxwell’s equation in vacuum and non-conducting
medium; The wave equation; Plane electromagnetic waves in vacuum, transverse character,
relation between electric and magnetic fields of an electromagnetic wave; Energy in an
electromagnetic field and Poynting theorem.
Text Book:
● Introduction to Electrodynamics, D.J. Griffiths, 3rd Edn., 1998, Benjamin Cummings.
Reference books:
● Fundamentals of Physics Electricity and Magnetism, Halliday and Resnick, tenth
edition (published 2013).
● Electricity, magnetism and light, W. Saslow, 1st edition
● Electromagnetic Theory, Singh and Prasad, I. K. International Publication, 1/e
● Electricity, Magnetism & Electromagnetic Theory, S. Mahajan and Choudhury, 2012, Tata
McGraw
● Elements of Electromagnetics, M.N.O. Sadiku, 2010, Oxford University Press.
● Fundamentals of Optics, F.A. Jenkins and H.E. White, 1981, McGraw-Hill
● Principles of Optics, Max Born and Emil Wolf, 7th Edn., 1999, Pergamon Press.
● Optics, AjoyGhatak, 2008, Tata McGraw Hill
● Waves: Berkeley Physics Course, vol. 3, Francis Crawford, 2007, Tata McGraw-Hill.
● Engineering physics, Gaur and Gupta, DhanpatRai Publications
● Modern engineering physics, A. S. Vasudeva, S Chand & Company Ltd
COURSE OUTCOMES
Students to get familiarize with the knowledge of harmonic oscillation and wave optics.
To make student understand the basic of electrostatics and magneto statics in vacuum and in material
medium.
Students to get familiarized with the vector calculus and Maxwell’s equation leading to the
application of EMW in vacuum and in
media.……………………………………………………………………………………………………
……
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
PHYSICS LABORATORY Code: BSC101P
Course Code BSC 101P
Course Title Physics Lab

Credits
0 0 3 1.5
● Experiments on electromagnetic induction and electromagnetic breaking;

● Study of LCR circuits
● Magnetic field from Helmholtz coil
● Coupled oscillators
● Experiment on moment of inertia measurement
● Experiments with gyroscope
● Resonance phenomena in mechanical oscillators
● Frank-Hertz experiment
● Photoelectric effect experiment
● Diffraction (from ordinary light or laser pointers)
● interference experiment (from ordinary light or laser pointers)
● Minimum deviation, refractive index and dispersive power of material of a prism
● Study of variation of resistance due to heating effect
● Study of variation of magnetic field along the axis of current carrying coil.
● Use of Carey-Foster bridge
● Measurement of numerical aperture of optical fibre
Text Book:
● Text Book of Practical Physics, Dr. S. K. Ghosh, New Central Book Agency (P.) Ltd.,
2000.
Reference books:
● Laboratory Manual in Applied Physics, Hannah Sathyaseelam, New Age International
Pvt. Ltd.
● B.Sc. Practical Physics, C.L. Arora, S. Chand Publication.
● Practical optics, NattalyMenn, Elsevier Publication
LABROTARY OUTCOMES
Students to have hands on experience with experiments on the basic laws and principles of
Physics in the field of Mechanics, Optics, Electricity, Magnetism, Modern Physics, etc.
Course Code BSC 201
Course Title Physics II
3 1 0 4
Pre-requisites Mathematics course on differential equations and linear algebra;

Introduction to Modern Physics
Physics-II
Module 1: Basic Quantum Mechanics 08 Lectures
Inadequacy of Classical Mechanics, Introduction to quantum physics, black body radiation;
explanation using the photon concept; photoelectric effect: Stopping Potential, Work
Function, Einstein’s photo electric equation, Compton Effect: Compton Shift.
Module 2:Wave particle duality and bound states 10 Lectures

de Broglie hypothesis, wave-particle duality, Bragg’s Law, Davision and Germer’s
experiment; Phase velocity, group velocity and relation between phase, group and particle
velocity, uncertainty principle- mathematical Illustration, Determination of minimum energy
of harmonic oscillator, Non existence of electron within a nucleus.
Wave function and Born’s interpretation of the wave function, Schrodinger wave equation:
time dependent and independent form, eigen value and eigen function, normalization of wave
function, particle in a box- one and three dimensional box, Linear harmonic oscillator.
Module 3: Theory of relativity 08 Lectures

Frame of reference, inertial and non-inertial frames, postulates of special theory of relativity,
Galilean Transformation, Michelson Morley experiment, Lorentz transformation, length
contraction, time dilation, relativistic variation of mass, addition of velocity, mass-energy
equivalence
Module 4: Fibre Optics 08 Lectures

Introduction of optical fibre as a dielectric wave guide: total internal reflection, numerical
aperture and various fibre parameters, losses associated with optical fibres, step and graded
index fibres, application of optical fibres.

Introduction to interaction of radiation with matter, Stimulated and spontaneous emission,
Einstein’s coefficient, principles and working of laser: population inversion, pumping,
various modes, threshold population inversion, three levels and four level laser, types of
laser: Ruby laser and He- Ne laser; application of lasers.
Text book:
● Eisberg and Resnick, Introduction to Quantum PhysicsPublisher New York: Wiley.
Collection
Reference Books:
● Introduction to Quantum mechanics, Nikhil Ranjan Roy, 2016, Vikash Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd.
● Introduction to Quantum Mechanics, David J. Griffith, 2005, Pearson Education.
● Quantum Mechanics: Theory & Applications, A.K.Ghatak&S.Lokanathan, 2004,
Macmillan
● Fundamentals of Optics, F.A. Jenkins and H.E. White, 1981, McGraw-Hill
● Principles of Optics, Max Born and Emil Wolf, 7th Edn., 1999, Pergamon Press.
● Optics, Ajoy Ghatak, 2008, Tata McGraw Hill
● Introduction to Special theory of Relativity, Robert Resnick, John Wiley & Sons
● Concept of Modern Physics, Arthur Beiser,2002, McGraw-Hill
● Engineering Physics, Gaur and Gupta, DhanpatRai Publications
● Modern Engineering Physics, A. S. Vasudeva, S Chand & Company Ltd
COURSE OUTCOMES
Students to learn the basics of Quantum mechanics and its application to bound states.
To understand the wave particle duality.
To be able to understand Special theory of relativity and its consequences.
To get familiarize with fiber optics and laser, their basic concept and application in
engineering.
…….............................................................................................................................................
Prof.(Dr.) R.K.Verma Dr. S. P. Singh N.K.Sinha Dr. R. Sharma

Deptt.of Physics Deptt. of Physics H. O. D. Deptt. of Physics
B.I.T. Sindri R.V.S.C.E.T. Deptt. of Physics R.T.C.I.T. Ormanjhi
Jamshedpur C.I.T. Ranchi
2nd Year UG Courses Engg & Tech Jharkhand University of Technology

Jharkhand, Ranchi
Proposed Syllabus for B.Tech 3rd Semester
Mechanical Engineering
&
Production Engineering
3rd semester course structure
Course
Sl. No. Subject L T P Credit
Code
01 ME301 Thermodynamics 3 1 0 3
02 ME302 Fluid Mechanics 3 1 0 3
03 ME303 Strength Of Materials 3 1 0 3
04 MT301 Materials Engineering 3 1 0 3
05 BSC301 Mathematics-III 3 1 0 4
06 BSC302 Environmental Science 2 0 0 0
01 ME301P Thermodynamics Lab 0 0 3 1

02 ME302P Fluid Mechanics Lab 0 0 3 1
03 ME303P Strength Of Materials Lab 0 0 3 1
Extra Activities (NSO/NSS/NCC/Yoga / 1
04 EX301 0 0 2
Creative Arts/Mini Project)
05 HS301 Communication Skill Lab 0 0 2 1
Total credit 21
Course
Code
01 ME301 Thermodynamics 3 1 0 3
02 ME302 Fluid Mechanics 3 1 0 3
03 ME303 Strength Of Material 3 1 0 3
04 MT301 Materials Engineering 3 1 0 3
01 ME302P Fluid Mechanics Lab 0 0 3 1

02 ME303P Strength Of Material Lab 0 0 3 1
03 MT301P Materials Engineering Lab 0 0 3 1
Extra Activities
04 EX301 (NSO/NSS/NCC/Yoga / Creative 0 0 2 1
Arts/Mini Project)
Total credit 21
Mathematics III
(COMMON FOR ALL BRANCH)
Course code –BSC- 301
L T P CR.
3 1 0 4
Module I
Laplace Transformation: Laplace Transformation and its applications, Inverse
Laplace Transformation, Convolution Theorem, Solution of ODE by Laplace
Transformation.
Module II
Fourier Transform: Complex form of Fourier series, Fourier Transformation and
inverse Fourier Transformation, sine, cosine Transformation, Inverse
Transformations -simple illustration.
Module III
Z-Transform: Inverse Z-Transform- Properties – Initial and final value theorems-
convolution theorem- Difference equations, Solution of Difference equations using
Z-Transformation.
Module IV
Partial Differential Equations: Solution of Wave equation, Heat equation,
Laplace’s equation by the method of separation of variables and its applications.
Solution of PDE by Laplace Transformation.
Module V
Numerical Method: Finite difference, Symbolic relations, Interpolation and
Extrapolation, Newton – Gregory forward and backward formula, Gauss forward
and backward formula, Lagrange’s formula , Inverse Interpolation by Lagrange’s
formula , Numerical Differentiation and Numerical Integration : Trapezoidal rule ,
Simpson’s 1/3rd rule , Simpson’s 3/8th rule ,Weddle quadrature formula.
Text Books
• Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons.
• Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi,2010.
• B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 44th Edition.
Reference Books
• R. J. Beerends ,H. G. Ter Morsche ,J. C. Van Den Berg, E. M. Van De Vrie, Fourier and
Laplace Transforms, Cambridge University Press.
• Sastry S.S, Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis, PHI.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
THERMODYNAMICS
(ME , PROD)
Course code -ME 301
Objectives:
• To learn about work and heat interactions, and balance of energy between
system and its surroundings.
• To learn about application of I law of various energy conversion devices.
• To evaluate the changes in properties of substances in various processes.
• To understand the difference between high grade and low grade energies and
II law limitations on energy conversion.
Contents:
Module -I
Fundaments- system and control volume; property; state and process; Exact &
inexact differentials; Work-thermodynamic definition of work; examples;
displacement work; path dependence of displacement work and illustrations for
simple processes; electrical, magnetic, gravitational, spring and shaft work. (5hrs)
Module – II
Temperature , definition of thermal equilibrium and zeroth law; Temperature
scales; various thermometers-definition of heat; examples of heat/work interaction
in systems-first law for cycle & non-cyclic processes; concept of total energy E;
Demonstration that E is a property; Various modes of energy; internal energy and
enthalpy.(5hrs)
Module – III
Definition of pure substance, ideal gases and ideal gas mixture, real gases and real
gas mixtures, compressibility charts-Properties of tow phase system-const.
temperature and const. pressure heating of water; Definitions of standard states; P-
V-T surface; use of steam tables and R134a tables; saturation tables; superheated
tables; identification of states and determination of properties, Mollier’s
chart.(8hrs)
Module – IV
First law of flow processes-Derivation of general energy equation for a control
volume; Steady state flow processes including throttling; Examples of steady flow
devices; unsteady processes; Examples of steady and unsteady I law applications
for system and control volume. (5hrs)
Module -V
Second law- Definitions of direct and reverse heat engines; Definitions of thermal
efficiency and COP; Kelvin-plank and Clausius statements; Definition of
reversible process; internal and external irreversibility; Carnot cycle; Absolute
Temperature Scale. (5hrs)
Module-VI
Clausius inequality; Definition of energy S; Demonstration that entropy S is a
property; Evaluation of S for solids, liquids, ideal gases and ideal gas mixtures
undergoing various processes; Determination of S from steam tables-Principle of
increase of entropy; Illustration of processes in T-S co-ordinates; Definition of
Isentropic efficiency for compressors, turbines and nozzles- Irreversibility and
availability, availability function for systems and control volume undergoing
different processes, Lost work. Second law analysis for a control volume. Energy
balance equation and Energy analysis. (8hrs)
Module -VII
Thermodynamic cycles- Basic Rankine cycle; Basic Brayton cycle; Basic vapour
compression cycle and comparison with Carton cycle. (4hrs)
Course Outcomes:
1. After completing this course, the students will be able to apply energy
balance to systems and control volumes, in situations involving heat and
work interactions.
2. Students can evaluate changes in thermodynamic properties of substances.
3. The student will be able to evaluate the performance of energy conversion
devices.
4. The students will be able to differentiate between high grade and low grade
energies.
Text Books:
1. Sonntag R.E., Borgnakke C. and Van wylen G. J., 2003- 6th edition,
Fundamentals of thermodynamics, John Wiley and sons.
2. Jones, J.B. and Duggan R.E., 1996, Engineering Thermodynamics, Prentice-
Hall of India.
3. Morgan, M.J and Shapiro, H.N., 1999, Fundamentals of Engineering
Thermodynamics, John Wiley and Sons.
4. Nag P.K.,1995, Engineering Thermodynamics, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co. Ltd.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FLUID MECHANICS
Course Code-ME302
Module I
Fluids and Their Properties: Introduction of fluid, fluid classifications, hypothesis of continuum,
Shear stress in a moving fluid, molecular structure of material, fluid density, viscosity, causes of
viscosity in gases and liquids, surface tension, capillary effect, vapor pressure, cavitation,
compressibility and the bulk modulus
Module II
Pressures and Head: Types of Pressure, Pascal’s law of pressure at a point, variation of pressure
vertically in a fluid under gravity, equality of pressure at the same level in a static fluid, general
equation for the variation of pressure due to gravity from a point to point in a static fluid,
pressure and head, the hydrostatic paradox, pressure measurements using Elastic Pressure
Transducers, Force Balance Pressure gauge, Electrical Pressure Transducers
Module III
Static Forces on Surface and Buoyancy: Fluid static, action of fluid pressure on surface, resultant
force and center of pressure on a plane surface under uniform pressure, resultant force and center
of pressure on a plane surface immersed in a liquid, pressure diagrams, forces on a curved
surface due to hydrostatic pressure, buoyancy, equilibrium of floating bodies, stability of a
submerged body, stability of floating bodies, determination of the metacentric height,
etermination of the position of the metacentre relative to the center of buoyancy
Module IV
The Energy Equation and its Application: Momentum and fluid flow, Momentum equation for 2-
D and 3-D flow along a stream line, momentum correction factor, Euler’s equation of motion
along a stream line, Mechanical energy of a flowing fluid – Bernoulli’s theorem, kinetic energy
correction factor, pitot tube, determination of volumetric flow rate via pitot tube, changes of
pressure in tapering pipe, principle of venturimeter, pipe orifices, theory of small orifices
discharging to atmosphere, theory of large orifices, Rotameter, elementary theory of notches and
weirs, flow in a curved path
Module V
Dimensional Analysis And Similarities: Dimension reasoning, dimensional homogeneity,
dimensional analysis using Rayleigh’s method, Buckingham π-theorem, significance of
dimensionless, use of dimensionless numbers in experimental investigation, geometric similarity,
dynamic similarity, Kinematic similarity, model testing-Model laws, Undistorted and Distorted
models.
Module VI
Viscous Flow: Reynolds number and Reynolds experiment, flow of viscous fluid through
circular pipe- Hagen Poiseuille formula, Flow of viscous fluid between two parallel fixed plates,
power absorbed in viscous flow through - journal, foot step and collar bearing , movement of
piston in dash pot, methods of measurement of viscosity Turbulent Flow: Expression for
coefficient of friction -Darchy Weishbach Equation, Moody diagram resistance of smooth and
rough pipes shear stress and velocity distribution in turbulent flow through pipes.
Module VII
Flow through pipes: Major energy losses, Minor energy losses, Hydraulic gradient and total
energy lines, Pipes in series and parallel, Equivalent pipes, Siphon, power transmission through
pipe, Flow through nozzle at end of pipe, Water hammer in pipes
Compressible Flow: Basic equations for one dimensional compression, Pressure wave
propagation, sound velocity in fluid, Mach number, Stagnation properties
Reference Books:
1. Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Power Engineering by D.S. Kumar, S.K.Kataria & Sons
2. Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines by R.K. Bansal, Laxmi Publications
3. Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines by R.K. Rajput, S.Chand & Co.
4. Fluid Mechanics by Frank .M. White, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.
5. Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics by Munson, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd
6. Fluid Mechanics by A. K. Mohanty, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
7. Laboratory Manual Hydraulics and Hydraulic Machines by R V Raikar
Course Outcome: After learning the course the students should be able to: Understand the basic
concept of fluid mechanics.
• Understand statics, dynamics and various approaches to fluid mechanics.
• Understand fundamentals of flow through pipes
• Understand basics of compressible flow
• Correlate fundamentals of fluid mechanics with various mechanical systems
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
(ME , PROD,CE)
Course code -ME 303
Objectives:
• To understand the nature of stresses developed in simple geometries such as
bars, cantilevers, beams,shafts cylinders and spheres for various types of
simple loads.
• To calculate the elastic deformation occurring in various simple geometries
for different types of loading.
Contents:
Module-1
Deformation in solids-Hooks law, stress and strain-tension, compression and shear
stresses –elastic constants and their relations-volumetric, linear and shear strains-
principal stresses and principal planes-mohr’s circle(8hrs)
Module-II
Beams and types transverse loading on beams-shear force and bending moment
diagrams-Types of beam supports, simply supported and over hanging beams,
cantilevers. Theory of bending of beam, bending stresses distribution and neutral
axis, shear stress distribution, point and distributed loads.(8hrs)
Module-III
Moment of inertia about the axis and polar moment of inertia, deflection of beam
using double integration method, computation of slopes and deflection in beams,
Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem.(8hrs)
Module-IV
Torsion, stresses and deformation in circular and hollow shafts,stepped shafts,
deflection of shafts fixed at both ends, stresses and deflection of helical
spring.(8hrs)
Module -V
Axial and hoop stresses in cylinders subjected to internal pressure, deformation of
thick and thin cylinders, deformation in spherical shells subjected to internal
pressure.(8hrs)
Course Outcomes:
• After completing this course, the students should able to recoginize various
type of load applied on machine components of simple geometry and
understand the nature of internal stresses that will develop within the
components.
• The students will be able to evaluate the strains and deformation that will
results due to the elastic stresses develop within the material for simple type
of loading.
Test Books:
1. Egor P. Popov,Engineering Mechanics of solids,Prentice Hall of india,New
Delhi,2001.
2. R.Subramanian, Strength of Materials,Oxford University Press,2007.
Ferdinand P.Been, Russel Johnson Jr and Jhon J.Dewole, Mechanism of

materials, Tata McGrawHill Publication Co. Ltd., New Delhi 2005.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATERIAL ENGINEERING
(ME , PROD)
Course code -MT 301
Course Objectives:
To increasing demand of the available materials, coupled with new applications
and requirements has brought about many changes in the style of their uses.
To develop the basic knowledge of metals, polymers composites and ceramics
other than conventional metals and alloys to apply them to advance engineering
applications.
Module - I
Introduction – Crystalline and Non crystalline solids, Classification of Engineering
materials and their selections, Bonding in solids: Ionic, Covalent and Metallic
bonding. (5hrs)
Module – II
Crystal Structure- Space lattices, Bravais lattices, Crystal system, Unit Cell,
Metallic crystal structures : SC, BCC, FCC, HCP structures, Miller notations of
planes and directions, Imperfections in crystal: Point defects, Line surface defects.
Dislocations: Edge and Screw dislocation, Burgers vectors. (12 hrs)
Module – III
Metallic Materials – Metals and alloys, ferrous materials- introduction to Iron
carbon Diagram, steel and their Heat treatment , Properties and applications.
Different types of heat treatment processes. Non-ferrous alloys:- Copper based
alloys. Al based alloys, other important non ferrous alloys, properties and
applications. (10hrs)
Module – IV
Polymers- Basic concepts of Polymers Science, polymer classifications.
Crystallinity of polymers, Copolymers, Thermoplastic and Thermosetting
polymers, Elastomers, Properties and Applications. (5hrs)
Module – V
Ceramics- Basic concepts of ceramics science, traditional and new ceramics. Oxide
and Non-Oxide ceramics, Ceramics for high temperature applications. Glass,
applications of ceramics, and glass. (5hrs)
Module -VI
Composite materials- Definition, general characteristics. Particles reinforced and
fiber reinforced composite materials, MMC, CMC, PMC, properties and
applications. (5hrs)
Text Books:
1. Elements of Material Science by Van Vlack
2. Material Science by O.P. Khanna
3. Material Science and Engineering by V. Raghavan
4. Material Science by R. K.Sharma and R.S. Sedha
Reference Books:
1. Material Science and Engineering by Wiliam D. Callister
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, the students would be able to :
➢ Select different materials other than conventional metals and alloys for
specific engineering applications.
➢ To solve the materials problems associated with the weight reduction
through the appropriate choice of metals, polymers, ceramics and
composites.
➢ Selection criterion for polymers and composites for various
engineering applications.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
Course code –BSC 302
L T P CR.
2 0 0 0
Module-1
Concept and scope of Environment science, components of environment,
environmental segment and their importance. (2 Hrs)
Module-II
Ecology: Ecosystem and its characteristics features, structure and function of forest
ecosystem, grassland ecosystem, desert ecosystem and aquatic ecosystem,
ecological balance and consequences of imbalance. (4 Hrs)
Module-III
Atmosphere: Atmospheric composition, energy balance, climate, weather,
depletion of ozone layer, green house effect, acid rain, particles, ions and radicals
in the atmosphere, chemical and photochemical reactions in the atmosphere.
Module-IV
(4 Hrs)
Air pollution and control: Air pollutants, sources and effect of air pollutants,
primary and secondary pollutants, photochemical smog, fly ash, inorganic and
organic particulate matter. Air quality standards, sampling, monitoring and control
measures for pollutants. (4 Hrs)
Module-V
Water pollution and control: Aquatic environment, water pollution, sources and
their effect, lake and ground water pollution, eutrophication, water quality standard
and water pollution control measures, waste water treatment.
Module-VI (4
Hrs)
Land pollution; Lithosphere, composition of soil, acid base and ion exchange
reactions in soil, soil erosion, landslides, desertification, pollutants (municipal,
industrial, commercial, agricultural , hazardous solid wastes), origin and effects,
collection and disposal of solid wastes, recovery and conversion methods.
(5 Hrs)
Module-VII
Noise pollution; Noise classification and its sources, effects and measurement,
noise pollution hazards, standards and noise pollution control. (2 Hrs)
Books and References:
1. Master, G.M Introduction to environment engineering and science, Pearson Education.

2. Nebel, B.J., Environment science, Prentice Hall Inc.
3. Odum, E.P. Ecology: The link between the natural and social sciences. IBH Publishing
Company Delhi
4. De, A.K. Environmental Chemistry, Merrut.
5. Sharma B.K Envrionmental Chemistry, Krishna Prakashan Media Merrut.
6. Kaushik, A and Kaushik, C.P. Perspectives in Environmental studies, New Age
International Publication.
7. Menon, S.E. Environmental Chemistry.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MATERIALS ENGINEERING LAB

MT301P
List of experiments
1. To study the Metallurgical Microscope.
2. To study the lattice structure of various types of unit cells, observe the mille indices for
various planes & directions in unit cells.
3. To study the microstructure of cast iron, cold work forged, rolled condition.
4. To study the microstructure of mild steel.
5. To study the microstructure of brass solder underancaed.
6. To verify Hall effect.
7. To verify the fracture, characteristics of ductile & brittle materials.
8. To determine the chemical composition of a few common alloys.
9. To determine the percentage of carbon & sulphur contents in a alloy with Fe as main
constituent.
10. Estimation of percentage carbon composition of mild steel.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FLUID MECHANICS LAB

Course Code-ME302P
1. To determine the coefficient of impact for vanes.
2. To determine coefficient of discharge of an orifice meter.
3. To determine the coefficient of discharge of Notch (V and Rectangular types).
4. To determine the friction factor for the pipes.
5. To determine the coefficient of discharge of venturi meter.
6. To determine the coefficient of discharge, contraction & velocity of an orifice.
7. To verify the Bernoulli’s Theorem.
8. To find critical Reynolds number for a pipe flow.
9. To determine the meta-centric height of a floating body.
10. To determine the minor losses due to sudden enlargement, sudden contraction and bends.
11. To show the velocity and pressure variation with radius in a forced vertex flow.
12.Verification of momentum theory by impact of Jet
13 .To study the performance characteristics of a Pelton Turbine
14.Determine the operating characteristic of a reaction turbine
15. Determine the operating characteristic of a reciprocating pump
16.Verification of momentum theory by impact of Jet
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Strength of Material Lab

ME303P
Name of the Experiment

1.Tensile test: To prepare the tensile test upon the given specimen (Mild Steel)
2.Compression test: To determine the compressive strength of the given specimen
3.Torsion test: To perform the Torsion test on the given specimen.
4.Impact test: To determine the Impact toughness of the given material
5.Brinell hardness test: To determine the hardness of the given specimen
6.Vicker,s Hardness test : To determine the hardness of the given specimen
7.Rockwell Hardness test: To determine the hardness of the given specimen.
8.To determine the shear strength of a mild steel specimen by Double Shear Test
9.To determine the modulus of rigidity of a solid circular rod by conducting Torsion Test.
10.To obtain tensile strength, modulus of elasticity, percentage elongation and percentage
reduction in area. of cross-section.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COMMUNICATION SKILL LAB

Course code HS301
This lab paper involves interactive practice sessions in Language Lab along with some class
lectures to enable the students to be confident enough in language and professional sphere
of life.
Module I: Listening Comprehension
To comprehend spoken material in standard Indian English/ British English & American English
➢ Current situation in India regarding English
➢ American English Vs. British English
Module II: Phonetics & Phonology

➢ Introduction to Phonetics & Phonology
➢ Organs of Speech/ Speech Mechanism
➢ Pronunciation, Intonation, Stress and Rhythm, Syllable division
➢ Consonants/Vowels/Diphthongs Classification
Module III: Common Everyday Situations: Conversations and Dialogues

Module IV: Communication at Workplace
Module V: Telephonic Conversation
➢ Introduction
➢ Listening/Speaking
➢ Telephonic Skills Required
➢ Problems of Telephonic Conversation
➢ Intensive Listening
Module VI: Interviews

➢ The Interview Process
➢ Purpose/Planning/Two-way Interaction/Informality
➢ Pre-interview Preparation Techniques
➢ Projecting a Positive Image
➢ Answering strategies
Module VII: Formal Presentations

➢ Introduction
➢ Nature/Importance of Presentation
➢ Planning
➢ Objective with central idea, main ideas, role of supporting materials
➢ Handling Stage Fright
Module VIII: Forms of Technical Communication: Technical Report: Definition &

importance; Thesis/Project writing: structure & importance; synopsis writing: Methods;
Technical research Paper writing: Methods & style; Seminar & Conference paper
writing; Expert Technical Lecture: Theme clarity; Analysis & Findings; C.V./Resume
writing; Technical Proposal: Types, Structure & Draft.
Module IX: Technical Presentation: Strategies & Techniques Presentation: Forms;
interpersonal Communication; Class room presentation; style; method; Individual
conferencing: essentials: Public Speaking: method; Techniques: Clarity of substance;
emotion; Humour; Modes of Presentation; Overcoming Stage Fear; Audience Analysis &
retention of audience interest; Methods of Presentation: Interpersonal; Impersonal;
Audience Participation: Quizzes & Interjections.
Module X: Technical Communication Skills: Interview skills; Group Discussion:
Objective & Method; Seminar/Conferences Presentation skills: Focus; Content; Style;
Argumentation skills: Devices: Analysis; Cohesion & Emphasis; Critical thinking;
Nuances: Exposition narration & Description; effective business communication
competence: Grammatical; Discourse competence: combination of expression &
conclusion; Socio-linguistic competence: Strategic competence: Solution of
communication problems with verbal and non verbal means.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Jharkhand, Ranchi
Proposed Syllabus for B.Tech 4th Semester
&
4th semester course structure
Credit
Sl. Course
Subject L T P s
No. code.
01 ME401 Theory Of Machines 3 1 0 3

02 ME402 Fluid Machines 3 1 0 3
03 ME403 Applied Thermodynamics 3 1 0 3
04 PE401 Manufacturing Process-I 3 1 0 3
05 EC404 Electronics & Instrumentation Engg. 3 1 0 3
EN401/ Engineering Economics / Cyber
06 2 0 0 0
IT402 Security
01 ME401P Theory Of Machines Lab 0 0 3 1

02 ME403P Applied Thermodynamics Lab 0 0 3 1
03 PE401P Manufacturing Process-I Lab 0 0 3 1
EX401 Extra Activities (NSO/NSS/NCC/Yoga/
04 0 0 2 1
IN401 Internship/ Tour & Training/Industrial
05 0 0 0 2
Training
Total credits 21
Sl. Course Subject
L T P Credit
No. code.
01 PE401 Manufacturing Process-I 3 1 0 3
Industrial Management & Plant
02 PE402 3 1 0 3
Engineering
03 PE403 Heat Transfer 3 1 0 3
04 ME401 Theory Of Machines 3 1 0 3
06 2 0 0 0
IT402 Security
01 PE401P Manufacturing Process – I Lab 0 0 3 1

02 ME401P Theory Of Machines Lab 0 0 3 1
03 EC404P Instrumentation Lab 0 0 3 1
EX401 Extra Activities (NSO/NSS/NCC/Yoga
04 0 0 2 1
/ Creative Arts/Mini Project)
05 0 0 0 2
Training
Total credit 21
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
THEORY OF MACHINE
(ME , PROD)
Course code -ME 402
Objective:
• To understand the kinematics and rigid-body dynamics of kinematically
driven machine components
• To understand the motion of linked mechanism in terms of the displacement,
velocity and acceleration at any point in a rigid link
• To understand the kinematics of gear trains
Contents:
Module -1
Classification of mechanisms- Basic kinematic concepts and definition – Degree of
freedom, mobility-Grashof ‘s law , Kinematic inversions of four bar chain and
slider crank chains-Limit proportions-Mechanical advantage-Transmission angle –
Description of some common mechanisms-Quick return mechanism, Straight line
generators-Universal Joint- Rocker mechanism(8hrs)
Module-II
Displacement, velocity and acceleration analysis of simple mechanisms, graphical
velocity analysis using instantaneous centers, velocity and acceleration analysis
using loop closure equation-kinematics analysis of simple mechanisms-slider crank
mechanism dynamics-Coincident points- Coriolis component of acceleration –
introduction to linkage synthesis-three position graphical synthesis for motion and
path generation(8hrs)
Module-III
Classification of cams and followers –Terminology and definitions –Displacement
diagrams –Uniform velocity, parabolic, simple harmonic and cycloidal motions-
derivatives of follower motion-specified counter cams-circular and tangents cams –
pressure angle and undercutting, sizing of cams, graphical and analytical disc cam
profile synthesis for roller and flat face followers(8hrs)
Module – IV
Involute and cycloidal gear profiles, gear parameters, fundamental law of gearing
and conjugate action, spur gear contact ratio and interference/undercutting –helical,
bevel, worm, rack & pinion gears, epicyclic and regular gear train
kinematics(8hrs)
Module – V
Surface contacts-sliding and rolling friction- friction drives- bearings and
lubrication-friction clutches-belt and rope drives-friction in brakes(8hrs)
Course outcomes:
• After completing this course, the students can design various types of
linkage mechanism for obtaining specific motion and analyze them for
optimal functioning.
Text Book:
1.Thomas Bevan,Theory of machines,3rd edition, CBS Publishers
&Distributors,2005.
2.Cleghorn W.L.,Mechanisms of Machines,Oxford University Press,2005.
3.Robert L. Norton, Kinematics and Dynamics of machinery,Tata
McGrawHill,2009.
4.Ghosh A. And Mallick A.K, Theory of Mechanism and Machines, Affiliated
East-West Pvt.Ltd,New Delhi,1988.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS
Course Code-ME 402
Objectives:
1) To learn about of 1st law for reacting systems and heating value of fuels.
2) To learn about gas and vapor cycles and their first law and second law efficiencies.
3) To understand about the properties of dry and wet air and the principles of psychometry.
4) To learn about gas dynamics of air flow and steam through nozzles.
5) To learn the about reciprocating compressors with and without intercooling
6) To analyze the performance of steam turbines.
Module-1
Introduction to solid, liquid and gaseous fuels- Stoichiometry, exhaust gas analysis- First law
analysis of combustion reactions- Heat calculations using enthalpy tables- Adiabatic flame
temperature- Chemical equilibrium and equilibrium composition calculations using free energy.
(8Hrs)
Module -II
Vapor power cycles Rankine cycle with superheat, reheat and regeneration, energy analysis
Super- critical and ultra super-critical Rankine cycle- Gas power cycles, Air standard Otto,
Diesel and Dual cycles- Air standard Brayton cycle, effect of reheat, regeneration and
intercooling – Combined gas and vapor power cycles- vapor compression refrigeration cycles,
refrigerants and their properties(12hrs)
Module-III
properties of dry and wet air, use of pschyrometric chart, processes involving heating/cooling
and humidification/ dehumidification, dew point(4hrs)
Module-IV
Basics of compressible flow. Stagnation properties, Isentropic flow of a perfect gas through a
nozzle, chocked flow, subsonic and supersonic flows- normal shocks-use of ideal gas tables for
isentropic flow and normal shock flow- Flow of steam and refrigerant through nozzle, super
saturation-compressible flow in diffusers, efficiency of nozzle and diffuser. (8hrs)
Module-V
Reciprocating compressors, staging of reciprocating compressors, optimal stage pressure ratio,
effect of intercooling, minimum work for multistage reciprocating compressors. (5hrs)
Module-VI
Analysis of steam turbines, velocity and pressure compounding of steam turbine. (3hrs)
Outcomes:
1. After completing this course the students will get a good understanding of various
practical power cycles and heat pump cycles.
2. They will be able to analyze energy conversion in various thermal devices such as
combustors, air coolers, nozzles, diffusers, steam turbines and reciprocating compressors.
3. They will be able to understand phenomena occurring in high speed compressible flows.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MANUFACTURING PROCESSES I
Course Code-PE 401
Objectives:
To motivate and challenge students to understand and develop an appreciation of the processes
in correlation with material properties which change the shape, size and form of the raw
materials into the desirable product by conventional or unconventional manufacturing methods.
Module-I
Conventional Manufacturing Processes:
Casting and moulding: Metal casting processes and equipment, Heat transfer and solidification,
shrinkage, riser design, casting defects and residual stresses. (5hrs)
Module-II
Introduction to bulk and sheet metal forming, plastic deformation and yield criteria;
fundamentals of hot and cold working processes; load estimation for bulk forming (forging,
rolling, extrusion, drawing) and sheet forming (shearing, deep drawing, bending) principles of
powder metallurgy.
Metal Cutting: Single and multi-point cutting; Orthogonal cutting, various force components:
Chip formation, Tool wear and tool life. Surface finish and integrity, Machinability, Cutting tool
materials, cutting fluids coating; Turning, Drilling, Milling and finishing processes, Introduction
to CNC machining (8hrs)
Module-III
Additive manufacturing: Rapid prototyping and rapid tooling (3hrs)
Module-IV
Joining/ fastening processes: Physics of welding, brazing and soldering; design considerations in
welding. Solid and liquid state joining processes; Adhesive bonding (3hrs)
Module-V
Unconventional Machining Processes:
Abrasive Jet Machining, Water Jet Machining Abrasive Water Jet Machining, Ultrasonic
Machining principles and process parameters (5hrs)
Module-VI
Electrical Discharge Machining principle and processes parameters, MRR, surface finish tool
wear, dielectric, power and control circuits, wire EDM; Electro-chemical machining (ECM),
etchant & maskant, process parameters, MRR and surface finish.(8hrs)
Module-VII
Laser Beam Machining (LBM), Plasma Arc Machining (PAM) and Electron Beam Machining
(3hrs)

1. Kalpakjian and Schmid, Manufacturing processes for engineering materials (5th Edition)-
Pearson India, 2014.
2. Mikell P. Groover, Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing: Materials, Processes, and
Systems.
3. Manufacturing Technology by P.N. Rao., MCGRAW HILL INDIA.
4. Materials and Manufacturing by Paul Degarmo.
5. Manufacturing Processes by Kaushish, PHI.
6. Principles of Foundry Technology, Jain, MCGRAW HILL INDIA
7. Production Technology by RK Jain.
8. Degarmo, Black &Kohser, Materials and Processes in Manufacturing.
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to understand the different conventional
and unconventional manufacturing methods employed for making different products Objectives:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
Course code – EC404
(For Civil , Mech. and Production Engineering).
Module 1: Basic Electronic Components

Active and Passive Components, Types of resistors and Colour coding, Capacitors, Inductors
applications of Resistor, Capacitor and Inductor, Relay, LDR, Basic Integrated Circuits ( IC
7805, 7809, 7812, 555 etc.).Measuring Instruments like CRO, Power supply, Multi-meters etc.
Module II: Semiconductors, Diode and Transistors:

Difference between Insulators, Semiconductors and Conductors, Mobility and Conductivity,
Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors, Fermi Level, Energy band, P-N Junction Diode,
construction, working, characteristics and diode equation Application of Diode, Rectifier: Half
Wave, Full Wave and Bridge Rectifier, Zener Diode and its Applications, Varactor Diode,
Schottky Diode, Regulated Power Supply using Zener Diode and Regulated ICs, LED,
Photodetector, Construction, Working, Modes and Configuration of BJT, Input and Output
Characteristics of all Configurations, Comparison of all Configuration & Modes, BJT as a
Switch and as an Amplifier. JFET Construction, working and characteristics. MOSFET
Construction, working and Characteristics, Types of MOSFET,.
ModuleIII: Digital Electronics Fundamentals:

Difference between analog and digital signals, Boolean algebra, Basic and Universal Gates,
Symbols, Truth tables, logic expressions, Logic simplification using K- map, Logic ICs, half and
full adder/subtractor, multiplexers, demultiplexers, flip-flops, shift registers, counters, Block
diagram of microprocessor/microcontroller and their applications.
ModuleIV: Electronic Instruments:

Measurement of Temperature, RTD, Thermistors, LVDT, Strain Gauge, Piezoelectric
Transducers, Digital Shaft Encoders, Tachometer, Hall effect sensors. Sensors and Transducers
for physical parameters: temperature, pressure, torque, flow. Speed and Position Sensors.
Electronic Display Device, Digital Voltmeters, Digital Energy meter, CRO, measurement of
voltage and frequency, Lissajous Patterns, Plotting B-H curve of a magnetic material, Wave
Analyzers, Harmonic Distortion Analyzer. Digital Energy Meter. Measurements of R, L and
C.Digital Multi-meter, True RMS meters, Clamp-on meters, Meggers.Digital Storage
Oscilloscope.
ModuleV: Electronic Communication Systems:

The elements of communication system, IEEE frequency spectrum and Transmission media:
wired and wireless, need of modulation, AM and FM modulation schemes, Mobile
communication systems: cellular concept and block diagram of GSM system, Ultrasonic wave &
its application in distance measurement.
Text Books
1. Basic Electronics and Linear Circuits by N. N. Bhargava, D. C. Kulshreshtha and S. C. Gupta,
TMH Publications.
2. Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits by Ramakant A. Gayakwad, PHI Publications.
3. Electronic Devices and Circuits by Godse and Bakshi Technical, Vol-1 Technical Publication
Pune.
4. Floyd ,” Electronic Devices” Pearson Education 9th edition, 2012.
5. R.P. Jain , “Modern Digital Electronics”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2007.
6. Frenzel, “Communication Electronics: Principles and Applications”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 3rd
Edition, 2001
Reference Books
1. Integrated Devices & Circuits by Millman & Halkias, TMH Publications.
2. Electronics Devices and Circuit Theory by R. Boylestad & L. Nashelsky, Pearson Publication
3. Electronic Communication System by G. Kennedy, TMH Publications.
4. Basic Electronics by Sanjeev Kumar & Vandana Sachdeva, Paragaon International Publication
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HEAT TRANSFER
Course code – PE403
Module I
Fundamental: Modes of heat transfer, effect of temperature on thermal conductivity of different
solids, liquids and gases, derivation of generalized equation in Cartesian, cylindrical and
spherical coordinates and its reduction to specific cases, General laws of heat transfer
Module II
Conduction: Fourier’s law, One dimensional steady state conduction, heat conduction through
plane and composite walls, cylinders and spheres, electrical analogy, critical radius of insulation
for cylinder and sphere, overall heat transfer coefficient.
Transient heat conduction- lumped heat capacity analysis, time constant, transient heat
conduction in solids with finite conduction and convective resistances Heat transfer from
extended surface: Types of fin, heat flow through rectangular fin, infinitely long fin, fin insulated
at the tip and fin losing heat at the tip, efficiency and effectiveness of fin, Biot number,
Estimation of error in temperature measurement in a thermometer well
Module III
Convection: Newton’s law of cooling, Dimensional analysis applied to forced and free
convection, dimensionless numbers and their physical significance, empirical correlations for
free and forced convection Continuity, momentum and energy equations, thermal and
hydrodynamic boundary layer, Blasius solution for laminar boundary layer, General solution of
Von-Karman integral momentum equation
Module IV
Radiation: Absorptivity, reflectivity and transmissivity, black, white and grey body, emissive
power and emissivity, laws of radiation – Planck, Stefan-Boltzmann, Wein’s displacement,
Kirchhoff’s law, intensity of radiation and solid angle, Lambert’s cosine law Radiation heat
exchange between black bodies, shape factor, heat exchange between non-black bodies- infinite
parallel planes and infinite long concentric cylinders, radiation shield, heat exchange between
two grey surfaces, electrical analogy
Module V
Heat exchanger: Classification, heat exchanger analysis, LMTD for parallel and counter flow
exchanger, condenser and evaporator, overall heat transfer coefficient, fouling factor, correction
factors for multi pass arrangement, effectiveness and number of transfer unit for parallel and
counter flow heat exchanger, introduction of heat pipe and compact heat exchanger Two-phase
heat transfer: Boiling of liquids, Pool boiling curve, different types of pool boiling, condensation
of vapor. Film wise & drop wise condensation.
Reference Books:
1. Heat & Mass Transfer by P.K. Nag, McGraw Hill
2. Heat and Mass Transfer: Fundamentals and Application by Yunus Cengel, McGraw Hill
3. Fundamental of Heat and Mass Transfer by Incropera and Dewitt, Wiley Publication
4. Heat Transfer by Mills and Ganesan, Pearson Education
5. Heat Transfer by J P Holman , McGraw Hill
6. Heat and Mass Transfer by R K Rajput, S.Chand Publication
7. Heat Transfer: Principles and Applications by Dutta, Binay K, PHI Publication
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT & PLANT ENGINEERING

Course code – PE402
Module I
Introduction: Concept and scope of Industrial Management. Productivity: Definition,
measurement, productivity index, types of production system, Industrial Ownership.
Module II
Functions of Management, Taylor’s Scientific Management Theory, Fayol’s Principles of
Management, Social responsibilities of Management, Introduction to Human resources
management: Nature of HRM, functions and importance of HRM.
Module III
Work Study: Introduction, definition, objectives, steps in work study, Method study: definition,
objectives, steps of method study, Work Measurement: purpose, types of study — stop watch
methods — steps — allowances — standard time calculations — work sampling, Production
Planning and Control Inventory Control: Inventory, Cost, Models of inventory control: EOQ,
ABC, VED
Module IV
Quality Control: statistical quality control, Control charts for variables and attributes,
Acceptance Sampling- Single sampling- Double sampling plans, Introduction to TQM.
Module V
Project Management: Project network analysis, CPM, PERT and Project crashing and resource
Leveling
References:
1. Engineering Management (Industrial Engineering & Management)/ S.C. Sharma & T.R.
Banga, Khanna Book Publishing Co. (P) Ltd., Delhi (ISBN: 978-93-86173-072)
2. Industrial Engineering and Management/ P. Khanna, Dhanpatrai publications Ltd.
3. Production & Operation Management /PaneerSelvam /PHI.
4. Industrial Engineering Management/NVS Raju/Cengage Learning.
5. Industrial Engineering Management I RaviShankar/ Galgotia.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CYBER SECURITY
Course code –IT 402
Module I: Introduction to Cybercrime : Introduction, Cybercrime, and Information Security,

Who are Cybercriminals, Classifications of Cybercrimes, and Cybercrime: The legal
Perspectives and Indian Perspective, Cybercrime and the Indian ITA 2000, A Global Perspective
on Cybercrimes.
Module II: Cyber Offenses: How Criminals Plan Them: Introduction, How Criminals plan
the Attacks, Social Engineering, Cyber stalking, Cyber cafe and Cybercrimes, Botnets: The
Fuel for Cybercrime, Attack Vector, Cloud Computing.
Module III: Cybercrime : Mobile and Wireless Devices: Introduction, Proliferation of Mobile
and Wireless Devices, Trends in Mobility, Credit card Frauds in Mobile and Wireless
Computing Era, Security Challenges Posed by Mobile Devices, Registry Settings for Mobile
Devices, Authentication service Security, Attacks on Mobile/Cell Phones, Mobile Devices:
Security Implications for Organizations, Organizational Measures for Handling
Mobile, Organizational Security Policies an Measures in Mobile Computing Era, Laptops.
Module – IV: Tools and Methods Used in Cybercrime : Introduction, Proxy Servers and
Anonymizers, Phishing, Password Cracking, Keyloggers and Spywares, Virus and Worms,
Trojan Horse and Backdoors, Steganography, DoS and DDoS attacks, SQL Injection, Buffer
Overflow.
Module V: Cyber Security : Organizational Implications Introduction, Cost of Cybercrimes

and IPR issues, Web threats for Organizations, Security and Privacy Implications, Social media
marketing: Security Risks and Perils for Organizations, Social Computing and the associated
challenges for Organizations.
TEXT BOOK:
• Cyber Security: Understanding Cyber Crimes, Computer Forensics and

Legal Perspectives, Nina Godbole and Sunil Belapure, Wiley INDIA.
REFERENCE BOOK:
• Cyber Security Essentials, James Graham, Richard Howard and Ryan Otson, CRC Press.
• Introduction to Cyber Security , Chwan-Hwa(john) Wu,J.David Irwin.CRC Press T&F
Group
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ENGINEERING ECONOMICS
Course code –EN 401
COURSE OUTLINE:
The basic purpose of this course is to provide a sound understanding of concepts and principles
of engineering economy and to develop proficiency with methods for making rational decisions
regarding problems likely to be encountered in professional practice.
Module -1
Introduction of Engineering Economics and Demand Analysis: Meaning and nature of

Economics, Relation between science, engineering, technology and economics; Nature of
Economic problem, Production possibility curve, Concepts and measurement of utility, Law of
Diminishing Marginal Utility, Law of equi-marginal utility – its practical application and
importance.
Meaning of Demand, Individual and Market demand schedule, Law of demand, shape of demand
curve, Elasticity of demand, measurement of elasticity of demand, practical importance &
applications of the concept of elasticity of demand.
Module -II
Meaning of production and factors of production; Law of variable proportions, Returns to scale,
Internal and External economics and diseconomies of scale.
Various concepts of cost – Fixed cost, variable cost, average cost, marginal cost, money cost,
real cost, opportunity cost. Shape of average cost, marginal cost, total cost, Cost curves.
Module III
Meaning of Market, Types of Market – Perfect Competition, Monopoly,

Oligopoly, Monopolistic Competition (Main features of these markets)
Pricing Policies- Entry Deterring policies, Predatory Pricing, Peak load Pricing. Product Life
cycle
Firm as an organisation- Objective of the Firm, Type of the Firm, Vertical and Horizontal
Integration, Diversification, Mergers and Takeovers.
Module -IV
Nature and characteristics of Indian economy (brief and elementary introduction), Privatization –
meaning, merits and demerits. Globalisation of Indian economy – merits and demerits.
Elementary Concepts of VAT, WTO, GATT & TRIPS agreement, Business cycle, Inflation
RECOMMENDED BOOKS:-
1. R.Paneer Seelvan: Engineering Economics, PHI
2. Managerial Economics, D.N.Dwivedi, Vikash Publication

3. Managerial Economics, H.L. Ahuja, S. Chand and Co. Ltd.
4. Managerial Economics, Suma Damodaran, Oxford.
5. R.molrishnd Ro T.V S 'Theory of firms : Economics and Managerial Aspects'. Affiliated
East West Press Pvt Ltd New Delhi
6. Managerial Economics, H. Craig Petersen &W. Cris Lewis, Pearson Education.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS LAB
Course Code-ME 402P
List of Experiments: (At least 8 of the following)
1. Study of Fire Tube boiler.

2. Study of Water Tube boiler.
3. Study and working of Two stroke petrol Engine.
4. Study and working of Four stroke petrol Engine.
5. Determination of Indicated H.P. of I.C. Engine by Morse Test.
6. Prepare the heat balance sheet for Diesel Engine test rig.
7. Prepare the heat balance sheet for Petrol Engine test rig.
8. Study and working of two stroke Diesel Engine.
9. Study and working of four stroke Diesel Engine.
10. Study of Velocity compounded steam turbine.
11. Study of Pressure compounded steam turbine.
12. Study of Impulse & Reaction turbine.
13. Study of steam Engine model.
14. Study of Gas Turbine Model.
S. No. Name of the Experiment

1 To study the construction and operation of a Cochran boiler
2 To study the construction and operation of a Babcock boiler
3 To study the construction and operation of a Lancashire boiler
4 To study the construction and operation of a vertical water tube boiler
5 To study about 2-Stroke petrol Engine
6 To study about 4-Stroke petrol Engine
7 To study about CI Engine(Diesel Engine)
8 Study of simple and compound Steam Engine
9 To determine the volumetric and isothermal efficiency
10 To determine the static efficiency and total efficiency
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
THEORY OF MACHINE LAB

ME402P
Name of the Experiment
1. To draw velocity diagram of four bar mechanism

2.To draw velocity diagram of slider crank mechanism.
3.To draw acceleration diagram of four bar mechanism
4.To draw acceleration diagram of slider crank mechanism
5.To study Different types of Cam profile
6.To draw displacement diagram, velocity diagram & acceleration diagram of cam follower
7.To draw a cam profile
8.To study Different types of Gears
9.To draw Involute gear profile.
10.To draw Cycloidal gear profile
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MANUFACTURING PROCESS LAB
Course Code-PE401P
List of Experiments: (At least 8 of the following along-with study of the machines/processes)
1. Shear-angle determination (using formula) with tube cutting (for orthogonal) on lathe machine.
2. Bolt (thread) making on Lathe machine.
3. Tool grinding (to provide tool angles) on tool-grinder machine.
4. Gear cutting on Milling machine.
5. Machining a block on shaper machine.
6. Finishing of a surface on surface-grinding machine.
7. Drilling holes on drilling machine and study of twist-drill
8. Study of different types of tools and its angles & materials.
9. Experiment on tool wear and tool life.
10. Experiment on jigs/Fixtures and its uses.
11. Gas welding experiment.
12. Arc welding experiment.
13. Resistance welding experiment.
14. Soldering & Brazing experiment.
15. Study and understanding of limits, fits & tolerances.
16. Study of temperature measuring equipment’s.
17. Measurement using Strain gauge.
18. Experiment on dynamometers.
19. To study the displacement using LVDT.
Course Outcomes: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to understand the different
conventional and unconventional manufacturing methods employed for making different products.
2nd year UG Engg & Tech. Jharkhand University Of Technology

Jharkhand, Ranchi
Electrical Engineering
&
Electrical and Electronics Engineering

Course
Code
01 EE301 Electrical Machine-I 3 1 0 3
02 EE302 Network Theory 3 1 0 3
03 EE303 Electromagnetic Field Theory 3 1 0 3
04 EC301 Basic Electronics 3 1 0 3
01 EE301P Electrical Machine-I Lab 0 0 3 1

02 EE302P Network Theory Lab 0 0 3 1
03 EC301P Basic Electronics Lab 0 0 3 1
Extra Activities (NSO/NSS/NCC/Yoga
04 EX301 0 0 2 1
Total credit 21

Course
Code
01 EE301 Electrical Machine-I 3 1 0 3

02 EE301P Electrical Machine-I Lab 0 0 3 1
04 EX301 0 0 2 1
Total credit 21
MATHEMATICS III

L T P CR.
3 1 0 4
Module I
Laplace Transformation: Laplace Transformation and its applications, Inverse Laplace

Transformation, Convolution Theorem, Solution of ODE by Laplace Transformation.
Module II
Fourier Transform: Complex form of Fourier series, Fourier Transformation and inverse
Fourier Transformation, sine,cosine Transformation, Inverse Transformations -simple
illustration.
Module III
Z-Transform: Inverse Z-Transform- Properties – Initial and final value theorems- convolution
theorem- Difference equations, Solution of Difference equations using Z-Transformation.
Module IV
Partial Differential Equations: Solution of Wave equation, Heat equation, Laplace’s equation
by the method of separation of variables and its applications. Solution of PDE by Laplace
Transformation.
Module V
Numerical Method: Finite difference, Symbolic relations, Interpolation and Extrapolation,

Newton – Gregory forward and backward formula, Gauss forward and backward formula,
Lagrange’s formula , Inverse Interpolation by Lagrange’s formula , Numerical Differentiation
and Numerical Integration : Trapezoidal rule , Simpson’s 1/3rd rule , Simpson’s 3/8th rule
,Weddle quadrature formula.
Text Books
Reference Books
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BASIC ELECTRONICS
(ECE, EEE, EE,CSE, IT)
Course code -EC 301
L T P CR.
3 1 0 3
Module I: Basic Electronic Components

Module II: Semiconductors

Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors, Fermi Level, Energy band, Charge Densities in
Semiconductors, Mass Action Law, Current Components in Semiconductors, Drift and Diffusion
Current, The Continuity Equation, Injected Minority Charge Carrier, Hall Effect, P-N Junction
Diode, construction, working, characteristics and diode equation Application of Diode, Rectifier:
Half Wave, Full Wave and Bridge Rectifier, Zener Diode and its Applications, Varactor Diode,
Photodetector.
Module III: Transistors
Construction, Working, Modes and Configuration of BJT, Input and Output Characteristics of all
Configurations, Comparison of all Configuration & Modes, BJT as a Switch and as an Amplifier.
JFET Construction, working and characteristics. MOSFET Construction, working and
Characteristics, Types of MOSFET.
Module IV: Power electronic devices &Communication engineering
Construction, characteristics and working of SCR, DIAC, TRIAC and UJT. Introduction,
Characteristics and applications of Operational Amplifier (Ic741). Modulation and its types.
Module V: Digital Logic and basic circuit Design
Number systems and conversion (DECIMAL, OCTAL, HEXADECIMAL,BINARY, BCD

etc.),binary addition and subtraction, Logic Gates and their truth-table ,Boolean algebra .Design
of Single Stage Amplifier, LED Driver Circuit, Infrared Transmitter Receiver Circuit, LDR
Driver Circuit, Relay Driver Circuit, Square Wave and Fix Frequency Generator using 555 IC.
Text Books

TMH Publications.
Pune.
Reference Books
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ELECTRICAL MACHINES-I
(EEE, EE,)
Course code -EE 301
L T P CR.
3 1 0 3
Module I: Review of Magnetic circuits and Electro-mechanical Energy Conversion
MMF, flux, reluctance, inductance; review of Ampere Law and Biot Savart Law; Visualization
of magnetic fields produced by a bar magnet and a current carrying coil. Magnetic Materials, BH
characteristics, Review of magnetic system, Energy in Magnetic system, Force and torque in
magnetic field system, Energy balance equation, Energy conversion via electrical field, Energy
in a singly excited system, Determination of the Force and Torque from energy and co-energy.
Module II: Single Phase Transformers and Autotransformers

Principle, construction and operation of single-phase transformers, equivalent circuit, phasor
diagram, voltage regulation, losses and efficiency Testing - open circuit and short circuit tests,
polarity test, back-to-back test, Autotransformers - construction, principle, applications and
comparison with two winding transformers.
Module III: Three Phase Transformers

Concept of Three-phase connections – Star/Delta. Construction of Three phase transformer, open
delta connection, phasor groups, 3-phase to 2-phase and3-phase to 6-phase connections with
their applications, Three winding transformers. parallel operation and load sharing of single
phaseand three phase transformers.Tap-changing transformers, No-load and on-load tap-
changing of transformers,three-winding transformers, Cooling of transformers.
Module IV: DC machines
Basic construction of a DC machine, magnetic structure - stator yoke, stator poles, pole-faces or
shoes, air gap and armature core, visualization of magnetic field produced by the field winding
excitation with armature winding open, air gap flux density distribution, flux per pole, induced
EMF in an armature coil. Armature winding and commutation – Elementary armature coil and
commutator, lap and wave windings, construction of commutator, linear commutation Derivation
of back EMF equation, armature MMF wave, derivation of torque equation, armature reaction,
air gap flux density distribution with armature reaction.
Module V: DC machine - motoring and generation

Armature circuit equation for motoring and generation, Types of field excitations – separately
excited, shunt and series. Open circuit characteristic of separately excited DC generator, back
EMF with armature reaction, voltage build-up in a shunt generator, critical field resistance and
critical speed. V-I characteristics and torque-speed characteristics of separately excited, shunt
and series motors. Speed control through armature voltage. Losses, load testing and back-to-back
testing of DC machines.
Text Books:
1. IJ Nagrath & D.P. Kothari, "Electrical Machines", Tata McGraw Hill
2. Rajendra Prasad , "Electrical Machines", PHI
3. PS Bimbhra, "Electrical Machinery", Khanna Publisher
4. AE Fitggerald, C. Kingsley Jr and Umans, "Electric Machinery", McGraw Hill, International
Student Edition.
Reference Books:
1. A. E. Clayton and N. N. Hancock, “Performance and design of DC machines”,
CBSPublishers, 2004.
2. M. G. Say, “Performance and design of AC machines”, CBS Publishers, 2002.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NETWORK THEORY
(ECE, EEE, EE)
Course code -EE 302
L T P CR.
3 1 0 3
Module I: Circuit Fundamentals

Voltage sources, Current sources, Conversion of voltage sources to current sources and vice a
versa. Network terminology :- Node, Junction, Branch, Loop, Network solution by branch
current method, Loop or Mesh current method, Node voltage method, Star delta connection and
conversion. Node and Mesh Analysis, matrix approach of network containing voltage and
current sources, and reactance’s, source transformation and duality. Network theorems:
Superposition, reciprocity, Thevenin’s, Norton’s, Maximum power Transfer, compensation and
Tallegen's theorem as applied to AC, circuits. Trigonometric and exponential Fourier series:
Discrete spectra and symmetry of waveform, steady state response of a network to non-
sinusoidal periodic inputs, power factor, effective values, Fourier transform and continuous
spectra, three phase unbalanced circuit and power calculation.
Module II: Resonance Circuits

Series resonance circuit, Frequency response of a series resonant circuit, Q factor, Bandwidth,
selectivity, Effect of Q on bandwidth and selectivity, Relation between bandwidth and Q,
Impedance of a series resonant circuit, Resonance by variation of L and C, Parallel resonant
circuit and effect of resistance of a capacitance, Frequency response of parallel resonant circuit.
Module III: Two- Port Network

Two- port network parameters, r, y, z, h, A B C D relation between the parameters, Inter-
conversion of two port networks, cascade connection series connection, series parallel
connection, T and M network representation of a two port network.
Module IV: NETWORK FUNCTIONS

Laplace transform, Transform of a voltage and current, Transform of circuit elements, Network
functions, Poles and zeros of the network functions, Pole zero plot, Physical significance of poles
and zeroes, Stability, Two-port network parameters in the frequency domain Transient response:
- step input response in RL circuit, step input response in R-C circuit, step input response in
R-L-C circuit, ac transients.
Module V: FILTERS and ATTENUATORS

Definitions, classification and characteristics of different filters, filter fundamentals such as
attenuation constant(alpha), phase shift (beta), propagation constant (gamma), characteristic
impedance (Zo), decibel, neper. Design and analysis of constant K, M derived and composite
filters (low pass, high pass, band pass, and band stop filters): T and PI sections. Definitions,
classification, relation between neper and decibel, analysis and design of T type, PI type, alpha
lattice, bridged –T and L types attenuators.
Text Books:
1. "A.Sudhakar, Shymmohan S. Palli, ‗Circuit and Network – Analysis and Synthesis‘, 3 rd
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publication.
2. Van, Valkenburg; “Network analysis”; Prentice hall of India, 2000.
3. A. Chakrabarti, ‗Circuit theory (Analysis and Synthesis)‘, IIIrd edition, Dhanpat Rai and Co.
Reference Books:
1. D. Roy Choudhuri, ‗Networks and Systems‘, New Age International Publisher.
2. M.E.Van Valkenburg Network Analysis‘, IIIrd edition, Pearsons Education/PHI.
3.Josheph Edministrar, ‗Theory and Problems of Electronic Circuit (Schaum‘s Series) – Tata
McGraw Hill Publication.
4. Soni Gupta, ‗Electrical Circuit Analysis‘, Dhanpat Rai and Co.
5. Boylestad, ‗Introductory Circuit Analysis‘, Universal Book Stall, New
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD THEORY

(ECE, EEE, EE)
Course code -EE 303
L T P CR.
3 1 0 3
Module I: Coordinate Systems and Transformation:

Basics of Vectors: Addition, subtraction and multiplications; Cartesian, Cylindrical, Spherical
transformation. Vector calculus: Differential length, area and volume, line surface and volume
integrals, Del operator, Gradient, Divergence of a vector, Divergence theorem, Curl of a vector,
Stokes’s theorem, Laplacian of a scalar.
Module II: Electrostatic fields:

Coulombs law and field intensity, Electric field due to charge distribution, Electric flux density,
Gausses’ Law- Maxwell’s equation, Electric dipole and flux line, Energy density in electrostatic
fields, Electric field in material space: Properties of materials, convection and conduction
currents, conductors, polarization in dielectrics, Dielectric-constants, Continuity equation and
relaxation time, boundary conditions, Electrostatic boundary value problems: Poisson’s and
Laplace’s equations., Methods of Images.
Module III: Magneto Statics:

Magneto-static fields, Biot - Savart’s Law, Ampere’s circuit law, Maxwell’s equation,
Application of ampere’s law, Magnetic flux density- Maxwell’s equation, Maxwell’s equation
for static fields, magnetic scalar and vector potential.
Module IV: Magnetic Forces:

Materials and devices, Forces due to magnetic field, Magnetic torque and moment, a magnetic
dipole. Magnetization in materials, Magnetic boundary conditions, Inductors and inductances,
Magnetic energy.
Module V: Waves and Applications:

Maxwell’s equation, Faraday’s Law, transformer and motional electromotive forces,
Displacement current, Maxwell’s equation in final form Electromagnetic wave propagation:
Wave propagation in loss dielectrics, Plane waves in lossless dielectrics Plane wave in free
space. Plain waves in good conductors, Power and the pointing vector, Reflection of a plain
wave in a normal incidence. Transmission Lines, and Smith Chart.
Text Book:
1. MNO Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetic’, Oxford University Press.
Reference Books:
1. WH Hayt and JA Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetic”, McGraw- Hill Education.
2. Antenna and wave propagation by k.d parsad satya prakashan.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Course code – BSC 302
L T P CR.
2 0 0 0
Module-1
Concept and scope of Environment science, components of environment, environmental

segment and their importance. (2 Hrs)
Module-II
Ecology: Ecosystem and its characteristics features, structure and function of forest ecosystem,
grassland ecosystem, desert ecosystem and aquatic ecosystem, ecological balance and
consequences of imbalance. (4 Hrs)
Module-III
Atmosphere: Atmospheric composition, energy balance, climate, weather, depletion of ozone

layer, green house effect, acid rain, particles, ions and radicals in the atmosphere, chemical and
photochemical reactions in the atmosphere.
Module-IV (4 Hrs)
Air pollution and control: Air pollutants, sources and effect of air pollutants, primary and
secondary pollutants, photochemical smog, fly ash, inorganic and organic particulate matter. Air
quality standards, sampling, monitoring and control measures for pollutants.
(4 Hrs)
Module-V
Water pollution and control: Aquatic environment, water pollution, sources and their effect, lake
and ground water pollution, eutrophication, water quality standard and water pollution control
measures, waste water treatment.
Module-VI (4 Hrs)
Land pollution; Lithosphere, composition of soil, acid base and ion exchange reactions in soil,
soil erosion, landslides, desertification, pollutants (municipal, industrial, commercial, agricultural
, hazardous solid wastes), origin and effects, collection and disposal of solid wastes, recovery
and conversion methods. (5 Hrs)
Module-VII
Noise pollution; Noise classification and its sources, effects and measurement, noise pollution
hazards, standards and noise pollution control. (2 Hrs)

Company Delhi
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BASIC ELECTRONICS LAB

(ECE, EEE, EE)
Course code -ECE 301P
List of Experiments (Minimum 10)

1. Identification and testing of Resistors, Inductors, Capacitors, PN-Diode. Zener Diode, LED,
LCD, LDR, BJT, Photo Diode, Photo Transistor,
2. Measurement of voltage and current using multimeter ,Measure the frequency and Amplitude
of a signal with the help of CRO and function generator.
3. Study of p-n junction diode AND Zener Diode I-V characteristics
4. Assemble the single phase half wave and full wave bridge rectifier & the analyze effect of
capacitor as a filter(only study of waveforms).
5. Study of Zener diode as voltage regulator.
6. Measurement & study of input characteristics of a BJT in CB configuration.
7. Measurement and study of characteristics of JFET and MOSFET
8. To design and simulate IR Transmitter and Receiver Circuit.
9. To design and simulate Motor Driver using Relay.
10. To design and simulate Light detector using LDR.
11. To design and simulate Constant frequency square wave generator using.
12. To design and simulate 5 volt DC power supply from 230 AC.
NOTE : At least ten experiments are to be performed, minimum seven experiments should be
performed from above list. Remaining three experiments may either be performed from the
above list or designed & set by the concerned institution as per the scope of the syllabus.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ELECTRICAL MACHINE LAB-I
1. To obtain the speed characteristics of a D.C shunt motor as a function of armature voltage,
field current, and externalresistance in the armature circuit.
2. To find the critical resistance (Rc) and critical speed (Nc) and O.C.C. of a dc shunt generator.
3. To conduct a load test on a dc shunt generator and obtain its internal and external
characteristics.
4. To conduct load test on a dc series generator and to obtain its internal and external
characteristics.
5. To perform Hopkinson’s test on two similar DC shunt machines and obtain their efficiencies
at various loads.
6. To separate the mechanical and iron losses (Retardation Test) of the given dc shunt machine.
7. To pre-determine the efficiency of a D.C shunt machine considering it as a motor by
performing Swinburne’s test on it.
8. To study about different types of DC motor starters.
9. To study power-sharing between two single-phase transformers operated in parallel.
10. To determine transformer winding polarity and explore the impact of connecting windings in
series aiding and series opposing configurations.
11. To perform the short circuit and open circuit test of single-phase transformer and draw the
equivalent circuit.
12.To determine Regulation and Efficiency of a single-phase transformer using direct loading
test.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NETWORK THEORY LAB

(ECE, EEE, EE)
Course code -EE 302P
1. Transient response of RC circuit.
2. Transient response of RL circuit.
3. To find the resonance frequency, Band width of RLC series circuit.
4. To study and verify effect of R on frequency response of parallel resonance circuit.
5. To calculate and verify "Z" parameters of a two port network.
6. To calculate and verify "Y" parameters of a two port network.
7. To determine equivalent parameter of parallel connections of two port network.

8. To plot the frequency response of low pass filter and determine half-power frequency.
9. To plot the frequency response of high pass filters and determines the half-power frequency.
10. To plot the frequency response of band-pass filters and determines the band-width.
11. To calculate and verify "ABCD" parameters of a two port network.
12. To synthesize a network of a given network function and verify its response.
13. Introduction of P-Spice or other simulation software
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Course code HS301
of life.


➢ Introduction

➢ Introduction
➢ Planning

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Jharkhand, Ranchi
&
Sl. Course
Subject L T P Credit
No. code.
01 EE401 Power System – I 3 1 0 3
02 EE402 Measurement & Instrumentation 3 1 0 3
03 EC401 Analog Electronics And Circuits 3 1 0 3
04 EC403 Digital Electronics And Logic Design 3 1 0 3
05 CS301 Data Structure And Algorithm 3 1 0 3
EN401/ Engineering Economics /Cyber Security 2 0 0 0
06
IT402
01 EE401P Power System- I Lab 0 0 3 1

02 EE402P Measurement & Instrumentation Lab 0 0 3 1
03 EC403P Digital Electronics And Logic Design Lab 0 0 3 1
04 0 0 2 1
05 0 0 0 2
Training
Total credit 21
Electrical & Electronics Engineering

Sl. Cred
Course code Subject L T P
No. it
01 EE401 Power System – I 3 1 0 3
02 EE402 Measurement & Instrumentation 3 1 0 3
EN401/ Engineering Economics /Cyber Security 2 0 0 0
06
IT402
01 EE401P Power System- I Lab 0 0 3 1

02 EE402P Measurement & Instrumentation Lab 0 0 3 1
03 EC403P Digital Electronics And Logic Design Lab 0 0 3 1
04 0 0 2 1
05 0 0 0 2
Training
Total credit 21
POWER SYSTEM-1
Course Code- EE401
Module I: Basic Concepts:
Evolution of Power Systems and Present-Day Scenario. Structure of a power system: Bulk
Power Grids and Micro-grids. Generation: Conventional and Renewable Energy Sources.
Distributed Energy Resources. Energy Storage. Transmission and Distribution Systems: Line
diagrams, transmission and distribution voltage levels and topologies (meshed and radial
systems). Synchronous Grids and Asynchronous (DC) interconnections. Review of Three-phase
systems. Analysis of simple three-phase circuits. Power Transfer in AC circuits and Reactive
Power.
Module II: Power System Components :
Overhead Transmission Lines and Cables: Electrical and Magnetic Fields around conductors,
Corona. Parameters of lines and cables. Capacitance and Inductance calculations for simple
configurations. Travelling-wave Equations. Sinusoidal Steady state representation of Lines:
Short, medium and long lines. Power Transfer, Voltage profile and Reactive Power.
Characteristics of transmission lines. Surge Impedance Loading. Series and Shunt Compensation
of transmission lines. Transformers: Three-phase connections and Phase-shifts. Three-winding
transformers, autotransformers, Neutral Grounding transformers. Tap-Changing in transformers.
Transformer Parameters. Single phase equivalent of three-phase transformers. Synchronous
Machines: Steady-state performance characteristics. Operation when connected to infinite bus.
Real and Reactive Power Capability Curve of generators. Typical waveform under balanced
terminal short circuit conditions – steady state, transient and sub-transient equivalent circuits.
Loads: Types, Voltage and Frequency Dependence of Loads. Per-unit System and per-unit
calculations.
Module III: Over-voltages and Insulation Requirements:
Generation of Over-voltages: Lightning and Switching Surges. Protection against Over-voltages,

Overhead Line Insulators: Introduction, types of insulators, Potential distribution over a string of
suspension insulators, Methods of equalizing the potential, testing of insulators. Insulation
Coordination. Propagation of Surges. Voltages produced by travelling surges. Bewley Diagrams.
Module IV: Fault Analysis and Protection Systems :
Method of Symmetrical Components (positive, negative and zero sequences). Balanced and
Unbalanced Faults. Representation of generators, lines and transformers in sequence networks.
Computation of Fault Currents. Neutral Grounding. Switchgear: Types of Circuit Breakers.
Attributes of Protection schemes, Back-up Protection. Protection schemes (Over-current,
directional, distance protection, differential protection) and their application.
Module V: Introduction to DC Transmission & Renewable Energy Systems
DC Transmission Systems: Line-Commutated Converters (LCC) and Voltage Source Converters

(VSC). LCC and VSC based dc link, Real Power Flow control in a dc link. Comparison of ac
and dc transmission. Solar PV systems: I-V and P-V characteristics of PV panels, power
electronic interface of PV to the grid. Wind Energy Systems: Power curve of wind turbine. Fixed
and variable speed turbines. Permanent Magnetic Synchronous Generators and Induction
Generators, Power Electronics interfaces of wind generators to the grid.
Text Books:
1. J. Grainger and W. D. Stevenson, “Power System Analysis”, McGraw Hill Education,1994.

2. O. I. Elgerd, “Electric Energy Systems Theory”, McGraw Hill Education,1995.
3. A. R. Bergen and V. Vittal, “Power System Analysis”, Pearson Education Inc.,1999.
4.“C. L. Wadhawa”, “Generation and utilization of Electrical Energy”, New age International (P)
Limited, Publishers 1997.
5.“C. L. Wadhawa”, “Electrical Power Systems”, New age International (P) Limited, Publishers 1997.
6.“M. L. Soni, P. V. Gupta, U. S. Bhatnagar and A. Chakraborti”, “A Text Book on Power System
Engineering”, DhanpatRai and Co. Pvt. Ltd, 1999.
Reference Books :
1. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, “Modern Power System Analysis”, McGraw HillEducation,2003.

2. B. M. Weedy, B. J. Cory, N. Jenkins, J. Ekanayake and G. Strbac, “ElectricPowerSystems”, Wiley,
2012.
3.“M.V. Deshpande”, “Elements of Power Station design and practice”, Wheeler Publishing, 3rd Edition
1999.
4.“S. N. Singh”, “Electrical Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution”, PHI, 2003.
5.“V.K Mehta and Rohit Mehta”, “Principles of Power Systems”, S. Chand& Company Ltd, New Delhi,
2004.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION

Course Code- EE402
Module I: Measuring System Fundamentals:
Absolute standards (International, Primary, Secondary, and Working standards),True Value,

Errors(Gross, Systematic and Random); Static Characteristic of instruments( Accuracy,
Precision, Sensitivity, Resolution and threshold).Classification of Instruments (based upon mode
of measurement- Indicating , Recording and Integrating Instruments), Generalized Instrument (
block diagram and description of various blocks ), the three forces in an electromechanical
indicating instrument ( deflecting controlling and damping forces and the interplay between
them), Comparison between gravity and spring(Qualitative Study) . Errors in Measurements.
Basic statistical analysis applied to measurements: Mean, Standard Deviation, Six-sigma
estimation, Cp, Cpk
Module II: Analog Ammeters , Voltmeters and Watt meters :
PMMC and MI Instruments, Construction, Torque Equation, Range Extension, Effect of

temperature, Classification, Errors, Advantages and Disadvantages. Analog Wattmeters Power
Factor Meters and Energy Meter Power and Power Factor, Electrodynamometer type wattmeter,
power factor meter, Construction, theory, Shape of scale, torque equation, Advantages and
disadvantages, active and reactive power measurement in single phase, Measurement in three
phase. Single phase induction type energy meters, construction, theory, Operation, lag
adjustments, Max Demand meters/indicators, Measurement of VAH and VARh.
Module III: DC and AC Bridges:
Measurement of resistance, Wheatstone Bridge, Kelvin’s Bridge, Kelvin’s Double Bridge,

Measurement of inductance, Capacitance, Maxwell’s Bridge, Desauty Bridge, Anderson Bridge,
Schering Bridge, Wien Bridge, Applications and Limitations.
Module IV: Instrument Transformers and Transducers
Current Transformer and Potential Transformer - construction, theory, phasor diagram, errors,
testing and applications. Measurement of Temperature, RTD, Thermistors, LVDT, Strain Gauge,
Piezoelectric Transducers, Digital Shaft Encoders, Tachometer, Hall effect sensors. Sensors and
Transducers for physical parameters: temperature, pressure, torque, flow. Speed and Position
Sensors.
Module V: Electronic Instruments:

Oscilloscope.
Text Books:
1. W.D. Coopers and Helfrick, Modern Electronic instrumentation and Measurements Techniques,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd,
2. E.W. Gowlding and F.C.Widdis, Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments 5/e, Wheeler
Publications.
3. U. A. Bakshi, A. V. Bakshi: Electrical Measurements and Instrumentation, Technical Publications.
Reference Books
1. A. K. Sawhney: A course in Electrical Measurements Electronic Measurements Instrumentation,

Edition 11, Dhanpat Rai and Sons,
2. J. B. Gupta: A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation, 13/E, Kataria
and Sons.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ANALOG ELECTRONICS AND CIRCUITS

Course Code- EC401
Module I: Diode & Transistor Circuits:
P-N junction diode, I-V characteristics of a diode, review of half-wave and full-wave rectifiers,
Zener diodes, clamping and clipping circuits. Amplifier models, Voltage amplifier, current
amplifier, transconductance amplifier and trans-resistance amplifier. Biasing schemes for BJT
and FET amplifiers, bias stability, various configurations (such as CE/CS, CB/CG, CC/CD) and
their features, small signal analysis, low frequency transistor models, estimation of
voltage gain, input resistance, output resistance etc., design procedure for particular
specifications, low frequency analysis of multistage amplifiers, high-frequency equivalent
circuits.
Module II: Oscillators, DAC & ADC:
Review of the basic concept, Barkhausen criterion, RC oscillators (phase shift, Wien bridge
etc.), LC oscillators (Hartley, Colpitt, Clapp etc.), non-sinusoidal oscillators. Digital-to-analog
converters (DAC) Weighted resistor, R-2R ladder, resistor string etc., Analog to-digital
converters (ADC): Single slope, dual slope, successive approximation, flash etc.
Module III: MOSFET circuits:
MOSFET structure and I-V characteristics, MOSFET as a switch, MOSFET as an amplifier:

small signal model and biasing circuits, common-source, common-gate and common-drain
amplifiers; small signal equivalent circuits - gain, input and output impedances, trans-
conductance, high frequency equivalent circuit.
Module IV: Differential, multi-stage and operational amplifiers:
Differential amplifier; power amplifier; direct coupled multi-stage amplifier; internal structure of
an operational amplifier, ideal op-amp, non-idealities in an op-amp (Output offset voltage, input
bias current, input offset current, slew rate, gain bandwidth product)
Module V: Linear & Nonlinear applications of op-amp:
Idealized analysis of op-amp circuits, Inverting and non-inverting amplifier, Differential

amplifier, Instrumentation amplifier, Integrator, Active filter, P, PI and PID controllers and
lead/lag compensator using an op-amp, Voltage regulator, Oscillators (Wein bridge and phase
shift).Analog to Digital Conversion. Hysteretic Comparator, Zero Crossing Detector, Square-
wave and triangular-wave generators, Precision rectifier, peak detector, Monoshot.
Text Books :
1. A. S. Sedra and K. C. Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits”, New York, Oxford University Press,
1998.
2. J. V. Wait, L. P. Huelsman and G. A. Korn, “Introduction to Operational Amplifier theory and
applications”, McGraw Hill U. S., 1992.
3. J. Millman and A. Grabel, “Microelectronics”, McGraw Hill Education, 1988.
Reference Books:
1. P. Horowitz and W. Hill, “The Art of Electronics”, Cambridge University Press, 1989.
2. P. R. Gray, R. G. Meyer and S. Lewis, “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”,
John Wiley & Sons, 2001
3. Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits by A. Gayakwad, Pearson Publication
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND LOGIC DESIGN
Course code -EC 302
Module I: Binary Codes and Boolean algebra
Analog and Digital, Binary Number System. Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division of
binary numbers, Subtraction using 2’s complement method. Binary codes: weighted and non
weighted codes, self complementary codes, BCD, Excess-3, Gray codes, Alphanumeric codes,
ASCII Codes. Boolean algebra: Boolean Laws and Expression using Logic
Gates, Realization of different gates using Universal gates, DeMorgan’s Theorem, Duality
Theorems.
Module II : Boolean function minimization Techniques

Standard forms: SOP, POS, Simplification of Switching function & representation (Maxterm &
Minterm), Boolean expression & representation using logic gates, Propagation delay in logic
gate. Karnaugh map: K-map(up to 5 variables), mapping and minimization of SOP and POS
expression, Don’t care condition, conversion from SOP to POS and POS to SOP form using K-
map, Minimization of multiple output circuits, Quine Mc-cluskey method minimization
technique, prime implicant table, Don’t care condition.
Module III: Combinational Circuits Design
Adder & Subtractor (Half and Full), Parallel Binary adder, BCD Adder, Binary multipliers, Code
Converters, parity bit generator, Comparators, Decoder, BCD to 7-segment Decoder, Encoders,
Priority Encoders, Multiplexers, De Multiplexers.
Module IV : Sequential Circuits Elements

Introduction to sequential circuit, Flip-flop & Timing Circuits: SR latch, Gated latch, Tri state
logic, Edge triggered flip-plop: - D, JK, T Flip-flop, flip-flop asynchronous inputs ,characteristic
table of Flip-flop, excitation table of Flip-flop, master slave JK flip flop, inter conversion of Flip-
flop. Study of timing parameters of flip-flop. Shift registers: buffer register, controlled buffer
register. Data transmission in shift resistor SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, Bidirectional shift register,
universal shift registers. Counter: Classification, Ripple or asynchronous counter, Effect of
propagation delay in ripple counters, up-down counter,
Design of Mod-n counter, synchronous counter, Ring counter, Johnson counter. Introduction to
FSM. Design of synchronous FSM, Algorithmic State Machines charts. Designing synchronous
circuits like Pulse train generator.
Module V: Logic Families and VLSI Design flow
Logic Families and Semiconductor Memories: TTL NAND gate, Specifications, Noise margin,
Propagation delay, fan-in, fan-out, Tristate TTL, ECL, CMOS families and their interfacing,
Memory elements, Concept of Programmable logic devices like FPGA, Logic implementation
using Programmable Devices VLSI Design flow: Design entry, Schematic, FSM & HDL,
different modeling styles in VHDL, Data types and objects, Dataflow, Behavioral and Structural
Modeling, Synthesis and Simulation VHDL constructs and codes for combinational and
sequential circuits
Text Books :
1. Kharate “Digital Electronics” OXFORD Publication

2. A. Anand Kumar ‘Fundamentals of Digital Circuits’. PHI Publications
3. R.P. Jain-‘Modern Digital Electronics’ IIIrd Edition- Tata Mc Graw Hill, Publication
4. Douglas Perry, “VHDL”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2002.
5. Charles Roth, “Digital System Design using VHDL”, Tata McGraw Hill 2nd edition
6. Bhaskar VHDL BASED DESIGN ,PEARSON EDUCATION
Reference Books:
1. Rajkamal ‘Digital Systems Principals and Design’ Pearson Education

2. A.P. Malvino, D.P. Leach ‘Digital Principles & Applications’ -VIth Edition-TMH
publication.
3. M. Morris Mano ‘Digital Design’ (Third Edition). PHI Publications
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS

Course code -CS 301
Module I
Basic concepts and notations: Data structures and data structure operations, Complexity
Analysis: Mathematical notation and functions, algorithmic complexity and time space trade off,
Big O Notation, The best, average & worst cases analysis of various algorithms. Arrays: Linear
& Multidimensional Arrays, Representation & traversal. Sorting algorithms: Bubble sort,
Selection sort, Insertion sort, Merge sort and Quick sort, Counting Sort. Linear search and Binary
search on sorted arrays.
Module II
Abstract Data Types (ADTs) Stack: Push; Pop, stack representation using array and linked list,
Applications of Stack, Recursion. Queue: Representation using array and linked list, Insertion
and deletion operations, circular queue, Dequeue, priority queue. Linked Lists & their types.
(Single, Double, Circular linked lists), Operations on Varieties of Linked Lists (Search and
Update) with applications
Module III
Introduction to Trees, Binary tree - definitions and properties; binary tree traversal algorithms
with and without recursion., Binary Search Tree - creation, insertion and deletion operations,
Threaded tree (One way and Two way). AVL tree balancing; B-tree
Module IV
Graph Algorithms: Graphs and their Representations, Graph Traversal Techniques: Breadth First
Search (BFS) and Depth First Search (DFS), Applications of BFS and DFS, Minimum Spanning
Trees (MST), Prim’s and Kruskal’s algorithms for MST, Connected Components, Dijkstra’s
Algorithm for Single Source Shortest Paths,, Floydd’s Algorithm for All-Pairs Shortest Paths
Problem
Module V
Hashing techniques, Hash function, Address calculation techniques- common hashing functions
Collision resolution, Linear probing, quadratic probing, double hashing, Bucket addressing.
Rehashing
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be able to:
➢ Understand the concept of ADT

➢ Identify data structures suitable to solve problems
➢ Develop and analyze algorithms for stacks, queues
➢ Develop algorithms for binary trees and graphs
➢ Implement sorting and searching algorithms
➢ Implement symbol table using hashing techniques
Text Books:
1. Data Structures Using C – A.M. Tenenbaum (PHI)
2. Introduction to Data Structures with Applications by J. Tremblay and P. G. Sorenson
(TMH)
3.Data Structures, Algorithms and Application in C, 2nd Edition, Sartaj Sahni
4. Data Structures and Algorithms in C, M.T. Goodrich, R. Tamassia and D. Mount, Wiley India.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Data Structure and Program Design in C by C.L. Tondo.

2. Data Structures with C++, J. Hubbard, Schaum’s Outlines, TMH.
3. Data Structures and Algorithms in C, M.T. Goodrich, R. Tamassia and D. Mount, Wiley
India.
4. Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, 3rd Edition, M.A. Weiss, Pearson.
5. Classic Data Structures, D. Samanta, 2nd Edition, PHI.
6. Data Structure Using C by Pankaj Kumar Pandey.
7. Data Structure with C, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited by Seymour
Lipschutz.
8. Data Structure through C in Depth, BPB Publication, by S.K. Srivastava.
9. Data Structure and algorithm Analysis in C 2nd Edition, PEARSON Publishing House,
Mark Allen Weiss
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CYBER SECURITY

on Cybercrimes.
Overflow.

TEXT BOOK:

REFERENCE BOOK:
Group
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE OUTLINE:
Module -1

importance.
Module -II
Module III

cycle
Module -IV
RECOMMENDED BOOKS:-

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
POWER SYSTEM-1 LAB

Course Code- EE401
1. To draw operating characteristics of DMT/IDMT relay.

2. To draw operating characteristics of differential relay.
3. To study Bucholtz Relay.
4. Testing of Transformer oil.
5. To find ABCD Parameters of a model of transmission line.
6. To observe Ferranti effect in a model of transmission line.
7. To study the microcontroller based differential relay for the protection of transformer.
8. To study electromechanical type negative sequence relay.
9. To study electromechanical type over current relay.
10. To study electromechanical type directional over current relay.
11. To study electromechanical type earth fault relay.
12. To determine the string efficiency of suspension type insulators with and without guard ring.
13. To plot Annual / monthly / daily load demand of nearby area.
14. To draw single line diagram of distribution system of JUVNL of nearby area of college
concerned.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION LAB

Course Code- EE402

1. Calibration of AC voltmeter and AC ammeter.
2. Measurement of inductance using Maxwell’s Bridge.
3. Measurement of capacitance using Schering Bridge.
4. Measurement of low resistance using Kelvin’s Double Bridge.
5. Measurement of Power using CT and PT.
6. Measuring displacement using LVDT.
7. Measuring temperature using thermocouple.
8. Measuring pressure using piezoelectric pick up.
9. Measurement of speed of DC motor by photoelectric pick up.
10. Speed measurement using Hall Effect sensor.
11. Measurement of a batch of resistors and estimating statistical parameters. Measurement
of L using a bridge technique as well as LCR meter.
12. Measurement of C using a bridge technique as well as LCR meter. Measurement of Low
Resistance using Kelvin’s double bridge.
NOTE : At least ten experiments are to be performed, minimum seven experiments should
be performed from above list. Remaining three experiments may either be performed from
the above list or designed & set by the concerned institution as per the scope of the
syllabus.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND LOGIC DESIGN LAB

Course code EC 302P
1. Study of TTL gates – AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, EX-OR, EX-NOR.
2. Design & realize a given function using K-maps and verify its performance.
3. To verify the operation of multiplexer & Demultiplexer.
4. To verify the operation of comparator.
5. To verify the truth tables of S-R, J-K, T & D type flip flops.
6. To verify the operation of bi-directional shift register.
7. To design & verify the operation of 3-bit synchronous counter.
8. Design all gates using VHDL.
9. Design a multiplexer using VHDL
10. Design a decoder using VHDL
11. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the hardware
generated a. half adder b. full adder
12. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the
hardware generated a. multiplexer b. demultiplexer
syllabus. For VHDL Xilinx software may be used.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
3rd SEMESTER COURSE STRUCTURE
Sl. No Course Subject L T P Credit

No.
1 Mathematics-III 3 1 0 4
2 Materials Engineering 3 0 0 3
3 Materials Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
and Kinetics
(PCC)
4 Fuels, Refractories and 3 0 0 3
Furnaces
(PCC)
5 Metallurgical Analysis 3 0 0 3
(PCC)
6 Biology/Environmental 3 0 0 0
Science
1 Communication Skill 0 0 2 1
Laboratory
2 Fuels, Refractories and 0 0 3 1
Furnaces Laboratory
3 Metallurgical Thermodymics 0 0 3 1
and Analysis Laboratory
4 Extra activity -III 0 0 (3) 1
(NSO/NSS/NCC/YOGA/CA)
5 Internship 2
Total Credit 22
METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
4th SEMESTER COURSE STRUCTURE
Sl. No Course Subject L T P Credit

No.
1 Mathematics-IV 4 0 0 4
2 Electronics and 3 0 0 3
instrumentation Engineering.
3 Physical Metallurgy 3 0 0 3
(PCC)
4 Mineral Engineering 3 0 0 3
(PCC)
5 Introduction to transport 3 0 0 3
phenomena
(PCC)
6 Biology/Environmental 3 0 0 0
Science
1 Advance Communication 0 0 2 1
Skill Laboratory
2 Metallography Laboratory 0 0 3 1
3 Mineral Engineering 0 0 3 1
Laboratory
4 Extra activity -IV 0 0 (3) 1
(NSO/NSS/NCC/YOGA/CA)
Total Credit 20
Metallurgical Engineering Department
SUBJECT: – MATERIAL ENGINEERING
Course objective:
To increasing demand of the available materials, coupled with new applications
and requirements has brought about many changes in the style of their uses.
To develop the basic knowledge of metals, polymers composites and ceramics
other than conventional metals and alloys to apply them to advance engineering
applications.
1. Introduction- Crystalline and Non crystalline solids. Classification of

Engineering materials and their selections, bonding in Solids: Ionic, Covalent
and Metallic bonding. (5hrs.)
2. Crystal Structure -Space lattices, Bravais lattices, Crystal system, Unit Cell,
Metallic crystal structures: SC, BCC,FCC,HCP structures, Miller notations of
planes and directions, Imperfections in crystals: Point defects, Line, surface
defects, Dislocations: Edge and Screw dislocation, Burgers vectors. (12hrs.)
3. Metallic Materials- Metals and alloys, ferrous materials- introduction to Iron

-carbon Diagram, Steel and their Heat treatment, properties and applications.
Different types of heat treatment processes. Non-ferrous alloys:-Copper based
alloys, Al based alloys, other important non ferrous alloys , properties and
applications. (10)
4. Polymers- Basic concepts of Polymer Science, polymer classifications,
Crystallinity of polymers, Copolymers, Thermoplastic and Thermosetting
polymers, Elastomers, Properties and Applications. (5hrs)
5. Ceramics-Basic concepts of ceramics science, traditional and new ceramics,
Oxide and Non-Oxide ceramics, Ceramics for high temperature applications,
Glass, applications of ceramics, and glass. (5 hrs.)
6. Composite materials-Definition, general characteristics, Particles reinforced

and fiber reinforced composite materials, MMC, CMC, PMC, properties and
applications. (5hrs.)
Text Books:
1. Elements of Material Science by Van Vlack
2. Material Science by O.P. Khanna
3. Material Science and Engineering by V. Raghavan
4. Material Science by R.S.Khurmi and R.S. Sedha
Reference Books:
1. Material Science and Engineering by William D. Callister
Course outcomes:
At the end of this course, the students would be able to:

➢ Select different materials other than conventional metals and alloys
for specific engineering applications.
➢ To Solve the materials problems associated with the weight
reduction through the appropriate choice of metals, polymers,
ceramics and composites.
➢ Selection criterion for polymers and composites for various
engineering applications.
MATERIALS THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS (PCC)
OBJECTIVES OF THE COURSE:
To highlight the fundamental role of thermodynamics in describing

metallurgical and materials processes.
To learn and use thermodynamics functions, rules and relations and interpret
thermodynamics plots and diagrams.
1. History of Thermodynamics, Ideal Gas, Energy and Work, Extensive and

Intensive properties. (2 hrs).
2. First Law of Thermodynamics, Internal Energy, Enthalpy, Heat Capacity,
Reversible Processes (3 hrs.)
3. Second Law of Thermodynamics, entropy and equilibrium, Reversibility,
Heat Engines (3 hrs.)
4. Statistical Interpretation of Entropy, Boltzmann Equation (3 hrs.)
5. Auxiliary functions Enthalpy, free Energy, Chemical potential, Maxwell's
Equations, Gibbs-Helmholtz Equation (3hrs.).
6. Enthalpy as a function of temperature and composition, Third law of
Thermodynamics (3 hrs.)
7. Phase Equilibrium in a one -component system, Equilibrium between Vapor
and Condensed phase, and between condensed phases (3 hrs.)
8. Gases: Ideal, Real, Van dar waal's (3 hrs.)
9. Raoult's Law and Henry's Law ,Activity, Gibbs-Duhem Equation, Properties
of Ideal and Non- ideal solutions, regular solutions (3 hrs.)
10. Effect of Temperature and Pressure on the Equilibrium constant for a gas
mixtures (3 hrs.)
11. Ellingham Diagram of Metal oxides and Sulphide systems. (2 hrs.)
12. The Gibbs Phase rule (3 hrs).
13. Electrochemistry, Concentration and EMF, standard Reduction potentials,
Pourbaix diagrams (3 hrs.)
14. Kinetic reactions, Activated complex theory, Homogeneous reaction and
importance of rate controlling steps, Adsorption and reaction on surfaces,
Reaction Rule, Thermodynamics of electrolytes and Concentration cells. (6 hrs.)
Reference Books:
1. Thermodynamics in Materials science, Robert Dehoff, CRC Press, 2006.

2. Introduction to Metallurgical Thermodynamics-Darken’s and Gurry,
MGH publication.
3. Introduction to the Thermodynamics of Materials-Gaskel
Course Outcomes:
1. Use the various thermodynamics functions appropriately under different

experimental situations involving gases, liquids and solids.
2. Utilize Pourbaix diagrams.
3. Utilize Ellingham Diagrams.
4. Explain the Gibbs phase rule.
FUELS REFRACTORIE AND FURNACES (PCC)
1. FUELS : Classification of fuels, Indian Resources.

2. SOLID FUELS :Coal preparation, Proximate and Ultimate analysis of coal,
Coal washing, Carbonization of Coal, Brief description of the manufacture of
Coke and recovery of products, Testing of coal and Coke. Indian standard
specifications of Metallurgical Coke to be used in blast furnace.
3. LIQUID FUELS : Advantages of liquids fuels , liquid fuels furnaces, storage
and handling of liquid fuels.
4. GASEOUS FUELS : Advantages of gaseous fuels, Manufacture of Producer
Gas , water Gas, By products of gaseous fuels-Blast furnace gas, Coke oven
Gas.
5. FURNACES: Classification of furnaces, Principles of working and
applications in Industries., Principles of Regenerators and Recuperators.
6. REFRACTORIES : Definition, Classification of Refractories, Properties of
a good refractory materials and factors affecting selection of Refractories .
Types of Clay, Use of Grog and its advantages. Manufacture, Properties and
Application of Fireclay Refractories, high Alumina Refractories, Silica
,Chromite, Graphite, Magnesite, Dolomite, Silicon carbide, silimanite and
Kyanite Refractories, Carbon Refractories : Characteristics of carbon as
refractories material, manufacture, properties and applications.
Reading:
1. J.D. Gilchrist -Fuels, Furnaces and refractories, Pergamon,1977.
2. O.P.Gupta -Elements of Fuels, Furnaces and Refractories, khanna
Publications,1998
3. W.Trinks, M.H. mawhinney- Industrial Furnaces, John Wiley and Sons,2003.
4. Samir Sarkar- Fuels and Combustion, Orient Longman Ltd.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Select fuels, refractories and furnces to minimize the overall cost production
for a given application
2. Classification of furnaces and Refractories and their operation conditions.
3. Understand the production of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
4. Illustrate the production, composition, properties, testing and applications of
refractories.
METALLURGICAL ANALYSIS (PCC)
1. Important of Metallurgical Analysis in Metallurgical Industries, Important

Methods for the preparation of standard samples. qualitative analysis of
metallurgical samples, Elementary discussion on the basic principles involved
in metallurgical analysis.
2. Colorimetry and Adsorptimetry: Theory of Adsorptiometry and Colorimetry,

Application of Beer's Law, Colorimetric methods, Adsorptiometric method.
3. Emission Spectroscopy and its use in Metallurgical Analysis. Atomic

Absorption Spectro electro photometric method of analysis. Conductimetric,
Potentiometric titration, Polaroghraphic and Electro- Gravitric methods of
analysis.
4. Quantitative Estimation of Important Constituents of the following items:

Iron ore, Iron and steel, Lime stone and dolomite and Blast Furnace slag.
Reading:
1. B.C. Aggrawal and S.P.Jain-A text book of Metallurgical Analysis

4th SEMESTER COURSE STRUCTURE
Physical Metallurgy (PCC)
Objectives of the course

To learn about the principles of alloy design, phase diagram and strengthening
Mechanisms in different metals and alloys.
To study the fundamental aspects of heat treatment and its influence on
properties and applications
To obtain knowledge about the physical metallurgy of specific and important
Engineering materials such as ferrous and non-ferrous alloys.
Detailed contents:
1: Phase diagrams – binary (Cu-Ni, Cu-Sn, Pb-Sn, Al-Cu, Al-Si, Cu-Zn and
other alloys) and ternary, principles of alloying, Hume-Rothery rules.
Strengthening mechanisms – solid solution, work hardening, precipitation
hardening, dispersion strengthening (10 hours)
2: Iron carbon diagram, isothermal, and continuous cooling transformation
Diagrams; influence of alloying elements on transformation characteristics (10
hours)
3: Heat treatment - annealing, normalizing, hardening and tempering of steels,
hardenability (5 hours)
4: Introduction to important ferrous alloys (stainless and special steels, cast
irons), aluminium alloys, titanium alloys, copper base alloys (10 hours)
5: Superalloys, shape memory alloys – classification, heat treatment, properties
and applications (5 hours)
Suggested books:
1. Physical Metallurgy: Principles and Practice, V. Raghavan, PHI Learning,
Delhi, 2008.
2. Physical Metallurgy Principles, R. Abbaschian, R. E. Reed-Hill, Cengage
Learning, 2009
Suggested reference books

1. Physical Metallurgy Vols. I, II, III, R.W. Cahn and P. Haasen, North Holland,
1996.
2. Light Metals, I.J. Polmear, Elsevier, 2005
Course Outcomes:
By completing this course the student will have:
1. The ability to identify the concepts of alloy design, phase diagrams and
strengthening mechanisms and apply them to materials systems
2. The knowledge of heat treatment and the resulting microstructure in materials
3. The knowledge of physical metallurgical aspects of important engineering
alloys
MINERAL ENGINEERING (PCC)
Course objective: The basic objective of mineral processing are technical and
econonmic.Theoretical aspects of common mineral processing techniques and
the associated equipment used in mining and pre-extraction practices.
1. Sampling of ores by different methods -Handling Sampling, Mechanical

sampling, Theory of liberation of minerals, Principle and applications of
primary, Secondary Crusheres (Jaw, Gyratory, Cone, Rolls crusher). Grinding,
Ball mills, Theory of ball mill operation, Rod mills and tube mills. (8 hrs.)
2. Theory of Comminution- Rittinger's Law, Kick's Law and Bond's Law

theories. (2hrs)
3. Sizing : Laboratory sizing, Types of screen, Screening and factor affecting

the screening Efficiency, Sedimentation and Elutriation. Industrial sizing
methods. (6 hrs)
4. Movement of solids in fluids: Stoke's and Newton's laws, Terminal velocity

and its relation with size, relation between time and velocity, relation between
distance travelled and velocity, free and hindered settling ratios.(6 hrs)
5. Quantifying concentration operation: Ratio of concentration, Recovery and

selective index. (2 hrs.)
6. Classification: Principles, Sizing and sorting classifiers. heavy media

separation, processes using heavy liquids, processes using heavy suspensions,
Thickening and Filtration. Jigging- Theory of jigging, types of jig, Jigging
machines, Advantages and disadvantages of jigs. Tabling- Theory of flowing
film concentration, shaking tables. (10 hrs)
7. Flotation: Principles of flotation, Physical Chemistry of Flotation, Factors

affecting flotation, Flotation reagents, Flotation of copper, Flotation of Lead-
Zinc ores Recent development in flotation process. Principles and applications
of Magnetic and Electrostatic separation. (10 hrs.)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A. M. Gaudin, Principles of Mineral Dressing, Tata McGraw & Hill, 1993
2. R. H. Richard and C. E. Locky, A text Book on Ore Dressing, A A Balkema,
2004
3. S.K.Jain ,Ore Processing, Oxford-IBH Publication Company-2005
REFERENCES:
1. Gilchrist J.D., „Extraction Metallurgy‟, 2nd Edition, Pergamon Press, 1980
2. Joseph Newton, „Extractive Metallurgy‟, 1st Edition, Wiley Eastern, 1967
Department of Metallurgical and Materials Engineering .
3. F. Taggart, Mineral Dressing Handbook, P & H, 2000
4. B. A. Wills,Tim Napier-Munn Mineral Processing Technology, Willy &
Sons, 2005
5. G. C. Lowrison, Crushing & Grinding, Maxwell and MacMillan, 2002
6. L. Svalovsky, Solid Liquid Separation, Tata McGraw & Hill Inc., 2003
Course outcomes:
At the end of this course, the students would be able to:
(A) To understand the mineral processing basic principles and process.

(B) Discuss the physical and chemical properties of various minerals.
(C) To understand the various separation methods of mineral or gangue
particles.
(D) Explain the different types of process control in mineral processing.
Introduction to Transport Phenomena (PCC)
Fluid Flow: Classification of fluids, Ideal and real, Newtonian & Non-
Newtonian, Newton’s law of viscosity. Types of fluid law: Streamline &
Turbulent, continuity equation for incompressible and compressible fluid and its
applications. Concept of velocity bounds layer.
Bernoulli’s equation and its application for flow measurement by venturimeter,

orifice meter, pilot tube and rotameter.
Dimensional analysis by Rayleigh’s method of indices and Buckingham’s π

theorem. Example of analysis of pressure gradient, Mass transfer co-efficient &
convective heat transfer co-efficient. Concept of similarly and dimensionless
criteria. Dimensionless groups & their significance.
Pressure drop & friction factor in various configurations, flow in packed bad &
Fludized bad. Free partially restricted jets, High velocity fluid jets.
Mass Transfer: Law of diffusion and their application, concept of mass

transfer co-efficient & Concentration boundary layer, Interfacial mass transfer,
overall mass balance.
Heat Transfer: Internal & external modes of Heat transfer, steady state heat
conduction in monolayer and composite flat walls & Cylinders. Unsteady state
heat conduction, thin & Massive heating and cooling. Finite difference method
in solving unsteady state heat conduction.
Natural and forced convection, concept of heat transfer co-efficient, thermal

boundary layer, some example of connective co-relations.
Law of radiation – Steffan-boltzmann’s law, Kirchoff’s law & Lambarth’s law,

Black and grey body concepts, view factor, radiation from flames & Gases.
Radiation between simple surfaces with & without absorbing gas media.
Radiation shields.
Suggested books:
1. 1. Transport phenomena, 2nd Edition: R. Byron Bird, Warren E. Stewart
and Edwin N
2. Lightfoot; John Wiley & Sons
3. 2. Fundamentals of Momentum, Heat and Mass Transfer, 4th Edition:
James R. Welty,
4. Charles E. Wicks, Robert E. Wilson and Gregory Rorrer; John Wiley &
Sons
Suggested reference books:

5. 1. Transport phenomena in materials processing : D.R. Poirier and G.H.
Geiger, TMS
6. 2. Introduction to Fluid Mechanics, 5th Edition: Robert W. Fox & Alan
T. McDonald: John Wiley & Sons.
Course Outcomes
At the end of this course, the student should be able to:
1. T solve a problem in transport phenomena as a balance equation

2. Make suitable assumptions to make the problem a well defined one
3. Identify suitable geometry and boundary conditions for the problem
2nd year UG courses Engg. & Tech Jharkhand University of Technology

Jharkhand, Ranchi
Civil Engineering
Civil Engineering
Sl. Course
No. Code
CE301 Civil Engineering Materials And
01 3 1 0 3
Construction
02 CE302 Surveying & Geomatics -I 3 1 0 3
03 ME303 Strength Of Materials 3 1 0 3
05 BSC303 Engineering Geology 3 1 0 3
01 CE301P Civil Engg Material Testing Lab. 0 0 3 1

02 CE302P Field Surveying Lab 0 0 3 1
CE303P Engineering Geology Lab And
03 0 0 3 1
Strength Of Materials Lab
04 EX301 0 0 2 1
Total credit 21
MATHEMATICS III
L T P CR.
3 1 0 4
Module I
Transformation.
Module II
inverse Fourier Transformation, sine,cosine Transformation, Inverse
Module III
Z-Transformation.
Module IV
Module V
Text Books
Reference Books
………………………………………………………………………………………………
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CIVIL ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTIONS

Course code –CE 301
Module 1:Introduction to Engineering Materials covering, Cements, M-Sand, Concrete (plain,

reinforced and steel fiber/glass fiber-reinforced, light-weight concrete, High Performance
Concrete, Polymer Concrete) Ceramics, and Refractories, Bitumen and asphaltic materials,
Timbers, Glass and Plastics Structural Steel and other Metals, Paints and Varnishes, Acoustical
material and geo-textiles, rubber and asbestos, laminates and adhesives, Graphene, Carbon
composites and other engineering materials including properties and uses of these (8 Hours)
Module II:Introduction to Material Testing covering, What is the “Material Engineering”?;
Mechanical behavior and mechanical characteristics; Electricity-principle and characteristics;
Plastic deformation of metals; Tensile test-standards for different material(brittle, quasi-brittle,
elastic and so on) True stress-strain interpretation of tensile test; hardness tests; Bending and
torsion test; strength of ceramic; Internal friction, creep-fundamentals and characteristics; Brittle
fracture of steel- temperature transition approach; Background of fracture mechanics; Discussion
of fracture toughness testing-different materials; concepts of fatigue of materials; Structural
integrity assessment procedure and fracture mechanics (8Hours).
Module III:Standard Testing & Evaluation Procedures covering, Laboratory for mechanical
testing; Discussion about mechanical testing; Naming systems for various irons, steels and
nonferrous metals; Discussion about elastic deformation; Plastic deformation; Impact test and
transition temperatures; Fracture mechanics- background; Fracture toughness- different
materials; Fatigue of material; Creep. (8 Hours)
Module IV:Constructions: Brick Masonry; Types of bond, construction of walls, partition wall,
cavity wall, advantages, disadvantages and construction procedure. D.P.C.: Purpose, types,
materials and procedures, Foundation: Function, types, their stability and foundation in black
cotton soil, proportioning of footings, plastering and composition, method of plastering, types of
plastering, pointing construction procedure, Washing: White washing, color washing, distemper
and snowcem, Roof: Flat roof, inclined roof, shells and domes, various types of roof covering
materials. Floor: Types i.e. wooden, IPS, Terrazzo, marbles, tiles, synthetic mats. Construction
of IPS and Terrazzo floor. Door and Windows types and fixtures including ventilators and lintel.
Door and windows from PVS material and MDF. Stairs: Types and proportioning, Lifts and
escalators (16 Hours).
Suggested Readings
1. Chudley,R.,Greeno(2006),’Building Construction Handbook’(6th ed.),R.Butterworth
Heinemann
2. Building Materials, S.Bhavikutti.
3. Building Materials,M.L.Gambhir.
4. Civil Engineering Materials, S.C.Rangwala, Charotar Publishing House. Various related
updated & recent standards of BIS, IRC, ASTM, RILEM, AASHTO,etc. corresponding
to materials used for Civil Engineering applications
5. Kyriakos Komvopolous (2011), Mechanical Testing of Engineering Materials, Cognella
6. E.N.Dowling(1993), Mechanical Behaviour of Materials, PHI
7. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM),Annual Books of ASTM Standards
(post 2000)
8. Civil Engineering Materials and Construction Practices, R.K.Gupta, Jain Brothers,New
Delhi.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SURVEYING AND GEOMATICS I
Course code –CE 302
Module I
Introduction: Importance of Surveying, Types of Surveying, Principle, Scales, Plan and
Map, Shrinkage of Maps, Mapping Concepts, Map Projections, Total Station uses and
application,Chain Surveying: Purpose, Chaining, accessories, Ranging and its types, Error,
Chaining on uneven ground, Tape corrections, Survey stations and lines, Well conditioned
triangle, basic problems, obstacles in chaining, field book. [7 Hrs]
Module II:
Compass Surveying: Introduction and Purpose, True Meridian, Magnetic Meridian
Geographical Meridian, True Bearing, Magnetic Bearing, Whole circle &Quadrantal Bearing,
Prismatic Compass and Surveyors Compass, Magnetic Declination, Isogonic and Agonic
Lines, Local Attraction and its adjustments. [4 Hrs]
Module III:
Plane Table Surveying: Equipment and uses, principle, methods of plane tabling, closing
error and its adjustment, two point problem and three point problem. [5 Hrs]
Module IV
Levelling: Types of levelling: Temporary Adjustment of Dumpy level, Methods of levelling,
Level book and computation, missing data, curvature and refraction corrections, reciprocal
levelling.Contouring: Definition, Methods of Contouring and plotting of contour.[6 Hrs]
Module V
Theodolite traversing: Scope, Types, temporary adjustment of transit theodolite,
measurement of horizontal& Vertical angles, Method of repeatation&Direction, errors and its
elimination, method of traversing, calculation of latitude and departure, balancing of traverse
[6 Hrs]
Module VI
Tacheometric Survey: Instruments used, Principle, determination of tacheometric constant,
Methods of Tacheometry: Stadia Method and Tangential Method. [4 Hrs]
Module VII
Classification of Curves: Simple curve, Combined curve, Compound curve, reverse curve,
transition curve, Methods of layout, offsets from chord produced, Rankine’s Method,
Transition Curve, super-elevation, length of transition curve, characteristics, equation, shift,
tangent length, and curve length of combined curve, setting out of simple and transition curve.
[12Hrs]
Text Books:
1. Duggal, S.K. Surveying Vol. I and II, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.
2. Punmia, B.C. Surveying Vol.I and II, Standard Publishers, 1994.
3. Arora, K. R. Surveying Vol. I and II, Standard Book House, 1996
4 N.N Basak.. Surveying and levelling
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
(ME , PROD,CE)
Course code -ME 303
Objectives:
• To understand the nature of stresses developed in simple geometries such as bars,
cantilevers, beams,shafts cylinders and spheres for various types of simple loads.
• To calculate the elastic deformation occurring in various simple geometries for different
types of loading.
Contents:
Module-I
Deformation in solids-Hooks law, stress and strain-tension, compression and shear stresses –
elastic constants and their relations-volumetric, linear and shear strains-principal stresses and
principal planes-mohr’s circle (8 Hrs)
Module-II
Beams and types transverse loading on beams-shear force and bending moment diagrams-Types
of beam supports, simply supported and over hanging beams, cantilevers. Theory of bending of
beam, bending stresses distribution and neutral axis, shear stress distribution, point and
distributed loads.(8Hrs)
Module-III
Moment of inertia about the axis and polar moment of inertia, deflection of beam using double
integration method, computation of slopes and deflection in beams, Maxwell’s reciprocal
theorem.(8Hrs)
Module-IV
Torsion, stresses and deformation in circular and hollow shafts,stepped shafts, deflection of
shafts fixed at both ends, stresses and deflection of helical spring.(8Hrs)
Module -V
Axial and hoop stresses in cylinders subjected to internal pressure, deformation of thick and thin
cylinders, deformation in spherical shells subjected to internal pressure.(8Hrs)
Course Outcomes:
• After completing this course, the students should able to recoginize various type of load
applied on machine components of simple geometry and understand the nature of internal
stresses that will develop within the components.
• The students will be able to evaluate the strains and deformation that will results due to
the elastic stresses develop within the material for simple type of loading.
Test Books:
1. Egor P. Popov,Engineering Mechanics of solids,Prentice Hall of india,New Delhi,2001.
2. R.Subramanian, Strength of Materials,Oxford University Press,2007.
Ferdinand P.Been, Russel Johnson Jr and Jhon J.Dewole, Mechanism of materials, Tata
McGrawHill Publication Co. Ltd., New Delhi 2005.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ENGINEERING GEOLOGY
Module 1: Introduction-Branches of geology useful to civil engineering , scope of geological

studies in various civil engineering projects. Department dealing with his subject in India and
their scope of work- GSI, Granite Dimension Stone Cell, NIRM. Mineralogy- Mineral, Origin
and composition. Physical properties of minerals, susceptibility of minerals to alteration, basic of
optical mineralogy,(6 hours)
Module II: Strength Behavior of Rocks- Stress and Strain in rocks. Concept of Rock
Deformation & Tectonics. Dip and Strike. Outcrop and width of outcrop. Inliers and Outliers.
Main types of discontinuities according to size. Fold –Types and nomenclature, Criteria for their
recognition in field . Faults: Classification, recognition in field, effects on outcrops. Joints &
Uncormity; Types, Stresses responsible, geotechnical importance. Importance of structural
elements in engineering operations. Consequences of failure as land sliding, Earthquake and
Subsidence, Strength of Igneous rock structures(6 hours)
Module III: Geological Hazards- Rock Instability and Slope movement:
Concept of sliding blocks. Different controlling factors. Instability in vertical rock structures and
measures to prevent collapse..Types of landslide. Prevention by surface drainage, slope
reinforcement by Rock bolting and Rock Anchoring, retaining wall, Slope treatment. Case study
on black clay. Ground water: Factors controlling water bearing capacity of rock. Previous &
impervious rocks and ground water. Lowering of water table and Subsidence. Earthquake:
Magnitude and intensity of earthquake. Seismic sea waves. Revelation from Seismic Records of
structure of earth. Case Study on Elevation and Subsidence in Himalayan region in India.
Seismic Zone in India.(6 hours)
Module IV: Geology of dam and reservoir site- Required geological consideration for selecting
dam and reservoir site. Failure of Reservoir. Favorable and unfavorable conditions in different
types of rocks in presence of various structural features, precautions to be taken to counteract
unsuitable conditions , significance of discontinuities on the dam site and treatment giving to
such structures.(4 hours)
Module V: Introduction and nature of soils: Soil problems in Civil Engineering, Types of soil,
formation, structure and mineralogical and composition, Physical and Engineering Properties of
soil, Atterberg Limit, Grain size analysis, by sieving and sedimentation, Activity of clay, All
type of Classification of soil, Engineering properties of soil.(6 hours)
Module VI: Soil hydraulic and seepage analysis : Darcy’s law, Measurement of Permeability,
Factors affecting permeability and neutral pressure and effective pressure.(4 hours)
Seepage analysis: Laplace’s equation, methods of obtaining flow nets, flow net for isotropic and
anisotropic soil and their applications.( 3 hours)
Consolidation and compaction: Definition, measurement, mechanism and analysis of data.(4
hours)
Shear strength of soil: Shear strength parameters of soil and laboratory methods for their
determination. Liquefaction of soil.(4 hours)
Suggested Readings:
1. Engineering and General Geology, Prabin Singh, 8th ed.(2010),S K Kataria and sons.
2. Text Books of Engineering Geology, N.Cheena Kesavulu,2nd Edition(2009)
3. Geology for Geotechnical Engineers, J.C.Harvey, Cambridge University Press(1982)
4. Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, B.C.Punmia, Laxmi Publication
5. Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, Gopal Ranjan, A.S.R. Rao, New Age Publisher
6. Advanced Soil Mechanics, B.M.Das,Taylor and Francis.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
L T P CR.
2 0 0 0
Module-1
Module-II
Module-III
Module-IV (4 Hrs)
(4 Hrs)
Module-V
Module-VI (4 Hrs)
Module-VII

Company Delhi
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CIVIL ENGINEERING MATERIAL TESTING LAB
Course code CE301P
List of Experiments
1. Test on Bricks: Shape and size of supplied brick, Water absorption of brick,
Compressive strength of bricks.
2. Test on Fine Aggregates: Moisture Content, Specific Gravity, Bulk Density, Sieve
Analysis
3. Test on Course Aggregates: Fineness modulus, Crushing Values
4. Test on Cement: Fineness of cement, Soundness of given cement, Specific gravity of

cement, Standard consistency of cement, Initial and final setting time of cement.
5. Test on Soil: Sieve Analysis, Specific Gravity, Liquid & Plastic Limits
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FIELD SURVEYING LAB
Course code CE 302P
List of Experiments
1. Study of different Levels and Leveling staff. Practice for temporary adjustment.
To find out the reduced levels of given points using Dumpy level. (Reduction by
Height of Collimation method)
2. Study of a Tilting (LOP.) Level and to find out the levels of given points
(Reduction of data by Rise and Fall method).
3. Visit to Lab, For the study of:-
(a) Map in the making p Survey of India publication
(b) Conventional Symbol charts and different types of maps
4. To establish a Benchmark by Check Leveling with a LOP. level and 'closing the
work at the staring Bench mark.
5. To perform Fly Leveling with a LO.P. Level.
6. To draw the longitudinal rid cross- sections profiles along a given route.
7. Practice for Temporary adjustments of a Vernier Theodolite and taking Horizontal
the work at the starting measurements. By Reiteration method.
8. To plot the coordinates at a given scale on Plane Table and their field checking.
9. To solve two Point and Three Point Problems in Plane Tabling.
10. To carry out Triangulation and Trilateration of a given area (2-3 turns are
needed).
---------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------
ENGINEERING GEOLOGY LAB & STRENGTH OF MATERIAL

LAB
Course code CE 303P
ENGINEERING GEOLOGY LAB

List of Experiments
1. Study of rock forming and Economic minerals, study of different rocks
2. Methods of completing the outrop of rocks on a map
3. Drawing the geological sections of geological maps
4. Inter-relation of geological maps rind sections with respect to subsurface Structure.
5. Problems of locating sites of projects like Dams, Tunnels Highways et. In the
geological sections.
STRENGTH OF MATERIAL LAB

List of Experiments
1. Tensile Test: To prepare the tensile test upon the given specimen (Mild Steel).
2. Compression Test To determine the compressive strength of the given specimen.
3. Torsion Test: To perform the Torsion test on given specimen.
4. Impact Test: To determine the impact toughness of. The given material.
5. Brinell hardness Test: To determine the hardness of the given specimen. -
6. Vicker’s Hardness Test: To determine, the hardness of the given specimen.
7. Rockwell Hardness Test: To determine the hardness of the given specimen.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Course code HS301
of life.


➢ Introduction


➢ Introduction
➢ Planning

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE : At least ten experiments are to be performed, minimum

seven experiments should be performed from above list. Remaining
three experiments may either be performed from the above list or
designed & set by the concerned institution as per the scope of the
syllabus

Jharkhand, Ranchi
Civil Engineering
Civil Engineering
Sl. L T P Credit
Course code. Subject
No.
01 CE401 Surveying & Geomatics – II 3 1 0 3
02 CE402 Fluid Mechanics & Fluid Machines 3 1 0 3
03 CE403 Structural Analysis –I 3 1 0 3
04 CE404 Concrete Structure –I 3 1 0 3
06 EN401/ Engineering Economics / Cyber 2 0 0 0
IT402/ Security/Disaster Preparedness &
CE405 Planning
01 CE402P Fluid Mechanics & Fluid Machines Lab 0 0 3 1

02 CE404P Concrete Structure Lab 0 0 3 1
03 CE406P CAD Building Drawing Lab 0 0 3 1
04 EX401 Extra Activities (NSO/NSS/NCC/Yoga
0 0 2 1
05 IN401 Internship/ Tour &
0 0 0 2
Training/Industrial Training
Total credit 21
SURVEYING AND GEOMATICS II
Course Code: CE401
Module I:
Triangulation and Trilateration- Principle of Triangulation& trilateration,Types of
Triangulation, Signals, selection of station &base line, base line measurement, choices-
instruments and accessories, extension of base line, corrections, satellite station, reduction
tocentre,intervisibility,[9hrs]
Module II
Trigonometric levelling: Curvature & Refraction Correction, axis signal corrections. Method
of Single &reciprocal Observations &their relative advantage, (4 hrs)
Module III
Theory of errors and adjustment of figures: Types of errors, theory of propagation of
errors,law of weights, weightedobservation,method to calculate most probable values, least
square, normal equation, method to correlate, adjustment of plane and geodetic figures.[7hrs]
Module IV :
Modern Field Survey Systems: Principle of EDM, types of EDM instruments, Distomat, Total
station- parts, accessories, advantages and application, Measurement of distance using
EDM,Types of waves, modulation of frequency, resolution of ambiguity, Errors in Total station
survey, Introduction to GPS- segment, measurement, errors and biases. [8hrs]
Module V
Photogrammetry Surveying: Introduction, basic concepts, perspective geometry of aerial
photograph, relief and tilt displacements, terrestrial photogrammetry, flight planning,
stereoscopy, ground control extension for photographic mapping- aerial triangulation, No. of
Photographs, mosaic. [6hrs]
Module VI:
Remote Sensing: Introduction and Definition of remote sensing terms, Remote sensing system,
electromagnetic radiation and spectrum, atmospheric window, different types of platforms,
sensors and their characteristics, orbital parameters of a satellite, multi concept in remote
sensing. {Only Introductions of all above} [6hrs]
Text Books-
Elements of photogrammetry by P.R. wolf.
Introduction to remote sensing by J.B. campbell
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FLUID MECHANICS & FLUID MACHINES

Course Code: CE402
Module I: Basic concepts and Definitions- Distinction between a fluid and a solid Density,
Specific weight, Specific gravity, Kinematic and dynamic viscosity, variation of viscosity with
temperature, Newton law of viscosity; vapor pressure, boiling point, cavitations; surface tension,
capillarity, Bulk modulus of elasticity, compressibility (4 hrs)
Module II: Fluid Statics- Fluid Pressure: Pressure at a point, Pascal’s law, pressure variation
with temperature, density and altitude. Piezometer, U-Tube Manometer, Single Column
Manometer, U-Tube Differential Manometer, Micromanometers, pressure gauges, Hydrostatic
pressure and force: horizontal, vertical and Inclined surfaces. Buoyancy and stability of floating
bodies (6 hrs)
Module III: Fluid Kinematics- Classification of fluid flow: steady and unsteady flow; uniform
and non- uniform flow; laminar and turbulent flow; rotational and irrotational flow; compressible
and incompressible flow; ideal and real fluid flow; one, two and three dimensional flows; Stream
line, path line, streak line and stream tube; stream function. velocity potential function. One, two
and three dimensional continuity equations in Cartesian coordinates (6 hrs)
Module IV: Fluid Dynamics – Surface and body forces: Equations of motion- Euler’s equation;
Bernoulli’s equations- derivation; Energy Principle; Practical applications of Bernoulli’s
equation: venturimeter, orifice meter and pitot tube; Momentum principle; Forces exerted by
fluid flow on pipe bend; Vortex Flow – Free and Forced (8 hrs)
Module V: Boundary layer theory, laminar and turbulent flow and flow through pipes (6 hrs)
Module VI: Dimensional Analysis and Dynamics Similitude- Definitions of Reynolds Number,
Froude Number, Mach Number, Weber Number and Euler Number; Buckingham’s π- Theorem .
(4 hrs)
Module VII: Fluid machines; Impact of Jets; Introduction to Turbines and Pumps (8 hrs)
Text/Reference Books:
1. Fluid Mechanics and Machinery, C.S.P. Ojha, R. Berndtsson and P.N. Chandramouli,
Oxford University Press 2010
2. Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics, P.M. Modi and S.M. Seth, Standard Book House.
3. Theory and Applications of Fluid Mechanics, K. Subramanya, Tata McGraw Hill
4. Fluid Mechanics with Engineering Applications, R.L. Daugherty, J.B. Franzini and E.J.
Finnemore, International Student Edition, Mc Graw Hill.
5. Elementary fluid mechanics, Dr. R.J. Garde.
6. Fluid Mechanics, R.K. Bansal.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS I
Course Code: CE403
Module I: Introduction concept of energy principles, safety, sustainable development in

performance; what makes a structure; principles of stability, equilibrium; Materials and
Structural Design. Introduction to the analysis and design of structural systems. Analyses of
determinate and indeterminate trusses, beams and frames, and design philosophies for
structural engineering. Laboratory experiments dealing with the analysis of determinate and
indeterminate structures: (8 hrs)
Module II : Planning and Design Process; Materials, Loads and Design Safety; Behaviour
and Properties of Concrete and Steel; Wind and Earthquake Loads System Design Concepts
Design Project Discussions; Cable Structures; Prestressed Concrete Bridges; Constructability
and Structural Control; Fire Protecton (6 hrs)
Module III: Trusses: General theory; Classification, solution of plane determinate trusses,
principle of virtual work and their applications for determination of deflection of determinate
plane trusses (6 hrs)
Module IV: Three pinned structures, calculation of bending moment shear force axial force
for three hinged arches and diagram of the same. Dead load, stress in three pinned
determinate trusses (6 hrs)
Module V: Influence line, basic concepts of moving load and influence line, influence line
for actions; shear force and bending moments of determinate beams; absolute maximum
shearing forces and bending moment; influence lines for three hinged arches. (6 hrs)
Module VI: Analysis of structure by unit load method and conjugate beam method;
Continuous and fixed beam: Theorem of three moments; analysis of fixed beams; settlement
of support. (8 hrs)
Suggested Readings:
1. Smith, J.C., Structural Analysis, Harpor and Row, Publishers, New York.
2. Structural Analysis I and II S.S. Bhavikatti, S.Chand Publishers
3. Theory and Problem in Structural Analysis, L.S. Negi, Tata Mcgraw Hills.
4. Structural Analysis, Ramon, v. Jarquio, CRC Press.
5. Structural Analysis, A. Ghali and A.M. Neville, CRC Press
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CONCRETE STRUCTURE- I
Course Code: CE404
Module I: Study of the strength, behavior, and design of indeterminate reinforced concrete
structures, Load and stresses, load combinations, Working stress and limit state approach. (4
hours)
Module II: Analysis and design of sections in bending – working stress and limit state
method. Rectangular and T- sections, Beams with reinforcement in compression. One-way
slab. Design for shear and bond, Mechanism of shear and bond failure, Design of shear using
limit state concept. Development length of bars; Design of sections in torsion. Design of two-
way slabs; staircase, Placement of reinforcement in slabs; (16 hours)
Module III: Design of stairs and staircase (6 hours)
Module IV: Design of compression members, Short column, Columns with uni-axial and bi-
axial bending; Long columns, use of design charts (8 hours)
Module V: Design of foundation; Wall footing, isolated and combined footing for columns.
All designs to be as per the most recent BIS standards as applicable (8 hours)
Suggested Readings
2. IS 456:2000 and IS 3370 (Part IV), BIS 2000
3. Design of Reinforced Concrete Structure (Limit State), A.K Jain, Nemchand Bros.
4. Limit state design of Reinforced Concrete (II) P.C. Verghese, PHI publisher
5. Limit state Design, B.C. Punmia, Laxmi Publications
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
Course code – EC404
(For Civil , Mech.& Production Engineering).
Module 1: Basic Electronic Components

Module II: Semiconductors, Diode and Transistors:

Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors, Fermi Level, Energy band, P-N Junction Diode,
construction, working, characteristics and diode equation Application of Diode, Rectifier: Half
Wave, Full Wave and Bridge Rectifier, Zener Diode and its Applications, Varactor Diode,
Photodetector, Construction, Working, Modes and Configuration of BJT, Input and Output
Characteristics of all Configurations, Comparison of all Configuration & Modes, BJT as a
Switch and as an Amplifier. JFET Construction, working and characteristics. MOSFET
Construction, working and Characteristics, Types of MOSFET,.
ModuleIII: Digital Electronics Fundamentals:

Difference between analog and digital signals, Boolean algebra, Basic and Universal Gates,
Symbols, Truth tables, logic expressions, Logic simplification using K- map, Logic ICs, half and
full adder/subtractor, multiplexers, demultiplexers, flip-flops, shift registers, counters, Block
diagram of microprocessor/microcontroller and their applications.
ModuleIV: Electronic Instruments:

Measurement of Temperature, RTD, Thermistors, LVDT, Strain Gauge, Piezoelectric
Transducers, Digital Shaft Encoders, Tachometer, Hall effect sensors. Sensors and Transducers
for physical parameters: temperature, pressure, torque, flow. Speed and Position Sensors.
Oscilloscope.
ModuleV: Electronic Communication Systems:

The elements of communication system, IEEE frequency spectrum and Transmission media:
wired and wireless, need of modulation, AM and FM modulation schemes, Mobile
communication systems: cellular concept and block diagram of GSM system, Ultrasonic wave &
its application in distance measurement.
Text Books
TMH Publications.
Pune.
4. Floyd ,” Electronic Devices” Pearson Education 9th edition, 2012.
5. R.P. Jain , “Modern Digital Electronics”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2007.
6. Frenzel, “Communication Electronics: Principles and Applications”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 3rd
Edition, 2001
Reference Books
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CYBER SECURITY

on Cybercrimes.
Overflow.

TEXT BOOK:

REFERENCE BOOK:
Group
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE OUTLINE:
Module -1

importance.
Module -II
Module III

cycle
Module -IV
RECOMMENDED BOOKS:-

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DISASTER PREPAREDNESS & PLANNING
Course Code: CE405
Module 1: Introduction - Concepts and definitions: disaster, hazard, vulnerability, risks-

severity, frequency and details, capacity, impact, prevention, mitigation).
Module 2: Disasters - Disasters classification; natural disasters (floods, draught, cyclones,

volcanoes, earthquakes, tsunami, landslides, coastal erosion, soil erosion, forest fires etc.);
manmade disasters (industrial pollution, artificial flooding in urban areas, nuclear radiation,
chemical spills, transportation accidents, terrorist strikes, etc.); hazard and vulnerability profile
of India, mountain and coastal areas, ecological fragility.
Module 3: Disaster Impacts - Disaster impacts (environmental, physical, social, ecological,

economic, political, etc.); health, psycho-social issues; demographic aspects (gender, age, special
needs); hazard locations; global and national disaster trends; climate change and urban disasters.
Module 4: Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR) - Disaster management cycle – its phases;
prevention, mitigation, preparedness, relief and recovery; structural and non-structural measures;
risk analysis, vulnerability and capacity assessment; early warning systems, Post-disaster
environmental response(water, sanitation, food safety, waste management, disease control,
security, communications); Roles and responsibilities of government, community, local
institutions, NGOs and other stakeholders; Policies and legislation for disaster risk reduction,
DRR programmes in India and the activities of National Disaster Management Authority.
Module 5: Disasters, Environment and Development - Factors affecting vulnerability such as

impact of developmental projects and environmental modifications (including of dams, land-use
changes, urbanization etc.), sustainable and environmental friendly recovery; reconstruction and
development methods.
1. http://ndma.gov.in/ (Home page of National Disaster Management Authority)
2. http://www.ndmindia.nic.in/ (National Disaster management in India, Ministry of Home
Affairs).
3. Pradeep Sahni, 2004, Disaster Risk Reduction in South Asia, Prentice Hall.
4. Singh B.K., 2008, Handbook of Disaster Management: Techniques & Guidelines, Rajat
Publication.
5. Ghosh G.K., 2006, Disaster Management, APH Publishing Corporation
6. Disaster Medical Systems Guidelines. Emergency Medical Services Authority, State of
California,
EMSA no.214, June 2003
7. Inter Agency Standing Committee (IASC) (Feb. 2007). IASC Guidelines on Mental Health
and Psychosocial Support in Emergency Settings. Geneva: IASC
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FLUID MECHANICS & FLUID MACHINES LAB

Course Code: CE402P
List of Experiments
1.To determine experimentally the metacentric height of a ship model
2.To verify the momentum equation experimentally.
3.To determine the coefficient of discharge of an orifice (or a month piece ) of a given shape.
4.Determine the coefficient of velocity and the coefficient and the contraction of the orifice (or
the mouth piece).
5.To verify Darcy's law and to find out the coefficient of permeability of the given medium
6.To study the transition from laminar to turbulent flow and to determine the lower critical
Reynolds number,
7.To study the velocity distribution in a pipe and also compute the discharge by integrating the
velocity profile.
8.To calibrate a venturimeter and to study the variation of coefficient of discharge with the
Reynolds number.
9.To calibrate an orifice meter and study the variation of the coefficient of discharge with the
Reynolds number.
10.To study the variation of friction factor “F” for turbulent flow in smooth and rough commercial
pipes
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CONCRETE STRUCTURE LAB

Course Code: CE404P
List of Experiments
1.Initial drying shrinkage, moisture movement, and coefficient of expansion of concrete.
2.Stress strain curve of concrete.
3.Behavior of under reinforced and over reinforced R.C. beams in flexure.
4.Behavior of R.C. beams, with and without shear reinforcement in shear.
5.Bond strength between steel bar and concrete
a) in a beam specimen and
b) by pull-out test.
6. a) Fineness of cement by Air Permeability method.
b) Soundness of cement by Le-Chatalier's Apparatus
c) Compressive strength of cement.
7. a) water content for standard consistency of cement.
b) Initial and final setting times of cement.
8.Moisture content and bulking of fine aggregate
9.Fineness modulus of coarse and fine aggregates.
10.Workability of cement concrete by
a) Slump test, and b) compaction factor test.
11. Concrete mix design for a given concrete strength and slump by LS. Code method
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CAD BUILDING DRAWING LAB

Course Code: CE406P
List of Experiments
1. Introduction to AutoCAD basic commands, Code provision of IS-696 regarding

Lines, Lettering and Dimensioning.
2. Drawing of Scales (Plane Scales, Diagonal Scales, Vernier Scales and Scales of
Chords),
3. Construction of simple geometrical figures and Engineering curves.
4. Orthographic Projections: Projection of a point situated in various quadrants,
projections of straight lines, true length, true inclinations and traces of a straight lines,
auxiliary projections, auxiliary inclined and Auxiliary vertical planes, projection of
plane figures.
5. Projection of simple solids, Auxiliary projection of solids, section of solids, true
shape of section.
6. Development of surfaces: prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones, spheres, pipe bends.
7. Isometric projection: Principles, Isometric scales, Isometric projection of plane
figures and simple solids.
8. function and types of building (Residential, Industrial and Institutional)
Line plan. Development of plan from a line plan
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE : At least ten experiments are to be performed, minimum
seven experiments should be performed from above list. Remaining
three experiments may either be performed from the above list or
designed & set by the concerned institution as per the scope of the
syllabus
2nd year UG courses Engg & Tech. Jharkhand University Of Technology.

Jharkhand, Ranchi
Electronics and Communication Engineering


Course
Code

EC302P Digital Electronics And Logic Design
02 0 0 3 1
Lab
EX301 Extra Activities (NSO/NSS/NCC/Yoga
04 0 0 2 1
Total credit 21
MATHEMATICS III
COMMON FOR ALL BRANCH) (
L T P CR.
3 1 0 4
Module I
Transformation.
Module II
inverse Fourier Transformation, sine,cosine Transformation, Inverse
Module III
Z-Transformation.
Module IV
Module V
Text Books
Reference Books
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BASIC ELECTRONICS
Course code -EC 301
L T P CR.
3 1 0 3
Module I: Basic Electronic Components

Active and Passive Components, Types of resistors and Colour coding, Capacitors,
Inductors applications of Resistor, Capacitor and Inductor, Relay, LDR, Basic
Integrated Circuits ( IC 7805, 7809, 7812, 555 etc.).Measuring Instruments like
CRO, Power supply, Multi-meters etc.
Module II: Semiconductors

Difference between Insulators, Semiconductors and Conductors, Mobility and
Conductivity, Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors, Fermi Level, Energy band,
Charge Densities in Semiconductors, Mass Action Law, Current Components in
Semiconductors, Drift and Diffusion Current, The Continuity Equation, Injected
Minority Charge Carrier, Hall Effect, P-N Junction Diode, construction, working,
characteristics and diode equation Application of Diode, Rectifier: Half Wave, Full
Wave and Bridge Rectifier, Zener Diode and its Applications, Varactor Diode,
Schottky Diode, Regulated Power Supply using Zener Diode and Regulated ICs,
LED, Photodetector.
Module III: Transistors

Construction, Working, Modes and Configuration of BJT, Input and Output
Characteristics of all Configurations, Comparison of all Configuration & Modes,
BJT as a Switch and as an Amplifier..h –parameter, JFET Construction, working
and characteristics. MOSFET Construction, working and Characteristics, Types of
MOSFET.
Module IV: Power electronic devices & Communication engineering

Construction, characteristics and working of SCR, DIAC, TRIAC and UJT.
Introduction, Characteristics and applications of Operational Amplifier (IC741).
Modulation and its types.

Number systems and conversion (DECIMAL, OCTAL,
HEXADECIMAL,BINARY, BCD etc.),binary addition and subtraction, Logic
Gates and their truth-table ,Boolean algebra .Design of Single Stage Amplifier,
LED Driver Circuit, Infrared Transmitter Receiver Circuit, LDR Driver Circuit,
Relay Driver Circuit, Square Wave and Fix Frequency Generator using 555 IC.
Text Books
TMH Publications.
Pune.
Reference Books
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

(ECE, CSE, IT)
Course code -EC 302
L T P CR.
3 1 0 3

Analog and Digital, Binary Number System. Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication,
Division of binary numbers, Subtraction using 2’s complement method. Binary
codes: weighted and non weighted codes, self complementary codes, BCD,
Excess-3, Gray codes, Alphanumeric codes, ASCII Codes. Boolean algebra:
Boolean Laws and Expression using Logic
Gates, Realization of different gates using Universal gates, DeMorgan’s Theorem,
Duality Theorems.
Module II: Boolean function minimization Techniques
Standard forms: SOP, POS, Simplification of Switching function & representation
(Maxterm & Minterm), Boolean expression & representation using logic gates,
Propagation delay in logic gate. Karnaugh map: K-map(up to 5 variables),
mapping and minimization of SOP and POS expression, Don’t care condition,
conversion from SOP to POS and POS to SOP form using K-map, Minimization of
multiple output circuits, Quine Mc-cluskey method minimization technique, prime
implicant table, Don’t care condition.

Adder & Subs tractor (Half and Full), Parallel Binary adder, BCD Adder, Binary
multipliers, Code Converters, parity bit generator, Comparators, Decoder, BCD to
7-segment Decoder, Encoders, Priority Encoders, Multiplexers, De Multiplexers.
Module IV: Sequential Circuits Elements
Introduction to sequential circuit, Flip-flop & Timing Circuits: SR latch, Gated
latch, Tri state logic, Edge triggered flip-plop: - D, JK, T Flip-flop, flip-flop
asynchronous inputs ,characteristic table of Flip-flop, excitation table of Flip-flop,
master slave JK flip flop, inter conversion of Flip-flop. Study of timing parameters
of flip-flop. Shift registers: buffer register, controlled buffer register. Data
transmission in shift resistor SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, Bidirectional shift register,
universal shift registers. Counter: Classification, Ripple or asynchronous counter,
Effect of propagation delay in ripple counters, up-down counter, Design of Mod-n
counter, synchronous counter, Ring counter, Johnson counter. Introduction to
FSM. Design of synchronous FSM, Algorithmic State Machines charts. Designing
synchronous circuits like Pulse train generator.

Logic Families and Semiconductor Memories: TTL NAND gate, Specifications,
Noise margin, Propagation delay, fan-in, fan-out, Tristate TTL, ECL, CMOS
families and their interfacing, Memory elements, Concept of Programmable logic
devices like FPGA, Logic implementation using Programmable Devices VLSI
Design flow: Design entry, Schematic, FSM & HDL, different modeling styles in
VHDL, Data types and objects, Dataflow, Behavioral and Structural Modeling,
Synthesis and Simulation VHDL constructs and codes for combinational and
sequential circuits
Text Books :
Reference Books:
2. A.P. Malvino, D.P. Leach ‘Digital Principles & Applicatios’ -VIth Edition-TMH
publication.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NETWORK THEORY
(ECE, EEE, EE)
Course code -EE 302
L T P CR.
3 1 0 3
Module I: Circuit Fundamentals

Voltage sources, Current sources, Conversion of voltage sources to current sources
and vice a versa. Network terminology :- Node, Junction, Branch, Loop, Network
solution by branch current method, Loop or Mesh current method, Node voltage
method, Star delta connection and conversion. Node and Mesh Analysis, matrix
approach of network containing voltage and current sources, and reactance’s,
source transformation and duality. Network theorems: Superposition, reciprocity,
Thevenin’s, Norton’s, Maximum power Transfer, compensation and Tallegen's
theorem as applied to AC, circuits. Trigonometric and exponential Fourier series:
Discrete spectra and symmetry of waveform, steady state response of a network to
non-sinusoidal periodic inputs, power factor, effective values, Fourier transform
and continuous spectra, three phase unbalanced circuit and power calculation.
Module II: Resonance Circuits

Series resonance circuit, Frequency response of a series resonant circuit, Q factor,
Bandwidth, selectivity, Effect of Q on bandwidth and selectivity, Relation between
bandwidth and Q, Impedance of a series resonant circuit, Resonance by variation
of L and C, Parallel resonant circuit and effect of resistance of a capacitance,
Frequency response of parallel resonant circuit.
Module III: Two- Port Network

Two- port network parameters, r, y, z, h, A B C D relation between the parameters,
Inter-conversion of two port networks, cascade connection series connection, series
parallel connection, T and M network representation of a two port network.
Module IV: Network Functions

Laplace transform, Transform of a voltage and current, Transform of circuit
elements, Network functions, Poles and zeros of the network functions, Pole zero
plot,Physical significance of poles and zeroes, Stability, Two-port network
parameters in the frequency domain Transient response: - step input response in
RL circuit, step input response in R-C circuit, step input response in
R-L-C circuit, ac transients.
Module V: filters and attenuators
Definitions, classification and characteristics of different filters, filter fundamentals
such as attenuation constant(alpha), phase shift (beta), propagation constant
(gamma), characteristic impedance (Zo), decibel, neper. Design and analysis of
constant K, M derived and composite filters (low pass, high pass, band pass, and
band stop filters): T and PI sections. Definitions, classification, relation between
neper and decibel, analysis and design of T type, PI type, alpha lattice, bridged –T
and L types attenuators.
Text Books:
1. "A.Sudhakar, Shymmohan S. Palli, ‗Circuit and Network – Analysis and Synthesis‘, 3 rd
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publication.
2. Van, Valkenburg; “Network analysis”; Prentice hall of India, 2000.
3. A. Chakrabarti, ‗Circuit theory (Analysis and Synthesis)‘, IIIrd edition, Dhanpat Rai and Co.
Reference Books:
1. D. Roy Choudhuri, ‗Networks and Systems‘, New Age International Publisher.
2. M.E.Van Valkenburg Network Analysis‘, IIIrd edition, Pearsons Education/PHI.
3.Josheph Edministrar, ‗Theory and Problems of Electronic Circuit (Schaum‘s Series) – Tata
McGraw Hill Publication.
4. Soni Gupta, ‗Electrical Circuit Analysis‘, Dhanpat Rai and Co.
5. Boylestad, ‗Introductory Circuit Analysis‘, Universal Book Stall, New
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD THEORY

(ECE, EEE, EE)
Course code -EE 303
L T P CR.
3 1 0 3
Module I: Coordinate Systems and Transformation:

Basics of Vectors: Addition, subtraction and multiplications; Cartesian,
Cylindrical, Spherical transformation. Vector calculus: Differential length, area
and volume, line surface and volume integrals, Del operator, Gradient, Divergence
of a vector, Divergence theorem, Curl of a vector, Stokes’s theorem, Laplacian of a
scalar.
Module II: Electrostatic fields:

Coulombs law and field intensity, Electric field due to charge distribution, Electric
flux density, Gausses’ Law- Maxwell’s equation, Electric dipole and flux line,
Energy density in electrostatic fields, Electric field in material space: Properties of
materials, convection and conduction currents, conductors, polarization in
dielectrics, Dielectric-constants, Continuity equation and relaxation time, boundary
conditions, Electrostatic boundary value problems: Poisson’s and Laplace’s
equations., Methods of Images.
Module III: Magneto Statics:

Magneto-static fields, Biot - Savart’s Law, Ampere’s circuit law, Maxwell’s
equation, Application of ampere’s law, Magnetic flux density- Maxwell’s
equation, Maxwell’s equation for static fields, magnetic scalar and vector potential.
Module IV: Magnetic Forces:

Materials and devices, Forces due to magnetic field, Magnetic torque and moment,
a magnetic dipole. Magnetization in materials, Magnetic boundary conditions,
Inductors and inductances, Magnetic energy.
Module V: Waves and Applications:

Maxwell’s equation, Faraday’s Law, transformer and motional electromotive
forces, Displacement current, Maxwell’s equation in final form Electromagnetic
wave propagation: Wave propagation in loss dielectrics, Plane waves in lossless
dielectrics Plane wave in free space. Plain waves in good conductors, Power and
the pointing vector, Reflection of a plain wave in a normal incidence. Transmission
Lines, and Smith Chart.
Text Book:
1. MNO Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetic’, Oxford University Press.
Reference Books:
1. WH Hayt and JA Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetic”, McGraw- Hill Education.
2. Antenna and wave propagation by k.d parsad satya prakashan.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
L T P CR.
2 0 0 0
Module-1
Module-II
Module-III
Module-IV (4 Hrs)
(4 Hrs)
Module-V
Module-VI (4 Hrs)
Module-VII

Company Delhi
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BASIC ELECTRONICS LAB

(ECE, EEE, EE)
Course code -EC 301P

1. Identification and testing of Resistors, Inductors, Capacitors, PN-Diode. Zener Diode, LED,
LCD, LDR, BJT, Photo Diode, Photo Transistor,
2. Measurement of voltage and current using multimeter ,Measure the frequency and Amplitude
of a signal with the help of CRO and function generator.
3. Study of p-n junction diode AND Zener Diode I-V characteristics
4. Assemble the single phase half wave and full wave bridge rectifier & the analyze effect of
capacitor as a filter(only study of waveforms).
5. Study of Zener diode as voltage regulator.
6. Measurement & study of input characteristics of a BJT in CB configuration.
7. Measurement and study of characteristics of JFET and MOSFET
8. To design and simulate IR Transmitter and Receiver Circuit.
9. To design and simulate Motor Driver using Relay.
10. To design and simulate Light detector using LDR.
11. To design and simulate Constant frequency square wave generator using.
12. To design and simulate 5 volt DC power supply from 230 AC.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

(ECE, CSE, IT)
Course code EC 302P

12. Write VHDL programs for the following circuits, check the wave forms and the
hardware generated a. multiplexer b. demultiplexer
syllabus. For VHDL Xilinx software may be used.
=====================================================================
=====================================================================
NETWORK THEORY LAB

(ECE, EEE, EE)
Course code -EE 302P

1. Transient response of RC circuit.
2. Transient response of RL circuit.
3. To find the resonance frequency, Band width of RLC series circuit.
4. To study and verify effect of R on frequency response of parallel resonance circuit.
5. To calculate and verify "Z" parameters of a two port network.
6. To calculate and verify "Y" parameters of a two port network.
7. To determine equivalent parameter of parallel connections of two port network.
8. To plot the frequency response of low pass filter and determine half-power frequency.
9. To plot the frequency response of high pass filters and determines the half-power frequency.
10. To plot the frequency response of band-pass filters and determines the band-width.
11. To calculate and verify "ABCD" parameters of a two port network.
12. To synthesize a network of a given network function and verify its response.
13. Introduction of P-Spice or other simulation software
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Course code HS301
of life.


➢ Introduction


➢ Introduction
➢ Planning

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Jharkhand, Ranchi

Electronics & Communication Engineering

Sl. Course
No. code
02 EC402 Analog Communication 3 1 0 3
03 EE403 Signals And Systems 3 1 0 3
04 EE404 Microprocessor And Interfacing 3 1 0 3
EN401/
06 Engineering Economics/Cyber Security 2 0 0 0
IT402
01 EC401P Analog Electronics And Circuits Lab 0 0 3 1

02 EC402P Analog Communication Lab 0 0 3 1
03 EE404P Microprocessor And Interfacing Lab 0 0 3 1
04 0 0 2 1
05 0 0 0 2
Training
Total credit 21
ANALOG ELECTRONICS AND CIRCUITS
Course Code- EC401
Module 1: Diode & Transistor Circuits:

P-N junction diode, I-V characteristics of a diode, review of half-wave and full-wave rectifiers,
Zener diodes, clamping and clipping circuits. Amplifier models, Voltage amplifier, current
amplifier, transconductance amplifier and trans-resistance amplifier. Biasing schemes for BJT
and FET amplifiers, bias stability, various configurations (such as CE/CS, CB/CG, CC/CD) and
their features, small signal analysis, low frequency transistor models, estimation of
voltage gain, input resistance, output resistance etc., design procedure for particular
specifications, low frequency analysis of multistage amplifiers, high-frequency equivalent
circuits.
Module II: Oscillators, DAC & ADC:

Review of the basic concept, Barkhausen criterion, RC oscillators (phase shift, Wien bridge
etc.), LC oscillators (Hartley, Colpitt, Clapp etc.), non-sinusoidal oscillators. Digital-to-analog
converters (DAC) Weighted resistor, R-2R ladder, resistor string etc., Analog to-digital
converters (ADC): Single slope, dual slope, successive approximation, flash etc.
Module III: MOSFET Circuits:

MOSFET structure and I-V characteristics, MOSFET as a switch, MOSFET as an amplifier:
small signal model and biasing circuits, common-source, common-gate and common-drain
amplifiers; small signal equivalent circuits - gain, input and output impedances, trans-
conductance, high frequency equivalent circuit.
Module IV: Differential, multi-stage and operational amplifiers:

Differential amplifier; power amplifier; direct coupled multi-stage amplifier; internal structure of
an operational amplifier, ideal op-amp, non-idealities in an op-amp (Output offset voltage, input
bias current, input offset current, slew rate, gain bandwidth product)
Module V: Linear & Nonlinear applications of op-amp:

Idealized analysis of op-amp circuits, Inverting and non-inverting amplifier, Differential
amplifier, Instrumentation amplifier, Integrator, Active filter, P, PI and PID controllers and
lead/lag compensator using an op-amp, Voltage regulator, Oscillators (Wein bridge and phase
shift).Analog to Digital Conversion. Hysteretic Comparator, Zero Crossing Detector, Square-
wave and triangular-wave generators, Precision rectifier, peak detector, Monoshot.
Text Books :
1. A. S. Sedra and K. C. Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits”, New York, Oxford University Press,
1998.
2. J. V. Wait, L. P. Huelsman and G. A. Korn, “Introduction to Operational Amplifier theory and
applications”, McGraw Hill U. S., 1992.
3. J. Millman and A. Grabel, “Microelectronics”, McGraw Hill Education, 1988.
Reference Books:
1. P. Horowitz and W. Hill, “The Art of Electronics”, Cambridge University Press, 1989.
2. P. R. Gray, R. G. Meyer and S. Lewis, “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”,
John Wiley & Sons, 2001
3. Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits by A. Gayakwad, Pearson Publication
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ANALOG COMMUNICATION
Course Code- EC402
Module I: Introduction
Block schematic of communication system, Electromagnetic Spectrum, Necessity of modulation,
Types of modulation – AM, FM, PM and Pulse Modulation. Noise types ( Internal & External),
Signal to Noise ratio, Noise factor, Noise figure, Noise Resistance, Noise Temperature, Noise
factor of Amplifiers in Cascade(Numerical expected)
Module II: Amplitude Modulation
Amplitude Modulation principle, AM envelope, frequency spectrum & BW, phase representation
of AM wave, Modulation index, % modulation, Power relations in AM (Numerical expected)
AM modulating circuits: Low level AM modulation, medium power AM modulation,AM
transmitters: Block diagram of low level DSBFC, High level DSBFC, Trapezoidal patterns, SSB
Principles, Balanced modulator, SSB Generation Methods: Filter system, phase shift & third
method ,Independent sideband system (ISB),Vestigial sideband(VSB)
Module III: Angle Modulation
Theory of frequency and phase modulation, mathematical analysis, FM and PM waveforms,
frequency deviation and percentage modulation, deviation sensitivity, deviation ratio ,phase
deviation and modulation index, frequency analysis of angle modulated wave-Bessel function,
BW requirements, Narrow band & wide band FM, FM modulators(Direct & Indirect) , Noise and
angle modulation, Pre-emphasis and de-emphasis.
Module IV: Pulse Modulation
Pulse amplitude modulation, Sampling theorem , types :Natural & flat top, PAM modulation
Demodulation, TDM and FDM, Crosstalk in TDM, PWM modulator & demodulator, PPM
modulators & demodulator.
Module V: Digital Modulation Schemes & AM/FM Receiver
Digital modulation schemes- phase shift keying, frequency shift keying, quadrature amplitude
modulation, continuous phase modulation and minimum shift keying. Simplified block diagram
of AM receiver, receiver parameters: Sensitivity, Selectivity, BW, dynamic range, fidelity, Types
of AM receiver: TRF and superhetrodyne (block diagram), Block diagram, Double conversion
FM receivers.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. George Kennedy, ‘Electronics Communication System’--Tata McGraw Hill Publication.
2. Wayne Tomasi, ‘Electronics Communication Systems Fundamentals through
Advanced’ - Pearson Education.
3. Haykin S., "Communications Systems," John Wiley and Sons, 2001.
4. Proakis J. G. and Salehi M., "Communication Systems Engineering," PearsonEducation,2002.
5. R P Singh, S D Sapre ‘Communication System-Analog & Digital’ 2nd Edition –
TMHPublication
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Dennis Roddy, John Coolen, ‘Electronics Communications ‘4th Edition-Pearson Education
2. Louis E. Frenzel, ‘Principles of Electronic Communication Systems’ -Tata McGraw Hill
3. Taub H. and Schilling D.L., "Principles of Communication Systems,” Tata McGrawHill,2001.
4. Barry J. R., Lee E. A. and Messerschmitt D. G., “Digital Communication,”KluwerAcademic
Publishers, 2004.
5. Abhay Gandhi, “Analog and Digital Communication,” Cengage publication, 2015.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

Course Code- EE 403
Module I: Introduction to Signals and Systems:

Signals and systems as seen in everyday life, and in various branches of engineering and
science. Signal properties: periodicity, absolute integrability, determinism and stochastic
character. Some special signals of importance: the unit step, the unit impulse, the sinusoid, the
complex exponential, some special time-limited signals; continuous and discrete time signals,
continuous and discrete amplitude signals. System properties: linearity: additivity and
homogeneity, shift-invariance, causality, stability, realizability. Examples.
Module II: Behavior of continuous and discrete-time LTI systems:

Impulse response and step response, convolution, input-output behavior with aperiodic
convergent inputs, cascade interconnections. Characterization of causality and stability of LTI
systems. System representation through differential equations and difference equations. State-
space Representation of systems. State-Space Analysis, Multi-input, multi-output representation.
State Transition Matrix and its Role. Periodic inputs to an LTI system, the notion of a frequency
response and its relation to the impulse response.
Module III: Fourier Transforms:

Fourier series representation of periodic signals, Waveform Symmetries, Calculation of Fourier
Coefficients. Fourier Transform, convolution/multiplication and their effect in the frequency
domain, magnitude and phase response, Fourier domain duality. The Discrete-Time Fourier
Transform (DTFT) and the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). Parseval's Theorem.
Module IV: Laplace and z- Transforms:

Review of the Laplace Transform for continuous time signals and systems, system functions,
poles and zeros of system functions and signals, Laplace domain analysis, solution to differential
equations and system behavior. The z-Transform for discrete time signals and systems, system
functions, poles and zeros of systems and sequences, z-domain analysis.
Module V: Sampling and Reconstruction:

The Sampling Theorem and its implications. Spectra of sampled signals. Reconstruction: ideal
interpolator, zero-order hold, first-order hold. Aliasing and its effects. Relation between
continuous and discrete time systems. Introduction to the applications of signal and system
theory: modulation for communication, filtering, feedback control systems.
Text Books :
1. A. V. Oppenheim, A. S. Willsky and S. H. Nawab, “Signals and systems”, Prentice Hall India,
1997.
2. J. G. Proakis and D. G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms, and
Applications”, Pearson, 2006.
3. H. P. Hsu, “Signals and systems”, Schaum’s series, McGraw Hill Education, 2010.
Reference Books :
1. S. Haykin and B. V. Veen, “Signals and Systems”, John Wiley and Sons, 2007.
2. A. V. Oppenheim and R. W. Schafer, “Discrete-Time Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall, 2009.
3. M. J. Robert “Fundamentals of Signals and Systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2007.
4. B. P. Lathi, “Linear Systems and Signals”, Oxford University Press, 2009
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MICROPROCESSOR AND INTERFACING

Course Code- EE404
Module I: Architecture & Programming of 8085:

Functional block diagram—Registers, ALU, Bus systems. Pin configuration, Timing and control
signals, Machine cycle and timing diagrams. Interrupts—Types of interrupt, interrupt structure,
Instruction format, Addressing modes, Instruction set. Development of assembly language
programs.
Module II: Interfacing Devices:

(a). The 8255 PPI chip: Architecture, pin configuration, control words, modes and Interfacing
with 8085. (b). The 8254 PIC chip: Architecture, pin configuration, control words and
Interfacing with 8085. Interrupt and DMA Controller (a). The 8259 Interrupt controller chip:
Architecture, pin configuration and control words only (b).The 8257 DMA controller chip:
Architecture, pin configuration and control words only.
Module III : Architecture & Programming of 8086:
Functional block diagram of 8086, details of sub-blocks such as EU, BIU, memory
segmentation, physical address computations, pin configuration, program relocation, Minimum
and Maximum modes of 8086— Block diagrams and machine cycles. Interrupts—Types of
interrupt, interrupt structure. Instruction format, Addressing modes, Instruction set. Development
of assembly language programs Assembler directives.
Module IV: 8051 Microcontroller :

8-bit Microprocessor and Microcontroller architecture, Comparison of 8-bit microcontrollers, 16-
bit and 32-bit microcontrollers, Definition of embedded system and its characteristics, Role of
microcontrollers in embedded Systems Overview of the 8051family. 8051 - Internal Block
Diagram, CPU, ALU, address, data and control bus, Working registers, SFRs, Clock and RESET
circuits, Stack and Stack Pointer, Program Counter, I/O ports, Memory Structures, Data and
Program Memory, Timing diagrams and Execution Cycles.
Module V: Instruction Set and Programming of 8051:

Addressing modes: Introduction, Instruction syntax, Data types, Subroutines Immediate
addressing, Register addressing, Direct addressing, Indirect addressing, Relative addressing,
Indexed addressing, Bit inherent addressing, bit direct addressing. 8051 Instruction set, data
transfer instructions, Arithmetic instructions, Logical instructions, Branch instructions,
Subroutine instructions, Bit manipulation instruction .
Text Books :
1. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming & Applications with 8085 : Ramesh S Gaonkar;
Wiley Eastern Ltd.
2. Microprocessor and applications – A.K.Ray.
3. M .A.Mazidi, J. G. Mazidi and R. D. McKinlay, “The8051Microcontroller and Embedded
Systems: Using Assembly and C”,Pearson Education,2007.
4. K. J. Ayala, “8051 Microcontroller”, Delmar CengageLearning,2004.
5. R. Kamal, “Embedded System”, McGraw Hill Education,2009.
Reference Books:
1. Microprocessors and interfacing : Hall; TMH
2. The 8088 & 8086 Microprocessors-Programming, interfacing, Hardware & Applications :
Triebel & Singh; PHI
3. Microprocessors and Interfacing, Sanjeev Kumar, Sun India’s Publication
4. Advanced Microprocessors and Interfacing : Badri Ram; TMH
6. D. V. Hall, “Microprocessors & Interfacing”, McGraw Hill Higher Education,1991.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------.
(Course code -CS 301)
Module I
Basic concepts and notations: Data structures and data structure operations, Complexity
Analysis: Mathematical notation and functions, algorithmic complexity and time space trade off,
Big O Notation, The best, average & worst cases analysis of various algorithms. Arrays: Linear
& Multidimensional Arrays, Representation & traversal. Sorting algorithms: Bubble sort,
Selection sort, Insertion sort, Merge sort and Quick sort, Counting Sort. Linear search and Binary
search on sorted arrays.
Module II
Abstract Data Types (ADTs) Stack: Push; Pop, stack representation using array and linked list,
Applications of Stack, Recursion. Queue: Representation using array and linked list, Insertion
and deletion operations, circular queue, Dequeue, priority queue. Linked Lists & their types
(Single, Double, Circular linked lists), Operations on Varieties of Linked Lists (Search and
Update) with applications
Module III
Introduction to Trees, Binary tree - definitions and properties; binary tree traversal algorithms
with and without recursion., Binary Search Tree - creation, insertion and deletion operations,
Threaded tree (One way and Two way). AVL tree balancing; B-tree
Module IV
Graph Algorithms: Graphs and their Representations, Graph Traversal Techniques: Breadth First
Search (BFS) and Depth First Search (DFS), Applications of BFS and DFS, Minimum Spanning
Trees (MST), Prim’s and Kruskal’s algorithms for MST, Connected Components, Dijkstra’s
Algorithm for Single Source Shortest Paths,, Floydd’s Algorithm for All-Pairs Shortest Paths
Problem
UNIT-5
Hashing techniques, Hash function, Address calculation techniques- common hashing functions
Collision resolution, Linear probing, quadratic probing, double hashing, Bucket addressing.
Rehashing
Text Books:
2. Introduction to Data Structures with Applications by J. Tremblay and P. G. Sorenson
(TMH)
4. Data Structures and Algorithms in C, M.T. Goodrich, R. Tamassia and D. Mount, Wiley India.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

India.
7. Data Structure with C, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited by Seymour
Lipschutz.
9. Data Structure and algorithm Analysis in C 2nd Edition, PEARSON Publishing House,
Mark Allen Weiss
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CYBER SECURITY

on Cybercrimes.
Overflow.
TEXT BOOK:

REFERENCE BOOK:
Group
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE OUTLINE:
Module -1

importance.
Module -II
Module III

cycle
Module -IV
RECOMMENDED BOOKS:-

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ANALOG ELECTRONICS & CIRCUITS LAB

Course Code- EC 401P

1. Design & study of half wave and full wave rectifier and calculation its various parameters.
2. Design and study of clipper and clamper circuit.
3. Design & Implement Transistor as a switch.
4. To study the input & output characteristics of common emitter configuration.
5. Design & measure the frequency response of an RC coupled amplifier using discrete
components. (Draw Gain vs frequency response curve on semilog graph paper).
6. Design a two stage RC coupled amplifier and determine the effect of cascading on gain and
bandwidth
7. Design & study of RC Oscillator.
8. Design & realize inverting amplifier, non-inverting and buffer amplifier using 741 Op Amp.
9. Verify the operation of a differentiator circuit using 741 op amp and show that it acts as a
high pass filter.
10. Verify the operation of a integrator circuit using 741 op amp and show that it acts as a low
pass filter.
11. Design and verify the operations of op amp adder and subtractor circuits.
12. To design and realize Schmitt trigger using op amp 741.
13. Design & realize Wein -bridge oscillator using op amp 741.
14. To design & realize square wave generator using op amp 741.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ANALOG COMMUNICATION LAB

Course Code- EC 402P
1. Study of Amplitude Modulation (A.M.)

2. Study of Frequency Modulation.(F.M.)
3. Study of AM Detection.
4. Study of SSB Modulation & Demodulation.
5. Study of DSB Modulation & Demodulation.
6. Study of FM Demodulation.
7. Sampling and Reconstruction.
8. Study of Pulse Amplitude Modulation & Demodulation.
9. Study of Pulse Width Modulation& Demodulation.
10. Study of Pulse Position Modulation & Demodulation.
11. Study of PAM-TDM.
12. Study of AM Receiver Characteristics.( Sensitivity, Selectivity & Fidelity)
13. Visit to radio station (AM/FM) or any local communication center /mobile tower
(Visit to radio station is compulsory. Student should attach report of visit in practical file)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MICROPROCESSOR AND INTERFACING LAB

Course Code- EE404P
1. Study of 8085 Microprocessor kit.

2. Write a program using 8085 and verify for : a. Addition of two 8-bit numbers. b. Addition of
two 8-bit numbers (with carry) and write a program using 8085 and verify for : a. 8-bit
subtraction (display borrow) b. 16-bit subtraction (display borrow).
3. Write a program using 8085 for multiplication of two 8- bit numbers by repeated addition
method. Check for minimum number of additions and test for typical data and write a program
using 8085 for multiplication of two 8- bit numbers by bit rotation method and verify.
4. Write a program using 8085 for division of two 8- bit numbers by repeated subtraction method
and test for typical data and write a program using 8085 for dividing two 8- bit numbers by bit
rotation method and test for typical data.
5. Write a program using 8086 and verify for: a. Finding the largest number from an array. b.
Finding the smallest number from an array.
6. Write a program using 8086 for arranging an array of numbers in descending order and verify
and write a program using 8086 for arranging an array of numbers in ascending order and verify.
7. Write a program for finding square of a number using look-up table and verify. .
8. Write a program to interface a two digit number using seven-segment LEDs. Use 8085/8086
microprocessor and 8255 PPI.
9. Write a program to control the operation of stepper motor using 8085/8086 microprocessor
and 8255 PPI.
10. . Study of 8051 Micro controller kit/programming software.
11. Write a program using 8051 and verify for : a. Addition of two 8-bit numbers. b. Addition of
two 8-bit numbers (with carry) and write a program using 8051 and verify for : a. 8-bit
subtraction (display borrow) b. 16-bit subtraction (display borrow).
12. Write a program using 8051 for multiplication of two 8- bit numbers by repeated addition
method. Check for minimum number of additions and test for typical data and write a program
using 8051 for multiplication of two 8- bit numbers by bit rotation method and verify.
13. Write a program using 8051 for blinking of two LED with suitable delay.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
JHARKHAND UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY, RANCHI
MINING ENGINEERING
B. Tech, Semester III (Second year]
Course Structure
3rd Semester Course Structure

Course Hours per week
Sl. No. Course Title Credits
Code L T P
THEORY
1. Mathematics-III 3 1 0 4
2. Mining Geology 3 1 0 3
3. MaterialsEngineering 3 1 0 3
4. Surveying and Geomatics - I 3 1 0 3
Introduction to Mining
5. MN301 3 1 0 3
Technology
6. Environmental Science 2 0 0 0
PRACTICAL
7. MiningGeology Lab 0 0 3 1
8. Field Surveying Lab 0 0 3 1
9. Communication Skill Lab 0 0 2 1
Introduction to Mining
10. MN301P 0 0 3 1
Technology - Lab
Extra-Curricular Activity – III

(NSO/NSS/NCC/YOGA/CREAT
11. 0 0 2 1
IVE ARTS /
Mini Project etc.)
Total 17 5 13 21
1
INTRODUCTION TO MINING
MN301 TECHNOLOGY 3L:1T:0P 3 Credits
Course Objective
When the students enter the college to pursue a degree in Mining Engineering and as well pursue
a career in Mining Engineering after graduation, they need to understand the breadth and depth
available in this field for possible engagement. When many alternative disciplines of engineering
appear to offer apparently more glamorous avenues for advancement, the Mining Engineering
student should realize the potentials available in this engineering discipline. The students should
understand the enormous possibilities available for creative and innovative works in this all-
pervasive field of engineering.
This course is designed to address the following:
• to give an understanding to the students of the vast breadth and numerous areas of
engagement available in the overall field of Mining Engineering
• to motivate the student to pursue a career in one of the many areas of Mining Engineering
with deep interest and keenness.
• To expose the students to the various avenues available for doing creative and innovative
work in this field by showcasing the many monuments and inspiring projects of public
utility.
Proposed Syllabus
Definition and scope of mining: Mining as a basic industry, definition of mining terms.
Economic importance of mining, Social and environmental impact of mining.
Principle of boring and purpose of boreholes; methods of boring; rotary and percussive
boring methods borehole deflection and deviation.
Explosives and Blasting: Definition, Classification, Basic ideas about coal and rock
drilling, basic ideas about the use of explosives in rock breaking concerning shaft
sinking, drifting and drivages of adit.
Opening of mineral deposits: Types of mine opening, selection, location, shape and size
of different types of opening, drivage methods for adits and incline drifts and cycle of
operation, support of incline drift and their mouth.
Shaft sinking: Conventional methods of shaft sinking, shaft lining (temporary and
permanent), surface arrangements, ventilation, pumping and illumination arrangement
during shaft sinking, shaft fittings. Pit top and Pit bottom layouts Opening and
development of mineral deposits, method of working, ventilation, transportation, hoisting
and dispatch.
2
Introduction to common extraction method of underground mineral deposit: Coal: Bord
and Pillar method, Longwall method Metal: Various stoping methods like open stoping,
cut and fill stoping, shrinkage stoping, sub level stoping, block caving etc.
Overview of Surface Mining: Types of surface mine, unit operation, basic bench
geometry, applicability and limitation, advantages and disadvantages.
Modules
Module 1: Definition and scope of mining:

Mining as a basic industry, definition of mining terms. Economic importance of
mining, Social and environmental impact of mining.
Module 2: Boring:
Principle of boring and purpose of boreholes; methods of boring; rotary and
percussive boring methods borehole deflection and deviation.
Module 3: Explosivesand Blasting:

Definition, Classification, Basic ideas about coal and rock drilling, basic ideas
about the use of explosives in rock breaking concerning shaft sinking, drifting and
drivages of adit.
Module 4: Opening of mineral deposits:

Types of mine opening, selection, location, shape and size of different types of
opening, drivage methods for adits and incline drifts and cycle of operation,
support of incline drift and their mouth.
Module 5: Shaft sinking: Conventional methods of shaft sinking, shaft lining (temporary
and permanent), surface arrangements, ventilation, pumping and illumination
arrangement during shaft sinking, shaft fittings. Pit top and Pit bottom layouts
Opening and development of mineral deposits, method of working, ventilation,
transportation, hoisting and dispatch.
Module 6: Overview of Underground Mining:

Coal: Bord and Pillar method, Longwall method
Metal: Various stoping methods like open stoping, cut and fill stoping, shrinkage
stoping, sub level stoping, block caving etc.
Module 7: Overview of Surface Mining:

Types of surface mine, unit operation, basic bench geometry, applicability and
limitation, advantages and disadvantages.
3
1. Introductory mining engineering-, Howard L.Hartman, Jan M.Mutmansky/ Wiley India

(P) Ltd
2. Elements of mining technology Vol.-I - D.J. Deshmukh /Denett& Company
3. Roy Pijush Pal, Blasting in ground excavations and mines, Oxford and IBH, 1st Ed.
1993
4. C.P. Chugh, Drilling technology handbook, Oxford and IBH, 1sted, 1977.
Goals & Outcomes:
• Introduction to what constitutes Mining Engineering

• Identifying the various areas available to pursue and specialize within the overall field of
Mining Engineering
• Exploration of the various possibilities of a career in this field
• Providing inspiration for doing creative and innovative work
• Highlighting possibilities for taking up entrepreneurial activities in this field
• Providing a foundation for the student to launch off upon an inspired academic pursuit
into this branch of engineering
4
GE 302 MINING GEOLOGY 3L:1T:0P 3 Credits
Proposed Syllabus:
Module 1: Physical Geology:

Geology in mining engineering, scope and application, earth structure and
composition, weathering processes and grade, physiographical division of India,
geological work of river, wind and glacier.
Module 2: Stratigraphy:
Principle of stratigraphy, geological time scale, mineral resource distributions and
economic importance of Archean, Cuddapah, Vindhyan, Gondwana, Tertiary
deposit of India.
Module 3: Minerology:
Classification of minerals, physical properties of minerals, properties of silica,
feldspar, pyroxene, amphibole, mica, olivine, group of minerals and calcite.
Module 4: Petrology:
Classification of rocks,
igneous rock: composition and diversification of magma, texture and structure of
igneous rock, tabular classification of igneous rocks, study of importance igneous
rock,
sedimentary rock: lithification and diagenesis, texture and structure of
sedimentary rock, study of important sedimentary rock,
metamorphic rock: metamorphism, agents and types, study of important
metamorphic rocks,
Module 5: Structural Geology:

Introduction to geological structure, faults, folds, joints and unconformities
classification, criteria for recognition in the field and significance in mineral
exploration, determination of strata thickness, dip and strike calculation,
Module 6: Economic Geology

Ore, Gauge, tenors of ore, grade, assay value cut – off grade, processes of
formation of mineral deposit, magmatic concentration, hydrothermal processes,
placer deposit and supergene sulphide enrichment deposit, iron, copper,
Manganese, lead & zinc, mica etc.
Coal Geology: Introduction, Coal petrography, origin, classification, structural
features of coal seam
5
Oil & Natural Gas:Introdution, origiin, classification, accumulation, migration,
cap rocks, traps.
Module 7: Mineral Exaploration

Geological, Geophysical and Geochemical prospecting- principle and
methodology
Module 8: Hydrogeology
Introduction, Hydrological cycle, vertical distribution of groundwater, aquifers,
Darcy’s law, hydrological properties of rocks and groundwater quality
6
GE 302P MININING GEOLOGY LAB 0L:0T:3P 1 Credits
SL. NO NAME OF EXPERIMENT/EXERCISE
A. Study of Mineral samples

(Identification of minerals on the basis of colour, streak, luster, hardness, cleavage, fracture)
1. Rock Forming Quartz, Orthoclase, Biotite, Muscovite, Calcite,

minerals Plagioclase,
2. Economic minerals Galena, pyrolusite, Hematite, Magnetite, Bauxite,

Chromite, Chalcopyrite, Pyrite
B. Megascopic study of hand specimens

(Identification of rock on the basis of colour, mineral composition, texture, structure)
3. Igneous rocks Granite, Basalt, Rhyolite, Obsidian, Dolerite, Syenite,
4. Sedimentary rocks Sandstone. Shale, Limestone, Conglomerate, Breccia
5. Metamorphic rocks Gneiss, Schist, Quarzite, Marble, Slate,
C. Study of external morphology of crystal models

(Determination of axial relationship, symmetry elements and forms present in model)
6. Isometric System& Tetragonal System
7. Orthorhombic System& Hexagonal System
8. Monoclinic System& Triclinic System
D.Numerical Problems related to Structural Geology
9. Three-point problems and its application
10. Borehole problems and its analysis
11. Structural analysis using stereonets
12. Lithologinterpretaion and correlation
7
INTRODUCTION TO MINING TECHNOLOGY -
MN301P LAB 0L:0T:3P 1 Credits
SL. NO NAME OF EXPERIMENT
13. Study and sketch of Boring and various methods of Boring.
14. Study and sketch of Explosive and its types.
15. Study and sketch of Blasting Accessories.
16. Study and sketch of Priming, Charging, Stemming and Shot – firing.
17. Solid Blasting Practices in Undergroundmines.
18. Study of Blasting Pattern in underground and surface mines.
19. Study and sketch of incline mouth support.
20. Study and sketch of Temporary lining of shaft during sinking.
21. Study and sketch of Concrete lining of Shaft.
22. Study and sketch of special methods of shaft sinking by cementation process.
8
MINING ENGINEERING
B. Tech, Semester IV (Second year]
Course Structure
th
4 Semester Course Structure
Course Hours per week
Sl No. Course Title Credit
Code L T P
THEORY
Electronics and Instrumentation
1. 1 3 1 0 3
Engg.
Underground Coal Mining
2. 2 MN401 3 1 0 3
Methods
3. 3 MN402 Surface Mining Methods 3 1 0 3
4. 4 MN403 Drilling and Blasting 3 1 0 3
5. 5 MN404 Mine Surveying 3 1 0 3

Engineering Economics/ Cyber
6. 6 2 0 0 0
Security
PRACTICAL
7. 8 MN401P Mine Design - I Lab 0 0 3 1
8. 9 MN402P Drilling and Blasting - Lab 0 0 3 1
9. 7 MN403P Mine Surveying Lab 0 0 3 1
10. 1 Internship/ Tour and Training/

0 0 0 2
0 Industrial Training
Extra-Curricular Activity – IV
11. 1
(NSO/NSS/NCC/YOGA/CA/ 0 0 2 1
1
Mini Project etc.)
Total 17 5 11 21
9
MN401 UNDERGROUND COAL MINING 3L:1T:0P 3 CREDITS
METHODS
Course Objectives:

• to give an understanding to the students for opening the underground coal deposit,
different mode of opening and their suitability including advantages and disadvantages.
• to give an understanding to the student of various methods of working in underground
coal mining and their application.
Proposed Syllabus
Opening of Deposits: Developments of mine for in-seam mining and horizon mining (including
shaft pillar), their comparison, advantages and disadvantages, division into levels and districts.
General principle of Bord& Pillar Development, their choice, suitability, advantages and
disadvantages.
Open and Panel Systems, Layout of Bord& Pillar panel, size of panel and statutory provisions,
Concurrent development activities like support, track laying, lighting, transportation of materials
and minerals in and out of the mine etc.
Preparatory arrangement for depillaring operation, statutory provision fordepillaring, principle
and designing of pillar extraction, size of a district, factors affecting choice of pillar extraction,
depillaring with caving, stowing, mechanized depillaring operation, organization and safety.
Longwall methods of working, their choice, suitability,advantages and disadvantages. Shape &
size of development roadways and gate roads and their maintenance, support systems of longwall
face and gate roads.
Layout of the workings for the required output, length and orientation of longwall faces.
Advancing and retreating longwall faces, longwall face and gate road machineries, mechanized
longwall faces with shearers, AFC, power support and gate road machineries.
Modules:
Module 1: Opening of Deposits: Developments of mine for in-seam mining andhorizon
mining (including shaft pillar), their comparison, advantages and disadvantages,
division into levels and districts.
Module 2: Bord and Pillar Development:

General principle of Bord& Pillar Development, their choice, suitability,
advantages and disadvantages,
Module 3: Bord and Pillar Panels:

Open and Panel Systems, Layout of Bord& Pillar panel, size of panel and
statutory provisions, Concurrent development activities like support, track laying,
lighting, transportation of materials and minerals in and out of the mine etc.
10
Module 4: Pillar Extraction:
Preparatory arrangement for depillaring operation, statutory
provisionfordepillaring, principle and designing of pillar extraction, size of a
district, factors affecting choice of pillar extraction, depillaring with caving,
stowing, mechanized
depillaring operation, organization and safety.
Module 5: Longwall Panel Development:

Longwall methods of working, their choice, suitability,advantages and
disadvantages. Shape & size of development roadways and gate roads and their
maintenance, support systems of longwall face and gate roads.
Module 6: Longwall Panel Extraction:

Layout of the workings for the required output, length and orientation of longwall
faces. Advancing and retreating longwall faces, longwall face and gate road
machineries, mechanized longwall faces with shearers, AFC, power support and
gate road machineries.
1. Wining and working – R. T. Deshmukh & D. J. Deshmukh
2. Elements of Mining Technology Vol. I, III – D. J. Deshmukh
3. Principle and Practices of Modern Coal Mining – R. D. Singh
4. Modern Coal Mining – S. K. Das
5. Introductory mining engineering-, Howard L.Hartman, Jan M.Mutmansky/ Wiley India
(P) Ltd
6. SME Mining Engineers Handbook 3rd Edition - Peter Darling
Goals and Outcomes:

This course qualifies participants to apply basic concepts of Mining in
1. Explain different mining methods and their selection.
2. Describe details working of bord and pillar method and its development & depillaring.
3. Explain longwall working.
Knowledge:
1. Analyse and evaluate the development of surface mines, with stripping ratio.
2. Analyse the operation and application of the equipment used in surface mining and
advanced appreciation of the systems engineering involved with interacting machines.
Skills:
1. Review, analyze, consolidate and synthesizes knowledge to identify and provide to
selection of Mining method.
2. Assess and evaluate complex ideas in surface mining and selection of the number
required and the size of appropriate equipment
11
MN402 SURFACE MINING METHODS 3L:1T:0P 3 CREDITS
Course Objectives:

• to give an understanding to the students for basic concept of surface mining including
selection between surface mining verses underground mining for a particular project.
• to give an understanding to the student of various cycle of operation of extraction of
deposit including opening of deposit, production of different benches, drilling and
blasting, excavation and transportation etc.
Proposed Syllabus:
Status of surface mining in India. Selection between surface mining and underground mining.
Preliminary evaluation of surface mining prospects; different stripping ratios -- concepts and
significance.
Box Cut: Selection of site and machineries, Calculation of rock movement in box cutting for
given geometry.
Geometrical parameters of the benches, bench height, bench slope, bench width etc. with regard
to the geometry of the deposits and overlying rocks. Formation parameters and factors affecting
their selection.
Working principles of Excavation machineries, deployment of drills, dozer, shovel - dumper,

dragline, hydraulic shovels, Ripper and Scraper, surface miners etc. their cycle of operation,
application and limitation.
Drilling principles, types of blast hole drills, estimation of number of drill for a given mine
production, blast design, determination of charge weight, factors affecting blast design,
calculation of charge required per hole, problems associated with drilling and blasting, secondary
blasting.
Cyclic methods-- shovel-dumper, pay-loader, dragline and their annual capacity calculation.
Modules:
Module 1: Basic Concept of Surface Mining:
Status of surface mining in India. Selection between surface mining and
underground mining. Preliminary evaluation of surface mining prospects;
different stripping ratios -- concepts and significance.
12
Module 2: Opening up of Deposits:
Box Cut: Selection of site and machineries, Calculation of rock movement in box
cutting for given geometry.
Module 3: Production benches

Geometrical parameters of the benches, bench height, bench slope, bench width
etc. with regard to the geometry of the deposits and overlying rocks. Formation
parameters and factors affecting their selection.
6h
Module 4: Preparation for Excavation:
Working principles of Excavation machineries, deployment of drills, dozer,
shovel - dumper, dragline, hydraulic shovels, Ripper and Scraper, surface miners
etc. their cycle of operation, application and limitation.
Module 5: Drilling and blasting:

Drilling principles, types of blast hole drills, estimation of number of drill for a
given mine production, blast design, determination of charge weight, factors
affecting blast design, calculation of charge required per hole, problems
associated with drilling and blasting, secondary blasting.
Module 6: Excavation and Transportation:

Cyclic methods-- shovel-dumper, pay-loader, dragline and their annual capacity
calculation.
1. Surface Mining- Misra, G.B.,

2. Surface Mining -B.A. Kennedy
3. Surface Mining Operations -S.K. Das,
4. SME Mining Engineers Handbook 3rd Edition - Peter Darling
5. Surface Mining Technology - T.N. Singh
6. Surface Mine Blast Evaluation, AMIE Publication
Course Learning Outcomes:

1. Provide a detailed description of the proposed surface mining method and related
equipment and support infrastructure (including illustrations, sketches, plans, etc.);
2. Design and evaluate materials handling and transport options;
3. Conduct productivity analysis for the selected mining system;
4. Identify and evaluate core risks in each mining method;
5. Appraise mining systems with respect to safe, efficient, economic and environmentally
and socially responsible operations; and
6. Demonstrate awareness of major technological trends.
13
MN403 DRILLING AND BLASTING 3L:1T:0P 3 CREDITS
Course Objectives:

• to give an understanding to the students for basic concept of drilling and blastingin both
surface mining and underground mining.
• to give an understanding to the student of various cycle of operation of drilling
andblasting including exploratory drilling, production drilling in both metal as well as
coal mines.
Proposed Syllabus:
Exploration Drilling Boring for exploration; Various types of exploratory drills and their
applicability – Auger, Cable-tool, Odex, Core Drills; Core recovery: single and double tube core
barrels, wire line core barrel; Storage of cores; Interpretation of borehole data. Explosives and
Initiating Systems Types of explosives, their composition and properties, classification; Selection
of explosives; Manufacture, transport, storage and handling of explosives; Testing of explosives;
Types of initiating systems – Electrical Detonators, Detonating Fuse, Detonating Relays,
NONEL, Electronic Detonators, Blasting accessories, exploders. Drilling & Blasting in Surface
Mines Drilling: Blasthole drills – types, classification, applicability and limitations; Mechanics
of drilling, performance parameters, drilling cost, compressed air requirement for hole cleaning;
Selection of drilling systems, drilling errors, organization of drilling. Blasting: Mechanics of
rock fragmentation; Livingstone theory of crater formation; Factors affecting blasting, Blast
design - estimation of burden and spacing, estimation of charge requirement; Initiation patterns;
Secondary blasting – pop and plaster shooting; Problems associated with blasting, Ground
vibration and air over pressure, Blast instrumentation Drilling & Blasting in Underground Mines
Coal mines: Drilling systems and their applicability, blasting-off-solid, different blasting cuts,
ring hole blasting, calculation of specific charge, specific drilling and detonator factor, initiation
patterns. Metal mines: Drilling systems and their applicability, blast design for horizontal
drivages, different blasting cuts, longhole blasting, vertical crater retreat blasting.
Modules:
Module 1: Exploration Drilling:
Boring for exploration; Various types of exploratory drills and their applicability
– Auger, Cable-tool,Odex, Core Drills; Core recovery: single and double tube
core barrels, wire line core barrel; Storage ofcores; Interpretation of borehole data
Module 2: Explosives and Initiating Systems:
Types of explosives, their composition and properties, classification; Selection of
explosives;Manufacture, transport, storage and handling of explosives; Testing of
explosives; Types of initiatingsystems – Electrical Detonators, Detonating Fuse,
Detonating Relays, NONEL, Electronic Detonators,Blasting accessories,
exploders.
14
Module 3: Drilling in Surface Mines
Drilling: Blasthole drills – types, classification, applicability and limitations;
Mechanics of drilling, performance parameters, drilling cost, compressed air
requirement for hole cleaning; Selection of drillingsystems, drilling errors,
organization of drilling.
Module 4: Blasting in Surface Mines

Mechanics of rock fragmentation; Livingstone theory of crater formation; Factors
affecting blasting, Blast design - estimation of burden and spacing, estimation of
charge requirement; Initiation patterns; Secondary blasting – pop and plaster
shooting; Problems associated with blasting, Ground vibration and air over
pressure, Blast instrumentation6 h
Module 5: Drilling & Blasting in Underground Coal Mines:

Drilling systems and their applicability, blasting-off-solid, different blasting cuts,
ring hole blasting, calculation of specific charge, specific drilling and detonator
factor, initiation patterns.
Module 6: Drilling & Blasting in Underground Metal Mines:

Drilling systems and their applicability, blast design for horizontal drivages,
different blasting cuts, longhole blasting, vertical crater retreat blasting.
1. Rock blasting effects and operations, Lovely Prakashan: P. Pal Roy.
2. Blasting Practices in Surface Mines: S K Das.
3. Explosives and Blasting Technology: G.K.Pradhan.
4. Rock Blasting: Sushil Bhandari.
5. Drilling and Blasting: chapters in SME Mining Engineers Handbook: P Darling.
6. Drilling and blasting of rock, CRC publications:Jimino.
7. Surface and Underground Excavations: R RTatiya.
8. Blasting principles for open pit mining, SME vol. Ⅰ &Ⅱ: W Hustrulid.
9. Surface Blast Design: C.J.Konya.
10. Indian Explosive Act 1884.
11. Legislation in Indian Mines – A Critical Appraisal: Rakesh and Prasad.
Course Learning Outcomes:

After completion of the subject the students will be able to:
1. Identifying and relating various drilling procedures to various rock characteristics.
2. Outline and define various blasting practices, accessories, explosives & their suitability in
Indianmines both underground and opencast.
3. Analyse and optimize blast performance and productivity improvements.
4. Formulate and list the documentation for safe blasting practices.
5. To understand and appreciate environmental and social implications of rock/coal
blasting.
MN404 MINE SURVEYING 3L:1T:P 3 Credits
15
Course Objectives:
The course is designed where, students can apply knowledge of mathematics in surveying to
calculate and analyse different parameters of survey. Students can get the ability to identify,
formulate and solve problems in the field of advanced surveying using advanced surveying
instruments. Ability to analyze survey data and design mining engineering projects.
• To give an understanding to the students of the vast breadth and numerous areas of
engagement available in the overall field of Mine Surveying.
• To motivate the student to pursue a career in one of the many areas of Mine Surveying
with deep interest and keenness.
• To expose the students to the various avenues and Instruments available for doing
creative and innovative work in this field by showcasing the applications in many
monuments and inspiring projects of public utility.
• To introduce the students to advanced and astronomical surveying.
Proposed Syllabus:
Surveying Instruments: Mining theodolite, miner’s dial, loose and fast needle traversing with
miner’s dial, EDM & Total Station -- their applications. Introduction to Gyro-theodolite & GPS.
Triangulation Survey: Classification; Reconnaissance; Procedures for angles and base-line
measurement; Comparison with precise EDM traversing
Correlation Survey: Correlation of underground and surface surveys and different methods of
correlation- connection through adit, incline and shafts, method of connection through single or
double vertical shafts. Corrections by means of magnetic needle.
In-pit Survey: Setting out a point of known rectangular co-ordinate. Control of directions and
gradients for inclined shafts, slopes, levels and tunnels. Maintaining alignments, simple curve
laying underground, laying out and fixing of mine boundaries claims, subsidence surveys on
surface and underground. Volume calculations.
Stope Surveying: Stope surveying with Hanging Compass and Alignometer, tape triangulation,
radiation and other methods.
Mine Plans and Sections: Legal requirements as to mine plans and sections in India, preparation
and preservation of plans and sections, representation of geological and other surface and
underground features on mine plans and sections.
Astronomy: Astronomical terms and definitions, Introduction to field astronomy, determination
of true meridian, latitude, longitude and time including hour angle.
Modules
Module 1: Surveying Instruments:
Mining theodolite, miner’s dial, loose and fast needle traversing with miner’s dial,
EDM & Total Station- their applications. Introduction to Gyro-theodolite & GPS.
Module 2: Triangulation Survey:
16
Classification; Reconnaissance; Procedures for angles and base-line measurement;
Comparison with precise EDM traversing.
Module 3: Correlation Survey:

Correlation of underground and surface surveys and different methods of
correlation- connection through adit, incline and shafts.Method of connection
through single or double vertical shafts. Corrections by means of magnetic needle
Module 4: In-pit Survey:

Setting out a point of known rectangular co-ordinate. Control of directions and
gradients for inclined shafts, slopes, levels and tunnels. Use of Top telescope and
side telescope.Maintaining alignments, simple curve laying underground, laying out
and fixing of mine boundaries claims, subsidence surveys on surface and
underground. Volume calculations.
Module 5: Stope Surveying:

Stope surveying with Hanging Compass and Alignometer, tape triangulation,
radiation and other methods.
Module 6: Mine Plans and Sections:

Legal requirements as to mine plans and sections in India, preparation and
preservation of plans and sections, representation of geological and other surface and
Module 7: Photogrammetric:
Introduction to photogrammetric, Scale of a vertical photograph, photographs verses
maps, application of photogrammetric in mining
Module 8: Astronomy:
Astronomical terms and definitions, Introduction to field astronomy, determination
of true meridian, latitude, longitude and time including hour angle.
Application of Computer in surveying and computation.
1. Surveying (Vol – 1,2 & 3), by B.C. Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain –
Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Surveying (Vol 1, 2& 3), Duggal S.K. Tata Mc.Graw Hill Publishing Co.Ltd. New Delhi,
2004
3. Text book of surveying by C. Venkataramaiah, Universities Press.
4. Engineering surveying by Schofield, Wilfred, and Mark Breach.. CRC Press, 2007
5. Surveying (Vol 1, 2&3), Arora K R, standard Book House, Delhi, 2004.
6. Plane Surveying, Chandra A M. New age International Pvt. Ltd. Publisher, New Delhi, 2002
17
7. Higher Surveying, Chandra A M., New Age International Pvt. Ltd. Publisher, New Delhi,
2002
8. Surveying and leveling by R. Subramanian, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
Goals & Outcomes:

Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:
(Knowledge based)
• Know the various surveying instruments and their purpose;
• Have complete understanding of the significant role ofsurveying play in mining.
• Understanding the setting out concepts and different kind of techniques.
• Understanding the Legal requirements of mine plans and sections in India
• Understand and remember different Astronomical terms, definition and their significance.
• Can remember different kind of representations of geological, surface and underground
features on mine plans and sections
(Skills)
Use operations of Mine Surveying to:
• Identify and analyzethe applications of Surveying Instruments in different kind of Mining
scenario.
• Apply and evaluate the techniques used in correlation for correlation survey depending
on the type of mine.
• Apply and analyse different setting out procedure in direction and gradient control in
Mining Scenario.
• Apply the different techniques of stope surveying in different kind of mining methods.
• Apply different techniques to analyse the volume of mined-out area, heap and etc.
• Identify and evaluate different kind of representations of geological, surface and
18
MN401P MINE DESIGN - I 0L:0T:3P 1 CREDITS
SL. NO NAME OF EXPERIMENT
1. Determination of annual production capacity of a rope shovel with given bucket

capacity, dumper capacity and numbers and distance of dumping yard.
2. Determination of annual excavation capacity of a dragline of given specification

including bucket capacity.
3. Determination of total drilling requirement for an opencast overburden/ coal bench

with given geometry and excavation volume/ production requirement per round of
blasting.
4. Determination of matching number of dumpers per shovel for a target output when
the shovel and dumper capacities are given.
5. Determination of volume of rock excavation in box cutting for a given geometry of

the entry and depth of first bench.
6. Determination of haul road dimensions for a given condition.
7. Study and sketch of an inclined drivage showing support requirements, transport

mode, safety features, illumination etc.
8. Study and sketch of a conventional/ mechanized Bord and Pillar panel being
developed.
9. Study and sketch of a Bord and Pillar panel being depillared with hydraulic sand
stowing showing systematic support.
10. Study and sketch of a Bord and Pillar panel being depillared with caving showing
systematic support.
11. Study and sketch of longwall main gate and tail gate roads with respective gate
machineries.
12. Study and sketch of a mechanized longwall face in a coal seam with given
specifications.
19
MN402P DRILLING & BLASTING LAB 0L:0T:3P 1 CREDITS
SL. NO NAME OF EXPERIMENT/ EXERCISE
1. Study & sketch of Hand held Coal drill, drill rods and drag bits.
2. Study & sketch of air leg mounted compressed air drill, drill rod with bit.
3. Study and sketch of rotary drill with Diamond coring bit.
4. Study and sketch of Churn/percussive drilling component including water flushing

system.
5. Study and sketch of Down the Hole (DTH) drill for O/C Mines.
6. Study and sketch of P3 and P5 explosives with priming and initiation (direct and
reverse) methods.
7. Study and sketch of copper and aluminium tube delay Detonators with sectional
views.
8. Study and sketch of non – electric delays, detonation chord with sectional views.
9. Study and sketch of multi shot exploders with internal views.
10. Exercise for deciding drilling pattern, number of holes, amount and type of
explosive, stemming material in respect of a given coal face with desired yield.
explosive, stemming material in respect of a given stone drift.
explosive, stemming material in respect of a given coal/ overburden bench.
20
MN403P MINE SURVEYING LAB 0L:0T:3P 1 CREDITS
SL. NO NAME OF EXPERIMENT/ EXERCISE
1. Study of EDM and total station.
2. Study of gyro theodolite.
3. GPS and its applications.
4. GNSS and its characteristics.
5. Correlation survey by alignment/ co-planning method.
6. Correlation survey by weisbach triangle method.
7. Correlation survey by weiss-quadrilateral method.
8. Setting out of simple curves.
9. To determine the most probable value of the included angles of given triangle by
method of least squares.
10. Subsidence monitoring using precise instruments.
11. Study of photo theodolite.
12. Measurement of muck pile volume.
21
2nd year UG courses Engg & Tech, Jharkhand university of Technology.

Jharkhand, Ranchi
Computer Science & Engineering

&
Information Technology

Sl. Course
No. Code
01 CS301 Data Structures And Algorithms 3 1 0 3
02 IT301 Object Oriented Programming 3 1 0 3
01 CS301P Data Structures And Algorithms Lab 0 0 3 1

02 IT301P Object Oriented Programming Lab 0 0 3 1
03 EC302P Digital Electronics & Logic Design Lab 0 0 3 1
Extra Activities (NSO/NSS/NCC/Yoga /
04 EX301 0 0 2 1
Total credit 21
Course
Code
01 IT301 Object Oriented Programming 3 1 0 3
02 CS301 Data Structures And Algorithms 3 1 0 3
01 IT301P Object Oriented Programming Lab 0 0 3 1

02 CS301P Data Structures And Algorithms Lab 0 0 3 1
03 EC302P Digital Electronics & Logic Design Lab 0 0 3 1
Extra Activities (NSO/NSS/NCC/Yoga /
04 EX301 0 0 2 1
Total credit 21
MATHEMATICS III
L T P CR.
3 1 0 4
Module I
Transformation.
Module II
inverse Fourier Transformation, sine,cosine Transformation, Inverse Transformations -
simple illustration.
Module III
convolution theorem- Difference equations, Solution of Difference equations using Z-
Transformation.
Module IV
Partial Differential Equations: Solution of Wave equation, Heat equation, Laplace’s
equation by the method of separation of variables and its applications. Solution of
PDE by Laplace Transformation.
Module V
Extrapolation, Newton – Gregory forward and backward formula, Gauss forward and
backward formula, Lagrange’s formula , Inverse Interpolation by Lagrange’s formula
, Numerical Differentiation and Numerical Integration : Trapezoidal rule , Simpson’s
1/3rd rule , Simpson’s 3/8th rule ,Weddle quadrature formula.
Text Books
• Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley
& Sons.
• Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill New
Delhi,2010.
• B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 44th
Edition.
Reference Books
• R. J. Beerends ,H. G. Ter Morsche ,J. C. Van Den Berg, E. M. Van De Vrie,
Fourier and Laplace Transforms, Cambridge University Press.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BASIC ELECTRONICS
Course code -EC 301
L T P CR.
3 1 0 3
Module I
Basic Electronic Components
Active and Passive Components, Types of resistors and Colour coding, Capacitors,
Inductors applications of Resistor, Capacitor and Inductor, Relay, LDR, Basic
Integrated Circuits ( IC 7805, 7809, 7812, 555 etc.).Measuring Instruments like CRO,
Power supply, Multi-meters etc.
Module II
Semiconductors
Difference between Insulators, Semiconductors and Conductors, Mobility and
Conductivity, Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors, Fermi Level, Energy band,
Charge Densities in Semiconductors, Mass Action Law, Current Components in
Semiconductors, Drift and Diffusion Current, The Continuity Equation, Injected
Minority Charge Carrier, Hall Effect, P-N Junction Diode, construction, working,
characteristics and diode equation Application of Diode, Rectifier: Half Wave, Full
Wave and Bridge Rectifier, Zener Diode and its Applications, Varactor Diode,
Photodetector.
Module III:
Transistors
Construction, Working, Modes and Configuration of BJT, Input and Output
Characteristics of all Configurations, Comparison of all Configuration & Modes, BJT
as a Switch and as an Amplifier. JFET Construction, working and characteristics.
MOSFET Construction, working and Characteristics, Types of MOSFET.
Module IV: Power electronic devices &Communication engineering
Construction, characteristics and working of SCR, DIAC, TRIAC and UJT.
Introduction, Characteristics and applications of Operational Amplifier (Ic741).
Modulation and its types.
Number systems and conversion (DECIMAL, OCTAL, HEXADECIMAL,BINARY,
BCD etc.),binary addition and subtraction, Logic Gates and their truth-table ,Boolean
algebra .Design of Single Stage Amplifier, LED Driver Circuit, Infrared Transmitter
Receiver Circuit, LDR Driver Circuit, Relay Driver Circuit, Square Wave and Fix
Frequency Generator using 555 IC.
Text Books
1. Basic Electronics and Linear Circuits by N. N. Bhargava, D. C. Kulshreshtha and S.
C. Gupta, TMH Publications.
2. Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits by Ramakant A. Gayakwad, PHI
Publications.
3. Electronic Devices and Circuits by Godse and Bakshi Technical, Vol-1 Technical
Publication Pune.
Reference Books
2. Electronics Devices and Circuit Theory by R. Boylestad & L. Nashelsky, Pearson
Publication 3. Electronic Communication System by G. Kennedy, TMH Publications.
4. Basic Electronics by Sanjeev Kumar & Vandana Sachdeva, Paragaon International
Publication
==========================================

(CSE, IT)
Course code -CS 301
(3-CREDIT) (L-T-P/3-0-0)
Module I
Basic concepts and notations: Data structures and data structure operations,
Complexity Analysis: Mathematical notation and functions, algorithmic complexity
and time space trade off, Big O Notation, The best, average & worst cases analysis of
various algorithms. Arrays: Linear & Multidimensional Arrays, Representation &
traversal. Sorting algorithms: Bubble sort, Selection sort, Insertion sort, Merge sort
and Quick sort, Counting Sort. Linear search and Binary search on sorted arrays.
Module II
Abstract Data Types (ADTs) Stack: Push; Pop, stack representation using array and
linked list, Applications of Stack, Recursion. Queue: Representation using array and
linked list, Insertion and deletion operations, circular queue, Dequeue, priority queue.
Linked Lists & their types (Single, Double, Circular linked lists), Operations on
Varieties of Linked Lists (Search and Update) with applications
Module III
Introduction to Trees, Binary tree - definitions and properties; binary tree traversal
algorithms with and without recursion., Binary Search Tree - creation, insertion and
deletion operations, Threaded tree (One way and Two way). AVL tree balancing; B-
tree
Module IV
Graph Algorithms: Graphs and their Representations, Graph Traversal Techniques:
Breadth First Search (BFS) and Depth First Search (DFS), Applications of BFS and
DFS, Minimum Spanning Trees (MST), Prim’s and Kruskal’s algorithms for MST,
Connected Components, Dijkstra’s Algorithm for Single Source Shortest Paths,,
Floydd’s Algorithm for All-Pairs Shortest Paths Problem
Module V
Hashing techniques, Hash function, Address calculation techniques- common hashing
functions Collision resolution, Linear probing, quadratic probing, double hashing,
Bucket addressing. Rehashing
Text Books:
2. Introduction to Data Structures with Applications by J. Tremblay and P. G.
Sorenson (TMH)
4. Data Structures and Algorithms in C, M.T. Goodrich, R. Tamassia and D. Mount,
Wiley India.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

India.
7. Data Structure with C, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited by Seymour Lipschutz.
9. Data Structure and algorithm Analysis in C 2nd Edition, PEARSON Publishing House, Mark
Allen Weiss
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING

(CSE, IT)
Course code -IT 301
(3-CREDIT) (L-T-P/3-0-0)
Course Outcome:
1. To be able to apply an object-oriented approach to programming and identify potential

benefits of object-oriented programming over the approaches.
2. To be able to reuse the code and write the classes which work like built in types.
3. To be able to design applications which are easier to debug, maintain and extend.
4. To be able to apply object-oriented concepts in real world applications.
5. To be able to develop applications using multi-threading.
6. To be able to handle exceptions in any applications.
Module-I 12 Hrs
Introduction to Java and Java Programming Environment, Object Oriented

Programming, Fundamental Programming Structure: Data Types, Variable,
Typecasting Arrays, Operators and their Precedence. Control Flow: Java’s Selection
Statements (if, Switch, Iteration, Statement, While, Do While, for, Nested Loop).
Concept of Objects and Classes, Using Exiting Classes Building your own Classes,
Constructor Overloading, Static, Final this Keyword, Inheritance: Using Super to Call
Super Class Constructor, Method Overriding, Dynamic Method Dispatch, Using
Abstract Classes, Using Final with Inheritance. The Object Class Packages &
Interfaces: Packages, Access Protection, Importing Package, Interface, Implementing
Interfaces, Variables in Interfaces, Interfaces can be Extended. Exception Handling:
Fundamentals, Types Checked, Unchecked Exceptions, Using Try & Catch, Multiple
Catch, Throw, Throws, Finally Java’s Built in Exceptions, User Defined Exception.
Module-II 12 Hrs
Multi-Threading: Java Thread Model, Thread Priorities, Synchronization, creating a

Thread, Creating Multiple Threads, Using is Alive () and Join () Wait () & Notify ().
String Handling: String Constructors, String Length, Character Extraction, String
Comparison, Modifying a String. Java I/O: Classes & Interfaces, Stream Classes, Byte
Streams, Character Streams, Serialization, JDBC: Fundamentals, Type I, Type II,
Type III, Type IV Drivers. Networking: Basics, Socket Overview, Networking
Classes, & Interfaces, TCP/IP Client Sockets, Whois, URL Format, URL Connection,
TCP/IP Server Sockets.
Module-III 12 Hrs
Applets: Basics, Architecture, Skeleton, The HTML APPLET Tag, Passing
Parameters to Applets, Applet Context and Show Documents (). Event Handing:
Delegation Event Model, Event Classes, Event Listener Interfaces, Adapter Classes.
AWT: AWT Classes Window Fundamentals, Component, Container, Panel Window,
Frame, Canvas, Creating a Frame Window in an Applet, Working with Graphics,
Control Fundamentals, Layout Managers, Handling Events by Extending AWT
Components. Core Java API package, reflection, remote method invocation (RMI)
swing applet, icons & labels, text fields, Buttons, combo boxes, tabbed panes, scroll
panes, trees, tables exploring Java-language: Simple type wrappers, runtime memory
management, object fusing clone () and the cloneable interface, thread, thread group,
runnable.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Introduction to Java Programming: Liang, Pearson Education, 7th Edition.

2. Java the Complete Reference: Herbert Schildt, TMH, 5th Edition.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Balguruswamy, Programming with Java, TMH.

2. Programming with Java: Bhave&Patekar, Person Eduction.
3. Big Java: Horstman, Willey India, 2nd Edition.
4. Java Programming Advanced Topics: Wigglesworth, Cengage Learning.
===================================================================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

(ECE, CSE, IT)
Course code -EC 302
L T P CR.
3 1 0 3

Analog and Digital, Binary Number System. Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication,
Division of binary numbers, Subtraction using 2’s complement method. Binary codes:
weighted and non weighted codes, self complementary codes, BCD, Excess-3, Gray
codes, Alphanumeric codes, ASCII Codes. Boolean algebra: Boolean Laws and
Expression using Logic
Gates, Realization of different gates using Universal gates, DeMorgan’s Theorem,
Duality Theorems.
Module II: Boolean function minimization Techniques

Standard forms: SOP, POS, Simplification of Switching function & representation
(Maxterm & Minterm), Boolean expression & representation using logic gates,
Propagation delay in logic gate. Karnaugh map: K-map(up to 5 variables), mapping
and minimization of SOP and POS expression, Don’t care condition, conversion from
SOP to POS and POS to SOP form using K-map, Minimization of multiple output
circuits, Quine Mc-cluskey method minimization technique, prime implicant table,
Don’t care condition.

Adder & Subtractor (Half and Full), Parallel Binary adder, BCD Adder, Binary
multipliers, Code Converters, parity bit generator, Comparators, Decoder, BCD to 7-
segment Decoder, Encoders, Priority Encoders, Multiplexers, De Multiplexers.
Module IV: Sequential Circuits Elements

Introduction to sequential circuit, Flip-flop & Timing Circuits: SR latch, Gated latch,
Tri state logic, Edge triggered flip-plop: - D, JK, T Flip-flop, flip-flop asynchronous
inputs ,characteristic table of Flip-flop, excitation table of Flip-flop, master slave JK
flip flop, inter conversion of Flip-flop. Study of timing parameters of flip-flop. Shift
registers: buffer register, controlled buffer register. Data transmission in shift resistor
SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, Bidirectional shift register, universal shift registers.
Counter: Classification, Ripple or asynchronous counter, Effect of propagation delay
in ripple counters, up-down counter, Design of Mod-n counter, synchronous counter,
Ring counter, Johnson counter. Introduction to FSM. Design of synchronous FSM,
Algorithmic State Machines charts. Designing synchronous circuits like Pulse train
generator.

Logic Families and Semiconductor Memories: TTL NAND gate, Specifications, Noise
margin, Propagation delay, fan-in, fan-out, TTL, ECL, CMOS families and their
interfacing, Memory elements, Concept of Programmable logic devices like FPGA,
Logic implementation using Programmable Devices VLSI Design flow: Design entry,
Schematic, FSM & HDL, different modeling styles in VHDL, Data types and objects,
Dataflow, Behavioral and Structural Modeling, Synthesis and Simulation VHDL
constructs and codes for combinational and sequential circuits
Text Books :
Reference Books:
2. A.P. Malvino, D.P. Leach ‘Digital Principles & Applicatios’ -VIth Edition-TMH
publication.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Course code – BSC 302
L T P CR.
2 0 0 0
Module-1
Module-II
grassland ecosystem, desert ecosystem and aquatic ecosystem, ecological balance and consequences
of imbalance. (4 Hrs)
Module-III
Atmosphere: Atmospheric composition, energy balance, climate, weather, depletion of ozone layer,
green house effect, acid rain, particles, ions and radicals in the atmosphere, chemical and
Module-IV (4 Hrs)
Air pollution and control: Air pollutants, sources and effect of air pollutants, primary and secondary
pollutants, photochemical smog, fly ash, inorganic and organic particulate matter. Air quality
standards, sampling, monitoring and control measures for pollutants.
(4 Hrs)
Module-V
Water pollution and control: Aquatic environment, water pollution, sources and their effect, lake and
ground water pollution, eutrophication, water quality standard and water pollution control measures,
waste water treatment.
Module-VI (4 Hrs)
Land pollution; Lithosphere, composition of soil, acid base and ion exchange reactions in soil, soil
erosion, landslides, desertification, pollutants (municipal, industrial, commercial, agricultural ,
hazardous solid wastes), origin and effects, collection and disposal of solid wastes, recovery and
conversion methods. (5 Hrs)
Module-VII

Company Delhi
6. Kaushik, A and Kaushik, C.P. Perspectives in Environmental studies, New Age International
Publication.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DATA STRUCTURE LAB

(CSE, IT)
Course code -CS 301P
Course Objective: The objective is to develop linear and non-linear data structure, express different
operation on AVL tree, evaluate infix to postfix expression, and apply searching and sorting algorithms in real
life applications.
1. C Programs on :
➢ Bubble sort
➢ Selection sort
➢ Insertion sort,
➢ Quick sort
➢ Heap sort, Merge Sort
2. C Programs on :
➢ Sequential Search
➢ Binary Search
3. Write a C Program to create a stack using an array and perform
➢ Push operation , Pop operation
4. Write a C Program that uses Stack Operations to perform the following:-
➢ Converting an infix expression into postfix expression
➢ Evaluating the postfix expression
5. Write a C Program to create a queue and perform
➢ Push, Pop, Traversal
6. Write a C Program that uses functions to perform the following operations on a single linked
list : i)Creation, ii) Insertion, iii) Deletion, iv) Traversal
7. Write a C Program that uses functions to perform the following operations on a double linked
list: i)Creation, ii) Insertion, iii) Deletion
8. Write a C Program that uses functions to perform the following operations on a Binary Tree
:i) Creation, ii) Insertion, iii) Deletion
9. Write a C Program for Single Source Shortest Paths using Dijkstra’s Algorithm
10. Write a C Program for All-Pairs Shortest Paths using Floydd’s Algorithm
be performed from above list. Remaining three experiments may either be performed
from the above list or designed & set by the concerned institution as per the scope of the
syllabus.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LAB

(CSE, IT)
Course code -IT 301P
Course Outcome:
1. Able to do program in object-oriented concept.

2. Able to create user defined exception.
3. Able to create GUI.
4. Able to understand JDBC and ODBC concept.
To do various Java Programs on:
1. Introduction, compiling & executing a Java program.

2. Data types & variables, decision control structures: if, nested if etc.
3. Loop control structures: do while, for etc.
4. Classes and objects.
5. Data abstraction & data biding, inheritance, polymorphism.
6. Using concept of package.
7. Threads, exception handlings and applet programs.
8. Interfaces and inner classes, wrapper classes, generics.
9. Programs on JDBC.
10. Creating GUI.
above list or designed & set by the concerned institution as per the scope of the syllabus
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

(ECE, EEE,EE,CSE, IT)
Course code EC 302P

generated a. multiplexer b. demultiplexer
above list or designed & set by the concerned institution as per the scope of the syllabus. For
VHDL Xilinx software may be used.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Course code HS301
lectures to enable the students to be confident enough in language and professional sphere of
life.


➢ Introduction


➢ Introduction
➢ Planning

Technical research Paper writing: Methods & style; Seminar & Conference paper writing;
Expert Technical Lecture: Theme clarity; Analysis & Findings; C.V./Resume writing;
Technical Proposal: Types, Structure & Draft.
retention of audience interest; Methods of Presentation: Interpersonal; Impersonal; Audience
Participation: Quizzes & Interjections.
Module X: Technical Communication Skills: Interview skills; Group Discussion: Objective

& Method; Seminar/Conferences Presentation skills: Focus; Content; Style; Argumentation
skills: Devices: Analysis; Cohesion & Emphasis; Critical thinking; Nuances: Exposition
narration & Description; effective business communication competence: Grammatical;
Discourse competence: combination of expression & conclusion; Socio-linguistic
competence: Strategic competence: Solution of communication problems with verbal and non
verbal means.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Jharkhand, Ranchi

&

Sl.
Course code Subject L T P Credit
No.
01 CS401 Operating System 3 1 0 3
02 CS402 Design And Analysis Of Algorithms 3 1 0 3
03 CS403 Formal Language And Automata Theory 3 1 0 3
04 BSC401 Discrete Mathematics 3 1 0 3
05 IT401 Database Management Systems 3 1 0 3
EN401/
06 Engineering Economics / Cyber Security 2 0 0 0
IT402
01 CS401P Operating System Lab 0 0 3 1

02 CS402P Design And Analysis Of Algorithms Lab 0 0 3 1
Formal Language And Automata Theory
03 CS403P 0 0 3 1
Lab
EX401 Extra Activities (NSO/NSS/NCC/Yoga /
04 0 0 2 1
05 0 0 0 2
Training
Total credit 21
Sl. Course
No. code
01 IT401 Database Management Systems 3 1 0 3
02 CS401 Operating System 3 1 0 3
03 CS402 Design And Analysis Of Algorithms 3 1 0 3
04 CS403 Formal Language And Automata Theory 3 1 0 3
05 BSC401 Discrete Mathematics 3 1 0 3
06 2 0 0 0
IT402 Security
01 CS401P Operating System Lab 0 0 3 1

02 CS402P Design And Analysis Of Algorithms Lab 0 0 3 1
Formal Language And Automata Theory
03 CS403P 0 0 3 1
Lab
04 0 0 2 1
05 0 0 0 2
Training
Total credit 21
OPERATING SYSTEM
Course Code- CS401
(3-CREDIT) (L-T-P/3-1-0)
Module - I
OPERATING SYSTEMS OVERVIEW: Introduction, Evolution of operating system, operating system
operations, operating system structure, System Calls, Types of System Calls
Modul – II
PROCESS MANAGEMENT: Process concepts, process state, process control block, scheduling queues,
process scheduling, Interposes Communication, Threads and implementation of threads.
CPU SCHEDULING: Objective and Criteria, CPU scheduling algorithms: FCFS, SJF, Priority Scheduling,
Round robin, multilevel queue scheduling and multilevel feedback queue scheduling.
Modul- III
CONCURRENCY AND SYNCHRONIZATION: Process synchronization, critical section problem, and its
solutions. Semaphores, classical problems of synchronization: readers and writers problem, dining
philosophers problem, sleeping barber problem.
Modul- IV
DEADLOCKS: Introduction, deadlock characterization, Resource allocation graph, Methods for Handling
Deadlocks: deadlock prevention, avoidance and deadlock detection, recovery from deadlock.
Modul V
MEMORY MANAGEMENT: Introduction, memory allocation techniques, paging, implementation of
paging, segmentation and its implementation, segmentation with paging, virtual memory, demand paging,
page-replacement algorithms, thrashing and its solution.
Modul VI
FILE SYSTEM: Concept of a file, access methods, directory structure, file system mounting, file
sharing, protection. File system implementation: file system structure, directory implementation, allocation
methods, free-space management, efficiency and performance.
Mass-Storage Structure: Overview of mass storage structure, disk structure, disk scheduling algorithms,
TEXT BOOKS:
1. ABRAHAM SILBERSCHATZ, PETER BAER GALVIN, GREG GAGNE (2012), Operating
System Principles, 9th edition, Wiley India Private Limited, New Delhi.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. William Stallings, Operating Systems, Internals and Design Principles, 7th edition, Pearson
Education, India. 2.
2. Andrew S. Tanenbaum (2007), Modern Operating Systems, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall of India,
India. 3. Deitel & Deitel (2008), Operating systems, 3rd edition, Pearson Education, India.
COURSE OVERVIEW:
Operating systems course is intended as a general introduced to the techniques used to implement
operating systems and related kinds of systems software. The topics covered will be functions and structure of
operating systems, process management (creation, synchronization, and communication); processor
scheduling; deadlock prevention, avoidance, and recovery; main-memory management; virtual memory
management (swapping, paging, segmentation and page-replacementalgorithms); control of disks and other
input/output devices; file-system structure and implementation; and protection and security
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
➢ To explain main components of OS and their working.
➢ To familiarize the operations performed by OS as a resource Manager.
➢ To impart various scheduling policies of OS.
➢ To teach the different memory management techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course students will be able to the following
➢ Outline various concepts and features of Operating systems.
➢ Compare various operating systems with respect to characteristics and features.
➢ Implement algorithm of CPU Scheduling, Memory Management and disk scheduling.
➢ Make changes in the OS configurations as per need.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHM

Course Code- CS402
(3-CREDIT) (L-T-P/3-1-0)
Course Outcome:
1. Ability to analyze the performance of algorithms.

2. Ability to choose appropriate algorithm design techniques for solving problems.
3. Ability to understand how the choice of data structures and the algorithm design methods
impact the performance of programs.
MODULE-I
INTRODUCTION & ANALYSIS:
Analyzing Algorithms, Recurrence Equations, Growth Function: Asymptotic Notation, Standard

Notation & Common Functions, Recurrence Relation, Different Methods of Solution of Recurrence
Equations with Examples.
MODULE-II
DIVIDE AND CONQUER & BACKTRACKING PARADIGM:
Introduction to Divide and Conquer Paradigm, Quick and Merge Sorting Techniques, Linear Time
Selection Algorithm, The Basic Divide and Conquer Algorithm for Matrix Multiplication,
Backtracking & Recursive Backtracking, Applications of Backtracking Paradigm, Heaps.
MODULE-III
GREEDY PARADIGM & DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING:
Greedy Paradigm: The Basic Greedy Strategy & Computing Minimum Spanning Trees, Algorithms
of Kruskal and Prim, Union to Find Algorithm & Their Applications, Disjoint Set, The Relationship
in Dijkstra’s and Prim’s Algorithms, Use of Greedy Strategy in Algorithms for the Knapsack
Problem and Huffman Trees. The Basic Dynamic Programming Paradigm, Dynamic Programming
Solution to the Optimal Matrix Chain Multiplication and the Longest Common Subsequence
Problems.
MODULE-IV
GRAPHS ALGORITHMS & STARING MATCHING ALGORITHMS:
Representational Issues in Graphs, Depth First Search & Breath First Search on Graphs,
Computation of Bi-connected Components and Strongly Connected Components Using DFS,
Topological Sorting & Applications, Shortest Path Algorithms on Graphs: Bellman-Ford Algorithm,
Dijkstra’s Algorithm & Analysis of Dijkstra’s Algorithm Using Heaps, Floyd-Warshall’s all Pairs
Shortest Path Algorithm and its Refinement for Computing the Transitive Closure of a Graph. The
General String Problem as a Finite Automata, Kunth Morris and Pratt Algorithms.
MODULE-V
NP-COMPLETE PROBLEMS:
Solvable Problems, Types of Problems, The Notion of a Non-Deterministic Algorithm and its Basic
Relationship to Backtracking, Polynomial Time Non-Deterministic Algorithms for Problems Like
Satisfiability, Clique Problem, Hamiltonian Path Problems etc. The Definition of NP-Hardness and
NP-Completeness, The Statement of Cook’s Theorem and a Discussion of its Implication, The
Notion of Polynomial Transformation, Vertex Cover, Subset Sum and Hamiltonian Cycle Problems
are NP-Complete, Other Models for Computations.
Text Books:
1. Introduction to Algorithms (Second Edition); Cormen, Leserson, Rivert; PHI.

2. Fundamentals of Algorithms, Sahni& Horowitz; Galgotia.
Reference Books:
1. The Design & Analysis of Computer Algorithms, Hopcroft-Aho-Ullman, AWL.

2. Handbook of Algorithms & Data Structures, G.H. Gonnet, AWL.
3. Introduction to Design & Analysis of Algorithms, Levitin, PE-LPE.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FORMAL LANGUAGES AND AUTOMATA THEORY
Course Code- CS403
(3-CREDIT) (L-T-P/3-1-0)
Module I: Fundamentals & Finite Automata:
Alphabet, Strings, Language, Operations, Mathematical proving techniques, Finite state machine,
definitions, finite automaton model, acceptance of strings, and languages, Deterministic Finite
Automaton (DFA) and Non deterministic Finite Automaton (NFA), transition diagrams and
Language recognizers. Equivalence of DFA and NFA, NFA to DFA conversion, NFA with ᵋ -
transitions - Significance, acceptance of languages. Equivalence between NFA with and without ᵋ -
transitions, minimization of FSM, Finite Automata with output- Moore and Mealy machines and
conversion of Mealy to Moore and vice-versa.
Module II: Regular Expression and Languages:
Regular sets, regular expressions, identity rules, Constructing finite Automata for a given regular
expressions, Conversion of Finite Automata to Regular expressions. Regular grammars-right linear
and left linear grammars, conversion of right linear grammar to left linear and vice-versa,
equivalence between regular grammar, regular expression and FA, Pumping lemma of regular sets,
closure properties of regular sets.
Module III: Context Free Grammars and Push Down Automata:
Context free grammar, derivation trees, sentential forms. Right most and leftmost derivation of
strings. Ambiguity in context free grammars. Reduction of Context Free Grammars. Chomsky
normal form(CNF), Greiback normal form(GNF), Pumping Lemma for Context Free Languages.
Simplification of CFL.
Push down automata(PDA) definition, model, acceptance of CFL, Acceptance by final state and
acceptance by empty state and its equivalence. Equivalence of CFG and PDA, interconversion.
Introduction to DCFL and DPDA. DPDA Vs NPDA.
Module IV: Turing Machine:
Turing Machine definition, representation of Turing Machines model, Variants of TM, design of TM,
linear bounded automata,
Module V: Computational Complexity & Decidability, Recursively Enumerable Languages:
Complexity : Growth rate of a function, class P and NP, polynomial time reduction and NP-
Completeness, NP-Complete problems(SAT, CSAT,Hamiltonian circuit, travelling salesman, vertex
cover). Decidability: decidability, decidable language, undecidable language, halting problem of
Turing Machine.Computability: primitive recursive function and recursive function.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Theory of Computer Science (Automata Language and Computation) K.L.P. Mishra and N.
Chandrasekran, PHI.
2. Introduction to Automata Theory, Language and Computation, John E, Hopcropt and Jeffery
D. Ullman, Narosa Publishing House.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Theory of Automata and Formal Language, R.B. Patel & P. Nath, Umesh Publication.
2. An Introduction and Finite Automata Theory, Adesh K. Pandey, TMH.
3. Theory of Computation AM Natrajan, Tamilarasi, Bilasubramani, New Age International
Publishers, Chhattisgarh Swami Vivekan.
4. An introduction to Formal Languages and Automata by Peter Linz, Narosa Publ
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

Course Code- IT401
Module I
Introduction: Overview, Database System vs File System, Database System Concept and
Architecture, Data Model Schema and Instances, Data Independence and Database Language and
Interfaces, Data Definitions Language, DML, Overall Database Structure. Data Modeling Using the
Entity Relationship Model: ER Model Concepts, Notation for ER Diagram, Mapping Constraints,
Keys, Concepts of Super Key, Candidate Key, Primary Key, Generalization, Aggregation, Reduction
of an ER Diagrams to Tables, Extended ER Model, Relationship of Higher Degree.
Module II
Relational data Model and Language: Relational Data Model Concepts, Integrity Constraints,
Entity Integrity, Referential Integrity, Keys Constraints, Domain Constraints, Relational Algebra,
Relational Calculus, Tuple and Domain Calculus. Introduction on SQL: Characteristics of SQL,
Advantage of SQL. SQl Data Type and Literals. Types of SQL Commands. SQL Operators and
Their Procedure. Tables, Views and Indexes. Queries and Sub Queries. Aggregate Functions. Insert,
Update and Delete Operations, Joins, Unions, Intersection, Minus, Cursors, Triggers, Procedures in
SQL/PL SQL
Module III
Data Base Design & Normalization: Functional dependencies, normal forms, first, second, 8 third
normal forms, BCNF, inclusion dependence, loss less join decompositions, normalization using FD,
MVD, and JDs, alternative approaches to database design
Module IV
Transaction Processing Concept: Transaction System, Testing of Serializability, Serializability of
Schedules, Conflict & View Serializable Schedule, Recoverability, Recovery from Transaction
Failures, Log Based Recovery, Checkpoints, Deadlock Handling. Distributed Database: Distributed
Data Storage, Concurrency Control, Directory System.
Module V
Concurrency Control Techniques: Concurrency Control, Locking Techniques for Concurrency
Control, Time Stamping Protocols for Concurrency Control, Validation Based Protocol,
Multiple Granularity, Multi Version Schemes, Recovery with Concurrent Transaction, Case Study of
Oracle.
References:
1. Korth, Silbertz, Sudarshan,” Database Concepts”, McGraw Hill
2. Date C J, “An Introduction to Database Systems”, Addision Wesley
3. Elmasri, Navathe, “ Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Addision Wesley
4. O’Neil, Databases, Elsevier Pub.
5. RAMAKRISHNAN"Database Management Systems",McGraw Hill
6. Leon & Leon,”Database Management Systems”, Vikas Publishing House
7. Bipin C. Desai, “ An Introduction to Database Systems”, Gagotia Publications
8. Majumdar & Bhattacharya, “Database Management System”, TMH
9. R.P. Mahapatra, Database Management System, Khanna Publishing House
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DISCRETE MATHEMATICS
Course Code- BSC401
(3-CREDIT) (L-T-P/3-1-0)
MODULE-I
Mathematical Logic:
Introduction, Statements and Notation, Connectives, Normal Forms, Theory of Inference for the
Statement Calculus, The Predicate Calculus, Inference Theory of the Predicate Calculus.
MODULE-II
Set Theory:
Introduction, Basic Concepts of Set Theory, Representation of Discrete Structures, Relations and
Ordering, Functions.
Algebraic Structures:
Introduction, Algebraic Systems, Semi Groups and Monoids, Groups, Lattices as Partially Ordered
Sets, Boolean Algebra.
MODULE-III
Elementary Combinations:
Basic of Counting, Combinations and Permutations, Enumeration of Combinations and

Permutations, Enumerating Combinations and Permutations with Repetitions, Enumerating
Permutations with Constrained Repetitions, Binomial Coefficients, The Binomial and Multi-Nominal
Theorems, The Principle of Inclusion-Exclusion.
MODULE-IV
Recurrence Relations:
Generating Functions of Sequences, Calculating Coefficients of Generating Functions, Recurrence

Relations, Solving Recurrence Relations by Substitution and Generating Functions, The Method of
Characteristic Roots, Solutions of Inhomogeneous Recurrence Relations.
MODULE-V
Graphs and Trees:
Basic Concepts, Isomorphisms and Subgraphs, Trees and Their Properties, Spanning Trees, Directed
Trees, Binary Trees, Planar Graphs, Euler’s Formula, Multigraphs and Euler Circuits, Hamiltonian
Graphs, Chromatic Numbers, The Four-Color Problem.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to Computer Science, J.P. Tremblay, R.

Manohar, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited (Units-I, II).
2. Discrete Mathematics for Computer Scientists & Mathematicians, Joe L. Mott, Abraham
Kandel, Theodore P. Baker, Pearson, 2nd Edition (Units- III, IV, V).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Discrete Mathematics and its Applications, Kenneth H. Rosen, 7th Edition, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited.
2. Discrete Mathematics D.S. Malik & K. K. Sen, Revised Edition Cengage Learning.
3. Elements of Discrete Mathematics, C.L. Liu and D.P. Mohapatra, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited.
4. Discrete Mathematics with Applications, Thomas Koshy, Elsevier.
5. Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics, R. P. Grimaldi, Pearson.
6. Discrete Mathematical Structures by Bernard Kolman, Robert C. Busby and Sharon Cutler
Ross, Pearson Education.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CYBER SECURITY
Module I: Introduction to Cybercrime : Introduction, Cybercrime, and Information Security, Who

are Cybercriminals, Classifications of Cybercrimes, and Cybercrime: The legal Perspectives
and Indian Perspective, Cybercrime and the Indian ITA 2000, A Global Perspective on Cybercrimes.
the Attacks, Social Engineering, Cyber stalking, Cyber cafe and Cybercrimes, Botnets: The Fuel for
Cybercrime, Attack Vector, Cloud Computing.
Anonymizers, Phishing, Password Cracking, Keyloggers and Spywares, Virus and Worms, Trojan
Horse and Backdoors, Steganography, DoS and DDoS attacks, SQL Injection, Buffer Overflow.
Module V: Cyber Security : Organizational Implications Introduction, Cost of Cybercrimes and

IPR issues, Web threats for Organizations, Security and Privacy Implications, Social media
TEXT BOOK:
• Cyber Security: Understanding Cyber Crimes, Computer Forensics and Legal Perspectives,
Nina Godbole and Sunil Belapure, Wiley INDIA.
REFERENCE BOOK:
• Introduction to Cyber Security , Chwan-Hwa(john) Wu,J.David Irwin.CRC Press T&F Group
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
COURSE OUTLINE:
The basic purpose of this course is to provide a sound understanding of concepts and principles of
engineering economy and to develop proficiency with methods for making rational decisions
Module -1

Economics, Relation between science, engineering, technology and economics; Nature of Economic
problem, Production possibility curve, Concepts and measurement of utility, Law of Diminishing
Marginal Utility, Law of equi-marginal utility – its practical application and importance.
Module -II
Various concepts of cost – Fixed cost, variable cost, average cost, marginal cost, money cost, real
cost, opportunity cost. Shape of average cost, marginal cost, total cost, Cost curves.
Module III
Meaning of Market, Types of Market – Perfect Competition, Monopoly, Oligopoly, Monopolistic

Competition (Main features of these markets)
Pricing Policies- Entry Deterring policies, Predatory Pricing, Peak load Pricing. Product Life cycle
Module -IV
meaning, merits and demerits. Globalisation of Indian economy – merits and demerits. Elementary
Concepts of VAT, WTO, GATT & TRIPS agreement, Business cycle, Inflation
RECOMMENDED BOOKS:-

5. R.molrishnd Ro T.V S 'Theory of firms : Economics and Managerial Aspects'. Affiliated East
West Press Pvt Ltd New Delhi
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHM LAB

Course Code- CS402P
Course Outcome:
1. Able to Analyze the Real World Problem and Solv it.

2. Able to analyze Any Algorithm in Terms of Complexity.
3. Able to Compare Different Sorting Algorithm.
4. Able to Design Algorithm by Following Different Approach.
list of experiments:
1. Using a Stack of Characters, Covert an Infix String of Postfix String (I Class)
2. Implement Insertion, Deletion, Searching of a BST, (I Class)
3. (a) Implement Binary Search and Liner Search in a Program.
(b) Implement a Heap Sort Using a Max Heap.
4. (a) Implement DFS/BFS for a Connected Graph.
(b) Implement Dijkstra’s Shortest Path Algorithm Using BFS.
5. (a) Write a Program to Implement Huffman’s Algorithm.
(b) Implement MST Using Kruskal/Prim Algorithm
6. (a) Write a Program on Quick Sort Algorithm.
(b) Write a Program on Merge Sort Algorithm.
Take Different Input Instance for Both the Algorithm and Show the Running Time.
7. Implement Matrix Chain Order Algorithm.
8. Write Down a Program to Find Out a Solution for 0/1 Knapsack Problem.
9. Using Dynamic Programming Implement LCS.
10. (a) Find Out the Solution on the N-Queen Problem.
(b) Implement Back Tracking Using Game Trees.
above list or designed & set by the concerned institution as per the scope of the syllabus
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPERATING SYSTEM LAB
Course Code- CS401P
1. Study of hardware and software requirements of different operating systems (UNIX,LINUX,WINDOWS

XP, WINDOWS7/8
2. Execute various UNIX system calls for i. Process management ii. File management iii. Input/output
Systems calls
3. Implement CPU Scheduling Policies: i. SJF ii. Priority iii. FCFS iv. Multi-level Queue
4. Implement file storage allocation technique: i. Contiguous(using array) ii. Linked –list(using linked-list) iii.
Indirect allocation (indexing)
5. Implementation of contiguous allocation techniques: i. Worst-Fit ii. Best- Fit iii. First- Fit
6. Calculation of external and internal fragmentation i. Free space list of blocks from system ii. List process
file from the system
7. Implementation of compaction for the continually changing memory layout and calculate total movement of
data
8. Implementation of resource allocation graph RAG)
9. Implementation of Banker‟s algorithm
10. Conversion of resource allocation graph (RAG) to wait for graph (WFG) for each type of method used for
storing graph.
11. Implement the solution for Bounded Buffer (producer-consumer)problem using inter process
communication techniques-Semaphores
12. Implement the solutions for Readers-Writers problem using inter process communication technique -
Semaphore
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FORMAL LANGUAGES AND AUTOMATA THEORY

Course Code- CS403P
1. Write a program for Pattern searching ?

2. Write a program to simulate Nondeterministic Finite Automata (NFA)
3. Write a program to simulate deterministic Finite Automata (DFA)
4. Write a Program to remove Useless Production in a C.F.G
5. Write a Program to remove Unit Productionin a C.F.G
6. Create a pushdown automata for string translation
Course Structure
Academic Session 2020-21 onwards
SEMESTER V
S. No. Course Code Subject L T P Credit

Theory
1. ME501 Heat Transfer 4 1 0 4
2. ME502 Design of Machine Elements 3 1 0 3
3. ME503 Internal Combustion Engines 3 1 0 3
4.* ME504 Industrial Robotics 3 1 0 3

ME505 Design for Manufacturing
ME506 Energy System and Management
5.** ME507 Project Management 3 1 0 3
ME508 Principles of Management
ME509 Total Quality Management
Laboratory/Sessionals
1. ME501P Heat Transfer 0 0 3 1
2. ME502P Design of Machine Elements 0 0 3 1
3. ME503P Internal Combustion Engines 0 0 3 1
4. ME504P Industrial Robotics Lab 0 0 3 1
5 General Proficiency/Seminar 0 0 2 2
Total Credit 22
*Professional Elective I
** Open Elective I
HEAT TRANSFER
Course Code - ME501
Objectives :
 The aim of the course is to build a solid foundation in heat transfer exposing students
tothe three basic modes namely conduction, convection and radiation.
 Rigorous treatment of governing equations and solution procedures for the three
modeswill be provided, along with solution of practical problems using empirical
correlations.
 The course will also briefly cover boiling and condensation heat transfer, and the
analysisand design of heat exchangers.
Contents :
Module I
Introduction to three modes of heat transfer, Derivation of heat balance equation- Steady
onedimensional solution for conduction heat transfer in Cartesian, cylindrical and
sphericalgeometry, concept of conduction and film resistances, critical thickness of insulation,
lumpedsystem approximation and Biot number, heat transfer through pin fins- Two
dimensionalconduction solutions for both steady and unsteady heat transfer-approximate solution
tounsteady conduction, heat transfer by the use of Heissler charts.(12)
Module II
Heat convection,basic equations, boundary layers- Forced convection, external and
internalflows- Natural convective heat transfer- Dimensionless parameters for forced and
freeconvection heat transfer-Correlations for forced and free convection- Approximate
solutionsto laminar boundary layer equations (momentum and energy) for both internal and
externalflow- Estimating heat transfer rates in laminar and turbulent flow situations using
appropriatecorrelations for free and forced convection. (10)
Module III
Interaction of radiation with materials, definitions of radiative properties, Stefan
Boltzmann’slaw, black and gray body radiation, Calculation of radiation heat transfer between
surfacesusing radiative properties, view factors and the radiosity method.(8)
Module IV
Types of heat exchangers, Analysis and design of heat exchangers using bothLMTD and ε-NTU
methods. Exposure of numerical technique of heat transfer. (6)
ModuleV
Boiling and Condensation heat transfer, Pool boiling curve (3)
ModuleVI
Introduction mass of transfer, Fick’s law, Similarity between heat and mass transfer (3)
Course Outcomes:
1. After completing the course, the students will be able to formulate and analyze a
heattransfer problem involving any of the three modes of heat transfer.
2. The students will be able to obtain exact solutions for the temperature variation
usinganalytical methods where possible or employ approximate methods or
empiricalcorrelations to evaluate the rate of heat transfer.
3. The students will be able to design devices such as heat exchangers and also estimate
theinsulation needed to reduce heat losses where necessary.
Text Books:
1. P. K. Nag, Heat and Mass Transfer
2. Yunus A Cengel, Heat Transfer : A Practical Approach, McGraw Hill, 2002
3. Frank Kreith, Raj M. Manglik, Mark S. Bohn: Principles of Heat Transfer, Cengage
Learning
References Books:
1. A. Bejan, Heat Transfer John Wiley, 1993
2. J.P.Holman, Heat Transfer, Eighth Edition, McGraw Hill, 1997.
3. F.P.Incropera, and D.P. Dewitt, Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, John
Wiley,Sixth Edition, 2007.
4. MassoudKaviany, Principles of Heat Transfer, John Wiley, 2002
DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS
Course Code - ME502
Objectives :
This course seeks to provide an introduction to the design of machine elements commonly
encountered in mechanical engineering practice, through
 A strong background in mechanics of materials based failure criteria underpinning the
safety-critical design of machine components
 An understanding of the origins, nature and applicability of empirical design principles,
based on safety considerations
 An overview of codes, standards and design guidelines for different elements
 An appreciation of parameter optimization and design iteration
 An appreciation of the relationships between component level design and overall
machine system design and performance
Contents :
Module I
Design considerations - limits, fits and standardization, Review of failure theories for static and
dynamic loading (including fatigue failure), (6)
Module II
Design of shafts under static and fatigue loadings, Analysis and design of sliding and rolling
contact bearings, (8)
Module III
Design of transmission elements: spur, helical, bevel and worm gears; belt and chain drives, (8)
Module IV
Design of springs: helical compression, tension, torsional and leaf springs, (6)
Module V
Design of joints: threaded fasteners, pre-loaded bolts and welded joints, (6)
Module VI
Analysis and applications of power screws and couplings, Analysis of clutches and brakes,
Engine Components. (9)
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course, students will get an overview of the design methodologies
employed for the design of various machine components
Text Books:
[1] Shigley, J.E. and Mischke, C.R., Mechanical Engineering Design, Fifth Edition, McGraw-
Hill International; 1989.
[2] Deutschman, D., Michels, W.J. and Wilson, C.E., Machine Design Theory and Practice,
Macmillan, 1992.
[3] Juvinal, R.C., Fundamentals of Machine Component Design, John Wiley, 1994.
[4] Spottes, M.F., Design of Machine elements, Prentice-Hall India, 1994.
[5] R. L. Norton, Mechanical Design – An Integrated Approach, Prentice Hall, 1998
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
Course Code - ME503
Objectives :
 To familiarize with the terminology associated with IC Engines.
 To understand the basics of IC Engines.
 To understand Combustion and various parameters and variables affecting it in various
types of IC Engines.
 To learn about various systems used in IC Engine required for various applications.
Contents :
Module I
Review of ideal cycles; Details of fuel-air cycles. [6 hrs]
Module II
Combustion in SI and CI engines, combustion stages, combustion chamber and abnormal
combustion. [8hrs]
Module III
Fuel supply systems in SI and CI engines, carburetor.[7hrs]
Module IV
Port fuel injection, direct injection and common rail injection. [7hrs]
Module V
Ignition system, lubrication systems and cooling Systems [7hrs]
Module VI
Testing of IC Engines, Engine emissions and control, advanced IC engine concepts [7hrs]
Course Outcomes:
1. Students who have done this course will have a good idea of the basics of IC engines.
2. They will have good knowledge of different parameters influence the operational
characteristics of IC Engines.
3. Students will have good idea about different operational parts of IC Engines.
4. They will have understand the functions of fuel combustion of IC Engines.
5. They will have the good knowledge about designing and modifying the IC engines.
Text books:
1.Obert E. F. "Internal combustion engines and air pollution " Harper and Row Publication Inc.
NY,1973.
2. Heisler H. " Advanced Engine technology " Edward Arnold 1995.
3. Heywood J.B. " Internal combustion Engine fundamentals ", McGraw Hill Book Co. NY, 1989.
4. Heldt P.M. " High combustion Engines ", Oxford &IBH Publishing Co.India, 1985.
5. Stockel M.W.,Stockel TS and Johnson C, " Auto Fundamentals ", The Goodheart, Wilcox
Co.Inc. Illinois, 1996.
INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS
Course code-ME504
Objective:
 To Gain knowledge of Robotics and automation.

 To Understand the working methodology of robotics and automation.
 Write the program for robot for various applications
Contents:
Module-I
Robotics-classification, Sensors-Position sensors, Velocity sensors, Proximity sensors, Touch
and Slip Sensors, Force and Torque sensors. (6hrs)
Module-II
Grippers and Manipulators-Gripper joints, Gripper force, Serial manipulator, Parallel
Manipulator, selection of Robot-Selection based on the Application (8hrs)
Module-III
Kinematics-Manipulators Kinematics, Rotation Matrix, Homogenous Transformation Matrix,
Direct and Inverse Kinematics for industrial robots for Position and orientation. (8hrs)
Module-IV
Differential Kinematics and static- Dynamics-Lagrangian Formulation, Newton-Euler
Formulation for RR & RP Manipulators. (6hrs)
Module-V
Trajectory planning-Motion Control- Interaction control, Rigid Body mechanics, Control
architecture- position, path velocity and force control systems, computed torque control, adaptive
control, and Servo system for robot control. (6hrs)
Module-VI
Programming of Robots and Vision System- overview of various programming languages. (4
hrs)
Module-VII
Application of Robots in production systems- Application of robot in welding, machine tools,
material handling, and assembly operations parts sorting and parts inspection. (2hrs)
Course Outcomes:
 Understand the basic components of robots.
 Differentiate types of robots and robot grippers.
 Model forward and inverse kinematics of robot manipulators.
 Analyze forces in links and joints of a robot.
 Programme a robot to perform tasks in industrial applications.
 Design intelligent robots using sensors.
Text Books:
1. Fu, K.S., Gonzalez, R.C., and Lee, C.S.G., Robotics control, Sensing, Vision and
Intelligence, McGraw-Hill Publishing company, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Klafter, R.D., Chmielewski, T.A., and Negin. M, Robot Engineering-An Integrated
Approach, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2002.
3. Craig, J.J., Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control, Addison Wesley, 1999.
DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING
Course code-ME505
Objective:
 To educate students on factors to be considered in designing parts and components with

focus on manufacturability.
.
 To impart the knowledge on design considerations for designing components produced
using various machining operations.
Contents:
Module-I
Introduction: Overview of the course, Design for manufacturing, Typical Case studies,
Innovative product and service designs. (4hrs)
Module-II
Material Selection: Requirements for material selection, systematic selection of processes and
materials, ASHBY charts (4hrs)
Module-III
Design for Casting: Basic characteristics and Mold preparation, Sand casting alloys, Design
rules for sand castings, Example calculations, Investment casting overview, Cost estimation,
Number of parts per cluster, Ready to pour liquid metal cost, Design guidelines for Investment
casting, Die casting cycle, Determination of optimum number of cavities, appropriate machine
size, Die cost estimation, Design principles. (8hrs)
Module-IV
Design for Injection molding: Injection molding systems, Molds, molding cycle time, mold cost
estimation, estimation of optimum number of cavities, Assembly techniques, Design Guidelines.
(5hrs)
Module-V
Design for Hot Forging: Characteristics of the forging process, forging allowances, flash
removal, die cost estimation,Die life and tool replacement costs. (5hrs)
Module-VI
Design for Sheet metal working: Press selection, press brake operations, Design rules. (2hrs)
Module-VII
Design for Powder Metal processing: Powder metallurgy, tooling and presses for Compaction,
Sintering, materials, heat treatments, Design guidelines. Design for machining: Machining using
single point cutting tools, multipoint cutting tools, abrasive wheels, Assembly, cost estimation
for machined components, Design guidelines. (10) Module 8: Design for Assembly: Design
guidelines for manual assembly, large assemblies, analysis of an assembly, rules for product
design for automation, design for robot assembly, Design for manufacture and Computer aided
design. (4hrs)
Course Outcomes:
 Understand the design principles of design for manufacturing processes
 Estimates the cost of dies, molds and machined components based on die life.
 Understand the design for manual assembly and automated assembly.
 Design typical assemblies using principles of design for X concepts.
 Understand the design rules for machining with single point and multi point cutting tools.
Text Books:
1. Geoffrey Boothroyd, Dewhurst.P, Knight.W, roduct design for manufacture and
assembly,
2. CRC press, 2002
3. George E Dieter, Engineering Design- A material processing approach, 5/E. Mc Graw
hill international, 2003.
4. ASM Handbook, Design for manufacture, 2000.
ENERGY SYSTEM AND MANAGEMENT
Course code-ME506
Objectives:
 To understand the basics of Energy Resources.

 To understand the Energy Conversion Systems and Management.
 To learn about basic concept of Power Systems Engineering.
Contents:
Module- I
Energy Resources: Energy and Development, Units and Measurements, Conventional and Non-
Conventional Sources of Energy, Fossil and Mineral Energy Resources, Details of Coal, Peat,
Oil, Natural Gas and Nuclear Resources, Recovery of Fossil Fuels, Classification and
Characterization of Fossil fuels, Basic of Solar, Wind, Bio, Hydro, Tidal, Ocean Thermal and
other Renewable Energy Sources, Impact of Energy on Environment, Flow of Energy in
Ecological System, Environmental Degradation due to energy, Control of Pollution from Energy.
(7hrs)
Module- II
Energy Conversion Systems I: Energy, Conversion routes, Direct and indirect way of Energy
Conversion, Principles of heat and mass transfer, Thermodynamics, Fluid static and dynamics,
Electricity generation, distribution and use, Basic of Solar Thermal Conversion, Technology of
Selective Coating, Fundamentals of Flat Plate Collector and Evacuated Collector, Basic of Wind
Energy Conversion, Wind machine, Wind electric generator, Wind pump. (7hrs)
Module- III
Energy Conversion Systems II: Basics of Photovoltaic Conversion technology and PV systems,
PV system design methodologies, Basics of Bio-energy conversion, biomethanation technology,
Thermochemical Conversion through Pyrolysis, Gasification and Esterification, Bio Oil,
Application of Ocean Thermal Gradient and Geothermal gradient for power generation, Basics
of hydropower, Tidal and Wave power, Basics of Hydrogen fuel, Fundamentals of Fuel Cells,
Basics of Fusion power, Energy Storage Technologies, Mechanical storage, Chemical storage
and Electrical storage, Details of Pb-acid battery, Ni-Cd-alkaline battery, Ni-iron and Na-S
batteries, battery maintenance and safety precautions. (7hrs)
Module- IV
Energy Management: Fundamental of Energy conservation, Energy Management and Audit,
Basics of Energy Demand and Supply, Principles of Economic analysis in the Energy
Management and Audit Programme, Supply side and demand side energy management, Boilers
and Firing System, Steam, Condensation Systems, Energy Conservation and Management in
power plant, Energy conservation in Buildings, Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
System, Degree day in energy use monitoring, Energy Conservation Opportunities, in chemical
industries, Waste heat recovery, Co-generation, Energy Conservation in Agricultural Sector,
Energy conservation in illumination engineering, Combustion stoichiometry, air-fuel ratio,
optimum loading in boilers, etc (7hrs)
Module- V
Industrial Energy Analysis: Materials and energy balance in the industries, Products and the
process, industrial demand and supply networking, Optimization techniques, efficiency analysis,
methods, Energy monitoring and ongoing information dissertation in terms of energy
consumption, production and cumulative sum of differences. Energy efficiency analysis in
various conversion systems like boilers, furnaces, compression systems, controlling systems, etc.
Case studies for large scale, medium scale and small scale industries, efficiency integration
methodologies. (7hrs)
Module- VI
Power Systems Engineering Basic concept of power plants, types of power plants, thermal power
stations, various components of thermal power stations, power plant cycles, fuel handling,
combustion, waste disposal methodologies, economizers, turbo alternators, heat balance and
efficiencies, hydroelectric power plant, various components, capacity calculation, design
methodologies, operation and maintenance methodologies, elements of nuclear power stations,
reactor design, fuel, moderator, coolant control and safety, waste disposal. (7hrs)
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to understand Energy Resources, Energy
Conversion Systems and Energy Management.
Text Books:
1. Albert Thumann, Handbook of Energy Audits, The Fairmont Press Inc., Atlanta gergia,
1979.
2. Murphy W.R and Mckay G, Energy Management, Butterworths, London, 1982.
3. Albert Thumann, Plant Engineer and Management guide to Energy Conservation, Van
Nost and Reinhold Co., Newyork.
4. Energy Audits, E.E.O.-Book-lets, U.K. 1988.
5. Craig B.Smith, “Energy Management Principles”, Pergamon Press.
6. The role of Energy Manager, E.E.O., U.K.
7. The Energy conservation Design Resource Hand Book-The Royal architectural Institute
of Canada.
8. Non-Conventional Energy Resources by B.H . Khan, Tata McGraw Hill
Project Management
Course code- ME507
Objective:
 To facilitate the understanding of project management principles and processes
Contents:
Module- I
Introduction: Introduction to Project Management, definitions, History of Project Management,
project identifications, establishing a project, Project Life Cycle.
(4 hrs)
Module- II
Project Analysis: Facets of Project Analysis, Resource Allocation, Market Analysis, Technical
Analysis, Economic and Ecological Analysis. (7 hrs)
Module- III
Financial Analysis: Financial Estimates and Projections, Investment Criteria, Financing of
Projects. (8 hrs)
Module- IV
Network Methods in PM: Origin of Network Techniques, AON and AOA differentiation, CPM
network, PERT network, Other network models. (9 hrs)
Module- V
Optimisation in PM: Time and Cost trade-off in CPM, Crashing procedure, Scheduling when
resources are limited. (6 hrs)
Module- VI
Project Risk Management: Risk analysis, Work Breakdown Structure, Earned Value
Management. (8 hrs)
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand the importance of projects and its phases.
2. Analyze projects from marketing, operational and financial perspectives.
3. Evaluate projects based on discount and non-discount methods.
4. Develop network diagrams for planning and execution of a given project.
5. Apply crashing procedures for time and cost optimization.
Text Books:
1. Prasanna Chandra, Project: A Planning Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Book Company,
New Delhi, 4th Edition, 2009.
2. Cleland, Gray and Laudon, Project Management, Tata McGraw Hill Book Company,
New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. Jack R. Meredith., Samuel J. Jr. Mantel., Project Management - A Managerial Approach,
John Wiley, 6th Edition, 2011.
Principles of Management
Course code- ME508
Objectives:
 To understand the principles of Management and their application to the functioning of
organization
Contents:
Module- I
Definition of management, science or art, manager vs. entrepreneur; Types of managers-
managerial roles and skills; Evolution of management-scientific human relations, system and
contingency approaches. (6 hrs)
Module- II
Types of Business organizations, sole proprietorship, partnership, company, public and private
enterprises; Organization culture and environment; current trends and issues in management,
Nature and purpose of planning, types of planning, objectives, policies , Strategic Management,
planning Tools and Techniques, Decision making steps & processes. (8 hrs)
Module- III
Nature and purpose of Organizing, formal and informal organization, organization structure,
types, line and staff authority, departmentalization, delegation of authority, centralization and
decentralization. Job design, human resource management, HR planning, Recruitment selection,
Training & Development, Performance Management, carrier planning and Management. (8 hrs)
Module- IV
Directing, individual and group behavior,, motivation, motivation theories, motivational
techniques, Job satisfaction, job enrichment, leadership, types and theories of leadership,
effective communication. (6 hrs)
Module- V
Production planning and control: Forecasting models, aggregate production, and planning,
scheduling, materials requirement planning; Controlling, system and process of controlling,
budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques (8 hrs)
Module- VI
Inventory Control: Deterministic models, safety stock inventory control system Use of
computers and IT in management control, productivity problems and management, control and
performance, direct and preventive control, reporting. (6 hrs)
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course, the students will
1. Get a clear understanding of management functions in an organization
2. Develop leadership quality to guide their work force to get done assigned jobs in time.
3. Maintain correct stock of spares and material for sustained production
4. Maintaining and hiring human resources of required skill and experience in time
5. Preparation of master budget and other budget to arrange required funds to carry out
planned activities of organization
Text Books:
1. Robbins S.P. and Couiter M, Management, Prentice Hall India, 10th ed., 2009
2. Stoner JAF, Freeman RE and Gilbert DR, Management, 6th ed., Pearson Education 2004.
3. Tripathy PC & Reddy PN, Principles of Management, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 1999.
4. O.P.Khanna - Industrial Engineering and Management – Dhanpat Rai Publications
O.P.Khanna
Total Quality Management
Course code- ME509
Objective:
To facilitate the understanding of total quality management principles and processes.
Contents:
Module-I
Introduction, evolution of quality control; Definitions of quality, Quality and productivity; Basic
concepts of TQM, TQM framework, contributions of Deming, Juran and Crosby.; Quality
conformance, customer need, customer orientation & satisfaction, customer complaints; Quality
cost, product & service costing, measuring quality cost
8 Hrs.
Module-II
TQM principles; leadership, strategic quality planning; Quality councils- employee involvement,
motivation; Empowerment;
6 Hrs.
Module-III
Team and Teamwork; Quality circles, recognition and reward, performance appraisal;
Continuous process improvement; PDCA cycle, 5S, Kaizen; Supplier partnership, Partnering,
Supplier rating & selection.
8 Hrs.
Module-IV
The seven traditional tools of quality management; New management tools; Six sigma-
concepts,methodology, applications to manufacturing, Bench marking process, evaluation;
FMEA-stages, types.
6 Hrs.
Module-V
TQM tools and techniques, control charts, process capability, concepts of six sigma, Quality
Function Development (QFD), Taguchi quality loss function; TPM- concepts, improvement
needs, performance measures.
8 Hrs.
Module-VI
Quality systems, need for ISO 9000, ISO 9001-9008; Quality system- elements, documentation;
Quality auditing, QS 9000, ISO 14000-concepts, requirements and benefits; TQM
implementation in manufacturing and service sectors.
6 Hrs.
Course Outcomes: At the end of course ,the students will be able to

1.Understand the importance of quality and its assurance.
2.Analyze quality statements, customer focus and market plan.
3.Evaluate quality based products & methods.
4.Develop tools, methodology for the assurance of quality.
5.Apply & use the tools and techniques of TQM in manufacturing and
service sector.
Text Books:
1. Besterfield D.H. et al., Total Quality Management, 3rd ed., Pearson Education Asia, 2006.
2. Evans J.R. and Lindsay W.M., The management and Control of Quality, 8th ed., first Indian
edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
3. Janaki raman B. and Gopal R.K., Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall India, 2006.
4. Suganthi L. and Samuel A., Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall India, 2006.
Course Structure
SEMESTER VI
S. No. Course Code Subject L T P Credit

Theory
1. ME601 Solid Mechanics 4 1 0 4
2. ME602 Automobile Engineering 3 1 0 3
3. ME603 Design of Transmission System 3 1 0 3
4.* ME604 Computer Aided Design 3 1 0 3

ME605 Mechatronic Systems
ME606 Microprocessor in Automation
5.** ME607 Operations Research 3 1 0 3
ME608 Reliability Engineering
ME609 Machine Tool Design
1. ME601P Solid Mechanics 0 0 3 1
2. ME602P Automobile Engineering 0 0 3 1
3. ME604P Manufacturing Lab 0 0 3 1
4. ME607P Computer Aided Design 0 0 3 1
5 IN601 Internship/Tour & Training/Industrial 0 0 2 2
Training
Total Credit 22
*Professional Elective II
** Open Elective II
SOLID MECHANICS
Course Code – ME601
Objectives:
The objective is to present the mathematical and physical principles in understanding the linear
continuum behavior of solids.
Course Contents:
Module-I
Introduction to Cartesian tensors, Strains: Concept of strain, derivation of small strain tensor and
compatibility, strain gauges and rosettes. (8hrs)
Module-II
Stress: Derivation of Cauchy relations and equilibrium and symmetry equations, principal
stresses and directions, octahedral shear stresses. (8hrs)
Module-III
Constitutive equations: Generalized Hooke’s law, Linear elasticity, Material symmetry;
Boundary Value Problems: concepts of uniqueness and superposition. (6hrs)
Module-IV
Plane stress and plane strain problems, introduction to governing equations in polar and
cylindrical coordinates, axisymmetric problems. (7hrs)
Module-V
Application to thick cylinders, rotating discs, torsion of non-circular cross-sections, stress
concentration, thermo-elasticity. (8hrs)
Module-VI
Solutions using potentials energy methods, Introduction to plasticity. (5hrs)
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to:
1. Understand the deformation behavior of solids under different types of loading.
2. Find mathematical solutions for simple geometries under different types of loading.
3. Transform the state of stress from one set of co-ordinate axes to another set of co-
ordinate axes.
4. Apply compatibility equation for different system of strain.
5. Find the mathematical solution for axisymmetric problem.
6. Understand the concept of elasticity and plasticity.
Text Books:
[1] G. T. Mase, R. E. Smelser and G. E. Mase, Continuum Mechanics for Engineers, Third
Edition, CRC Press, 2004.
[2] Y. C. Fung, Foundations of Solid Mechanics, Prentice Hall International, 1965.
[3] Lawrence. E. Malvern, Introduction to Mechanics of a Continuous Medium, Prentice Hall
international, 1969.
[4] S M A Kazimi, Solid Mechanics, Mc Graw Hill, 2016
AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
Objectives:
To understand the construction and working principle of various parts of an automobile
Contents:
Module-I
Types of automobiles, vehicle construction and layouts, chassis, frame and body, vehicle aerodynamics,
IC engines- components, function and materials, (5)
Module-II
Engine auxiliary systems, fuel supply system, starting system, ignition system, electronic injection for SI
and CI engines, engine lubrication and cooling system, engine emission control by 3-way catalytic
converter system, Emission norms .(10)
Module-III
Transmission systems, AWD and 4WD transmission, clutch types & construction, gear boxes, Automatic
transmission, fluid flywheel, torque converter, propeller shaft, slip joints, universal joints, differential
and rear axle, (6)
Module-IV
Steering geometry and types of steering gear box, power steering, types of front axle, wheel alignment
types of suspension systems. (5)
Module-V
General braking requirement, elementary theory of shoe brake, weight transfer, mean lining pressure
and heat generation during braking, mechanical Pneumatic and hydraulic braking systems, power brake,
antilock braking system(ABS), (6)
Module-VI
Alternative energy sources, natural gas, LPG, biodiesel, bio-ethanol, gasohol and hydrogen fuels in
automobiles, modifications needed, performance, combustion &emission characteristics of alternative
fuels in SI and CI engines. Electric and Hybrid vehicles, application of Fuel Cells, ( 10)
Module-VII
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the function of each automobile component
and also have a clear idea about the overall vehicle performance.
Text books:
(i)Kirpal Singh, Automobile Engineering, 7thed., Standard Publishers, New Delhi, 1997.
(ii) Jain K.K. and Asthana R.B., Automobile Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,2002.
(iii)Heitner J., Automotive Mechanics, 2nd ed., East-West Press, 1999.
(iv)Heisler H., Advanced Engine Technology, SAE International Publ., USA, 1998.
DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Objectives:
 To learn about the design procedures for mechanical power transmission components
Contents:
Module-I
Flexible transmission elements- design of flat belts & pulleys, selection of V-belts and pulleys,
selection of hoisting wire ropes and pulleys, design of chains and sprockets. (6 hrs)
Module-II
Gear transmission- speed ratios and number of teeth, force analysis, tooth stresses, dynamic
effects, fatigue strength, factor safety, gear materials; Design of straight tooth spur gear and
parallel axis helical gears based on strength and wear considerations, pressure angle in the
normal and transverse plane; equivalent number of teeth and forces for helical gears. (6 hrs)
Module-III
Straight bevel gear- tooth terminology, tooth forces and stresses, equivalent number of teeth.
Estimating the dimensions of a pair of straight bevel gears. (4 hrs)
Module-IV
Worm gear, merits & demerits, terminology, thermal capacity, materials, forces & stresses,
efficiency, estimating the size of worm gear pair. Cross helical gears, terminology, helix angles,
sizing of a pair of helical gears. (4 hrs)
Module-V
Gear box- geometric progression, standard step ratio; Ray diagram, kinematics layout; Design of
sliding mesh gear box- Design of multi-seed gear box for machine too applications; constant
mesh gear box, speed reducer unit; Variable speed gear box; Fluid couplings, Torque converters
for automotive applications. (10 hrs)
Module-VI
Cam design, types: pressure angle and undercutting base circle determination, forces and surface
stresses; Design of plate clutches, axial clutches, cone clutches, internal expandingrim clutches;
Electromagnetic clutches; Band and Block brakes. (6 hrs)
Module-VII
External shoe brakes, internal expanding shoe brake. (4 hrs)
Course Outcomes:
1. Upon completing this course the students will be able to design transmission systems for
engines and machines.
Text Books:
(i) Shigley J., Mischke C., Budynas R. and Nisbett K., Mechanical Engineering Design,
8thed., Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
(ii) Jindal U.C., Machine Design: Design of Transmission System, Dorling Kindersley,
2010.
(iii) Maitra G. and Prasad L., Handbook of Mechanical Design, 2nd ed., Tata McGraw
Hill,2001.
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN
Objectives:
 To provide an overview of how computers can be utilized in mechanical component
design
Contents:
Module- I
Fundamentals of Computer Graphics- Product cycle, sequential and concurrent engineering,
Computer Aided Design, CAD system architecture, computer graphics, Coordinate systems, 2D
and 3D transformations, viewing transformation (8 hrs)
Module- II
Geometric Modelling- straight line, representation of curves, Hermite curves, Bezier curves, B-
spline curves, rational curves (5 hrs)
Module- III
Techniques of surface modelling, plane surface, cylindrical surface, surface of revolution,
surface patch, Coons and bicubic patches, Bezier and B-spline surfaces (6 hrs)
Module- IV
Fundamental of solid design, parametric space of a solid, surface and curves in a solid, Solid
modelling techniques, CSG and B-rep. (6 hrs)
Module- V
Visual realism- hidden line-surface-solid removal algorithms, shading, colouring, computer
animation (5 hrs)
Module- VI
Assembly of parts- assembly modelling, interferences of positions and orientation, tolerance
analysis, mass property calculations, mechanism simulation and interefence checking CAD
standards- Graphical Kernel System (GKS), standards for vexchange images, Open Graphics
Library (OpenGL), Data exchange standards- IGES, STEP, CALS etc., Communication
standards (12 hrs)
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Use computer and CAD software for modelling mechanical components
2. draw different types of curves in 2D
3. draw different types of surface
4. draw solid modelling
5. assembly of different part modelling
Text Books:
1. Ibrahim Zeid, Mastering CAD CAM, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. 2007.
2. C. McMohan and J. Browne, CAD/CAM Principles, II edition, Pearson Education, 1999.
3. W. M. Neumann and R.F. Sproul, Principles of Computer Gra[hics, McGraw Hill, 1989.
4. D. Hearn and M.P Baker, Computer Graphics, Prentice Hall Inc., 1992.
MECHATRONIC SYSTEMS
Objective:
 To provide an overview of mechatronics applications and the use of micro-sensors and
microprocessors.
Contents:
Module-I
Introduction: Definition of Mechanical Systems, Philosophy and approach; Systems and Design:
Mechatronic approach, Integrated Product Design, Modeling, Analysis and Simulation, Man-
Machine Interface. (8hrs)
Module-II
Sensors and transducers: classification, Development in Transducer technology, Opto-
electronics- Shaft encoders, CD Sensors, Vision System, etc.(5hrs)
Module-III
Drives and Actuators: Hydraulic and Pneumatic drives, Electrical Actuators such as servo motor
and Stepper motor, Drive circuits, open and closed loop control.(5hrs)
Module-IV
Embedded Systems: Hardware Structure, Software Design and Communication, Programmable
Logic Devices, Automatic Control and Real Time Control Systems.(6hrs)
Module-V
Smart materials: Shape Memory Alloy, Piezoelectric and Magnetostrictive Actuators: Materials,
Static and dynamic characteristics, illustrative examples for positioning, vibration isolation,
etc.(8hrs)
Module-VI
Micro mechatronic systems: Micro sensors, Micro actuators; Micro-fabrication techniques LIGA
Process: Lithography, etching, Micro-joining etc. Application examples; Case studies Examples
of Mechatronic Systems from Robotics Manufacturing, Machine Diagnostics, Road vehicles and
Medical Technology. (10hrs)
Course Outcomes:
 To understand the structure of microprocessors and their applications in mechanical

devices
 To know the use of various sensors and transducers
 To understand the principle of automatic control and real time motion control systems,
with the help of electrical drives and actuators
 To know the static and dynamic characteristics of actuators
 To understand the use of micro-sensors and their applications in various fields
Text Books:
1. Devdas Shetty & Richard A. Kolk, Mechatronics System Design, PWS Publishing
Company (Thomson Learning Inc.)
2. William Bolton, Mechatronics: A Multidisciplinary Approach, Pearson Education
3. R. K. Rajput, A Textbook of Mechatronics, S. Chand & Company Private Limited
4. Mechatronics: Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering,
William Bolton, Prentice Hall
MICROPROCESSOR IN AUTOMATION
Objectives:
 To introduce the basic concepts of Digital circuits, Microprocessor system and digital
Controller.
Contents:
Module- I
Number Systems, codes, digital electronics: Logic Gates, combinational circuits design, Flip-
flops, Sequential logic circuits design: Counters, Shift registers. Introduction to 8085 Functional
Block Diagram, Registers, ALU, Bus systems, Timing and control signals. (10 hrs)
Module- II
Machine cycles, instruction cycle and timing states, instruction timing diagrams, Memory
interfacing. (3 hrs)
Module- III
Assembly Language Programming: Addressing modes, Instruction set, simple programs in 8085;
Concept of Interrupt, Need for Interrupts, Interrupt structure, Multiple Interrupt requests and
their handling, Programmable interrupt controller; Interfacing peripherals: Programmable
peripheral interface (8255). (10 hrs)
Module- IV
Interfacing Analog to Digital Converter & Digital to Analog converter, Multiplexed seven
segments LED display systems, Stepper Motor Control, Data Communication: Serial Data
communication (8251), Programmable Timers (8253); 8086/8088 Microprocessor and its
advanced features (10 hrs)
Module- V
Introduction to Digital Control: Sampling theorem, Signal conversion and Processing, Z
Transform, Digital Filters, Implementation of Digital Algorithm. (7 hrs)
Course Outcomes:
1. Students who have done this course will have a good idea of the use of microprocessers
for automation.
Text Books:
1. Digital Electronics: An Introduction to Theory and Practice, William H. Gothmann, PHI
Learning Private Limited
2. Digital Computer Electronics: An Introduction to Microcomputers, Albert Paul Malvino,
Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd.
3. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the 8085, Ramesh
Gaonkar, PENRAM International Publishers.
4. Digital Control Systems, Benjamin C. Kuo, Oxford University Press (2/e, Indian Edition,
2007).
5. Microcomputer Experimentation with the Intel SDK-85, Lance A. Leventhal, Prentice
Hall
OPERATIONS RESEARCH
Course Code-ME 607
Course Objectives : This course enables the students:

(1) Formulate a real-world problem as a mathematical programming model
(2) Know the theoretical workings of the simplex method for linear programming and
perform iterations of it
(3) Analyze the relationship between a linear program and its dual, including strong duality
and complementary slackness
(4) Solve specialized linear programming problems like the transportation, assignment,
sequencing, games theory, and queuing model problems
(5) The use of Operations Research approaches in solving real problems in industry;
mathematical models for analysis of real problems in Operations Research.
Course Outcomes: After completion of the course, the learners will be able to:
(1) Capability to recognize the importance and value of Operations Research and
mathematical modeling.
(2) Ability to formulate a managerial decision problem into a mathematical model;
(3) Recognize Operations Research models and apply them to real-life problems;
(4) Use various approaches to solve a mathematical model for various practical problems in
industry.
(5) Describe dynamic programming terminology.
Syllabus
MODULE I
Introduction: Scope and limitations of O.R., Linear Programming: Mathematical formulation of
the problem. Graphical solution and Simplex Method. 8L
MODULE II
Linear Programming: Big-M Method, Concept of duality, Dual simplex method. 6L
MODULE III
Transportation Model: Basic feasible solution by different methods, Finding optimal solutions,
Degeneracy in transportation problems, Unbalanced transportation problems.
Assignment Model: Balanced and unbalanced assignments,Assignment to given schedules.10L
MODULE IV
Sequencing: Processing of 2 jobs through machines –graphical method, Processing of n jobs
through two machines, processing n jobs through three machines. 5L
MOLULE V
Games Theory: Two-persons zero sum games, Pure and mixed strategies, Rules of dominance,
Solution methods without saddle point. 5L
MOLULE VI
Queuing Model: Queuing systems and their characteristics, The M/M/1/FIFO/ Queuing
system, Introduction to dynamic programming. 8L
Text Books:
1. P. Rama Murthy , Operations Research, New Age, New Delhi
2. P.K. Gupta & D. S. Hira , Operations Research, S.Chand & Company Ltd, New Delhi.
References Books:
1. Hamdy A Taha, 1999. Introduction to Operations Research, PHI Limited, New Delhi.
2.Sharma, J.K., 1989. Mathematical Models in Operations Research, Tata McGraw Hill
publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi.
3.Beer, Stafford, 1966. Decision and Control, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.
RELIABILITY ENGINEERING
Objectives : To understand the applications of reliability in engineering decision making
Contents:
Module-I
Introduction: Probabilistic reliability, failures and failure modes, repairable and non-repairable items,
pattern of failures with time, reliability economics. (6)
Module-II
Component Reliability Models: Basics of probability & statistics, hazard rate & failure rate, constant
hazard rate model, increasing hazard rate models, decreasing hazard rate model, time-dependent &
stress-dependent hazard models, bath-tub curve. (10)
Module-III
System Reliability Models: Systems with components in series, systems with parallel components,
combined series-parallel systems, k-out-of-m systems, standby models, load-sharing models, stress-
strength models, reliability block diagram. (10)
Module-IV
Life Testing & Reliability Assessment: Censored and uncensored field data, burn-in testing, acceptance
testing, accelerated testing, identifying failure distributions & estimation of parameters, reliability
assessment of components and systems. (8)
Module-V
Reliability Analysis & Allocation: Reliability specification and allocation, failure modes and effects and
criticality analysis (FMECA), fault tree analysis, cut sets & tie sets approaches; Maintainability Analysis:
Repair time distribution, MTTF / MTBF, MTTR, availability, maintainability, preventive maintenance. (6)
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Understand the concepts of reliability, availability and maintainability

2. Develop hazard-rate models to know the behavior of components
3. Build system reliability models for different configurations
4. Asses reliability of components and systems using field and test data
5. Implement strategies for improving reliability of repairable and non-repairable systems
Text Books:
(i) Ebeling CE, An Introduction to Reliability and Maintainability Engineering, TMH, New Delhi, 2004.
(ii) O’Connor P and Kleymer A, Practical Reliability Engineering, Wiley, 2012.

MACHINE TOOL DESIGN
Objectives:
 Implement the tool design process when designing tooling for the manufacturing of
a product.
 Apply Geometric Tolerancing principles in the designs of tooling.
 Evaluate and select appropriate materials for tooling applications.
 Design, develop, and evaluate cutting tools and work holders for a manufactured product.
Contents:
Module- I
Introduction to Machine Tools: Classification, similarities; various cutting tools and cutting
fluids: speed of cutting, feed rate, machining rate and machining time. (4 hrs)
Module- II
Lathe: Construction, important mechanisms viz. apron, tail stock, head- stock, feed box;
specification, operations e.g., taper turning, eccentric turning, screw cutting. (4 hrs)
Module- III
Milling machine: Construction, types specifications; cutters, dividing head, simple compound
and differential indexing; various operations: Slab milling, angle cutting, slot milling, fly milling,
slit gear milling, spur and bevel, T- slot milling, nature of operations, up and down milling. (10
hrs)
Module- IV
Shaper, Slotter, Planer: Construction, automatic feed mechanism, quick return mechanisms:
operations e.g., horizontal, vertical and inclined machining, spline cutting, keyway cutting,
contour machining. (7 hrs)
Module- V
Drilling machine: Construction, feed mechanism: Specification, geometry and nomenclature of
twist drill, operations e.g. reaming, boring, tapping. (5 hrs)
Module- VI
Grinding Machines: M, N types and construction features, Operations e.g. Plane, cylindrical,
internal and centreless grinding, tool and cutter grinding, grinding wheels- specifications, shapes,
setting, dressing, truing. (10 hrs)
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to, Understand basic motions involved in a
machine tool. Design machine tool structures. Design and analyze systems for specified speeds
and feeds. Select subsystems for achieving high accuracy in machining. Understand control
strategies for machine tool operations.
Text Books:
1. B.L.Juneja, G.S.Sekhon&Nitin Seth, Fundamentals of Metal Cutting & Machine Tools,
New Age International Publications
2. P.N.Rao, Manufacturing Technology: Metal Cutting & Machine Tools, Tata McGraw
Hill Publications.
3. G.K.Lal, Introduction to Machining Science ,New Age International Publications.
4. B.S.Raghuwanshi, Workshop Technology , Dhanpat Rai& Sons, Publications
5. HazraChandhari, Elements of Workshop Technology.
Jharkhand University of Technology,
Ranchi
Detailed Syllabus
5th Semester
Department of Electrical Engineering
1
Course structure of Electrical Engineering
Semester -5th
Branch: Electrical Engineering
S.No Course Subject L T P Credit

Code
01 EE501 Electrical Machine-II 4 1 0 4
02 EE502 Principles of Control Systems 3 1 0 3
03 EE503 Microprocessor and Microcontroller 3 1 0 3
04 Professional Elective-I 3 1 0 3
05 Open Elective-I 3 1 0 3
Laboratory/sessional
01 EE501P Electrical Machine-II Lab 0 0 3 1

02 EE502P Principles of Control Systems Lab 0 0 3 1
03 EE503P Microprocessor and Microcontroller Lab 0 0 3 1
04 EE504P Basic Computational Lab 0 0 3 1
05 EE505P General Proficiency/Seminar 0 0 3 2
Total Credits 22
Professional Elective-I
EE511 Signals & Systems
EE512 Electrical Machine Design
EE513 Transforms in Electrical Engineering
EE514 Applied Electrical Engineering
Open Elective-I
EE521 Power Plant Engineering
EE522 Industrial Instrumentation and Automation
EE523 Principles of Control Systems*
EE524 Electromechanical Energy Conversion and Transformers*
Any paper floated by the other department can be selected/ opted by the Electrical Engineering
Students
*This course is not offered to Electrical Engineering students.
2
Professional Core
3
EE501 L T Credit
Electrical Machines-II
4 1 4
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO’s CO Description
Understand the construction and principle of operation of synchronous machines and
CO1
induction machines.
Analyze the effects of excitation and mechanical input on the operation of synchronous
CO2
Machine.
Analyze starting and speed control methods of synchronous machines and induction
CO3
machines.
CO4 Evaluate performance characteristics of synchronous machines and induction machine.
CO’s-PO’s Mapping Matrix:
Enter correlation levels1, 2 or 3 as defined below-
1. Slight (low) 2. Moderate (Medium) 3. Substantial (High)
COs/Pos PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 1 2
Avg. 3 3 2 2 2 1 2
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Fundamentals of A.C. Machines (5 Lectures)
Fundamental principles of A.C. machines: E.M.F equation of an elementary alternator, single &
three phase, factors affecting the induced e.m.f, full pitch & fractional pitch windings, winding
factors, armature reaction, concept of time phasor & space phasor.
Module-II: Synchronous Generator (12 Lectures)

Various types and construction, cylindrical rotor theory, phasor diagram, open circuit & short
circuit characteristics, armature reaction, synchronous reactance, SCR, load characteristics,
voltage regulation, E.M.F. method, MMF method, ZPF method, Potier triangle, synchronous
machine connected to infinite bus, power angle characteristics.
Theory of salient pole machine: Blondel’s two reaction theory, phasor diagram, direct axis and
quadrature axis synchronous reactance, power angle characteristics, slip test, parallel operation:
Synchronizing method, effect of wrong synchronization, load sharing between alternators in
parallel, transient & sub-transient reactance.
Module-III: Synchronous Motor (7 Lectures)

General physical consideration, main features, equivalent circuit & phasor diagram, torque &
power relations in salient and non-salient pole motors, V-curves & inverted V-curves, effect of
change of excitation, synchronous condenser, starting of synchronous motor, performance
characteristics of synchronous motor, hunting, applications.
Module-IV: Three Phase Induction Motor (10 Lectures)
4
Three Phase Induction Motors: Types, Construction and principle of operation, phasor
diagrams, equivalent circuit, power and torque relations, condition for maximum torque,
Performance characteristics, effect of rotor resistance on speed torque characteristics, stable &
unstable region of operation, Operation with unbalanced supply voltage. Starting of 3 phase
induction motor, speed control of induction motor, Double cage induction motor, Cogging and
Crawling of Induction motor, induction generator.
Module-V: Single phase motors (5 Lectures)

Induction type, Double revolving field theory, equivalent circuit, characteristics & starting of
single phase motor, shaded pole machine, synchronous type, hysteresis motor, reluctance motor.
Module VI: Single phase special type of machines (3 Lectures)

Switched reluctance motor, PMBLDC motor, tachometer, two phase control motor, Synchro.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. I. J. Nagrath & D. P. Kothari, “Electric Machines”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 7th Edition.2005
[2]. P. S. Bhimbra, “Electrical Machines”, Khanna Publishers.
[3]. A.E. Fitzgerald, C.Kingsley and S.Umans, “Electric machinery”, MacGraw Hill
Companies, 5th edition.
[4]. Stephen Chapman, “Electric Machinery Fundamentals” Mac Graw HillCompany.
[5]. Langsdorf, “Theory of Alternating Current Machinery”, Tata McGraw-Hill Companies,
2nd edition.
[6]. Performance and Design of AC Machines by M G. Say, BPB Publishers.
5
EE502 L T Credit
Principles of Control System
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Analyze electromechanical systems by mathematical modeling.
CO2 Determine Transient and Steady State behavior of systems using standard test signals.
CO3 Analyze linear systems for steady state errors, absolute stability and relative
Stability using time domain and frequency domain techniques.
CO4 Identify and design a control system satisfying specified requirements.
COs/POs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 - - 3 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 2
Avg.
3 3 2.33 3 3 1 1 2
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Introduction to Principles of Control System (8 Lectures)
Concept of systems and its classification; open-loop and closed-loop control system, benefits of
feedback, mathematical modeling and representation of physical systems, analogous systems.
Transfer functions for different types of systems, block diagrams and its reduction techniques,
Signal flow graphs and Mason’s gain formula.
Module II: Time domain and Frequency domain (10 Lectures)

Time domain performance criterion, transient response of first order and second order systems;
Steady state errors and error constants of different types of system; dynamic error constant:
Derivation and its advantages; sensitivity; performance analysis for P, PI and PID controllers.
Module III: Stability Criterion (8 Lectures)

Concept of stability by Routh stability criterion. Stability analysis using root locus. Bode plot
analysis. Absolute and Relative stability. Definition and computation of Gain Margin and Phase
Margin. Comparison between time and frequency response plot.
Module IV: Stability Criterion Continued (6 Lectures)

Frequency response Polar plots and its stability criterion. Relative stability, Nyquist criterion;
Graphical approach for gain and phase margin using polar plot; Advantages and disadvantages
of frequency response plot.
Module V: Compensation design (4 Lectures)

Compensation - lag, lead and lag-lead networks, Compensation designs of networks using time
domain analysis and frequency response analysis.
6
Module VI: State Space Analysis (6 Lectures)
Concepts of state, state variables, state space representation of systems, dynamic equations,
transient matrix, merits for higher order differential equations and its solution; Concept of
controllability and observability.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International, 2009
[2]. B. C. Kuo, “Automatic Control System”, Prentice Hall, 1995.
[3]. K. Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall, 1991.
[4]. H. Saeed, “Automatic Control System”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 2008.
[5]. S. K. Bhardwaj and S. K. Nagar, “Modern Control System with Advance Topics”, New Age
International, 2019.
7
EE503 L T Credit
Microprocessor & Microcontroller
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course students will be able to:
CO1 Categorize the basic concepts of microprocessor & microcontrollers
CO2 Interpret different addressing modes and types of registers in processor or controller
CO3 Execute simple programs on microprocessor & microcontroller
CO4 Illustrate how the different peripherals are interfaced with 8086 microprocessor
CO5 Illustrate how memory or I/O interfaced with 8051 microcontroller
1.Slight (low) 2. Moderate (Medium) 3. Substantial (High)
CO1 2 1
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 1 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 2
Avg. 2.6 2.0 2.25 2.0 2.0 1.0 2.0
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module-I (6 Lectures)
Brief introduction to 8085 CPU Architecture, Pin configuration, Addressing Modes, Registers,
Memory Addressing, Instructions Set.
Module-II (10 Lectures)
THE 8086 ARCHITECTURE: Pin diagram of 8086 and description of various signals.
Architecture block diagram of 8086 & description of sub-blocks such as EU & BIU & of
various registers; Description of address computations & memory segmentation; addressing
modes; Instruction formats.
Module-III (4 Lectures)
Interfacing of memory and peripherals with microprocessor, Architecture and modes of
operation of 8255.
Module-IV (10 Lectures)
Microcontrollers– Type, processor architecture memory type, hardware features, 8051
Processor architecture, Memory mapping.
Addressing modes, 8051 Instruction Set – Data movement Instruction, arithmetic instruction,
Logic instruction, Branch group Instruction
Module-V (10 Lectures)
Addressing modes, 8051 Instruction Set – Data movement Instruction, arithmetic instruction,
Logic instruction, Branch group Instruction. 8051 microcontroller: Memory interfacing and
address decoding, programming Input/ Output port/ timer programming and Serial data
communication controller.
8
Suggested Readings:
[1]. Brey , The Intel Microprocessors 8086- Pentium processor, PHI

[2]. Badri Ram, Advanced Microprocessors and Interfacing, TMH
[3]. Triekel & Singh, The 8088 & 8086 Microprocessors-Programming, Interfacing, Hardware &
Applications: PHI.
[4]. D. B. Hall , Microprocessor and Interfacing, McGraw Hill
[5]. M. A. Mazidi & J. G. Mazidi,The 8051 Microcontroller & Embedded System, Pearson
Education.
9
(Any One)
10
EE511 L T Credit
Signals And Systems
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Understand the concepts of continuous time and discrete time systems.
CO2 Analyze systems in complex frequency domain.
CO3 Understand sampling theorem and its implications
CO1 3 3 3 1 2
CO2 3 2 3 1 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 2
Avg. 3 2.66 3 2 2
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I (5 Lectures)
Introduction to signals and systems - Classification of signals - Basic operations on signals –
Elementary signals - Concept of system - Properties of systems - Stability, invertability, time
invariance - Linearity - Causality - Memory - Time domain description - Convolution - Impulse
response.
Module II (5 Lectures)
Representation of LTI systems - Differential equation and difference equation representations of
LTI systems, Continuous Time LTI systems and Convolution Integral, Discrete Time LTI
systems and linear convolution.
Module III (5 Lectures)

Frequency Domain Representation of Continuous Time Signals- Continuous Time Fourier
Series: Convergence. Continuous Time Fourier Transform: Properties.
Module IV (9 Lectures)
Frequency Domain Representation of Discrete Time Signals- Discrete Time Fourier Transform:
Properties, Sampling Theorem, aliasing, reconstruction filter, sampling of band pass signals.
Fourier Series Representation of Discrete Time Periodic Signals.
Module V (10 Lectures)

Laplace Transform – ROC – Inverse transform – properties – Analysis of Continuous LTI
systems using Laplace Transform – unilateral Laplace Transform. Relation between Fourier and
Laplace Transforms.
Laplace transform analysis of systems - Relation between the transfer function and differential
equation - Causality and stability - Inverse system - Determining the frequency response from
11
poles and zeros.
Module VI (8 Lectures)
Z Transform - Definition - Properties of the region of convergence - Properties of the Z
transform - Analysis of LTI systems - Relating the transfer function and difference equation -
Stability and causality - Inverse systems - Determining the frequency response from poles and
zeros.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. Haykin. S., Venn B. V. Signals and Systems

[2]. Oppenheim A.V., Willsky A.S. &Nawab S.H., Signals and Systems, Tata McGraw Hill
[3]. Taylor F.H, Principles of Signals and Systems, McGraw Hill
References
[1]. Bracewell R.N., Fourier Transform & Its Applications, McGraw Hill
[2]. Haykin S., Communication Systems, John Wiley
[3]. Lathi B.P., Modern Digital& Analog Communication Systems, Oxford University Press
[4]. Papoulis A., Fourier Integral & Its Applications, McGraw Hill
12
EE512 L T Credit
Electrical Machine Design
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of this course, student should be able to:
CO1 Understand the construction and performance characteristics of electrical machines.
CO2 Understand the various factors which influence the design: electrical, magnetic and
thermal loading of electrical machines.
CO3 Understand the principles of electrical machine design and carry out a basic design of an
ac machine
CO4 Analyze design aspects of rotating electrical machines.
CO5 Use software tools to do design calculations.

CO1 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 2
Avg. 3 2.6 2.4 2 2 2
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Factors in Design (8 Lectures)
Specifications for machines, output equation, limitations in design, electric and magnetic
loadings, space factor, winding factor and their effects on machine performance, mechanical
and high speed problems.
Module II: Design of Poly phase Asynchronous Machines (10 Lectures)

Details of construction, stator design, output equation, separation of D and L ,specific loadings,
leakage reactance, rotor design, slip ring and squirrel cage motors, harmonic effects and slot
combination, magnetizing current and losses, prediction of characteristics.
Module III: Design of Synchronous Machines (10 Lectures)

Details of construction, generators, salient and non-salient pole machines, specific loadings and
output equation, stator design, harmonics and reduction, armature reaction, design of field
winding, short circuit ratio, voltage regulation, efficiency, differences in design between salient
and non-salient pole machine.
Module IV: Design of Transformers (8 Lectures)

Design of single and three phase transformers, output equation, specific loadings, electro
mechanical stresses on windings, no load current, temperature rise.
13
Module V: Thermal aspects of Design (6 Lectures)
Generation, flow and dissipation of heat losses, thermal capacity, temperature rise curves,
ratings of machines, cooling media, ventilation, types of cooling, standard enclosures.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. A.K. Sawhney, “A Course in Electrical Machine Design”, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, 1970.
[2]. M.G. Say, “Theory & Performance & Design of A.C. Machines”, ELBS London.
[3]. Ion Boldea, Syed A. Nasar, “The Induction Machines Design Handbook”, CRC Press.
[4]. Juha Pyrhonen, Tapani Jokinen, Valeria Hrabovcova, “Design of Rotating Electrical
Machines”,Wiley
[5]. K. M. V. Murthy, “Computer Aided Design of Electrical Machines”, B.S. Publications,
2008.
14
EE513 L T Credit
Transforms in Electrical Engineering
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
CO’s Description
CO1 Understand the concepts of continuous time and discrete time systems.
CO2 Understand the concepts of different discrete transforms.
CO3 Analyze systems in complex frequency domain.
CO4 Design of different types of filters.
CO1 3 3 3 1 2
CO2 3 2 3 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2
Avg. 3 2.5 2.5 1.5 2
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Discrete-Time Signals (4 Lectures)

Concept of discrete-time signal, basic idea of sampling and reconstruction of signal, sampling
theorem, sequences,-periodic, energy, power, unit-sample, unit step, unit ramp &complex
exponentials, arithmetic operations on sequences..
Module II: LTI Systems (6 Lectures)

Definition, representation, impulse response, derivation for the output sequence, concept of
convolution, graphical, analytical and overlap-add methods to compute convolution supported
with examples and exercise, properties of convolution, interconnection of LTI systems with
physical interpretations, stability and causality conditions, recursive and non-recursive systems.
Module III: Discrete Fourier Transform (10 Lectures)

Concept and relations for DFT/IDFT, Relation between DTFT & DFT. Twiddle factors and
their properties, computational burden on direct DFT, DFT/DFT as linear transformation,
DFT/IDFT matrices, computation of DFT/IDFT by matrix method, multiplication of DFTs,
circulation convolution, computation of circular convolution by graphical, DFT/IDFT and
matrix methods, linear filtering using DFT, aliasing error, filtering of long data sequences-
Overlap-Save and Overlap-Add methods with examples and exercises.
Module IV: Discrete Time Fourier Transform (5 Lectures)

Concept of frequency in discrete and continuous domain and their relationship (radian and
radian/sec), freq. response in the discrete domain. Discrete system's response to
sinusoidal/complex inputs (DTFT), Representation of LTI systems in complex frequency
domain.
15
Module V: Fast Fourier Transforms (4 Lectures)
Radix-2 algorithm, decimation-in-time, decimation-in-frequency algorithm, signal flow graph,
Butterflies, computations in one place, bit reversal, examples for DIT & DIF FFT Butterfly
computations and exercises.
Module VI: Z- Transforms (8 Lectures)

Definition, mapping between s-plane & z-plane, unit circle, convergence and ROC, properties
of Z-transform, Z-transform on sequences with examples & exercises, characteristic families of
signals along with ROC, convolution, correlation and multiplication using Z- transform, initial
value theorem, Parseval’s relation, inverse Z transform by contour integration, power series &
partial-fraction expansions with examples and exercises.
Module VII: Filter Design (5 Lectures)

Basic concepts of IIR and FIR filters, difference equations, design of Butterworth IIR analog
filter using impulse invariant and bilinear transform, design of linear phase FIR filters no. of
taps, rectangular, Hamming and Blackman windows. Effect of quantization.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. Digital Signal Processing-A computer based approach, S. Mitra, TMH

[2]. Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms & Application, J.C. Proakis& M.G.
Manslakis, PHI
[3]. Fundamental of Digital Signal Processing using MATLAB , Robert J. Schilling, S.L.
Harris, Cengage Learning.
[4]. Digital Signal Processing-implementation using DSP microprocessors with examples
from TMS320C54XX, Avtar Singh & S. Srinivasan, Cengage Learning.
Reference Books
[1]. Digital Signal Processing, Chen, OUP

[2]. Digital Signal Processing, Johnson, PHI
[3]. Digital Signal Processing using MATLAB, Ingle, Vikas.
16
EE514 L T Credit
Applied Electrical Engineering
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Capable to model the physical system into electrical system
CO2 Apply mathematics for electrical systems to analysis
CO3 Select simulation technique for DC and AC system analysis
CO4 Able to design the electro-mechanical systems
CO1 3
CO2 3 2
CO3 2 3
CO4 2
Average 3 3 2 2 3
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Model of Physical Systems (8 Lectures)
Introduction to physical systems: Mass-spring-damper system, accelerometer, rotational
mechanical system, gear trains, liquid level system; Circuit models: RL, RC, LC, RLC series
and parallel circuits with sinusoidal and non-sinusoidal excitations, diode rectifier.
Module II: Solution of Differential Equations (12 Lectures)

Systems of linear equations, homogeneous and non-homogeneous linear equations, Polynomial
equations, least squares fit; ordinary differential equations: Euler’s method, Runge-Kutta
method, Newton-Raphson method, Predictor-Corrector methods; Numerical integration:
Forward and backward integration rules, Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s rule, Errors of integration.
Module III: Simulation Techniques (6 Lectures)

Continuous state simulation: circuit level simulators, Discrete-event simulation: Fixed time
step, variable time step; Response analysis of circuits: DC analysis, AC Analysis, Transient
analysis.
Module IV: Programming in MATLAB (8 Lectures)

Programming a function, repetitive and conditional control structures, Iterative solution of
equations, polynomial interpolation; Plotting and analysis: two-dimensional and three-
dimensional plots, Histograms, Polar plots, Function evaluation; Handling external files: saving
and loading data.
Module V: PSPICE Circuit Simulator (6 Lectures)
17
Introduction, circuit descriptions, Input files, nodes, circuit elements, element values, sources,
output variables; Analysis: DC sweep, Transient and AC analysis. PSPICE models.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. Biran A. and Breiner M., “MATLAB 5 for Engineers”, 2nd edition, Addison Wesley,1999
[2]. Rashid M. H. and Rashid H. M., “SPICE for Power Electronics and Electric Power”, 2nd
edition, Taylor & Francis,2009
[3]. William J. P., “Introduction to MATLAB for Engineers”, 3rd edition,McGraw Hill,2010.
18
Open Elective-I
(Any One)
19
EE521 L T Credit
Power Plant Engineering
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
CO’s CO Descriptions
CO1 Describe and analyze different types of sources and mathematical expressions related to
thermodynamics and various terms and factors involved with power plant operation.
CO2 Analyze the working and layout of thermal power plants and the different systems
comprising the plant and discuss about its economic and safety impacts
CO3 To define the working principle of diesel power plant, its layout, safety principles and
compare it with plants of other types.
CO4 Discuss and analyze the mathematical and working principles of different electrical
equipment involved in the generation of power and to understand co-generation.
Discuss and analyze the mathematical and working principles of different electrical
CO5
equipment involved in the generation of power and to understand co-generation.
CO’s-PO’s Mappings Matrix:
CO1 2 3 2 3 1 2 1
CO2 2 2 3 1 2 1 1
CO3 2 2 1 1 2 1
CO4 2 2 1 1 2 1
CO5 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1
Avg. 2 2.33 2 2.67 1.33 1.33 1.66 1
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Introduction (10 Lectures)
Conventional & Non-Conventional Sources of Energy and their availability in India, Different
Types of Power Plants, Layout of Steam , Hydel , Diesel , MHD, Nuclear and Gas turbine
power plants, Combined Power cycles – comparison and selection , Load duration Curves,
Steam boilers and cycles – High pressure and Super Critical Boilers – Fluidized Bed Boilers.
Module II: Thermal Power Plants (10 Lectures)

Basic thermodynamic cycles, various components of steam power plant-layout-pulverized coal
burners-Fluidized bed combustion-coal handling systems-ash handling systems- Forced draft
and induced draft fans- Boilers-feed pumps super heater- regenerator-condenser- de-aerators,
cooling towers, electrostatic precipitators.
Module III: Hydel Power Plant (8 Lectures)

Principle of working, Classification, Site selection; Different components & their functions;
Types of Dams; Types, Characteristics & Selection of Hydro-Turbines; Mini & Micro Hydro
Power Plants, Pumped Storage Power Plants.
Module IV: Diesel And Gas Turbine Power Plant (8 Lectures)
20
Types of diesel plants, components, Selection of Engine type, applications. Gas turbine power
plant- Fuels- Gas turbine material, open and closed cycles, reheating, Regeneration and inter
cooling, combines cycle.
Module V: Co-Generation (6 Lectures)

Concept; Schemes; Brief Description; Benefits & Limitations; Applications. Non-Conventional
Energy Sources, Types, Brief Description, Advantages & Limitations.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. P.K.Nag, “Power Plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Publications.2007

[2]. EI-Wakil M.M, “Power Plant Technology,” Tata McGraw-Hill 1984
[3]. Power Plant Engineering, Gautam S, Vikas Publishing House. 2012
[4]. Power station Engineering and Economy by Bernhardt
[5]. G.A.Skrotzki and William A. Vopat- Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.2002
[6]. “Modern Power Station Practice”, Volume B, British Electricity International Ltd., Central
Electricity Generating Board,Pergamon Press, Oxford.1991
[7]. ‘Power Plant Familiarization – Vol. II’, NPTI Publication.
21
EE522 L T Credit
Industrial Instrumentation And Automation
3 1 3
Pre-requisites: Measurements & Instrumentation
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Apply the concepts and analyze the performance of physical systems using transducers
for measurement of physical quantities.
CO2 Understand various Signal Conditioning operations and design Signal Conditioning
circuitry of a measurement & instrumentation system.
CO3 Exposure to the technology of Industrial Automation and Control.
CO4 Implementation of various PLCs to Automation problems in industries.
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 2 3 2
Avg. 3 3 3 3 2.5 2.25 1.75 1.25 2 1.5 2.5 2
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: (4 Lectures)
Introduction: Static and Dynamic characteristics of Instrument. Displacement and proximity
gauges. Linear Variable Differential Transformer (LVDT), Hall-effect sensors.
Module II: (10 Lectures)
Measurement of Temperature, Flow, Level and Viscosity: Thermocouple, Resistance
Temperature Detector (RTD), Thermistor, Radiation Pyrometer, Differential Pressure flow-
meter, Variable area flow- meter, Variable reluctance transducer, Turbine flow-meter,
Ultrasonic flow-meter (Both transit time and Doppler Shift), electromagnetic flow-meter and
Mass flow meter, Capacitance based and Float based method, pH -probe and viscosity
measurement.
Module III: (6 Lectures)
Measurement of Pressure, strain & Vibration: Elastic transducers (Bourdon Gauge, Bellow and
Diaphragm Gauge). Low pressure measurement, Strain Gauge, unbalanced Wheatstone bridge,
Load cell, Torque Cell, Piezo-eiectric sensors, accelerometers.
Module IV: (10 Lectures)
Signal Conditioning and Processing: Estimation of errors and Calibration, Fundamentals of 4-
20 mA current loops, Regulators and power supplies for industrial instrumentation.
Basics of Data transmission: Synchro and Servo motor. IEEE-488 bus, RS 232 and RS 485
interface. Pneumatic and Hydraulic Instrumentation system
22
Automation: Benefits and Impact of Automation on Manufacturing and Process Industries;
Architecture of Industrial Automation Systems. Data Acquisition systems and PC based
automation.
Module V: (6 Lectures)
Introduction to Automatic Control: P-I-D Control, Controller Tuning, Special Control
Structures, Feed- forward and Ratio Control, Predictive Control, Control of Systems with
Inverse Response, Cascade Control. Process and Instrumentation Diagrams.
Module VI: (6 Lectures)

Sequence Control: PLCs and Relay Ladder Logic, Scan Cycle, RLL Syntax, Structured Design
Approach, Advanced RLL Programming, Hardware environment; Control of Machine tools:
Introduction to CNC Machines.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. Doebelin, Measurement Systems, Applications and Design, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
[2]. Measurement & Instrumentation : Trends & Applications by M.K. Ghosh, S. Sen and S.
Mukhopadhyay, Ane Books,2010
[3]. Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation Alok Barua, Wiley India Pvt Ltd,2011
[4]. Measurement and Instrumentation Principles, 3rdEdition, Alan S Morris, Butterworth-
Heinemann, 2001
[5]. Industrial Instrumentation, Control and Automation, S. Mukhopadhyay, S. Sen and A. K.
Deb, Jaico Publishing House,2013
[6]. Chemical Process Control, An Introduction to Theory and Practice, George
Stephanopoulos, Prentice Hall India,2012
[7]. Frank. D, Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, Tata McGraw Hill Third
Edition-2010.
23
EE523 L T Credit
Principles of Control System*
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Analyze electromechanical systems by mathematical modeling.
CO2 Determine Transient and Steady State behavior of systems using standard test signals.
CO3 Analyze linear systems for steady state errors, absolute stability and relative
Stability using time domain and frequency domain techniques.
CO4 Identify and design a control system satisfying specified requirements.
CO1 3 3 - - 3 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 2
Avg.
3 3 2.33 3 3 1 1 2
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Introduction to Principles of Control System (8 Lectures)
Concept of systems and its classification; open-loop and closed-loop control system, benefits of
feedback, mathematical modeling and representation of physical systems, analogous systems.
Transfer functions for different types of systems, block diagrams and its reduction techniques,
Signal flow graphs and Mason’s gain formula.
Module II: Time domain and Frequency domain (10 Lectures)

Time domain performance criterion, transient response of first order and second order systems;
Steady state errors and error constants of different types of system; dynamic error constant:
Derivation and its advantages; sensitivity; performance analysis for P, PI and PID controllers.
Module III: Stability Criterion (8 Lectures)

Concept of stability by Routh stability criterion. Stability analysis using root locus. Bode plot
analysis. Absolute and Relative stability. Definition and computation of Gain Margin and Phase
Margin. Comparison between time and frequency response plot.
Module IV: Stability Criterion Continued (6 Lectures)

Frequency response Polar plots and its stability criterion. Relative stability, Nyquist criterion;
Graphical approach for gain and phase margin using polar plot; Advantages and disadvantages
of frequency response plot.
Module V: Compensation design (4 Lectures)

Compensation - lag, lead and lag-lead networks, Compensation designs of networks using time
24
domain analysis and frequency response analysis.
Module VI: State Space Analysis (6 Lectures)

Concepts of state, state variables, state space representation of systems, dynamic equations,
transient matrix, merits for higher order differential equations and its solution; Concept of
controllability and observability.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International, 2009
[2]. B. C. Kuo, “Automatic Control System”, Prentice Hall, 1995.
[3]. K. Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall, 1991.
[4]. H. Saeed, “Automatic Control System”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 2008.
[5]. S. K. Bhardwaj and S. K. Nagar, “Modern Control System with Advance Topics”, New Age
International, 2019.
25
EE524 L T Credit
Electromechanical Energy Conversion And
Transformers*
3 1 3
(This course is not offered to Electrical Engg students)
Course Outcome:
After successful completion of the course students will able to:
CO1 Understand the principle of operation of Electromechanical energy conversion
CO2 Understand the construction and principle of operation of DC machines, single phase
and three phase transformers and auto transformers.
CO3 Analyze starting methods and speed control of DC machines.
CO4 Analyze parallel operation of DC Generators, single phase and three phase
transformers.
CO5 Evaluate the performance of DC machines.
CO1 3 3 3 1 1 2 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 1 1 2 1 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 2
Avg. 3 3 3 1.6 1 2 1 2.0
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Principle of Electromechanical Energy Conversion (4 Lectures)
Energy stored in electric and magnetic fields, energy conversion in single and multi-excited
systems and torque production, reluctance torque; Reluctance and hysteresis motors.
Module II: General Description of Electrical Machines (5 Lectures)

Constructional details of dc and ac machines, description of magnetic and electric circuits in
cylindrical rotor and salient pole machines, mmf distribution of current carrying single and
multiple coils; Armature winding as a current sheet, associated mmf and flux density waves.
Module III: DC Machines and Commutations (9 Lectures)

Simplex lap and wave windings, emf and torque equations, interaction of the fields produced by
field and armature circuits.
Module IV: DC Generators (4 Lectures)

Methods of excitation, shunt, series and compound generators, characteristics, testing.
Module V: DC Motors (4 Lectures)

Methods of excitation, characteristics, starting and speed control methods; Losses and their
estimation, efficiency.
Module VI: Single-phase Transformers (9 Lectures)

Principle of operation, equivalent circuit, voltage regulation and efficiency; Parallel operation.
26
Principle of operation and comparison with two winding transformer.
Autotransformers: Principle of operation and comparison with two winding transformer
Module VII: Three Phase Transformers (6 Lectures)

Various connections and their comparative features, harmonics in emf and magnetizing current,
effect of connections and construction on harmonics; Parallel operation of three-phase
transformers, sharing of load, 3-phase to 2-phase conversion, 3-phase to 6-phase conversion.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. Fitzgerald A. E., Kingsley C. and Kusko A., “Electric Machinery”, 6th Ed., McGraw-Hill
International Book Company,2008.
[2]. Say M. G., “The Performance and Design of Alternating Current Machines”, CBS
Publishers and Distributors,2005.
[3]. Say M. G. and Taylor E. O., “Direct Current Machines”, 3rd Ed.,ELBS and Pitman.1986
[4]. Nagrath I. J. and Kothari D. P., “Electrical Machines”, 3rd Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Limited,2008.
[5]. Chapman S. J., “Electric Machinery Fundamentals”, 4th Ed.,McGraw-Hill International
Book Company, 2005
[6]. Clayton A. E. and Hancock N., “The Performance and Design of DC Machines”, CBS
Publishers and Distributors, 2003.
[7]. Langsdorf A. S., “Theory of AC Machines”, 2nd Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited, 2008.
27
Laboratory / Sessional
28
EE501P P Credit
Electrical Machines-II Laboratory
3 1
This Laboratory Experiments may be performed in physical/ virtual platform (as per availability
of list of experiments in virtual lab portal).
List of the Experiments

Atleast 10 experiments should be performed in this Laboratory.
1) No Load & blocked rotor test on a three phase induction motor & draw the circle diagram.
2) Speed control of a 3-phase induction motor by rheostatic, cascading and pole changing
methods.
3) Load test on three phase induction motor & draw the various characteristics.
4) To perform slip test on a given alternator and to determine d-axis reactance (Xd ) and q-
axis reactance (Xq)
5) Determination of sub-transient reactance of a synchronous generator by static method.
6) To perform load test on Schrage motor at different speed setting (1000, 1400 rpm).
7) To perform open circuit test and short circuit tests on a three phase Synchronous generator
and calculate its voltage regulation by Synchronous impedance method.
8) Determination of V curve and Inverted V curve of a 3-phase Synchronous motor at no-
load.
9) To perform load test on single phase capacitor motor.
10) To determine the negative and zero sequence reactance of a given alternator.
11) Synchronization of two alternators and their load sharing.
12) To perform open circuit test and short circuit tests on a three phase Synchronous generator
and calculate its voltage regulation by Synchronous impedance method.
13) To determine voltage regulation of three phase Synchronous generator by ZPF method.
14) To determine the core loss of a single phase transformer at varying frequency and separate
the hysteresis and eddy current loss.
29
EE502P P Credit
Principles of Control System Laboratory
3 1

1) To Study the time response of a closed loop second order system.

2) Study of closed loop P, PI, PID Controllers.
3) Time response analysis of LEAD compensating network.
4) Frequency response analysis of LEAD compensating network.
5) Study of temperature control of oven using PID Controller.
6) To obtain the characteristics of Synchro Transmitter and Receiver
7) To obtain transfer function of a D.C Shunt motor.
8) To plot and analyze the Root locus, Bode & Nyquist plots using MATLAB.
9) To perform dynamic system simulation using MATLAB.
10) Design of PID controller for speed control of a dc motor using MATLAB.
30
EE503P P Credit
Microprocessor & Microcontroller Laboratory
3 1
Microprocessor
1) Write an ALP for addition of two 8 bit numbers, result may be of more than 8 bit.
2) Write an ALP to find the largest/ smallest number in a data array.
3) Write an ALP to arrange the numbers of data array in ascending/descending order.
4) Write an ALP to move a block of data from a location of memory to another location of
memory.
5) Design an interfacing circuit to interface 64KB of memory with 8085 microprocessor.
6) Design an interfacing circuit to interface a common anode/ cathode seven segment LED
display with microprocessor and write an ALP to display digit 0 to 9 and letter A to F.
7) Write a program for addition of content of the memory location 3000:0400H to the
contents of 4000:0700H and store the result in 6000:0900H by using instructions of 8086
microprocessor.
8) Design an interfacing circuit to interface 8255 with 8085 microprocessor and write an ALP
for controlling LEDs with switches.
9) Write an ALP to find square of an 8 bit number using look up table.
10) Write a program for generation of square wave.
Microcontroller
1) Write a program in assembly language/C language to send data on ports of 8051
microcontroller.
2) Write a program in assembly language/C language to perform various arithmetic
operations.
3) Write a program in assembly language/C language to read dot-matrix keyboard.
4) Write a program in assembly language/C language to display massage on multiple 7
segment display.
5) Write a program in assembly language/C language to generate 1kHz square wave on port
line of 8051
6) Write a program in assembly language/C language to perform various logical operations.
7) Write a program in assembly language/C language to display message on LCD display.
8) Write a program in assembly language/C language to rotate stepper motor in clockwise
direction.
9) Write a program in assembly language/C language send MSBTE on hyper terminal of PC.
10) Write a program in assembly language/C language to read ADC.
NOTE: At least ten experiments are to be performed, minimum seven experiments should be
performed from above list. Remaining three experiments may either be performed from the above
list or designed & set by the concerned institution as per the scope of the syllabus.
31
EE504P P Credit
Basic Computational Laboratory
3 1

These experiments can be performed using any software / FOSS (Free and Open Source Software)
available at the institute.
1) To create arrays and matrices and perform various arithmetic operations.

2) To write a programme for getting the desired data (largest, smallest, a range etc) from a
set.
3) To write a programme for creating various types of 2D plots (single and multiple) from a
set of data.
4) To write a programme to solve linear equations.
5) To perform Scientific Computation.
6) Write a program for Logical Operation.
7) To perform Laplace Transform of Symbolic Expression.
8) Write a program to evaluate Eigen values and Eigen Vector of a matrix
9) To measure and plot the Instantaneous, RMS and average values of current/voltage,
power, power factor, crest factor, frequency and various other waveform parameters while
simulation of behavior of basic circuit components supplied from a DC and an AC source.
32
Jharkhand University of Technology,
Ranchi
Detailed Syllabus
6th Semester
Department of Electrical Engineering
1
Course structure of Electrical Engineering
Semester -6th
Branch: Electrical Engineering
S.No Course Subject L T P Credit

Code
01 EE601 Power Systems-II 4 1 0 4
02 EE602 Power Electronics 3 1 0 3
03 EE603 Advanced Control Systems 3 1 0 3
04 Professional Elective-II 3 1 0 3
05 Open Elective-II 3 1 0 3
06
Laboratory/ Sessional
01 EE601P Power System-II Lab 0 0 3 1
02 EE602P Power Electronics Lab 0 0 3 1
03 EE603P Simulation Lab 0 0 3 1
04 EE604P Electrical Workshop 0 0 3 1
05 Internship/Tour & Training/Industrial Training 0 0 3 2
Total credit 22
Professional Elective-II
EE611 Electrical Estimation and Costing
EE612 Electrical Engineering Materials
EE613 Power System Restructuring
EE614 Green Energy Technology
Open Elective-II
EE621 Advanced Control Systems*
EE622 Soft Computing Techniques
EE623 Power Electronics*
EE624 Mine Electrical Engineering*
EE625 Green Energy Technology*
Any paper floated by the other department can be selected/ opted by the Electrical Engineering
Students
*This course is not offered to Electrical Engineering students.
2
Professional Core
3
EE601 L T Credit
Power Systems-II
4 1 4
Course Outcomes:
Illustrate power system components using single line diagram and usage of per unit
CO1
system.
Calculate symmetrical components and examine different types of faults (both
CO2
symmetrical and unsymmetrical).
Formulate nodal admittance (Y-bus) matrix, and develop load flow equations and find
CO3
its solution.
Calculate optimal generator allocations and analyze single area power system for load
CO4
frequency control
Illustrate the concept of stability, power angle curve, and swing equation and diagnose
CO5
steady-state and transient stability of the power system.
CO1 3 2
CO2 3 2 1 2
CO3 3 3 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 1 2 1
CO5 3 3 1 3 2 1
Avg. 3 2.6 1 2.5 2 1
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Per Unit System (4 lectures)

Per Unit meaning and its calculation. Need and advantages of per unit system, Single line diagram,
Per unit representation of a given power system network, Change of base value Impedance
diagram, Numerical problems
Module II: Faults Analysis: (8 lectures)

Symmetrical fault Analysis: Short Circuit Current and MVA Calculations, Fault levels, Reactors-
Numerical Problems. Symmetrical Component Theory: Symmetrical Component Transformation,
Sequence Networks: Positive, Negative and Zero sequence Networks for transformers,
transmission line and synchronous machine, Numerical Problems. Unsymmetrical Fault Analysis:
LG, LL, LLG faults, Interconnection of sequence networks, effect of fault impedance, Numerical
Problems
4
Module III: Load Flow Analysis (8 lectures)
Bus classification, formulation of Ybus matrix, power flow equations. Gauss – Seidel method,
algorithm, derivation of iterative equation, modification for PV bus, Advantages and
disadvantages, acceleration factor, Numerical Problems, Newton – Raphson method, algorithm,
power mismatch vector, size of Jacobian matrix and its elements. Advantages and disadvantages,
Numerical Problems, FDLF.
Module IV: Economic Operation of Power Systems (6 lectures)

Input-output characteristics of thermal and hydro plants, Optimum generator allocations without
and with transmission losses, calculation of penalty factors, incremental transmission loss,
transmission loss coefficients and their calculations.
Module V: Load Frequency Control (8 lectures)

Necessity of keeping frequency constant, Modeling of speed governing, steam turbine and
generator, Definition of Control area, Block diagram representation of an isolated power system,
Steady state analysis, Dynamic response, Proportional plus Integral control of single area and its
block diagram representation, , Two area system, block diagram, Tie-line-bias control.
Module VI: Stability (8 lectures)

Concept of stability and Classification, Description of Steady State Stability Power Limit, Transfer
Reactance, Synchronizing Power Coefficient, Power Angle Curve and Determination of Steady
State Stability, Methods to improve steady state stability. Derivation of Swing Equation,
Determination of Transient Stability by Equal Area Criterion, Application of Equal Area Criterion,
Critical Clearing Angle Calculation.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. J Grainger and W.D. Stevenson , “ Power System Analysis ’’ , McGraw Hill Education ,
First Edition, 2017
[2]. Hadi Sadat, “Power System Analysis”, PSA Publishing LLC, Third Edition, 2011
[3]. D.P. Kothari and I.J. Nagrath, “ Modern Power System Analysis ’’ ,McGraw Hill Education
2003
Reference Books:
[1]. Prabha Kundur, “Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw Hill Education; First Edition,
2006.
[2]. A.J. Wood and B.F. Wollenberg, “Power Generation, Operation and Control”, John Wiley and
Sons, 2011.
5
EE602 L T Credit
Power Electronics
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
CO1 To understand different power semiconductor devices and their characteristics.
CO2 To understand the operation, characteristics and performance parameters of AC to DC

Converters.
CO3 To study the operation and basic topologies of DC-DC Converters
CO4 To learn the different modulation techniques of PWM inverters and to understand
commutation techniques.
CO5 To study the operation of AC voltage controller and it’s various configurations.

CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 1 1
CO3 2 2 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO5 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
Avg. 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.2 1.4 1 1 1
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Power Semiconductor Devices (10 Lectures)
Power Diode, BJT, MOSFET, IGBT, Thyristor, and GTO: constructional features, I-V
Characteristics, switching Characteristics, Firing circuit for thyristor; protection of thyristor and
gate drive circuit, Turn on techniques, Voltage and current commutation of a Thyristor.
Module II: AC-DC Converters (8 Lectures)

Introduction, Single-phase half-wave and full-wave rectifiers with R, R-L and R-L-E load; effect of
source inductance, Three-phase full-bridge rectifier with R, R-L and R-L-E load; freewheeling
effect, power factor improvement.
Module III: DC-DC Buck and Boost Converter (6 Lectures)

Introduction, Elementary chopper with an active switch and diode, concepts of duty ratio and
average voltage, quadrant operation of chopper. Power circuit of a buck, boost and buck-boost
converter, analysis and waveforms at steady state, duty ratio control of output voltage.
6
Module IV: Single-Phase Voltage Source Inverter (6 Lectures)
Introduction, Single-phase voltage source inverter, operation and analysis, concept of average
voltage over a switching cycle, sinusoidal pulse width modulation, modulation index and output
voltage. Current source inverter.
Module V: Three-Phase Voltage Source Inverter (6 Lectures)

Three-phase voltage source inverter, operation and analysis, 120- degree conduction, 180-degree
conduction, three-phase sinusoidal pulse width modulation.
Module VI: AC Voltage Controllers (6 Lectures)

Introduction, principle of on-off control, principle of phase control and integral cycle control,
configuration of three phase controllers, Cycloconvertor.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. M. H. Rashid, “Power electronics: circuits, devices, and applications”, Pearson Education
India, 2009.
[2]. N. Mohan and T. M. Undeland, “Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design”,
John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
[3]. R. W. Erickson and D. Maksimovic, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Springer Science
&Business Media, 2007.
[4]. L. Umanand, “Power Electronics: Essentials and Applications”, Wiley India, 2009.
7
EE603 L T Credit
Advanced Control Systems
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1 Evaluate the output of a digital system for a given input.
CO2 Describe the dynamics of a Linear, Time Invariant systems through difference equations.
CO3 Analyze digital systems using the Z-transformation, state space methods.
CO4 Design digital controllers for physical systems.
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 1 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 1.5
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Sampling and Reconstruction (8 Lectures)
Introduction to digital control system, Examples of Data control systems, Sampler, Sampling
Theorem, Data Reconstruction: Digital to Analog conversion and Analog to Digital conversion,
sample and hold operations.
Module II: Modeling discrete-time systems by pulse transfer function (8 Lectures)

Revisiting Z-transform: Introduction to Z – transforms, Theorems of Z – Transforms, inverse Z-
transforms, Z-Transform method for solving difference equations. Mapping of S-plane to Z-plane,
Pulse transfer function, Pulse transfer function of closed loop system, sampled signal flow graph
Module III: State Space Analysis (12 Lectures)

State variables, State model for linear continuous-time system. Types of state models, Eigen value
and Eigen vectors, Solution of state equation, State transition matrix and its Properties.
Discrete state space model: Introduction to state variable model, various canonical forms,
Characteristic equation, state transition matrix, Solution to discrete state equation.
Module IV: Controllability, Observability & Stability (8 Lectures)

Concepts of Controllability and Observability, Tests for controllability and Observability Duality
between Controllability and Observability. Stability analysis of discrete time systems: Jury stability
8
test Stability analysis using Bi-linear transformation.
Module V: State Feedback Controller (6 Lectures)

Design of state feedback controller through pole placement – Necessary and sufficient conditions.
Observer: Full Order Observer, Reduced Order Observer. Lyapunov Stability Theorem.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. Discrete-Time Control systems – K. Ogata, Pearson Education/PHI, 2nd Edition

[2]. B. C Kuo, Digital Control Systems, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, Inc., 1992.
Reference Books:
[1]. F. Franklin, J.D. Powell, and M.L. Workman, Digital control of Dynamic Systems, Addison-
Wesley Longman, Inc., Menlo Park, CA , 1998.
[2]. Digital Control and State Variable Methods by M.Gopal, TMH.
9
(Any One)
10
EE611 L T Credit
Electrical Estimation & Costing
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Understand the purpose of estimation and costing.
Understand distribution of energy in a building, wiring and methods of wiring, cables used in
CO2
internal wiring, wiring accessories and fittings, fuses and types of fuses..
CO3 Analyze design of lighting points and its number, total load, sub-circuits, size of conductor.
CO4 Understand types of service mains and estimation of service mains and power circuits.
CO5 Estimate overhead transmission and distribution systems and its components.
COs/POs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO1 3 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 3 3 2 1 1 2
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Principles of Estimation (5 Lectures)
Introduction to estimation & costing, Electrical Schedule, Catalogues, Market Survey and source
selection, Recording of estimates, Determination of required quantity of material, Labor conditions,
Determination of cost material and labour,Contingencies, Overhead charges, Profit, Purchase
system, Purchase enquiry and selection of appropriate purchase mode, Comparative statement,
Purchase orders, Payment of bills, Tender form, General idea about IE rule, Indian Electricity Act
and major applicable I.E rules.
Module II: Residential Building Electrification (7 Lectures)

Introduction to electrical symbols, their advantages and requirement. Concept of wiring diagram,
schematic diagrams and their types. General Rules guidelines for wiring of residential installation
and positioning of equipments, Principles of circuit design in lighting and power circuits
Procedures for designing the circuits and deciding the number of circuits, Method of drawing
single line diagram. Selection of type of wiring and rating of wires and cables Load calculations
and selection of size of conductor, Selection of rating of main switch Distribution board, protective
switchgear ELCB and MCB and wiring accessories, Earthing of residential Installation, sequence
to be followed for preparing estimate, Preparation of detailed estimates and costing of residential
11
installation.
Module III: Electrification of Commercial Installation (7 Lectures)

Concept of commercial installation, Differentiate between electrification of residential and
commercial installation, Fundamental considerations for planning of an electrical installation
system for commercial building, Design considerations of electrical installation system for
commercial building, Load calculation and selection of size of service connection and nature of
supply, Deciding the size of the cables, busbar and bus bar chambers, Mounting arrangements and
positioning of switchboards, distribution boards main switch etc, Earthing of the electrical
installation, Selection of type wire, wiring system and layout, Sequence to be followed to prepare
estimate, Preparation of detailed estimate and costing of commercial installation.
Module IV: Service Connection, Inspection and Testing of Installation (7 Lectures)

Concept of service connection, Types of service connection and their features, Method of
installation of service connection, Estimates of underground and overhead service connections,
Inspection of internal wiring installations, Inspection of new installations, testing of installations,
testing of wiring installations, Reason for excess recording of energy consumption by energy
meter.
Electrical Installation For Power Circuits: Introduction, Important considerations regarding motor
installation wiring, Determination of input power, Determination of input current to motors
Determination of rating of cables
Determination of rating of fuse, Determination of size of Condit, distribution Board main switch
and starter.
Module V: Design & Estimation of Overhead Transmission & Distribution Lines (10 Lectures)
Introduction, Typical AC electrical power system, Main components of overhead lines, Line
supports, Factors governing height of pole, Conductor materials, Determination of size of
conductor for overhead transmission line, Cross arms, Pole brackets and clamps,Guys and Stays,
Conductors configuration spacing and clearances, Span lengths, Overhead line insulators, Insulator
materials, Types of insulators, Lightning Arrestors, Phase plates, Danger plates, Anti climbing
devices, Bird guards, Beads of jumpers, Muffs, Points to be considered at the time of erection of
overhead lines, Erection of supports, Setting of stays, Fixing of cross arms, Fixing of insulators,
Conductor erection, Repairing and jointing of conductor , Dead end clamps, Positioning of
conductors and attachment to insulators, Jumpers, Tee-offs, Earthing of transmission lines,
Guarding of overhead lines, Clearances of conductor from ground, Spacing between conductors,
Testing and commissioning of overhead distribution lines, Some important specifications.
Module VI: Design and Estimation of Substations (6 Lectures)

Introduction, Classification of substation, Indoor substations, Outdoor substations, Selection and
12
location of site for substation, Main Electrical Connections, Graphical symbols for various types of
apparatus and circuit elements on substation main connection diagram, Key diagram of typical
substations, Equipment for substation and switchgear installations, Substation auxiliaries supply,
Substation Earthing.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. Raina K.B. and Bhattacharya S.K., “Electrical Design, Estimating and Costing”, New Age
International, New Delhi, 2010
[2]. N. Alagappan & S. Ekambaram, “Electrical Estimating & Costing”, TMH,2006
[3]. Dr.S.L.Uppal, “Electrical Wiring, Estimating and Costing”, 5th Edition, Khanna
Publishers,2003.
[4]. M.V. Deshpande, “Elements of Electrical Power Station Design”, PHI 2009.
[5]. J. B. Gupta, “A Course in Electrical Installation Estimating and Costing”, S. K. Kataria and
Sons, India,2013.
[6]. ISI, National Electric Code, Bureau of Indian Standard Publications, New Delhi, 2011.
13
EE612 L T Credit
Electrical Engineering Materials
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1 Understand various types of dielectric materials, their properties in various conditions.
CO2 Evaluate magnetic materials and their behavior.
CO3 Evaluate semiconductor materials and technologies.
CO4 Acquire Knowledge on Materials used in electrical engineering and applications.
CO1 3 3 3 1 2
CO2 3 2 3 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2
Avg. 3 2.5 2.5 1.5 2
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Dielectric Materials
Dielectric as Electric Field Medium, leakage currents, dielectric loss, dielectric strength,
breakdown voltage, breakdown in solid dielectrics, flashover, liquid dielectrics, electric
conductivity in solid, liquid and gaseous dielectrics, Ferromagnetic materials, properties of
ferromagnetic materials in static fields, spontaneous, polarization, curie point, anti-ferromagnetic
materials, piezoelectric materials, pyroelectric materials.
Module II: Magnetic Materials

Classification of magnetic materials, spontaneous magnetization in ferromagnetic materials,
magnetic Anisotropy, Magnetostriction, diamagnetism, magnetically soft and hard materials,
special purpose materials, feebly magnetic materials, Ferrites, cast and cermet permanent magnets,
ageing of magnets. Factors effecting permeability and hysteresis.
Module III: Semiconductor Materials

Properties of semiconductors, Silicon wafers, integration techniques, Large and very large scale
integration techniques (VLSI).
Module IV: Materials for Electrical Applications

Materials used for Resistors, rheostats, heaters, transmission line structures, stranded conductors,
bimetals fuses, soft and hard solders, electric contact materials, electric carbon materials,
14
thermocouple materials. Solid, Liquid and Gaseous insulating materials, Effect of moisture on
insulation.
Module V: Special Purpose Materials

Refractory Materials, Structural Materials, Radioactive Materials, Galvanization and Impregnation
of materials, Processing of electronic materials, Insulating varnishes and coolants, Properties and
applications of mineral oils, Testing of Transformer oil as per ISI.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. “R K Rajput”, “ A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Laxmi Publications, 2009

[2]. “T K Basak”, “ A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, New Age Science Publications
2009
Reference Books:
[1]. TTTI Madras, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, McGraw Hill Education, 2004.
[2]. “AdrianusJ.Dekker”, Electrical Engineering Materials, PHI Publication, 2006.
[3]. S. P. Seth, P. V. Gupta “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Dhanpat Rai &
Sons, 2011.
15
EE613 L T Credit
Power System Restructuring
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Understand the developments of restructuring worldwide.
CO2 Identify the roles and responsibilities of different entities in power market.
CO3 Identify issues like congestion management Ancillary Services Management.
CO4 Evaluate the transmission pricing schemes
CO5 Explain the Ancillary Services Management and the reforms in Indian power sector
COs/POs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO1 1 2 1 1 2
CO2 1 2 1 2 1 2
CO3 2 2 1 2 1 2 2
CO4 1 1 1 2 1 2
CO5 2 2 1 1 2
Avg. 1.4 1.75 1.0 1.6 1 1.5 2
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Introduction to Restructuring of Power Industry (8 Lectures)
Introduction: Deregulation of power industry, Restructuring process, Issues involved in
deregulation, Deregulation of various power systems – Fundamentals of Economics: Consumer
behavior, Supplier behavior, Market equilibrium, Short and long run costs, Various costs of
production – Market models: Market models based on Contractual arrangements, Comparison of
various market models.
Module II: Electricity Market Model (8 Lectures)

Separation of ownership and operation, Deregulated models, pool model, pool and bilateral trades
model, multilateral trade model. Competitive electricity market: Independent System Operator
activities in pool market, Wholesale electricity market characteristics, central auction, single
auction power pool, double auction power pool, market clearing and pricing, Market Power and its
Mitigation Techniques, Bilateral trading.
Module III: Transmission Congestion Management (8 Lectures)

Introduction: Definition of Congestion, reasons for transfer capability limitation, Importance of
congestion management, Features of congestion management – Classification of congestion
management methods – Calculation of ATC - Non – market methods – Market methods – Nodal
pricing – Inter zonal and Intra zonal congestion management – Price area congestion Management.
16
Module IV: Locational Marginal Prices and Financial Transmission Rights (5 Lectures)
Mathematical preliminaries: - Locational marginal pricing– Lossless DCOPF model for LMP
calculation – Loss compensated DCOPF model for LMP calculation – ACOPF model for LMP
calculation – Financial Transmission rights.
Module – V: Transmission Pricing Schemes (7 Lectures)

Introduction to transmission pricing, Principles of transmission pricing, Classification of
transmission pricing, Rolled-in transmission pricing paradigm, Marginal transmission pricing
paradigm, Composite pricing paradigm, Merits and de-merits of different paradigms, Classification
of loss allocation methods, Pro-rata methods, Incremental methods, Power flow tracing based
allocation.
Module – VI: Ancillary Service Management (4 Lectures)

Introduction of ancillary services – Types of Ancillary services – Classification of Ancillary
services – Load generation balancing related services – Voltage control and reactive power support
devices – Black start capability service.
Module-VII: Reforms in Indian Power Sector (2 Lectures)

Introduction – Framework of Indian power sector – Reform initiatives - Availability based tariff –
Electricity act 2003 – Open access issues – Power exchange – Reforms in the near future.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. Mohammad Shahidehpour, Muwaffaq Alomoush, Marcel Dekker, “Restructured electrical

power systems: operation, trading and volatility” Pub., 2001.
[2]. Kankar Bhattacharya, Jaap E. Daadler, Math H.J. Boolen, “Operation of restructured power
systems”, Kluwer Academic Pub., 2001.
[3]. Leo Lei Lai, “Power System Restructuring and Deregulation: Trading, Performance and
Information Technology” Wiley Pub. November 2001.
[4]. Steven Stoft, “Power system economics: designing markets for electricity”, John Wiley &
Sons, 2002.
Reference Books:
[1]. Making competition work in electricity Sally Hunt, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2002.
[2]. Marija llic, Francisco Galiana and Lestor Fink , Power System Restructuring Engineering &
Economics , Kulwer Academic Publisher, USA-2000.
17
EE614 L T Credit
Green Energy Technology
3 1 3
Course Outcome:
CO1 Identify different non-conventional energy system and realize their importance in today's
scenario.
CO2 Analyze the performance and limitations of the solar and wind energy conversion system.
CO3 Understand the concept behind the bio-mass, geothermal, tidal, ocean thermal and wave
energy conversions.
CO4 Outline the basics of fuel cells and hydrogen production and storage.
CO1 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg. 2.5 1.25 1.33 1.25 1 1 1
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Basics of energy, conventional energy sources, fossil fuels limitations, renewable energy sources,
advantages and limitations, global energy scenario, energy scenario of India, new technologies
(hydrogen energy, fuel cells, bio fuels).
Module II: Solar Energy (12 Lectures)

Theory of solar cells, solar cell materials, I-V characteristics of solar cell, PV module, PV array,
MPPT, PV systems, Stand alone and grid connected PV systems, storage, PV based water
pumping, solar radiation and its measurement, flat plate collectors and their materials, applications
and performance, solar thermal power plants, limitations.
Module III: Wind Energy (10 Lectures)

Wind power and its sources, site selection, power in the wind, impact of tower height, classification
of wind turbine and rotors, wind energy extraction, betz’z limit, wind characteristics, performance
and limitations of wind energy conversion systems.
Module IV: Biomass and Geothermal energy (5 Lectures)

Availability of biomass and its conversion theory, types of biomass, gasification, biogas plant,
biomass cogeneration, resources of geothermal energy, thermodynamics of geo-thermal energy
conversion, geothermal power generation, environmental considerations.
18
Module V: Tidal, Wave and Ocean energy (6 Lectures)
Introduction to tidal energy, tidal characteristics, tidal power plant, tidal power development in
India, introduction to wave energy, factors affecting wave energy, principles of wave energy plant,
OTEC, applications of OTEC.
Module VI: Emerging technologies for power generation (5 Lectures)

Fuel cells, Principle of working of various types of fuel cells and their working, performance and
limitations, future potential of fuel cells, emergence of hydrogen, cost analysis of hydrogen
production, hydrogen storage.
Suggested Readings:
[1] Non-Conventional Energy Resources, D.S. Chauhan, New Age International Pvt Ltd., 2006.
[2] D. P. Kothari, Rakesh Ranjan, Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies, PHI,
India,2011.
[3] Solar Cells: Operating principles, Technology and Systems Applications, Martin Green,
UNSW, Australia, 1997
[4] S. P. Sukhatme, Solar Energy, TMH, India. 2008.
[5] Introduction to Wind Energy Systems: Basics, Technology and Operation (Green Energy and
Technology), by Hermann-josef Wagner, ISBN: 9783642020223, Publisher: Springer,
September 2009.
[6] Biofuels - Securing the Planet's Future Energy Needs, Edited by A Demirbas Springer 2009
[7] Fuel Cells: The Sourcebook - New Edition 2004 Escovale 2004.
Reference Books:
[1] John Twiden and Tony Weir, Renewable Energy Resources, BSP Publications, 2006.
[2] Renewable Energy, Third Edition, Bent Sorensen, Academic Press August 2004
[3] Wind Energy Explained: Theory, Design and Application, by J. F. Manwell, ISBN:
9780470015001, Publisher: John Wiley & Sons, Publication Date: February 2010 .
[4] L.L. Freris, Wind Energy Conversion Systems, Prentice Hall, 1990.
19
Open Elective-II
(Any One)
20
EE621 L T Credit
Advanced Control Systems*
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1 Evaluate the output of a digital system for a given input.
CO2 Describe the dynamics of a Linear, Time Invariant systems through difference equations.
CO3 Analyze digital systems using the Z-transformation, state space methods.
CO4 Design digital controllers for physical systems.
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 1 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 1.5
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Sampling and Reconstruction (8 Lectures)
Introduction to digital control system, Examples of Data control systems, Sampler, Sampling
Theorem, Data Reconstruction: Digital to Analog conversion and Analog to Digital conversion,
sample and hold operations.
Module II: Modeling discrete-time systems by pulse transfer function (8 Lectures)

Revisiting Z-transform: Introduction to Z – transforms, Theorems of Z – Transforms, inverse Z-
transforms, Z-Transform method for solving difference equations. Mapping of S-plane to Z-plane,
Pulse transfer function, Pulse transfer function of closed loop system, sampled signal flow graph
Module III: State Space Analysis (12 Lectures)

State variables, State model for linear continuous-time system. Types of state models, Eigen value
and Eigen vectors, Solution of state equation, State transition matrix and its Properties.
Discrete state space model: Introduction to state variable model, various canonical forms,
Characteristic equation, state transition matrix, Solution to discrete state equation.
Module IV: Controllability, Observability & Stability (8 Lectures)

Concepts of Controllability and Observability, Tests for controllability and Observability Duality
between Controllability and Observability. Stability analysis of discrete time systems: Jury stability
21
test Stability analysis using Bi-linear transformation.
Module V: State Feedback Controller (6 Lectures)

Design of state feedback controller through pole placement – Necessary and sufficient conditions.
Observer: Full Order Observer, Reduced Order Observer. Lyapunov Stability Theorem.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. Discrete-Time Control systems – K. Ogata, Pearson Education/PHI, 2nd Edition

[2]. B. C Kuo, Digital Control Systems, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, Inc., 1992.
Reference Books:
[1]. F. Franklin, J.D. Powell, and M.L. Workman, Digital control of Dynamic Systems, Addison-
Wesley Longman, Inc., Menlo Park, CA , 1998.
[2]. Digital Control and State Variable Methods by M.Gopal, TMH.
22
EE622 L T Credit
Soft Computing Techniques
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Distinguish the concept between the hard and soft computing techniques.
CO2 Understand the basic concept of the Artificial Neural Network (ANN).
CO3 Understand the basic concept of the fuzzy logic system
CO4 Explain the concept of Genetic Algorithm (GA) and its limitation.
Choose the different kind of evolutionary programming for multi objective optimization
CO5
problem based on their application.
CO1 3 3 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 2
Avg. 3 3 3 2 2 2
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Fundamentals of Soft Computing Techniques (4 Lectures)
Conventional and Modern Control System, Intelligence, Soft and Hard Computing, Artificial
Intelligence.
Module-II: Artificial Neural Network (10 Lectures)

Introduction to Artificial neural networks-biological neurons, Basic models of artificial neural
networks- Connections, Learning, Activation Functions, McCulloch and Pitts Neuron.
Learning rule- Hebbian Learning, Perceptron Learning, Delta Learning- Training and Testing
algorithm, Adaptive Linear Neuron, Back Propagation Network – Architecture, Training algorithm.
Module-III: Fuzzy Logic System-I (8 Lectures)

Fuzzy Logic- Fuzzy sets- Properties- Operation on fuzzy sets, fuzzy relations- operations on fuzzy
relations.
Fuzzy membership functions, fuzzification, Methods of membership value assignments- intuition-
inference- rank ordering, Lambda- cuts for fuzzy sets, Defuzzification methods.
Module –IV: Fuzzy Logic System-II (7 Lectures)
23
Truth values and Tables in Fuzzy Logic, Fuzzy propositions, Formation of fuzzy rules –
Decomposition of rules- Aggregation of rules, Fuzzy Inference Systems- Mamdani and Sugeno
types, Neuro-fuzzy hybrid systems – characteristics- classification
Module-V: (8 Lectures)
Introduction to genetic algorithm, operators in genetic algorithm – coding – selection – cross over –
mutation, Stopping condition for genetic algorithm flow, Generational Cycle, Applications.
Module-VI: (5 Lectures)
Evolutionary Programming, Multi-objective Optimization Problem Solving and its applications,
Genetic- neuro hybrid systems, Genetic-Fuzzy rule based system.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. N.P Padhy, Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent Systems- Oxford University Press.
[2]. S. N. Sivanandam and S. N. Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing- Wiley India.
[3]. Timothy J. Ross, Fuzzy Logic with engineering applications – Wiley India.
[4]. M.E. E1- Hawary , Artificial Intelligence application in Power Systems, IEEE Press,2009
[5]. Jan Jantzen, Foundations of Fuzzy Control, A practical approach, Wiley,2013
[6]. M Gopal, Digital Control and State Variable Methods, conventional and neural-fuzzy control
system, Published by Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Ltd,2012
[7]. David E Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms, published by Pearson 2008
Reference Books:
[1]. Satish Kumar, Neural Networks- Prentice Hall of India.
[2]. N. K. Sinha and M.M. Gupta, Soft Computing and Intelligent Systems: Theory &
Applications- Academic Press/ Elsevier, 2009.
[3]. Simon Haykin, Neural Network- A comprehensive Foundation- PHI, Inc.
[4]. Eberhart and Y. Shi, Computational Intelligence: Concepts to Implementation, Morgan
Kaufman/ Elsevier, 2007.
24
EE623 L T Credit
Power Electronics*
3 1 3
Course Outcomes:
CO1 To understand different power semiconductor devices and their characteristics.
CO2 To understand the operation, characteristics and performance parameters of AC to DC

Converters.
CO3 To study the operation and basic topologies of DC-DC Converters
CO4 To learn the different modulation techniques of PWM inverters and to understand
commutation techniques.
CO5 To study the operation of AC voltage controller and it’s various configurations.

CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 3 3 2 1 1
CO3 2 2 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO5 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
Avg. 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.2 1.4 1 1 1
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I: Power Semiconductor Devices (10 Lectures)
Power Diode, BJT, MOSFET, IGBT, Thyristor, GTO: constructional features, I-V Characteristics,
switching Characteristics, Firing circuit for thyristor; protection of thyristor and gate drive circuit,
Turn on techniques, Voltage and current commutation of a thyristor.
Module II: AC-DC Converters (8 Lectures)

Introduction, Single-phase half-wave and full-wave rectifiers with R, R-L and R-L-E load; effect of
source inductance, Three-phase full-bridge rectifier with R, R-L and R-L-E load; freewheeling
effect, power factor improvement.
Module III: DC-DC Buck and Boost Converter (6 Lectures)

Introduction, Elementary chopper with an active switch and diode, concepts of duty ratio and
average voltage, quadrant operation of chopper. power circuit of a buck, boost and buck-boost
converter, analysis and waveforms at steady state, duty ratio control of output voltage.
25
Module IV: Single-Phase Voltage Source Inverter (6 Lectures)
Introduction, Single-phase voltage source inverter, operation and analysis, concept of average
voltage over a switching cycle, sinusoidal pulse width modulation, modulation index and output
voltage. Current source inverter.
Module V: Three-Phase Voltage Source Inverter (6 Lectures)

Three-phase voltage source inverter, operation and analysis, 120- degree conduction, 180-degree
conduction, three-phase sinusoidal pulse width modulation.
Module VI: AC Voltage Controllers (6 Lectures)

Introduction, principle of on-off control, principle of phase control and integral cycle control,
configuration of three phase controllers, cycloconverter.
Suggested Readings:
[1]. M. H. Rashid, “Power electronics: circuits, devices, and applications”, Pearson Education
India, 2009.
[2]. N. Mohan and T. M. Undeland, “Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design”,
John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
[3]. R. W. Erickson and D. Maksimovic, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Springer Science
&Business Media, 2007.
[4]. L. Umanand, “Power Electronics: Essentials and Applications”, Wiley India, 2009.
26
EE624 L T Credit
Mine Electrical Engineering*
3 1 3
Pre-requisite: Basic Electrical Engineering and Basic Electronics Engineering.
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Understand different types of power supply systems and protection schemes used
underground coal mines.
CO2 Understand different types of circuit breakers and relay used in Mines.
CO3 Analyze illumination, Intrinsically Safe circuit methods of attaining intrinsic safety, Zener
safety barriers and their applications in mines.
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 2
CO5 3 3 12 1 1 2
Avg. 3 3 2 1 1 2
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Module I:
Types of electrical power supply systems for underground coal mines – solidly earthed, restricted
neutral and insulated – neutral systems of electrical power supply; their comparisons.
Module II:
Earth fault protection techniques for above mine power supply systems, sensitive and fail-safe earth
fault relays. On-line insulation monitoring for insulated-neutral electrical distribution system.
Module III:
Mining type circuit breakers – Air circuit breaker, vacuum and Hexa Sulfa Flouride (Sf6) circuit
breakers, Field switch, Tran switch Unit, Gate End Box, Drill Panel.
Module IV:
Electrical power planning for mechanized longwall faces – general scheme of electrical power
distribution, voltage drop problems and remedial measurers; Inbye substation capacity selection.
General scheme of electrical power distribution in opencast projects, Quarry substation capacity
selection. Choice of restricted-neutral and insulated-neutral systems in open cast mines.
Module V:
27
Illumination planning for mines – underground roadway lighting system; intrinsically-safe lighting
system for longwall faces, opencast mine lighting. Unit-VI Earthing practice in mines – earth pits,
earthing of mobile electrical equipment in mines. Mining cables – types, constructional details;
layout of cables through shaft and other locations.
Module VI:
Principles of flame proof enclosures. Intrinsically safe circuit methods of attaining intrinsic safety,
zeener safety barriers and their applications. Indian electricity rules as applied to mines.
Suggested Readings:
[1] A Text Book on Power Systems Engineering – Soni Gupta, Bhatnagar, Chakarbarti, Dhanpat
Rai & Sons.
[2] Electrical Equipment in mines- H. Cotton.
[3] Switchgear and Protection- S.S. Rao Khanna Publications.
[4] Indian Electricity Rules.
[5] Principles of Mine Planning J. Bhattacharya, Allied Publications.
Reference Books:
[1] Universal Mining School Series (UK)
[2] Coal Mining Practice- J.C. F Statharm Vol III, Heart Series.
[3] Electrical Power Systems – C.L. Wadhwa, New Age International Publishers
28
EE625 L T Credit
Green Energy Technology*
3 1 3
Course Outcome:
CO1 Identify different non-conventional energy system and realize their importance in today's
scenario.
CO2 Analyze the performance and limitations of the solar and wind energy conversion system.
CO3 Understand the concept behind the bio-mass, geothermal, tidal, ocean thermal and wave
energy conversions.
CO4 Outline the basics of fuel cells and hydrogen production and storage.
CO1 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Avg. 2.5 1.25 1.33 1.25 1 1 1
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Basics of energy, conventional energy sources, fossil fuels limitations, renewable energy sources,
advantages and limitations, global energy scenario, energy scenario of India, new technologies
(hydrogen energy, fuel cells, bio fuels).
Module II: Solar Energy (12 Lectures)

Theory of solar cells, solar cell materials, I-V characteristics of solar cell, PV module, PV array,
MPPT, PV systems, Stand alone and grid connected PV systems, storage, PV based water
pumping, solar radiation and its measurement, flat plate collectors and their materials, applications
and performance, solar thermal power plants, limitations.
Module III: Wind Energy (10 Lectures)

Wind power and its sources, site selection, power in the wind, impact of tower height, classification
of wind turbine and rotors, wind energy extraction, betz’z limit, wind characteristics, performance
and limitations of wind energy conversion systems.
Module IV: Biomass and Geothermal energy (5 Lectures)

Availability of biomass and its conversion theory, types of biomass, gasification, biogas plant,
biomass cogeneration, resources of geothermal energy, thermodynamics of geo-thermal energy
conversion, geothermal power generation, environmental considerations.
29
Module V: Tidal, Wave and Ocean energy (6 Lectures)
Introduction to tidal energy, tidal characteristics, tidal power plant, tidal power development in
India, introduction to wave energy, factors affecting wave energy, principles of wave energy plant,
OTEC, applications of OTEC.
Module VI: Emerging technologies for power generation (5 Lectures)

Fuel cells, Principle of working of various types of fuel cells and their working, performance and
limitations, future potential of fuel cells, emergence of hydrogen, cost analysis of hydrogen
production, hydrogen storage.
Suggested Readings:
[1] Non-Conventional Energy Resources, D.S. Chauhan, New Age International Pvt Ltd., 2006.
[2] D. P. Kothari, Rakesh Ranjan, Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies, PHI,
India,2011.
[3] Solar Cells: Operating principles, Technology and Systems Applications, Martin Green,
UNSW, Australia, 1997
[4] S. P. Sukhatme, Solar Energy, TMH, India. 2008.
[5] Introduction to Wind Energy Systems: Basics, Technology and Operation (Green Energy and
Technology), by Hermann-josef Wagner, ISBN: 9783642020223, Publisher: Springer,
September 2009.
[6] Biofuels - Securing the Planet's Future Energy Needs, Edited by A Demirbas Springer 2009
[7] Fuel Cells: The Sourcebook - New Edition 2004 Escovale 2004.
Reference Books:
[1] John Twiden and Tony Weir, Renewable Energy Resources, BSP Publications, 2006.
[2] Renewable Energy, Third Edition, Bent Sorensen, Academic Press August 2004
[3] Wind Energy Explained: Theory, Design and Application, by J. F. Manwell, ISBN:
9780470015001, Publisher: John Wiley & Sons, Publication Date: February 2010 .
[4] L.L. Freris, Wind Energy Conversion Systems, Prentice Hall, 1990.
30
Laboratory/ Sessional
31
EE601P P Credit
Power Systems-II Laboratory
3 1
This Laboratory Experiments may be performed in physical/ virtual platform (as per availability of list of
experiments in virtual lab portal).

Any 10 experiments out of which atleast 7 experiments from Group-A and 3 experiments from Group-B.
Group-A: SIMULATION BASED (USING MATLAB OR ANY OTHER SOFTWARE)
1) Formation of Bus admittance matrix
2) Solution of load flow problem using Gauss-Seidel method
3) Solution of load flow problem using Newton-Raphson method.
4) Solution of load flow problem using Fast Decoupled Method
5) Formation of Z-bus matrix
6) Application of Swing equation and its solution to determine transient stability
7) Simulation of LFC for two area power system
8) Economic load dispatch without considering network losses
9) Economic load dispatch considering network losses
10) To perform symmetrical fault analysis in a power system
Group B: HARDWARE BASED

1) To determine negative and zero sequence synchronous reactance of an alternator.
2) To determine fault current for L-G, L-L, L-L-G and L-L-L faults at the terminals of an
alternator at very low excitation.
3) To determine location of fault in a cable using cable fault locator
4) Determination of power angle characteristics of an Alternator
32
EE602P P Credit
Power Electronics Laboratory
3 1
This Laboratory Experiments may be performed in physical/ virtual platform (as per availability of
list of experiments in virtual lab portal).

1) To study 1-phase half wave and full wave mid-point uncontrolled rectifier
2) To study 1-phase half wave and full wave bridge controlled rectifier.
3) Study of three-phase half & fully wave controlled bridge converter with R and RL load.
4) To study V-I characteristics of SCR.
5) Study of AC voltage controller using TRIAC with R and RL load.
6) To study different triggering circuits for thyristors.
7) To study the operation of buck converter.
8) To study the operation of boost converter.
9) To study the function of Inverter trainer
10) To study class A and Class B commutation circuit.
11) To study class C and class D commutation circuit
12) To study the single phase cycloconverter with R and R-L Loads.
13) To study the operation of single phase dual converter fed PMDC motor
14) To determine speed vs load characteristics of BLDC motor.
15) To perform speed control of 3-phase induction motor using v/f control method
NOTE: At least ten experiments are to be performed, minimum seven experiments should be performed
from above list. Remaining three experiments may either be performed from the above list or
designed & set by the concerned institution as per the scope of the syllabus.
33
EE603P P Credit
Simulation Laboratory
3 1

These experiments can be performed using any software / FOSS (Free and Open Source Software)
available at the institute.
1) Simulation of Single Phase Half Wave Uncontrolled Rectifier with R and RL-Load.
2) Simulation of Single Phase Half Wave Controlled Rectifier with R and RL-Load.
3) Simulation of Single Phase Semi Controlled Rectifier with R and RL-Load.
4) Simulation of Single Phase Full Wave Uncontrolled Rectifier with R and RL- Load.
5) Simulation THD Analysis of Single Phase Full Wave Controlled Rectifier with R and RL-
Load.
6) Simulation and THD Analysis of Single Phase Full Wave Rectifier with RLE-Load.
7) Simulation and THD Analysis of Three Phase Half Wave Rectifier using R and RL-Load.
8) Simulation and THD Analysis of Three Phase Full Bridge Converter using R and RL-Load.
34
EE604P P Credit
Electrical Workshop
3 1

1) To study the different types of cable and conductors.

2) To perform house wiring for bulb, fan and a 3-pin socket.
3) To study the different types of motor starters.
4) To perform and verify the connection of fluorescent lamp, circuit, lines.
5) To Study Institute Substation.
6) Determination of dielectric strength of the given transformer oil.
7) To study different components of CT & PT.
8) To measure the resistance by using earth resistance tester.
9) To study of lap, wave, short pitch winding in machine.
10) To measure insulation resistance of 3 - induction motor.
35
BRANCH - PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
Course structure
5th Sem. Course structure
Sl.
Course No. Subject L T P Credit
No.
1 PE 501 Manufacturing Process-II 4 1 0 4
2 PE 502 Metrology 3 1 0 3
3 PE 503 Advanced Economic Analysis 3 1 0 3
PE 504
PE 505
4 Professional Elective -I 3 1 0 3
PE 506
PE 507
PE 508
PE 509
5 Open Elective -I 3 1 0 3
PE 510
PE 511
1 PE 501P Manufacturing Process-II Lab 0 0 3 1
2 PE 502P Metrology Lab 0 0 3 1
3 PE 503P Work Study and Ergonomics Lab 0 0 3 1
4 PE 504P Computer Aided Design Lab 0 0 3 1
5 DS 501 General Proficiency/ Seminar 0 0 2 2
Total credit 22
6th Sem. Course Structures

Sl.
Course No. Subject L T P Credit
No.
1 PE 601 Machine Tool Design 4 1 0 4
2 PE 602 Manufacturing Process-III 3 1 0 3
3 PE 603 Modern Manufacturing Process 3 1 0 3
PE 604
PE 605
4 PE 606 Professional Elective -II 3 1 0 3
PE 607
PE 608
PE 609
PE 610
5 PE 611 Open Elective -II 3 1 0 3
PE 612
PE 613
1 PE 601P Machine Tool Design Sessional 0 0 3 1
2 PE 602P Manufacturing Process-III Lab (TMCF Lab) 0 0 3 1
3 PE 603P Modern Manufacturing Process Lab 0 0 3 1
4 PE 604P Automation Lab 0 0 3 1
5 IN 601 Internship/ Tour & Training/ Industrial Training 0 0 2 2
Total credit 22
Professional Elective -I
PE 504 Lean Manufacturing
PE 505 Process Engineering
PE 506 Value Engineering
PE 507 Work Study and Ergonomics
Open Elective -I
PE 508 Eco-Friendly Manufacturing
PE 509 Automobile Engineering
PE 510 CAD/CAM
PE 511 Industrial Pollution
Professional Elective -II

PE 604 Processing of Non-Metals.
PE 605 Agile Manufacturing
PE 606 Product Development and Design
PE 607 Competitive Manufacturing Strategies
PE 608 Operation Research
Open Elective -II

PE 609 Mathematical Modelling and Simulation
PE 610 Maintenance Technology and Safety Engineering (MTSE)
PE 611 Industrial Automation & Robotics
PE 612 Computer Integrated Manufacturing
PE 613 System Dynamics
NAME OF DEPTT. /CENTRE: Department of Production Engineering
1. Course Title: Manufacturing Process-II (PE 501)Semester - V
2. Details of Course:
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Foundry: Patterns, Pattern materials, types of patterns, Pattern allowances. Mould and
1. core making, properties of molding and core sands, Sand testing, Machine Molding. 08
Gating, Risering and solidification of casting.
Special casting processes: Centrifugal casting, investment casting, Die casting,
2. Continuous casting and shell molding. Working principle and operation of cupola. 08
Cleaning of casting, inspection of casting, casting defects.
Welding and Allied Process: Gas welding and Gas cutting processes. Electric Arc
Welding: Carbon Arc welding, Shielded-Metal Arc Welding, Submerged Arc
3. 08
Welding, TIG (or GTAW) welding, MIG (or GMAW) welding, Electroslag welding,
Plasma Arc welding.
4. Resistance welding : Spot, Seam, Projections, Butt welding etc. 04
Advance Welding Methods:Thermit welding, atomic hydrogen welding, Ultrasonic
5. Welding, explosive welding, electron beam welding, Laser beam welding, Soldering, 10
Brazing and Braze-welding.
Welding Design: Design of welded joints. Weldability and weldability testing.
6. 04
Inspection (Destructive and non-destructive testing)
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. DeGarmo, E. P, Black, J. T., Kohser, R. A. “ Materials and Processes in Manufacturing”, Prentice

Hall of India Pvt. Limited
2. Kalpakjian, S. and Schmid, S. R, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Pearson Education
3. Groover, M. P., “Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing”, John Wiley and Sons Inc.
4. Lindberg, R. A., “Processes and Materials of Manufacture”, Prentice Hall India Limited
5. Rao, P. N., “Manufacturing Technology (Vol. 1&2)”, Tata McGraw Hill

NAMEOFDEPTT. /CENTRE: Department of Production Engineering
1. Course Title: Metrology (PE 502) Semester - V
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Standard of Measurements: Principles of measurements: Line standard: Imperial
standard yard, standard meter, wave length standards, end bars, effect of environment
1. on measuring accuracy. Constructional details of measuring instruments, Abbe 06
principles, pivots and Bearings, sources of error, temperature variations, parallel, sine
and cosine errors, elastic deformations etc.
Measuring accuracy: Dimensional and geometrical accuracy. Tolerance and Limit
Systems: System of tolerance and fits, ISA and BIS system of tolerances and fits, the
2. 08
economics of wide and close tolerance, principles of limit gauging of plain work,
Design and manufacture of gauge.
Measuring Instruments: Linear measurement: Direct measuring tools, comparators
types, relative merit and limitations, optical instruments, projectors and microscopes,
3.
angular measurements: clinometer, taper gauges, sine bar, angle blocks and auto 08
collimators, circular division testers, optical dividing head.
Geometrical form of surfaces: Concepts and measurements of flatness, straightness,
4. Parallelism, perpendicularity, roundness, cylindricity, Runout and concentricity, errors 06
in positioning. Uses of interference methods, Measurements of surface texture.
Screw Thread Measurements: Systems of screw threads. Principles of limit gauging
of threaded work, measurements of screw threads, external and internal threads and
5. measuring instruments. Spur Gear Measurements: Geometrical definitions of spur 08
gears, basic parameters of spur gears, measurements of spur gear parameters,
individual and accumulative error measurements.
Alignment and large scale measurements: Machine tool alignments, instruments and
6. methods for testing straightness, flatness &squarness, alignments charts, dynamic 06
testing of machine tools. Concept of on-line inspection
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Jain R K, “Engineering Metrology”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi
2. Kumar D S, “Mechanical Measurements and Control Engineering” Metropolitan Book Company,

New Delhi
3. Sawney R, “Instrumentation and Mechanical Measurements”, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi
4. Holeman J P, “Experimental Methods for Engineers”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company,
Delhi
5. Beckwith T H, “Mechanical Measurements”, Addison Wesley, New York

1. Course Title: Advanced Economic Analysis(PE 503) Semester - V

S. No. Contents Contact
Hours
1 Fundamental economic concepts and basic economic laws relating to market and 08
prices. Selection in present terms economy. The time element is economy study,
interest and interest formulas. Nominal and effective interest rates, calculation of
equivalent involving interest. Present worth, properties, capitalized costs and
capitalized values.
2 Comparison of alternatives, Selection and replacement of equipment from 06
amongst multiple alternatives. Uncertainty in economy studies, decision making
under known probabilities, decision trees in evaluation of alternatives.
3 Promotion of a company and its legal aspects. Raising of capital, equity capital 06
and borrowed capital. General accounting and double entry, book keeping,
journals and ledgers, income statement, balance sheet and their analysis.
4 Cost accounting, cost elements and cost structure, Methods of allocating factory 08
overhead, various classification of cost and use of cost data in economy studies.
5 Depreciation and depreciation accounting, classification and types of depreciation 08
and accounting for the recovery of cost of capital assets. Value time function,
common methods of depreciation, accounting and their selection.
6 Economy of operation and minimum cost analysis for purchase, production order, 08
maintenance tooling etc. Break even analysis, effect of price on profit. Income
taxes, inflation.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Industrial Engg. And Mgt. B.Kumar (Dhanpat Rai.)
2. Industrial Engg. & mgt. O.P. Khanna, (Khanna Pub)
3. Engineering Economy. Gerald J. Thuesen.(PHI)
4. Engineering Economy. E. Paul DeGarmo.( EEE)
NAME OF DEPTT./CENTRE: Department of Production Engineering
1. Course Title: Lean Manufacturing (PE 504) Semester-V
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Objectives of lean manufacturing-key principles and implications of lean
1. 03
manufacturing- traditional Vs lean manufacturing.
Value creation and waste elimination- main kinds of waste- pull production-
different models of pull production-continuous flow-continuous
2. 08
improvement/Kaizen- worker involvement -cellular layout- administrative
lean.
Standard work -communication of standard work to employees -standard work
and flexibility -visual controls-quality at the source- 5S principles -preventative
3. 09
maintenance-total quality management-total productive maintenance -
changeover/setup time -batch size reduction -production leveling.
Value Stream Mapping-The as-is diagram-the future state map-application to
the factory simulation scenario-line balancing -Poke Yoke – overall
4. 08
equipment effectiveness. One Piece Flow-Process razing techniques – cells
for assembly line – case studies
Introduction - elements of JIT - uniform production rate - pull versus push
5. method- Kanban system - small lot size - quick, inexpensive set-up - continuous 08
improvement. Optimised production technology.
Team establishment, transformation process, Project Management, Lean
6. implementation, Reconciling lean with other systems- lean six sigma-lean 06
and ERP-lean with ISO 9001:2000.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Askin R G and Goldberg J B, “Design and Analysis of Lean Production Systems”,
John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2003.
2. Hobbs, D.P. “Lean Manufacturing implementation”, Narosa Publisher, 2004.
3. Micheal Wader, “Lean Tools: A Pocket Guide to Implementing Lean Practices”,
Productivity and Quality Publishing Pvt Ltd, 2002.
4. Michael L George, David T Rowlands, Bill Kastle, “What is Lean Six Sigma”,
McGraw Hill, New York, 2004.
5. Kenichi Sekine, “One-Piece Flow”, Productivity Press, Portland, Oregon, 1992.
6. Alan Robinson “Continuous Improvement in Operations”, Productivity Press,
Portland, Oregon, 1991.
7. Poke - Yoke, "Improving Product Quality by Preventing Defects", Productivity Press,
1992.
1. Course Title: Process Engineering(PE 505) Semester - V
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Introduction to process planning, Design and manufacture cycle, Process planning -
1. the design/manufacture interface, Process planning activities, Process planning verses 05
production planning.
Process planning methods, Manual process planning, Experience-based process
planning, Part design/drawing interpretation, Basic process planning terminology,
2. 08
Equivalent parts -interchangeability and standardization, Concept of dimensional
chain, Dimensional and Tolerance analysis
Process selection, Process capability analysis, Process and operations sequencing,
3. Calculation of process parameters, Process re-engineering, Preparation of process
07
sheet,
4. Expert systems and their use in developing process planning systems, 02
Computer-aided process planning (CAPP), Variant process planning, Generative
5. and dynamic CAPP, Forward and Backward planning, Logical design of process 06
planning systems,
Optimal selection of manufacturing processes, tools and fixtures, coolants and
6. 08
other consumables required for manufacturing,
Cost analysis and cost control for different processes, Make-or-buy decisions,
7. Methods of process cost estimation and its application in preparation of 06
manufacturing budget.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Process Engineering for manufacturing by Donald F. Eary and Gerald E. Johnson
2. Process Planning by Peter Scallan, ELSEVIER
3. Process Engineering techniques Evaluation by W.F. Waller
4. Product Planning systems by L.N.Goslin
1. Course Title: Value Engineering (PE 506) Semester - V
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Introduction & Value Orientation: Reasons for unnecessary costs, VE-versatile
1. technique, definition, beginning and the Spread. Value orientation, customer and cost, 05
internal customers, value defined, Increasing value.
The Orientation Phase: Training, Selection of projects, impact of VE application,
ABC analysis, Problematic areas, production problems, maintenance problems, vendor
2. 08
development problems, design problems, old designs, specifications and standards.
Selection of leader, team members, workshop.
The Information Phase: Decision and costs, use of work book, human relations.
The Function Phase: Importance of functions, types of functions, functions defined,
3.
levels of functions, Function-cost, concept of worth, value potential, function Analysis 07
System Technique (FAST), scope lines.
The Creation Phase: Brainstorming, split-brain theory, brainstorming process,
Gordon technique, checklists, Morphological analysis technique, word association
4. technique. 08
The Evaluation Phase: Filters, ranking, feasibility rankings, weighted evaluation,
factor comparison, Decision matrix.
The Recommendation Phase: Conducting trails, assessing management’s needs,
preempting, making the presentation.
5. The Implementation Phase: Action plan, record progress, report progress, organizing 06
review meetings, problems in implementation, incorrect project selection, human
factors.
The Audit Phase: Technical audit, cost audit, case study, timing of audit, problems in
audit, audit personnel, documentation, frequency of audit, benefits.
Managing the VE Program: The need, management support, VE organization, VE
6. 08
group, VE manager, tasks, VE workshops, selection of projects, follow-up, Publicity,
VE Budgets, action plan, Select a simple project, Management Presentation, Audit of
savings.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Materials : S. Kalpakjian, 3rd edition Addison - Wesley,
2. Composite Materials: Science and Engineering: Krishan Kumar Chawla, Springer Science &
Business Media
Callister's Materials Science and Engineering: R. Balasubramaniam, 2nd edition,Wiley
1. Course Title: Work Study and Ergonomics (PE 507)Semester - V
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Introduction: Purpose and scope of work study and its historical development. Work
1. 05
study as a tool for productivity enhancement.
Method Study: Objectives and scopes; general procedure to tackle method study
problems (steps; select, record, critical examination, develop, install and maintain
2. improved method). Recording techniques and their applications (Operation process 08
chart, flow process chart, two handed process chart, multiple activity chart, flow
diagram, string diagram, photographic aids and models).
Micro-motion Study: Preparation of motion films and analysis with the help of
3. therbligs and SIMO charts, memomotion study, cycle graph and chronocylegraph,
07
Principles of motion economy.
Work Measurements: Concept, scope and objectives. Various work measurement
techniques. Stop watch study, procedure in detail. Performance rating and
determination of normal time. Allowances in time study and determination of Standard
4. 08
time
Work Sampling : Concept and uses. Sampling study procedure and presentation of
results. Establishing time standards by work sampling, practical applications.
Pmts: Establishment and uses of elemental time data, predetermined motion time
systems, major systems, uses and applications.
5. 06
Wage & Incentive: Principles and methods of job evaluation and merit rating.
Principles of wage & incentive payment, comparative study of incentive schemes.
Ergonomics: Concept, scope and objectives of human factors in engineering and Man-
6. environment interaction. Causes and prevention of fatigue, Design of Man- 08
environment systems and methodology.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Workstudy and Ergonomics by Lakhwinder Pal Singh Cambridge Publication
2. Workstudy and ergonomics by P.C Tewari CRC Press
3. Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work by Ralph M. Barnes, Wiley Publication
1. Course Title: Eco -Friendly Manufacturing (PE 508) Semester V
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
INTRODUCTION; Introduction to lean, sustainable, green manufacturing;
1. concept of Eco-friendly manufacturing; the monozukuri principles. 04
REGULATORY CONSIDERATIONS: Regulatory considerations and

2. sustainability strategies, Imperative global warming perspectives, Carbon 07
credits, green power and renewable energy credits;
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE INDICES; Effect of industrial activity
on environment, measures and metrics; ranking of risks; Environmental Load
3. 06
Units (ELU); International green manufacturing standards and compliance; ISO
14000;
MATERIAL FLOWS THROUGH THE ECONOMY AND THE
4. ENVIRONMENT: Metals production, Metal recycling, Energy and other 06
advantages of metal
INDUSTRIAL WASTE: Type of wastes, causes of waste generation and its
5. elimination in manufacturing industries, Hidden waste in industries, 07
workplace organization.
ANALYTICAL TOOLS: Lean vision and lean principles, value added and
6. non-value-added activities Metrics for sustainable practices; life cycle 06
assessment/impact tools; Product Stewardship in Industry
ECO FRIENDLY MANUFACTURING SYSTEM: Green Design and
Manufacturing in Consumer Products; Green rapid prototyping and rapid
7. 6
manufacturing; green packaging; Green collaboration processes via the
Internet; Reverse supply chain, green supply chain.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Fast Track to Waste Free Manufacturing J.W. Davis, Productivity Press USA
2. Clean Production, K.B. Misra, Springer – Verlog – 1996
3. Environmentally Benign Manufacturing, WTEC Panel Report, 2001
4. Design for environment: A guide to sustainable product development: Eco- efficient product
development, J, Fiksel. McGraw-Hill.- 2009
5. Green Manufacturing: Case Studies in Lean Manufacturing and Sustainability., AME, Association
for Manufacturing Excellence (2007) Productivity Press, Inc.
1. Course Title: Automobile Engineering (PE 509) Semester-V

Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Introduction to automobile: Importance, applications, job opportunities,
1. classification, types of vehicles, basic structure, general layout, hybrid 05
vehicles.
Automotive electric and electronic systems: Electric and electronics
principles, systems, and circuits, automotive batteries, construction, and
operation, starting system, charging system, operation and service, ignition
2. 08
system, electronic ignition and fuel control, engine management, electric
vehicles, electronic fuel injection system - monopoint and multipoint
systems.
Automotive drive trains: Clutch - types and construction, fluid flywheel, gear
3. boxes, manual and automatic - overdrives - propeller clutches, drive shafts,
07
universal joints, drive axles.
Automotive chassis: Vehicle construction, chassis, frame and body, construction,
4. operation, performance, steering system, wheel alignment, brakes, wheels and 07
tyres.
Maintenance and Trouble Shooting: Automobile performance, drivability,
emissions and emission norms, noise and vibration, engine tuning, equipment
5. 08
for measuring various vehicle parameters such as BHP, A/F ratio, noise,
vibration and emission, comfort and safety.
Newer Fuels: Use of natural gas, LPG, hydrogen, biodiesel in automobiles
6. as fuels, electric and hybrid vehicles, fuel cells. Other recent advances in 07
automobiles and automotive components.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Crouse – Anglin, “Automotive Mechanics”, McGraw Hill, 10th Edition, Singapore.
2. Pulkrabek Willard W., “Engineering Fundamental of the Internal Combustion Engine”,
Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2002.
3. Bosch, “Automotive Handbook”, SAE Publication.
4. Denton Tom, “Automobile Electrical and Electronics Systems”, Butterwoth, Heinemann,
2003.
5. Layne Ken, “Automotive Engine Performance: Tune up, Testing and Service”,
Englewood Prentice Hall of India, 1996.
1. Course Title: CAM/CAM (PE 510) Semester - V

Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Introduction: CAD/CAM Processes, Role of CAD/CAM/CAE in the Product
1. Cycle, CAD tools to support the design process and manufacturing, Benefits of 08
CAD/CAM/CAE in the industry.
Geometric Modeling: Wire frame modeling – entities, curve representation
methods, parametric representation of analytic and synthetic curves, Surface
2. 12
modeling – parametric representation of analytic and synthetic surfaces, Solid
modeling – Boundary representation, constructive solid geometry
Geometrical transformation: Two-dimensional transformation Three-
3. dimensional transformation representation of matrix: translation, scaling, rotation,
05
mirror, shearing, Solid modeling types: parametric, solid, surface.
Numerical Control (NC): Introduction, numerical control – its growth and
development, components of NC system, input devices, control systems –
4. point to point, straight cut, and continuous path NC, open loop and closed loop 05
NC systems, NC interpolations – linear, circular, helical, parabolic and cubic
interpolation, applications of NC systems, merits and demerits.
Part Program Terminology: G and M Codes, Types of interpolation,
Methods of CNC part programming, Manual part programming, Computer
5. 08
Assisted part programming: APT language, CNC part programming using
CAD/CAM Introduction to Computer Automated Part Programming.
Factors influencing selection of CNC Machines: Cost of operation of CNC
Machines-cost of Operation of CNC Machines-Practical aspects of
6. 04
introduction of CNC-Maintenance features of CNC Machines-Preventive
Maintenance.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Zeid, I., “Mastering CAD/CAM”, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Hsu, T. R. and Sinha, D. K., “Computer Aided Design: An Integrated Approach”, West Publishing
Company.
3. Groover, M. P., “Automation, Production systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, 3rd
2007 Ed., Prentice-Hall.
4. Singh, N., “Systems Approach to Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing”, John Wiley &
Sons
5. Besant, C. B. and Lui, C. W. K., “Computer Aided Design and Manufacture”, Ellis Horwood Ltd.
6. Rao, P. N., Tiwari, N. K. and Kundra, T.K., “Computer Aided Manufacturing”, Tata McGraw Hill.
1. Course Title: Industrial Pollution (PE 511) Semester V
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Introduction: Environments and Human activities, Environments and Ecology, 02
1.
Consequences of population growth. Energy problem.
Pollution of air, water and land, Fossil fuel related pollutants in the 06
2.
environment.
3. Environmental Impacts of Hydro-electric, Nuclear energy and chemicals. 03
Air pollution - Definitions and scales of concentration, classification and 04
properties of air pollutants, Emission- sources and their classification. Air
4. pollution laws and standards, Inversion Ambient air sampling, stack sampling,
sampling system, analysis of air pollutants. Air pollution emission control,
selection of a particulate: collector, control of gaseous emission, combustion
Water pollution - Hydrologic cycle and water quality , origin of waste water and 14
its composition, Type of water pollutants and their effects, water pollution laws:
5. and standards, waste water sampling and analysis water quality standard, waste
water treatment , Biological systems( Aerobic and Facultative ponds), Recovery
of material from process effluents.
Noise pollution- Different noise environments and their sources, measurement 07
6. of noise and the equipments Noise pollution lows an, Vibration isolation and
noise control in industries.
Solid Waste Management Sources and classification, Public health aspect, 08
effluent treatment processes and solid waste management: sources and
7.
classification. Public health aspect, effluent treatment process and solid waste
management, “Solid-Solid separation technique for recovery and reuse
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Bhatia S C, Managing Industrial Pollution, Macmillan India Pvt. Ltd.
2. Dix H M, Environmental Pollution, Institution of Environmental Sciences Series/ Wiley
3. Sawyer C N, Mccarty P L, Parkin G F, Chemistry for Environmental Engineering and Science,
McGraw-Hill
NAMEOFDEPT./CENTRE: Department of Production Engineering
1. Course Title: Manufacturing Process Lab-II (PE 501P) Semester – V
2. List of experiments
I. Study of classification and basic principles of the welding processes.
II. Preparation of a butt/lap joint using oxy-acetylene gas welding technique.
III. Preparation of a butt/lap joint with mild steel plate using TIG Welding.
IV. Preparation of a butt/lap joint with mild steel plate using SAW.
V. Preparation of a butt/lap joint with mild steel strip using MIG welding.
VI. Preparation of a Lap joint with using Spot welding technique.
VII. Study of plasma arc welding (PAW).
VIII. Preparation of a joint using soldering technique.
IX. Preparation of butt joint using oxy-acetylene brazing process.
X. Study of thermal cutting of metals.
NAME OF DEPT. /CENTRE: DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
Metrology Lab (PE 502P) Semester-V
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Practicals : 3 hrs/week Term work: 100
Sl
Topic
No.
1. Measurement of taper angle using Sine bar
2. Measurement of alignment using Autocollimator
3. Measurement of surface roughness (Talysurf)
4. Measurements of surface flatness by using Monochromatic light source
5. Measurement of linear and Angular dimensions by Tool Makers Microscope
6. Roll test two-flank inspection measurement error
7. Measurement of linear and Angular dimension using Coordinate Measuring Machine
8. Measurement of linear and Angular dimension by CAD Model in CMM Machine.

NAME OF DEPT./CENTRE: Department of Production Engineering
Work Study and Ergonomics Lab (PE 503P) Semester-V
Sl
Topic
No.
1. Operation Analysis-Flow Process Chart

2. Activity Chart (Right/Left Hand Activity Chart)
3. String Diagram
4. Motion Study (Therbligs Technique)
5. Direct Time Study Method
6. Work Sampling Measurement Method
7. Tread Mill Excise (a)
8. Tread Mill Excise (b)
9. Tread Mill Excise (c)
NAME OF DEPTT. /CENTRE: DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
Computer Aided Design Laboratory (PE 504P) Semester-V
Practical : 4 hrs/week Term Work : 100
Sl. Topic
No.
1. An introduction of cad software and its utilities in the engineering software.
2. Study of the basic initial setting and viewing of drafting software interface.
3. Study of various tools bar options and exercises to familiarize all the drawing tools.
4. Study and implementation of co-ordinate systems and UCS.
5. Use of basic entities in 2D.
6. Use of various modifies commands of drafting software.
7. Dimensioning in 2D and 3D entities.
8. Draw different types of 3D modeling entities using viewing commands, to view them
(isometric projectio).
9. Sectioning of solid primitives and rendering in 3D.
10. Intersection of solid primitives.

NAMEOFDEPTT./CENTRE: Department of Production Engineering
1. Course Title: Machine Tool Design (PE 601) Semester - VI
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Stress in elementary machine members, Design stress and factor of safety,
1. Design of rivets, welded joints, keys, cutters, knuckle joints, Power screw 08
and springs.
Introduction to Jigs and Fixtures, Basic principle followed in the design of Jigs
2. and Fixtures, Jig classification and drill bushes and its types, Typical Jigs for 06
components for drilling, reaming, tapping, counter boring.
Job holding and clamping devices, Fixtures characteristics and setting-piece.
Milling fixtures, turning Fixtures, grinding fixtures, Assembly and inspection
3.
of fixtures, Design and construction of form tool and relieving cutters, 06
Design of Reamers and thread cutting tools
Kinematics of machine tool drive, types of machine tool drive, standard
series used for selection of spindle, Determination of speed Structures and
4. 06
layout for a drive, Design of main spindle and feed drive system, Design of
spindle, bearings, slides and slide ways
Press tools, classification and operation of press, design of press tools.
Progressive and compound tools, Broaching, construction and design features,
5. 10
Vibration in machine tools and dynamic rigidity, sources of vibration, effect
of vibration, Chatter theory
Gear cutting tools for spur, helical and worm gear, types and construction
6. concept of generation and forming, hob for spur and worm, Gear shapers, 06
Slotters, bevel gear cutters, design features and design of fly cutters.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Fundamentals of Tool Engineering design, S.K. Basu, S.N. Mukherjee, R. Mishra,
Oxford & IBH Publishing co.
2. Technology of Machine Tools, Krar, Gill, Smid, Tata Mc Graw Hill
3. Jigs & Fixture Design, Edwrd G Hoffman, Cengae Learning
4. A Textbook of Production Engineering, P.C. Sharma, S. Chand & Co
5. Machine Tool Design and Numerical Control, N.K.Mehta, Tata Mc Graw Hill
6. Tool Design , Donaldson,Lecain,Goold,Ghosh Tata Mc Graw Hill
1. Course Title: Manufacturing Processes III (PE 602) Semester - VI
Hours
1 Principles of Metal Machining: Metal Machining, Elements of machining, 08
Classical metal machining process; Tool Signature, Mechanism of chip
formation; types of chips. Geometry of chip formation, Forces on chips, Velocity
relationships; stress and strain in chips; Mechanics of Multi-Point Cutting Tools:
Milling cutters; Forces in Milling, specific cutting pressure.
2 Theories on Mechanics of metal cutting for orthogonal cutting: (Merchant, 08
Lee and (Shaffer); Power and energy relationship; Thermal aspects of metal
machining; Measurement of chip-Tool interface temperature, Friction in metal
cutting. Measurement of Cutting Forces: Tool Dynamometer.
3 Theory of Machinability: Evaluation of machinability , Tool life, Tool life 06
Plots, Types of tool failure, Flank wear and crater wear, variable influencing tool
failure and tool life, Economics of metal machining.
4 Principles of Metal Forming: Principle of plastic flow of metals during hot and 06
cold working. Hot and cold working processes: Forging, Rotary swaging,
Rolling, Thread rolling, extrusion, wire drawing, Tube drawing, Sheet metal
operations.
5 Theory of Metal Forming: Introduction of plasticity theories. Application of 08
slab theory in the analysis of metal forming Processes (forging, wiredrawing,
rolling, Extrusion, Deep drawing). Introduction to slip line concept and its
application to simple plain strain problems.
6 Powder Metallurgy: Definition and scope of powder Metallurgy in Industry, 06
Merits and demerits. Types of powders and their manufacturing. Fundamental
properties of powders. Mech. Pulverisation, Electrolytic process, chemical
reduction, Automization. Process of powder Metallurgy: Mixing, Compaction,
Sintering infiltration, sieving, coining, Machining etc.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. A.B. Chattopadhyay. “Machining and Machine Tools” Wiley Publication
2. Amitabha Bhattacharya. “Metal Cutting (Theory and Practice)” New Central Book Agency
3. M.C. Shaw. “Metal Cutting Principles”. CBS Publishers & Distributions
4. B.L. Juneja. “Fundamentals of Metal Forming Processes”. New Age International Publishers
5. Dr. Sadhu Singh. “Theory of Plasticity & Metal forming processes”. Khanna Publishers
6. P.C.Angelo, R.Subramaniam. “Powder Metallurgy”. Prentice Hall India Learning Pvt. Ltd
1. Course Title: Processing of Non-Metals (PE 603)Semester - VI
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Introduction: Classification of engineering materials and processing techniques,
1. structure and properties of non-metals. Glass structure and properties, glass 05
melting and forming, glass annealing.
Classification of ceramics: crystal structures and properties, ceramic powder
preparation, Synthesis of ceramic powders, fabrication of ceramic products from
2. 07
powders: pressing, casting, vapour phase techniques, sintering, finishing, machining.
ceramic coatings.
Structure and mechanical properties of plastics, thermoplastics and thermosets,
Processing of Plastics: Extrusion. Injection moulding. Thermoforming. Compression
3.
moulding. Transfer moulding. General behavior of polymer melts, Machining of 07
plastics
Classification of composite materials, properties of composites, processing methods of
polymeric matrix composites: hand lay-up, autoclaving, filament winding, pultrusion,
4. 10
compression molding, pre-pegging, sheet molding compounds etc., process capability
and application areas of various techniques.
Ceramic matrix composites, mechanical properties of ceramic matrix composites,

5. different processing techniques for ceramic matrix composites, process capability and 06
applications of various techniques
Secondary processing of composite materials, Need of secondary operations, different

type of secondary operations, machining and drilling of non-metals, machining
6. 07
induced damage, different methods of reducing the damage on account of secondary
processing.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Materials : S. Kalpakjian, 3rd edition Addison - Wesley,
2. Composite Materials: Science and Engineering: Krishan Kumar Chawla, Springer Science &
Business Media
3. Callister's Materials Science and Engineering: R. Balasubramaniam, 2nd edition,Wiley

1. Course Title:Agile Manufacturing (PE 604) Semester - VI
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Types of Production- The Agile Production Paradigm- History of Agile
1. Manufacturing- Agile Manufacturing Vs Mass Manufacturing, Agile Manufacturing 05
Vs Mass Customization- Agile Manufacturing Research Centers.
Agile Practices- Agile practice for product development - Manufacturing agile
2. practices - understanding the value of investing in people, Concept models of 08
Agile Manufacturing- Infusing managerial principles for enabling agility.
Implementing technology to enhance agility- Implementing new technology – reasons
3. – guidelines preparation for technology implementation - A checklist, technology
08
applications that enhance agility - agile technology make-or-buy decisions.
Performance Measurement and Costing: Measurement of agility – methods –
4. Scoring and Fuzzy approaches – Costing for Agile Manufacturing practices – 08
Activity Based Costing.
Creating the learning factory: Imperative for success, factory becoming a learning
5. 05
factory, building a road map for becoming a learning factory - core capabilities
Guiding vision, leadership that fits, ownership and commitment, pushing the
6. envelope, prototypes, integration, learning challenges for learning manufacturing 08
business.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Gunasekaran A, “Agile Manufacturing, 21st Strategy Competitiveness Strategy”, Elsevier
Publications, 2001.
2. Montgomery J C and Levine L O, “The Transition to Agile Manufacturing – Staying Flexible for
Competitive Advantage”, ASQC Quality Press, Wisconsin, 1995.
3. Goldman S L, Nagal R N and Preiss K, “Agile Competitors and Virtual Organizations”, Van
Nostrand Reinhold, 1995.
4. Brian H Maskell, “Software and the Agile Manufacturer, Computer Systems and World Class
Manufacturing, Productivity Press, 1993
1. Course Title: Modern ManufacturingProcesses (PE605) Semester - VI
Sl. Contents Contact
No. Hours
1 Introduction: Types of advanced manufacturing processes; Evolution, need, and 02
classification of modern machining processes (MMPs).
2 Mechanical Type MMPs: USM, Rotary Ultra Sonic Machining (RUM), AJM, 06
WJM, AWJM, Process principles and mechanisms of material removal, Process
parameters,Processcapabilities,Applications,Operationalcharacteristics,
Limitations.
3 Chemical Type MMPs: Process principle and details of Chemical Machining 03
(CHM), Photo-Chemical Machining (PCM) processes.
4 Electro Chemical Type MMPs: ECM - Process principle, Mechanism of 04
material removal, Process parameters, Process capabilities, Applications
5 Thermal Type AMPs: EDM, Wire Electro Discharge Machining (WEDM), 14
LBM, EBM, IBM, PAM, Process principles and mechanisms of material
removal, Process parameters and characteristics, Surface finish and accuracy,
Process capabilities, Applications, Limitations.
6 Derived and Hybrid AMPs: Electro Stream Drilling (ESD), Shaped Tube 07
Electro Machining (STEM), Electro Chemical Honing (ECH), Electro Chemical
Deburring (ECDE), Electro Chemical Discharge Machining (ECDM), Process
parameters, Process capabilities, Applications, Limitations, Introduction to form
machining.
7 Additive Manufacturing (AM): Process chain in AM, CAD model, Slicing, 08
Model orientation for AM processes, Support Structures, Seven families of AM
processes (ASTM)- Process description, Types of materials, Strengths and
Limitations.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Pandey P. C., Shan H. S. "Modern Machining Processes", Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd,
New Delhi
2. Ghosh A., Mallik A. K., "Manufacturing Science", Affiliated East-West Press Ltd, New Delhi
3. Benedict G. F., "Nontraditional Manufacturing Processes", Marcel Dekker, Inc. New York
4. McGeough J. A.,"Advanced Method of Machining", Chapman and Hall, New York
5. Mishra P. K., "Nonconventional Machining", Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi
6. Jain V. K.,"Advanced Machining Processes", Allied Publishers, New Delhi
7. Gibson, I, Rosen, D W., and Stucker, B., Additive Manufacturing Methodologies: Rapid
Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing, Springer
1. Course Title: Product Development and Design (PE 606) Semester - VI
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Product Design: Traditional and modern design processes; Organization objectives;
1. Innovation, creation, and diffusion techniques; Evaluation of new product ideas – 06
functional, technological, ecological, legal.
Product Modeling and Reverse Engineering: Wireframe modeling; Surface
2. modeling – boundary representation; Solid modeling – CSG; Concept of reverse 08
engineering.
Product Data Exchange: Neutral file formats for product data exchange–DXF, IGES,
3.
STEP 06
Concurrent Engineering: Concept of concurrent engineering; Design for X; Design
4. for manufacturability (DFM); Design for assemblability (DFA); Design for reliability 10
(DFR); Design for quality (DFQ).
Rapid Prototyping Methods: Liquid based RP methods – stereolithography apparatus

5. 06
(SLA), solid ground curing (SGC), solid creation system (SCS), etc.
Solid based RP methods: Fused deposition modeling (FDM), laminated object

6. manufacturing (LOM), etc.; Powder based RP methods– selective laser sintering 06
(SLS), 3D printing (3DP), ballistic particle manufacturing (BPM), etc.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Andrearsen, M. M., and Hein, L., “Integrated Product Development”, Springer.
2. Huang, G. Q., “Design for X: Concurrent Engineering Imperatives”, Chapman and Hall.
3. Chitale, A. K. and Gutpa, R. C., “Product Design and Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall.
4. ZeidI., “CAD/CAM: Theory and Practice”, Tata McGraw Hill.
5. Boothroyd G., Dewhurst P., and Knight, “Product Design for Manufacture and Assembly”, 2nd Ed.,
Marcel Dekker.
6. Chua, C. K and. Leong, K. F., “Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications in Manufacturing”,
John Wiley & Sons.
1. Course Title: Competitive Manufacturing Strategies (PE 607) Semester - VI
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
The competitive environment in the market, The WTO agreement and its effect on
1. Indian Industries, Manufacturing as a competitive strategy, Competitive Advantages 05
and Disadvantages
Product Variety, Modular Design, Design for manufacturability, Selection of
2. 08
manufacturing technologies, Vendor Development, Vendor rating.
Just in time manufacturing, Kanban system, and Agile Manufacturing, Reengineering,

3. 08
TQM, MRP
ERP, and simulation as tools for competitive manufacturing, Intelligent

4. 07
Manufacturing
Elementary of manufacturing systems for different manufacturing scenarios -

Dedicated manufacturing system, Flexible manufacturing system (FMS), cellular
5. 08
manufacturing system (CMS), and Re-configurable manufacturing system (RMS);
Selection of manufacturing systems.
6. Concept of CIM, FOF, Network based manufacturing, and E-Manufacturing 06
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Manufacturing Excellence in Global Markets by W. Euershelm
2. Manufacturing Systems Design & Analysis by B. Wa.
3. Computer Automation in Manufacturing by T.O.Boucher
4. Intelligent Manufacturing Planning by P. Gu.

1. Course Title: Operation Research (PE 608)Semester - VI
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Introduction: Origin and development of operations research, general methodology of
1. 02
OR, applications of OR to industrial problems
Linear Programming
2. Mathematical formulation of the problem, Graphic solution, the simplex 14
method, Big-M method, concept of duality, dual simplex method.
Transportation Model
3. Basic feasible solution by different methods, finding optimal solutions, degeneracy in
transportation problems, unbalanced transportation problems
06
Assignment Model
Balanced and unbalanced assignments, assignment to given schedules
Sequencing Model
4. Processing of 2 jobs through machines –graphical method, Processing of n jobs
08
through two machines, processing n jobs through three machines
Queuing Model
5. 06
Queuing systems and their characteristics, The M/M/1/FIFO/Queuing system
Games Theory
6. Two-persons zero sum games, Pure and mixed strategies, Rules of dominance, 06
Solution methods without saddle point
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Operation Research by P.K. Gupta & D. S. Hira 7e, S.Chand
2. Operation Research by Hamdy A. Taha, Pearson publication 8e
3. Operation Research by Kantiswarup, Sultan Chand & Sons Publication
NAME OF DEPT. /CENTRE: Department of Production Engineering
1. Course Title: Mathematical Modelling and Simulation (PE609) Semester - VI
Hours
1. Introduction: Basic concepts of systems, Elements of systems, event driven 05
models, simulation as a decision making tool, types of simulation, system
modeling, types of modeling
2. Basic factory dynamics: Basic definitions and Parameters; Simple 05
relationships, Little’s Law; Bottleneck Rates and Cycle Times; Labour
Constrained Systems
3. Statistical models in Simulation: Review of terminology and concepts, 06
Probabilistic and statistical models in simulation. Introduction to some discrete
and continuous probability distributions including Bernoulli, Poisson,
Geometric, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma, Erlang, Normal, and Triangular
distributions. Relevance to simulation modelling.
4. Random Numbers: properties of random numbers, pseudo random numbers, 8
techniques for generating random numbers, test for random numbers,
techniques for random variate generation.
5. Analysis of simulation data: Input data modelling, Data collection, parameter 07

estimation, distributional assumptions and hypothesis testing. Chi-square and
Kolmogorov-Smirnov Goodness-of-fit tests.
6. Recent advances and case studies/mini project: Development of simulation 06
models for systems like queuing systems production, inventory, maintenance,
material handling and replacement systems-Investment analysis etc.
Introduction to the special purpose simulation language
7. Model verification and validation techniques. Output data analysis of 5
terminating and non-terminating Systems. Variance reduction techniques.
Introduction to simulation experimental design methods.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Gray Beal, Wajne J and Pooch U W, “Simulation Principles & Methods”, Winthrop Publishing
Incorporate.
2. Severance Frank, “System Modelling and Simulation”, John Wiley and Sons
3. Banks, Carson, Nelson and Nicole, “Discrete Event System Simulation”, Pearson Education, Asia
4. Hopp W.J. and Spearman M.L., Factory Physics, Mc-Graw Hill Higher Education
5. Kelton W.D., Sadowski R.P., and Swets N.B., Simulation with Arena, Mc-Graw-Hill
6. Banks Jerry and Carson John S., “Discrete event system simulation”, Prentice Hall
1. Course Title: Maintenance Technology and Safety Engineering (PE 610) Semester - VI
S. Contents Contact
No. Hours
1 Introduction: Definition, Importance, Purpose and results of maintainability 03
efforts, maintainability in product life cycle, maintainability tools
2 Failure Analysis: failure mode, effect and critical analysis, fault tree analysis, 08
cause and effect diagram, total quality management, Reliability, maintainability,
both-tub curve, concept of repair ability
3 Maintenance Strategies: Principle, relative advantage, limitation and application 08
of various maintenance strategies like, preventive maintenance, predictive
maintenance, condition based maintenance, Reliability based maintenance etc
4. Computer Integrated Maintenance: A Maintenance Data System, Processing 08

Recorded Data and Analyzing Information, Maintenance / e-Maintenance
through Data Mining, E-CBM, E-CMMS, Maintenance through Expert System
5 Costing and Budgeting of Maintenance System: Concept and strategies for tero- 06
technology and Maintainability testing, costing, budgeting and control index for
maintained system
6 Industrial Safety Principle: Industrial safety-concept and relevance, occupational 05
diseases, electrical and mechanical hazards, personal protective equipment and
clothing
7 Safety Functions: Safety responsibility and function of various functionaries and 04
departments, safety & profitably employee training and safety
42
Suggested Books:
1. B.S. Dhillon, Engineering Maintainability, Eastern Economy Edition PHI

2. A.K. Gupta, Reliability Engineering and Technology, Macmillan India Limited
3. N.V.S. Raju, Plant Maintenance and Reliability Engineering ,Cengage Learning India Private
Limited
4. S.K. Srivastava, Maintenance Engineering Principles, Practices &Management S. Chand
Publishing
5. H.P.Garg, Industrial Maintenance Engineering, S. Chand Publishing
6. E.T. Newbrough, Effective Maintenance Management Mc Graw Hill
7. Mobley, R. Keith, Higgins, R. Lindley and Wikoff, J. Darrin, Maintenance Engineering
Handbook
8. Mohamed Ben- Daya, Salih O. Duffuaa, Abdul Raouf, Maintenance Modelling and Optimization,
Springer
1. Course Title: Industrial Automation and Robotics(PE 611)Semester - VI
Hours
1. Basic Concepts of Automation: Introduction of mechanization and automation, 04
classification and strategies of automation, reasons for and arguments against
automation, mechanical, electrical, hydraulic, and pneumatic devices and
controls.
2. High Volume Manufacturing: Automated flow lines, types of automatic transfer 04
mechanisms, design and fabrication considerations, analysis of automated flow
lines.
3. Assembly Systems: Assembly systems and their types, manual assembly lines 12
and line balancing. Assembly Automation: automated assembly lines and their
types, automatic assembly transfer systems, automatic feeding and orienting
devices- vibratory and mechanical feeders and their types, orientation of parts,
performance and economics of assembly systems, feasibility study for assembly
automation.
4. Basic concept in Robotics : Introduction, Basic structure of robots, Resolution, 08
Accuracy, and Repeatability Position representation, Classification and Structure
of Robotic System: Point to point and continuous path Robotic systems:
Trajectory planning, control loops of Robotic systems; The manipulator-
Cartesian, Cylindrical, Spherical and articulated robots; Direct and indirect drives;
Wrist, motions and grippers;
5. Drive and Control Systems: Hydraulic systems; direct current servo motors 08
control approaches of Robots. Kinematics Analysis and Co-ordinate
Transformation: Direct kinematics problem in Robotics; Geometry based direct
kinematics analysis. Homogeneous transformation. The necessity of interpolators;
The generation of motion commands; Trajectory planning Basic structure of
interpolators
6. Programming, Sensors and Application of Robots: Manual teaching; lead- 06
through teaching, programming languages, programming with graphics; storing
and operating tasks programmes. Introduction to robotic sensors; vision systems,
Range defectors: Assembly Aid Devices; force and torque sensors: artificial
intelligence. Flexible manufacturing systems, Computer-Integrated
Manufacturing Systems. Concept of group Technology.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Groover, M. P., “Automation, Production systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, 2nd
Ed., Prentice Hall.
2. Boothroyd, G., “Assembly Automation and Product Design”, 2nd Ed., Marcel Dekker.
3. Tergan, V., Andreev, I. and Lieberman, B., “Fundamentals of Industrial Automation”, Mir
Publishers.
4. Craig John J., “Introduction to robotics: Mechanics & Control”, AddisonWesley
5. Schilling R. J., “Fundamentals of Robotics Analysis and Control”, Prentice Hall Inc
6. Mittal R. K. and Nagrath I. J., “Robotics and Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi
7. GhosalAshitava, “Robotics: Fundamental Concepts and Analysis”, Oxford University Press
1. Course Title: Computer Integrated Manufacturing (PE612) Semester - VI
Sl. No. Contents Contact Hours
1 Introduction: Introduction to manufacturing systems and their performance 04
analysis; Introduction to automation; Introduction to computer integrated
manufacturing (CIM).
2 Numerical Control (NC): Introduction, numerical control – its growth and 10
development, components of NC system, input devices, control systems –
point to point, straight cut, and continuous path NC, open loop and closed
loop NC systems, NC interpolations – linear, circular, helical, parabolic and
cubic interpolation, applications of NC systems, merits and demerits.
3 Extensions of NC: Concepts of computer numerical control (CNC), 06
machining center, and direct numerical control (DNC), and their advantages.
4 Robotics: Robot anatomy and related attributes, robot control systems – 06
limited sequence, playback with point to point, playback with continuous
and intelligent control; End effectors – gripper, tools; Sensors in robotics –
tactile sensors, proximity, optical sensors and machine vision; Applications
of industrial robots, robot programming.
5 Material Handling and Storage: Overview of material handling 06
equipments, automated material handling equipments – AGVs, conveyor
systems, performance analysis of material handling systems, automated
material storage systems – ASRS and carousel storage, analysis of automated
storage systems.
6 Manufacturing Support Functions: Introduction to group technology 06
(GT), computer aided process planning (CAPP), material requirement
planning (MRP), capacity planning, scheduling etc.
Total 42
4. Suggested Books
1. Groover, M. P., “Automation, Production systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, 3rd
Ed., Prentice-Hall.
2. Singh, N., “Systems Approach to Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing”, John Wiley &
Sons.
3. Chang,T.-C., Wysk,R. A. and Wang, H.-P. “Computer Aided Manufacturing”, 3rd Ed., Prentice
Hall.
4. Rembold,U., Nnaji,B. O. and Storr A., “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Addison Wesley.
5. Besant,C. B. and Lui,C. W. K., “Computer Aided Design and Manufacture”, Ellis Horwood Ltd.
6. Rao,P. N., Tiwari,N. K. and Kundra,T.K., “Computer Aided Manufacturing”, Tata McGraw Hill.
7. Koren, Y. “Computer Control of Manufacturing Systems”, McGraw Hill.
8. Lynch, M., “Computer Numerical Control for Machining”, McGraw-Hill.
9. Sava,M. and Pusztai,J., “Computer Numerical Control Programming”, Prentice Hall.
1. Course Title: System Dynamics (PE 613) Semester-VI
2. Details ofCourse:
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Introduction, Purpose and concepts of system dynamics,Building a
1. model,Problem definition and model purpose, building theory with causal 06
loop diagrams
Mapping the stock and flow structure of systems,Dynamics of stocks and
2. 06
flows; linking feedback with stock and flow structure
Understanding the Dynamics of Simple Systems, Analyzing Systems and
Creating Robust Policies,Industry dynamics and diffusion models,Network
3.
externalities, complementarities, and path dependence,Mark Paich System 08
Dynamics,Interactions of Operations, Strategy, and Human Resource Policy
Mark Paich System Dynamics,Interactions of Operations, Strategy, and Human
4. Resource Policy, Re-engineering the Supply Chain in a High-velocity 08
Industry,Formulating and Testing Robust Models of Business Processes
The Supply Line and Supply Chains,Forecasting and Feedback: Bounded
5. Rationality or Rational Expectations,Service Quality Management,Service 08
Quality Dynamics
Applications of System Dynamics to Environmental and Public Policy
6. Issues, Dynamics of Project Management, Project Dynamics Modeling in the 06
Real World
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Business Dynamics: Systems Thinking and Modeling for a Complex World, Sterman,
McGraw-Hill
2. System Dynamics Modelling: A Practical Approach, R.G.Coyle ,Chapman and
Hall/CRC
3. Systems Thinking, System Dynamics: Managing Change and Complexity,Kambiz E.
Maani and Robert Y. Cavana,Pearson Education
4. Strategic Modelling and Business Dynamics: A Feedback Systems Approach, John D.
W. Morecroft,Wiley
5. System Dynamics: Soft and Hard Operational Research, Martin
Kunc,Palgravemacmillan
Machine Tool Design Sessional (PE 601P) Semester-VI
Practicals : 3 hrs/week Term work : 100
Sl
Topic
No.
1. Design & Drawing of rivets.
2. Design & Drawing of cotter joint
3. Design & Drawing of knuckle joint
4. Design & Drawing of indexing jig/fixture for drilling operation
5. Design & Drawing of indexing jig/fixture for milling operation
6. Design and draw Punching die set
7. Design and draw a die for deep drawing
8. Design & drawing of Broach.

Manufacturing Processes III Lab (PE 602P) Semester-VI
. List of Experiments
1. To analyze various forces on the chip using Merchant Circle Diagram
2. To estimate power and cutting forces required in turning process
3. To calculate machining time for various operations
4. To study economics of metal cutting
5. To analyze tool life at different machining parameters
6. To study and analyze the process of open die forging
7. To study and analyze the process of metal extrusion process
8. To study and observe thorough demonstration of the rolling process
Modern Manufacturing Processes Lab (PE 603P) Semester-VI
Sl No. Topic
1. Electro-discharge Drilling
2. Wire-cut Electro-discharge Machining
3. Chemical Machining
4. Electro-chemical Machining
5. Ultrasonic Machining
6. Abrasive Jet Machining
7. Laser Beam Drilling
8. Rapid Prototyping
2. Course Title: Automation/FMS Lab (PE 604P) Semester -VI
3. List of experiments
1. Study of Industrial robots
2. Study of Common Robot Configurations.
3. Study of Articulated Robot Components.
4. Study of Robot End -Effectors.
5. Use of D H convection for three axis articulated Arm.
6. Write a robot program for the specified task by teach pendant Method.
7. Study of the integration mechanism of an flexible manufacturing systems
8. considering different elements such as CNC machines, robots etc.
9. Mechatronics in our Daily Life
1. Course Title: Production Planning and Control (PE701) Semester - VII
S. Contents Contact
No. Hours
1 Introduction to Production Planning and Control: 03
Production system, type of manufacturing systems and their characteristics,
objectives and functions of production planning and control
2 Pre-planning: 06
Demand forecasting, common techniques of demand forecasting, estimating factors
of production, product mix and batch size decisions, aggregate planning
3 Production Planning: 05
Routing, Loading and scheduling with their different techniques, dispatching,
Progress Report, Expediting and corrective measures
4 Inventory Control: 08
Field and scope of inventory control, inventory types and classification, Inventory
control models, static model, dynamic model both deterministic and
stochastic,Economic lot size, reorder point and their application, ABC analysis,
FSN analysis and VED analysis, Modern practice in purchasing and store keeping
5 Material Requirement Planning & JIT: Material requirement planning (MRP), 08
Manufacturing Resource planning (MRP II). Japanese approach to inventory
management: JIT, KANBAN
6 Value Engineering: Introduction, Different phase of value Engineering. Concept 06
of productivity
7 Aggregate Planning: Introduction, Nature of Aggregate planning, Costs, problem 06
structure, Methods of Aggregate planning, Introduction to Capacity planning
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. S.N Chary, Production and Operation Management, Tata McGraw Hill

2. Dr. K. C. Arora Production and Operation Management, Laxmi Publication Pvt. Ltd.
3. R. K. Garg & V. Sharma, Production planning and Control Management, Dhanpat Rai & C
Sons
4. E.D. Scheele, W.L. Westerman and R.J. Wimment, Principles and Design of Production
Control Systems
5. Production Control Engineering D. K. Corke, Hodder Arnold
6. Production Planning and Inventory Control- Seetharama L. Narasimhan, Dennis W.
McLeavey, Peter J. Billington.
1. Course Title: Statistical Quality Control (PE 702) Semester - VII
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Introduction: The meaning of quality and Quality improvement; Brief history
of Quality methodology, Statistical methods for Quality Control and
1. improvement; Total Quality management(quality philosophy, links between 04
quality and productivity, quality costs, legal aspects of quality implementing,
quality improvement)
Methods and philosophy of SPC: Chance and Assignable causes, Statistical
basis of the control charts (basic principles, choices of control limits, significance
2. 06
of control limits, sample size and sampling frequency, rational subgroups, analysis
of pattern on control charts, warning limits, Average Run Length - ARL)
Control Charts for Variables: Control Charts for X-bar and R charts, Type I
3.
and Type II errors, the probability of Type II error, simple numerical problems. 08
Process Capability: The foundation of process capability, Natural tolerance
4. limits, Cp- process capability index, C pk, Pp- process performance index, 06
summary of process measures. Numerical problems.
Control Charts for Attributes: Binomial distribution, Poisson Distribution
(from the point of view of Quality Control), Control chart for fraction
5. nonconforming, Control chart for number nonconforming, Control charts for 08
nonconformities or defects, Control chart for number of nonconformities per
unit, Numerical Problems
Lot by lot Acceptance Sampling for Attributes and CUSUM and EWMA
control charts: The acceptance sampling problem, single sampling plan for
6. attributes, Double, Multiple, Sequential sampling, AOQL, LTPD, OC curves, 10
Cumulative sum control chart, Exponentially Weighted Moving Average
control chart, Numerical Problems.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. M. Mahajan., “Statistical Quality Control”, 5th Ed.,
2. Dhanpat Rai and co.
3. Eugen L. Grant, Richard S. Leavenworth “Statistical Quality Control”
4. 6th edition, McGraw Hill
5. AmitavaMitra, “Fundamentals of Quality Control and Improvement”, Wiley India
6. S.A.H Rizvi, Zahid A. Khan., “Quality Control (for engineers and managers)”,
1. Course Title: Total Quality Management (PE 703)Semester - VII
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Introduction to Quality Management
Evolution of Quality Management, Concepts of Product and Service Quality,
1. 04
Dimensions of Quality, Deming’s, Juran’s, Crosby’s Quality Philosophy,
Quality Cost
Process Quality Improvement
Introduction to Process Quality, Graphical and statistical techniques for Process
2. 08
Quality Improvement, Graphical tools for data representation, 7 QC tools,
Sampling, sampling distribution, DMAIC process.
Statistical Process control Control charts for variables, control charts for
3. 08
attributes, application of control charts.
Process capability analysis, Measurement system analysis, Analysis of Variance
4. (ANOVA), Design and Analysis of Experiment (DOE), Acceptance sampling 12
plan.
TQM, Leadership, Lean and JIT Quality Philosophy, Benchmarking, Process
5. failure mode and effect analysis (PFMEA), Service Quality, Six sigma for 06
Process Improvement, ISO 9001 and QS 9000, Quality Audit, Quality Circles.
Quality Function Deployment, Robust Design and Taguchi Method. Design
6. Failure Mode & Effect Analysis, Product Reliability Analysis of Six Sigma in 04
Product Development.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Total Quality Management by Dale H. Besterfield, Pearson Publication
2. Principles of Total Quality Management by VipinMathur
3. Fundamentals of Quality Control and Management by AmitavaMitra, Wiley Publication

1. Course Title: Quality and Reliability Engineering. (PE 704) Semester - VII
Sl. No. Contents Contact Hours
1 Control chart : Introduction to quality control, objectives, applications and 10
cost consideration. Control charts, general theory of control charts, Control
charts for variables and attributes, Theory and application of control charts
for averages, ranges, standard deviation, fraction defective and number of
defects, Process capability study, Interpretation of control chart. Acceptance
sampling : Elementary concepts, sampling by attributes, single, double and
multiple sampling plans, construction and use of o.c. curves, Sequential
sampling techniques. Concept of quality circle. ISO -9000 Quality systems.
Total quality control-quality and competitiveness in a Global Market place,
Establishing a customer focus. Employee involvement. Six sigma,
Introduction to Taguchi methods.
2 Reliability concept, Failure-statistics: Failure density, Failure rate, 6
Probability of failure, Mean failure rate, mean time to failure(MTTF), mean
time between failure(MTBF).Graphical plots.
3 Hazard Models: Introduction, Constant Hazard, Linearly increasing Hazard, 6
The weibull model. Distribution functions and Reliability analysis. Hazard
Rate as Conditional Probability.
4 System Reliability: Introduction, Series configuration, Parallel configuration, 6
Mixed configuration. Application to specific Hazard Models.
Reliability analysis of (i) Complex systems and (ii)Systems not reducible to
mixed Configuration. Mean time to failure of systems. Logic diagrams,
Markov Models.
5 Reliability Improvement: Improvement of components, Redundancy 6
(Element redundancy, Unit redundancy, Stand by redundancy),
Optimization, Reliability Cost Trade-off.
6 Calculation of Reliability from: (i) Fault tree analysis (ii) Tie set and Cut-set 4
methods (iii) by use of Boolean Algebra.
7 Maintainability and Availability: Introduction, Maintainability, System 4
downtime, Availability, Inherent Availability, Achieved Availability,
Operational Availability, Reliability and Maintainability Tradeoff.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books
1. Fundamentals of Quality Control and Improvement: AmitavaMitra, Wiley
2. Statistical Quality Control – Eugen L. Grant , Richard S. Leavenworth
3. Statistical Quality Control – M. Mahajan
4. Quality Control (For Engineers and Managers) – S.A.H. Rizvi, Zahid A. Khan, D.K. Singh,
GauharAlam
5. Reliability Engineering – E. Balagurusamy
6. Reliability Engineering and Life Testing – V. N. A. Naikan

1. Course Title: Surface Engineering (PE 705) Semester - VII
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Fundamentals of surface engineering 1. Introduction: Engineering components,
surface dependent properties and failures, importance and scope of surface
1. engineering. 2. Surface and surface energy: Structure and types of interfaces, surface 04
energy and related equations. 3. Surface engineering: classification, definition, scope
and general principles.
Conventional surface engineering
Surface engineering by material removal: Cleaning, pickling, etching, grinding,
polishing, buffing / puffing (techniques employed, its principle). Role and estimate of
surface roughness. 5. Surface engineering by material addition: From liquid bath - hot
2. 08
dipping (principle and its application with examples). 6. Surface engineering by
material addition: Electrodeposition / plating (theory and its scope of applicatio). 7.
Surface modification of steel and ferrous components: Pack carburizing (principle and
scope of applicatio).
Conventional surface engineering
8. Surface modification of ferrous and non ferrous components: Aluminizing,
calorizing, diffusional coatings (principle and scope of applicatio). 9. Surface
3. modification using liquid/molten bath: Cyaniding, liquid carburizing (diffusion from
liquid state) (principle and scope of applicatio). 10. Surface modification using
08
gaseous medium: Nitridingcarbonitriding (diffusion from gaseous state) (principle and
scope of applicatio).
Advanced surface engineering practices
11. Surface engineering by energy beams: Laser assisted microstructural modification
– surface melting, hardening, shocking and similar processes. 12. Surface engineering
by energy beams: Laser assisted compositional modification – surface alloying of steel
4. and non-ferrous metals and alloys. 13. Surface engineering by energy beams: Laser 12
assisted compositional modification – surface cladding, composite surfacing and
similar techniques. 14. Surface engineering by energy beams: Electron beam assisted
modification and joining. 15. Surface engineering by energy beams: Ion beam assisted
microstructure and compositional modification.
Characterization of coatings and surfaces
16. Measurement of coatings thickness 17. Porosity & adhesion of surface coatings
5. 06
18.. Measurement of residual stress & stability 19. Surface microscopy & topography
by scanning probe microscopy 20. Spectroscopic analysis of modified surfaces
Functional Coatings & Applications
21. Functional and nano-structured coatings and their applications in photovoltaics,
6. 04
bio- and chemical sensors 22. Surface passivation of semiconductors & effect on
electrical properties 23. . Surface engineering of polymers and composites
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. K.G. Budinski, Surface Engineering for Wear Resistances, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs.
2. M. Ohring, The Materials Science of Thin Films, Academic Press Inc,
3. Introduction to Surface Engineering by P. A. Dearnley

1. Course Title: Advance Casting and Welding (PE 706) Semester - VII
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Gating system: Elements of gating system, top and bottom getting system.
1. Design of gating system ,Riser design-Caine method, modulus method, NRL 6
method; time of pouring, casting yield
Meting and solidification of casting: Melting and quality control of various
2. steels and non-ferrous alloys - Nucleation and grain growth, solidification of pure 6
metals, short and long freezing range alloys. Fluidity and its measurement
Special casting technique: shell moulding, squeeze casting, vacuum die casting,
3. counter-gravity flow-pressure casting, centrifugal casting, continuous casting &
5
squeeze casting ,semisolid metal casting
Advance arc Welding process: Plasma TIG, Hot wire TIG, cold metal transfer,
4. Under water arc welding, Solid state welding; friction welding , Friction stir 5
welding
Welding process used for special fabrication: Thermit welding, Electroslag
welding, electron beam welding, Laser beam welding, Ultrasonic Welding;
5. 7
special welding process (friction stir welding and hybrid (laser +GMAW/GTAW)
process
Inspection and testing of welding: Defects, Destructive tests – Non-destructive
6. 5
testing techniques – surface treatments-safety aspects in welding processes-
CAE of Welding And Casting: Design of weldment, application of finite
element method in welding – determination of distortion in weldments,
modeling of temperature distribution – case studies.
7. 8
Design for casting, application of finite element method in casting-
determination of hot spots, location of turbulence, and other defects,
modeling of flow in molds, modeling of heat transfer in castings case studies
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. P.L.Jain “ Principles of foundry Technology” Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers
2. Dr.R.S.Parmer “Welding processes and Technology” Khanna Publishers.
3. Howard B Cary, “ Modern Welding Technology” Prentice Hall, 2002
4. “Manufacturing & Technology: Foundry Forming and Welding”,P.N.Rao, 3rd Ed., Tata McGraw
Hill, 2003.
5. H.S.Bawa “Manufacturing Technology-I” Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi, 2007.
6. S.V.Nadkarni, Modern Arc Welding Technology, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
1. Course Title: Material Deformation Process (PE 707) Semester - VII
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Basic Concepts
1. State of stress at a point, equilibrium equations, stress tensor, spherical tensor and 05
deviator stress tensor, principal stress, deformation tensor
Theory of Plasticity
Engineering and true stress –strain, flow curve, idealized stress-strain model, plastic
2. 07
deformation equations, levy–mises equations, prandlt–reuss equations, strain
hardening, strain rate and bauschinger effects
Flow Rule and Yield Criterion
Velocity field and strain rate, compatibility equation, von – mises and tresca yield
3.
criterion, biaxial and triaxial yield surfaces, experimental verification of yield 07
criterion, lode–stress, parameter
Friction and Lubrication
Interfacial friction laws–Coulombs friction law, constant shear factor law,
4. composite friction, law and hydrodynamic friction law, friction mechanism during 10
plastic deformation, lubrication mechanisms– boundary, hydrodynamic and solid
lubrication, metal working, lubricants–types and characteristic
Plain Strain Deformation Processes
Basic concepts of slip-line method, slab method (equilibrium technique) and
energy method, (upper bound technique), analysis of following deformation
5. 06
processes, Forging of strip: pressure distribution and forging load Rolling of strip:
pressure distribution, roll–separating force and driving torque
Axi-Symmetric Deformation Processes

Analysis of following deformation processes:-Forging of disc: pressure
6. distribution and forging load 07
Extrusion of cylindrical rod: extrusion load and frictional power loss
Drawing of cylindrical wire: drawing load and maximum allowable reduction
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Principle of Industrial Metal Working G.W. Rowe, Edward Arnold , London
2. Principles of Metal Working S. Kumar, IBH & Co., New Delhi
3. Metal Working Processes and Analysis B. Avitzur, McGraw Hill, USA Metal Working Processes
and Analysis B. Avitzur, McGraw Hill, USA
4. Metal Working Processes and Analysis B. Avitzur, McGraw Hill, USA

1. Course Title: Supply Chain Management (PE 708) Semester - VII
S. Contents Contact
No. Hours
1 Introduction to Supply Chain Management: Concepts, Objectives, Information and 4
Material flows in the Supply Chain, Supply Chain Planning, Supply Chain Decision
Making, Managing uncertainties in Supply chain, Benefits of Supply Chain Management in
Industry
2 Dynamics of SCM: Supply Chain Process Cycles, Supply Chain Integration, Bullwhip 6
effect in Supply Chain, Information Systems and Processing in Supply Chain,
Collaborative Planning Forecasting and Replenishment (CPFR), Inventory Planning and
control
3 Information and Communication Technology used in Supply Chain: Need and Role of an 7
Information System in SCM, Enterprise Resource Planning ( ERP), Concept of SAP in
Supply chain, Current Trends of use of IT in SCM, Use of IT enabled technologies /
services in Logistical system
4 Supply Chain Management Practices: Bar-coding, Tierization of suppliers, Vendor 7
Managed Inventory, Hub and Spoke concept, Dynamic pricing, Third Party Logistics ( 3
PL’s) providers, Fourth Party Logistics ( 4 PL’s) providers, Reverse Logistics, Green
Logistics, Electronic Data Interface, Lean Operations
5 Procurement and Outsourcing Strategies: Make / In sourcing or Buy / Outsourcing 8
Decisions, Green Purchasing, Strategic Outsourcing, Strategic partnership with the
suppliers, Suppler Selection process, Supplier Rating and Control, Strategic Sourcing
Decisions, Continuous Improvement of Suppliers, Quality Assurance Program of suppliers
6 Customer Relationship Management in Supply Chain: CRM, Strategic Partnership with the 5
Customer, Linkage between CRM and SRM, Functional components of a CRM system,
CRM Business cycle
7 Performance Benchmarking in SCM Implementation: Supply Chain Integration, Supply 5
Chain Operations Reference (SCOR) Model, Supply Chain Performance Benchmarking
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Chopra, Sunil and Peter Meindl, Supply Chain Management - Strategy, Planning and Operation,
Prentice Hall of India.6th Edition
2. Sunil Sharma, Supply Chain Management - Concepts, Practices and Implementation, Oxford
University Press
3. Mohanty R. P and S. G. Desmukh, Essentials of Supply Chain Management, Phoenix publishing
4. Ballou, Donald H. and S. Srivastava, Business Logistics / Supply Chain Management, Pearson
Education, 5th Edition,
5. Simchi - Levi, D.P Kaminsky, Edith Simchi –Levi, Designing and Managing the supply Chain
concepts, Strategies and Cases Tata McGraw – Hill, 3rd Edition,
6. Buffa, E. S. and Sarin, R. K., John Wiley & Sons Ltd , Modern Production / Operations
Management, 8th Revised Edition,
1. Course Title: Enterprise Resource Planning(PE 709) Semester - VII
S. Contact
Contents
No. Hours
Enterprise: An Overview: Business Functions and Business Processes,
importance of Information: Characteristics of information; Types of
1. information, Information System: Components of an information system; 6s
Different types of information systems; Management information system,
Enterprise Resource Planning: Business modelling; Integrated data model
Introduction to ERP: Defining ERP, Origin and Need for an ERP System,
Benefits of an ERP System, Reasons for the Growth of ERP Market,
2. 7
Reasons for the Failure of ERP Implementation: Roadmap for successful
ERP implementation
ERP and Related Technologies: Business Process Re-engineering,
Management Information systems, Decision Support Systems, Executive
7
3. Information Systems- Advantages of EIS; Disadvantages of EIS, Data
Warehousing, Data Mining, On-Line Analytical Processing, Product Life
Cycle Management, Supply Chain Management, ERP Security
ERP Implementation Life Cycle: ERP Tools and Software, ERP Selection
Methods and Criteria, ERP Selection Process, ERP Vendor Selection,
4. 6
ERP Implementation Lifecycle, Pros and cons of ERP implementation,
Factors for the Success of an ERP Implementation
ERP Modules Structure: Finance, Sales and Distribution, Manufacturing
and Production Planning- Material and Capacity Planning; Shop Floor
Control; Quality Management; JIT/Repetitive Manufacturing; Cost
Management ; Engineering Data Management; Engineering Change
Control ; Configuration Management ;Tooling, Human Resource, Plant
5. 8
Maintenance- Preventive Maintenance Control; Equipment Tracking;
Component Tracking; Plant Maintenance Calibration Tracking; Plant
Maintenance Warranty Claims Tracking, Quality Management Materials
Management- Pre-purchasing; Purchasing; Vendor Evaluation; Inventory
Management and Invoice Verification and Material Inspection
ERP – A Manufacturing Perspective: Role of Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP) in manufacturing, Computer Aided Design/Computer
Aided Manufacturing (CAD/CAM), Materials Requirement Planning
(MRP)-Master Production Schedule (MPS);Bill of Material
6. 8
(BOM);Inventory Records; Closed Loop MRP; Manufacturing Resource
Planning (MRP-II), Manufacturing and Production Planning Module of an
ERP System , Distribution Requirements Planning (DRP), Just-in-
Time(JIT) & KANBAN - Kanban; Benefits of JIT
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II) with Introduction to ERP; SCM; an CRM by Khalid
Sheikh, Publisher: McGraw-Hill
2. ERP and Supply Chain Management by Christian N. Madu, Publisher: CHI
3. Implementing SAP ERP Sales & Distribution by Glynn C. Williams, Publisher McGraw-Hill
4. The Impact of Enterprise Systems on Corporate Performance: A study of ERP, SCM, and CRM
System Implementations [An article from: Journal of Operations Management] by K.B. Hendricks;
V.R. Singhal; and J.K. Stratman, Publisher: Elsevier
1. Course Title: Management Information System(PE 710)Semester - VII
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
The Meaning and Role of Management Information System: Decision support
system, System Approach, The system view of Business, MIS organization within the
company.
1. 06
Management Organizational Theory and the System Approach: Development of
organizational theory, Management and organizational behavior, Management,
Information, and the system approach.
Technology of Information System: Introduction, Data Processing, Transaction
Processing, Application Processing, Information System Processing, TQM of
information system, Human Factors and user interface, Real Time Systems and Good
2. 08
Design, Strategic nature of IT Decisions, Evaluation and feasibility of IT Solutions.
Data Base Management: The Business setting, Data base management system,
Objective of a DBMS, Computer, Database Technical overview.
Decision Support Systems and Knowledge Management: Decision Support
Systems (DSS): Concept and Philosophy, Artificial Intelligence (AI) system,
3.
Knowledge based Expert System (KBES), DSS Application in E-enterprise. 05
Information Security: Threats and Management

Information Security: Threats and vulnerability, Controlling Security Threat and
Vulnerability, Managing security Threat in E-business, Disaster Management,
4. 05
Application system’s Security management, Information Security Management,
Measure of Information Security, Network Security, and Cyber Security.
Application Manufacturing Sector: Introduction, Personnel Management, Financial

5. Management, Production Management, Raw Materials Management, Marketing 04
Management.
Application in Service Sector: Introduction to Service sector, creating a distinctive
6. Service, Service Concept, Service Process Cycle and Analysis, Customer Service 06
Design, Service Management System, MIS Application in Service Industry.
Management of Global Enterprise: Enterprise Management System (EMS),
Enterprise Resource Planning(ERP) System, ERP Models and Modules, Benefits of
7. the ERP, ERP Product Evaluation, ERP Implementation, Supply Chain Management, 08
Information Management in SCM, Customer Relationship Management, Management
of Global Enterprise, EMS and MIS.
Total 42
1. Suggested Books:
1. Information system for modern management by Robert Murdick& James Claggett, PHI
Publication
2. Management Information Systems by James A. O’Brien, George M. Marakas, McGraw Hill

Education
3. Management Information System by Olson MIS- Rahul De, Wiley Publication

1. Course Title: Marketing Management (PE 711) Semester - VII
S. Contents Contact
No. Hours
1 Fundamentals of Marketing: Core concepts of marketing and Company orientation 6
towards the market place, Market Oriented Strategic Planning: Defining the
Mission, Defining SBUs, Business Portfolio Evaluation and assigning resources to
SBUs, Scanning the Marketing Environment: Analyzing trends in the components
of the company’s Macro & Micro environment.
2 Market segmentation, targeting and positioning: Purpose of Segmentation, Bases of 8
segmenting Consumer Markets - Demographic, Geographic, Psychographic &
Behavioral, Evaluating & Selecting Market Segments, Dealing with competition:
Identifying and analyzing competitors, Strategies for the Market leader, Follower,
Challenger
3 Analyzing Consumer Markets: Consumer behavior- Factors affecting consumer 6
behavior& consumer decision making process, Creating customer value,
satisfaction & loyalty: Customer perceived value, customer satisfaction, measuring
satisfaction, measuring customer life time value, CRM & building loyalty
4 Product Strategy: Classification of products, product levels, Analysis of product 5
line & product mix, Product Life Cycle: Concept, Strategies for Introduction,
Growth, Maturity & Decline Phase. Criticism of the Product Life Cycle.
5 Pricing Strategies: Selecting the pricing Objective, Determining demand, estimating 6

costs, analyzing competitors, selecting a pricing method, initiating & responding to
price changes, Integrated Marketing Communication: Meaning and Role of IMC,
designing effective communication program, Meaning and role of the elements of
communication mix, Leveraging Social Media for effective communication.
6 Distribution Strategies: Concept of Value Networks, Role of marketing channels. 8
Channel design decisions, channel management decisions. Channel Integration
through Vertical Marketing systems & Horizontal Marketing Systems, Retailing:
Classification of Store Formats, Types of Retail Formats, Retail positioning, Store
Location, Product assortment & Services, Price, promotion, Store Atmosphere
7 Managing services: Importance, Distinctive Characteristics, Green Marketing, 3
Rural Marketing and Consumer Protection - Introduction and significance
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Kotler, Keller, Koshy &Jha, Marketing Management A South Asian Perspective Prentice
Hall/Pearson, Fourteenth Edition,
2. RajanSaxena, Marketing Management, TMH, Fourth Edition,
3. Arun Kumar, N Meenakshi, Marketing Management, Vikas Publishing , 3rd Edition,
4. Bruce Walker &Stanton, Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw Hill
5. W.D. Perraut& E.J. Mc Carthy, Basic Marketing, TMH
6. Russel S. Winner, Marketing Management , Pearson
3. Course Title: Intelligent Manufacturing Systems(PE 712) Semester - VII
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Basic concepts of Artificial intelligence and expert systems, System
1. 06
Components ,System architecture and Data flow, System Operations
Knowledge based systems, knowledge representation ,knowledge acquisition and
2. optimization, Knowledge based approaches to design mechanical parts and 08
mechansims and design forautomated assembly
Knowledge based system for material selection, Intelligent process planning
3.
system 06
Intelligent system for equipment selection, Intelligent system for project

4. 06
management & factorymonitoring.
Intelligent system for Scheduling in manufacturing ,scheduling the shop floor ,

5. 08
Diagnosis & troubleshooting
The role of Artificial Intelligence in the factory of the future , Intelligent

6. 08
systems
Total 42
5. Suggested Books:
1. Intelligent Manufacturing Systems, Andrew Kussiak, Prentice Hall
2. Introducing Artificial Intelligence, Simons, G.L, NCC Pub
3. IntelligentScheduling,.by Monte Zweben, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers
1. Course Title: Finite Element Method (PE713) Semester - VII
Hours
1 Basic concepts: Variational and Residual methods-Introduction - Different 08
approaches in Finite Element Method - Direct Stiffness approach, simple examples
Variational approach, Elements of variational calculus – Euler’s-Lagrange equation,
Rayliegh Ritz method , Weighted Residual methods, Point Collation method, Sub
domain Collation method, Galerkins method - Steps involved in FEM.
2 Elements and Interpolation Functions: Elements and coordinate system – 07
Interpolation Polynomials - Linear elements Shape function - Analysis of simply
supported beam - Element and Global matrices - Two dimensional elements,
triangular and rectangular elements - Local and Natural Co-ordinate systems.
3 Finite Element Solution of Field Problems: Field problems – Finite element 07
formation of field problems - Classification of partial differential equations -
Quasiharmonic equation - Steady state problems - Eigen value problems -
Propogation problems - Examples, Torsional problem – Fluid flow and Heat transfer
problems - Acoustic vibrations – Application in manufacturing problems – metal
cutting and metal forming.
4 Finite Element Solution of Structural Problems: Solid mechanic problems – Finite 08
element formulation of solid mechanic problems - Axial force member - element
matrices for axial force members - Truss element analysis of pinned truss - Two
dimensional elasticity problems.
5 Higher Order Elements and Numerical Methods: Numerical method and computer 07
implementation –Numerical method in FEM and Computer implementation.
Evaluation of shape functions - One dimensional & triangular elements
6 Quadrilateral elements, Isoparametric elements - Numerical Integration, Gauss 05
Legendre quadrature - Solution of finite element equations - Cholesky
decomposition, Skyline storage - Computer implementation- Use of FEM software.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Larry J Segerlind ,“ Applied Finite Element Analysis”, John Wiley
2. Bathe, K.J., “Finite Element Procedures”, Prentice Hall
3. Huebner,K.H. and Thornton, E.A., “The Finite Element Method for Engineers”, John Wiley
4. Reddy,J.N., “Introduction to Finite Element Method”, McGraw Hill,
5. S.S.Rao, “The Finite element method”, Elsevier.
6. Zienkiewich . O.C., and Taylor . R.L., “The Finite Element Method”, McGraw Hill
1. Course Title: Modern Optimization Technique(PE 714) Semester - VII
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
Dynamic Programming: Multistage Decision Processes, Concept of Suboptimization
1. and Principle of Optimality, Computational Procedure in Dynamic Programming 08
Continuous Dynamic Programming.
Integer Programming: Gomory’s Cutting Plane Method ,Integer Polynomial
2. Programming, Branch and Bound Method, Sequential Linear Discrete 07
Programming, Generalized Penalty Function Method
Stochastic Programming: Random Variables and Probability Density Functions,
3.
Stochastic Linear Programming, Stochastic Nonlinear Programming 05
Optimal Control and Optimality Criteria Methods: Calculus of Variations,
4. 05
Optimal Control Theory, Optimality Criteria Methods
Modern Methods of Optimization: Genetic Algorithms, Particle Swarm

5. Optimization, Optimization of Fuzzy Systems, Neural-Network-Based 10
Optimization
Practical Aspects of Optimization: Sensitivity of Optimum Solution to

6. 07
Problem Parameters, Multilevel Optimization, Multi objective Optimization
Total 42
3. Suggested Books:
1. Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice, S.S. Rao ,New Age International Pvt
Ltd.,
2. Operation Research by Hamdy A. Taha, Pearson publication
3. Optimization for Engineering Design Algorithms and Examples, K. Deb, Prentice-Hall of
India Pvt. Ltd
4. Modern heuristic optimization techniques, Kwang Y.Lee, Mohammed A.ElSharkawi
John Wiley and Sons,
5. Dynamic Programming and Optimal Control,Dimitri P. Bertsekas,Athena Scientific
6. PrabhakarPai, Operation Research, Oxford University Press
7. Engineering Optimization, A.Ravindran, K.M.Ragsdell, G.V.Reklaitis, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd
NAME OF DEPT./CENTRE: DEPARTMENT OF PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
1. Course Title: Mechatronics (PE715) Semester - VII
Sr. Contents Contact
No. Hours
1. Introduction: Definition of mechatronics, measurement system, control systems, 2

microprocessor based controllers, mechatronics approach.
2. Sensors and Transducers: Sensors and transducers, performance terminology, 7
photoelectric transducers, flow transducers, optical sensors and transducers,
semiconductor lasers, selection of sensors, mechanical / electrical switches,
inputting data by switches.
3. Actuators: Actuation systems, pneumatic and hydraulic systems, process control 5
valves, rotary actuators, mechanical actuation systems, electrical actuation
systems.
4. Signal Conditioning: Signal conditioning, filtering digital signal, multiplexers, 5
data acquisition, digital signal processing, pulse modulation, data presentation
systems.
5. Microprocessors and Microcontrollers: Microcomputer structure, 8
microcontrollers, applications, programmable logic controllers.
6. Modeling and System Response: Mathematical models, bond graph models, 7
mechanical, electrical, hydraulic and thermal systems, dynamic response of
systems, transfer function and frequency response, closed loop controllers.
7. Design and Mechatronics: Input/output systems, computer based modular design, 7
system validation, remote monitoring and control, designing, possible design
solutions, detailed case studies of mechatronic systems used in photocopier,
automobile, robots.
Total 42
3. Suggested Books
1. Bolton, W., “Mechatronics”, Longman.
2. Alciatore, D. G. and Histrand, M. B., “Introduction to Mechatronics”, Tata McGraw Hill
3. Shetty, D. and Richard, A.K., “Mechatronics System Design”, PWS Pub. Boston
4. Mahalik, N., “Principles, Concept and Applications: Mechatronics”, Tata McGraw.
5. Bishop, R.H. “Mechatronics Handbook”, CRC Press.
6. Bolton, W., “Mechatronics: A Multidisciplinary Approach”, 4th Ed., Prentice Hal
7. Merzouki R., Samantaray A. K., Pathak P.M., Bouamama B. Ould, Intelligent Mechatronic
Systems: Modeling, Control and Diagnosis, Springer.

6. Course Title: Project Engineering (PE716) Semester - VII
Contact
S. No. Contents
Hours
The scope of project, characteristics of a project, stages of a project, Project
1. 08
constraints, Project Management structures, Responsibilities of project manager,
Project productivity. The anatomy of a project. Environmental considerations in

2. 07
project evaluation.
Main issues and secondary issues in feasibility study, Social cost benefit
3. analysis, Commissioning, Evaluation of competing projects. Budgetary aspects and
05
considerations of a project.
Industrial/Engineering projects, R & D Projects, Turnkey projects, Network
4. Modeling of a project, Deterministic & probabilistic activity networks, 05
Line of Balance, Time-cost trade-off in a project, Mega projects.
5. Project scheduling techniques, PERT, CPM Models. 08
Project monitoring techniques, Performance and Cost Evaluation (PACE), Project
6. Staffing Requirements, Resource leveling. Project Documentation, Computer 9
Application in Project Engineering.
Total 42
8. Suggested Books:
1. Elements of Project Management, K. Nagarajan, New Age International
2. Production and Operation Management, S.N Chary, Tata McGraw Hill
3. Information Technology Project Management, Kathy Schwable, Cengage Learning
Australia
4. Guidelines for Project Evaluation, Pratha Dasgupta, Amartya Sen, & Stephen Marglin,
United Nations,
5. Strategic Project Management Made Simple: Practical Tools for Leaders and
Teams,Terry Schmidt
6 Effective Project Management: Robert K. Wysocki ,Traditional, Agile, Extreme, 5th
Edition
7 Project Engineering: The Essential Toolbox for Young Engineers, Frederick Plummer
8. Project Management Panneerselvam R, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
Modern Optimization Lab Sessional (PE 701P) Semester-VI

Sl
Topic
No.
1. Design of Continuous Beams using dynamic programming method.
2. Optimal Design of a Gear Train using dynamic programming method
3. Optimization using Genetic Algorithms
4. Optimization using particle swarm optimization
5. Optimization using Ant Colony Optimization
6. Optimization using Simulated Annealing
7. Multi objective Optimization using Genetic Algorithms
8. Multi objective Optimization using particle swarm optimization

DEPARTMENT OF METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING
BIT, SINDRI, DHANBAD
5th Semester Course Structure
Sl. No. Course No. Subject L T P Credit
1. MT 501 Material Characterization (Professional Core Course -I) 4 1 0 4

2. MT 502 Degradation of Materials (Professional Core Course -II) 3 1 0 3
3. MT 503 Heat Treatment of Metallic Materials (PCC-III) 3 1 0 3
4. Professional Elective – I (Any One of the Following)
I. MT 504 Physics of Materials 3 1 0 3
II. MT 505 Casting and Solidification of Materials 3 1 0 3
III. MT 506 Mechanical working of Materials 3 1 0 3
IV MT 507 Unit process of Extraction 3 1 0 3
V MT 508 Non-ferrous Extractive Metallurgy 3 1 0 3
5. Open Elective – I (Any One of the Following)
I. MT 509 Powder Metallurgy 3 1 0 3
II MT 510 Deformation Theory of Metals 3 1 0 3
III MT 511 Nuclear Materials 3 1 0 3
IV MT 512 Ceramic and Polymer Materials 3 1 0 3
V MT 513 Materials Technology 3 1 0 3
Laboratory / Sessionals
1. MT 501P Laboratory-I (Material Characterization Lab) 0 0 3 1
2. MT 502P Laboratory- II (Corrosion Lab) 0 0 3 1
3. MT 503P Laboratory-III (Heat Treatment Lab) 0 0 3 1
4. MT 504P Laboratory -IV (Physics of Material Lab) 0 0 3 1
5. DS 501 General Proficiency / Seminar 0 0 2 2
Total Credit 22
Materials Characterization (MT 501)
Course objectives -
To prepare students for careers in metallurgical engineering where knowledge of characterization
techniques used to measure thermal properties, metallography, surface morphology, chemical
properties, crystal structure etc. of the materials.
Course Detail -
Module 1 - Thermal characterization techniques: - Theory, Instrumentation and Application of
Thermo gravimetric Analysis (TGA), Differential thermal analysis (DTA), Differential scanning
Calorimetry (DSC). (9 L)
Module 2 - Diffraction method: Principle of X-ray diffraction methods, Brags Law, determination
of crystal structure, lattice parameter, crystallite size. (8L)
Module 3 - Optical microscopy techniques: Metallurgical Microscopes, Image formation,
resolving power, numerical aperture, empty magnification, depth of focus, components of
microscopes, important lens defects and their correction. (10 L)
Module 4 - Electron microscopy: Interaction of electrons with matter, Construction and Working
of TEM, SEM with their merits, limitations and applications, modes of operation, Electron beam.
(10 L)
Module 5 -Advance Microscopic technique:- Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM), Scanning
Tunneling Microscopy. (5 L)
Suggested References/Books -
1. Elton N Kaufmann, Characterization of Materials, Willey Publishers, 2003.
2. Ruth E. Whan, Material Characterization, Metals Handbook, Vol 10, ASM, 1986.
3. B.D. Cullity, Elements of X-ray diffraction, Pearson Education, 2014.
4. Douglas B. Murphy and Michael Davidson, Fundamentals of Light Microscopy and
Electronic Imaging, Wiley-Blackwell, 2012.
Course Outcomes:- After attending this course, students will have
CO-1: understanding of the basics of common important characterization techniques used in

Materials/Metallurgical Engineering field.
CO-2: understanding of the experimental and theoretical basics of techniques used to measure
important thermal properties
CO-3: understanding of the basics of techniques used to measure the structural and morphological
properties viz electron microscopy, XRD and optical microscopy.
CO-4: understanding at both theoretical and practical level at important characterization tools.
Degradation of Materials (MT 502)

Course Objective-
To introduce students with fundamentals of corrosion, its thermodynamics-kinetic aspect, methods

to measure and control it.
Detailed contents
Module 1: Introduction, Definition, Forms of environmental degradation, Classification of

corrosion Importance of corrosion studies and cost of corrosion. (4L)
Module 2: Corrosion principles: Electrochemical aspects, Thermodynamic aspects of
corrosion – Gibbs energy and electrochemical potential (4L)
Module 3: Metal-Electrolyte Interface, EMF series, Nernst relationship and Pourbaix
Diagram (6L)
Module 4. Kinetic aspects of corrosion: Corrosion rate, Current density, Exchange current
density, Mixed potential theory, Polarization and Passivation. (6L)
Module 5: Forms of corrosion: Uniform Corrosion, Localized Corrosion; Pitting; Crevice
Corrosion, Galvanic Corrosion and Protection; Concentration Cells, Intergranular Corrosion;
De-alloying, environmentally assisted failures (SCC, Hydrogen embrittlement; corrosion
fatigue), Erosion; Fretting. Experimental methods to identify corrosion susceptibility (9L)
Module 6: Corrosion Measurements and Corrosion Control: Exposure studies,
Electrochemical work bench, DC and AC methods of testing, Polarization measurements-
Corrosion rate assessment by Tafel’s extrapolation method, Linear polarization resistance
(LPR).Coatings, Inhibitors, Cathodic and Anodic protection. (9L)
Suggested References/Books-
1. Corrosion Engineering, Mars. G. Fontana, McGraw Hill Education, 2017

2. Electrochemical Techniques in Corrosion Science and Engineering. R.G. Kelly, J.R.
Scully, D.W. Shoesmith, R.G. Buchheit, CRC Press., 2002
3. Corrosion: Metal / Environment Reactions, Volume 1, L.L. Shreir, R.A. Jarman, G.T.
Burstein, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1994.
4. Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, Denny A. Jones, Pearson, 1995.
Course Outcomes- After attending this course, students
CO-1: will know importance of studying corrosion and its effect of ferrous and non ferrous
metals/alloys.
CO-2: will have understanding of the thermodynamic and kinetic aspects of corrosion
CO-3: will have theoretical and practical knowledge of various way to measure and control
corrosion rate.
Heat Treatment of Metallic Materials (MT 503)

Course objective-
To impart the knowledge of various heat treatment techniques employed commercially primarily
for steel and other important non ferrous metals/alloys.
Module 1 : Objective and variables of heat treatments, Limitation of Fe-Fe3C Phase Diagram.
(3L)
Module 2 : Formation of Austenite, TTT and CCT Diagram, Types of TTT Diagram. Application
of TTT Diagrams (Martempering, Austempering and Patenting). (5L)
Module 3 : Annealing (Full, Homogenising, Spheroidisation and Stress-relieving annealing),
Normalising, Comparison of Annealing and Normalising. (6L)
Module 4 : Hardening and Tempering of plain and alloy steels, Hardening (Objective,
Austenitizing temperature and Internal stresses (4L)
Module 5 : Quenching Mediums and Methods, Retained austenite and Defects in hardening.
(3L)
Module 6 : Tempering of steels, Aims and stages of tempering, Effects of Carbon and alloying
elements, Tempering of alloy steels and Multiple tempering, Embrittlement during tempering.
(4L)
Module 7 : Hardenability and its determination, Factors affecting hardenability. Case and Surface
hardening: Carburising, Nitriding and Carbonitriding, Induction and Laser Hardening. (6L)
Module 8 : Heat treatments of general engineering steels: Spring, Bearing steels, Tool steels,
HSLA steel and Maraging steels, Dual phase steels and Stainless steels. (5L)
Module 9 : Heat Treatments of Al-alloys, Cu-alloys and Ti-alloys. Age-Hardening: Types
andsequence of precipitates, Mechanism and kinetics of precipitation. Heat-treatment defects and
their rectification. (5L)
Suggested References/Books:
1. B. Zakharov, Heat Treatment of Metals, CBS Publishers.

2. Principles of Heat Treatment of Steels, ASM.
3. R Kumar, Physical Metallurgy of Iron and steels, Asia Publishing House.
4. G. Krauss,Steels: Processing, Structure and Performance, ASM International.
5. K E Thelning, Steel and Its Heat Treatment, Butterworth.
6. W C Leslie, The Physical Metallurgy of Steels, MeGraw-Hill International.
Course Outcomes: After attending this course, students
CO-1: will have comprehension of the fundamentals and importance of heat treatment.
CO-2: will be able to optimise the heat treatment processes used in laboratory as well as in steel
industry.
CO-3: will be able to process/product problems where heat treatment is involved in the
manufacturing steel industry, design and implement correct heat treatment process.
Physics of materials (MT 504)
Course Objective-
To study the basics of crystallography; semiconductor physics, magnetic materials and XRD.
Module 1: Crystallography: Crystalline and amorphous structures, Elements of Crystal Symmetry,

Symmetry elements and axes, two, three, four and six fold Symmetry, Review of atomic bonding.
(7L)
Module 2: Order-Disorder Transformation: Ordering, Degrees of long range and short range
ordering, Anti phase Domain, Super lattice, Elements of Super lattice Theories, Properties and
Applications. (6L)
Module 3: Electron Theory of Materials: Heisenberg’s uncertainty Principle, Schrodinger’s

equation. Free Electron Theory, Zone Theory, Density of States, Fermi Energy Level, Application
of Zone. (6L)
Module 4: Theory to Alloy Phases; Conductors and Insulators, Semiconductors, P & N – Type
Semiconductors.
(4L)
Module 5: Magnetic Properties: Dia, Para and Ferro-magnetism, Domain Theory of

Ferromagnetism Antiferromagnetism and Ferrites, Hysteris loop, Soft Magnetic Materials, Hard
Magnetic Materials, Super Conductivity, BCS Theory, Type-I & Type-II Super Conductors. (10L)
Module 6: Elements of X-ray Diffraction: X-ray, Bragg’s Law, Laue, Rotating Crystal and
Powder Methods, Structure Determination with the help of X-ray.
(8L)
1. W. Hume Rothery and B. R. Coles – Atomic Theory for Students of Metallurgy. The Institute
of Metals (London) (1988).
2. R. E. Reid – Hill, Physical Metallurgy Principles, East – West Press Pvt. Ltd., (New Delhi),
(2004).
Supplementary Reading:
1. S. L. Kakani and A. Kakani, Material Science, New Age International Publishes Ltd., (New
Delhi) (2004).
2. R. A. Higgins, Engineering Metallurgy, Standard Publishes Distributors (Delhi) (1998).
3. M. S. Vijaya, G. Rangarajan, Materials Science, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited (New Delhi) (2004).
4. V. Raghavan, Material Science and Engineering, Princep Hall (New Delhi) (2003).
5. C. S. Barrett and T. B. Massalski, Structure of Metals, Euresia Publishing House (Pvt.) Ltd.
Couse Outcomes- After attending this course, students
CO-1: will have understanding of the basics of theory of crystallography.

CO-2: will have understanding of the basics of physics of semiconductors.
CO-3: will have knowledge of the basics of Magnetism and magnetic materials.
CO-4: will have understanding of the basics of XRD.
Casting and solidification of materials (MT 505)
Course objective:
This course is mainly intended to introduce and explain various moulding- casting
techniques and equipment used. Principle of solidification and defects in castings and
their remedies are also dealt in details.
Detailed Syllabus:
Module1: Introduction: Casting as a process of Manufacturing. Moulding Processes,
Equipments and Mechanization: Different types of Moulds, Moulding Materials and
Moulding processes, Pattern and other mould making equipment,for actingon moulds,
Mould factors in metal flow, Moulding factors in casting design. (8L)
Module2: Different types of binders, mould and core-makings. Melting of Metals and
Alloys for casting: Brief mention of various melting units, melting and post melting
treatments, melting practices as adopted for a few metals and alloys such as Al ,Cu, steels,
cast irons. (8L)
Module 3: Solidification of Metals and Alloys: Nucleation, Growth, Role of alloy

constitution, Thermal conditions and inherent nucleation and growth condition,
Significance and practical control of cast structure. (8L)
Module 4: Principles of Gating and Risering: Feeding characteristics of alloys, Types of

Gates and Risers, Time of solidification and Chowrinov rule, Wlodawer system for feeder
head calculations, gating ratio, concept of directionality in solidification, Yield of casting
and prescription for its augmentation. (8L)
Module 5: Special casting Methods: Investment casting, Die casting, Centrifugal

casting, Full mould casting, Vacuum sealed casting. Casting Defects: A detailed analysis
of casting defects. Their causes and prescription of remedial measures. (10L)
Suggested Refernces/Books:
1. P. R. Beeley, Foundry Technology, Newnes-Buttterworths,2001.

2. P. D. Webster, Fundamentals of Foundry Technology, Portwillis press, Red hill,1980.
Supplementary Reading:
1. P. C. Mukherjee, Fundamentals of Metal casting Technology, Oxford IBH,1980.
2. R.W.Hein, C.R.LoperandP.C.Rosenthal,PrinciplesofMetalcasting,McGrawHill,1976.
Course Outcomes-
CO-1: To study the various steps in foundry viz molding, sand preparation, core/pattern
making, gating system etc.
CO-2: To study the solidification of alloys and metals and same under industrial conditions.
CO-3: To study advanced and other special casting techniques besides traditional sand casting
techniques.
Mechanical working of materials (MT 506)
Course objective:
Objective of metal working processes are to provide the desired shape and size,
under the action of externally applied forces in metals
Detailed syllabus :
Module 1: Forming processes, effect of metallurgical structure & strain-rate, cold

working, recovery, recrystallisation and grain growth, hot working, Stress, Strain fields,
strain energy & line tension of a dislocation, Forces on and between dislocations,
Dislocation reactions in FCC, BCC and HCP crystals. (8L)
Module 2: Dislocation intersections, Origin, multiplication and observation of
dislocations, plasticity of single crystal of FCC, BCC and HCP structures, Twinning,
deformation mechanisms of poly-crystalline metals, effect of grain boundary, solute atoms
and second phase particles. (9L)
Module 3: Yield point phenomena and strain ageing, Forging processes, forging
equipment, Forging in plane strain, Open and closed die forging, Forging defects, Rolling
processes, Rolling mills. (7L)
Module 4: Rolling of bars and shapes, Forces and geometrical relationships in rolling,
Simplified analysis of rolling load, rolling variables, problems and defects in rolled
products, Theories of cold and hot rolling, torque and horsepower. (8L)
Module 5:Extrusion processes, extrusion equipment, Deformation and defects in
extrusion, analysis of the extrusion process, Extrusion of tubing and production of
seamless pipes and tubes, Rod,wire and tubedrawing, Deep drawing and redrawing,
Common defects in sheet metal formed products. (8L)
1. G. E. Dieter: Mechanical Metallurgy, McGraw Hill Book Company,1988.
2. C.J.Richardson,et.al:Worked Examples inMetal Working,Institute of Metals,London,1985.
3. ASM Hand Book, Vol. 14: Forming and Forging, ASM,1988.

CO-1: will be able to understand the basisc of dislocation theory and plastic deformation
under this theory
CO-2: will have the knowledge of basics of forging tools and operations.
CO-3: will have knowledge industrial metal working processes viz rolling, extrusion, deep
drawing etc.
Unit process of extraction (MT 507)
Course Objective-
To impart the knowledge of Pyrometallurgy and its various steps viz, roasting, Calcination
Smelting etc.,Basics of hydrometallurgy and electrometallurgy.
Module 1: Principles of Unit processes: Pyrometallurgy processes: Calcination, Principles and

types of roasting (Oxidising roasting, Sulphating roasting, Chloridising roasting), Roasting
equipment and methods (Multiple hearth, Flash roasting, Fluidized bed roasting,sintering roasting
), Predominance area diagrams. Ellingham diagrams for oxides and sulphides. (8L)
Module 2: Pyrometallurgical Processes: Reduction and smelting using Blast furnace and Electric
arc furnace, Flash smelting, Converting, Refining processes such as Fire refining, Liquation, Zone
Refining, Distillation and Vacuum Refining. (10 L)
Module 3: Pyro-metallurgical processes using vacuum, reduction of halide by another element.

Matte smelting, Principles of metallothermic reduction of oxides and halides . (2L)
Module 4: Hydrometallurgical Processes: Hydrometallurgical Process, Advantages and

disadvantages of hydrometallurgy, flow sheet of hydrometallurgical steps. (2 L)
Module 5: Leaching: Leaching, Various types of Leaching such as Pressure leaching and Bacterial
leaching, Effect of various factors on bacteria, leaching methods such as In-situ, Heap, and
Percolation leaching,Solution purification methods (Recovery of metal from leach liquor) such
asIon exchange ,Solvent extraction,and precipitation Cementation. (10 L)
Module 6: Electrometallurgical Processes: Principles of electrometallurgy, Faraday’s laws of

Electrolysis, Electrolysis of Aqueous solutions ,Electrolysis of fused sants and Molten salts
processes, Electrolysis of fused salts, Electrode potential, Applications of electrode potentials,
Kinetics of electrode processes, Electrolytic Cell, Cells and thermodynamic
relations,Concentration Polarization, Elementary theory of Electrolytic decomposition.
Electroplating process. (10 L)
1. C. Bodsworth, Extraction and Refining of Metals, CRC Press, 1994.

2. A. Ghose and H. S. Ray, Principles of Extractive Metallurgy, Wiley Eastern, 1991.
3. H. S. Ray, R. Sridhar, K. P. Abraham, Extraction of Non-ferrous Metals, Affiliated East-West
Press Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi-1985.
4. T. Rosenquist, Principles of Extractive Metallurgy, McGraw hill, 1974.
5. R. D. Pehike, Unit Processes of Extractive Metallurgy, American Elsevier, N. Y., 1968.

CO-1: will have knowledge of the principles of fire refining, liquation, distillation refining and
zone refining.
CO-2: will have knowledge of principles of electro-metallurgy.
CO-3: will have understanding of the metal recovery of a hydrometallurgical process.
CO-4: will have knowledge of the percent reduction of metal from its ore by pyro-metallurgical
route.
Non Ferrous Extractive Metallurgy (MT 508)
Course Objective- To introduce students with the thermodynamic fundamental for extraction of
non ferrous metals through various commercial routes and knowledge of extraction common
industrial metals
Module-1: Brief Introduction of Non Ferrous Ores ore & mineral; Thermodynamics & kinetics of
metal extraction from oxides , sulphides & other forms: metal slag equilibria, Ellingham Diagram
for oxides and sulphides (20L)
Module-2: Unit processes in Pyrometallurgy: Classification and design aspects of roasting
process and equipment, calcinations, different types of smelting, refining, Predominance diagram,
Extraction of common metals, Cu, Ni, Zn, Pb, Al, Au & Ag, Cr,Ti, etc and important rare earth
metals; Secondary Metals extraction from waste products & slag. (10L)
Module-3: Unit processes in Hydrometallurgy: E-pH diagram, Leaching, Solvent extraction, Ion
Exchange, precipitation, cementation, Unit processes in Electrometallurgy: Electrowining,
Electrorefining, Cell potential, polarization, Electrolytic production of metals from aqueous &
Fused salt electrolytes. (12L)
Suggested reference/books-
Extraction of Non-ferrous Metals, H. S. Ray, R. Sridhar and K. P. Abraham, Affiliated East-West
Press. 2. Principles of Extractive Metallurgy -A. Ghosh and H. S. Ray, John Wiley & Sons. 3.
Extractive Metallurgy by Joseph Newton, John Wiley & Sons. 4. Principles of Extractive
Metallurgy., T. Rosenquist, McGraw Hill 5. Metallurgy of the Non ferrous metals, by W.H.
Dennis, Pitman, London 1963. 6. Nuclear Reactor Fuel Elements – Metallurgy and Fabrications –
Kaufmann 7. C.G. Krishnadas Nair, Non-ferrous Metals strategy cum source book, IIM
publication. 8. R.Bhimarao, K. Srinivasrao and Vibhuti N. Mishra, Non-ferrous Metals in the New
Millennium, 2001.

CO-1: would be able to understand the fundamentals of thermodynamic reactions required for
extraction, stability of various phases etc
CO-2: will have knowledge extraction of common industrially important metals
CO-3: will have understanding of basics of electrometallurgy and hydrometallurgy
Powder metallurgy (MT 509)
Objectives of the course:

Technical knowledge and understanding of powder methodology salient features of the process
contrast to others .Analysis of the problem and providing the solution.
Detailed contents
Module 1: Powder production: Mechanical, Chemical and Electrochemical methods, Atomization
and other emerging processes, High energy ball milling, mechanical alloying and applications,
self-propagating high temperature synthesis. Performance Evaluation of different Processes,
Design and Selection of Process. (8L)
Module 2: Powder characterization: Particle Size, Shape, Distribution and morphology, Tap
density, green density, Inter-particle Friction, flowability and surface Area, Particle porosity.
Compressibility. (8L)
Module 3:Blending and mixing of powders-equipment, Lubricants & Binders, Particle Packing
Modifications. Powder compaction: Powder Compaction: die compaction, process variables,
density distribution during compaction, Isostatic Pressing, Cold and hot isostatic pressing,
Injection Molding, Powder Extrusion, Slip Casting, Tape Casting. (8L)
Module 4: Sintering: Theory of Sintering, Sintering mechanisms, Sintering Variables, Sintering

furnaces and atmospheres, Pressure less sintering, Liquid Phase Sintering, and Sintering of Single
& Mixed Phase Powders. Modern Sintering Techniques: spark plasma sintering, microwave
sintering. (8L)
Module 5: Defects in P/M route and their control, treatment of powder metallurgy Components.
(2L)
Module 6: Testing and quality control, metallic and ceramic P/M components, application of P/M
products. Applications of Powder Metallurgy: Filters, Tungsten Filaments, Self-Lubricating
Bearings, Porous Materials, ODS Alloys, Biomaterials and Case Studies. (8L)
Suggested books
1. Powder metallurgy: science, technology and materials –Anish Upadhyaya, G.S.Upadhyaya,
Universities Press (2011).
2. Power metallurgy: science, technology and materials – P.C. Angelo, R. Subramanian, Prentice
Hall India Learning Pvt. Ltd., (2008).
3. Materials and processes in manufacturing, by De GARMO, BLACK &
KOHSER,PHI,Publication.
Course Outcomes
After attending this course, the student will be able to
CO-1: Understand different stages of manufacturing using the powder metallurgy route
CO-2: Describe characteristics of a P/M components.
CO-3: Explain the causes, identification & remedies of defects that the arises during working in
this field.
CO-4: Analyze the material and design needs of P/M components.
Deformation theory of metals (MT 510)

Course Objectives-
To impart the knowledge of basics of elasticity and plasticity; deformation behavior of materials
through dislocation theory.
Course Content
Module 1 : Elastic Behaviour: Concept of elasticity in three dimensions, Generalised Hook’s Law,
Plane stress and plane strain state, Strain energy, Stress intensity factor, Concept of finite element
method. (8L)
Module 2 : Theory of Plasticity: Flow curve; Yield criteria, Plastic stress strain relationship. (8L)
Module 3 : Dislocation Theory: Line defects, Deformation by slip, Theoretical shear strength,
Critical resolved shear stress, Burger’s vector and dislocation loop, Edge, Screw, Mixed and Partial
dislocations, Dislocation reactions, Dislocations in FCC and BCC crystals, Cross slip and climb
of dislocations, Interaction of dislocations, Energy of dislocations, Forces on dislocations,
Dislocation sources and multiplication of dislocations. Dislocation pile-ups and Bauschinger’s
effect. (8L)
Module 4 : Strain hardening in single crystals and polycrystals, Yield point phenomenon, Strain
aging, dynamic strain aging, Strengthening mechanisms. (8L)
Module 5 : Deformation Twinning: Classification, Slip vs. twinning, Stress for twinning. (10L)
Suggested Reference/ Books:
1. G. E. Dieter, Mechanical Metallurgy, McGraw Hill Publication, 1988.

2. D. Hull and DC Bacon, Introduction to Dislocation, Elsevier Butterworth – Heinemann, Pub.,
4th Ed. (2001).
3. Wole Soboyejo, Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials, Marcel Dekker Publication,
2003.
4. R. W. Hertzberg, Deformation and Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials, John Wiley
& Sons Publication, 1995.
5. R. E. Reed–Hill, Physical Metallurgy Principals, Litton Education Publication, 2004
CO-1: will have comprehension of mechanism of deformation of materials.

CO-2: will have understanding of dislocation theory, strain hardening, strenghthening mechanism.
CO-3: will have knowledge of deformation theory through finite element method.
Nuclear materials (MT 511)
Course Objectives
Understanding the basics of radiation theory; concept of fission and fusion of reactions;
mechanism to select materials for nuclear reactor; present and future challenges of nuclear energy.
Course Content:
Module 1 :Nuclear radiation, microscopic flux and microscopic cross-section, attenuation of

radiation fission, elastic collision slowing down infinite multiplication constant.(15L)
Module 2: Fuel and breeder materials manufacture and properties.(12L)
Module 3: Structural materials, Radiation damage in fuel elements, Structural coolant and control
rod materials, and Nuclear power, present and future states.(15L)
Suggested Reference Books:

1. Bodansky, Nuclear Energy: Principles, Practices and Projects, Springer, 2004.
2. C.A. Hampel, Rare Metals Handbook, Robert E. Krieger Publishing Company, 1971.
3. S. Glasstone and A. Sesonke, Nuclear Reactor Engineering, CBS Publishers and Distributors,
Delhi, 2003.
CO-1: Will hold the comprehension of concept of radiation theory.

CO-2: basics of fission and fusion of reactions.
CO-3: Will be able to justify the criteria to choose materials for nuclear reactor.
CO-4: Will understand the present and future challenges of nuclear energy.
Ceramic and polymer materials (MT 512)
Course objective:
Develop an awareness of careers related to various areas in ceramics. Also to provide the
basic building blocks of polymer science by imparting fundamental knowledge of
molecular weight, polymerization mechanism, polymer reactions and environmental
awareness & polymer science.
Detailed Syllabus:
Module1: Introduction of ceramics, Common ceramics crystal structures:

silicates,clay,minerals, graphite and carbides. Classification and applications of ceramics
materials. Raw materials preparation, Different structural ceramics: their properties and
applications. (8L)
Module2: Mechanical behaviour of different structural ceramics-brittleness of

ceramics,Concept of fracture toughness and different toughness measurement techniques,
Elastic modulus, Strength measurement, Weibull theory. (8L)
Module 3: Basic concepts in polymer science, various polymerization mechanisms,

polymerization techniques and molecular weight. Free radical polymerization: initiators,
chain transfer, inhibition and retardation; Cationic and anionic polymerization: initiators;
Kinetics of free radical, cationic and anionic polymerization reactions, an overview of
solid phase and gas phase polymerization. (8L)
Module 4: Polycondensation, polyaddition and ring-opening polymerization, need for

stoichiometric control, gelation, crosslinking, Carother’s equation,kinetics of step
polymerization, an overview of interfacial and melt polymerization technique. (8L)
Module 5: Step copolymerization: introduction, types, methods of synthesis; Chain

copolymerization: introduction, types, copolymerization equation, monomer reactivity
ratio, applicability of copolymerization equation, types of copolymerization behavior,
sequence length distribution, Q-e scheme; Commercial applications of
copolymerization.(10L)
1. W. D. Kingery, H. K. Bowen, D. R. Uhlmann, Introduction to Ceramics, Wiley
Publishers, 1986.
2. Randall German, John Wiley & Sons, Powder Metallurgy,2006.
3. M. N. Rahaman, Marcel Dekker, Ceramic processing & Sintering,1995.
CO-1: will have understanding of importance ceramics, their crystal structure and major
applications.
CO-2: will be knowing the important mechanical properties, parameters and their measurement
for various applications.
CO-3: will be able to understand the basic mechanism happening in major polymerization
reaction, their thermodynamics and kinetics.
Materials technology (MT 513)

Course Objectives
Understanding the basics of material science; the several heat treatment processes, the several
characterization techniques, radiographic testing of materials.
Course Content:
Module 1 : Metallic Materials: Concept of phase diagram crystallography and microstructure,

Steels, Different types of Steel, Iron-Iron Carbide phase diagram, TTT and CCT diagrams. (5L)
Module 2 : Heat-Treatment of steels: Annealing, Normalizing, Hardening and Tempering of
steels, Plain carbon steels and their applications. (5L)
Module 3 : Alloy steels: High speed steels, stainless steels, HSLA; (5L)
Module 4 : Non Ferrous alloys: Al alloys, Cu alloys, applications of these alloys, Magnesium
alloys, Titanium alloys and Zirconium alloys. (5L)
Module 5 : Electrical and Magnetic properties of materials: Band Structure, Conductors,
Insulators, semiconductors, superconductors, p-n junction and application of these properties. (5L)
Module 6 : Engineering polymers and composites: Thermoplastics, Thermosetting polymers,
processing of composites, Hybrid composites. Ceramics: Different ceramics available, Properties
of ceramics, Crystal structure, Overview of Ceramic Applications, Processing of ceramics,
Densification and sintering, (5L)
Module 7 : Mechanical properties and characterization. Mechanical Characterization: Tension
test, Fatigue test, Creep test, Hardness, Impact Tests, Fracture of materials, Modes of fracture. Non
Destructive Testing: (5L)
Module 8 : Ultrasonic Radiography, X-ray diffraction, Crystal Structure, Bragg’s law, Liquid
penetrant testing, Ultrasonic testing, Electromagnetic testing, Acoustic emission testing, Magnetic
resonance imaging and NMR spectroscopy. (5L)
Suggested Reference/Books:
1. Van Vlack L H, Elements of Material Science and Engineering, ISBN: 8131706001 ISBN-
13: 9788131706008, Addison Wesley,6th edition, 1967.
2. W. F. Smith, Principles of Materials Science and Engineering (McGraw Hill Series in
Materials Science and Engineering), McGraw-Hill College; 3rd edition (1995) ISBN-10:
0070592411. ISBN-13: 978-0070592414
3. William D. Jr. Callister, Wiley, Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction, 7th
edition (2006) ISBN-10: 0471736961.
Course Outcomes- After attending this course, students will have,
CO-1: Understanding the basics of material science.

CO-2: Study the several alloys and heat treatment processes.
CO-3: Understanding the several characterization techniques and testing.
CO-4: Study the radiographic testing of materials.
DEPARTMENT OF METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING
BIT, SINDRI, DHANBAD
6th Semester Course Structure
Sl. No. Course No. Subject L T P Credit
1. MT 601 Iron Making (Professional Core Course-I) 4 1 0 4

Material Forming Technology (Professional Core
2. MT 602 Course-II) 3 1 0 3
3. MT 603 Non-ferrous Technology (Professional Core -III) 3 1 0 3
4. Professional Elective – II (Any One of the Following)
I. MT 604 Mechanical Behaviour of Materials 3 1 0 3
II. MT 605 Creep Fatigue and Fracture 3 1 0 3
III. MT 606 Experimental Techniques in Materials Engineering 3 1 0 3
IV MT 607 Computational Material Engineering 3 1 0 3
5. Open Elective – II (Any One of the Following)
I. MT 608 Joining of Materials 3 1 0 3
II MT 609 Nano Science and Nano Technology 3 1 0 3
III MT 610 Surface Engineering 3 1 0 3
IV MT 611 Advanced Materials 3 1 0 3
V MT 612 X- Ray Difraction and Electron Microscopy 3 1 0 3
Laboratory / Sessionals
1. MT 601P Laboratory -I (Extractive Metallurgy –I Lab.) 0 0 3 1
2. MT 602P Laboratory -II (Mechanical Testing Lab.) 0 0 3 1
3. MT 603P Laboratory -III ( Extractive Metallurgy-II Lab.) 0 0 3 1
4. MT 607P Laboratory -IV (Computational Engineering. Lab.) 0 0 3 1
5. IN 601 Internship/Tour & Training / Industrial Training 0 0 2 2
Total Credit 22
6th Semester Syllabus / Course Content
Iron Making (MT 601)

Course objective: To know the importance of the Iron making and to apply them for the
advancement of the production feasibilities in Industries to compete with the modern day
manufacturing routes.
Module 1 : Blast furnace raw materials and their properties: Iron Ores, agglomerates and coke,
Preparation of ores: sintering and pelletizing. Blast furnace burdening and distribution, testing of
raw materials for blast furnace. (5L)
Module 2 : Blast furnace profile: Constructional feature of blast furnace, profile, Stove and gas
cleaning units, instrumentation, refractories used in blast furnace. Charging mechanism, Bell and
bell-less charging systems. (5L)
Module 3 : Blast furnace reactions: Physico-chemical principles of blast furnace, Reaction in

stack, tuyere zone, bosh and hearth. Thermodynamics equilibria, Direct and indirect reduction,
Kinetics of iron oxide reduction.Formation of primary and bosh slag, slag composition.Slag-metal
reactions, Desiliconization, Desulphurization. (15L)
Module 4 : Blast furnace operation: Blast Furnace irregularities and remedial measures,
operational steps, blast furnace gas properties, cleaning and utilization. (5L)
Module 5 : Modern Developments: High top pressure, Humidified and oxygen enriched blast
and auxiliary fuel injection through tuyers and their effect on productivity and coke rate. (5L)
Module 6 : Alternative methods of iron making: DRI, MIDREX, COREX, SL/RN, HYL-III,
Fluidised bed reactor, Hismelt. (5L)
1. Ahindra Ghosh and Amit Chatterjee: Ironmaking and Steelmaking Theory and Practice,
Prentice-Hall of India Private Limited,
2. R.H.Tupkary, Khanna Publishers `
3. Anil K. Biswas: Principles of Blast Furnace Iron making, SBA Publication, 1999.
Course outcomes:
After attending this course, the student would be able to:
CO-1: know different kinds of furnaces and their ancillary equipment used for Iron making
CO-2: hold understanding of thermodynamics and kinetics of major reactions during iron making
CO-2: Analyze the irregularities and cause of failures in blast furnace and apply the remedial
measures for immediate rectification.
Metal Forming Technology (MT 602)
Course objectives -
• To develop the fundamental aspects of mechanics of deformation and fracture of materials.

• To provide knowledge about various metal forming operations, their process parameters,
and mathematical equations associated with the process.
• To develop the ability to solve the problem which encounters during metal forming
Course Detail -
Module 1: Fundamentals of Metal Working: Classification of forming processes; Temperature
in Metal– working, Hot working, Cold working and Warm working of metals, Heating of metals
and alloys for hot working, Friction in Metal working, Lubrication, concept of yield criteria. (6L)
Module 2: Rolling of Metals: Classification of Rolled products, Types of rolling mills,

Terminology used in rolling; Forces and Geometrical relationships in rolling, rolling variables,
Theories of rolling, Rolling Torque and HP calculations. Roll-pass Design: Fundamentals of Roll-
pass-design; Mill type, Layout and rolling practice adopted for some common products such as
Slabs, Blooms, Billets, Plates, Sheets etc. Rolling defects and their control. (8L)
Module 3: Forging of Metals: Forging principles, types of forging and equipment needed;
calculation of forging load under sticking and slipping friction conditions. Forging defects and
their control. Manufacture of rail wheels. (6L)
Module 4: Extrusion: Types, Principles and Equipment. Variables in extrusion, deformations in
extrusion, calculation of extrusion pressure under plane strain conditions; extrusion defects;
production of tubes and seamless pipes. (8L)
Module 5: Wire Drawing: Drawing of Rods, Wires and Tubes, calculation of drawing load;
drawing defects. (6L)
Module 6: Sheet Metal Forming: Forming methods such as bending, stretch forming, shearing
and blanking, deep drawing, and redrawing. Defects in formed products. Special forming methods
such as explosive forming (elementary ideas excluding mathematical treatment). (8L)
1. G. E. Dieter, Mechanical Metallurgy, Mc Graw Hill-1988
2. Roll pass Design, the united steel companies Ltd., U. K. -1960
3. Metal Forming: Fundamentals and Applications by Taylan Altan (ASM Series in Metal
Processing)
Course Outcomes: After attending this course,
CO-1: Students will be able to solve the numerical problems to calculate stresses on inclined
planes.
CO-2: Student will be able to apply theory of failure for the given process.
CO-3: Student will estimate the working loads for pressing, forging, wire drawing etc. processes.
Non ferrous technology (MT 603)

Course objective: A thorough knowledge of this topic helps an engineer for selecting of non
ferrous and an alloy for a component or structure. To evaluate the various microstructure of the
non-ferrous metals and alloys using microscope and apply the concepts to make tailor made
materials for given engineering design and applications.
Module 1: General principles of extraction of metals from oxides and sulphides; Mineral resources
of non – ferrous metals in India, Future of non – ferrous metal industries in India.
(6 L)
Module 2: Introduction : Pyrometallurgy, Hydrometallurgy and Electrometallurgy processes,
Kinetics of leaching of ores , Ion exchange and solvent extraction processes. (4 L)
Module 3 : Aluminium: Sources of aluminium, Bayer’s process and factors affecting its
operation; Hall – Heroult process: principle & practices, anode effect, Cause of anode effect ;
Refining of Aluminium; Alternative methods of Alumina and Aluminium production like Alcoa
process,Toth process, ALCAN process. Uses of Aluminium. (5L)
Module 4 : Production and refining of Cu from Sulphide ores. Newer processes like Noranda,
Mitsubishi and WORCRA in Cu extraction, Flow sheet of hydrometallurgy process of copper.
(5 L)
Module 5 : Zinc: Production and refining of Zn from Sulphide ores. ISP process for Zn extraction
, Applications of Zn. (4 L)
Module 6: Lead: Production and refining of Pb from sulphide ore. (4L)
Module 7 : Magnesium ores, methods of Magnesium extraction from oxide ores and Sea water.
(4 L)
Module 8: Other Metals: Simplified flow sheets and relevant chemical principles of extraction of
Ni, Ti, Sn,Zr ,U, etc. (10 L)
1. Extraction of Non-ferrous Metals, Affiliated East- West Press, 2001– H. S. Ray, K. P. Abraham
and R. Sridhar .
2. K Grjotheim & B J Welch: Aluminium Smelter Technology, Aluminium – Verlag, 2nd Edn.
1988.
3. A K Biswas & W G Devenport: Extractive Metallurgy of Copper, Pergamon, 4th Edn. 2002.
4. W H Dennis, Metallurgy of Non – Ferrous Metals, Pitman, London, 1954.
5. J N Anderson & P Queneau, Pyrometallurgical Processes in Non – Ferrous Metallurgy, Gorden
& Breach, New York, 1967.
6. N Sevryukov, Non – Ferrous Metallurgy, Trans. By I V Savin, Mir Publishers, Moscow, 1975.
7. J L Bray, Non – Ferrous Production Metallurgy, John Wiley, New York.
8. R D Pehlke, Unit Processes of Extraction Metallurgy, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1982.
Course outcomes: At the end of this course, the students
CO-1: Will have the knowledge of extraction of important non ferrous metals from its ore.
CO-2: Will have knowledge of other routes of extraction besides pyrometallurgical route of
extraction.
CO-3: Will have understanding of thermodynamics and kinetics of major reactions that take place
during extraction.
Mechanical Behavior of Materials (MT 604)
Course objectives -
• Primary objective is to present the basic fundamentals of failures of the materials.

• Help students to possess a solid foundation in advanced materials with emphasis on the
fundamental engineering principles that govern the properties, processing and their applications.
• To apply the different methods or techniques in improving the properties of materials
Course Detail -
Module 1: Tensile Behavior of Metals: True stress-true strain curve, Strain hardening coefficient,
Instability in tension, Effect of strain rate and temperature on flow properties. (8L)
Module 2: Fracture: Theoretical cohesive strength of metals, Griffith’s theory of brittle fracture,
Mechanism of brittle and ductile fracture, Fractographic aspects of fracture, Notch effects. (9 Hours)
Module 3: Impact Behavior: Notched bar impact test, Transition temperature phenomenon, Factors
affecting transition temperature. (6L)
Module 4: Fracture Mechanics: Strain energy release rate, Stress intensity factor, Plane strain fracture
toughness, Design approach (6L)
Module 5: Fatigue: Micro mechanisms of crack initiation and growth, Stress and strain approaches of
fatigue, Fracture mechanics approach, Fatigue crack growth (6L)
Module 6: Environmental Assisted Cracking: Stress corrosion cracking, Hydrogen embrittlement,
Corrosion fatigue. (4L)
Module 7: Creep: Creep curves, Mechanisms of creep, Stress rapture test, Life prediction, High
temperature alloys. Composites: Fracture and fatigue of composites. (6L)
Suggested references/Books:
1. G E Dieter, Mechanical Metallurgy –McGraw – Hill Publication (1988).

2. R W Hertzberg, Deformation and Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials, John Wiley &
Sons Publication (1995).
3. R E Reed, Physical Metallurgy Principals ––Hill Litton Education Publication (2004).
4. W. Soboyejo, Mechanical Properties of Engineering Materials –Marcel Dekker Publication
(2003).
CO-1: will be able to Explain the theories of elastic and plastic behaviour of materials.
CO-2: will be knowing different mechanical testing methods of materials.
CO-3: will have knowledge the strengthening mechanisms of materials
CO-4: will have knowledge various modes of failure mechanisms in materials
Creep, Fatigue and Fracture (MT 605)
Course Objectives
➢ Study the fracture mechanism of mechanical equipment.
➢ Understanding of wear behaviour of components.
➢ Understanding strengthening mechanism of materials.
➢ Study the creep, fatigue, and fracture for the materials
Course Content:
Module 1 : Fracture- use of fracture mechanics in the prediction of mechanical failure, Griffiths
analysis concept of energy release rate and fracture energy, Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics,
(LEFM)- Loading modes, stress ahead of the crack tip, stress concentration factor, stress
intensity factor and the material parameter the critical stress intensity factor, Plasticity at the
crack tip and the principles behind the approximate derivation of plastic zone shape and size,
limits on the applicability of LEFM. (10L)
Module 2 : The effect of constraint, definition of plane stress and plane strain and the effect of
component thickness, Elastic-Plastic Fracture Mechanics (EPFM)- Alternative failure
prediction parameters, Crack Tip Opening Displacement, and J integral, measurement of
parameters and examples of use, Effect of Microstructure on fracture mechanism and path,
cleavage and ductile failure, factors improving toughness, (10L)
Module 3 : Fatigue- High Cycle Fatigue, Low Cycle Fatigue, mean stress, R ratio, strain and
load control, S-N curves, Goodman diagram, fatigue limit, mechanism of fatigue failure, effect
of stress concentration, specimen size, Total life and damage tolerant approaches, Paris law.
(10L)
Module 4 : Creep- Creep curve, creep properties of metals, stress-rupture test, deformation and
fracture at elevated temperature, theories of creep, prediction of long time properties.. Effect of
metallurgical variables on creep, Creep resistant materials. (10L)
Suggested references/books:
1. G. E. Dieter: Mechanical Metallurgy, McGraw Hill, 1988.
2. Michael Kassner: Fundamentals of Creep in Metals and Alloys, 2nd Edition, Elsevier
Science, 2009.
CO-1: Will have knowledge and understanding of basics of elastic and plastic fracture
mechanics.
CO-2: Will have knowledge of various mode of fracture.
CO-3: Will have basic knowledge of high temperature deformation
Experimental Techniques in Materials Engineering (MT 606)
Course objectives –
• To obtain knowledge on various structural and microstructural characterization
techniques of materials.
• To study the principles, theory and practice of various characterization techniques
Course Detail -
Module 1: Optical Microscopy and Image analyser: Understanding of image formation,
resolution, numerical aperture, magnification, depth of field and depth of focus of a microscope.
Quantitative and phase analysis (inclusion, size distribution etc.). (7L)
Module 2: X-ray diffraction and analysis: Production and properties of X-rays, X-ray diffraction,
Structure factor and intensity calculations. (7L)
Module 3: Effect of texture, particle size, micro strain on diffraction lines. Indexing of powder
photographs. X-rays florescence: basics and applications in materials science. (7L)
Module 4: SEM and FESEM: Principle and applications, Modes of operation, Image formation -
plane and fractured surfaces. Microanalysis (EDX, WDS etc.) (7L)
Module 5: TEM: Principle and operation. Bright field and dark field images, Sample preparation
techniques. Selected area diffraction, Reciprocal lattice and Ewald sphere construction, indexing
of selected area diffraction patterns. (7L)
Module 6: Advanced Characterization Techniques: STEM, AFM, Nanoindentation Testing,
EELS- Principle and applications. DTA/DSC-TG: Scope and applications in materials science. (7
L)
Suggested references/books:
1. B. D. Cullity, Elements of X-ray Diffraction (II edition), Addison-Wesley Publishing Co.

Reading, USA, 1978.
2. P. J. Goodhew and F. J. Humphreys, Taylor and Francis, Electron Microscopy and Analysis,
London, 2001(ISBN-0-7484-0968-8).
3. S. H. Cohen and Marcia L. Light body (Editors), Atomic Force Microscopy / Scanning
Tunnelling Microscopy, Plenum Press, New, York, 1994.
4. P. J. Haines (Editor), Principles of Thermal Analysis and Calorimetry Royal Society of
Chemistry (RSC), Cambridge, 2002.
5. G. F. Vander Voort, Metallography: Principles and Practice ASM International, Materials Park,
USA, 1984
6. S. Amelinckx, D. van Dyck, J. van Landuyt and G. van Tendeloo (Editors), Electron
Microscopy: Principles And Fundamentals, VCH, Weinheim, 1997.
7. C. Suryanarayana and M. Norton, X-ray Diffraction, A Practical Approach, Plenum Press, New
York, (1998).
8. Metallography and Microstructures, Metals Handbook, Volume 9, 9th edition, American
Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio,1986.
9. Materials Characterization, Metals Handbook, Volume 10, 9th edition, American Society for
Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1986.
CO-1: will have Understanding of the principles of optical and electron microscopy.
CO-2: will be able Interpret optical and electron micrographs.
CO-3: will be able to describe composition analysis techniques in SEM.
CO-4: will have understanding of the principle of XRD, thermal analysis techniques includes DSC and
TGA.
CO-5: will be able to choose correct characterization techniques for a given range of metallurgical problem.
Computational Materials Engineering (MT 607)
Course objectives -
• To acquaint the candidate with the ability of programming languages and various software
packages like COMSOL, MATLAB, etc.
• To impart the knowledge and understanding of physical and chemical properties of
complex materials.
• To make them understand molecular dynamics, thermodynamics, phase diagrams and
processes of modelling.
• To develop the ability of designing of new materials with modified properties.
Course Detail -
Module 1: Review of Computer Basics and programming, Techniques in Computer simulation,
Finite element analysis, Monte Carlo methods. (6L)
Module 2: General Methodology, Understanding of the physical and chemical properties of
complex materials by applying molecular dynamics, Monte Carlo method, and continuum
mechanics. (8L)
Module 3: Thermodynamics and Phase Diagrams, Kinetics & Microstructure Modelling, Process
Modelling, Integrated Selection of Materials and Processes, Calculation of materials properties
starting from microscopic theories. (12L)
Module 4: Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic, Genetic Algorithms, Molecular Modelling, Cellular
Automata. (7L)
Module 5: Designing of new materials, modifying materials properties and optimizing chemical
processes. (6L)
Module 6: Practical examples and programming in computational materials engineering. (3L)
References:
1. K. Ohno, K. Esfarjani, and Y. Kawazoe: Computational Materials Science - From Ab Initio to
Monte Carlo Methods, Springer, 1999.
2. Koenraad George Frans Janssens, Dierk Raabe, et al: Computational Materials Engineering- An
Introduction to Microstructure Evolution, Academic Press, 2007.
3. June Gunn Lee: Computational Materials Science, CRC Press, 2011.
C R A Catlow: Computational Materials Science, IOS Pr Inc., 2003.
CO-1: will be able to approach the problem through modelling in materials engineering.
CO-2: will be able to use software to code and analyze the possible outcomes.
Joining of Materials (MT 608)
Course objectives -
1. Technical knowledge of joining of materials.
2. Analysis of problems come into the way of joining and its remedies.
3. Metallurgy behind the joining techniques.
Course Detail -
Module 1: Introduction: Principle, Theory and Classification of welding and other joining
processes. (2L)
Module 2: Manual metal arc (MMA): Equipment requirement, electrodes for welding of structural
steels, coating constituents and their functions, types of coatings, current and voltage selection for
electrodes. (6L)
Module 3: Arc welding power sources; Conventional welding transformers, rectifiers and current
and voltage. The influence of these power sources on welding. Metal transfer. Submerged arc
welding (SAW): Process details, consumables such as fluxes and wires for welding mild steel,
Variations in submerged arc welding process. (6L)
Module 4: Gas metal arc welding (GMAW) or MIG/ MAG welding: Process details, shielding
gases, electrode wires, their sizes, and welding current ranges. TIG welding: Process details, power
sources requirements, electrode sizes and materials, current carrying capacities of different
electrodes, shielding gases, application of process. (8L)
Module 5: Resistance welding: General principle of heat generation in resistance welding,
application of resistance welding processes. Process details and working principle of spot, seam,
and. projection welding, electrode materials, shapes of electrodes, electrode cooling, selection of
welding currents, voltages. (8L)
Module 6: Welding metallurgy of carbon and alloy steels, Cast irons, Stainless steels, Al- and Cu-
based alloys. Weldability and Heat affected zones (HAZ). Welding defects and detection
techniques.
Soldering and brazing: Difference between both the processes, consumables used, methods of
brazing, fluxes used, their purposes and flux residue treatment. High energy density welding
techniques like: Electron beam welding and laser welding technique. (12L)
Suggested refernces/books:
1. J F Lancaster, Allen and Unwin, Metallurgy of Welding.

2. R L Little, Welding and Welding Technology, TMH.
3. J Norrish, Woodhead, Advanced Welding Processes.
4. K Weman, Woodhead. Welding Processes Handbook.
5. Welding technology & Design by V.M.Radhakrishnan, New Age International publication.
Course Outcomes-After attending this course, students will be able to

CO-1: Classify and differentiate welding processes.
CO-2: explain heat flow in welding.
CO-3: Identify various defects and remedial measures in weldment.
CO-4: Complete concept of welding metallurgy.
Nano Science and Nano Technology (MT 609)

Course objectives -
• To foundational knowledge of the Nanoscience and related fields.
• To make the students acquire an understanding the Nanoscience and Applications
• To help them understand in broad outline of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology.
Course Detail -
Module 1: Significance of Nano materials, properties of materials at Nano level, Nano clusters,
synthesis of metal and ceramic Nano materials, classical, chemical and biological methods, carbon
Nano tubes, aerogels, zeolites and special nanomaterials, Changes in order behaviour and
compositional changes due to reduction in size. (6L)
Module 2: Carbon Nano structures- carbon molecules, carbon clusters, carbon Nano tubes-
synthesis, formation mechanisms, strength, separation, stability and applications, Properties of
Nano materials- Mechanical and structural properties, Elastic and plastic behaviour of Nano
materials. Effect of temperature and nature of dislocations and their mobility super plasticity in
Nano materials, improvements in strength and ductility. (10L)
Module 3: Nano indentation, principles and mechanisms leading to enhanced properties of
composite materials, Fatigue, super plastic behaviour of Nano grained materials, Nano control for
high strength and high ductility in light weight alloys. (4L)
Module 4: Ceramic Nano systems- Nano ceramic powders, Nano grained ceramics, Quantum
effects, quantum confinement, quantum wells, wires and dots, effect of size reduction on optical,
electrical, electronic, mechanical, magnetic and thermal properties of materials due to size. Surface
effects, Nano electronics, Differences between Nano and microelectronics, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D Nano
structures, Nano fluidics, Nano layered composites, Nano filamentary and Nano wire composites.
(11L)
Module 5: Nano particulate composites, Capacity building in Nano materials such as capacitors,
superconductors, super capacitors etc., (6L)
Module 6: Nano electromechanical systems (NEMS) organic optoelectronic nanostructures,
photonic crystals, biomimetic Nano structures. (5L)
Suggested References/books:
1. Sulabha K. Kulkarni: Nanotechnology Principles and Practices, Capital Publishing Company,

2007.
2. H. Hosono, Y. Mishima, H. Takezoe and K.J.D Mackenzie: Nanomaterials- From Research to
Applications, Elsevier Ltd., Noida, 2008.
3. Massimilano Di Ventra, S. Evoy and James R. Heflin, Jr.: Introduction to Nanoscale Science
and Technology, Springer, Noida, 2009.
4. Charles P. Poole Jr. and Frank J. Owens: Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley India, 2010.
Course Outcomes: After attending this course, the student will be able to:
CO-1: Indicate the differences between nanomaterials and conventional materials

CO-2: Indicate how specific synthesis techniques can result in nanomaterials
CO-3: Give examples of specific nanomaterials and explain the scientific reasons for the
properties displayed by them.
CO-4: Describe how specific characterization techniques can be used to analyze nanomaterials
surface
Surface Engineering (MT 610)
Course Objectives
➢ Understanding the theory degradation of materials.
➢ Study the different types of materials degradation.
➢ Study the different surface modification techniques.
➢ Study the advanced surface modification techniques.
Course Content:
Module 1 : Introduction tribology, surface degradation, wear and corrosion, types of wear,
adhesive, abrasive, oxidative, corrosive, erosive and fretting wear, roles of friction and lubrication-
overview of different forms of corrosion. (8L)
Module 2 : Chemical and electrochemical polishing, significance, specific examples, chemical
conversion coatings, phosphating, chromating, chemical colouring, anodizing of aluminium
alloys, (8L)
Module 3 : Thermochemical processes -industrial practices Surface pre-treatment, deposition of
copper, zinc, nickel and chromium - principles and practices, alloy plating, electrocomposite
plating, properties of electro deposits, electroless, electroless composite plating; application areas,
properties. (8L)
Module 4 : Definitions and concepts, physical vapour deposition (PVD), evaporation, sputtering,
ion plating, plasma nitriding, process capabilities, chemical vapour deposition (CVD), metal
organic CVD, plasma assisted CVD. (8L)
Module 5 : Thermal spraying, techniques, advanced spraying techniques - plasma surfacing,
detonation gun and high velocity oxy-fuel processes, laser surface alloying, laser cladding, specific
industrial applications, tests for assessment of wear and corrosion (8L)
Suggested reference/books:
1. Sudarshan T S, „Surface modification technologies - An Engineer‟s guide‟, Marcel Dekker,

Newyork,
2. Varghese C.D, „Electroplating and Other Surface Treatments - A Practical Guide‟, TMH, 1993
3. Tadeusz Burakowski and Tadeusz Wierzchon, Surface Engineering of Metals: Principles,
Equipment, Technologies, CRC Press LLC, 1999.
4. K. G. Budinski, Surface Engineering for Wear Resistance, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1998.
5. Surface Engineering, Process Fundamentals and Applications, Vol I &Vol II, Lecture Notes of
SERC School on Surface Engineering, 2003.
Course outcomes: After attending this course, the student will be able to:
CO-1: Define different forms of processing techniques of surface engineering materials.
CO-2: Know the types of Pre-treatment methods to be given to surface engineering.
CO-3: Select the Type of Deposition and Spraying technique with respect to the application.
CO-4: Study of surface degradation of materials.
Advanced Materials (MT 611)

Course objectives -
• To understand the various strengthening mechanisms and also failure mechanisms for alloy
systems to achieve enhanced mechanical performance.
• To gain knowledge with regards to kinetics of phase transformations and their effect on
mechanical properties of alloys.
• To gain knowledge about the characteristics, processing and applications of polymers and
composite materials.
Course Detail -
Module 1: Special purpose steels. Light metals and alloys, Titanium and Ti-based alloys and
Intermetallic, Advanced Aluminium alloys. (7L)
Module 2: High temperature materials, Ultra high temperature materials. Cryogenic materials,
Functional and Functionally graded materials-synthesis and their thermal and mechanical
treatment. (8L)
Module 3: Quasi Crystals, Metallic Glasses, Amorphous materials. (6L)
Biomaterials, Carbon-based materials, Advanced Magnetic. (5L)
Module 4: Electrical and Electronic materials, Optical materials (6L)
Shape Memory Alloys, Smart Materials. (4L)
Module 5: Materials for Automobiles, Lasers, Sensors. (5L)
Suggested References/books:
CO-1: M.F. Ashby: Engineering Materials, 4th Edition, Elsevier, 2005.

CO-2: M.F. Ashby: Materials Selection in Mechanical Design, Butterworth Heinemann, 2005.
CO-3: ASM Publication, Vol.20: Materials Selection and Design, ASM, 1997.
CO-4: Pat L. Mangonon: The Principles of Materials Selection and Design, Prentice Hall
International, Inc. 1999.
Course Outcomes: After attending this course,
CO-1: Students will be able to compile about the properties, structure of ceramic materials and
their need for newer applications and processing techniques.
CO-2: Students will be able to express the different fabrication techniques, how the properties are
improved after they are processed with different methods.
CO-3: Students will be able to demonstrate the need for newer materials by comparing the
limitations of conventional materials.
X-ray Diffraction and Electron Microscopy (MT 612)

• To impart the basic knowledge of material characterization with the help of SEM, TEM.
• To provide a thorough introduction to the principles and practice of X-ray diffraction.
• To provide practical experience in laboratory methods of material characterization and it’s
reporting.
• To analyze the variation in properties of materials with respect to the variation in their
microstructure.
Course Detail -
Module 1: Introduction to crystallography, Symmetry – point group and space group, Reading of
the space group tables. (4L)
Module 2: X-ray diffraction – Generation of X-rays, characteristic X-ray spectrum, Bragg’s Law,
Diffraction methods – Laue method, rotating crystal method, powder method, Principle, equipment
and applications, structure factor, derivation of diffraction conditions for SC, BCC and FCC
Bravais lattice. (8L)
Module 3: X-ray diffractometer, filters and counters/detectors, texture, importance of texture,
measurement of texture, pole figures (stereographic projections), orientation distribution function,
sample symmetry, and its importance, applications of X-ray diffraction in materials
characterization – determination of crystal structure, lattice parameter, examples of textures in
cubic materials. (8L)
Module 4: Electrons as source, properties of electron beam, elastic and inelastic scattering of
electrons, importance in electron microscopy. (3L)
Module 5: Principles of transmission electron microscopy, construction, ray-diagram, working,
sample preparation, contrast mechanisms, ring and spot diffraction patterns, detectors and imaging
modes, Kikuchi lines, measurement of lattice parameter, orientation relationship determination.
(10L)
Module 6: Principles of scanning electron microscopy, construction, ray-diagram, working,
sample preparation, contrast mechanisms, Bright field and dark field imaging. Detection of
secondary electrons. Detection of backscattered electrons. (9L)
1. B D Cullity, S R Stock: Elements of X-ray Diffraction, Prentice Hall, Inc 2001
2. D. Brandon and W. Kaplan: Microstructural Characterization of Materials, Wiley & Sons, 2000.
3. K R Hebbar: Basics of X-Ray Diffraction and its Applications, I.K. International Publishing
House Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2007
4. Goodhew, Humphreys and Beanland: Electron Microscopy and Microanalysis, Taylor and
Francis, New York, 2001.
Course Outcomes: After attending this course, students will hold
CO-1: An ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern tools necessary to perform x-ray
diffraction, scanning electron microscopy, energy dispersive spectroscopy and related
microanalytical techniques.
CO-2: An ability to conduct experiments, analyse and interpret data, and to relate the composition
and atomic, structural and microstructural configuration with other material properties.
CO-3: An understanding of the crystallography of simple structures, Miller indices, reciprocal
space, structure factors and the general concepts of stereographic projections, pole figures and
inverse pole figures.
CO-4: An understanding of professional and ethical responsibilities with regard to preparing
materials for structural and microstructural observation, reporting observations, and drawing
engineering conclusions.
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
Course Structure
SEMESTER V
S. Subject Code Subject L T P Cr.

No.
Theory
1. P. Core Mass Transfer Operations 4 1 4
2. P. Core Chemical Reaction Engineering 3 1 3
3. P. Core Solutions Thermodynamics 3 1 3
4. P. Elective 1. Numerical Methods in Chemical 3 1 3
Engineering
2. Computer Application in Chemical
Engineering
3. Optimization of Chemical Processes
4. Fluidization Engineering
5. Open Elective 1. Environmental Engineering 3 1 3
Course 2. Industrial Pollution Control
3. Solid Waste Management
4. Water Pollution Control
Total 16
Practical
1. Lab Mass Transfer Lab 0 0 3 1
2. Lab Physical and Chemical Equilibria 0 0 3 1
3. Lab Fluidization Engineering Lab 0 0 3 1
Lab Chemical Engineering Drawing 0 0 3 1
GP/Seminar 0 0 2 2
Total 6
Grand Total Credits 16 + 6 22
Course Structure
SEMESTER VI
S. No. Subject Code Subject L T P Cr.

Theory
1. P. Core Process Equipment Design 3 1 3
2. P. Core Instrumentation and Process Control 4 1 4
3. P. Core Advance Mass Transfer 3 1 3
4. P. Elective 1. Heterogeneous Catalysis 3 1 3
2. Chemical Reactor Analysis
3. Material Characterization
3. Reactor Design
5. Open 1. Energy Option 3 0 3
Elective* 2. Fertilizer Technology
3. Fuel and Combustion Technology
Total 16
Practical
1. Lab Process Equipment Design Sessional 0 0 2 1
2. Lab Chemical Reaction Engineering Lab 0 0 3 1
3. Lab Instrumentation & Process control 0 0 3 1
4. Lab Energy Option Lab 0 0 3 1
Internship 0 0 2 2
Total 6
Grand Total Credits 16 + 6 22
Syllabus
SEMESTER V
Mass Transfer Operations
Lectures: 4 Periods/week Sessional Marks: 30

University Examination: 3 hours. University Examination Marks: 70
COURSE OBJECTIVE: The students will be able to understand the concepts of basic mass transfer
operations involved in industrial processes as well as relate them to practical problems in everyday
lives.
Unit 1 Lecture 10
Introduction to mass transfer operations, Molecular mass transfer, Fick’s law, Diffusivities, Differential
equation for diffusion steady state equimolar counter diffusion, Diffusion of A through stagnant B for
liquid or gases. Convective diffusion mass transfer coefficient, Diffusion between two phases, inter
phase diffusion, Equilibrium; Equilibrium relation, two film theory, overall mass transfer coefficient,
Diffusion of turbulent flow-eddy diffusion, Mixing length, Wetted wall column, Mass, heat and
momentum transfer: Analogies, JD factor.
Unit 2 Lectures 8
Distillation: Vapor-liquid equilibrium and enthalpy concentration diagram, Principles of distillation,
Principles of batch distillation, Flash distillation, Differential distillation, McCabe Thiele methods, Feed
plate location and efficiency, Optimum reflux, Types of equipment , Bubble cap plate, Sieve plate,
Valve tray, Packed tower, Packed columns: Concept of height evaluation to theoretical plate(HETP),
NTU(Number of Transfer Units).
Unit 3 Lectures 6
Gas absorption & stripping: Mechanism of absorption, Equilibrium relations, Operating line,
Absorption factor, NTU & HTU, Column diameter, Gas absorption equipments: Plates and & Packed
column, Packing materials, Capacity of packed towers, Special Case: Flooding in column.
Unit 4 Lecture 8
Extraction: Solid-liquid extraction, Multistage counter counters operations, Number of equilibrium
stages, Liquid –liquid extraction: Ternary liquid-liquid equilibrium, Batch and continuous liquid–liquid
equilibrium, Batch and continuous liquid- liquid extraction, Stage calculations, Extraction with
intermediate feed and reflux, Reflux, selectivity, Rate of extraction, Systems with complete
immiscibility.
Unit 5 Lectures 8
Drying: Equilibrium: Insoluble solids, soluble solids, soluble solid equilibrium, Critical, free, bound
and unbound moisture content. Drying operation and mechanism, rates of batch drying and continuous
drying, drying curve, direct dryers, indirect dryers, drying at high temperature and low temperature.
Text Book/Reference Books:
1. Mass Transfer Operations, Treybal Robert E., 3rd edition, International Edition, McGraw Hill.
2. Unit Operations of Chemcal Engineering, Warren L., McCabe, Julian C., Smith, Peter, Harriot,
7th edition, McGraw Hill.
Suggested Textbooks:
1. Treybal, R. E.: “Mass transfer Operations”, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill, New York, 1980.
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, McCabe W.L., and Smith J.C. & Harriot,
McGraw Hill Book Co., New York 1980, 5th Edition.
Reference books:
1. Geankpolis, C.J., Transport Processes and Separation Process Principles (Includes Unit
Operations),Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 4th Edition, 2003.
2. Roman Zarzytci, Andrzai Chacuk, Absorption: Fundamentals and Application, Pergamon,

Press, 1993.
Course Outcomes:
After completion of this course, the student will be able to:
CO1 Solve diffusion and diffusion related problems.
CO2 Estimate mass transfer coefficients for gas–liquid contacting systems.
CO3 Explain the humidification and dehumidification operations.
CO4 Estimate the rate of batch and continuous drying.
CO5 Apply design calculations of single and multiple effect evaporators.
Mapping of course outcomes with program specific outcomes:

Course
outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 1 1 1 2 - - - - - - -
CO2 1 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - -
CO3 2 2 2 3 - - - - - - - -
CO4 1 2 3 3 1 2 1 - - - - -
CO5 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 - - - - -
Chemical Reaction Engineering

Course objective
This course will provide students understand the kinetics of reaction engineering and provide basis for
design of simple chemical reactors.
Unit – I Lectures 8
Classification of reactions, rate of reaction, Variable effecting the rate, reaction mechanism, order of
reaction and its determination through different methods, collision and activated complex theory.
Unit-II Lectures 8
Classification of reactors: Concept of ideality. Development of design Equation for batch reactor,
CSTR, and PFR, properties of ideal reactor.
Unit-III Lectures 8
Combination of reactors, reactors with recycles Yield and selectivity in multiple reactions. Multiple
reactions in batch, CSTR and PFR. Autocatalytic reaction.
Unit-IV Lectures 8
Design of isothermal and non-isothermal batch, CSTR, PFR, optimum temperature progression, thermal
characteristics of reactors.
Unit- V Lectures 8
Non-ideal reaction, evaluation of RTD characteristics, non-ideal models: axial dispersion model and
tank in series model.
Course Outcomes:
After completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1 Explain the basic concepts in reaction and reactor engineering.
CO2 Design performance equations of reactors.
CO3 Analyse Non-Isothermal operation in Ideal Reactors
CO4 Examine the Non-Ideal Behaviour of real reactor.

Course PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
outcomes
CO1 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 - - - - -
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - -
CO3 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - -
CO4 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - -
Suggested Reading:
1. Chemical Reaction Kinetics By J.M. Smith (3 rd Edition Mc Graw Hill)
2. Chemical Reaction Theory an Introduction By K.G. Denbigh & K.G. Turner (2nd Edition United
Press & ELBS 1972)
3. Chemical Kinetic and Reactor Engineering By G. Copper & GVJ jeffery`s (Prentice Hall 1972)
4. Chemical reaction engineering By O.Levenspiel (2nd Edition Willey Eastern,
Singapore)
5. Chemical process Principal Part-III By Houghen Watsn & Ragatz [Kinetics & catalysis
(2nd Edition asian publication House Bombay)]
6. Element of Chemical Reaction Engineering By Fogler ,H.S. (2nd edition Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi 1999)
Solution Thermodynamics
Objective : To impart fundamental concepts of solution thermodynamics involving ideal and non –
ideal systems and to compute phase and reaction equilibrium data.
Detailed Syllabus
Unit I Lectures 8
Equation of states, generalized correlations, acentric Factor, Calculation of thermodynamic properties
using fugacity and fugacity coefficient and activity and activity coefficient, Excess properties of mixing,
Gibbs Duhem equation and its correlation in terms of partial pressure.
Unit II Lectures 8
Phase Rule and Phase Equilibria: Phase rule, Claussius-Claypron equation, VLE calculation-Bubble
Point, Dew Point, Dew point and flash calculation. Phase Equilibrium VLE.
UNIT III Lectures 8
Excess Free Energy: Concept of excess free energy of mixing and its Gibbs-Duhem equation, in relation
to Raoult’s Law, Henry’s Law, Lewis Randle Rule and partial pressure.
UNIT IV Lectures 8
Gibbs/Duhem equation and its interacted form like, Porter Van Laar, Margules, Wilson and
Redlich/Kister Equation. Excess function of non-ideal solution.
UNIT V Lectures 8
Chemical Equilibria: Criteria for Equilibrium, Equilibrium Constant and its dependence on temperature
and pressure, Evaluation of equilibrium constant. Equilibrium conversion for single and multiple
reaction systems, Phase rule for reacting substances.
TEXTBOOK
1. Introduction to Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, Smith, J.M., Van Ness, H.C., and
Abbott, M.M., 7th Edition, McGraw Hill.
Reference Books:
1. Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, Y.V. C. Rao, Universities press.
2. A Textbook of Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, K. V. Narayanan. Publisher, PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2004.
Course outcomes (COs)
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Apply basic equation of states to calculation of state variables for a chemical process.
CO2: Determine the thermodynamic properties of gas mixture/solution and their correlation to standard
equation.
CO3: Calculate Bubble-P&T, Dew P&T, Flash P&T in VLE for a binary and multi component systems.
CO4: Determine Equilibrium constant & composition of the chemical solution at given state conditions.
NUMERICAL METHODS IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING
University Examination: 3 hours. University Examination Marks:70
Course Objective: To study the numerical+ analysis methods and their applications in solving
chemical engineering problems.
Syllabus
UNIT I Lectures 6
Introduction, Approximation and Concept of Error & Error Analysis. Linear Algebraic Equations:
Methods like Gauss elimination, LU decomposition and matrix inversion, Gauss-Siedel method,
Chemical engineering problems involving solution of linear algebraic equations.
UNIT II Lectures 7
Root finding methods for solution on non-linear algebraic equations: Bisection, Newton-Raphson and
Secant methods, Chemical engineering problems involving solution of non-linear equations.
Interpolation and Approximation, Newton's polynomials and Lagrange polynomials, spline

interpolation, linear regression, polynomial regression, least square regression.
UNIT III Lectures 10

Numerical integration: Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s rule, integration with unequal segments, quadrature
methods, Chemical engineering problems involving numerical differentiation and integration.
UNIT IV Lectures 7
Ordinary Differential Equations: Euler method, Runge-Kutta method, Adaptive Runge-Kutta method,
Initial and boundary value problems, Chemical engineering problems involving single, and a system of
ODEs .
UNIT V Lectures 5
Introduction to Partial Differential Equations: Characterization of PDEs, Laplace equation, Heat

conduction/diffusion equations, explicit, implicit, Crank-Nicholson method.
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Solve linear and non linear equations using bisection and Newtons method.
CO2 Evaluate sets of linear equations.
CO3 Apply laplace equations to heat and mass transfer governing equations.
CO4 Understand linear and non linear regression techniques and to correlate with experimental
data.
CO5 Solve initial and boundary value problems of ordinary differential equations.
outcomes
CO1 2 2 - 1 - - - - - - - -
CO2 2 2 - 1 1 - - - - - - -
CO3 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - - - -
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - -
CO5 2 1 2 1 2
1. Gupta, S. K., "Numerical Methods for Engineers, New Academic Science, 2012.
Suggested References Books
1.S.C. Chapra& R.P. Canale, "Numerical Methods for Engineers with Personal Computer
Applications", McGraw Hill Book Company, 1985.
2. R.L. Burden & J. D. Faires, "Numerical Analysis", 7th Ed., Brooks Coles, 2000.
3. Atkinson, K. E., "An Introduction to Numerical Analysis", John Wiley & Sons, 1978.
4. Press, W. H. et al., "Numerical Recipes in C: The Art of Scientific Computing, 3rd Edition,
Cambridge University Press, 2007.
Mathematical Methods in Chemical Engineering
Teaching Scheme: Sessional Marks: 30
Lectures: 3 periods/week University Examination Marks: 70
University Examination: 3 hours
Course Objectives:
1. To impart the knowledge of partial differential equations.
2. To understand concept of probability and distributions.
3. To know the probable errors while using different techniques.
4. To understand model writing techniques.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
5. Understand the vectors and partial differential equations.
6. Understand probability and distributions
7. Estimate error analysis in different techniques.
8. Write model equations for numerical techniques for solution of ODE and PDEs.
UNIT 1 Lectures 9
Vector and tensor spaces; Metric,norm and inner products; orthonormalization; matrices, operators and
transformations; eigen values and eigen vectors; Fredholm alternative, Rayleigh quotient and its
application to chemical engineering systems; self adjoint and non self adjoint systems
UNIT 2 Lectures 6
Partial differential equations and their application in chemical engineering; Strum-louiville theory;
Separation of variables and Fourier transformations.
UNIT 3 Lectures 8
Applications of Greens function for solution of ODE and PDEs in chemical engineering; Numericals
techniques for solution of ODE and PDEs; Linear stability and limit cycles; Bifurcation theory;
Secondary bifurcation and chaos.
UNIT 4 Lectures 6
Probability concepts and distributions, random variables, error analysis, point estimation and
confidence intervals, hypothesis testing
UNIT 5 Lectures 8
Development of empirical chemical engineering models using regression techniques, design of
experiments, process monitoring based on statistical quality control techniques, case studies
1. Pushpavnam, S., Mathematical Methods in Chemical engineering, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, IsBN-81-203-1262-7
Course outcome mapping with Programme outcomes:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 3
CO2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3
CO4 3 2 3 1 - - - - - - - 3
OPTIMIZATION OF CHEMICAL PROCESS
Lectures: 3 periods/week Sessional Marks: 30

University Examination: 3 hrs. University Examination Marks: 70
Course Objectives:-
1. To understand the different optimization techniques
2. To impart knowledge of linear programming’s
3. To apply optimization techniques for the design of different equipment
4. To apply optimization techniques for the optimization of process parameters
UNIT – I: [4L]
Nature and Organization of optimization problems, fitting models to data, formulation of objective
functions.
UNIT – III [6L]

Basic concepts of optimization, optimization of unconstrained function, one dimensional search.
UNIT – III: [6L]

Linear programming and applications.
UNIT – IV: [10L]

Optimization recovery of waste heat, shell and tube heat exchanger, evaporator design, liquid-liquid
extraction process, optimal design of staged distillation column.
UNIT – V: [10L]
Optimal pipe diameter, optimal residence time for maximum yield in an ideal isothermal batch reactor,
chemostat, optimization of a thermal cracker using linear programming.
Text Book:
1. Optimization of chemical process, T.F.Edgar and Himmelblau.D.M., McGraw Hill.
Reference Book:
Optimization: Theory and Applications, S.S.Rao, Wiley Eastran Ltd.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Understand the basic concept of optimization.
2. Estimate the recovery of waste heat from shell and tube heat exchanger.
3. Write linear programing for various problems.
4. Design evaporator, liquid-liquid extraction process and stage distillation column.
POs1 POs2 POs3 POs4 POs5 POs6 POs7 POs8 POs9 POs10 POs11 POs12
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 3
CO2 3 1 3 2 - - - - - - - 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 3
FLUIDIZATION ENGINEERING
Course Objectives:
To study the fluidization phenomena, fluidized bed regimes and models.
Course Outcomes:
The students will be able to:
1. understand the fluidization phenomena and operational regimes.
2. design various types of gas distributors for fluidized beds and determine effectiveness of gas
mixing at the bottom region.
3. analyse fluidized bed behaviour with respect to the gas velocity.
4. develop and solve mathematical models of the fluidized bed.
UNIT I Lectures 4
Flow through packed beds-Ergun equation,
UNIT II Lectures 12
Phenomena of fluidization liquid like behavior of a fluidized bed, Types of fluidization-
particulate and Aggregative fluidization Advantages and disadvantages of fluidization over
packed beds and moving beds. Industrial applications. Minimum fluidization velocity,
Terminal velocity and pressure drop in a fluidized bed.
UNIT III Lectures 8

Average particle size, sphericity, voidage, Expansion of liquid-solid fluidized bed, Richandson,
Zaki equation, use of dimensional analysis
UNIT IV Lectures 8
Brief idea of the mechanism of gas-solid fluidization homogeneous & bubble phase, size of
bubble, bubble velocity and its expansion.
UNIT V Lectures 8
1. Design of batch & continuous fluidizer for heat & mass Transfer, Entrainment & Elutriation-
Entrainment at or above TDH, Entrainment below TDH
2. Semi fluidizations.
Text Books:
1. Fluidization Engineering, Kunii, Diazo and Octave Levenspiel (Chapters 1,2,3,4,7,9,10 and
12).
2. Fluidization, Max Leva (Chapters 2,3, and 7)
Reference Book:
1. Perry’s Chemical Engineers Hand Book, Perry Rober H, 7th edition, McGraw Hill
Environmental Engineering
Objective: Objective of this course is to understand the different environmental issues and its
consequence on the ecosystem. Further, it has been introduced the technical solution of numerous
pollutions such as air, water, soil, and noise pollution. It also addresses the solid waste issue of urban
area.
Course Outcome (CO): At the end of the course, student will be able to
CO1. Understand the different type of pollutions (air, water and noise) its consequence on eco-
system.
CO2. Evaluate the plum size, plum rise, COD, BOD and noise label.
CO3. Identify the different control measures as well as treatment process of different pollutant.
CO4. Explain the different type of chemical and biological treatment process.
Course Plan
UNIT I (10 lectures)
Air Pollution: Types of air Pollutants, Classification of Industries based on Pollutants, sources of air
Pollutant, line source, point source and fumigate source, Atmospheric dispersion, Dispersion model, plume
size, types of calculation of plume rise, calculation of concentration, Atmospheric salability Meteorology,
UNIT II (5 lectures)
Gaseous pollutant control technology, ESP, cyclone separation, victory scrubber, bag filters, Air Act.
UNIT III (10 lectures)

Water Pollution: Sources, criteria and standards, physical and chemical characteristics, Pre Primary,
Secondary and Tertiary treatments of wastewater, sludge digestion and disposal, Advanced treatment
processes, Disinfections, Typical Industrial treatment processes, Municipal waste waters treatment, Water
act.
UNIT IV (05 lectures)

Noise Pollution: Definition ,measurement, effects and control
UNIT V (05 lectures)

Solid Waste: Classification of solid waste, collection, chemical and biological treatment, disposal of solid
waste
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
Mahajan S.P., “Pollution Control in Process Industries”, Tata McGraw Hill Inc., New Delhi, 2001.
Rao C.S., “Environmental Pollution Control Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Revised, Wiley Eastern
Limited, India, 2006.
Bhatia S.C., “Environmental Pollution & Control in Chemical Process Industries”, Khanna
Publications, Delhi, 2001.
Sawyer C.N., McCarty P.L. & Perkin G.F., “Chemistry for Environmental Engineering and Science”,
McGraw-Hill, 5th ed., 2002
Relationship of COs to POs for Environmental Engineering
CO1. 3 2 1 - - 2 1 - - 1 - -
CO2. 3 3 2 2 - 2 2 - - - - -
CO3. 2 2 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - -
CO4. 3 3 3 1 - 1 3 - - - - -
Industrial Pollution Control
Teaching Scheme:
Objectives
1. To understand the importance of industrial pollution and its abatement
2. To study the underlying principles of industrial pollution control
3. To acquaint the students with case studies
4. Student should be able to design complete treatment system
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Recognize the causes and effects of environmental pollution
2. Analyze the mechanism of proliferation of pollution
3. Develop methods for pollution abatement and waste minimization
4. Design treatment methods for gas, liquid and solid wastes
Unit I Lectures 8
Industries & Environment

Industrial scenario in India - Industrial activity and Environment - Uses of Water by industry - Sources
and types of industrial wastewater - Industrial wastewater and environmental impacts - Regulatory
requirements for treatment of industrial wastewater - Industrial waste survey - Industrial wastewater
generation rates, characterization and variables - Population equivalent - Toxicity of industrial effluents
and Bioassay tests.
Unit II Lectures 8
Air Pollutant Abatement
Air pollutants scales of concentration, lapse rate and stability, plume behavior, dispersion of air
pollutants, atmospheric dispersion equation and its solutions, Gaussian plume models. Air pollution
control methods, Source correction methods, Design concepts for pollution abatement systems for
particulates and gases. Such as gravity chambers, cyclone separators, filters, electrostatic precipitators,
condensation, adsorption and absorption, thermal oxidation and biological processes.
Unit III Lectures 8
Waste water treatment processes

Design concepts for primary treatment, grid chambers and primary sedimentation basins, selection of
treatment process flow diagram, elements of conceptual process design, design of thickner, biological
treatment Bacterial population dynamics, kinetics of biological growth and its applications to biological
treatment, process design relationships and analysis, determination of kinetic coefficients, activated
sludge process. Design, trickling filter design considerations, advanced treatment processes, Study of
environment pollution from process industries and their abatement: Fertilizer, paper and pulp, inorganic
acids, petroleum and petrochemicals, recovery of materials from process effluents.
Unit IV Lectures 8
Solid waste and Hazardous waste management
Sources and classification, properties, public health aspects, Sanitary land fill design, Hazardous waste
classification and rules, management strategies, Nuclear waste disposal Treatment methods –
component separation, chemical and biological treatment, incineration, solidification and stabilization,
and disposal methods, Latest Trends in solid waste management.
Unit V Lectures 8
Industrial Noise pollution Sources of noise pollution, characterization of noise pollution prevention&
control of noise pollution, Factories Act 1948 for regulatory aspects of noise pollution.
References
1. Rao C.S., “Environmental Pollution Control Engineering”, 2nd edition
2. Mahajan S.P., “Pollution Control in Process Industries”.
3. Nemerow N.L., “Liquid waste of industry- theories, Practices and Treatment”, Addison Wesley, New
York, 1971
4. Weber W.J., “Physico-Chemical Processes for water quality control”, Wiley Interscience New York,
1969
5. Strauss W., “Industrial Gas Cleaning”, Pergamon, London, 1975
6. Stern A.C., “Air pollution”, Volumes I to VI, academic Press, New York, 1968
7. Peterson and Gross. E Jr., “Hand Book of Noise Measurement”, 7th Edn, 2003.
8. Antony Milne, “Noise Pollution: Impact and Counter Measures”, David & Charles PLC, 2009.
SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT

Course objective:
This course will give the idea about the solid waste management (SWM), equipment and processing
technique for SWM, properties of municipal solid waste and disposal of SWM.
Module 1: Introduction Lecture 8

Philosophy and organization, Status of waste management, Computation an integrated waste
management strategy. Evolution of solid waste management, Legislation and Government agencies
Module 2: Management Lecture 8
Planning solid waste management progress, Generation of solid waste, Onsite handling, Storage and
processing, Transfer and transport, Processing techniques and equipment, Hazardous waste and their
management, Process management issues, Planning, Recovery of resources conservation, Chemical and
Biological methods.
Module 3: Properties of Municipal Solid Waste Lecture 8
State the Physical, Chemical and Biological properties, Describe associated considerations of
Municipal Solid Waste (MSW)
Module 4: Disposal of solid waste Lecture 8

Land filling, Ocean disposing, Source reduction, Recycling, Incineration, Composting.
Module 5: Case studies on major industrial solid waste generation units Lecture 8
Coal fired, power plant, Textile industry, Brewery, Distillery, Oil refinery, radioactive generation units.
Case studies on spills, Sludge lagooning and incineration.
Course outcome:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Idea about the solid waste management.
CO2: Outline sources, types and composition of solid waste with methods of handling, sampling and
storage of solid waste
CO3: Select the appropriate method for solid waste collection, transportation, redistribution and
disposal
CO4: Describe methods of disposal of hazardous solid waste.
Reference Book:
1. Solid Waste, Martell, 1975, John Wiley, NY.
2. Solid Waste, George Techobanuglour, H. Theisen and R. Eliassen.
3. Handbook of Solid Waste by Frank Krieth, 1996, McGraw Hill Inc. NY.
Water Pollution Control
UNIT I Lectures 8
Sources, criteria and standards, physical and chemical characteristics, Pre-Primary, Secondary
and Tertiary treatments of wastewater, sludge digestion and disposal.
UNIT II Lectures 9
Wastewater characteristics; Wastewater treatment objectives, methods, and implementation

considerations.
UNIT II Lectures 8
Principles of physical, chemical, and biological processes, that form the basis for wastewater
and liquid hazardous waste treatment, such as chemical, biological, and thermal oxidation,
carbon adsorption, ion-exchange, membrane processes, air and steam stripping, and chemical
precipitation.
UNIT IV Lectures 8
Design of facilities for physical and chemical treatment; Design of facilities for treatment and
disposal of sludge; Effluent disposal.
Water pollution legislation and regulation.
UNIT V Lectures 9
Schemes for treatment of some typical industrial wastes – pulp and paper, sugar, distillery,
dairy, fertilizer, refinery etc.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
Rao C.S., “Environmental Pollution Control Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Revised, Wiley
Eastern Limited, India, 2006.
Syllabus
SEMESTER VI
PROCESS EQUIPMENT DESIGN

Pre-requisites: Heat transfer and Mass transfer
Objective: Introduce the basic design concepts for chemical process equipment industrial pressure
vessel, storage vessel, heat exchangers, distillation column, absorption column, and reactors used in
chemical industries.
Course Outcome:
CO1. Understand the basic design concept of chemical process equipment
CO2. Design the pressure vessel and its closures, distillation column and absorption column
CO3. Design the heat exchanger as per TEMA standards.
CO4. Apply various designs in process plant.
Detailed syllabus
UNIT I Lectures 08
Heat-exchanger
Design of double pipe heat exchanger, Shell and tube type heat exchanger, over all heat transfer Co-
efficient.
UNIT II
Evaporators Lectures 08
Design of evaporators (Double and triple effect), Over all heat transfer Co-efficient, heating surface
and mechanism of vacuum system etc.
UNIT III Lectures 05

Piping system
Piping: Design of piping system for transfer of fluid covering pipes, valves, fittings, Instrumentation,
insulation, Pumps etc.
UNIT IV Lectures 08
Design of distillation column
Design of distillation column-number of plates, stages arrangement of double caps, Dimeter and
height of the tower and thickness of the shell.
UNIT V Lectures 06
Design of Absorption column
Design of absorption column, Number of transfer units, Dimeter, Height of the tower and the
thickness of the shells
BOOKS RECOMMENDED
Bhattacharyya B.C., “Introduction to Chemical Equipment Design: Mechanical Aspects”, 5th Ed.,
CBS Publishers, New Delhi, 2008.
Kern D.Q., “Process Heat Transfer”, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1965.
Coulson & Richardson’s Chemical Engineering, Vol. 6, 4th Ed., Elesevier, New Delhi, 2006.
Soares C., “Process Engineering Equipment Handbook”, McGraw-Hill, New York, 2002.
Table 1. Relationship of COs to POs for Process Equipment Design (CL 506):
COs/POs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11
CO1. 3 - 2 1 - - - - - - -
CO2. 2 2 3 2 2 - - - - - -
CO3. 3 2 3 2 2 2 - - - - -
CO4. 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - -
INSTRUMENTATIION AND PROCESS CONTROL
Course objective: To provide detail knowledge about various techniques used for the measurement
of primary industrial parameters (Flow, level, temperature and pressure) and application of different
sensor/transducers, final control element for industrial and control system.
Syllabus:
UNIT I Lectures 8
Process variable, Elements of measuring instrument, Static and dynamic response of measuring device;
Different types of thermometer and Thermocouples, Absolute pressure, Gauge Pressure, Differential
Pressure, Measuring pressure for corrosive fluids, Head flow meters, open channel meters, area flow
meters, Flow of dry material.
UNIT II Lectures 10
Transmitter, Transducers, Converter, Multiplexer, Pneumatic control valve, Stepper motor, Motorized
valve; Data acquisition system and intelligent instruments, Process Instrumentation Diagrams:
Representation and symbols, Instrumentation diagram for Distillation Column, Heat exchanger,
Petroleum refinery.
UNIT III Lectures 7
Introductory Concepts: Need for control and automation, Control logic, manipulate variable, Control
variable, set point and load; Blending Tank, Stirred Tank, Reactor, Interacting and Non-Interacting
Process, Modelling considerations for control purposes.
UNIT IV Lectures 9
Linearization of Non-linear function across steady state- Deviation variable, Some Important aspects of
Laplace transforms., Forcing functions (Step, Impulse, Ramp) and their Laplace transfer, Transfer
functions and the input-output models; Dynamics and analysis of first, second and higher order systems,
Transportation Lag, Dead Time.
UNIT V Lectures 6
Concept of feedback control, Closed loop and open loop transfer function, Implementation of block
diagram, Different type of controllers, Control valve characteristics.
Routh stability criterion, Root locus plot and stability analysis, Bode stability criterion Nyquist stability
criterion, Frequency response technique; Phase margin and gain margin;
Text/Reference books
1. Patranabis, D “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation” Tata Mc.Graw Hill Publishing Co.
2. Johnson, C,D,”Process Control Instrumentation Technology” Pearson Education, Inc
3. Coughnaowr, D.D. Process systems Analysis and Control, Mc.Graw –Hill,Inc.
4. SeborgD.E.Edgar, T, and Mellichamp,D.A. “Process Dynamics and Control” John Wiley
and Sons, Inc.
5. Stephanopolous, G “Chemical Process Control” Prenticed –Hall.
Course outcome: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the various measuring devices in chemical industry.

CO2: Able to explain instrumentation diagram in process flow sheet.
CO3: Sketch the block diagram for various chemical processes.
CO4: Examine the stability concerns of a block diagram.
Course outcome mapping with Programme outcomes
CO1 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 3
CO2 2 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - 2
CO3 2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 3
ADVANCE MASS TRANSFER

University Examination: 3 h University Examination Marks: 70
Pre-requisite: Mass Transfer and Separation Processes
Syllabus
Unit I
Humidification-phase rule relations and definitions. Humid heat, humid volume, Enthalpy,
adiabatic saturation process, wet bulb temp., dew point Lewis relation, humidity Charle’s
calculation for humidification dehumidification operations.
Adsorption: Adsorption equilibria; Batch, stage-wise and continuous adsorption; Industrial
absorbers
Unit II
Evaporator-Evaporation, evaporation with direct heating steam headed evaporators natural
circulation units, horizontal tubes, vertical tubes coil evaporators forced circulation
evaporators, film type units.
Operation of evaporators- Heat transfer coefficient, operation under vacuum, single and
multiple effect evaporators, Economy and capacity of multiple effect system, calculations,
forward and backward and mixed feed operation, vapor recompression, integrated evaporators,
in tot total plant economy.
Unit III
Vacuum and steam distillation, azeotropic & extractive distillation. Crystallization: Nucleation
and crystal growth; Controlled growth of crystals; Industrial crystallizers.
Unit IV
Introduction to advance separation techniques, Mass transfer in membranes Reverse Osmosis,
ultra-filtration, Ion exchange,
Text Book / Reference Books:

1. Mass Transfer Operations, Treybal Robert E., 3 rd edition, International Edition, McGraw
Hill.
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, Warren, L., McCabe, Julian C.Smith, Peter
Harriot, 7th Edition, McGraw Hill.
3. Principles and Modern Applications of Mass Transfer Operations, Benitez Jaime, 2 nd
Edition, 2009, John Wiley & Sons
4. Separation Process Principles, Seader J D and Henly E J, John Wiley & sons.
5. Principles of Mass Transfer and Separation Process, Dutta Binay K., PHI, New Delhi.
6. Fundamentals of Momentum Heat and Mass Transfer, Welty, J.R., Wicks, C.W., Wilson,
R.E. and Rorrer, G., John Wiley & Sons.
Course Outcomes (COs):

After completing this course, you should be able to:
CO1: Understand the mass transfer operations and various methods of conducting mass transfer
operations for multi-component system.
CO2: Estimate the diffusivity for the molecular diffusion in gases and liquids.
CO3: Understand various models of inter-phase mass transfer and estimate multi-component mass
transfer coefficients.
CO4: Understand and be able to handle the physical and mathematical complexities involved in multi-
component mass transfer.

POs1 POs2 POs3 POs4 POs5 POs6 POs7 POs8 POs9 POs10 POs11 POs12
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 2
Heterogenous Catalysis
Teaching Scheme:
Course objective
This course will provide students understand the kinetics of reaction heterogenous
catalytic and non-catalytic reaction.
Unit-I Heterogenous catalysts: Homogeneous processes, global and intrinsic rates, and
mechanism of catalytic reactions. Engineering properties of catalysts, surface area
measurement theories and techniques. Lecture 8
Unit-II. Development of rate equations for solid catalysed fluid phase reactions. Estimation
of Kinetic parameters, deactivation of catalyst, rate equation determination for catalytic
deactivation Lecture 8
Unit-III Effective diffusivity, Thiele modulus, effectiveness factor. Analysis of rate data.
Reaction & diffusion within porous catalysts Lecture 8
Unit-IV Fluid- solid reactions: Rate expressions for non-catalytic fluid solid system. Kinetics
of Fluid Solid Reactions: External transport processes, shrinking core model. Lecture 8
Unit-V Fluid-Fluid Reactions: kinetics, design, Straight Mass Transfer, Mass Transfer Plus
Not Very Slow Reaction Lecture 8
Suggested Reading:
1. Chemical Reaction Kinetics By J.M. Smith (3rd Edition Mc Graw Hill)
2. Chemical Reaction Theory an Introduction By K.G. Denbigh & K.G. Turner (2nd Edition United
Press & ELBS 1972)
3. Chemical Kinetic and Reactor Engineering By G. Copper & GVJ jeffery`s (Prentice Hall 1972)
4. Chemical reaction engineering By O.Levenspiel (2nd Edition Willey Eastern,
Singapore)
5. Chemical process Principal Part-III By Houghen Watsn & Ragatz [Kinetics & catalysis
(2nd Edition asian publication House Bombay)]
6. Element of Chemical Reaction Engineering By Fogler ,H.S. (2nd edition Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd. New Delhi 1999)
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Interpret heterogeneous catalytic and non-catalytic processes.

CO2 Evaluate the mass transfer process in reaction system.
CO3 Examine kinetics of catalytic and noncatalytic heterogeneous system.
CO4 Design reactors for heterogeneous processes.
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

outcomes
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - 1 - - -
CO2 3 3 2 3 - - - - 1 - - -
CO3 3 3 2 3 - - 1 - 1 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 - - - 1 - - -
CHEMICAL REACTOR ANALYSIS
Lectures: 3 Periods/week Sessional Marks:
30
University Examination: 3 hours. University Examination Marks:
70
Course Objective:
This course will prove advanced knowledge in reactor design and analysis along with providing
kinetics of heterogenous catalytic process.
UNIT I
Introduction to ideal reactors, performance equation and reaction mechanism analysis for
batch reactor, plug flow reactor, CSTRs, recycle reactor and autocatalytic reactions. Design
for multiple reactions: Reactions in parallel, reactions in series, contacting patterns, product
distribution Lectures 8
UNIT II
Introduction to design for heterogeneous reacting systems: Rate equations for heterogeneous
reactions, contacting patterns for two phase systems.
Lectures 8
UNIT III
Design of fixed bed catalytic reactor-isothermal, adiabatic, non-isothermal reactors, design of
fluidized bed reactor. Lectures 8
UNIT IV
design of slurry reactor, Trickle bed reactor Intra-particle heat and mass transfer-Wheeler’s
parallel pore model, random pore model. Lectures 8
UNIT V
Introduction to biochemical reaction: enzymatic reaction kinematics, Michaelis-Menten
Kinetics, Inhibition by a Foreign Substance-Competitive, fermenter reactor design
Lectures 8
Suggested Reading:
1. Chemical Reaction Kinetics By J.M. Smith (3rd Edition Mc

Graw Hill)
2. Chemical Reaction Theory an Introduction By K.G. Denbigh & K.G. Turner
(2nd Edition United Press & ELBS 1972)
3. Chemical Kinetic and Reactor Engineering By G. Copper & GVJ jeffery`s
(Prentice Hall 1972)
4. Chemical reaction engineering By O.Levenspiel (2 nd Edition
Willey Eastern, Singapore)
5. Chemical process Principal Part-III By HoughenWatsn&Ragatz
[Kinetics & catalysis (2nd Edition asian publication House Bombay)]
6. Element of Chemical Reaction Engineering By Fogler ,H.S. (2nd edition
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi 1999)
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Interpret heterogeneous catalytic and non-catalytic processes.

CO2 Evaluate the mass transfer process in reaction system.
CO3 Examine kinetics of catalytic and noncatalytic heterogeneous system.
CO4 Design reactors for heterogeneous processes.

Course PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4 PSO5 PSO6 PSO7 PSO8 PSO9 PSO10 PSO11 PSO12
outcomes
CO1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - -
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - -
CO3 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - -
CO4 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - -
Materials Characterization
Objective: Characterization of materials is essential to the systematic development of new materials
and understanding how they behave in practical applications. This course focuses on the principal
methods required to characterize broad range of materials such as polymers, ceramics, nanostructures
etc. for their applications based on mechanical, optical, thermal properties of materials.
Course outcomes: At the end of the course, student will be able to
CO1 Identifies the various characterization techniques applicable for the material
CO2 Understand the physical and chemical properties of material
CO3 Analyzed the structural properties, thermal properties and morphology of the material.
CO4 Explain the of the properties of material.
Detailed Syllabus:
UNIT I Lectures: 8
Introduction to materials and Techniques, Production and properties of X-ray, absorption of X-rays and
filters, X-ray - diffraction directions, diffraction methods. X-ray - diffraction intensities, factors
affecting intensity, ‘structure factor’ calculations for simple, body centered, face centered, diamond
cubic and hexagonal crystal structures. Working principles of diffractometer. Indexing of XRD patterns.
Precise lattice parameter determination, Chemical analysis by X-ray diffraction & fluorescence,
determination of particle size and micro/macro strains), energy dispersive X-ray microanalysis (EDS).
UNIT II Lectures: 8
Fundamentals of optics and microscopy techniques, Optical microscope and its instrumental details,
Variants in the optical microscopes and image formation. Sample preparation and applications.
Introduction to scanning electron microscopy (SEM), sample preparation and applications, Instrumental
details and image formation, various imaging techniques and spectroscopy, electron diffraction, and
low energy electron diffraction.
UNIT III Lectures: 6

Introduction to Transmission electron microscopy (TEM), instrumental details and working principles
of TEM. Image formation, science of imaging and diffraction, sample preparation procedures and
instruments for various materials
UNIT IV Lectures: 6
Thermal analysis technique: Differential thermal analysis (DTA), Differential Scanning Calorimetry
(DSC), Thermogravimetric analysis (TGA), UV-VIS spectroscopy
UNIT V Lectures: 8
principles of characterization of other materials properties: BET surface area; chemisorption; particle
size; zeta potential; rheology; and interfacial tension. Introduction to spectroscopy (UV-vis, IR and
Raman)
Texts/References:
1. Y. Leng, Materials Characterization: Introduction to microscopic and spectroscopic methods, 1 st
Ed., John Wiley & Sons, 2008.
2. A.W. Adamson and A.P. Gast, Physical Chemistry of Surfaces, John Wiley, New York, 1997.
3. D.G. Baird and D.I. Collias, Polymer Processing Principles and Design, Butterworth-Heinemann,
Massachusetts, 1995.
4. A.J. Milling, Surface Characterization Methods: Principles, techniques, and applications, Marcel
Dekker, 1999.
5. G. Ertl, H. Knozinger and J. Weitkamp, Handbook of Heterogeneous Catalysis, Vol. 2, Wiley-
VCH, 1997.
6. W.D. Callister (Jr.), Material Science and Engineering: An introduction, 8th Ed., John Wiley &
Sons, 2010.
Chemical Reactor Design

Course objective : To increase the student's ability to do chemical reactor design by providing the
knowledge and tools required to obtain, evaluate, and improve rate equations for use in design,
operation and optimization of chemical reactors.
UNIT I Lectures 6
Introduction to Reactor design: Single ideal Reactor: Ideal batch reactor, space time and space
velocity, steady state mixed flow reactor, steady state plug flow reactor, holding time and space time
for flow systems.
UNIT II Lectures 3
Introduction to design for heterogeneous reacting systems: Rate equations for heterogeneous
reactions, contacting patterns for two phase systems.
UNIT III Lectures 7

Thermal characteristics and design of reactors: Batch reactor, PFR, CSTR under adiabatic
conditions for first order irreversible reactions
Reactor design: Reactor principles, performance. Reactor and catalyst equipment- Selection of
Catalyst, Types of Reactors, Selection of Reactors and Design of Reactor Systems.
UNIT IV Lectures 8
Calculation of equilibrium compositions of a set of simultaneous reactions, Performance calculation for

batch reactor, plug flow reactor and CSTRs, homogeneous and heterogeneous flow reactors for specific
reactions.
UNIT V Lectures 12
Design for Single Reactions: Size comparison of single reactors, multiple reactor systems, recycle
reactor, autocatalytic reactions.
Design for multiple reactions: Reactions in parallel, reactions in series, contacting patterns, product
distribution.
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Analyze the rates of chemical reactions for both homogeneous and heterogeneous reactions
CO2 Evaluate the performance calculation for CSTR, PFR , Batch reactors.
CO3 Understand catalyst activity, selectivity and stability in reactor design.
CO4 Explain Thermal characteristics and design of reactors.
CO5 Differentiate single and multiple reactor systems.
Mapping of course outcomes with program specific outcomes

outcomes
CO1 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - - -
CO2 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - - -
CO3 2 1 1 3 - - - - - - - -
CO4 1 - 1 2 1 - - - - - - -
CO5 1 2 1 3 2
Suggested Reading:
1. Fogler S.H., "Elements of Chemical Reaction Eng.", 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall,1999.
2. Levenspiel, O., ''Chemical Reaction Eng.'' John Wiley & Sons 1972,
3. Froment G.F. and Bischoff K.B., ''Chemical Reactor Analysis and Design'' John Wiley, 1990.
4. Roberts, G.W., ''Chemical Reactions and Chemical Reactors'', Wiley, 2009.
Energy option
Course objective
To impart basic knowledge of current energy sources, scenario, energy conservation, audit and
management.
UNIT I Lectures 8
Fuels: Solids, liquids and gaseous fuels, Availability and classification. Coal: Theories of
formation, Coal composition petrography of Coal calorific value of Coal, Chemical
Constitution of Coal, Action of heat and solvent on coal, Coal preparation, handling and
storage.
UNIT II Lectures 8
Industrial Coal Carbonization low and high temperature carbonization processes Design of
Coke ovens with recovery system. Numerical problems based on Combustion, use of grates,
combustion of pulverized fuel and fluidized bed combustion, efficient utilization of Indian coals
UNIT III Lectures 8

Liquid fuels: Indian cruds & refinery products. Chemical Coal tar distillation Hydrogenation of
Coal, FiacherTropse process, other liquefaction process, Synthesis gas from petroleum
fractions. Gaseous fuel: Natural gas producer gas reactions and its manufacture, water gas,
carbureted water gas
UNIT IV Lectures 8
Analysis of flue gases, complete gasification of Coal Lurgi, Kopper’sTotzek, and Winkler
process synthesis gas form Coal. Renewable sources of energy and their potential, low
Temperature application of solar Energy.
UNIT V Lectures 8
Conversion of Bio-mass and their characteristic, physical thermo-chemical and Bio-logical
methods of their conversion, Fuel cell
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Understand the basic concepts of coal energy and Indian cruds & refinery products.
CO2 Numerical problems based on Combustion and fluidized bed combustion.
CO3 Analyse of different different energy sources.
CO4 Examine and apply for applications.
Suggested Reading:
1. Coal Energy system By Bruce Miller, (Published-Academic Press)
2. Fuels and their Combustion By Robert T.HASLAM (5th edition, McGraw Hill)
Fuel and Combustion Technology
Teaching Scheme: Sessional Marks: 30
Lectures: 3 periods/week University Examination Marks: 70
University Examination: 3 hours
Course Objective: This course will provide knowledge regarding solid, liquid and gaseous fuels,
their origin, classification, properties, preparation and combustion characteristic of fuel.
Unit 1 Lectures 8
Solid fuels: Classification, preparation, cleaning, analysis, ranking and properties - action of heat,
oxidation, hydrogenation, carbonization, liquefaction and gasification.
Liquid fuels: Petroleum origin, production, composition, classification, petroleum processing,
properties, testing - flow test, smoke points, storage and handling.
Unit 2 Lectures 8
Secondary liquid fuels: Gasoline, diesel, kerosene and lubricating oils. Liquid fuels - refining,
cracking, fractional distillation, polymerization. Modified and synthetic liquid fuels. ASTM methods of
testing the fuels.
Unit 3 Lectures 10
Gaseous fuels: Types, natural gas, methane from coal mine, water gas, carrier gas, producer gas, flue
gas, blast furnace gas, biomass gas, refinery gas, LPG - manufacture, cleaning, purification and analysis.
Fuels for spark ignition engines, knocking and octane number, anti knock additives, fuels for
compression, engines, octane number, fuels for jet engines and rockets. Flue gas analysis by
chromatography and sensor techniques.
Unit 4 Lectures 6
Combustion: Stochiometry, thermodynamics. Nature and types of combustion processes –
Mechanism-ignition temperature, explosion range, flash and fire points, calorific value, calorific
intensity and theoretical flame temperature.
Unit 5 Lectures 6
Combustion calculations, theoretical air requirements, flue gas analysis, combustion kinetics–
hydrogen-oxygen reaction and hydrocarbon-oxygen reactions.
Rocket propellants and Explosives - classification, brief methods of preparation, characteristics; storage
and handling
1. Fuels and Combustion, Samir Sarkar, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd, 3 rd edition, 2009
2. Fuels - Solids, liquids and gases - Their analysis and valuation, H. Joshua Philips, Biobliolife
Publisher, 2008.
3. An introduction to combustion: Concept and applications - Stephen R Turns, Tata Mc. Graw
Hill, 3rd edition, 2012.
4. Fundamentals of Combustion, D P Mishra, 1st edition, University Press, 2010
5. Engineering Chemistry - R. Mukhopadhyay and Sriparna Datta, Newage International Pvt.
Ltd, 2007.
Course Outcomes: After completion of this course students will able to

CO1: Classify different kinds of fuels used in process industries.
CO2: Examine the quality of fuel using different test methods.
CO3: Report the flue gas analysis from combustion process.
CO4: Demonstrate the combustion process mechanism of fuel.
Course outcome mapping with Programme outcomes
CO1 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - 2
CO2 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 - - - - 3
CO3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 - - - - 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 - - - - 3
Fertilizer technology

Course objective
To enable the students to learn the fertilizer manufacturing including new or modified fertilizer
products and new techniques.
Unit – I Lectures 10
Definition of fertilizer, nutrient requirement of different plants paddy, wheat, sugarcane
Natural way of fixing nitrogen, Nitrogen cycle, carbon cycle, different nitrogen fixing plants,
bacteria and algae. Role of C/N ratio in the growth of different plants. Organic manure.
Unit-II Lectures 10
Production of ammonia-its feed preparation, limitations of using different feed material for
hydrogen generation, Reforming process and reformer design. Partial oxidation process and
partial oxidation reactor design.
Unit-III Lectures 10
Removal of Impurities from synthesis gas CO removal and shift reactor design.CO 2 removal
methods, Design of CO2 absorber, NH3 synthesis loop design, Design considerations for
different types of NH3 Reactors.
Unit-IV Lectures 10
Phosphate fertilizers-different methods of production, NPK, production and drying of NPK
fertilizers, Bio-fertilizer.
Unit-V Lectures 10
Urea production; special features of urea reactor, prilling tower design.
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Understand the basic concepts of fertilizer for agriculture and manufacturing process.
CO2 Design of ammonia reactor and urea pilling tower.
CO3 Analyse of different fertilizers.
CO4 Examine different fertilizer for different agriculture purpose.
Suggested Reading:
1. Chemistry and Technology of Fertilizers By V. Sauchelli, (Reinhold Publications)
2. Hand book on Fertilizers By Vasant Gowariler,

V.N.Krishnamurthy and Sudha Gowariker (published, Fertilizer Association of India, New Delhi)
3. Dryden’s Outlines of Chemical Technology By M. Gopala Rao Sitting Marshal
(Affiliated East West Press (Pvt) Ltd, 3 rd Ed., New Delhi).
4. Shreve’s Chemical Process Industries, By Austin G.T. (5th edition, McGraw

Hill publication, New Delhi)
5. Chemical Technology – By Pandey G.N. and Shukla Vol. I

and II, 2nd edition (Vani Books Company – Hyderabad)
Department of Civil Engineering
B.I.T. Sindri, Dhanbad
5thsemester -Course Structure
Sl.no Course no. Subject L T P Credit

.
1 CE5PC01 PC-I - SteelStructure& Design 4 1 0 4
2 CE5PC02 PC-II -Geotechnical Engineering-I 3 1 0 3
3 CE5PC03 PC-III - Environmental Engineering 3 1 0 3
4 CE5PE01() PE-I - 3 1 0 3
5 CE5OE01() OE-I - 3 1 0 3
1 Lab-1 Sessional- SteelDesign Lab 0 0 3 1
2 Lab-2 Sessional- Geotechnical Engineering Lab 0 0 3 1
3 Lab-3 Sessional- Environmental EngineeringLab 0 0 3 1
4 Lab-4 Field Survey 0 0 3 1
5 General Proficiency/Seminar 0 0 2 2
TOTAL CREDIT 22
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – I
[CE5PE01(A)] Water Resources Engineering-I
[CE5PE01(B)] Earthquake Engineering
[CE5PE01(C)] EnvironmentalGeo-technology
[CE5PE01(D)] Advance Surveying
[CE5PE01(E)] Water resources system
[CE5PE01(F)] IndustrialStructure
[CE5PE01(G)] DesignofStructural System
OPEN ELECTIVE – I
[CE5OE01(A)] EnvironmentalImpact Assessment
[CE5OE01(B)] Reliability Engineering
[CE5OE01(C)] Global Positioning System
[CE5OE01(D)] Disaster Management
[CE5OE01(E)] Environmental Management System
[CE5OE01(F)] Advanced Engineering System – MechanicalDepartment
[ ] Human ResourceDevelopmentandOrganisationalBehaviour – Humanities Department
[] Cyber Lawand Ethics – Humanities Department
PROFESSIONAL CORE – I
CE5PC01 STEEL STRUCTURE PC – I 4-1-0 4 Credits

&DESIGN
Pre-requisites: None
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Introduction to steel structures and IS 800-2007- Material
specifications - Rolled sections – Section classifications - Design
approach; design philosophy, i.e. loading load combination,
1. factor of safety, permissible and working stress elastic method, 12
limit state of design, plastic design, Elements of plastic theory:-
Plastic hinge, shape factor, collapse load for beams & portal
frame. Uniqueness, upper & lower bound theorem. Effect of axial
force & shear in plastic moment ofsections.
Connections: riveted, bolted and welded connections, strength
2. 12
and efficiency, Eccentric connection
3. Tension member: rolled sections and built-up sections, 8
Compression members - Slenderness ratio – Design - Simple and
4 10
built- up sections - lacings and battens - Tension members.
Flexural members – Rolled sections - built-up beams - Design
5. for strength and serviceability, web crippling, webyielding, 10
bearing stiffeners,
BEAM column: stability consideration, interaction formulae
and Column bases: stability of base, gusseted base and grillage
6. 8
footing
Plate Girder, Gantry Girder,
Reading:
1. Subramanian N, Design of Steel Structures, Oxford University Press, New Delhi2008.
2. Dayaratnam P, Design of Steel Structures, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi,2003.
3. Arya, A.S and Ajmani, A.L., Design of Steel Structures, Nemchand and brothers, Roorkee,
1992..
4. Punmia, B.C., Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain. Comprehensive Design of Steel
Structures, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi2000.
5. IS 800-2007, Code of practice for general construction in steel, Bureau of Indian Standards,
NewDelhi.
PROFESSIONAL CORE – II
CE5PC02 Geotechnical Engineering-I PC – II 3-1-0 3 Credits
Pre-requisites: None
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Engineering Properties and Classifications
Laboratory and field identification of soils:
Determination of water content by oven drying– specific gravity
using Pycnometer and specific gravity bottle – grain size analysis
by sieveanalysis, hydrometer analysis and pipette analysis –
Atterberg limit and indices, sensitivity &thixotropy field density
1. 10
by core cutter, sand replacement and wax coating
methods.Permeability: Definition - Darcy’s law - factors affecting
permeability – laboratorydetermination – permeability of stratified
soils. Classification of Soils: Necessity – Principles of
classification – I.S. classification – plasticitychart.
Stress Distribution in Soils

Stress distribution: Boussinesque’s and Westergaard’s
equations for vertical pressure due topoint loads and uniformly
2. distributed loads - assumptions and limitations - pressure bulb – 4
Newmarks` charts and their use
Compressibility of Soils
Consolidation: definition - concepts of coefficient of
compressibility - coefficient of volumechange and compression
index - e-log p curves - pre-consolidation pressure -
Terzaghi’stheory of one-dimensional consolidation - determination
3. of coefficient of consolidation -difference between consolidation 12
and compaction
Compaction: definition and objectives of compaction - proctor test
and modified proctor test- concept of OMC and maximum dry
density - zero air voids line - factors influencingcompaction - field
compaction methods - Proctor needle for field control
Shear Strength and Stability of Slopes:
Shear Strength: definition - Mohr’s strength and stress
circles - Mohr’s envelope – MohrCoulomb strength theory - direct,
triaxial and UCC tests - drainage conditions-UU, CU andCD tests -
4 8
vane shear tests - total and effective stress - strength parameters
Stability of slopes: slope failure, base failure and toe failure -
Swedish circle method -friction circle method - Taylor’s stability
number - stability charts
Retaining Walls :
5. Retaining walls, Active, neutral and Passive earth pressures 6
and their distributions, rigid and flexible retaining walls,
Coulomb’s and Rankine’s earth pressure distribution, Tension
cracks, depth of tension cracks, Critical depth of excavation
Sub-surface Exploration :
Subsurface exploration and investigation: Preliminary and
6. detailed investigation, Soil sampling and various terms such as 4
clearance and recovery ratio, auguring and boring, Penetration
tests such as SPT, CPT, SCPT
PROFESSIONAL CORE – III
CE5PC03 ENVIROMENTAL ENGINEERING PC – III 3-1-0 3 Credits
Pre-requisites:None
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Water demand: - Population- forecast, design period, factors
1. affecting populations growth, water demand, factors affecting rate of 8
demand, variations in rate of demand.
Quality of water: - sources of impurities, common impurities in
water and their effect, water analysis, physical, chemical and
2. 8
biological characteristics, water borne diseases, Indian andWHO
drinking standard.
Purification: Sedimentation, flocculation, coagulation, filtration,
3. disinfection, water softening, aeration, miscellaneous treatment 8
method.
Distribution of water: - Introductions , Methods of distribution,
pressure in distribution mains, system of water supply, storage and
4. 12
distribution reservoir, layout and design of distribution system and
distribution reservoir.
Waste water treatment: - Sewage characteristics.
Sewerage system: - Type, design, construction and maintenance.
Treatment :- Primary and secondary treatments, screens, grit
chamber, sedimentation chamber, principle and design of activated
5. 12
sludge digestion, final disposal of sludge and effluents, Disposal of
sewage by dilution, self-purification of streams, sewage disposal by
irrigation, waste water reuse, solid waste collection, re-
utilization/disposal, B.O.D, C.O.D.
Reference Books
1. G.B. Masters, Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science, Pearson
Education,2013.
2. Gerard Kiely, Environmental Engineering, McGraw Hill Education Pvt Ltd, Special
Indian
Edition, 2007.
3. W P Cunningham, M A Cunningham, Principles of Environmental Science, Inquiry and
Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, Eighth Edition,2016.
4. M. Chandrasekhar, Environmental science, Hi Tech Publishers,2009
PROFESSIONAL ELLECTIVE – I
CE5PE01(A) WATER RESOURCES PE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits

ENGINEERING – I
Prerequisite: Fluid Mechanics
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Introduction - Hydrologic cycle, water-budget equation, history of
1. hydrology,worldwaterbudget,WaterbudgetofIndia,Organization 4
preserving hydrological data,
Precipitation – types and forms of precipitation, different characteristics
of rainfall and their representation, measurement of rainfall , rain gauge
2. network, mean precipitation over an area, depth area-duration 8
relationships, maximum intensity/depth-duration-frequency relationship,
Probable Maximum Precipitation (PMP), rainfall data in India
Abstractions from precipitation - evaporation process, evaporimeters,
analytical methods of evaporation estimation, reservoir evaporation and
methods for its reduction, evapotranspiration, measurement of
evapotranspiration,evapotranspiration equations, potential
3. 10
evapotranspiration, actual evapotranspiration, interception, depression
storage, infiltration, infiltration capacity, measurement of infiltration,
infiltration capacity curve, classification of infiltrationcapacities,
infiltration indices
Runoff –components ofrunoff , Estimation of run off, SCS-CN method of
estimating runoff, flow duration curve, flow-mass curve, Different types
4. 4
ofindices.
Hydrograph: Elements of storm hydrograph, simple and complex storm

hydrograph, factors affecting runoff hydrograph, components of
5. 10
hydrograph, base flow separation, effective rainfall, unit hydrograph,
Derivation of unit hydrograph from S- Curve technique, SUH and IUH.
Floods estimation and Flood Routing: Estimation of peak discharge,
rational method, SCS method and unit hydrograph method, Design flood,
6. 8
return period, flood frequency analysis, concepts of flow routing,
Different methods of routing,PMF,SPF
Reading:
1. 1.KSubramanya, Engineering Hydrology, Mc-GrawHill.
2. K N Muthreja, Applied Hydrology, Tata Mc-GrawHill.
3. K Subramanya, Water Resources Engineering through Objective Questions, TataMc-
a. GrawHill.
CE5PE01(B) EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING PE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
Pre-requisites: NA
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Elements of Seismology ,Definitions of Magnitude, Intensity,
Epicenter, etc. General features of tectonic of seismic regions,
1. 8
Seismographs. Theory of Vibrations
Free vibrations of single degree, two degree and multiple degree

freedom systems. Computation of dynamic response to time
2. 8
dependent forces. Vibration isolation. Vibration absorbers.
Principles of Earthquake Resistant Design ,Response spectrum

3. theory. Brief introduction to accelerographs and S.R.R.’s. 8
Nature of dynamic loading resulting from earthquakes.

Application of Response spectrum. Theory to a seismic design to
structures. Resistance of structural elements and structures for
4. 8
dynamic loads, design criteria-strength and deflection. Ductility
and absorption of energy.
Dynamic Properties of Soils, Remedial measures and

5. management of earthquake disaster , Introduction to Indian 8
Standard Codes IS : 1893 – 1984 and IS: 4326 – 1993
CE5PE01(C) ENVIRONMENTAL GEO- PE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits

TECHNOLOGY
Pre-requisites:None
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

A consideration of technical and scientific aspects of key geo-
1. 8
societal issues.
Case studies and analysis of current and historic databases will
be used to illustrate topics including impact of climate change,
2. 16
energy resources, water and soil pollution, and health risks
posed by heavy metals and emerging pollutants.
Influence of disposal of industrial and construction waste on the
3. 12
Geo-environment
Effect and impact of effluent from chemical and mining
4. 8
industries on ground water, Design of clay liners
Reference Books
1. Introduction to Environmental Geotechnology by Hsai – YangFang

2. CDEEP, IITB video lectures on course CE 488 and CE 641 by Prof. D. N.Singh
CE5PE01(D) ADVANCE SURVEYING PE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
Pre-requisites: Surveying &Geomatics
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Field Astronomy: Introduction, purposes, astronomical terms,
Astronomical coordinate system, astronomical triangle,
1. determination of azimuth, declination & hour angle, different 12
types of time, LMT, ST & GMT and interdependencies.
Equation of time,
Aerial photogrammetry: Introduction, Principle, Uses, Aerial
& terrestrial photographs, Scale of vertical and tilted
2. photograph, photographic mapping- mapping using paper 10
prints, mapping using stereoplotting instruments, mosaics,map
substitutes.
Remote Sensing And Geographical Information System:
Introduction, Electromagnetic spectrum, Principles of energy
interaction in atmosphere and earth surface, Image interpretation
techniques, digital satellite data; Global Positioning system:
3. 12
Definition of GIS, Key Components of GIS, Functions of GIS,
Spatial data, spatial information system, Geospatial analysis,
Integration of Remote sensing & GIS and Applications in Civil
Engineering
Hydrographic surveying: Introduction, shoreline survey,
4. sounding method of locating sounding, Three pointproblem. 10
Reading:
1. Surveying Vol. II and III by Dr. B.C. Punamia, Laxmi Publishers. NewDelhi
2. Surveying Vol. II and III by Dr. K.R. Arora, Standard Book House. NewDelhi
3. Advanced Surveying by R. Agor, Khanna Publishers, NewDelhi
4. Remote Sensing and GIS by B Bhatia, Oxford University Press, NewDelhi.
5. Remote sensing and Image interpretation by T.M Lillesand,. R.W Kiefer,. and J.W
Chipman, 5th edition, John Wiley and SonsIndia
CE5PE01(E) WATER RESOURCE SYSTEM PE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
Pre-requisites: Fluid Mechanics & Hydrology
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Introduction and Basic Concepts: Introduction, System
Components, Planning and management, Concept of a system,
1. Advantages and limitations of systems approach, Modeling of 6
Water Resources Systems, Simulation andoptimization,
Economics in water resources, Challenges in water sector
Linear Programming and Applications: General form of LP,
Standard and Canonical forms of LP, Elementary
transformations, Graphical method, Feasible and infeasible
2. 8
solutions, Simplex method, Dual and sensitivity analysis, LP
problem formulation, Reservoir sizing and Reservoir operation
using LP
Simulation: Introduction, River basin simulation, Reservoir
3. operation simulation, Performance evaluation - Reliability, 4
Resiliency and Vulnerability, Some simulation models
Water Resources Systems Modeling: River basin planning and
management, Water distribution systems, Groundwater systems,
4. 8
Water quality modeling, Floodplain management, Urban storm
water management
Reading:
1. Loucks D.P, Stedinger J.R and Haith D.A, ‘Water Resources Systems Planning and
Analysis’, Prentice Hall, USA, 1981.
CE5PE01(F) INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES PE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
Pre-requisites: Steel Structure
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Industrial steel building frames: Types of frames, bracing, crane
1. 6
girders and columns, workshop sheds, trussed bents
Transmission and Communication towers: Types and
configuration, Analysis and design; Chimneys; Loads and
2. stresses in chimney shaft, Earthquake and wind effect, Stresses 10
due to temperature difference, combined effect of loads and
Temperature
Silos and Bunkers; Jassen’s theory, Airy’s theory, Shallow and
deep bins, Rectangular bunkers with slopping bottom,
3. Rectangular bunkers with high side walls, Steel stacks; 12
introduction, force acting on a steel stack, design consideration,
design example of stacks
Concrete Shell Structures: Folded plate and cylindrical shell
structures; Introduction, structural behaviour of long and short
4 10
shells, beam and arch action, analysis and design of cylindrical
shell structures
Machine foundations; introduction, machine vibration, structural
design of foundation to rotary machines, impact machines,
5. vibration characteristics, design consideration of foundation to 10
impact machine, grillage, pile and raft foundation.
Reading:
1. 1.Design of Steel Structures, Arya and Azmani, Nem Chand Brothers, Roorkee,2004
2. Punmia B.C, Ashok Kr. Jain, Arun Kr. Jain, RCC Designs (Reinforced Concrete Design),
10th Edition, Lakshmi Publishers,2006.
3. Ramachandra, Design of Steel Structures, 12th Edition, Standard Publishers,2009.
CE5PE01(G) DESIGN OF STRUCTURAL PE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
SYSTEMS
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Classification of structural systems, Loads, assumptions and
1. 10
Idealizations
The whole structural design process including definition of
2. 18
functional requirements, selection of structural scheme
Formulation of design criteria, preliminary and computer- aided
3. proportioning, and analysis of response, cost, and value. 18
Reading:
1. Structural Stability - Theory and Implementation by W.F.Chen and E.M.Lui byElsevier.
2. Reeve,D., Chadwick, A. and Fleming, C. Coastal Engineering-Processes, theory and
design practice, Spon Press, Taylor & Francis Group, London &Paris,2004.
OPEN ELLECTIVE – I
CE5OE01(A) ENVIRONMENT IMPACT OE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits

ASSESSMENT
Prerequisites: Environmental Engineering
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Evolution of EIA: Concepts ofEIA methodologies,
1. 8
Screening and scoping;
Rapid EIA and Comprehensive EIA; GeneralFramework for
2. Environmental Impact Assessment, Characterization and 8

site assessment.Environmental Risk Analysis
Definition of Risk, Matrix Method. Checklist method,
Faulttree analysis, Consequence Analysis; Socioeconomic
3. 12
aspects, measures of effectiveness of pollution control
activities
Environmental Legislation; Introduction to
EnvironmentalManagement Systems; Environmental
Statement - procedures; Environmental Audit: CostBenefit
4 14
Analysis; Life Cycle Assessment; Resource Balance,
Energy Balance &ManagementReview; Operational
Control;
5 Case Studies on EIA. 2

CE5OE01(B) RELIABILITY ENGINEERING OE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
Pre-requisites: NA
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Introduction: Definitions and concepts, Reliability , Probability,
Impossible and certain events. Failure-data and its Analysis, Hazard
1. 10
rate and Failure density, Reliability in terms of hazard rate, Failure
density in other situations.
Hazard Models : Type of distribution and standard deviation and
2. 8
variance, Expectations , Conditional probabilities.
System Reliability : Series, Parallel and mixed configurations.
3. 8
Methods of solving Complex systems.
Reliability improvement : Types of redundancies, Reliability
4. allocation for a series of system, Optimization Reliability- cost trade- 8
off.
CE5OE01(C) GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM OE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
Pre-requisites: NA
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Overview of GPS – Development of Global Surveying Techniques,
1. History of GPS, New Satellite Navigations constellations, Basic concept 8
of GPS, Space, Control and User segments.
GPS Observables – Structure of GPS Signal, Frequency, P Code, C/A
code and data format, Generation of C/A code, Navigation data bits
2. Pseudo range measurements, Phase measurements, system accuracy 8
characteristics, DOP, Data format.
Surveying with GPS–Planning a GPS Survey, Positioning methods –

3. point positioning, relative positioning, Static, Fast static, RTK, 8
Differential Positioning, Post processing, real-time processing,
Accuracy measures, software modules, Network adjustments, Dilution of

4 Precision. 8
Applications of GPS – General Uses of GPS, Attitude determination,

Interoperability of GPS.
5 8
Future of GPS – Modernization plans of navigational satellites,
Hardware and software improvements.
Reading:
1. Bradford W. Parkinson, James Spilker, Global Positioning System: Theory and Applications,
Vol. I, 1996.
2. Gunter Seeber, Satellite Geodesy Foundations, Methods and Applications, Walter de
Gruyter Pub., 2003.
3. Hofmann W.B, Lichtenegger, H, Collins, J Global Positioning System – Theory and
Practice, Springer-VerlagWein, 2001.
CE5OE01(D) DISASTER MANAGEMENT OE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
Pre-requisites: NA
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Understanding Disaster:Concept of Disaster – Different approaches-
Concept of Risk – Levels of Disasters – Disaster Phenomena and Events
(Global, national and regional) Hazards and Vulnerabilities: Natural and
man-made hazards; response time, frequency and forewarning levels of
1. 8
different hazards – Characteristics and damage potential or
natural hazards; hazard assessment – Dimensions of vulnerability
factors; vulnerability assessment – Vulnerability and disaster risk –
Vulnerabilities to flood and earthquake hazards
Disaster Management Mechanism:Concepts of risk management and
crisis managements – Disaster Management Cycle – Response and
2. 8
Recovery – Development, Prevention, Mitigation and Preparedness –
Planning for Relief
Capacity Building:Capacity Building: Concept – Structural and
Nonstructural Measures Capacity Assessment; Strengthening Capacity
for Reducing Risk – Counter-Disaster Resources and their utility in
3. 8
Disaster Management – Legislative Support at the state and national
levels
Coping with Disaster:Coping Strategies; alternative adjustment processes

4 – Changing Concepts of disaster management – Industrial Safety Plan; 8
Safety norms and survival kits Mass media and disaster management
Planning for disaster management:Strategies for disaster management
planning – Steps for formulating a disaster risk reduction plan – Disaster
5 management Act and Policy in India – Organizational structure for 8
disaster management in India – Preparation of state and district disaster
management plans
TEXT BOOKS:
Manual on Disaster Management, National Disaster Management, Agency Govt of India.
Disaster Management by MrinaliniPandey Wiley 2014.
Disaster Science and Management by T. Bhattacharya, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt Ltd Wiley 2015
CE5OE01(E) ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT OE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
SYSTEM
Pre-requisites: NA
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Environmental Management System in Industry : Quality of environment.
1. ISO 14000 Environment standards, EMS model. Policy planning process, 8
implementation and operation in industry.
Environmental Pollution & Control Techniques: Definition of pollution,

2. pollutant and significance of pollution of pollution control. Types of 8
environment pollution: air, water and land pollution and control.
Hazardous waste management system : landfill as incineration,

environment problems and solution Concept of Restoration Ecology and
3. 8
Reclamation of degraded land.
Environment Impact Assessment and Audits : Basic concept of EIA,

Needs for EIA and Methods. Introduction and Significance of
4 8
Environment Audit. Audit regulations, standards and protocols. Setting up
EIA and Audit Division in Industry.
Disasters and their management: Introduction of disasters, Classification
and sub types of disasters. Industrial disasters and related case studies.
5 8
Precautions of SHE in disaster management. Role of SHE in disaster
management
CE5OE01(F) ADVANCE ENGINEERING OE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits

SYSTEMS
Pre-requisites: NA
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Equations of motion for simple physical system. mechanical,
1. 10
electrical and eectromechanical systems
Equations of motion for simple heat, conduction and fluid system.

Analogies. Equations of motion for mechanical system in two and three 12
2.
dimension. Dynamic response of first orderand
second order systems
Forced oscillations of elementary systems. Dynamic stability of

3. compound system. Total response of compound 12
system. Fundamentals of compound systemanalysis.
* Human Resource Development and Organizational Behavior (syllabus prepared and taught by
Training and placement Cell, BIT, Sindri)
* Cyber Law and Ethics (syllabus prepared and taught by CSE & IT Department)
Department of Civil Engineering
B.I.T. Sindri, Dhanbad
6th semester -Course Structure
Sl.no Course no. Subject L T P Credit

.
1 CE6PC01 PC-I - Concrete Structure-II 4 1 0 4
2 CE6PC02 PC-II - Structural Analysis-II 3 1 0 3
3 CE6PC03 PC-III - Highway Engineering 3 1 0 3
4 CE6PE01() PE-I - 3 1 0 3
5 CE6OE01() OE-I - 3 1 0 3
1 Lab-1 Sessional- ConcreteDesign Lab 0 0 3 1
2 Lab-2 Sessional- Transportation Engineering Lab 0 0 3 1
3 Lab-3 Sessional- Structural EngineeringLab 0 0 3 1
4 Lab-4 C.S.Q.A. 0 0 3 1
5 IN601 Tour&Training/Internship 0 0 2 2
TOTAL CREDIT 22
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – I
[CE6PE01(A)] Water Resources Engineering-II

[CE6PE01(B)] Pavement Design
[CE6PE01(C)] Bridge engineering
[CE6PE01(D)] Structural Dynamics
[CE6PE01(E)] System Engineering &Economics
[CE6PE01(F)] Masonry Structure
OPEN ELECTIVE – I
[CE6OE01(A)] IndustrialWaste Treatment

[CE6OE01(B)] Composite Material
[CE6OE01(C)] Environmental Laws and Policy
[CE6OE01(D)] Operational Research Technique
[CE6OE01(E)] Value and Ethics in engineering
[CE6OE01(F)] Decision and Risk Analysis
PROFESSIONAL CORE – I
CE6PC01 CONCRETE STRUCTURE-II PC-I 4-1-0 4 Credits
Pre-requisites: Strength of Materials
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Design of Residential Buildings: fundamentals of multi-storey
buildings, analysis of various loads: gravity, wind, earthquake
1. loads., method of substitute frames, design examples, bending 12
moments in columns, analysis of multistory frames subjected to
horizontal loads.
Design of RCC water tanks: Uncracked structures and
determination of basic parameters, Revision of working stress
design philosophies. Introduction to water tanks and their
classifications, Important IS codes and its provisions, Analysis
2. and design of Circular water tanks with flexible base and 12
restrained base. Analysis and design of Rectangular water tanks,
Analysis of Overhead tanks, Intze tank- basic geometrical
configurations; analysis methods; design of top domes,
cylindrical walls, ring beam.
Design of Silos and Bunkers: Introduction, difference between
bunker and silo, design of square or rectangular bunkers, design
3. of circular bunkers, design examples, silos for storage of cement, 10
design examples.
Design of Simple Bridges: Bridges – basic definition,

importance, classification., Site investigations for design of a
bridge, Various loads and their combinations, Relevant IRC
4. 12
codes and its provisions, Introduction to RC bridge-, design of
Culvertand T-beam bridge,.
PROFESSIONAL CORE – II
CE6PC02 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS II PC-II 3-1-0 3 Credits Prereq

uisites: Structural Analysis I
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Analysis of fixed beams, continuous beam, simple frames and
redundant frames with and without translation of points. Method
1. 12
of consistent deformation, Strain energy method, Slope
deflection method, Moment distribution method.
Analysis of two hinged arches. Suspension bridges with two
2. 10
hinged stiffening girder.
Structural theorems:-Linearity principle of
3. superposition,virtualwork,energy theorems, reciprocal theorems, 6
Muller's Breslau's principles.
Basics of force and displacement matrix methods for
4. 10
beams,plane frame (rigid and pin-pointed)
Influence lines:-Influence lines for propped
5. 10
cantilevers,continuous beams and two hinged arches
PROFESSIONAL CORE – III
CE6PC03 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING PC-III 3-1-0 3 Credits
Prerequisites: None
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Highway development and planning-Classification of roads,
1. road development in India, Current road projects in India; 6
highway alignment and project preparation.
Geometric design of highways-: Introduction; highway cross
2. section elements; sight distance, design of horizontal and vertical 12
alignment; Grade compensation
Traffic engineering & control- Traffic Characteristics, traffic
engineering studies, traffic flow and capacity, traffic regulation
3. 10
and control; Design of signals, design of road intersections;
design of parking facilities; highway lighting; problems
Design of pavements- Introduction; flexible pavements, factors
affecting design and performance; stresses in flexible
pavements; design of flexible pavements as per IRC; rigid
4. 12
pavements- components and functions; factors affecting design
and performance of CC pavements; stresses in rigid pavements;
design of concrete pavements as per IRC; problems
Pavement materials- Materials used in Highway Construction-
Soils, Stone aggregates, bituminous binders, bituminous paving
5. mixes; Portland cement and cement concrete: desirable 8
properties, tests, requirements for different types of pavements.
Problems
PROFESSIONAL ELLECTIVE – I
CE6PE01(A) WATER RESOURCE PE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits

ENGINEERING II
Prerequisites: Water Resources Engineering I
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

1. Irrigation Principles and planning 10
Definition of Irrigation, development of irrigation in India.
Benefits and ill effects of Irrigation. Types of method of irrigation
system. quality of irrigation water, water requirements and
irrigation scheduling, duty and data & base periods and their
relationship, improvements of duty.
2. Canal design and layouts , types of canal 10
Canal alignment –
Canal design – Kennedy’s Silt theory method, Laceyes regime
theory. RangaRaju and Misri Method. Basak Method, Tractive
shear approach ,layout of canals. Conveyance losses.
3. Diversion head Works, Layout of diversion head works, 8
Components of head works, Bligh’s and lane’s theories, Khosla
theory, Design of weir& Barrage
4. Canal Regulation Works: Different types of regulation 8
works, Types and Design of falls.
Types and design of regulators, Cross regulator, head
regulator, canal escapes, canal modulus etc.
5 Cross – Drainage Works 6
Types of cross-drainage works and design of aqueducts.
River Training Works
Meandering of rivers, cut off, spurs, guide banks ,marginal
embankment. Channel Improvements
CE6PE01(B) PAVEMENT DESIGN PE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
Prerequite: Highway Engineering
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

1. Introduction: Types and component parts of pavements, 6
Factors affecting design and performance of pavements.
Highway and airport pavements.
Stresses and Deflection sin Flexible Pavements: Stresses

and deflection sin homogeneous masses. Burmister's two
layer theory, three layer and multi-layer theories; wheel
2. load stresses, various factors in traffic wheel loads; ESWL 10
of multiple wheels.
Repeated loads and EWL factors; sustained loads.
Pavement behaviour under transient traffic loads.
Flexible Pavement Design Methods For Highways and
Airports: Empirical, semi-empirical and theoretical
approaches, development, principle, design steps,
advantages; design of flexible pavements as per IRC;
3. Stresses in Rigid Pavements: Types of stresses and causes, 10
factors in fluencing the stresses; general considerations in
rigid pavement analysis, EWL; wheel load stresses,
warping stresses, frictional stresses, combined stresses.
Rigid Pavement Design: Types of joint sin cement concrete

pavements and their functions, joint spacings; design of CC
pavement for roads and run ways as per IRC, design of
4. joint details for longitudinal joints, contraction joints and 10
expansion joints. IRC method of design by stress ratio
method.
Design of continuously reinforced concrete pavements;

Maintenance, repair and rehabilitation of pavements
5 including design of bituminous and concrete over lays as 8
per IRC
CE6PE01(C) BRIDGE ENGINEERING PE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
Prerequisites: Highway Engineering
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

General; classification of bridges, site selection, geometric
1. 6
and hydraulic design consideration
Loading standards for highway and railway bridges, general
design consideration; optimum spans; Concrete bridges:
culverts; Slab, T-beam, box girder bridges, balanced
2. 12
cantilever bridge, cable stayed bridge, extrados bridges;
arch bridge;
Special requirements for Prestressed Concrete bridges; Steel

3. 12
bridges: plate girder bridge, truss bridge, suspension cable
bridge, cable stayed bridge; Substructures: design of piers
and abutments, pile and well foundations, bearings and
expansion joints, special wearing coats
seismic design considerations; Aerodynamic stability

4. considerations; special durability measures; provisions for 10
inspection and maintenance;
CE6PE01(D) STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS PE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
Prerequisites: Structural Engineering I
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

THEORY OF VIBRATIONS
Difference between static loading and dynamic loading – Degree
of freedom – idealisation of structure as single degree of freedom,
1. – Formulation of Equations of motion of SDOF system – 9
D’Alemberts principles – effect of damping – free and forced
vibration of damped and undamped structures – Response to
harmonic and periodic forces.
Two degree of freedom system – modes of vibrations –
formulation of equations of motion of multi degree of freedom
2. (MDOF) system – Eigen values and Eigen vectors – Response to 9
free and forced vibrations – damped and undamped MDOF
system – Modal superposition methods.
Elements of Engineering Seismology – Causes of Earthquake –
Plate Tectonic theory – Elastic rebound Theory – Characteristic
3. 9
of earthquake – Estimation of earthquake parameters –
Magnitude and intensity of earthquakes – Spectral Acceleration.
Effect of earthquake on different type of structures –
Behaviour of Reinforced Cement Concrete, Steel and
Prestressed Concrete Structure under earthquake loading –
4. 9
Pinching effect – Bouchinger Effects – Evaluation of
earthquake forces as per IS:1893 – 2002 – Response Spectra
– Lessons learnt from past earthquakes.
Causes of damage – Planning considerations / Architectural
concepts as per IS:4326 – 1993 – Guidelines for Earthquake
5 resistant design – Earthquake resistant design for masonry 9
and Reinforced Cement Concrete buildings – Lateral load
analysis – Design and detailing as per IS:13920 – 1993.
CE6PE01(E) SYSTEM ENGINEERING AND PE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
ECONOMICS
Prerequisites: None
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Introduction to the formulation and solution of
1. civilengineeringproblems.Engineering economy, 12
mathematical modeling, andoptimization.
Techniques, including classical optimization, linear and
2. nonlinearprogramming, network theory, critical path 14

methods, simulation, decision theory
Dynamic programming applied to a variety of civil
3. 12
engineering problems.
CE6PE01(F) MASONRY STRUCTURES PE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
Prerequisites: None
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Introduction to analysis, design and construction of
1. 8
masonrystructures.
Mechanical properties of clay and concrete masonry units,
2. 8
mortar, and grout
Compressive, tensile, flexural, and shear behavior of
3. 8
masonry structural components.
Strength and behavior of unreinforced bearing walls.
4 Detailed design of reinforced masonry beams, columns, 8

structural walls with and without openings
5 Complete lateral-forceresisting building systems. 8

OPEN ELLECTIVE – I
CE6OE01(A) INDUSTRIAL WASTE OE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits

TREATMENT
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

INTRODUCTION
Types of industries and industrial pollution – Characteristics of
industrial wastes – Population equivalent – Bioassay studies –
effects of industrial effluents on streams, sewer, land,
1. sewage treatment plants and human health Environmental 8
legislations related to prevention and control of industrial
effluents and hazardous wastes
CLEANER PRODUCTION
Waste management Approach – Waste Audit – Volume and
2. 8
strength reduction – Material and process modifications –
Recycle, reuse and byproduct recovery – Applications.
POLLUTION FROM MAJOR INDUSTRIES
Sources, Characteristics, waste treatment flow sheets for selected
industries such as Textiles, Tanneries, Pharmaceuticals,
3. 9
Electroplating industries, Dairy, Sugar, Paper, distilleries,
Steel plants, Refineries, fertilizer, thermal power plants –
Wastewater reclamation concepts
TREATMENT TECHNOLOGIES
Equalisation – Neutralisation – Removal of suspended and
dissolved organic solids – Chemical oxidation – Adsorption –
4. 11
Removal of dissolved inorganics – Combined treatment of
industrial and municipal wastes – Residue management –
Dewatering – Disposal
CE6OE01(B) COMPOSITE MATERIALS OE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Introduction: Classifications of Engineering Materials, Concept
of composite materials, Matrix materials, Functions of a Matrix,
Desired Properties of a Matrix, Polymer Matrix (Thermosets and
Thermoplastics), Metal matrix, Ceramic matrix, Carbon Matrix,
Glass Matrix etc. Types of Reinforcements/Fibers: Role and
1. 14
Selection or reinforcement materials, Types of fibres, Glass
fibers, Carbon fibers, Aramid fibers , Metal fibers, Alumina
fibers, Boron Fibers, Silicon carbide fibers, Quartz and Silica
fibers, Multiphase fibers, Whiskers, Flakes etc., Mechanical
properties of fibres.
Various types of composites: Classification based on Matrix
Material: Organic Matrix composites, Polymer matrix
composites (PMC), Carbon matrix Composites or Carbon-
Carbon Composites, Metal matrix composites (MMC), Ceramic
2. matrix composites (CMC); Classification based on 10
reinforcements: Fiber Reinforced Composites, Fiber Reinforced
Polymer (FRP) Composites, Laminar Composites, Particulate
Composites, Comparison with Metals, Advantages & limitations
of Composites.
Fabrication methods: Processing of Composite Materials:
Overall considerations, Autoclave curing, Other Manufacturing
Processes like filament welding, compression molding, resin-
transplant method, pultrusion, pre-peg layer, Fiber-only
3. performs, Combined Fiber-Matrix performs, Manufacturing 8
Techniques: Tooling and Specialty materials, Release agents,
Peel plies, release films and fabrics, Bleeder and breather plies,
bagging films.
Mechanical testing of composites, tensile testing, Compressive

4. testing, Intra-laminar shear testing, Inter-laminar shear testing, 8
Fracture testing etc.
CE6OE01(C) ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS AND OE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits

POLICY
Prerequisites: Environmental Engineering
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Overview of environment, nature and eco system, Concept
1. 14
of laws and policies, Origin of environmental law,
Introduction to environmental laws and policies,
Environment and Governance, sustainable development and
2. 12
environment, understanding climate change, carbon
crediting, carbon foot print etc.,
Introduction to trade and environment. International
environmental laws, Right to Environment as Human Right
3. International Humanitarian Law and Environment, 14

environment and conflicts management, Famous
international protocols like Kyoto.
CE6OE01(D) OPERATIONAL RESEARCH OE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
TECHNIQUE
Prerequisites: None
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Introduction: History of operation research, nature and scope of
1. operations research, allocation. 10
Linear programming: Mathematical formulations of the problem,
2. Graphical solution methods, mathematical solution of L-P 10

problems, matrix formulation of general linear programming.
Simplex Method: Algorithm and computational procedures, Two
phase Simplex method, Problems of degeneracy, Principles of
3. duality in simplex method, Sensitivity analysis, Transportation 10
problem.
Game Theory: Introduction, Two persons zero sum games, the
maxmini and minimax principles. Integer Programming:
4 Formulation and solution of integer programming problems 10
Suggested Reading
1. Taha,H A, "Operations Research - An Introduction", Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall of India Private
Limited, N. Delhi, 2004.
2. Hillier, F S, "Operations Research", First Indian Edition, CBS Publishers & Distributors, Delhi, 1994.
CE6OE01(E) VALUES AND ETHICS IN OE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits

ENGINEERING
Prerequisites: None
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

Human Values:Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity –
1. Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for 10

others – Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty –
Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation – Commitment –
Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirituality –
Introduction to Yoga and meditation for professional
excellence and stress management.
Engineering Ethics: Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ –
Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral
dilemmas – Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory –
2. 10
Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
professional roles – Theories about right action – Self-
interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of Ethical Theories
ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION
Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible
3. 10
Experimenters – Codes of Ethics – A Balanced Outlook on
Law.
SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk
Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk – Respect for Authority
4 – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of 10

Interest – Occupational Crime – Professional Rights –
Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) –
Discrimination
GLOBAL ISSUES Multinational Corporations –
Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons
Development – Engineers as Managers – Consulting
5 8
Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors –
Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social
Responsibility
CE6OE01(F) DECISION AND RISK ANALYSIS OE – I 3-1-0 3 Credits
Prerequisites: None
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE CONTENTS Hrs

1. Development of modern statistical decision theory and 10
riskanalysis, and application of these concepts in civil
engineering design and decision making;
Bayesian statistical decision theory, decision tree, utility
2. 8
concepts, and multi-objectivedecision problems;
Modelling and analysis of uncertainties, practical risk
3. 12
evaluation, andformulation of risk-based design criteria,
4 Risk benefit trade-offs, and optimal decisions. 10

Semester - V
Branch: Electronics & Communication Engineering
Sl. N. Code Course Title Lecture Tutorial Practical Credits

1 Digital Signal Processing 4 1 0 4
2 Digital Communication 3 1 0 3
3 Microcontroller & Embedded system 3 1 0 3
4 Professional Elective –I 3 1 0 3
5 Open Elective –I# 3 1 0 3
Total 16
1 DSP Lab 0 0 3 1
2 Digital Communication Lab 0 0 3 1
3 Microcontroller & Embedded system lab. 0 0 3 1
4 Professional Elective –I Lab 0 0 3 1
5 General Proficiency/seminar 0 0 2 2
Total Credits 22
# to be offered by other department
Code Professional Elective-I

Linear Control System
Optoelectronics
Electronic Devices
Code Open Elective-I (Any One)*

Communication System
Signal & System
* Not for ECE Students
Digital System Design
Semester -VI
Branch: Electronics & Communication Engineering
Sl. N. Code Course Title Lecture Tutorial Practical Credits

1 Microwave Engineering 4 1 0 4
2 VLSI 3 1 0 3
3 IoT 3 1 0 3
4 Professional Elective-I I 3 1 0 3
5 Open Elective –II# 3 1 0 3
Total 16
1 Microwave Lab 0 0 3 1
2 VLSI Lab 0 0 3 1
3 IoT Lab 0 0 3 1
4 Professional Elective –II Lab 0 0 3 1
5 IN601 Internship/Tour and training/Industrial training 0 0 2 2
tttraining
1 Total 6
Total Credits 22
# to be offered by other department
Code Professional Elective-I I

Biomedical signal processing
Electronic Measurement &
Instrumentation
Biosensor
Code Open Elective-II (Any One)*

Digital Signal Processing
VLSI
Biomedical Electronics
* Not for ECE Students

SEMESTER V
EC621N DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING*
No. of
Module Content
Lectures
Signals and systems: Basic elements of DSP, concepts of frequency in
Analog and Digital Signals, sampling theorem, Discrete time signals,
1 systems analysis of discrete time LTI systems, Z transform, Convolution,
6
Correlation.
Frequency transformations: Introduction to DFT, Properties of DFT,
Circular Convolution, Filtering methods based on DFT, FFT Algorithms,
2 Decimation in time Algorithms, Decimation in frequency Algorithms, Use
10
of FFT in Linear Filtering, DCT, Use and Application of DCT.
IIR filter design: Structures of IIR, Analog filter design, Discrete time IIR
filter from analog filter, IIR filter design by Impulse Invariance, Bilinear
3 10
transformation, Approximation of derivatives (LPF, HPF, BPF, BRF) filter
design using frequency translation.
FIR filter design: Structures of FIR, Linear phase FIR filter, Fourier Series,
4 Filter design using windowing techniques (Rectangular Window, Hamming 8
Window, Hanning Window), Frequency sampling techniques.
Finite word length effects in digital filters: Binary fixed point and floating
point number representations, Comparison, Quantization noise, truncation
5 and rounding, quantization noise power, input quantization error, coefficient 8
quantization error, limit cycle oscillations-dead band, Overflow error-signal
scaling.
Text Books:
1. J.G.PROAKIS & D.G.MANOLAKIS, Digital Signal Processing - Principles, algorithms &
Applications, PHI, 2000.
2. .B.Venkataramani, M.Bhaskar, "Digital Signal Processors, Architecture, Programming and
Application", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003
3. A.V. Oppenheim and Ronald W. Schafer, Discrete Time Signal Processing, 2nd Edition,
PHI, 2000.
4. S.K.MITRA, Digital Signal Processing – A computer Based Approach, 2nd Edition, MGH,
2001.
5. Multi Rate Systems and Filter Banks – P.P.Vaidyanathan – Pearson Education.
6. Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing using Matlab – Robert J. Schilling, Sandra L.
Harris, Thomson, 2007
EC503N DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
No. of
Module Course Content
Lecture
Introduction: A historical perspective in the development of digital
communication, Elements of digital communication system.
Source encoding: Pulse code modulation, quantization noise, linear and non-
1 8
linear quantization, companding. Differential pulse code modulation, delta
modulation, adaptive delta modulation, Delta sigma modulation, linear
predictive coders.
Multiplexing: Introduction to different type of multiplexing, Frequency
Division & Time Division Multiplexing, Multiplexing hierarchy, synchronous
and asynchronous multiplexing, pulse staffing and word staffing.
Baseband transmission: Baseband signal receiver, integrate and dump type
2 8
filter probability of error calculations, optimum filters, coherent reception,
matched filter and its transfer function. Probability of error of matched filter.
Regenerative repeater, Bit synchronization, In-phase and mid-phase
synchronizer. Early late gate synchronizer. Frame synchronization.
Different type of line coding: UPNRZ, UPRZ, PNRZ, PRZ, Manchester,
differential encoding and their spectral characteristic, self synchronization
properties of some of the encoded signal.
3 Equalization: Inter symbol interference (ISI), Purpose of equalization, Eye 10
pattern, Nyquist criterion for zero ISI, fixed equalizer. Design of equalizer,
Adaptive equalizer, Decision directed equalizer, Adaptive decision directed
equalizer, Partial response signaling.
Digital modulation techniques: BPSK, DPSK. BFSK, MARY-PSK & -FSK,
QPSK, MSK principles, QASK, Error calculation.
Spread-spectrum modulation: Pseudo-Noise Sequence, A notion of Spread
4 8
Spectrum, Direct-Sequence Spread- Spectrum with Coherent Binary Phase-
Shift Keying, Processing Gain, Probability of Error, Frequency-hop Spread
Spectrum, Code-Division Multiple Access.
Information theory and coding: Concept and measure of information,
Entropy, Discrete and continuous messages, Message source, zero memory
sources, extension of zero memory source, Markov source and their entropy,
Channel with and without memory, Channel capacity, Hartlay and Shannon’s
5 6
law.
Properties of code: Uniquely decodable codes, Instantaneous codes, Kraft
inequality and Macmillion inequality, Construction of instantaneous codes,
Hoffman and Shannon-Fano coding, Error Coding.
Text Books:
1. S.Haykin, Digital Communications, John Wiley & Sons, 2009.

2. B.Sklar, Digital Communications, 2 nd Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
3. John G.Proakis, Digital Communications, 3 rd edition, McGraw Hill, 1995.
EC505N LINEAR CONTROL SYSTEM
No. of
Lecture
INTRODUCTION: Concepts of Control Systems- Open Loop and closed loop
control systems and their differences, Different examples of control systems-
1 Classification of control systems, Feed-Back Characteristics, Effects of feedback, 7
Mathematical models, Differential equations, Impulse Response and transfer
functions.
TRANSFER FUNCTION REPRESENTATION: Block diagram representation
2 of systems considering electrical systems as examples -Block diagram algebra – 6
Representation by Signal flow graph-Reduction using mason’s gain formula.
TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS: Standard test signals - Time response of first
order systems –Characteristic Equation of Feedback control systems, Transient
response of second order systems- Time domain specifications–Steady state
response-Steady state errors and error constants–Effects of proportional
3 10
derivative, proportional integral systems.
STABILITY ANALYSIS IN S-DOMAIN: The concept of stability–Routh’s
stability criterion – qualitative stability and conditional stability – limitations of
Routh’s stability.
ROOT LOCUS TECHNIQUE: The root locus concept - construction of root
loci-effects of adding poles and zeros to G(s) H(s) on the root loci.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS: Introduction, Frequency domain
4 specifications-Bode diagrams Determination of Frequency domain specifications 10
and Phase margin and Gain margin Stability Analysis from Bode Plots. Polar
Plots, Nyquist Plots Stability Analysis. Compensation techniques – Lag, Lead, and
Lead-Lag Controllers design in frequency Domain, PID Controllers.
State Space Analysis of Continuous Systems: Concepts of state, state variables
and state model, derivation of state models from block diagrams, Diagonalization-
5 6
Solving the Time invariant state Equations- State Transition Matrix and it’s
Properties – Concepts of Controllability and Observability.
Text Books:
1. Control Systems Theory and Applications - S. K. Bhattacharya, Pearson.

2. B.C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, 7th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2009.
3. I.J. Nagarath and M. Gopal: Control Systems Engineering, 2nd Edition, New Age Pub. Co.
2008.
4. Modern Control System with Advanced topics- S. K. Bharadwaj and S. K. Nagar, New Age
Publication.
5. Control Systems - N. C. Jagan, BS Publications.
6. Control Systems - A. Ananad Kumar, PHI.
7. Control Systems - N. K. Sinha, New Age International (P) Limited Publishers
OPTOELECTRONICS
No. of
Lecture
INTRODUCTION: Difference between electronic, optoelectronic and

1 photonic devices, Electrical and Optical Bandwidth, Wave nature of light, 7
Polarization, Interference, Diffraction, Absorption, Light Source
ELEMENTS OF LIGHT AND SOLID STATE PHYSICS: Basic principles of

light propagation. Band structure of metals and semiconductors, Semiconductors -
2 8
band diagrams, direct and indirect bandgap, degenerate and nondegenerate
semiconductors, intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors.
OPTICAL SOURCES :LED Device structure, materials and characteristics. The

3 10
Semiconductor Laser: Basic structure, theory and device characteristics
Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers(SOA) characteristics and some applications,

4 EDFA. 10
OPTICAL DETECTION DEVICES: Types of photodetectors,

5 Photoconductors, Noise in photodetection, Photodiodes, PIN diodes and APDs: 8
structure, materials, characteristics, and device performance
Reference :
• B. E. A. Saleh and M. C. Teich, Fundamentals of Photonics, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2nd
Ed. (2007), Ch.16, 17, and 18.
• P. Bhattacharya, Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices, Prentice Hall of India (1997).
• J. Singh, Semiconductor Optoelectronics: Physics and Technology, McGraw-Hill Inc. (1995).
• G. Keiser, Optical Fiber Communications, McGraw-Hill Inc., 3rd Ed. (2000), Ch.4, 6
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
No. of
Lecture
Crystal Properties and charge Carriers in Semiconductors: Elemental and
compound semiconductor materials, crystal lattice structure, Bonding forces and
1 6
energy bands in solids, charge carriers in semiconductors, carrier concentrations,
drift of carriers in electric field
Excess Carriers in Semiconductors: Optical absorption, luminescence, carrier

2 6
life time and photo conductivity, diffusion of carriers
Junction Properties: Equilibrium conditions, biased junctions, steady state
3 conditions, reverse bias break down, transient and AC conditions. Metal 8
semiconductor junctions.
Transistors: Metal-semiconductor-field-effect-transistors (MESFET), Metal-
insulator-semiconductor-field-effect-transistors (MISFET), Metal oxide
4 semiconductor field effect transistor (MOSFET): Construction, Operation and 12
characteristics of above devices. Bipolar junction transistors: Fundamentals of
BJT operation, amplification with BJTs.
Some special devices: Photodiodes, photo detectors, solar cell, light emitting
diodes, semiconductor lasers, light emitting materials. Tunnel Diode: degenerate
5 semiconductors, IMPATT diode; The transferred electron mechanism: The GUNN 8
diode. P-N-P-N diode, semiconductor controlled rectifier (SCR), bilateral devices:
DIAC, TRIAC, IGBT.
EC515N Microcontroller and Embedded System
Sl Topics No of
No Lectures
Introduction to Microcontroller and Embedded Processor. The 8051 09
Architecture- Hardware- Oscillator and clock-program counter –data pointer-

1 registers-stack and stack pointer-special function registers- -memory
organization-program memory-data memory -Input / Output Ports –External
memory-counter and timer-serial data Input / output-Interrupts.
2 8051 Assembly Language Programming-Structure of Assembly language- 10
Assembling and running an 8051 program- Addressing modes-Accessing
memory using various addressing modes- Instruction set- Arithmetic
operations and Programs-Logical operations and Programs -Jump and
Call instructions and Programs -I /O Pot Programs - Single bit
instructions and Programs –Timer and counter - and Programs
3 8051 Serial Communication -Connection to RS-232- Serial 08
Communication Programming- Interrupts Programming
4 Hardware Interfacing: Interfacing with Key Board, LEDs, Seven Segment, 08
Basic concepts of LCD, ADC, DAC, Relays and their interfacing to
microcontroller.
5 Basic concept of PIC microcontroller –Microcontroller Architecture – PIC16F 09
Family
Electronics Measurement and Instrumentation
Module Topics No. of Lectures
Measurement Errors and Standards:

Definitions, Accuracy and Precision, Significant Figures, Types of Error,
Statistical Analysis, Probability of Errors, Limiting Errors, Time and
Frequency Standards, Electrical Standards.
1 8
Bridge Measurements:
Wheatstone Bridge, Kelvin Bridge, AC Bridge and their Applications,
Maxwell Bridge, Hay's Bridge, Unbalance Conditions, Wein Bridge.
Anderson's Bridge, De Sauty’s Bridge, Schering Bridge.
Electronics Instrument For Measuring Basic Parameters:

True RMS Responding Voltmeter, Digital Frequency Meter, Circuit for
Measurement of Frequency, High Frequency Measurements, Period
Measurement, Ratio and Multiple Ratio Measurements, Time Interval
2 Measurements, Vector Impedance Meter. 11
Cathode Ray Oscilloscope:
Introduction, Oscilloscope Block Diagram, Cathode Ray Tube, Delay
Line, Multiple Trace, Oscilloscope Scope and Transducers, Oscilloscope
Techniques, Digital Storage Oscilloscope.
Instrument for Generation and Analysis of Waveforms:

Introduction, The Sine Wave Generator, Frequency Synthesized Signal
Generator, Frequency Divider Generator, Signal Generator Modulation,
3 6
Sweep Frequency Generator, Pulse and Square Wave Generator,
Function Generator, Wave Analyzers, Harmonic Distortion Analyzer,
Spectrum Analyzer.
Transducers:
Electrical Transducers Selection and Considerations, Resistive, Strain
Gauges, Temperature Transducers: Platinum Resistance Type,
Thermistor, Thermocouples, Inductive, LVDT, Capacitive, Load Cell,
Piezoelectric, Photoelectric Transducers.
4 Signal Converters: 9
I to P and P to I Converter, Temperature to Voltage Converter,
Conversion To Frequency, Period, or Time Duration, Measurement of
Phase Difference Using X-OR and SR Flip-Flop Method, Measurement
of Active And Reactive Power of Supply Line, Locking Amplifiers,
Variable Oscillators, Direct Sensor- Microcontroller Interfacing.
Module Topics No. of Lectures
Isolation Techniques:
Transformer Isolation, Optical Isolation, Digital Techniques For Optical
Isolation, Hall-Effect Principle And Measurement Of Displacement,
Current And Power Using Hall Sensors, Amplifications Of Low Level
Signals, Guarding, Shielding.
5 12
Data Acquisition And Conversion:
Analog Signal Processing, Sample And Hold Operation, S/H Circuits
Using Op-Amps, Introduction To Data Acquisition System, Various
DAS Configurations, Single Channel DAS, Multi-Channel DAS, IC
Based DAS, Data Acquisition, Data Acquisition in PLC.
EC515N BIOSENSORS
No. of
Lecture
General principles: A historical perspective, Signal transduction, Physico-
chemical and biological transducers, Sensor types and technologies, Definitions
1 and Concepts Terminology and working vocabulary, Main technical 8
definitions, calibration, selectivity, sensitivity, reproducibility, detection limits,
response time.
Physico-chemical transducers: Electrochemical transducers (amperometric,
potentiometric,
2 conductimetric), optical transducers (absorption, fluorescence, SPR), Thermal 5
transducers,
piezoelectric transducers.
Bio recognition systems: Enzymes: Oligonucleotides and Nucleic Acids,
Lipids (Langmuir-Blodgett bilayers, Phospholipids, Liposomes), Membrane
3 receptors and transporters, Tissue and organelles (animal and plant tissue), Cell 10
culture, Immuno receptors, Chemoreceptors, Limitations & problems,
Immobilization of biomolecules.
Biosensor Engineering: Methods for biosensors fabrication, self-assembled
4 monolayers, screen printing, photolithography, micro-contact printing, MEMS, 8
Engineering concepts for mass production.
Application of modern sensor technologies: Clinical chemistry, Test-strips
for glucose monitoring, Urea determination; Implantable sensors for long-term
5 8
monitoring, Environmental monitoring, Technological process control, Food
quality control, Forensic science benefits, Problems & limitations.
Text Books:
1. Donald G. Buerk, Biosensors: Theory and Applications, First Edition, CRC Press, 2009.
2. Alice Cunningham, Introduction to Bioanalytical Sensors, John Wiley& Sons, 1998.
3. Brian R. Eggins, Chemical Sensors and Biosensors, John Wiley& Sons, 2003.
EC615N COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Module Course content No. of Lectures
Signals and Signal Analysis: Periodic and nonperiodic signals,
Composite signals, Signal analysis, Time and frequency domain
1 8
representation. Introduction to Data and signal fundamentals, Analog
and digital signals.
Analog Transmission: Concepts of carrier signal, noise, modulating
signal and modulated signal; Amplitude modulation – double
sideband suppressed carrier, double sideband transmitted carrier,
2 single sideband; Frequency modulation – Narrowband FM and 8
wideband FM; Digital to analog conversion – Amplitude shift keying,
Frequency shift keying, Phase shift keying, Quadrature amplitude
modulation, Performance.
Digital Transmission: Problems with digital transmission,
Different line coding schemes, Block coding schemes,
Scrambling techniques; Analog to digital conversion –
Sampling techniques, Sampling theorem, Pulse amplitude
3 10
modulation, Pulse code modulation, Differential pulse code
modulation, Delta modulation (along with advantages and
disadvantages of each technique), Transmission modes (serial
and parallel).
Multiplexing and Spreading: Concept of multiplexing, Frequency
4 division multiplexing, Time division multiplexing – Synchronous and 10
Statistical time division multiplexing.
Error Detection and Correction: Types of errors, Basic concepts of
error detection and correction, Redundancy, Hamming distance, Error
5 detection – Simple parity check codes, Two-dimensional parity 8
check, Cyclic redundancy check, Polynomials and cyclic code
analysis, Checksum, Error correction – Hamming code.
Text Books:
1. S. Haykin, Digital Communications, John Wiley & Sons, 2009.

2. B. Sklar, Digital Communications, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
3. John G. Proakis, Digital Communications, 3rd edition, McGraw Hill, 1995.
4. BP Lathi Communication System BS Publication
5. Singh & Sapre, Analog Communication, TMH.
EC511N SIGNAL AND SYSTEM
No. of
Lecture
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS: Continuous Time and Discrete Time signals,
Exponential and
Sinusoidal Signals, Unit Impulse and Unit Step Functions, Continuous and
1 Discrete Time Systems, basic System Properties. 6
LINEAR TIME INVARIANT SYSTEMS: Discrete Time LTI Systems,
Continuous Time LTI Systems, properties of LTI Systems, causal LTI Systems
Described by Difference equations.
FOURIER SERIES REPRESENTATION OF PERIODIC SIGNALS:
Response of LTI systems to Complex Exponentials, Fourier series
Representation of CT periodic Signals, properties of CT Fourier Series, Fourier
Series representation of DT periodic Signals, properties of DFS, Fourier series
2 and LTI Systems, Filtering, Examples of CT filters, Examples of DT filters. 9
CONTINUOUS TIME FOURIER TRANSFORM: Representation of a periodic
Signals by continuous FT, FT of periodic signals, convolution and
multiplication property of continuous FT, systems characterized by Linear
Constant Coefficient Differential Equations.
TIME AND FREQUENCY CHARACTERIZATION OF SIGNALS AND
SYSTEMS: Magnitude and phase representation of FT, Magnitude and phase
response of LTI systems, Time domain and Frequency domain aspects of ideal
and non-ideal filters.
3 9
DISCRETE TIME FOURIER TRANSFORM (DTFT) and DISCRETE
FOURIER TRANSFORM (DFT): Properties of DTFT and DFT, convolution
property, multiplication property, Duality, Systems characterized by Linear
Constant Coefficient Difference Equations.
SAMPLING: Sampling theorem, Impulse sampling, sampling with zero order
Hold, Reconstruction of signal from its samples using interpolation, Effect of
under sampling
Z-TRANSFORM: Z-transform, Region of convergence and its properties,
4 9
Inverse Z transform,
properties of ZT, Analysis and characterization of LTI systems using ZT, LTI
Systems, System
function algebra and block diagram representations.
SIGNAL FLOWGRAPHS: Impulse Response and Transfer function of linear
Systems, Block
5 7
diagrams, Signal flow graphs, Basic properties of SFG, SFG Terms, SFG
Algebra, Gain formula, Application of gain formula to block diagrams.
Text Books:
1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Alan S. Willsky, S. Hamid Nawab, Signals and Systems Prentice Hall
India, 2nd Edition, 2009.
2. John G. Proakis, Dimitris G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing, Principles, Algorithms,
and Applications, 4th Edition, PHI, 2007.
3. Robert A. Gable, Richard A. Roberts, Signals & Linear Systems, 3rd Edition, John
Wiley,1995.
EC519N DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN
No. of
Lecture
INTRODUCTION: Introduction to Number Systems and Boolean Algebra
Digital and Analog Basic Concepts, Number Base Conversion - Complement
Codes, Binary Arithmetic , Binary codes: BCD, Weighted codes -2421, 8421,
gray code - Binary Logic functions, Boolean Algebra, Theorems and Properties
of Boolean Algebra.
1 8
MINIMIZATION OF BOOLEAN FUNCTION: Minimization techniques in
digital Logic Canonical forms, Generation of Switching Equations from Truth
Table - K-map (Karnaugh map) 2 ,3 and 4 variables, K map with Don’t care
terms - Quine Mc-Cluskey minimization technique, Quine Mc-Cluskey using
Don’t Care Terms - Mixed logic Combinational circuits.
COMBINATIONAL CIRCUIT DESIGN: Design with basic logic gates,
comparators, data selectors, priority encoders, decoders, full adder, serial binary
2 adder, parallel binary adders-ripple-carry adder, carrylook ahead adder; Parallel 8
prefix adders- Carry select Adder, Conditional sum adder, Kogge-stone Adder,
Brent-kung adder, Verilog models.
SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN: Memory elements and their excitation
functions SR, JK, T, and D latches and flip-flops, master slave JK flip-flop,
3 edge-triggered flip-flop, synchronous and asynchronous counters, finite-state 10
machine, sequence detector, minimization and transformation of sequential
machines, Registers, Verilog models.
TESTING OF COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS: Fault models, structural
testing: path sensitization Logic families: TTL and CMOS Logic circuits,
4 8
Transfer characteristics, fan-in, fan-out, noise margin, rise time and fall time
analysis, realization of Boolean equations using CMOS logic.
MEMORY: Types of memories, MOS SRAM cells, DRAM, SDRAM, DDR
SDRAM, DDR2 SDRAM, DDR4 SDRAM, organization of a SRAM,
5 6
Organization of SDRAM, Periphery circuitry of Memory, Flash memory, SD
card.
SEMESTER VI
EC601N VLSI DESIGN
No. of
Module Content
Lectures
Introduction: Review of MOSFET characteristics, scaling and small-
geometry effects, and MOSFET capacitances. MOS resistor, MOS current
1 source, current mirror circuits. MOS voltage source, linear voltage and
6
current converters.
CMOS operational amplifier (OPAMP) design: Differential amplifier,
level shifter, source follower, output stage voltage and power amplifiers.
Cascode OP-AMP. Compensation techniques.
Analog Filters: Switched capacitor (SC) fundamentals, first order SC
2 14
circuits, second-order SC circuits and cascade design. Analog to digital and
digital to analog converters, speed of conversion and over sampling issues.
VLSI Interconnects: Distributed RC model, transmission line model. Future
inter connect technologies.
Digital VLSI Circuit Design: MOS inverters, CMOS inverter, state
characteristics, switching characteristics, power dissipation issues.
3 CMOS logic gates: NAND, NOR, XOR, CMOS logic design of half and
9
full adders. CMOS transmission gates, pseudo-nMOS, domino logic gates.
Sequential MOS Logic Circuits: The SR latch circuit, clocked latch and
flip-flop, CMOS D-latch and edge-triggered circuits, Schmitt trigger circuit,
4 Comparator. 8
Dynamic Logic Circuits: Pass transistor logic, synchronous dynamic circuit
techniques.
Semiconductor Memories: ROM circuits, SRAM circuits, DRAM circuits,
5 drivers and buffers, Buffer scaling and design issues
5
Text Books:
1. Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici Chulwoo kim, Digital Integrated Circuits: Analysis and
Design, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2016.
2. Behzad Razavi, Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill
Education, 2016.
3. Jan M RABAEY, Digital Integrated Circuits, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
4. Neil H.E. Weste and David Harris, CMOS VLSI Design: A circuits and systems perspective,
4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
EC611N MICROWAVE ENGINEERING
No. of
Module Content
Lectures
Introduction: RF and microwave spectrum, historical background,
application of RF and Microwave Impedance Matching–Unknown
1 impedance measurement using shift in minima technique and impedance
8
matching using single and double stub matching.
Microwave waveguides and components: Rectangular waveguide and
circular waveguide, mode structure, cutoff frequency, wall current,
attenuation; microwave cavities – rectangular cavity resonator, Q factor,
2 power divider, scattering matrix and transmission matrix, attenuator, phase
10
shifter, directional coupler, Bethe hole coupler, magic tee, hybrid ring,
circulator, isolator, Ferrite Devices
Planar structures: Strip line, microstrip line, coplanar structure Microwave
Tubes: Limitations of conventional tubes, Multicavity Klystron, Reflex
3 Klystron, Magnetron, Travelling Wave Tube, Backward Wave Oscillator 10
Semiconductor Microwave Devices – Tunnel diode, Gunn diode and their
waveguide mounts
Avalanche diodes: IMPATT, TRAPATT, Microwave bipolar transistor,
heterojunction bipolar transistor.
4 Microwave field effect transistor: JFET, MOSFET, MESFET
8
Applications of microwave: Industrial Applications of microwave.
Microwave Measurement: VSWR measurement, power
measurement, impedance measurement, frequency Measurement
5 6
Equivalent RF circuit parameters Low pass filter, high pass filter, band
pass filter, RF amplifier.
Text Books:
1. Golio M, Golio J (2008) The RF and Microwave Handbook. CRC Press.

2. Pozar DM (2005) Microwave Engineering. John Wiley & Sons.
3. Hong JS, Lancaster MJ (2001) Microstrip Filters for RF/Microwave Applications. John Wiley
& Sons.
EC605N BIOMEDICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
No. of
Module Content
Lectures
Introduction to Biomedical Signals: The nature of Biomedical
Signals, Examples of Biomedical Signals, Objectives and difficulties
in Biomedical analysis.
Electrocardiography: Basic electrocardiography, ECG lead systems,

1 ECG signal characteristics. 8
Signal Conversion :Simple signal conversion systems, Conversion

requirements for biomedical signals, Signal conversion circuits
Signal Averaging: Basics of signal averaging, signal averaging as a

digital filter, a typical averager, software for signal averaging,
limitations of signal averaging.
2 8
Adaptive Noise Cancelling: Principal noise canceller model, 60-
Hzadaptive cancelling using a sine wave model, other applications of
adaptive filtering
Data Compression Techniques: Turning point algorithm, AZTEC
algorithm, Fan algorithm, Huffman coding, data reduction algorithms
3 8
The Fourier transform, Correlation, Convolution, Power spectrum
estimation, Frequency domain analysis of the ECG
Cardiological signal processing: Basic Electrocardiography, ECG
data acquisition, ECG lead system, ECG signal characteristics
(parameters and their estimation), Analog filters, ECG amplifier, and
QRS detector, Power spectrum of the ECG, Bandpass filtering
4 8
techniques, Differentiation techniques, Template matching techniques,
A QRS detection algorithm, Realtime ECG processing algorithm,
ECG interpretation, ST segment analyzer, Portable arrhythmia
monitor
Neurological signal processing: The brain and its potentials, The
electrophysiological origin of brain waves, The EEG signal and its
5 characteristics (EEG rhythms, waves, and transients), Correlation. 8
Analysis of EEG channels: Detection of EEG rhythms, Template matching
for EEG, spike and wave detection
EC615N INTERNET OF THINGS
No. of
Course Content
Module Lecture
Introduction to IOT: IoT and the connected world, Architecture of IoT,
Security issues, Opportunities for IoT.
1 The Web of Things: Linked data, Enterprise data, Importance of security, 8
privacy, and authenticity, Industry standards, Web of Things layer as the driver
for IoT systems.
Lessons from the Internet: Relevance of internet to network of things,
2 5
network management, security, mobility and longevity.
Technologies: Wireless protocols, Connectivity options.
Data storage and analysis: Managing high rate sensor data, Processing data
3 10
streams, Data consistency in an intermittently connected or disconnected
environment, Identifying outliers and anomalies.
Use cases: Smart Buildings, Smart health, Home automation, Location
4 6
tracking.
Smart Cities: Collection of information including opportunistic sensing,
crowd sensing, and adhoc sensing Response of the system including analytics
5 10
and optimization, distributed action, people as intelligent actuators, the risk for
cyber-attacks in centralized and distributed systems
Text Books:
1. Designing the Internet of Things, by Adrian McEwen, Hakim Cassimally Wiley 2013.
2. Enterprise IoT Naveen Balani Create Space Independent Publishing Platform 2016.
Vth SEMESTER
MINING ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT, BIT SINDRI

MINING ENGINEERING
B.Tech, Semester V (Third year]
Course Structure
Sl. No. Course Course Title Hours per week Credits

Code
L T P
Professional Core
1. MN501 Mine Ventilation Engineering 4 1 0 4
2. MN502 Mining Machinery 3 1 0 3
3. MN503 Underground Metal Mining Methods 3 1 0 3
4. Professional Elective – I
I. MN504 Operation Research 3 1 0 3
II. MN505 Mine System Engineering 3 1 0 3
III. MN506 Remote Sensing & GIS 3 1 0 3
IV. MN507 Numerical Techniques in Geomechanics 3 1 0 3
5. Open Elective – I (Any One of the Following)
I. MN508 Mineral Process Engineering 3 1 0 3
II. MN509 Bulk Material Handling 3 1 0 3
III. MN510 Clean Coal Technology 3 1 0 3
IV. MN511 Internet of Things (IOT) 3 1 0 3
PRACTICALS
1. MN521P Mine Ventilation Engineering Lab 0 0 3 1
2. MN522P Mining Machinery Lab 0 0 3 1
3. MN523P Internet of Things (IoT) Lab 0 0 3 1
4. MN524P Mine Design – II Lab 0 0 3 1
5. ×××××× General Proficiency/ Seminar 0 0 2 2
22

PROFESSIONAL CORE

MN501 MINE VENTILATION ENGINEERING 3L:1T:0P 4 Credits
Overview
Excavation in the earth under even normal circumstances can be fraught with environmental
problems and hazards. In undergrounds mining, and tunneling too, the most critical aspect of
is the environment in the working place. It is in fact the backbone of the miner’s life support
system.
To the mining engineering, ventilation trends to be the environmental remedy. It is the air –
condition process relied upon which accomplish most environmental control underground.
Ventilation is the control of air movement, its amount and direction. As the principle means
of quantity control, it is one of the constituent processes of total air conditioning, the
simultaneous control within prescribed limits of the quality, quantity, and temperature –
humidity of the air.
Ventilation, therefore, is not only total-air-conditioning process, nor is it adequate alone to

satisfy all mine environmental objectives. That is why this course stress that mine ventilation
and air conditioning are complementary and separate processes. Increase, in underground
mining as in surface industry, environmental objectives require that condition air to meet
quality and temperature –humidity objectives as well as quantity.
In recent years’ environmental standards in mines have been raised substantially. Worker
productivity and job satisfaction correlate closely with environmental quantity. No mining
company today can afford to be negligent in its environmental and air-control practices.
The goal of this course is to instruct the mining engineer in the principles and practices of
ventilation and air conditioning applicable to the atmosphere and the unique environmental
conditions found in mines.
Course Description
The purpose of this course is to present a modern and comprehensive treatment of mine
ventilation system from the viewpoint of the total mine atmosphere environment and its
control. Hence, the subject is treated in terms of the theory and practices in the three broad
areas of air conditioning-quantity control, quantity control(ventilation), temperature –
humidity control.
From the basic physics of gases, the theory is to developed to cover air measurements, the
flow of air through ducts, through opening, and through circuits, the design of networks and
the design of temperature-humidity control systems. The solution of examples problems and
the many references to the technical literature will further assist the reader in grasping this
theory.

At the end of this course it is intended that the students will be able to:
 Describe and apply the principles of fluid flow to ventilation systems.

 Describe and apply fan behavior laws to ventilation systems
 Design and develop a ventilation system for a mine.
 Describe environmental hazards found in mines and outline the ventilation control
measures that detect, monitor, minimize and/or manage these hazards.
Syllabus:
Atmospheric air- Its composition, mine air -its composition and variation, origin, occurrence,
physical, chemical and physiological properties of mine gases, various types of damps.
Sampling and analysis of mine air. Methane content and pressure, methane drainage and
methane layering. Monitoring of gases. Heat and humidity: Sources of heat in mines, effect
of heat and humidity, psychometric, kata thermometer, methods of improving of cooling
power of mine air. Air conditioning – basic vapour cycle, representative layout. Air flow
through mine openings: Laws of air flow, resistance of airways, equivalent orifice,
distribution of air, flow control devices. Natural Ventilation: Calculation of NVP from air
density, thermodynamic treatment etc., artificial aids to natural ventilation. Mechanical
Ventilation: principal types of mine fan and their suitability, merits, limitation, efficiency
and characteristics. Selection of mine fan, fan testing, output control in fans, series and
parallel operation of mine fans. Ventilation of advancing heading-auxiliary fan, duct,
matching of fan to the duct system. Reversal of air current. Fan drift, evasee, diffuser, booster
fans.
Modules:
1. Introduction and course overview:composition of mine air, its variation, origin,
occurrence, physical, chemical and physiological properties of mine gases.
2. Classification of various types of damps:Sampling and analysis of mine air.
Methane content and pressure, methane drainage and methane layering. Monitoring of
gases.
3. Heat and humidity:Sources of heat in mines, effect of heat and humidity,
psychometric, kata thermometer,
4. Methods of improving: of cooling power of mine air. Air conditioning – basic
vapour cycle, representative layout.
5. Air flow through mine openings: Laws of air flow, resistance of airways,
equivalent orifice, distribution of air, flow control devices
6. Natural Ventilation: Calculation of NVP from air density, thermodynamic treatment
etc. artificial aids to natural ventilation.
7. Mechanical Ventilation: principal types of mine fan and their suitability, merits,
limitation, efficiency and characteristics.
8. Selection of mine fan: fan testing, output control in fans, series and parallel operation
of mine fans.
9. Ventilation of advancing: heading-auxiliary fan, duct, matching of fan to the duct
system.
10. Reversal of air current. Fan drift, evasee, diffuser, booster fans.

 Banerjee S.P. (2003); "Mine Ventilation"; Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad, India.
 Panigrahi D.C: Mine Ventilation, CRC Press
 Deshmukh, D. J. (2008); "Elements of Mining Technology,Vol. II"; Denett& Co.,
Nagpur, India.
 Hartman, H. L., Mutmansky, J. M. & Wang, Y. J. (1982); "Mine Ventilation and Air
Conditioning"; John Wiley & Sons, New York.
 Karmakar, N. C. (2001); "Handbook of gas testing"; Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad,
India.
 Le Roux, W. L. (1972); Mine Ventilation Notes for Beginners"; The Mine Ventilation
Society of South Africa.
 McPherson, M. J. (1993); Subsurface Ventilation and Environmental Engineering";
Chapman & Hall, London.
 Misra G.B. (1986); "Mine Environment and Ventilation"; Oxford University Press,
Calcutta, India.
 Ramlu, M. A. (1991); "Element of Mine Ventilation"; Oxford and IBH Publishing Co.
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
 Vutukuri, V. S. & Lama, R. D. (1986); "Environmental Engineering in Mines";
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
 Kejriwal,B.K,”ASurvey Of Accidents , Their Causes &Prevention’’.
 Kaku L.C, “Fire In Coal Mine” ,Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad, India.
 Ghatak S.,“Mine Ventilation”Vol. 1 & Vol. 2,Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad, India.
 Banerjee S.P., “Prevention combating Mine Fires”,Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad, India.
Goals & Outcomes:

(Knowledge based)
 Explain the meaning of mine ventilation system.
 Recognise the different types of damps and their causes and prevention techniques.
 Describe the various techniques of fan selection for a particular mine;
 Explain the laws of air flows, resistance of airways, equivalent orifice, distribution of
air;
 Have complete understanding of the significant role of different flow control devices.
(Skills)
Use mine ventilation system to:
 Apply the techniques used in fan selection to solve real life problem in mining
industry
 Develop skills sets for calculating natural ventilation pressure from air density etc.
 Formulate air quantity required to solve real life problem.
 Deal with fire dams in mine.
 Recognising the physiological properties of dust.
 Develop the prevention and suppression techniques of dust, dust formation sources.
 Develop methods of improving the cooling power of mine air.
 Determine the characteristics of mine airways.
 Maintain and monitor the mine fans.

MN502 MINING MACHINERY 3L:0T:0P 3 Credits
Pre-requisite: Engineering Mechanics, Mechanical Technology
Course Objectives:
This course introduces prime movers used for moving of mining machinery, Rails, Joints,
Crossings, Plates for track laying, Locomotives used in mines, drills used for drilling in
mines, mine winders, winding drums, man riding systems, cutter loaders, pumps, opencast
machinery for mining to improve its output.
Syllabus:
Prime Mover for Mining Machinery: O.C. engine, hydraulic power, pneumatic power,
elements of mechanical power transmission – gear, belt, chain, coupling, clutch and brake.
Rope haulage: Construction of the wire ropes, rope haulages – gravity, direct, balanced
direct, main & tail, endless, reversible endless. Suitability of these haulages and their
limitations. Dimension of ropes, drums and pulleys, care and maintenance of ropes, changing
of haulage ropes, rope splicing, safety appliances in haulage road, signaling, Statutory
requirements of haulages. Track Laying: Rail, joints, crossings, plates, turn tables a curve,
track extension, Aerial Ropeways: Types, construction, Application and operation. Mine
Locomotives: Types, constructional features of compressed air, diesel, battery and electric
trolley-wire locomotives, comparison of various locomotive haulages. Comparison of rope
and locomotive haulages. Conveyors: Principle types and their operations, installation,
shifting, maintenance and applicability, shuttle cars, stage loaders, bridge conveyors,
capacity. Drills for Coal and Stone: Various types, their construction and maintenance,
Jumbo drills. Mine Winders: Koepe and Drum winders and their applications, head gear,
head gear pulley, shaft fitting – Keps, rope guides, shaft sinking and bells, capping and
recapping, cage and suspension gear. Winding Drum-types and construction, Safety devices
in winders-over speed and over wind preventers, slow breaking, depth indicator, Methods of
counter balancing rope. Duty cycle. Mechanical and electrical braking. Winding from
different levels in shaft. Man riding system in underground mines. Face Machinery: SDL &
LHD – their applications, capacity, operation, fitting, control and maintenance. Cutter loaders
– Shearers, Coal plough and Continuous Miners – their constructional features, applications,
capacity and maintenance. Layout of faces with Power loader working under varied
condition, Shuttle cars. Pumps: Types, Construction, operation, characteristics and
application, Calculation of size, efficiencies and capacities. Layout of drainage system.
Opencast Machinery: Blast Hole Drill, Ripper, Shovel, Dragline, Dumper, Bucket Wheel
Excavator, Continuous Miners – their basic construction, applications and operation.
Modules:
Module 1: Prime Mover for Mining Machinery: O.C. engine, hydraulic power, pneumatic
power, elements of mechanical power transmission – gear, belt, chain, coupling, clutch and
brake.
Module 2: Rope haulage: Construction of the wire ropes, rope haulages – gravity, direct,
balanced direct, main & tail, endless, reversible endless. Suitability of these haulages and
their limitations. Dimension of ropes, drums and pulleys, care and maintenance of ropes,
changing of haulage ropes, rope splicing, safety appliances in haulage road, signaling,
Statutory requirements of haulages.

Module 3: Track Laying: Rail, joints, crossings, plates, turn tables a curve, track extension,
Aerial Ropeways: Types, construction, Application and operation.
Module 4: Mine Locomotives: Types, constructional features of compressed air, diesel,
battery and electric trolley-wire locomotives, comparison of various locomotive haulages.
Comparison of rope and locomotive haulages. Conveyors: Principle types and their
operations, installation, shifting, maintenance and applicability, shuttle cars, stage loaders,
bridge conveyors, capacity.
Module 5: Drills for Coal and Stone: Various types, their construction and maintenance,
Jumbo drills.
Module 6: Mine Winders: Koepe and Drum winders and their applications, head gear, head
gear pulley, shaft fitting – Keps, rope guides, shaft sinking and bells, capping and recapping,
cage and suspension gear.
Module 7: Winding Drum-types and construction, Safety devices in winders-over speed and
over wind preventers, slow breaking, depth indicator, Methods of counter balancing rope.
Duty cycle. Mechanical and electrical braking. Winding from different levels in shaft.
Module 8: Man riding system in underground mines. Face Machinery: SDL & LHD – their
applications, capacity, operation, fitting, control and maintenance. Cutter loaders – Shearers,
Coal plough and Continuous Miners – their constructional features, applications, capacity and
maintenance.
Module 9: Layout of faces with Power loader working under varied condition, Shuttle cars.
Pumps: Types, Construction, operation, characteristics and application, Calculation of size,
efficiencies and capacities. Layout of drainage system.
Module 10: Opencast Machinery: Blast Hole Drill, Ripper, Shovel, Dragline, Dumper,
Bucket Wheel Excavator, Continuous Miners – their basic construction, applications and
operation.
1. Elements of Mining Technology Vol. III, D.J. Deshmukh, Denett & Company,
2. Coal Mining Series Vol. 1 & II, Ernest Mason, Virtue
3. Mine Transport – N.T. Karelin, Orient Longmans
4. Mining and Transport – S. C. Walker, Elsevier
5. Introduction to Mining Engineers – Hartman. H.L, John Wiley & Sons.
6. Pumps Focus Compressors Walkar wending & Transport, Cherkasky B.M.
7. Mine Mechanisation and Automation, Alemgren G, U. Kumar.
Course Outcomes:
Students can understand mechanism involved in heavy machinery, locomotives used in

mines, track laying with different techniques. Different types of drills used in mines, winders
applications, winding drum construction, face machinery, open cast machinery like blast hole
drill, ripper, dumper, bucket wheel excavator, which will enhance the output of mines.

MN503 UNDERGROUND METAL MINING METHODS 3L:0T:0P 3 CREDITS
Syllabus:
Introduction to Metal Mining: Peculiarities of Metalliferous deposit. Scope and limitations of

underground mining, Opening up of underground deposits, choice of entry shaft and
combination and their applicability, limitations.
Mine Developments: Methods of developments, Factors effecting choice of level interval,
Cross cuts, Drive, shape and size of drive, winzes, Raises, block size, shaft station, ore bin,
ore pass and their position in relation to ore body and general scheme of its development.
Division of mining area into working units and level pattern, dimensions of panels and
blocks.
Stoping: Classification of stoping methods, applicability, limitations, merits and demerits,
Factors affecting choice of stopping methods like depth, dip, Width grade / value of deposit,
physio mechanical characteristics of the ore and wall rocks. Stope design and production
planning in various methods of stoping. Production and cycle time estimates. Stope and
development support, mining cycles, shift times, estimating equipment’s requirements.
Stoping Methods: Stoping without supports: Open stopping, overhand, underhand, breast
stoping. Stoping with Supports: shrinkage stopping cut and fill stopping, square set stopping.
Caving methods: Top Slicing, sublevel caving and block caving.
Special Stoping methods: Sublevel stoping, long-hole stoping, blast hole stoping, raise
stoping, V.C.R Stoping, in-situ leaching, bio-mineral engineering, hydraulic mining, blast
hole stoping, underground bench blasting, Extraction of remnant pillars, shaft pillars and
contiguous reefs, their supporting system and special precautions during extraction.
Deep mining: concept of deep mining, special problems of deep mining, , salt potash and
Sulphur mining and their special problems, stoping practices in rock burst prone mines.
Under sea mining, novel mining methods, application of tunnel and shaft boring machines
and their applications.
Module
01. Introduction to Metal Mining: Peculiarities of Metalliferous deposit. Scope and

limitations of underground mining, Opening up of underground deposits, choice of entry
shaft and combination and their applicability, limitations.
2. Mine Developments: Methods of developments, Factors effecting choice of level interval,

Cross cuts, Drive, shape and size of drive, winzes, Raises, block size, shaft station, ore bin,
ore pass and their position in relation to ore body and general scheme of its development.
Division of mining area into working units and level pattern, dimensions of panels and
blocks.
3. Stoping: Classification of stoping methods, applicability, limitations, merits and demerits,

Factors affecting choice of stopping methods like depth, dip, Width grade / value of deposit,
physio mechanical characteristics of the ore and wall rocks. Stope design and production

planning in various methods of stoping. Production and cycle time estimates. Stope and
development support, mining cycles, shift times, estimating equipment’s requirements.
4. Stoping Methods: Stoping without supports: Open stopping, overhand, underhand, breast
stoping. Stoping with Supports: shrinkage stopping cut and fill stopping, square set stopping.
Caving methods: Top Slicing, sublevel caving and block caving.
5. Special Stoping methods: Sublevel stoping, long-hole stoping, blast hole stoping, raise
stoping, V.C.R Stoping, in-situ leaching, bio-mineral engineering, hydraulic mining, blast
hole stoping, underground bench blasting, Extraction of remnant pillars, shaft pillars and
contiguous reefs, their supporting system and special precautions during extraction.
6. Deep mining: concept of deep mining, special problems of deep mining, salt potash and
Sulphur mining and their special problems, stoping practices in rock burst prone mines.
Under sea mining, novel mining methods, application of tunnel and shaft boring machines
and their applications.
Goals and Outcomes:
On completion of the subject, students will be able to:

1. Explain various terminology and development of underground metal mines.
2. Compare between coal and metal mining.
3. Explain various raising methods in stope development.
4. Explain various stopping methods used in metal mines.
5. Describe about face mechanism.
6. Explain about deep mining.
7. Explain design and planning of various stoping methods for effective production.
Suggested Text books:
1. Introductory Mining Engg: Harman, John Wiley and sons;

2. EMT-D.J Deshmukh
Reference Books:
3. Deep Mining-jack Spalding, mining publications;

4. P. Darling:”SME Mining engineers hand book”Vol.I&II
5. U/G Mining Method-Hustrulid, society for mining, metallurgy & Exploration
6. Shevyalov:”Mining and mineral deposits”. MIR Publishers
7. Popov:”Working of mineral deposits”. MIR Publishers

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE I

MN504 OPERATION RESEARCH 3L:0T:0P 3 Credits
Overview:
Operation Research (OR) is application of scientific methods, techniques and tools of
mathematical science to problems involving the operations of a system. OR provides the
control in the system and its component with optimum solutions to the problems. It is a
decision taking tool, which searches for the optimum results in coequality with the overall
objectives within the constraints of the organization.
Thus, OR is to solve complex problems that involves management of large systems of men,
machines, materials, and money in industry, business, government and defence. The
distinctive approach is to develop a scientific model of the system incorporating measurement
of factors such as chance and risk, to predict and compare the outcome of alternative
decisions, strategies or controls.
Its purpose is to give administration, on the basis of predicting most effective quantitative
results of an operation, under given set of variable conditions and thereby to provide a sound
basis for “decision-making”. Though it is very clear that operation research never make
decisions for the management, instead the method presents management with a careful
scientific and quantitative analysis of problem so that the management will be in a better
position to make sounder decisions.
In the more wide sense, operation research does not deal with the everyday problems such as
output by the one worker or machine capacity; instead it is concerned with the overall aspect
of business operation such as something as the relationship between inventory, sales,
production and scheduling. It may also deal with the overall flow of goods and services from
plants to consumers.
The team doing operation research may have, psychologists, labour specialists,
mathematicians, analysts, statisticians and others depending upon the requirement for the
problems.
Course Description:
This course is an introductory and practical course to the study of operations research
application in mining projects. It is designed primarily for mining engineering students to
replicate what is happening in the mining industry in classroom so as to be able to apply the
knowledge and skills gained during and after course of study to real life situations they might
face in the industry. It involves demonstration of principles and techniques of operations
research using real life projects. Topics to be covered include operation research and model
formulation, solution of the operation research model, phases of an 2 operation research
study, techniques of operation research or operations research solution tools such as Linear
Programming (LP) (Two phase (two variables) LP, Three phase (three variables) LP);
Transportation models, Network models, Queuing systems (models) etc.

The objectives of this course are to:
 Introduce students to the techniques of operations research in mining operations

 Provide students with basic skills and knowledge of operations research and its
application in mineral industry
 Introduce students to practical application of operations research in big mining
projects
Syllabus:
Introduction: Objectives and scope of Quantitative methods; Classification or types of
Quantitative methods; A brief history with particular reference to mining industry.
Linear Programming: Concepts, graphical solutions, simplex method, sensitivity analysis,
transportation and assignment problems.
Network Analysis: CPM and PERT methods, their relative suitability vis-à-vis specific
applications, time cost trading.
Dynamic Programming: Introduction, basic concept, Stage coach problem.
Stochastic Methods: Discrete and continuous probability distributions, Stochastic process and
Markov chains.
Basic queuing models with constant arrival and service rates; inventory models.
Monte-Carlo method- Introduction.
Modules:
Module 1: Introduction and course overview: Definition of Operation Research,
Objectives and scope of Quantitative methods.
Module 2: Classification of Quantitative methods: Different types of Quantitative
methods.
Module 3: History of OR: A brief history with particular reference to mining industry.
Module 4: Linear Programming Solving Techniques: Concepts, Graphical solutions
and Simplex methods.
Module 5: Linear Programming Application: Sensitivity analysis, Transportation and
assignment problems.
Module 6: Network analysis methods: CPM and PERT methods.
Module 7: Network analysis method's application and suitability: Relative suitability
vis-à-vis specific applications of CPM and PERT methods and Time cost
trading.
Module 8: Dynamic Programming: Introduction, basic concept, Stage coach problem.
Module 9: Stochastic approach to OR: Discrete and continuous probability
distributions, stochastic process and Markov chains.
Module 10: Problems which involves queuing or waiting: Basic queuing models with
constant arrival and service rates.
Module 11: Inventory models: Mathematical models in determining optimum level of
inventories.
Module 12: Introduction to statistical simulation: Introduction to Monte-Carlo method.

1. Handy A. Taha, An Introduction to Operation Research, University of Arkansas,
Fayettiville. 8th Edition. Pearson Education Inc. London (2003). 81p.
2. Hiller, F.S. And L.J. Lieberman: Introduction to operation research, Holden Day, San
Francisco (6th Ed.) (1995).
3. S. Kalavathy,Operations Research, 4th Edition, Vikas Publishing House
4. K.A. Stroud: Further Engineering Mathematics. Programmes and problems. 3rd
Edition Macmillan Press Ltd (1996). 974p.
5. P. Herrison, Operational Research: Quantitative Decision Analysis; Mike Morris
Publication (1983).
6. TaiwoOwoeye: Operation Research; Olugbenga Press Publication (2001). ISBN 987-
2430. 60p
7. Wayne L. Winston. Operation Research Application. 415p
Goals & Outcomes:

(Knowledge based)
 Explain the meaning of operations research
 Know the various techniques of operations research techniques;
 Apply the techniques used in operations research to solve real life problem in mining
industry
 Select an optimum solution with profit maximization;
 Have complete understand of the significant role operation research play in mining
 Project completion at every stage of the mines
(Skills)
Use operations research to:
 Identify and develop operational research models from the verbal description of the
real system. E.g. Solve transportation problems during the allocation of trucks to
excavators
 Formulate operation research models to solve real life problem
 Proficiently allocating scarce resources to optimize and maximize profit
 Eliminate customers / clients waiting period for service delivery
 Turn real life problems into formulation of models to be solve by linear programming
etc.
 Determine critical path analysis to solve real life project scheduling time and timely
delivery
 Use critical path analysis and programming evaluation production and review
techniques for timely project scheduling and completion and
 Conduct literature search on the internet in the use of operation research techniques in
mining projects execution and completion.
 Understand the mathematical tools that are needed to solve optimization problems.
 Use mathematical software to solve the proposed models.
 Develop a report that describes the model and the solving technique, analyse the
results and propose recommendations in language understandable to the decision-
making processes in Management Engineering.

MN505 MINE SYSTEM ENGINEERING 3L-0T-0P 3 CREDITS
Syllabus
Introduction to system engineering, system concept analysis, models in system analysis.
System approach to mine design, sub-system, engineering design phases of planning.
Economic considerations in planning of opencast and underground mining, optimal size,
capacity and development parameters.
Tactical and strategic planning, project planning, project appraisal, prepration of project
feasibility report.
Introduction to Statistical decision theory and its applications in the mineral industries,
Technological forecasting
Introduction to operations research techniques, network analysis, application of PERT and
CPM to mining projects.
Modules
1. Introduction to system engineering, system concept analysis, models in system
analysis.
2. System approach to mine design, sub-system and engineering design phases of
planning.
3. Economic considerations in planning of opencast mining, optimal size, capacity and
development parameters.
4. Economic considerations in planning of underground mining, capacity and
development parameters.
5. Tactical and strategic planning, project planning, project appraisal, prepration of
project feasibility report.
6. Introduction to Statistical decision theory and its applications in the mineral
industries, Technological forecasting
7. Introduction to operations research techniques, network analysis, application of PERT
and CPM to mining projects.
Fayettiville. 8th Edition. Pearson Education Inc. London (2003).
2. D. Biswas, Modern concepts of Surface Mining
3. W.Hustrulid, M.Kuchta and R.Martin, Openpit Mine Planning and Design.
4. S. Kalavathy,Operations Research, 4th Edition, Vikas Publishing House
5. Wayne L. Winston. Operation Research Application.
6. Surface Mining: Methods, Technologies and Systems. Volume-2
7. SME Mining Engineering Handbook, Third Edition
Fayettiville. 8th Edition. Pearson Education Inc. London (2003).
9. S.K. Das, Surface Mining Operations.

Goals and Outcomes:

This course qualifies participants to apply an advanced body of knowledge in the area of
mine system engineering and equips them with highly developed skills for research and
enquiry. Students enrolled in this course will be able to apply the body of knowledge to a
range of contexts within the mining industry enabling them to undertake professional or
highly skilled work within the mining industry and allow them to undertake further study.
Knowledge:
1. Analyse mining systems used in surface operations
2. Identify and develop operational research models from the verbal description of the
real system. E.g. Solve transportation problems during the allocation of trucks to
excavators
3. Formulate operation research models to solve real life problem
4. Turn real life problems into formulation of models to be solve by linear programming
etc.
5. Determine critical path analysis to solve real life project scheduling time and timely
delivery
Skills:
1. Review, analyze, consolidate and synthesizes knowledge to identify and provide
solutions to complex surface mining problems
2. Assess and evaluate complex ideas in mine system engineering and selection of the
number required and the size of appropriate equipment
3. Apply specialized technical and creative skills using appropriate tools to solve
problems in surface mining.

MN506 REMOTE SENSING & GIS 3L:0T:0P 3 Credits
Course Objectives:
Remote Sensing and GIS is a relatively young scientific discipline and is an area of emerging
technology which has witnessed phenomenal growth over last three decades. In the recent
past, there has been tremendous development in the field of Remote Sensing data collection,
analysis and utilization. The science of Remote Sensing is no more an art of Map making
from satellite image. The digital data handling led to the development of GIS (Geographical
Information System) followed by another innovation of GPS (Global Positing System).
Remote Sensing coupled with GIS and GPS techniques has dramatically enhanced human
capability for resources exploration, mapping and monitoring on local and global scale.
The application of Remote Sensing techniques and Geographical Information System (GIS)
in various activities including resources evaluation, environmental monitoring and
Landuse/Landcover mapping etc, have grown considerably during the last three decades and
Remote Sensing data products are being increasingly used for plan information at all levels.
An essentials pre-requisite to partaking in these opportunities is the building of various
indigenous capacities for the development and utilization of space science and technology.
This has led to a spurt in the demand for qualified manpower.

 Understanding the Geoinformatics approach
 Teach fundamental principles involved in RS and GIS
 Understand the Fundamentals of Remote sensing Products
 Know the Indian Remote Sensing Program
 Role of Remote Sensing for various surveys and information extraction
 Know about different software available in RS and GIS
 Learn fundamental procedures in RS and GIS
 Teach data integration and defining problems in digital format
Syllabus:
Definition & Scope of Remote Sensing: Electromagnetic energy & spectrum, Atmospheric
windows. Remote Sensing Systems, Sensors & Scanners, Resolution of sensors,
Multispectral, thermal & Radar data. Radiometers, spectral Signatures. Elements of Remote
Sensing Systems: Terrestrial, airborne &spaceborne platforms, sunsynchronous &
Geostationary satellites. Various earth resources satellites, Indian Remote sensing Programs.
Remote Sensing Data products & their types: Analogue & Digital data Formats, errors.
Interpretation Techniques: Elements & Methods of interpretation, Relief displacement and
vertical exaggeration, Photogrammetric determination of elevation from Remote Sensing
Data. Digital Image Processing: Image rectification & restoration, image enhancements,
image classification; supervised & unsupervised, accuracy assessments. Geographical
Information Systems: Raster & Vector Data, Components of GIS, concepts & basic
characteristics of Vectorization, topology generation, attribute data attachment, editing and
analysis. Buffer, Overlay and Interpolation techniques. Managing networks in GIS. Global
Positioning Systems: Types and method. Applications: Integrated approach of RS & GIS
application; Geotechnical investigations (soil studies, dam site studies), water resources
management, environmental studies (EIA and Land Use Land cover studies), transportation
planning, Urban Planning, E-Governance.

Modules
Module 1: Definition & Scope of Remote Sensing: Electromagnetic energy & spectrum,
Atmospheric windows. Remote Sensing Systems, Sensors & Scanners,
Resolution of sensors, Multispectral, thermal & Radar data. Radiometers,
spectral Signatures.
Module 2: Elements of Remote Sensing Systems: Terrestrial, airborne &spaceborne
platforms, sunsynchronous & Geostationary satellites. Various earth resources
satellites, Indian Remote sensing Programs.
Module 3: Remote Sensing Data products & their types: Analogue & Digital data
Formats, errors.
Module 4: Interpretation Techniques: Elements & Methods of interpretation, Relief
displacement and vertical exaggeration, Photogrammetric determination of
elevation from Remote Sensing Data.
Module 5: Digital Image Processing: Image rectification & restoration, image
enhancements, image classification; supervised & unsupervised, accuracy
assessments.
Module 6: Geographical Information Systems: Raster & Vector Data, Components of
GIS, concepts & basic characteristics of Vectorization, topology generation,
attribute data attachment, editing and analysis. Buffer, Overlay and Interpolation
techniques. Managing networks in GIS.
Module 7: Global Positioning Systems: Types and method.
Module 8: Applications: Integrated approach of RS & GIS application; Geotechnical
investigations (soil studies, dam site studies), water resources management,
environmental studies (EIA and Land Use Land cover studies), transportation
planning, Urban Planning, E-Governance.
1. M. Anji Reddy BS Publications Remote Sensing and Geographical Informatiotn Systems
Third Edition.
2. C.P LO Albert KW Yeung, Concepts and techniqes of Geographic Infromation Systems
Pritince Hall of India 2002.
3. John R Jensen Remote Sensing of the Environment ..an Earth Resource Perspective
Pearson Education 2006.
4. Geographic Informaiton System and Enviornment Modeling Keith C. Clerk, Bradely O
Parks, Michel P Crane Pritince Hall of India 2002.
5. Bhatta Remote Sensing and GIS Oxford University press First Edition.Surveying (Vol –
1,2 & 3), by B.C. Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain – Laxmi
Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi.

Goals & Outcomes:

(Knowledge based)
 Know Understand the remote sensing process;
 Understand digital data in different and their formats
 Know about National and International RS Programs
 Know about various satellites and images
 Know about changing field practices in Survey
 Know how to generate different types of digital data
 Know about Application areas
(Skills)
Use operations of RS & GIS to:
 Geotechnical investigations (soil studies, dam site studies)
 Water resources management
 Environmental studies (EIA and Land Use Land cover studies)
 Transportation planning, Urban Planning, E-Governance.

MN507 NUMERICAL TECHNIQUES IN 3L:0T:0P 3 credits

GEO-MECHANICS
Overview:
Numerical Techniques in Geo-Mechanics is the application of Numerical Methods in
Geomechanics (i.e. Rock Mechanics and Soil Mechanics). The Course aims to introduce the
extended evaluation of safety, regarding collapse or excessive settlement, for slopes, surface,
and underground earth works using Numerical Simulation. The perception is to Practice
Numerical Techniques in Rock and Geotechnical Engineering. The course is intended for
sixth semester students of B. Tech degrees in Civil and Mining Engineering (Geotechnics,
Mining Structures). Also, for professionals with an interest in the area of Geomechanics (like
Geotechnical Engineers, Structural Foundation Designers and Geology Engineers) and people
interested in research in applied numerical methods.
Since the Course is promoted by a Research Group in Computational Mathematics applied to

Geomechanics, applications of different Numerical Methods and Techniques are particularly
stressed.
Course Description:
This course starts with Principle of continuum mechanics and Numerical Methods. It will
elaborate the different numerical methods for Mathematical Modelling and need of
Numerical Modelling in designing excavation by analysing stresses around the excavation.
The course will also explain different Numerical Techniques such FDM, FEM, BEM and
introduction to some software’s based on these techniques.

 Introduce students to application of Numerical Methods in Mathematical Modelling
 Introduce students to practical application of Numerical Simulation in civil and
mining industry
 Introduce students to different Numerical Techniques and software’s based on this.
Syllabus:
Introduction: Principle of continuum mechanics, Numerical methods: Numerical Methods in
general, Numerical Methods in Linear Algebra; Need for numerical modelling in design of
excavation in mines, domain and boundary conditions, discretisation of domain and
boundary, principal methods of numerical simulation for excavation in mining (FEM, FDM,
& BEM; reference to geomechanics).
Finite Element Method: Basic principle, assembling elements to form a structural stiffness
matrix, imposing boundary conditions, solving structural equations using plane truss,
elements on assumed displacements, constant strain triangle, iso-parametric formulation.
Finite Difference Method: Basic principle, explicit finite difference method, finite difference
equation, solution stability.
Boundary Element Method: Basic principle, introductory ideas of its application in mining
excavations.
Introduction to numerical modelling packages: ANSYS, PLAXIS, FLAC etc.

Modules:
1. Introduction: Principle of continuum mechanics, Numerical Methods in general,
Solution of Equations by Iteration, Interpolation.
2. Numerical Integration and Differentiation: Numerical Integration and
Differentiation
3. Numerical Methods in Linear Algebra: Linear systems: Gauss Elimination,
Solution by Iteration.
4. Numerical Modelling: Need for numerical modelling in design of excavation in
mines, domain and boundary conditions and its application in Mathematical
Modelling.
5. Finite Element Method: Basic principle, assembling elements to form a structural
stiffness matrix, imposing boundary conditions, solving structural equations using
plane truss, elements on assumed displacements, constant strain triangle, iso-
parametric formulation.
6. Finite Difference Method: Basic principle, explicit finite difference method, finite
difference equation, solution stability.
7. Boundary Element Method: Basic principle, introductory ideas of its application in
mining excavations.
1. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th edition; John wiley & sons,
Part E (Numerical Methods)
2. Debasis Deb, Finite Element Method: Concept and Applications in Geomechanics;
Prentice Hall of India
3. J. B. Martins, Numerical Methods in Geomechanics; Springer
4. G. Swoboda, Numerical Methods in Geomechanics, 6th edition; CRC Press
5. http://vle.du.ac.in/course/view.php?id=562
Goals & Outcomes:
(Knowledge based)
 Understand different Numerical Methods.
 Identify and apply different Numerical Methods in different kind of Modelling
 Understand working of different FEM/ FDM/ BEM based software’s
(Skills)
Use Numerical Techniques in Geomechanics to:
 Analyse and evaluate different kind of Numerical Techniques (FEM) for different
conditions
 Can use different software’s for designing Civil and Mining structures
Able to write some programmes for various applications in Civil and Mining Industry

OPEN ELECTIVE I

MN508 MINERAL PROCESSING ENGINEEINRG 3L:0T:0P 3 Credits
Course Objectives:
This course introduces objectives of mineral processing, characteristics of minerals and coal,
crushing methods, separation methods, methods of concentration, fields of application and
limitations. Upon completion of the course, students will possess the knowledge needed to
design a mineral processing operation that ensures maximum profitability for a mining
company while achieving the required product quality specifications. Students will
understand the methodology used to select the appropriate unit operations, determine the
optimum operating conditions and select the required size of the unit. A knowledge of
product quality assurance programs that includes the monitoring of plant efficiency will be
demonstrated.
Syllabus:
Scope, objectives and limitations of mineral processing, liberation and beneficiation.
Comminution: Theory and practices of crushing and grinding; different types of crushing and
grinding equipment’s – their applications and limitations. Laboratory size analysis and
interpretation; settling of solids in fluids; industrial screens, mechanical classifiers and hydro
cyclones. Gravity Concentration Methods: Jigging, Heavy media separation, flowing film
concentrators–theory, applications and limitations. Physico-chemical principles, reagents,
Machines, floatation of sulphides and oxides ores and coals. Magnetic methods of
concentration Principles, Applications and limitations of magnetic concentration, Electric
methods of concentration Principles, High tension and low-tension electric concentration, Ore
sorters, Dewatering: Thickeners, filters, thermal drying. Simplified flow sheets for coal, zinc,
iron, and manganese ores. Magnetic methods of concentration Principles, Fields of
Application and Limitation.
Modules:
Module 1: Introduction: Scope, objectives and limitations of mineral processing, liberation

and beneficiation.
Module 2: Comminution: Theory and practices of crushing and grinding; different types of
crushing and grinding equipment’s – their applications and limitations.
Module 3: Size Separation: Laboratory size analysis and interpretation; settling of solids in
fluids; industrial screens, mechanical classifiers and hydro cyclones.
Module 4: Gravity Concentration Methods: Jigging, Heavy media separation, flowing film
concentrators–theory, applications and limitations.
Module 5: Froth Floatation: Physico-chemical principles, reagents, Machines, floatation of
sulphides, oxides and coal.
Module 6: Electrical and magnetic methods of concentrating technique: Magnetic
methods of concentration Principles, Applications and limitations of magnetic concentration,
Electric methods of concentration Principles, High tension and low-tension electric
concentration, Ore sorters,

Module 7: Dewatering: Thickeners, filters, thermal drying.

Module 8: Flow Sheets: Simplified flow sheets for coal, copper, lead and zinc, gold,
uranium, iron, manganese and lime stone ores, Laboratory sampling.
Module 9: Industrial lectures: Case studies of mineral processing plant projects by industry
professionals, covering comprehensive planning to commission the same.
Module 10: Basics of Professionalism: Professional Ethics, Entrepreneurial possibilities in
Mineral Processing Technology, Possibilities for creative & innovative working in this field,
1. Introduction to Mineral Processing – V. Malleswar Rao, Indian Academy of Geoscience
2. Mineral Processing – Barry A Wills, Elsevier.
3.Mineral Processing – S.K. Jain, CBS Publishers & Distributors
4. Mineral beneficiation a concise basic course by D.V. Subba rao
5. J. W. Leonard and B. C. Hardinge, Coal Preparation, Society for Mining, Metallurgy and
Exploration, Inc., Littleton, CO, ISBN 0-87335-104-5, 1991.
6. N. L. Weiss, SME Mineral Processing Handbook, Volumes 1 and 2, Society for Mining,
Metallurgy and Exploration, Inc., Littleton, CO, ISBN 0-89520-433-6, 1985.
Course goals and outcomes:

At the end of the course, students will be able to learn the following points which are given
below:
1. Understand Scope, objectives and limitations of mineral processing and theory of
Comminution
2. Understand basic concepts of Size Separation
3. Understand basic concepts Froth Floatation
4. Understand Applications and Limitations of Concentrating techniques
5. Understand various Flow Sheets
6.Develop processing flow sheets for the production of aggregates and mineral concentrates
from raw ore material
7. Obtain the knowledge for the typical process circuits used to treat aggregates and ores
containing one or more valuable minerals.
8. Conduct mass and water balances throughout the process flow sheet.
9. Predict solid-solid and solid-liquid separation performances based on known physical
properties of the raw material and process unit models.
10. Determine the process unit, size and number needed to effectively achieve solid-solid
separations and solid liquid separations.

MN 509 BULK MATERIAL HANDLING 3L:0T:0P 3 Credits
Course Objectives:
When the students enter the college to pursue a degree in Mining Engineering and as well
pursue a career in Mining Engineering after graduation, they need to understand the breadth
and depth available in this field for different bulk material handling system. When many
alternative disciplines of engineering appear to offer apparently more glamorous avenues for
advancement, the Mining Engineering student should realize the solid foundations available
in this mother of all engineering disciplines. The students should understand the enormous
possibilities available for creative and innovative works in this all-pervasive field of
engineering. This course introduces material handling and transportation concept, Operation
and maintenance of different conveying system, Design of transportation system and different
storage systems etc.
 To give an understanding to the students of the vast breadth and numerous areas of
 To motivate the student to pursue a career in one of the many areas of Mining
Engineering with deep interest and keenness.
 To expose the students to the various avenues available for doing creative and
innovative work in this field by showcasing the many monuments and inspiring
projects of public utility.
Syllabus:
Properties of the bulk material vis-à-vis different bulk handling operations. Classification of
bulk material transportation system: Road transport system, Rail transport system, pipe line
transport system, conveyor transport system. Design, operation and maintenance: Belt
conveyors. High angle conveyors, Cable belt conveyors, Booster belt conveyors -their
selection and application in the mining industry. Design and operation of slurry transport of
minerals and mining wastes. Operation and maintenance of Stacker, Reclaimer and Spreader.
Hydraulic and pneumatic conveying, stacking and blending, reclaiming of bulk materials.
Automation and online monitoring of bulk material handling system, Storage systems: Silos,
bins and bunkers. Rapid loading system, Merry-go-round system.
Modules:
Module 1: Introduction to Bulk Material Handling: Properties of the bulk material vis-à-
vis different bulk handling operations
Module 2: Classification of Bulk Material transportation System: Road transport system,
Rail transport system, pipe line transport system, conveyor transport system.
Module 3: Design, Operation and Maintenance of different types of Conveyor: Belt
conveyors. High angle conveyors, Cable belt conveyors, Booster belt conveyors -their
selection and application in the mining industry.
Module 4: Design, Operation and Maintenance of slurry transport system: Design and
operation of slurry transport of minerals and mining wastes.
Module 5: Operation and Maintenance of material handling machines: Operation and
maintenance of Stacker, Reclaimer and Spreader
Module 6: Hydraulic and pneumatic conveying system: Hydraulic and pneumatic
conveying, stacking and blending, reclaiming of bulk materials.
Module 7: Automation and online monitoring: Automation and online monitoring of bulk
material handling system,

Module 8: Storage System: Storage systems: Silos, bins and bunkers. Rapid loading system,
Merry-go-round system.
Module 9: Industrial lectures: Case studies of large tunneling and shaft sinking engineering
projects by industry professionals, covering comprehensive planning to commission the
same.
Tunneling Engineering, Possibilities for creative & innovative working, Technical writing
Skills enhancement; Facilities Management; Quality & HSE Systems in tunnel excavation
method.
1. Design and Selection of Bulk Material Handling Equipment and Systems Vol II, Jayanta
Bhattacharya
2. Design and Selection of Bulk Material Handling Equipment and Systems: Mining
Mineral Processing Port Plant and Excavation Engineering: Vol. I, Jayanta Bhattacharya
3. Hand Book of Bulk Materials Handling, Fruchtbaum, Jacob
4. Material Handling – Principles and Practices by Allegri (Sr.), T.H CBS Publishers and
Distributors, Delhi, 1987.
5. Kennedy, B.A., Surface Mining – 2nd Edition, SME, New York, 1990.
6. Peng, S.S., and Chiang, H.S., Longwall Mining, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1984.
7. Hartman, H.L., (Ed.), SME Mining Engg. Handbook Vol. I and II,
8. Society for Mining, Metallurgy, and Exploration, Inc., Colorado, 1992.
Course Goals & Outcomes:

1. Introduction to what constitutes Bulk material handling system.
2. Highlighting the depth of engagement possible within each of these areas.
3. Exploration of the various possibilities of a career in this field.
4. Understanding the vast interfaces this field has with the society at large.
5. Providing inspiration for doing creative and innovative work in bulk material handling
system.
6. Highlighting possibilities for taking up entrepreneurial activities in this field.
7. Providing a foundation for the student to launch off upon an inspired academic pursuit
into this subject of engineering.
8. Know about material handling system, different material handling methods.
9. Student gets knowledge about design, operation and maintenance of different conveying
system i.e. hydraulic, pneumatic, slurry transportation system etc.

MN510 CLEAN COAL TECHNOLOGY 3L:0T:0P 3 Credits
Course objectives:
The course outlines the current changes and developments in the coal combustion-related
processes. The course objectifies with the aim of utilizing the energy from coal and its by-
products efficiently, such that minimal amount of waste generation and disposal takes place.
The course aims at stating the physical and chemical process working under the carbon
capture, and sequestrations. Clean coal technology works around the foundation to create
minimal impact on the environment.
Syllabus:
Definition and objectives. Classification of CCT’s. Carbon sequestration and storage of CO2,
coal bed methane recovery and its utilization, underground coal gasification (in-situ and
surface gasification), Coal production and utilization trends., Life cycle of coal, Status of coal
utilization technology and related operating and environmental problems. coal
characterization and qualities and their effect on selection of efficient methods for eco-
friendly utilization of coal. classification system of coal, rank and grade of coal. Necessity,
scope and limitations of pre-combustion coal cleaning technology. Wash ability
characteristics and preparation problems related to coal quality. Principles, operations and
selection of processes for coal preparation. Plant performance evaluation and forecasting of
cleaning results. Environmental problems and related mitigating measures. Fluidized bed
combustion techniques, integrated gasification combined cycle (IGCC) and their co –
generation options. Necessity, scope and limitations of combustion and post-combustion
clean coal technologies. Developments, basic principles, operating features of clean coal
technologies. Selection, performance and related environmental problems and their control.
Characterization, impacts, control, treatment and safe disposal of wastes and pollutants
released from various stages of clean coal technologies. Utilization of wastes and pollutants.
Modules:
Module 1: Introduction to CCT: Definition and objectives. Classification of CCT’s.

Carbon sequestration and storage of CO2, coal bed methane recovery and its utilization,
underground coal gasification (in-situ and surface gasification),
Module 2: Coal characterization and utilization: Coal production and utilization trends.,
Life cycle of coal, Status of coal utilization technology and related operating and
environmental problems. coal characterization and qualities and their effect on selection of
efficient methods for eco-friendly utilization of coal. classification system of coal, rank and
grade of coal.
Module 3: Pre-combustion techniques: Necessity, scope and limitations of pre-combustion
coal cleaning technology. Wash ability characteristics and preparation problems related to
coal quality. Principles, operations and selection of processes for coal preparation. Plant
performance evaluation and forecasting of cleaning results. Environmental problems and
related mitigating measures.
Module 4: Combustion techniques: Fluidized bed combustion techniques, integrated
gasification combined cycle (IGCC) and their co – generation options.
Module 5: Post combustion techniques: Necessity, scope and limitations of combustion and
post-combustion clean coal technologies. Developments, basic principles, operating features

of clean coal technologies. Selection, performance and related environmental problems and
their control.
Module 6: Waste management and Pollutants: Characterization, impacts, control,
treatment and safe disposal of wastes and pollutants released from various stages of clean
coal technologies. Utilization of wastes and pollutants.
Module 7: Industrial lectures: Case studies of coal preparation plant projects by industry
professionals, covering comprehensive planning to commission the same.
Clean Coal Technology, Possibilities for creative & innovative working in this field to extend
a practicable solution to coal industries.
Reference/text books:
1. Clean Coal Technologies for Power Generation by P Jayrama Reddy.
2. Clean Coal Engineering Technology by Bruce Granville Miller.
3. Clean Coal Technology and Sustainable Development from Proceedings of the 8th
International Symposium on Coal Combustion. -Yue, Guangxi, Li, Shuiqing, (2016).
4. Clean Coal Engineering Technology: Bruce G Miller, Elsevier Publications.
5. Fuels and Combustion: Samir Sarkar, University Press (India) Pvt Limited, India.
6. The Chemistry and Technology of Coal: James G Speight, Marcel Dekker.
Course goals and outcomes:
1. After successful completion of the course the learner will be able to:
2. List the new technologies for coal-fired power generation.
3. Identify policy considerations and outline future aspects for coal use.
4. Examine new technologies for clean coal and analyze commercial viability of new
technologies.
5. Assess technologies in clean coal to technologies in energy alternatives.

MN511 INTERNET OF THINGS (IoT) 3L:0T:0P 3 CREDITS
Course Objective
Internet of Things (IoT) is presently a hot technology worldwide. Government, academia, and
industry are involved in different aspects of research, implementation, and business with IoT.
IoT cuts across different application domain verticals ranging from civilian to defense
sectors. This course is designed to address the following: Similarly, for safety critical
industry like of mining industry application of IoT has potential to open up the opportunities
of enhancement of operational safety and productivity.
Purposes of this course is:
 To get the students acquainted with upcoming trend of using sensor networks in
Mining Industry.
 To learn the basic concepts of IoT.
 To learn the different communication schemes and protocols used in IoT
 To lean the data management techniques in IoT.
Syllabus
Importance of sensor networking in mining and other safety critical industries.
Introduction to IoT: functional layers of IoT, Sensing, Actuation, data warehousing and
analytics.
Basics of Networking, Communication Protocols, Networking Hardwares
Sensor Networks: Machine-to-Machine Communications, Interoperability in IoT.
SDN for IoT, Cloud Computing for IoT, Fog Computing in IoT context,
Industrial IoT: Impact in Security, Data Integrity, Ease of industrial operations management.
Modules
1. Importance of sensor networking in mining and other safety critical industries.

2. Introduction to IoT: functional layers of IoT, Sensing, Actuation, data warehousing
and analytics.
3. Basics of Networking, Communication Protocols, Networking Hardwares
4. Sensor Networks: Machine-to-Machine Communications, Interoperability in IoT.
5. SDN for IoT, Cloud Computing for IoT, Fog Computing in IoT context,
6. Industrial IoT: Impact in Security, Data Integrity, Ease of industrial operations
management.

1. Related Magazines and Research Articles

2. Online Blogs on IoT
3. NPTEL lecture Notes of Prof. Sudip Mishta
Goals & Outcomes:
 Making students aware of applications of IoT in Mining Industry scenario.

 Getting overall knowledge of IoT ecosystem.
 Making the students aware of different technical perspective of sensor networking.

PRACTICALS

MN 521P MINE VENTILATION ENGINEERING LAB 0L:0T:3P 1 CREDITS
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
Sl. No. Name of Experiment
1. Study of whirling and fixed hygrometer and estimation of relative humidity.
2. Study of whirling and fixed hygrometer and estimation of relative humidity.
3. Study of kata thermometer and determination of cooling power in mine air.
4. Determination of air velocity and air quantity measurement by vane
anemometer.
5. Determination of effective temperature using dry and wet bulb temperature.
6. Study of co and h2s detectors and determination of their percentage.
7. Determination of inflammable gas percentage by MSA d6 Methanometer.
8. Study of various types of flame safety lamps.
9. Study of various types of fans and their characteristic curves and their use in
locating efficient operating point.
10. Determination of parallel and series operation of fan.
11. Determination of air pressure by inclined tube manometer.

MN 522P MINING MACHINERY LAB 0L:0T:3P 1 CREDITS
1. Study and sketch of various types of wire ropes construction.
2. Study of friction props.
3. Study and sketch of hydraulic props (close and open circuit).
4. Study and sketch of safety devices in haulage roads.
5. Study and sketch of coal drill and bits.
6. Study and sketch of jack hammer drill.
7. Study and sketch of side discharge loader and load haul dumper.
8. Study and sketch of chain conveyor & belt conveyor.
Study and sketch of suspension gear arrangements in friction and drum

9. winders.
10. Study and sketch of various safety hooks in winding.
11. Study and sketch of safety devices used in winders.
12. Study and sketch of face pumps and their operations.

MN 523P INTERNET OF THINGS LAB 0L:0T:3P 1 CREDITS

(IoT LAB)
1. Setting up a programming environment for Arduino Boards and programming
in emulators.
2. Handling Digital display and LED panels with Arduino
3. Interfacing methods for digital and analog sensors and logging data with
timestamp.
4. Interfacing Gas Sensors with Arduino controllers.
5. Serial, I2C and SPI communication.
6. Wireless communication Modules.
7. Introduction to IoT development boards with inbuilt wireless capability.
8. Introduction to Embedded Computer and their programming.
9. Introduction of designing Device schismatics with KiCad (Open Source)
10. Introduction to custom PCB Design using KiCad (Open Source)
11. Localization of Wireless Sensor Devices with RSSI data
12. Setting up local servers for handling and storage of IoT sensors data.
13. Use of cloud servers for developing IoT Platforms
14. Data Analytics with IoT sensors acquitted data.
15. Designing of user interfaces for IoT data visualization.
16. Modelling Sensor Networks with Network Emulators.

MN 524P MINE DESIGN - II LAB 0L:0T:3P 1 CREDITS
1. Study of bely conveyor and carrying capacity determination.
2. Study of direct rope haulage capacity calculation.
3. Determination of factor of safety of winding rope.
4. Study of winding pulley and calculation of fleet angle.
5. Study of torque - time diagram in friction and drum winder.
6. Determination of load on longwall face and choice of suitable power support.
7. Production design of mechanized longwall face (AFC & Shearer).
8. Production design of mechanized B & P using continuous miner technology.
9. Blast design for given production of an opencast mines.
10. Design of open pit slope for stability.
11. Study of bucket wheel excavator in an opencast mine.
12. Study of Surface Miner in an opencast mine.

VIth SEMESTER

MINING ENGINEERING
B.Tech, Semester VI (Third year]
Course Structure
Sl. No. Course Course Title Hours per week Credit

Code
L T P
THEORY
1. MN601 Mine Environmental Engineering 4 1 0 4
2. MN602 Rock Mechanics 3 1 0 3
3. MN603 Advanced Underground Coal Mining Methods 3 1 0 3
4. Professional Elective – II (Any One of the Following)
I. MN604 Rock Excavation Engineering 3 1 0 3
II. MN605 Rock Slope Engineering 3 1 0 3
III. MN606 Mine Ventilation Planning 3 1 0 3
IV. MN607 Advanced Mine Ventilation Engineering 3 1 0 3
5. Open Elective – II (Any One of the Following) *
I. ×××××× Electrical Engineering in Mines 3 1 0 3
II. MN608 Data Analytics 3 1 0 3
III. MN609 Reliability Engineering 3 1 0 3
IV. MN610 Geostatistics 3 1 0 3
PRACTICALS
1. MN621P Rock Mechanics Lab 0 0 3 1
2. MN622P Mine Environmental Engineering Lab 0 0 3 1
3. MN623P Data Analytics Lab 0 0 3 1
4. ×××××× Electrical Engineering in Mines Lab 0 0 3 1
5. ×××××× Internship/ Tour & Training/ Industrial Training 0 0 2 2
22

PROFESSIONAL CORE

MN601 MINE ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING 3L:1T:0P 4 CREDITS
Course objective
Assess environmental issues associated with air, land, and water systems and their
accompanying human health and ecological impacts due to mining activities. Synthesize
technical knowledge of engineering analysis and design to identify, formulate, and solve
problems of professional interest and importance. This course streams into more specialised
areas including: water quality engineering, air and noise pollution control, solid and hazardous
waste management, environmental engineering design, and site remediation related to mining
engineering.
Course content
Land environment: visual impacts, landscape analysis, land use, landscape planning,
physical reclamation and subsidence management. Land reclamation principles and
requirement; Topsoil management inventory, removal, preservation and redistribution;
Ecological restoration technology –objectives and guidelines ;Technical reclamation –
stability, drainage and erosion control; Factors effecting the development of vegetation cover
in mine
degraded areas; estimation of sediment load and design of sedimentation pond; Mine closure
planning – environmental impacts of mine closure, development of closure plan, closure
guidelines, mine closure activity, closure cost.
Water regime: Water quality – physical, chemical, biological, criteria and standards, Waste
water management – sources characteristics, techniques of treatment. Acid mine drainage –
occurrence, effects and treatment techniques. Groundwater hydrology: Measurement of yield,
Laws of groundwater movement: Darcy`s law, Thiems equilibrium formula, Duipuits formula
etc. CPCB standards.
Air pollution: sources of gaseous and particulate pollutants , their physical, chemical( special
preference to greenhouse gases and ozone)physiological effects Classification of Air
Pollutants, Particulates and Gaseous pollutants, Sources of air pollution, Effects of air
pollution on Human Beings, Materials, Vegetation, Animals. Major Global and Regional
impacts, monitoring and control.control of air borne respirable dust : ventilation , water
spray, cyclone dust collector, dust filtration , dust scrubber. Control technologies of motor
vehicle emissions and indoor air pollution.CPCB standards for air pollution control.
Noise pollution/ ground vibration: Fundamentals of Noise: Basics of Acoustics: Sound

power, Sound intensity and Sound pressure levels; Plane, Point and Line sources, Multiple
sources; Outdoor and indoor noise propagation; Effects of noise –noise induced deafness,
presbycusis, acoustic trauma, other physiological and psychological effects; Noise standards
and indices. Vibration problems in surface mines and control measures. Ground Vibration
and Air Blast -Environmental impacts, strategic planning and abatement/ prevention.
Illumination: Cap lamps; Layout and organization of lamp rooms; Standards of illumination;
Photometry and illumination survey.

Learning outcomes:
After successful completion of the course the learner will be able to:
 Identify, formulate, and solve complex mine environmental engineering problems in

land degradation ,water and wastewater, air pollution, solid waste, and related areas
by selecting and applying appropriate tools and techniques.
 Specify or design unit processes or systems associated with traditional areas of
environmental engineering.
 Synthesize advanced technical knowledge in a traditional or emerging specialization
area of mine environmental engineering.
References /textbooks
 Environmental Land use planning and Management, John Randolph, Island Press,
 Land Use in Mining Areas of India, Rekha Ghosh, Envis, ISM Dhanbad, ISSN 0972
4656.
 Eco restoration of the coalmine degraded lands- Subodh Kumar Maiti, Springer
(2013).
 Air Pollution Control Equipment. H. Brauer and Y. B. G. Verma, Berlin Heidelberg,
New York, latest edition.
 Environmental Impact of Mining – Down CG and Stocks J. Applied Science
Publishers, London,1978.
 Best Practices Environmental Management in Mining” - EPA (Australia): 1997-2004.
 Environmental Management in Mining Areas– Saxena NC, Singh Gurdeep and Ghosh
R, (Ed.), Scientific Publishers (India), Jodhpur 2003.
 Industrial Noise Control and Acoustics – Randall F Barron, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New
York, 2003.
 Engineering Noise Control: Theory and Practice – David Bies et. al., Routledge
Publishers, 2003.
 Vibrations – Balakumar Balachandran and Edward B. Magrab, Thomson Asia Pte.
Ltd., Singapore, 2003.
 Noise control: Principles and Practice - Bruel & Kjaer, 2nd ed. B & K Pub., Denmark,
1986.

MN602 ROCK MECHANICS 3L: 0T: 0P 3. Credit
Course Objective
The course is designed to provide a better understanding to evaluate physico-mechanical
properties of rocks, elastic and time dependent behavior, laboratory and field test procedure,
rock mass characteristics. Theories of rock failure, Influence of water on rock and soil
behavior. Dynamic characteristics of rocks. Concept of in - situ stress and post mining
redistribution of stress.
Syllabus
Concept of stress and strain in rock: Analysis of stress, strain and constitutive relations in
isotropic and anisotropic rocks. Physico-mechanical properties rocks: Determination of
physical properties, strength, strength indices and static elastic constants, parameters
influencing strength, abrasivity and its determination. Physico-mechanical properties of
soil: Physico-mechanical properties including consistency and gradation, classification of
engineering soils, engineering properties of soils- compressibility, consolidation, compaction
and strength. Time dependent properties of the rock. Creep formation and strength behavior,
creep test and simple rheological models. Behavior of Rock Mass: Rock mass structure,
in-situ elastic properties and strength determination. Failure criteria for rock and rock mass:
Theories of rock failure, Column, Mohr, Griffith and Empirical criteria. Pre-mining state of
stress: Sources, methods of determination including over coring and hydro-fracturing methods.
Ground water: Influence of water on rock and soil behavior, permeability of rocks,
measurement of permeability, ground water flow in rock mass, measurement of water
pressure. Dynamic property of the rock and rock mass: Propagation of elastic wave in rock
media, determination of properties and elastic constants.
Modules
Module 1. Introduction to Stress and Strain:
Concept of stress and strain in rock, Analysis of stress, strain and constitutive relations in
isotropic and anisotropic rocks.
Module 2. Physico-mechanical properties rocks:
Determination of physical properties, strength, strength indices and static elastic
constants, parameters influencing strength, abrasivity and its determination.
Module 3.Time dependent properties of the rock:
Creep formation and strength behavior, creep test and simple rheological models.
Module 4. Behavior of Rock Mass:
Rock mass structure, in-situ elastic properties and strength determination.
Module 5. Rock mass Failure criteria:
Failure criteria for rock and rock mass. Theories of rock failure, Coulomb - Navier, Mohr,
Griffith and Empirical criteria.
Module 6. Influence of water on rock and soil behavior:
Ground water: Influence of water on rock and soil behavior, permeability of rocks,
measurement of permeability, ground water flow in rock mass, measurement of water
pressure.
Module 7. Dynamic behavior of Rock and Rock mass:
Dynamic property of the rock and rock mass. Propagation of elastic wave in rock media,
determination of properties and elastic constants.

1. Fundamental of Rock Mechanics by J.C Jaeger & N.G.W. Cook, Blackwell Publishing
2. Coal Mining ground Control by Syd S. Peng, West Virginia University.
3. Rock Mechanics for underground Mining– BHG Brady & E T Brown, George Allen &
Unwin Ltd, 1992.
4. Introduction to Rock Mechanics, Second Edition, Richard E. Goodman
5. Fundamental and Applied Rock Mechanics, D. Deb, A.K. Verma
Course Outcome:
After completion of the course, students will be able to:
1. Understand mechanical properties of rock, different theories of rock failure.
2. Know Causes and impacts of rock failure, rock strength and stresses induced in rocks.
3. Understand the time dependent deformation in rock structure.
4. Understand the effect of water on rock structure and their stability.
5. Understand the dynamic characteristics of rock and rock mass.

MN603 ADVANCED UNDERGROUD COAL 3L: 0T: 0P 3. Credit

MINING METHODS
Course Objective
After getting exposed to basics of mining engineering, students should get a dig into different
types of mines. When it comes to coal mines, especially underground coal mines where there
is relatively high risk compare to other mines, students should be well familiar with risks and
challenges associated with them, thus requiring some case studies essentially. Advance
Underground coal mining methods covers many working methods which are applicable
within different and rare circumstances. Students, after going through this subject, will be
benefitted with deep knowledge of underground coal mining, as they have some basics in
earlier.

 To expose the students with the knowledge of special working methods carried out for
abnormal cases.
 To expose the students with modern methods being carried out across the globe.
 To encourage the students for some innovative works by the exposure of some case
studies.
Syllabus
Thick Seam Mining: Concept of thick seam, problems of the mining thick seams, past
experience of working thick seams by Bord & Pillar method in multi sections. Modern multi-
slicing method - incline slicing, horizontal slicing, cross slicing in ascending and descending
order. Equipments for thick seam mining. Case Studies. Advanced Underground Winning
Methods: Sublevel Caving, Integral Caving, Blasting Gallery Method, Descending Shield
Method, Hydraulic Mining, Bhaska and Tipong Method. Case Study. Steep Seam Mining:
Mining technology of inclined and steep seams Thin Seam Mining: Problems in thin seam
mining, equipment and methods for thin seam extraction. Case Study. Underground Coal
Gasification and Coal Bed Methane: Basic concepts, applications and limitations of the
methods with case studies.
Modules
1. Thick Seam Mining: Concept of thick seam, problems of the mining thick seams,
past experience of working thick seams by Bord & Pillar method in multi sections.
2. Modern multi- slicing method: incline slicing, horizontal slicing, cross slicing in
ascending and descending order. Equipments for thick seam mining. Case Study.
3. Advanced Underground Winning Methods: Sublevel Caving, Integral Caving,
Blasting Gallery Method, Descending Shield Method,
4. Hydraulic Mining: Bhaska and Tipong Method. Case Study.
5. Steep Seam Mining: Mining technology of inclined and steep seams
6. Thin Seam Mining: Problems in thin seam mining, equipments and methods for thin
seam extraction. Case Study.
7. Underground Coal Gasification (UCG): Basic concepts, applications and limitations
of the methods with case studies.
8. Coal Bed Methane: Basic concepts, applications and limitations of the methods with
case studies.

1. Principles and Practices & Modern Coal Mining, R.D. Singh,New Age International
Publication.
2. Underground Mining & Coal, Singh, T.N. Singh – Oxford Publication.
3. Modern Coal Mining Technology, Das S.K. – Lovely Prakasan publication.
4. Longwall mining, Peng S.S., Chiang H/S. – John Willey Publication.
5. Mine Planning for Coal, Mathur S.P. – M.J Consultant Publications.
6. Winning and Working Coal in India Vol.II- R.T. Deshmukh and D.J.Deshmukh,
Dhanbad Publishers
7. Underground Coal Mining Methods – J.G. Singh, Braj-Kalpa Publishers.
Goals & Outcomes:
1. Understand mine planning, opening of deposits, pillar development, pillar extraction,

Layout required for out puts, long well mining, mechanized extraction of long wall
panel.
2. Understand the concept of gasification, Technology involved in it, Non-mining
methods of UCG, Gasification at great depth, merits and demerits, Future scope and
Development.

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE II

MN604 ROCK EXCAVATION ENGINEERING 3L:0T:0P 3 Credits
Course Objectives:
When the students enter the college to pursue a degree in Mining Engineering and as well
pursue a career in Mining Engineering after graduation, they need to understand the breadth
and depth available in this field for different rock excavation methods. When many
alternative disciplines of engineering appear to offer apparently more glamorous avenues for
advancement, the Mining Engineering student should realize the solid foundations available
in this mother of all engineering disciplines. The students should understand the enormous
possibilities available for creative and innovative works in this all pervasive field of
engineering.

 To give an understanding to the students of the vast breadth and numerous areas of
 To motivate the student to pursue a career in one of the many areas of Mining
Engineering with deep interest and keenness.
 To expose the students to the various avenues available for doing creative and
innovative work in this field by showcasing the many monuments and inspiring
projects of public utility.
Syllabus:
Scope and importance: Rock excavation engineering in mining and construction
industries; physico-mechanical and geotechnical properties of rocks Vis-à-vis excavation
method; selection of excavation method.
Drilling: Mechanics of rock drilling; design and operating parameters of surface and
underground drilling; evaluation of drill performance; drillability of rocks; mechanism of bit
wear; bit selection; problems of drilling; economics of drilling.
Blasting: mechanics of rock fragmentation by explosives; advances in explosives and their
selection criteria for rock excavation; blast design for surface excavations and optimization;
advanced blast initiation systems; blast performance evaluation; cast blasting; techno-
economic and safety aspects of surface and underground blasting; advances in blast design
for underground excavations; contour blasting; computer aided blast designs; review of
tunnel blasting techniques in recent advances.
Rock Cutting: theories of rock tool interaction for surface excavation machinery-
rippers, bucket wheel excavators, continuous surface miners; theories of rock tool
interaction for underground excavation machinery- ploughs, shearers, road headers,
continuous miners and tunnel boring machines; selection criteria for cutting tools;
Advanced rock cutting techniques- high pressure water jet assisted cutting.
Modules:
Module 1: Basic Understanding: What is Rock Excavation Engineering? Basics of Rock
Excavation Engineering in mining and construction industries; Importance of Rock
Excavation Engineering; Possible scopes for a career in Rock Excavation Engineering.
Module 2:. Selection Criteria for Rock Excavation: Physical and mechanical properties of
rock materials; Geotechnical properties of rock materials in regard to method of excavation;
Selection of excavation method.
Module 3: Drilling Mechanism, Performance and Problems: Mechanics of drilling;
Design and operating parameters of surface drilling and underground drilling. Performance

parameters of drilling; Evaluation of drilling performance; Drillability of rock; Selection of

drill bit. Drill bit wear; Mechanism of drill bit wear; Economics of drilling.
Module 4: Blasting Operation, Blast Design, Performance and Advance underground
blast: Mechanism of rock fragmentation by explosives; Advances in explosives and their
selection criteria for rock excavation. Blast design for surface excavation; Optimization of
blast design; Initiation system; advanced blast initiation system; Powder factor; Calculation
of powder factor; techno-economic aspects in surface and underground blasting; safety
aspects in surface and underground blasting. New technology for underground blast design
for excavation; contour blasting; computer aided blast design; recent advances in tunnel
blasting.
Module 5: Rock cutting technology and Selection: Theories of rock cuttings; rock and tool
interaction for surface and underground excavation. Criteria for selecting cutting tools;
advanced rock cutting techniques; High pressure jet assisted cutting.
Module 6: Surface and Underground excavation machineries: Ripper; Bucket wheel
Excavator; Surface continuous miner; Ploughs; Shearers; Road headers; Continuous miner
and Tunnel boring machines.
Module 7: Computational Methods, IT in Rock Excavation Engineering: Typical
software used in Rock Excavation Engineering- Finite Element Method, Computational Fluid
Dynamics; Computational geotechnical methods; Highlighting typical available software
system (FLAC 2D, FLAC 3D, PLAXIS 2D and PLAXIS 3D)
Module 8: Industrial lectures: Case studies of large tunneling and shaft sinking engineering
projects by industry professionals, covering comprehensive planning to commission the
same.
Rock Excavation Engineering, Possibilities for creative & innovative working, Technical
writing Skills enhancement; Facilities Management; Quality & HSE Systems in excavation
method.
1. Ratan Raj Tatiya, Surface and underground excavation method.
2. Principles of Rock fragmentation,Cark G.B-John Wiley & Sons
3. Diamond Drilling, Chugh C.P-Oxford Publication
4. Introduction to Mining Engineers – Hartman. H.L, John Wiley & Sons.
Course Goals & Outcomes:
* Introduction to what constitutes Rock Excavation Engineering.
* Identifying the various areas available to pursue and specialize within the overall field of
Rock Excavation Engineering.
* Highlighting the depth of engagement possible within each of these areas.
*Exploration of the various possibilities of a career in this field.
*Understanding the vast interfaces this field has with the society at large.
*Providing inspiration for doing creative and innovative work in Rock Excavation
Technology.
* Showcasing the many tunnel construction, vertical shaft and incline for accessing the
deposits, nationally important infrastructure, and impressive projects to serve as sources of
inspiration.
* Highlighting possibilities for taking up entrepreneurial activities in this field.
* Providing a foundation for the student to launch off upon an inspired academic pursuit into
this subject of engineering.
* Know about rock excavation, excavation methods, drill bit wear and drillability to cut
rocks.
* Optimize, safety aspects of surface and underground blasting.

MN605 ROCK SLOPE ENGINEERING 3L:0T:0P 3 Credits
Pre-requisite: Surface mining technology
Course Objectives:
To introduce the basic mechanics of rock slope failure to learn the types of rock failure and
its influencing parameters
Syllabus:
Basic mechanics of rock slope failure: Rock slope economics, slope parameters, effect of
water pressure, factor of safety of slopes, slope height vs. slope angle, design of slopes.
Geological and strength properties: Geological parameters affecting slope stability; physico-
mechanical properties affecting slope stability, shearing on incline plane, determination of
shear strength of rock and rock discontinuities; Ground water flow in rock masses; field
measurement of permeability; measurement of water pressure. Plane Failure: Plane failure
analysis; graphical analysis of stability; influence of ground water on stability, Influence of
tension crack; rock reinforcement; analysis of failure on a rough plane; case studies. Wedge
Failure: Analysis of wedge failure; wedge analysis including cohesion and water pressure;
case studies. Circular and toppling Failure: Conditions for circular failure; derivation of
circular failure analysis; effect of ground water; Types of toppling failure; analysis of
toppling failure; Influence of slope curvature on stability; slope depressurization: protection
of slopes: control of rock falls. Slope Monitoring: Monitoring and instrumentation techniques
of rock slopes. Investigations of failed slopes, Remedial Measure: Remedial and corrective
measures. Remedial measures for slope stabilization. Numerical Analysis: Numerical analysis
of slopes. Use of FLAC Software.
Modules:
Module 1: Basic mechanics of rock slope failure: Rock slope economics, slope parameters,
effect of water pressure, factor of safety of slopes, slope height vs. slope angle, design of
slopes. Module 2: Geological and strength properties: Geological parameters affecting
slope stability; physico-mechanical properties affecting slope stability, shearing on incline
plane, determination of shear strength of rock and rock discontinuities; Ground water flow in
rock masses; field measurement of permeability; measurement of water pressure.
Module 3: Plane Failure: Plane failure analysis; graphical analysis of stability; influence of
ground water on stability, Influence of tension crack; rock reinforcement; analysis of failure
on a rough plane; case studies.
Module 4: Wedge Failure: Analysis of wedge failure; wedge analysis including cohesion
and water pressure; case studies.
Module 5: Circular and toppling Failure: Conditions for circular failure; derivation of
circular failure analysis; effect of ground water; Types of toppling failure; analysis of
toppling failure; Influence of slope curvature on stability; slope depressurization: protection
of slopes: control of rock falls.
Module 6: Slope Monitoring: Monitoring and instrumentation techniques of rock slopes.
Investigations of failed slopes.
Module 7: Remedial Measure: Remedial and corrective measures. Remedial measures for
slope stabilization.
Module 8: Numerical Analysis: Numerical analysis of slopes. Use of FLAC Software.

1. Hoek, E and Bray, J.W., Rock Slope Engineering, Institution of Mining and Metallurgy,
1991.
2. Goodman, R.E., Rock Mechanics, John Wiley and Sons, 1989
3. Singh, R.N. and Ghose, A.K., Engineered Rock Structures in Mining and Civil
Construction, A.A. Balkema, Netherlands, 2006.
4. Rock Slope Engineering: Civil and Mining by Duncan C. Wyllie
5. Cumming A.B. & Given I &V. & SME Vol. I & II, Society of Mining Engineers, USA.
6. Introduction to Mining Engineering, Hartman H.L. – John Willey & Sons.
7. Soil Slope Instability and Stabilization, Bruce F. Walker, Robin Fell, Proceedings of an
Extension Course on Soil Slope Instability and Stabilization, Sydney
8. Rock Mechanics by Alfreds R. Jumikis, Trans Tech Publications,
9. Rock Mechanics by BGH Brady, ET Brown/Springer Publishing
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to,

1. Understand Basic mechanics of rock slope failure
2. Understand Geological parameters and physico-mechanical properties affecting slope
stability
3. Understand basics of Plane failure
4. Understand basics of Wedge failure
5. Understand basics of Circular and toppling failure.
6. Understand about data interpretation for slope stability analysis
7. Understand about mechanism of failure of rock mass,
8. Understand about influence of ground water on slopes and techniques of depressurization,
9. Understand about instrumentation techniques of rock slopes, use of software like FLAC.

MN606 MINE VENTILATION PLANNING 3L:0T:0P 3 credits
Overview:
Mine Planning introduces you to key mine planning concepts. The mine planning process is
complex and integrates several technical branches of the mining discipline including rock
mechanics, rock breakage, ventilation and mine design. While mine planners should
endeavour to design and implement plans that are safe, environmentally sustainable and
socially acceptable, the overriding factor in the success of a mining operation and what
ultimately determines whether it will proceed through feasibility studies and onto
construction and development is the level of profitability. The drive to exploit a mineral
resource such that it adds as much value as possible to the mining business requires a
continual update of the mine plan and the rapid implementation of any value adding
opportunities as they arise.
It is assumed that course participants have a good understanding of mining terms and
descriptions, have been exposed to surface and underground mining methods, are familiar
with mining development, operations and production and are keen to learn how to plan a
mine for the purpose of maximizing value. Course participants are also expected to have a
basic knowledge of rock mechanics, rock breakage, ventilation, typical mining equipment
and other technical fundamentals which form the platform and constraints for generating
mine plans.
Course Description:
This course applies ventilation principles to the design of underground mines and enables the
ventilation requirements for underground mining methods to be met. Students work in groups
for projects work that are focused on the ventilation requirements of the mine in question.
The projects are structured in such a way as to lead each group through the processes that are
required. In addition to the projects work, a site visit where ventilation techniques and data
collection is practiced. A minor report completes this visit where the student provides a
summary of the learnings from the visit. The visit is structured around a ventilation survey.
 Apply ventilation principles to mine design

 Quantify ventilation requirements
 Identify risks associate with ventilation management
 Identify controls to manage ventilation.
 Determine fan / system performance and specification of requirements in complex
coal and metalliferous ventilation systems, including trouble shooting and problem
solving.
 Identify the requirements, and issues associated with, the application of appropriate
ventilation monitoring systems in both coal and metalliferous mines.
 Develop ventilation designs for a coal mine and a metalliferous mine.
 Identify the requirements of appropriate management plans for the designed systems

Syllabus:
Ventilation planning: Objectives and steps in ventilation planning, system analysis of the
planning procedure, desirable features of ventilation systems, ventilation plans.
Types of ventilation system, Central, Boundary and Combined ventilation systems, Air
distribution with different mining methods: Board and Pillar method, Longwall methods,
Shrinkage and Cut and Fill stopes, Open and Underhand stopes, Sublevel stopes. Top slicing
and Sub-level caving, Block caving.
Air quantity requirement: Air quantity requirement in the workings, Strata gas, Diesel
exhaust fumes, dust, heat, workshop and other ancillary areas, air requirements in drifts and
tunnels, leakage of air, expansion in upcast, air velocities.
Pressure Requirement, Selection of fans, output control in fans, series and parallel
combination of mine fans, forcing and exhaust, maintenance and monitoring of fans, booster
fans, auxiliary ventilators, fan installations, diffuser and evasee.
Network Analysis: solution of complex ventilation network, solution by Hardy Cross Method
of successive approximation, ventilation network analysis by digital computer, recent
development in ventilation planning
Ventilation Economics: Analysis of ventilation cost, Interest payments, time value of money,
present value, Equivalent annual cost, ventilation operating cost, optimum size of airway and
shaft.
Modules:
1. Introduction: Objectives and steps in ventilation planning, desirable features of
ventilation systems, ventilation plans.
2. Types of ventilation system: Central, Boundary and Combined ventilation systems
3. Air distribution with different mining methods: Bord and Pillar method, Longwall
methods, Shrinkage and Cut and Fill stopes, Open and Underhand stopes, Sublevel
stopes. Top slicing and Sub-level caving, Block caving.
4. Air quantity requirement: Air quantity requirement in the workings, Strata gas,
Diesel exhaust fumes, dust, heat, workshop and other ancillary areas, air requirements
in drifts and tunnels, leakage of air, expansion in upcast, air velocities.
5. Pressure Requirement: Selection of fans, output control in fans, series and parallel
combination of mine fans, forcing and exhaust, maintenance and monitoring of fans,
booster fans, auxiliary ventilators, fan installations, diffuser and evasee.
6. Network Analysis: solution of complex ventilation network, solution by Hardy Cross
Method of successive approximation, ventilation network analysis by digital
computer,
recent development in ventilation planning.
7. Ventilation Economics: Analysis of ventilation cost, Interest payments, time value of
money, present value, Equivalent annual cost, ventilation operating cost, optimum
size of airway and shaft.

Goals & Outcomes:

 (Knowledge based)
 To familiarize with the steps in ventilation planning.

 Know the various types of ventilation system.
 To get acquainted with the various air quality requirement in the working.
 To know the various causes of leakage of air.
 To have the knowledge of effects on various leakage of air.
(Skills)
Use operations research to:
 To apply the knowledge gained for solving problems related to mine ventilation
planning.
 To make acquainted ventilation network.
 To have hands on the ventilation cost
1. Skochinsky, A. and Komarov, V., (1969) Mine ventilation, Mir Publisher, Moscow.
2. Roberts, A., (1960), mine ventilation, Clever Hume Press Ltd.
3. Graham, J.I., (1949-50), the methane content of unworked coal seams,ibid 109;2.
4. Penman, D and Penman, J.S., (1947), mine ventilation, Charles griffin &Co.
5. Ower. E., (1949), the measurement of air flow, 3rd., chapman and hall, London.
6. Rouse, H., (1956) elementary mechanics of fluids, Jhon willey and sons Inc.
7. Hinsely, F.B., (1950-51) ‘natural and mechanical ventilation ‘, Tr. I.M.E 110;67.
8. Hall,C.J.,(1953), thermodynamics of mine ventilation’, col.eng. 30; 66, 102, 158, 189
and 246.
9. Misra , G.B.,(1964) mine ventilation, thacker spink &Co.
10. Rouse,H., (1956), elementary of mechanis of fluids , Jhon wiley and Sons Inc.
11. Ower.E., (1949), the measurement of air flow, 3rd ed, Chapman and Hall, London.
12. ‘mine fans’, (1952), N.C.B bull.66.
13. Bromilow, J.G., (1962), ventilation of mechanised heading’, Jr. Min met. F. special
issue.

MN507 ADVANCED MINE VENTILATION 3L:0T:0P 3 CREDITS

ENGINEERING
Course Objectives:
To introduce advanced mine ventilation problems in underground coal as well metal mines.
This course also gives exposures of various application of software in mine ventilation
network analysis including recent developments in mine ventilation.
Syllabus:
Mine thermodynamics: Computation of thermodynamic properties of mine air; Basics of
modes of heat transfer in mine roadways; Evaporation and consequent changes in mine air
properties;
Thermal properties of rocks; Fourier and Biot numbers; Calculation of heat flow and
temperature rise in mine airways; Sources of heat and moisture transfer in Bord and
Pillar/Longwall and other workings.
Network analysis: Hardy Cross method of iterative analysis; Thermodynamic analysis of

mine airflow in ventilation network without and with change in moisture content; Change in
Darcy-Weisbach equation and square law due to variation of air density; Pseudo-pressure
equation;
Leakage and recirculation; Application of thermodynamic network analysis for complete

mine ventilation circuit; Application of software for solving real life ventilation problems in
coal and metal mines.
Recent developments in mine ventilation; Air conditioning & ventilation in deep mines; Gas
monitoring systems.
Modules:
1. Mine thermodynamics: Computation of thermodynamic properties of mine air;
Basics of modes of heat transfer in mine roadways; Evaporation and consequent
changes in mine air properties;
2. Thermal properties of rocks; Fourier and Biot numbers; Calculation of heat flow
and temperature rise in mine airways; Sources of heat and moisture transfer in Bord
and Pillar/Longwall and other workings.
3. Network analysis: Hardy Cross method of iterative analysis; Thermodynamic
analysis of mine airflow in ventilation network without and with change in moisture
content; Change in Darcy-Weisbach equation and square law due to variation of air
density; Pseudo-pressure equation;
4. Leakage and recirculation; Application of thermodynamic network analysis for
complete mine ventilation circuit;
5. Software application: Application of software for solving real life ventilation
problems in coal and metal mines.
6. Recent developments in mine ventilation; Air conditioning & ventilation in deep
mines; Gas monitoring systems.

1. Skochinsky, A. and Komarov, V., (1969) Mine ventilation, Mir Publisher, Moscow.
2. Roberts, A., (1960), mine ventilation, Clever Hume Press Ltd.
3. Graham, J.I., (1949-50), the methane content of unworked coal seams,ibid 109;2.
4. Penman, D and Penman, J.S., (1947), mine ventilation, Charles griffin &Co.
5. Ower. E., (1949), the measurement of air flow, 3rd., chapman and hall, London.
6. Rouse, H., (1956) elementary mechanics of fluids, Jhon willey and sons Inc.
7. Hinsely, F.B., (1950-51) ‘natural and mechanical ventilation ‘, Tr. I.M.E 110;67.
8. Hall,C.J.,(1953), thermodynamics of mine ventilation’, col.eng. 30; 66, 102, 158, 189
and 246.
9. Misra , G.B.,(1964) mine ventilation, thacker spink &Co.
10. Rouse,H., (1956), elementary of mechanis of fluids , Jhon wiley and Sons Inc.
11. Ower.E., (1949), the measurement of air flow, 3rd ed, Chapman and Hall, London.
12. ‘mine fans’, (1952), N.C.B bull.66.
13. Bromilow, J.G., (1962), ventilation of mechanised heading’, Jr. Min met. F. special
issue.

OPEN ELECTIVE II

MN608 DATA ANALYTICS 3L:0T:0P 3 Credits
Course Objectives:
Data Analytics is the science of analyzing data to convert information to useful knowledge.
This knowledge could help us understand our world better, and in many contexts enable us to
make better decisions. While this is broad and grand objective, the last 20 years has seen
steeply decreasing costs to gather, store, and process data, creating an even stronger
motivation for the use of empirical approaches to problem solving. This course seeks to
present you with a wide range of data analytic techniques and is structured around the broad
contours of the different types of data analytics, namely, descriptive, inferential, predictive,
and prescriptive analytics.
This course will cover fundamental algorithms and techniques used in Data Analytics. The
statistical foundations will be covered first, followed by various machine learning techniques
Supervised, Unsupervised, Semi-supervised and data mining algorithms. In summary, this
course will provide exposure to theory as well as practical systems and software used in data
analytics.
After completing this course, you will learn how to:

1. Find a meaningful pattern in data
2. Graphically interpret data
3. Implement the analytic algorithms
4. Handle large scale analytics projects from various domains
5. Develop intelligent decision support systems
Syllabus:
Data Definitions and Analysis Techniques: Concept of Data Science, Why/When/What,
application in real scenarios, Elements, Variables, and Data categorization, Levels of
Measurement, Data management and indexing, Introduction to statistical learning and R-
Programming. Descriptive Statistics: Measures of central tendency, Measures of location of
dispersions, Practice and analysis with R. Programming Tools for Data Science: Basics of
Python (file handling, case-folding, spell check, split, strip, Regex, find, replace, etc.);
Toolkits using Python: Matplotlib, NumPy, Scikit-learn, NLTK; Visualizing Data: Bar
Charts, Line Charts, Scatterplots. Basic Analysis Techniques: Basic analysis techniques,
Statistical hypothesis generation and testing; Chi-Square test, t-Test, Analysis of variance,
Correlation analysis, Maximum likelihood test, Practice and analysis with R. Data analysis
techniques: Regression analysis, Classification techniques, Clustering, Association rules
analysis, Practice and analysis with R. Machine Learning: Overview of Machine learning
concepts – Bias/variance, overfitting and train/test splits. Types of Machine learning –
Supervised, Unsupervised, Semi-supervised. Classification and Regression algorithms-
Naïve Bayes, K-Nearest Neighbors, logistic regression, support vector machines (SVM),
decision trees and induction rules, Hidden Markov Models; Linear Regression-model
assumptions; Regularization (lasso, ridge, elastic net) from both the statistical and Bayesian
inference viewpoint; Analysis of Time Series; Unsupervised learning: KMeans and
Hierarchical clustering; Reinforcement learning.
Modules:
Module 1: Data Definitions and Analysis Techniques: Concept of Data Science,
Why/When/What, application in real scenarios, Elements, Variables, and Data
categorization, Levels of Measurement, Data management and indexing,
Introduction to statistical learning and R-Programming.
Module 2: Descriptive Statistics: Measures of central tendency, Measures of location of
dispersions, Practice and analysis with R.
Module 3: Descriptive Statistics: Measures of central tendency Measures of location of
dispersions, Practice and analysis with R Basic Analysis Techniques Basic
analysis techniques;
Module 4: Programming Tools for Data Science: Basics of Python (file handling, case-
folding, spell check, split, strip, Regex, find, replace, etc.); Toolkits using
Python: Matplotlib, NumPy, Scikit-learn, NLTK; Visualizing Data: Bar Charts,
Line Charts, Scatterplots.
Module 5: Basic Analysis Techniques: Basic analysis techniques, Statistical hypothesis
generation and testing; Chi-Square test, t-Test, Analysis of variance, Correlation
analysis, Maximum likelihood test, Practice and analysis with R.
Module 6: Data analysis techniques: Regression analysis, Classification techniques,
Clustering, Association rules analysis, Practice and analysis with R.
Module 7: Machine Learning: Overview of Machine learning concepts – Bias/variance,
overfitting and train/test splits. Types of Machine learning – Supervised,
Unsupervised, Semi-supervised.
Module 8: Classification and Regression algorithms-Naïve Bayes, K-Nearest Neighbors,
logistic regression, support vector machines (SVM), decision trees and induction
rules, Hidden Markov Models; Linear Regression-model assumptions;
Regularization (lasso, ridge, elastic net) from both the statistical and Bayesian
inference viewpoint; Analysis of Time Series; Unsupervised learning: KMeans
and Hierarchical clustering; Reinforcement learning
1. Hastie, Trevor, et al. The elements of statistical learning. Vol. 2. No. 1. New York:
springer, 2009.
2. Montgomery, Douglas C., and George C. Runger. Applied statistics and probability for
engineers. John Wiley & Sons, 2010
3. Probability & Statistics for Engineers & Scientists (9th Edn.), Ronald E. Walpole,
Raymond H. Myers, Sharon L. Myers and Keying Ye, Prentice Hall Inc.
4. The Elements of Statistical Learning, Data Mining, Inference, and Prediction (2nd Edn.),
Trevor Hastie Robert Tibshirani Jerome Friedman, Springer, 2014
5. An Introduction to Statistical Learning: with Applications in R, G James, D. Witten, T
Hastie, and R. Tibshirani, Springer, 2013
6. Software for Data Analysis: Programming with R (Statistics and Computing), John M.
Chambers, Springer
7. Mining Massive Data Sets, A. Rajaraman and J. Ullman, Cambridge University Press,
2012
8. Advances in Complex Data Modeling and Computational Methods in Statistics, Anna
Maria Paganoni and Piercesare Secchi, Springer, 2013
9. Data Mining and Analysis, Mohammed J. Zaki, Wagner Meira, Cambridge, 2012
10. Hadoop: The Definitive Guide (2nd Edn.) by Tom White, O'Reilly, 2014

11. Map Reduce Design Patterns: Building Effective Algorithms and Analytics for Hadoop
and Other Systems, Donald Miner, Adam Shook, O'Reilly, 2014
12. Beginning R: The Statistical Programming Language, Mark Gardener, Wiley, 2013
13. http://cse.iitkgp.ac.in/~dsamanta/courses/da/index.html
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Analyse data to evaluate meaningful pattern.
2. Demonstrate understanding of the mathematical foundations needed for data science.
3. Collect, explore, clean, munge and manipulate data.
4. Implement models such as k-nearest Neighbours, Naive Bayes, linear and logistic
regression, decision trees, neural networks and clustering.
5. Build data science applications using Python based toolkits.
6. Graphically interpret data using different statistical tool and hypothesis tests.
7. Implement the analytic algorithms.
8. Develop intelligent decision support systems for various mining operations.

MN609 RELIABILITY ENGINEERING 3L:0T:0P 3 credits
Overview:
This course introduces students to concepts and methods of modern statistical quality control.
Students learn to apply standard quality control tools. They learn the theoretical statistical
concepts that justify the use of particular quality control tools in particular situations. They
learn theory and methods for analyzing the performance of different quality control tools.
Course Description:
Principles of statistical quality control including control by variable and by attribute,
construction and use of control charts for variables, fraction defectives and number of defects
and use of standard plans, reliability and life cycle testing.

 To define and describe concept of system structures
 To apply the principles of reliability, quality and asset management to mechanical
engineering processes, production and manufactured products
 The use of appropriate software for statistical and quality analysis is taught and is
necessary for successful completion of some homework assignments. Issues of ethics
and professional responsibility and their relation to product quality are discussed.
Syllabus:
Introduction to reliability concept.
System Structures: Status functions, series systems, parallel systems, and equivalent
structures.
Reliability of System Structures: Series systems, parallel systems, equivalent structures.
Unit and system reliability- forward models, density and distribution functions, fault tree
analysis, HAZOP analysis, risk and criticality analysis, maintainability analysis, calculation
of maintainability parameters, availability calculations, maintenance management.
Introduction to product quality. Introduction to ISO 9000 series, concept of TQM and
Business performance, HRD and quality management, organizing for TQM, CI.
Modules:
1. Introduction to reliability concept: Introduction to system and reliability
2. System Structures: Status functions, series systems, parallel systems, and equivalent
structures
3. Reliability of System Structures: Series systems, parallel systems, equivalent
structures
4. Unit and system reliability: forward models, density and distribution functions
5. System Reliability Analysis: fault tree analysis, HAZOP analysis, risk and criticality
analysis
6. System Reliability Analysis: Maintainability analysis, calculation of maintainability
parameters, availability calculations, maintenance management
7. Introduction to product quality: Introduction to ISO 9000 series, concept of TQM
and Business performance
8. Quality Management: HRD and quality management, organizing for TQM, CI

6. Introduction to Quality and Reliability Engineering by Renyan Jiang, Springer, 2015
7. An Introduction to Reliability and Quality Engineering by John P. Bentley, Longman
Scientific & Technical, 1993
8. Reliability Engineering, by E. Bala Guruswamy, Tata McGraw Hill, 1994.
9. Reliability Engineering, (3rd Edition), by LS Srinath, Affiliated East West Pvt Ltd, 1991.
10. Optimization &Variation Reduction in Quality, by W.A. Taylor, Tata McGraw Hill,
1991.
Goals & Outcomes:

(Knowledge based)
 Understand and able to describe different system’s structure
 Understand the concepts of reliability and maintainability
 Acquire basic knowledge of total quality management
(Skills)
Use reliability and quality engineering to:
 Use System structure concept to examine reliability of different systems
 Use different reliability analysis techniques to appraise and manage a system or
process
 Describe standard control charts and use it to analyze and improve the product
quality.

MN610 GEOSTATISTICS 3L:0T:0P 3 credits
COURSE OUTCOME
The course is designed to provide a better understanding to use the statistical tool in mining
industries. It will give the idea of interpretation of reserve estimation using three-dimensional
modelling software.
SYLLABUS
Geo - statistics: Introduction, Concept.
Basics of Probability and Statistics: Mean, Median, Mode, Probability Distribution (normal &
log normal), Variance, Cumulative frequency and Cumulative probability.
Mineral Inventory: Prospecting, exploration, method to quantify the size, shape &
distribution of the ore reserve. Ore reserve calculation.
Extension method and application of classical statistics, regionalized variables, variogram
and semi – variogram modeling, regularization, auxiliary functions.
Kriging; Introduction, concept of development, types of kriging, linear kriging methodology,
and their application in mining industries, common problems associated with the use of
kriging.
Geo - statistics for quality control, basis of non-parametric geo - statistics and indicator
kriging. Introduction to SURPAC, STATISTICA, SPSS/SYSTAC software.
MODULE 1. Geo - statistics: Introduction, Concept.
MODULE 2. Basics of Probability and Statistics

Mean, Median, Mode, Probability Distribution (normal & log normal),
Variance, Cumulative frequency and Cumulative probability.
MODULE 3. Mineral Inventory
Prospecting, exploration, method to quantify the size, shape & distribution of
the ore reserve. Ore reserve calculation
MODULE 4. Extension method and application of classical statistics
regionalized variables, variogram and semi – variogram modeling,
regularization, auxiliary functions.
MODULE 5. Kriging
Introduction, concept of development, types of kriging, linear kriging
methodology, and their application in mining industries, common problems
associated with the use of kriging.
MODULE 6. Geo - statistics for quality control

basis of non-parametric geo - statistics and indicator kriging. Introduction to
SURPAC, STATISTICA, SPSS/SYSTAC software.

6. Open Pit Mine Planning and Design, Two Volume Set, Second Edition by William A.
Hustrulid (Author), Mark Kuchta (Author)
7. Mining Geostatistics by A. G Journel & Ch. J. Huijbregts.
8. Advanced Geostatistics in the Mining Industry: Proceedings of the NATO Advanced
Study Institute held at the Istituto di Geologia Applicata of the ... 13–25 October 1975
(Nato Science Series C:) Paperback – Import, 26 Mar 2012 by M. Guarascio (Editor), C.J.
Huybrechts (Editor), M. David (Editor)
9. Geostatistics, Rendu J.M
10. Surface Mining, Kennedy Wiley
Course Outcome:
6. Understand use of statistics tools to use in mining fields.
7. Know reserve estimation methods using statistics tool.
8. Understand and interpret the 3 – D model of reserve.
9. Understand the and use in mine modelling software like surpac minex.

PRACTICALS

MN621P ROCH MECHANICS LAB 0L:0T:3P 1 CREDITS

1. Determination of uniaxial compressive strength of rock using compression
testing machine/UTM.
2. Indirect determination of uniaxial compressive strength of rock/coal using

Protodyakonov strength index apparatus.
3. Indirect determination of uniaxial compressive strength of coal using impact

strength index apparatus.
4. Determination of tensile strength of rock/coal by brazilian test.
5. Determination of point load index of rock/coal and estimation of uniaxial

compressive strength and tensile strength.
6. Determination of shear strength of rock/coal using direct shear apparatus.
7. Determination of cohesion and angle of internal friction of rock/coal using

shear apparatus with normal loading.
8. Determination of bulk density, dry density and specific gravity of rock

sample.
9. Determination of durability index of rock/coal using durability index

apparatus.
10. Determination of ultimate tensile strength of steel reinforcement rod using

UTM.
11. Determination of permeability of soil and rock under fixed head and variable
head condition.

MN622P MINE ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEEIRNG LAB 0L:0T:3P 1 CREDITS

1. Determination of water quality and its suitability for industrial use.
2. Determination of respirable particulate matter concentration by filtration method.
3. Determination of particulate matter concentration by optical method.
4. Determination of level of dust respirable exposure using personal dust sampler.
5. Study and sketch of blastmate and micromate for measuring ground vibration.
6. Study and sketch of radiationmeter.
7. Study and sketch of weather monitoring station to measure local meteoroloical
data.
8. Study and sketch of haldane and orsat apparatus.
9. Study and sketch of multi- gas detector.
10. Determination of air velocity and quantity using digital anemometer.
11. Study and sketch of lux meter.
12. Study and sketch of sound level meters.

MN623P DATA ANALYTICS LAB 0L:0T:3P 1 CREDITS

1. Find the Mean, Mode, Median, Variance, Skewness and Kurtosis for the given
opencast blasting data using Excel.
Mineral price data using C.
average pull from the underground face data using C++.
Mineral price data using python.
5. Write a program in C or C++ or Python to predict the average pull from the
underground face after the blast.
6. Find the cohesion, angle of internal friction, failure angle and UCS from the
given set of triaxial data (excel or other programming language).
7. Write a program in C and C++ to determine the equivalent resistance of the
mine, for the network given below (Fig 1).
R1 R6
R2 R5
R3
R4
Mine Ventilation networks

(Resistance of air current network follows the same rule of addition as of
Electrical current network.)
8. Write a program in C, C++ and python to determine RQD of a core sample.

9. Write a program in C, C++ and python to deduct Whole Circle Bearing (WCB)
into Quadrantal Bearing (QB), with proper assumptions.
10. Write a program in Python to predict the traffic on a new mode of transport for
haul road for surface mine.

JHARKAHAND UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY, RANCHI
Syllabus for B. Tech course in Computer Science & Engineering and Information Technology
Course Structure for 5th and 6th Semester CSE

5th Sem CSE
Sl. Course Category Subject L T P Credit

No Code
1 Professional Core-I Computer Organization and 4 1 0 4

Architecture
2 Professional Core-II Compiler Design 3 1 0 3
3 Professional Core-III Computer Graphics 3 1 0 3
4 Professional Electives-I List of Professional Electives-I 3 1 0 3
5 Open Elective-1 List of Open Elective-1 3 1 0 3
Laboratory/Sessional
1 Laboratory-I Computer Organization 0 0 3 1

and Architecture Lab.
2 Laboratory-II Compiler Design Lab. 0 0 3 1
3 Laboratory-III Computer Graphics Lab. 0 0 3 1
4 Laboratory-IV Professional Electives-I 0 0 3 1

Lab.
5 Laboratory-V General Proficiency / 0 0 2 2

Seminar
Total Credits (Theory + Sessional) 22

List of Electives 5th Semester CSE
Course No. Subject Name
Web Technology
Linux Programming
System Analysis and Design
Semantics Web
Open Elective-I
Data Science
Computer Architecture*
Data Base Management Systems*
Data Communication
*These subjects are open for all the branches other than CSE and IT.
6th Semester, CSE
S. No Course Category Subject L T P Credit

Code
1 Professional Core-I Computer Networks 4 1 0 4
2 Professional Core-II Software Engineering 3 1 0 3
3 Professional Core-III Image Processing 3 1 0 3
4 Professional Electives- List of Professional Electives-II 3 1 0 3

II
5 Open Elective-II List of Open Elective-II 3 1 0 3
1 Laboratory-I Computer 0 0 3 1
Networks Lab.
2 Laboratory-II Software 0 0 3 1
Engineering Lab.
3 Laboratory-III Image Processing 0 0 3 1

Lab.
4 Laboratory-IV Professional 0 0 3 1
Electives-II Lab.
5 Laboratory-V Internship/Tour & 0 0 2 2

Training /Industrial
Training

List of Electives 6th Semester, CSE
Soft Computing
System Software
Distributed System
Natural Language Processing
Open Elective-II
Information Retrieval
AI and Machine Learning*
Computer Network*
Internet Of Things (IOT)
Course Structure for 5th and 6th Semester IT

5th Semester, IT
Sl. Course Category Subject L T P Credit
No Code
1 Professional Core-I Computer Organization and 4 1 0 4

Architecture
2 Professional Core-II Information System 3 1 0 3
3 Professional Core-III Computer Graphics 3 1 0 3
4 Professional Electives-I List of Professional 3 1 0 3

Electives-I
5 Open Elective-1 List of Open Elective-1 3 1 0 3
1 Laboratory-I Computer Organization and 0 0 3 1

Architecture Lab.
2 Laboratory-II Information System Lab. 0 0 3 1
3 Laboratory-III Computer Graphics Lab. 0 0 3 1
4 Laboratory-IV Professional Electives-I Lab. 0 0 3 1
5 Laboratory-V General Proficiency / Seminar 0 0 2 2

5th Semester, electives list IT
Web Technology
Linux Programming
Compiler Design
Semantics Web
Open Elective-I
Data Science
Computer Architecture*
Data Base Management Systems*
Data Communication
6th Semester, IT
S. Course Category Subject L T P Credit

No Code
1 Professional Core-I Computer Networks 4 1 0 4
2 Professional Core-II Software Engineering 3 1 0 3
3 Professional Core-III Image Processing 3 1 0 3
4 Professional Electives-II List of Professional Electives-II 3 1 0 3
5 Open Elective-II List of Open Elective-II 3 1 0 3
1 Laboratory-I Computer Networks 0 0 3 1

Lab.
2 Laboratory-II Software Engineering 0 0 3 1

Lab.
3 Laboratory-III Image Processing Lab. 0 0 3 1
4 Laboratory-IV Professional Electives-II 0 0 3 1

Lab.
5 Laboratory-V Internship/Tour & 0 0 2 2

Training /Industrial
Training

6th Semester, elective list IT
Soft Computing
System Software
Distributed System
Natural Language Processing
Open Elective-II
Information Retrieval
AI and Machine Learning*
Computer Network*
Internet Of Things (IOT)
Detailed Syllabus
Code: CS Computer Organization and Architecture L T P C

4 1 0 4
This course open to all branch except CSE/IT.

Course Outcomes:
1. Ability to describe the organization of computer and machine instructions and programs
2. Ability to analyze Input / Output Organization
3. Analyze the working of the memory system and basic processing unit.
4. Ability to solve problems of multicores, multiprocessors and clusters.
5. Choose optical storage media suitable for multimedia applications.
CO-PO Mapping:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 P10 P11 P12
CO1 - 3 - 2 2 - - - - - - 1
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2
CO3 2 2 2 2 3 - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 2
Average
*3: high, 2: moderate, 1 low
MODULE-I:
Basics of Digital Electronics: Multiplexers and De multiplexers, Decoder andEncoder, Codes, Logic gates, Flip
flops, Registers.
Register Transfer and Micro Operations: Bus and Memory Transfer, Logic Micro Operations, Shift Micro
Operations, Register transfer and register transfer language, Design of arithmetic logic unit.
MODULE II:
Basic Computer Organization: Instruction codes, Computer instructions, Timing and Control, Instruction cycle,
Memory reference Instruction, Complete computer description, Design of basic computer, Input output and
interrupt.
MODULE III:
Control Unit: Hardwired controls, Micro programmed controls.

Central Processing Unit : Program control, Reduced instruction set computer, Complex instruction set
computer, Data Transfer, Manipulation, General register and stack organization, Addressing mode.
MODULE IV:
Computer Arithmetic: Addition and subtraction algorithm, Multiplication algorithm, Division algorithms.
MODULE V:
Input-Output Organization: Priority interrupt, Peripheral devices, Input output interface, Data transfer schemes,
Program control and interrupts, Direct memory access transfer, Input/output processor.
Memory Unit: High speed memories, Memory hierarchy, Processor Vs Memory speed, Cache memory,
Associative memory, Inter leave, Virtual memory, Memory management.
MODULE VI :
Introduction to Parallel Processing: Pipelining, Characteristics of multiprocessors, Interconnection structures,

Inter processor arbitration, Inter processor communication, Synchronization.
Text Books:
1. Computer System Architecture by Morris Mano, Prentice hall, 3rd Edition, (2007)
References:
1. Computer Organization by Carl Hamacher, ZvonkoVranesic, SafwatZaky, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 5th Edition,
(2011)
2. Computer Architecture : A Quantitative Approach by Hennessy, J. L, David A Patterson, and Goldberg,

Pearson Education, 4th Edition, (2006)
Code: CS Compiler Design L T P C

3 1 0 4
Pre-requisites: knowledge of automata theory, context free languages, computer architecture, data structures and
simple graph algorithms, logic or algebra.
MODULE-I:
Introduction to compiler and Finite automata 14 lectures
Compilers, Analysis of source programs, Tokens, patterns, lexemes, Phases of compilers, Parsing, Parse trees,
Ambiguity, Associativity and precedence of operators, Top-down parsing, Bottom-up parsing, Left recursion,
Syntax directed translation. Classification of grammars, NFA, DFA, Conversion of NFA to DFA, RE to NFA
(Thompson’s Construction), Optimization of NFA/DFA using FIRSTPOS, LASTPOS, FOLLOWPOS.
MODULE-II:
Context Free Grammar 4 lectures
RE vs. CFG, Eliminating ambiguity and left recursion, Left factoring.
MODULE-III:
Compiler Parser 8 lectures
Top down parsing-LL parser, LL grammars. Bottom up parsing- LR parser, SLR parser, CLR parser, LALR
parser. Polishing expressions Operator precedence grammar. LR grammars. Comparison of parsing methods.
Error handling.
MODULE-IV:
Run time environments 8 lectures
Symbol tables, Language facilities for dynamic storage allocation, Dynamic storage allocation technique,
Organization for non-block and block structured languages.
MODULE-V:
Intermediate code generation 4 lectures
Intermediate languages, graphical representations, Synthesized and inherited attributes, Dependency graph,
Syntax directed translation, S and L- attributed definitions, Polish notation, three address, quadruples, triples,
indirect triples Flow of control statement.
MODULE-VI:
Code optimization and code generation 4 lectures
Basic blocks and flow graphs, Optimization of basic blocks, Code optimization techniques, Issues in design of
code generator, Target machine code and simple code generator.
• Alfred V. Aho, Ravi Sethi, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Monica S. Lam, Compilers: Principles,
Techniques, and Tools. Addison‐Wesley, 2006 (optional).
• Thomas W. Parsons, Introduction to Compiler Construction. Computer Science Press,1992.
Suggested Reference books
• Compiler design in C, A.C. Holub, PHI.

• Compiler construction (Theory and Practice), A.Barret William and R.M. Bates, Galgotia Publication.
• Compiler Design, Kakde.
•
COURSE OUTCOMES
1 Identify the issue that arises in the design and construction of translator for programming language.
2 Analyze RE and CFG to specify the lexical and syntactic structure of programming language.
3 Design different parsers from given specification.
4 Assess the various program transformations.
5 Design a compiler for a programming language.
CO-PO MAPPING
1 - 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 - -
2 - 3 - 2 - - - - - - - -
3 - - 2 2 - - - - - 2 - -
4 - 2 - 2 - - - - - - - -
5 - - 2 1 - - - - - 1 - -
*3: high, 2: moderate, 1: low
Code: CS Computer Graphics L T P C

3 0 0 3

This course covers basics of computer graphics. Computer graphics are pictures and films created using
computers. Usually, the term refers to computer-generated image data created with the help of specialized
graphical hardware and software. It is a vast and recently developed area of computer science. Computer graphics
is responsible for displaying art and image data effectively and meaningfully to the consumer. It is also used for
processing image data received from the physical world. Computer graphics development has had a significant
impact on many types of media and has revolutionized animation, movies, advertising, video games, and graphic
design in general.
Course Outcomes
After completing this course, the student will be able to:
CO1 Understand the basics of computer graphics, different graphics systems and applications
of computer graphics.
CO2 Discuss various algorithms for scan conversion and filling of basic objects and their
comparative analysis.
CO3 Use of geometric transformations on graphics objects and their application in
composite form.
CO4 Extract scene with different clipping methods and its transformation to graphics display
device.
CO5 Render projected objects to naturalize the scene in 2D view and use of illumination
models for this
Module – I:
Introduction to computer graphics and graphics systems. Raster and vector graphics systems, video display
devices, physical and logical input devices, simple color models.
Module – II:
Points & lines, Line drawing algorithms; DDA algorithm, Bresenham’s line algorithm, Circle generation
algorithm; scan line polygon, fill algorithm, boundary fill algorithm, flood fill algorithm.
Module – III:
2D Transformation : Basic transformations : translation, rotation, scaling ; Matrix representations &
homogeneous coordinates, transformations between coordinate systems ; reflection shear ; Transformation of
points, lines, parallel lines, intersecting lines.
Module – IV:
Viewing pipeline, Window to Viewport co-ordinate transformation, clipping operations, point clipping, line
clipping, clipping circles, polygons & ellipse.
Module – V:
Hidden Surfaces: Depth comparison, Z-buffer algorithm, Back face detection, BSP tree method, the Printer’s
algorithm, scan-line algorithm; Hidden line elimination, wire frame methods, fractal - geometry. Rendering of a
polygonal surface; Flat, Gouraud, and Phong shading; Texture mapping, bump texture, environment map;
Introduction to ray tracing; Image synthesis, sampling techniques, and anti-aliasing.
Text Books
1. Donald Hearn and Pauline Baker Computer Graphics, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2012
2. Steven Harrington, "Computer Graphics- A programming approach", McGraw 3. Hill, 2nd Edition, 1987.
Reference Book
3. Foley J.D., Van Dam A, "Fundamentals of Interactive Computer Graphics", Addison Wesley, 1990
Code: CS Web Technology L T P C

3 0 0 3
Course Objective: The focus in this course is on the World Wide Web continues to provide a foundation
for the developmentofabroadrangeofincreasinglyinfluentialandstrategictechnologies,supporting a large
variety of applications and services, both in the private and public sectors. There is a growing need for
management and decision makers to gain a clearer understanding of the application development process,
from planning through to deployment and maintenance. In this course, you will learn about the HTTP
communication protocol, the markup languages HTML, XHTML and XML, the CSS standards for formatting
and transforming web content, interactive graphics, multimedia content on the web, client-side
programming using Java script; an understanding of approaches to more dynamic and mobile content; and
demonstrate how you can analyze requirements, plan, design, implement and test arrange of
webapplications.
Course Prerequisite
• Programming for Problemsolving.
• Object Oriented Programming ThroughJava.
• Basic concept ofNetworking.
Course Outcomes
After Successful completion of course, the students will be able to
CO Description
CO 1 Describe various web technology and application development issues and trends.
CO 2 Design static and dynamic web pages using HTML, CSS and Java Script.
CO 3 Design and implement web services from the server and client side.
CO 4 Build interactive Web applications using JSP and Servlet.
CO 5 Identify the engineering structural design of XML and parse construction tree model.
CO-PO Mapping:
CO 1 - 3 - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 - - - - - -
CO 3 - - 3 - 2 - - 2 - - -
CO 4 2 2 3 - 2 1 - - - - - -
CO 5 2 2 - - - - - - - - - -
Avg 2.33 2.25 3 2 2.33 1 2 2
Note- 3: high, 2: moderate, 1 low
Module – I
Introduction to html: Fundamentals of HTML elements, Document body, Different tags, sections, text, hyperlink,
lists, tables, color and images, frames, frameset, form.
Web Pages: types and issues, tiers; comparisons of Microsoft and java technologies; WWW: Basic concept, web
client and web server, HTTP protocol (frame format), universal resource locator (URL).
Module – II
Dynamic web pages: The need of dynamic web pages; an overview of DHTML, Cascading Style Sheets (CSS),
comparative studies of different technologies of dynamic page creation.
Active web pages: Need of active web pages; java applet life cycle.
Module – III
JavaScript: Data types, variables, operators, conditional statements, array object, date object, string object.
Java Servlet: Servlet environment and role, HTML support, Servlet API, the Servlet Life cycle, cookies and sessions.
Module – IV
JSP: JSP architecture, JSP servers, JSP tags, understanding the layout in JSP, Declaring Variables, methods in JSP,
inserting java expressions in JSP, processing request from user and generating dynamic response for the user,
inserting applets and java beans into JSP, using include and forward action, comparing JSP and CGI program,
comparing JSP and ASP program; Creating ODBC data source name, introduction to JDBC, prepare statement and
callable statement.
Module – V
J2EE:AnoverviewofJ2EEwebservices,basicsofEnterpriseJavaBeans,EJBvs.JavaBeans,basic of RMI,JNI.
XML: Basics XML, elements and attributes, document type definition, xml parsers, sequential and tree approach
Text Books:
1. ChrisBates,“WebProgramming:BuildingInternetApplications”,WileyDreamTech, 2nd Edition,2002.

2. Jeffrey C K Jackson, Web Technologies”, Pearson Education, 1stEdition,2006.
3. JasonHunter,WilliamCrawford―JavaServletProgramming‖O‘Reilly Publications, 2nd Edition, 2001.
References
1. W Hans Bergsten, “Java Server Pages”, O‟Reilly, 3rd Edition,2003.

2. D. Flanagan, “Java Script”, O‟Reilly, 6th Edition,2011.
3. Jon Duckett, “Beginning Web Programming”, WROX, 2nd Edition,2008.
4. Herbert Schildt, “Java the Complete Reference”, Hill - Osborne, 8th Edition,2011.
List of Open Source Software/learning website:
• Browsers like IE, Mozilla, Firefoxetc.

• Server softwareXAMPP/WAMP/LAMP.
• www.apachefriends.org
• www.w3.org
• www.w3schools.com
• www.php.net
• www.mysql.com
• www.phpmyadmin.net
• www.javatpoint.com
Code: CS Linux Programming L T P C

3 0 0 0
Course objectives:
CO1: able to understand the basic commands of linux operating system and can write shell scripts.
CO2: able to create file systems and directories and operate them
CO3: Students will be able to create processes background and fore ground etc. by fork() system calls
CO4: able to create shared memory segments, pipes, message queues and can exercise inter process communication
CO PO Mapping
CO1 2 2 2 - - - - - - - -
CO2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - -
CO3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO4 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - -
Module - I:Linux Utilities:

File handling utilities, Security by file permissions, Process utilities, Disk utilities, Networking commands, Filters,
Text processing utilities, Backup utilities Sed - Scripts, Operations, Addresses, Commands,,awk - Execution, Fields
and Records, Scripts, Operations, Actions, Assocoative Array, Strings and Mathematical functions, System
commands in awk, Applications. Shell programming with Bourne Again Shell (bash): Introduction, Shell
responsibilities, Pipes and redirection, here documents, Running a shell script, Shell as a programming language,
Shell meta characters, File-name substitution, Shell variables, Command substitution, Shell commands, The
environment, Quoting, test command, Control structures, Arithmetic in shell, Shell script examples, Interrupt
processing functions, Debugging shell scripts
Module-II:Files and Directories:
File concepts, File types File system structure, file metadata - Inodes, kernel support for files, System calls for the file
I/O operations- open,create,read,wrirte,close,lseek,dup2,file status information-stat family, file and record locking-
fcntl function, file permissions- chmod, fchmod, file ownership-chown, lchown, fchown, links-soft links and hard
links- symlink, link, unlink. Directories: Creating,,removing and changing Directories-mkdir, rmdir,chdir, obtaining
current working directory-getcwd, directorycontents, scanning directories- opendir, readdir, rewin functions.
Module- III:Process:
Process concept, Layout of a C program image in main memory, Process environment – environment list,
environment variables, getenv, setenv, Kernel support for process, Process identification, Process control - Process
creation, replacing a process image, waiting for process, Process termination, Zombie process, Orphan process,
,system call interface for process management – fork, vfork, exit, wait, waitpid, exec family, process groups, sessions
and controlling Terminal, differences between threads and processes. Signals: Introduction to signals, Signal
generation, Signal handling, Kernel support for signals, signal function, Unreliable signals, Reliable signals, and
Signal functions: kill, raise, alarm, pause, abort, sleep.
Module- IV:Inter process Communication:
Introduction to IPC,IPC between processes on a single computer system, IPC between processes on different
systems, Pipes-creationIPC between related processes using FIFOs(Named pipes), differences between unnamed and
named pipes, popen and pclose library functions. Message Queues: Kernel support for messages, APIs for message
queues, Client/Server example Semaphores: Kernel support for semaphores, APIs for semaphores, file locking with
semaphores.
Module -V:Shared Memory:
Kernel support for Shared Memory, APIs for Shared Memory, Shared Memory example Sockets: Introduction to
Berkley Sockets, IPC over a network, client – server model, Socket address structures (Unix domain and internet
domain) , Socket system calls for connection oriented protocol and connectionless protocol, example- client/server
programs- single server- client connection, multiple simultaneous clients, socket options- setsockopt and fcntl system
calls, comparison of IPC mechanisms.
EXT BOOKS:-
1. Unix System Programming using C++, T. Chan, PHI,(UNIT III to UNIT VIII)
2. Unix concepts and Applications, 4th Edition, Sumitabha Das, TMH.
3. Beginning Linux Programming, 4th Edition, N.Matthew, R.Stones, Wrox, Willey India Edition.
REFERRENCE BOOKS:
1. Linux System Programming. Robert Love, O’Reilly, SPD.
2. Advanced Programming in the Unix environment, 2nd Edition, W.R.Stevens, Pearson Education.
3. Unix Network Programming, W.R.Steven, PHI.
4. UNIX for Programming and users, 3rd Edition, Graham Glass, King Ables, Pearson Edition.
5. UNIX and shell Programming, B.A.Forouzan and R.F.Koretsky, S.A.Sarawar, Pearson edition.
6. Unix The Text book, 2nd edition, S.M.Sarawar, Koretsky, S.A.Sarawar, Pearson Edition
Code: CS System Analysis and Design L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO 1 Identify the issue that arises in the design of systems as a whole
CO 2 Ability to understand the Software Development Life Cycle
CO 3 Students will be able to understand different types of system designing and Modelling
CO 4 Students will be able to understand Maintenance, Testing and structured Design
CO 5 Ability to understand the Security and Threats
CO-PO MAPPING:
CO 1 - 3 2 2 - - 2 - - 1 - -
CO 2 - 3 - 2 - - - - - - - -
CO 3 - - 2 2 - 3 - - - 2 - -
CO 4 - 2 - 2 - - - - - - - -
CO 5 - - 2 1 - - - - - 1 - -
MODULE- I:
INTRODUCTION
System definition and concepts: Characteristics and types of system, Manual and automated systems
Real-life Business sub-systems: Production, Marketing, Personal, Material, Finance
Systems models types of models: Systems environment and boundaries, Real-time and distributed systems, Basic
principles of successful systems
MODULE- II:
SYSTEMS ANALYST
Role and need of systems analyst, Qualifications and responsibilities, Systems Analyst as and agent of change,
Introduction to systems development life cycle (SDLC):

Various phases of development: Analysis, Design, Development, Implementation, Maintenance

Systems documentation considerations: Principles of systems documentation, Typesof documentation and their
importance, enforcing documentation discipline in anorganization.
System Planning
Data and fact gathering techniques: Interviews, Group communication, Presentations, Sitevisits. Feasibility study and
its importance, Types of feasibility reports System Selection plan and proposal Prototyping
Cost-Benefit and analysis: Tools and techniques
MODULE- III:
SYSTEMS DESIGN AND MODELING
Process modeling, Logical and physical design, Design representation, Systems flowcharts and structured charts,
Data flow diagrams, Common diagramming conventions and guidelines using DFD and ER diagrams. Data
Modeling and systems analysis, designing the internals: Program and Process design, Designing Distributed Systems.
Input and Output Classification of forms: Input/output forms design, User-interface design, Graphical interfaces
MODULE- IV:
MODULAR AND STRUCTURED DESIGN
Module specifications, Module coupling and cohesion, Top-down and bottom-up design
System Implementation and Maintenance
Planning considerations, Conversion methods, producers and controls, System acceptance Criteria, System
evaluation and performance, Testing and validation, Systems quality Control and assurance, Maintenance activities
and issues.
MODULE- V:
SYSTEM AUDIT AND SECURITY
Computer system as an expensive resource: Data and Strong media Procedures and norms for utilization of
computer equipment, Audit of computer system usage,Audit trails
Types of threats to computer system and control measures: Threat to computer system and control measures,
Disaster recovery and contingency planning
Object Oriented Analysis and design
Introduction to Object Oriented Analysis and design life cycle, object modeling: Class Diagrams, Dynamic modeling:
state diagram, Dynamic modeling: sequence diagramming.
TEXT BOOKS: -
1. System Analysis and Design Methods, Whitten, Bentaly and Barlow, Galgotia Publication.
2. System Analysis and Design Elias M. Award, Galgotia Publication
REFERENCES
3. Modern System Analysis and Design, Jeffrey A. Hofer Joey F. George JosephS. Valacich Addison Weseley.
Code: IT522 Semantic Web L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Understand and explain the overall architecture of semantic web and to illustrate the
overview of design principles and technologies in semantic web.
CO2 Design and implement a small ontology that is semantically descriptive of your chosen
problem domain, implement applications that can access, use and manipulate the
ontology, represent data from a chosen problem in XML with appropriate semantic tags
obtained or derived from the ontology.
CO3 Describe the semantic relationships among these data elements using Resource
Description Framework (RDF).
CO4 Design and implement a web services application that ―discovers‖ the data and/or other
web services via the semantic web (which includes the RDF, data elements in properly
tagged XML, and the ontology), discover the capabilities and limitations of semantic
web technology for different applications.
CO-PO MAPPING:
CO1 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 - 3 3 2 - - - - - - 2 -
CO3 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO4 - 3 3 2 - - - - - - 2 -
Avg. 1.5 1.5 1.5 1 - - - - - - 1 -
DETAIL SYLLABUS:
MODULE-I:
INTRODUCTION
Introduction to the Syntactic Web and Semantic Web – Evolution of the Web – the Visual and Syntactic Web –
Levels of Semantics – Metadata for Web Information – the Semantic Web Architecture and Technologies –
Contrasting Semantic with Conventional Technologies– Semantic Modeling -Potential of Semantic Web Solutions
and Challenges of Adoption Design Principles.
MODULE-2:
KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION AND ONTOLOGIES
Knowledge Representation and Reasoning - Ontologies- Taxonomies –Topic Maps – Classifying Ontologies -
Terminological Aspects: Concepts, Terms, Relations Between Them – Complex Objects -Subclasses and Sub-
properties definitions –Upper Ontologies – Quality – Uses - Types of Terminological Resources for Ontology
Building – Methods and Methodologies for Building Ontologies – Multilingual Ontologies -Ontology Development
Process and Life Cycle – Methods for Ontology Learning – Ontology Evolution – Versioning Ontologies in Semantic
Web.
MODULE-3:
STRUCTURING AND DESCRIBING WEB RESOURCES
Structured Web Documents - XML – Structuring – Namespaces – Addressing – Querying – Processing - RDF – RDF
Data Model – Serialization Formats- RDF Vocabulary –Inferencing RDFS – basic Idea – Classes – Properties- Utility
Properties – RDFS Modelling for Combinations and Patterns- Transitivity.
MODULE-4:
WEB ONTOLOGY LANGUAGE
OWL – Sub-Languages – Basic Notions -Classes- Defining and Using Properties – Domain and Range – Describing
Properties - Data Types – Counting and Sets- Negative Property Assertions – Advanced Class Description –
Equivalence – OWL Logic.
MODULE-5:
SEMANTIC WEB TOOLS AND APPLICATIONS
State - of- the- Art in Semantic Web Community-Development Tools for Semantic Web – Jena Framework – SPARL
–Querying Semantic Web- Semantic Desktop – Semantic Wikis - Semantic Web Services – Application in Science –
Business
TEXTBOOKS:
1. LiyangYu,‖A Developer‘s Guide to the Semantic Web‖, Springer, First Edition, 2011.
2. John Hebeler, Matthew Fisher, Ryan Blace and Andrew Perez-opez, ―Semantic Web Programming‖, First
Edition, Wiley, 2009.
3. Grigoris Antoniou, Frank van Harmelen, ―A Semantic Web Primer‖, Second Edition, MIT Press, 2008. 4. Robert
M.Colomb, Ontology and the Semantic Web‖, Frontiers in Artificial Intelligence and Applications, IOS Press, 2007.
5. Dean Allemangand James Hendler, Semantic Web for the Working Ontologist: Effective Modeling in RDFS and
OWL‖, Second Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2011.
6. Pascal Hitzler, Markus Krotzsch, Sebastian Rudolph, ―Foundations of Semantic Web Technologies, CRC Press,
2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Michael C. Daconta, Leo J.Obrst and Kevin T. Smith, ―The Semantic Web: A Guide to the Future of XML, Web
Services, and Knowledge Management‖, First Edition, Wiley, 2003
2. Karin Breitman, Marco Antonio Casanova and Walt Truszkowski, ―Semantic Web:
Concepts,TechnologiesandApplications(NASAMonographsinSystemsandSoftware Engineering) Springer, 2010.
3. Vipul Kashyap, Christoph Bussler and Matthew Moran, The Semantic Web: Semantics for Data and Services on
the Web(Data-Centric Systems and Applications), Springer, 2008.
Computer Science & Engineering *This

course
Code: CS532 Computer Architecture* L T P C
3 0 0 3 open to
all
branch except CSE/IT.
Course Outcomes:
1. Ability to describe the organization of computer and machine instructions and programs
2. Ability to analyze Input / Output Organization
3. Analyze the working of the memory system and basic processing unit.
4. Ability to solve problems of multicores, multiprocessors and clusters.
5. Choose optical storage media suitable for multimedia applications.
CO-PO Mapping:
CO1 - 3 - 2 2 - - - - - - 1
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2
CO3 2 2 2 2 3 - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 2
Average
MODULE-I:
Basics of Digital Electronics: Multiplexers and De multiplexers, Decoder andEncoder, Codes, Logic gates, Flip
flops, Registers.
Register Transfer and Micro Operations: Bus and Memory Transfer, Logic Micro Operations, Shift Micro
Operations, Register transfer and register transfer language, Design of arithmetic logic unit.
MODULE-II:
Basic Computer Organization: Instruction codes, Computer instructions, Timing and Control, Instruction cycle,
Memory reference Instruction, Complete computer description, Design of basic computer, Input output and interrupt.
MODULE-III:
Control Unit: Hardwired controls, Micro programmed controls.
Central Processing Unit : Program control, Reduced instruction set computer, Complex instruction set computer,
Data Transfer, Manipulation, General register and stack organization, Addressing mode.
MODULE-IV:
Computer Arithmetic: Addition and subtraction algorithm, Multiplication algorithm, Division algorithms.
MODULE-V:
Input-Output Organization: Priority interrupt, Peripheral devices, Input output interface, Data transfer schemes,
Program control and interrupts, Direct memory access transfer, Input/output processor.
Memory Unit: High speed memories, Memory hierarchy, Processor Vs Memory speed, Cache memory, Associative
memory, Inter leave, Virtual memory, Memory management.
MODULE-VI:
Introduction to Parallel Processing: Pipelining, Characteristics of multiprocessors, Interconnection structures, Inter
processor arbitration, Inter processor communication, Synchronization.
Text Books:
1. Computer System Architecture by Morris Mano, Prentice hall, 3rd Edition, (2007)
References:
1. Computer Organization by Carl Hamacher, ZvonkoVranesic, SafwatZaky, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 5th Edition,
(2011)
2. Computer Architecture : A Quantitative Approach by Hennessy, J. L, David A Patterson, and Goldberg,
Pearson Education, 4th Edition, (2006)
Semester – VI
Code: CS Computer Network L T P C

3 1 0 4
Course Objective:
This course includes learning about computer network organization and implementation. Students are introduced to
computer network design and its operations, and discuss the topics of OSI communication model; error detection and
recovery; LANs; network naming and addressing; and basics of cryptography and network security.
Course Outcome:
CO1 Describe and analyze the importance of data communications and the layered protocol
model
CO2 Describe, analyze and evaluate a number of data link, network, and transport layer protocols
and network devices.
CO3 Have a basic knowledge of the use of cryptography and network security;
CO4 Explain concepts and theories of networking and apply them to various situations,
classifying networks, analyzing performance and implementing new technologies
CO-PO Mapping:
CO1 1 1 - 2 - - - 1 1 - - 2
CO2 2 2 1 1 3 - - - 1 - 1 2
CO3 - 1 3 2 - 2 2 3 - - - 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 - - 2 1 1 2 2
Course Description:
MODULE 1:
Data communication Components: Representation of data and its flow in Networks, Various Connection Topology,
Protocols and Standards, OSI model.Physical Layer: LAN technologies (Ethernet), Multiplexing, Transmission
Media, Switching Techniques.
MODULE 2:
Data Link Layer: Flow Control and Error control protocols - Stop and Wait, Go back – N ARQ, Selective Repeat
ARQ, and Sliding Window. Multiple access protocols -Pure ALOHA, Slotted ALOHA, CSMA/CD, CDMA/CA.
Error Detection and Error Correction - Fundamentals, Block coding, CRC, Hamming Code.
MODULE 3:
Network Layer: Internetworking Devices. IP Addressing and Subnetting, Network Layer Protocols: IPV4, IPV6 and
ICMP. Address Mapping: ARP, RARP and DHCP. Routing algorithms (link state and distance vector).
MODULE 4:
Transport Layer: Process to Process Delivery: UDP and TCP, Congestion Control and Quality of Services.
MODULE 5:
Application Layer: Application layer protocols (DNS, SMTP, POP, FTP, HTTP). Basics of Wi-Fi.
MODULE 6:
Network security: authentication, basics of public key and private key cryptography, digital signatures and
certificates, firewalls.
Text Books:
1. “Data Communication and Networking”, Behrouz Forouzan, McGraw Hill Education.
Reference Books:
1. “Computer Networks”, Andrew S Tanenbaum, Pearson Edition

2. “Data and Computer Communications ” , W. Stallings, PHI/ Pearson Education
Code: IT Data Science L T P C

3 1 0 4
Course Objective:
The main objective of this course is to train the student to do theoretical with practical data science work, Career-
wise, we expect our students to be able to develop into skilled data science researchers or software developers.
Course Outcome:
1. To enable students with data analytics skill

2. To develop knowledge of fundamentals of data science
3. To empower students with hands-on for data science
4. To make students experience with theoretical data science and programming
CO-PO Mapping:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO5 PO9 P11 P12
CO1 - 3 2 - 1 3 3
CO2 3 2 - - 2 2 2
CO3 - 2 3 3 3 3 -
CO4 2 - 2 3 3 2 2
MODULE-I
INTRODUCTION: -
Introduction to data science, Different sectors of using data science, Purpose and components of Python, Data
Analytics processes, Exploratory data analytics, Quantitative technique and graphical technique, Data types for
plotting.
MODULE-II
STATISTICAL ANALYSIS: -
Introduction to statistics, statistical and non-statistical analysis, major categories of statistics, population and sample,
Measure of central tendency and dispersion, Moments, Skewness and kurtosis, Correlation and regression,
Theoretical distributions – Binomial, Poisson, Normal
MODULE-III
INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE LEARNING: -
Machine learning, Types of learning, Properties of learning algorithms, Linear regression and regularization, model
selection and evaluation, classification: SVM, kNN and decision tree, Ensemble methods: random forest, Naive
Bayes and logistic regression, Clustering: k-means, feature engineering and selection, Dimensionality reduction:
PCA
MODULE-IV
PYTHON SETUP FOR MATHEMATICAL AND SCIENTIFIC COMPUTING: -
Anaconda installation process, data types with python, basic operators and setup, introduction to numpy,
mathematical functions of numpy, introduction to scipy, scipy packages, data frame and data operations, data
visualisation using matplotlib
Text Books:
1. N.G.Das , Statistical Methods (combined edition Vol.I and Vol.II) – McGraw Hill
2. Roger D. Peng, Elizabeth Matusi, The Art of Data Science: A Guide for Anyone who work with data -
Leanpub
3. AurelienGeron, Hands-On Machine Learning with Scikit – Learn &TensorFlow – O’reilly
Reference Books:
1. AndriyBurkov, The Hundred Page Machine Learning Book – Xpress Publishing

2. James, G., Witten, D., Hastie, T., Tibshirani, R. An introduction to statistical learning with applications
in R. Springer.
3. Murphy, K. Machine Learning: A Probabilistic Perspective. - MIT Press
4. Jan Erik Solem, Programming Computer Vision with Python – O’ Reilly
Code: CS Image Processing L T P C

3 0 0 3
Pre-requisite(s)
Knowledge ofData Structures, Computer Graphics required for this course.
Course Outcomes:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
CO1 To study the image fundamentals and image transforms necessary for image processing
CO2 Map
To study the image enhancement techniques.
ping
To study the image restoration procedures and segmentation tools. of
CO3
cour
se
CO4 To study the wavelet tools and the image compression procedures.
outc
omes
with program outcomes:
CO1 3 - 2 - - - - - - - -
CO2 3 2 2 3 - - - - - - - -
CO3 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - - -
CO4 1 2 3 - - - - - - - - -
MODULE-I:
INTRODUCTION AND DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS
Introduction: Origin, Steps in Digital Image Processing, Components. Digital Image Fundamentals: Elements of
Visual Perception, Image Sampling and Quantization, Some Basic Relationships between pixels, Color Models.
MODULE-II:
IMAGE TRANSFORM
Introduction to the Fourier Transform, The Discrete Fourier Transform, Discrete Cosine Transform, Singular Value
Decomposition and Principal Component Analysis.
MODULE-III:
IMAGE ENHANCEMENT
Spatial Domain: Some Simple Intensity Transformations, Histogram processing, Basics of Spatial Filtering,
Smoothing and Sharpening Spatial Filtering. Frequency Domain: Smoothing and Sharpening frequency domain
filters – Ideal, Butterworth and Gaussian filters.
MODULE-IV:
IMAGE RESTORATION AND SEGMENTATION
Image Restoration: Noise models, Mean Filters, Order Statistics, Adaptive filters, Band reject Filters, Band pass
Filters, Notch Filters, Optimum Notch Filtering, Inverse Filtering, Wiener filtering. Segmentation: Thresholding.
MODULE-V:
WAVELETS AND IMAGE COMPRESSION
Wavelets: Background, Sub-band Coding, Multi-resolution Expansions. Compression: Fundamentals, Image
Compression Models, Error Free compression- Variable Length Coding, Bit-Plane Coding, Lossless Predictive
Coding, Lossy Compression, Lossy Predictive Coding, Transform Coding and Wavelet Coding.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Rafael C. Gonzales, Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. S. Jayaraman, S Essakirajan, “Digital Image Processing”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009
2. Khalid Sayood, “Introduction to Data Compression”, Third Edition, Elsevier, 2006.
3. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Steven L. Eddins, “Digital Image Processing Using MATLAB”,
Third Edition Tata McGraw Hill Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
4. https://cse19-iiith.vlabs.ac.in/index.html
Code: System Software L T P C

3 0 0 3

To introduce the student to key concepts in Phase transformations and enable an
understanding of the steps involved in several important phase transformations.
Course Outcomes
After completing this course, the student should be able to:
Explain the organization of basic computer, its design and the design of control unit.
CO1
CO2 Understand the organization of memory and memory management hardware.
CO3 Distinguish between Operating Systems software and Application Systems software.
CO4 Identify the primary functions of an Operating System.
CO5 Master attributes and assessment of quality, reliability and security of software.
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE-I
INTRODUCTION: System Software, Application Software, components of a programming system:

Assembler, Loader, Linker, Macros, Compiler, Program Development Cycle, Evolution of Operating
Systems, Functions of Operating System, Machine Structure: General Machine Structure, Approach to a
new machine, Memory Registers, Data, Instructions, Evolution of Machine Language: Long Way, No
looping, Address Modification, Looping, Introduction to Assembly LanguageProgram.
MODULE –II
ASSEMBLERS: Review of Computer Architecture – Machine Instructions and Programs – Assemblers –Basic
Assembler Functions – Assembler Features – Assembler Design Options. LOADERS AND LINKERS: Loaders
and Linkers – Basic Loader Functions – Machine-Dependent Loader Features – Machine-Independent
Loader Features– Loader Design Options-Dynamic Linking and Loading- Object files- Contents of an object
file – designing an object format – Null object formats- Code sections- Relocation – Symbols and Relocation
– Relocatablea. out-ELF.
MODULE-III
MACROPROCESSORS AND EMULATORS: Microprocessors – Basic Macro Processor Functions – Machine-

Independent Macro Processor Features – Macro Processor Design Options - Introduction to Virtual
Machines (VM) - Emulation - basic Interpretation – Threaded Interpretation – Interpreting a complex
instruction set – binary translation.
MODULE-IV
VIRTUAL MACHINES: Pascal P-Code VM – Object-Oriented VMs – Java VM Architecture – Common

Language Infrastructure – Dynamic Class Loading. ADVANCED FEATURES: Instruction Set Issues – Profiling –
Migration – Grids – Code optimizations- Garbage Collection - Examples of real-world implementations of
system software.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Leland L. Beck, “System Software”, 3rd ed., PearsonEducation.

2. John R. Levine, “Linkers & Loaders”, MorganKauffman.
3. James E Smith and Ravi Nair, “Virtual Machines”,Elsevier.
REFERENCES:
1. Srimanta Pal, “ Systems Programming “ , Oxford UniversityPress.

2. John J.Donovan, “ “Systems Programming”, Tata McGraw-Hill.
3. Systems Programming by John J Donovan (McGraw-HillEducation)
4. Operating System and System Programming – Dhamdhere (McGraw-HillEducation)
Code: Distributed System L T P C

3 0 0 3
Course objective:
This course covers the basic understanding of distributed computing system. The course aims to provide an
understanding of the principles on which the Internet and other distributed systems are based; their
architecture, algorithms and how they meet the demands of contemporary distributed applications. The
course covers the building blocks for a study of distributed systems, and addressing
thecharacteristicsandthechallengesthatmustbeaddressedintheirdesign:scalability,heterogeneity,
securityandfailurehandlingbeingthemostsignificant.Distributedcomputingisafieldofcomputerscience that
studies distributed systems. A distributed system is a system whose components are located on different
networked computers, which communicate and coordinate their actions
bypassingmessagestooneanother.Thecomponentsinteractwithoneanotherinordertoachieve a common goal.
Three significant characteristics of distributed systems are: concurrency of components, lack of a global
clock, and independent failure ofcomponents.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course the students will be able to:
Demonstrate knowledge of the basic elements and concepts related to distributedsystem

CO1
technologies.
CO2 Demonstrate knowledge of the core architectural aspects of distributed systems
CO3 Demonstrate knowledge of details the main underlying components of distributed

systems (such as RPC, file systems);
CO4 Use and apply important methods in distributed systems to support scalability and fault
tolerance;
CO5 Demonstrate experience in building large-scale distributed applications.
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE-I.
Introduction to distributed computing system, evolution different models, gaining popularity, definition,
issues in design, DCE, message passing –introduction, desirable features of a good message passing system,
issues in IPC, synchronization, buffering, multigram messages, encoding and decoding of message data,
process addressing, failure handling, group communication.
MODULE-II.
Introduction, model, transparency, implementation mechanism, stubgeneration, RPC messages, marshalling

arguments and results, server management, parameter - passing semantics, call semantics, communication
protocols for RPCs, client – server binding, exception handling, security, mini project using Java RMI.
MODULE-III.
General architecture of DSM systems, design and implementation issues of DSM systems, granularity,
structure of shared memory space, consistency model, replacement strategy, thrashing, advantages of
DSM, clock synchronization DFS and security- Desirable features of good DFS, file models, file accessing
Models, file sharing semantics, file catching schemes, file replication, fault Tolerance, atomic transaction,
potential attacks to computer system, cryptography, authentication, access control.Digital signatures, DCE
securityservice.
MODULE-IV.
Operating Systems, Client-Server Model, Distributed Database Systems, Parallel Programming Languages
and Algorithms. Distributed Network Architectures- Managing Distributed Systems. Design Considerations.
MODULE-V.
For development, implementation & evaluation of distributed information systems, workflow, software
processes, transaction management, and data modeling, infrastructure e.g. middle-ware to glue
heterogeneous, autonomous, and partly mobile/distributed data systems, such as e.g. client/server-,
CORBA-, and Internet- technologies. Methods for building distributed applications.
Text / Reference
1. Pradeep K. Sinha, "Distributed Operating Systems: Concepts Design", 2007
2. Crichlow Joel M, "An Introduction to Distributed and Parallel Computing", PHI, 1997
3. Black Uyless, "Data Communications and Distributed Networks", PHI, 5thEdition,1997

Code: Software Engineering L T P C

3 0 0 3
1. To develop basic Knowledge in Software Engineering and its applications.
2. To understand software Engineering layered architecture and the process frame work.
3. To analyze software process models such as the waterfall, spiral, evolutionary models and agile method for
software development.
4. To design software requirements and specifications of documents.
5. To understand project planning, scheduling, cost estimation, risk management.
6. To describe data models, object models, context models and behavioral models.
7. To learn coding style and testing issues.
8. To know about the quality checking mechanism for software process and product.
Course outcomes –
CO.1 Identifythe principles of large scale software systems, and the processes that are used to build them.
CO.2 Ableto use tools and techniques for producing application software solutions from informal and semi-formal
problem specifications.
CO.3 Develop an appreciation of the cost, quality, and management issues involved in software construction.
CO.4 Implement design and communicate ideas about software system solutions at different levels.
CO.5 Establish the relation with other people in a team, communicating computing ideas effectively in speech and
in writing.
CO.1 2 2 - 3 - - - - - - - 1
CO.2 - 3 - 2 1 - - - - - - -
CO.3 - 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO.4 1 2 - 1 - - - - - 1 - -
CO.5 - - - - - 1 - 1 1 1 2 3
MODULE-I:
SOFTWARE PROCESS AND AGILE DEVELOPMENT
Introduction to Software Engineering, Software Process, Perspective and Specialized Process Models –Introduction
to Agility-Agile process-Extreme programming-XP Process.
MODULE-II:
REQUIREMENTS ANALYSIS AND SPECIFICATION
Software Requirements: Functional and Non-Functional, User requirements, System requirements, Software
Requirements Document – Requirement Engineering Process: Feasibility Studies, Requirements elicitation and
analysis, requirements validation, requirements management Classical analysis: Structured system Analysis, Petri
Nets- Data Dictionary.
MODULE-III:
SOFTWARE DESIGN
Design process – Design Concepts-Design Model– Design Heuristic – Architectural Design - Architectural styles,
Architectural Design, Architectural Mapping using Data Flow- User Interface Design: Interface analysis, Interface
Design –Component level Design: Designing Class based components, traditional Components.
MODULE-IV:
TESTING AND MAINTENANCE
Software testing fundamentals-Internal and external views of Testing-white box testing - basis path testing-control
structure testing-black box testing- Regression Testing – Unit Testing – Integration Testing – Validation Testing –
System Testing And Debugging –Software Implementation Techniques: Coding practices-Refactoring-Maintenance
and Reengineering-BPR model-Reengineering process model-Reverse and Forward Engineering.
MODULE-V:
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Software Project Management: Estimation – LOC, FP Based Estimation, Make/Buy Decision COCOMO I & II
Model – Project Scheduling – Scheduling, Earned Value Analysis Planning – Project Plan, Planning Process, RFP
Risk Management – Identification, Projection - Risk Management-Risk Identification-RMMM Plan-CASE TOOLS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Roger S. Pressman, ―Software Engineering – A Practitioner‟s Approach‖, Seventh Edition, McGraw-Hill
International Edition, 2010.
2. Rajib Mall, ―Fundamentals of Software Engineering‖, Third Edition, PHI Learning PrivateLimited, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ian Sommerville, ―Software Engineering‖, 9th Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2011.
2. PankajJalote, ―Software Engineering, A Precise Approach‖, Wiley India, 2010.

3. Kelkar S.A., ―Software Engineering‖, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2007.
4. Stephen R.Schach, ―Software Engineering‖, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited,2007.
Code: Distributed System L T P C

3 0 0 3
Course objective:
This course covers the basic understanding of distributed computing system. The course aims to provide an
understanding of the principles on which the Internet and other distributed systems are based; their
architecture, algorithms and how they meet the demands of contemporary distributed applications. The
course covers the building blocks for a study of distributed systems, and addressing
thecharacteristicsandthechallengesthatmustbeaddressedintheirdesign:scalability,heterogeneity,
securityandfailurehandlingbeingthemostsignificant.Distributedcomputingisafieldofcomputerscience that
studies distributed systems. A distributed system is a system whose components are located on different
networked computers, which communicate and coordinate their actions
bypassingmessagestooneanother.Thecomponentsinteractwithoneanotherinordertoachieve a common goal.
Three significant characteristics of distributed systems are: concurrency of components, lack of a global
clock, and independent failure ofcomponents.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course the students will be able to:
Demonstrate knowledge of the basic elements and concepts related to distributedsystem

CO1
technologies.
CO2 Demonstrate knowledge of the core architectural aspects of distributed systems
CO3 Demonstrate knowledge of details the main underlying components of distributed

systems (such as RPC, file systems);
CO4 Use and apply important methods in distributed systems to support scalability and fault
tolerance;
CO5 Demonstrate experience in building large-scale distributed applications.
Detailed Syllabus:
MODULE-I:
Introduction to distributed computing system, evolution different models, gaining popularity, definition,
issues in design, DCE, message passing –introduction, desirable features of a good message passing system,
issues in IPC, synchronization, buffering, multigram messages, encoding and decoding of message data,
process addressing, failure handling, group communication.
MODULE-II:
Introduction, model, transparency, implementation mechanism, stubgeneration, RPC messages, marshalling
arguments and results, server management, parameter - passing semantics, call semantics, communication
protocols for RPCs, client– server binding, exception handling, security, mini project using Java RMI.
MODULE-III:
General architecture of DSM systems, design and implementation issues of DSM systems, granularity,
structure of shared memory space, consistency model, replacement strategy, thrashing, advantages of
DSM, clock synchronization DFS and security- Desirable features of good DFS, file models, file accessing
Models, file sharing semantics, file catching schemes, file replication, fault Tolerance, atomic transaction,
potential attacks to computer system, cryptography, authentication, access control.Digital signatures, DCE
securityservice.
MODULE-IV:
Operating Systems, Client-Server Model, Distributed Database Systems, Parallel Programming Languages
and Algorithms. Distributed Network Architectures- Managing Distributed Systems. Design Considerations.
MODULE-V:
For development, implementation & evaluation of distributed information systems, workflow, software
processes, transaction management, and data modeling, infrastructure e.g. middle-ware to glue
heterogeneous, autonomous, and partly mobile/distributed data systems, such as e.g. client/server-,
CORBA-, and Internet- technologies. Methods for building distributed applications.
Text / Reference
1. Pradeep K. Sinha, "Distributed Operating Systems: Concepts Design", 2007 2.Crichlow Joel M,
"An Introduction to Distributed and Parallel Computing", PHI, 1997
3. Black Uyless, "Data Communications and Distributed Networks", PHI, 5thEdition,1997

Code: Artificial Intelligence & Machine Learning L T P C

3 0 0 3
Course objectives -
The aim of Artificial Intelligence & Machine Learning course is to prepare students for career in computer
science & engineering where knowledge of AI & ML techniques leading to the advancement of research
and technology. Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning are the terms of computer science. Machine
Learning is the learning in which machine can learn by its
ownwithoutbeingexplicitlyprogrammed.ItisanapplicationofAIthatprovidesystemtheability to automatically
learn and improve fromexperience.
Course Outcomes: After completing this course the student will be able to:
CO1 Demonstrate fundamental understanding of artificial intelligence (AI) and expert systems.
Apply basic principles of AI in solutions that require problem solving, inference,

CO2
perception, knowledge representation, and learning.
CO3 Demonstrate proficiency in applying scientific method to models of machine learning.
Discuss the basics of ANN and different optimizations techniques.

CO4
CO1 3 3 - 2 2 - - - - - - -
CO2 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - - -
CO3 3 2 - 3 - - - - - - - -
CO4 2 - 1 - 3 - 2 - - - - -
Course Detail -
MODULE-I:
Overview and Search Techniques: Introduction to AI, Problem Solving,

Statespacesearch,Blindsearch:Depthfirstsearch, Breadthfirstsearch,Informedsearch: Heuristic function, Hill
climbing search, Best first search, A* & AO* Search, Constraint satisfaction problem; Game tree, Evaluation
function, Mini-Max search, Alpha-beta pruning, Games of chance.
MODULE-II:
Knowledge Representation (KR): Introduction to KR, Knowledge agent, Predicate logic, Inference rule &
theorem proving forward chaining, backward chaining,
resolution;Propositionalknowledge,Booleancircuitagents;RuleBasedSystems,Forward reasoning: Conflict
resolution, backward reasoning: Structured KR: Semantic Net - slots, inheritance, ConceptualDependency.
MODULE-III:
Handling uncertainty and Learning: Source of uncertainty, Probabilistic inference, Bayes’ theorem,
Limitation of naïve Bayesian system, Bayesian Belief Network (BBN); Machine learning, Basic principal,
Utility of ML Well defined learning system, Challenges in ML, Application of ML.
MODULE-IV:
Learning and Classifier: Linear Regression (with one variable and multiple variables), Decision Trees and
issue in decision tree, Clustering (K-means, Hierarchical, etc), Dimensionality reduction, Principal
Component Analysis, Anomaly detection, Feasibility of learning, Reinforcement learning.
MODULE-V:
Artificial Neural Networks: Introduction, Artificial Perceptron’s, Gradient Descent and The Delta Rule,
Adaline, Multilayer Networks, Back-propagation Rule back-propagation Algorithm- Convergence;
Evolutionary algorithm, Genetic Algorithms – An Illustrative Example, Hypothesis Space Search, Swarm
intelligence algorithm.
Text Book:
1. Artificial Intelligence by Elaine Rich and Kevin Knight, Tata MeGrawHill
2. Understanding Machine Learning. ShaiShalev-Shwartz and Shai Ben-David. Cambridge
University Press.
3. Artificial Neural Network, B. Yegnanarayana, PHI,2005
Reference Book:
1. Christopher M. Bishop. Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning(Springer)
2. IntroductiontoArtificialIntelligenceandExpertSystemsbyDanW.Patterson,Prentice Hall ofIndia
Code : Internetworking L T P C Course

3 0 0 3 Outco
mes:
CO 1: Students will be able to classify the routing protocols and analyse how to assign the IP addresses for the given
network.
CO 2: Students will be able to understand the architecture of different internet servers.
CO 3: Students will be able to configure the firewall in the network.
CO-PO Mapping:
CO 1 2 2 2 2 - 2 - - 1 - 3 1
CO 2 2 - 3 - - - - - 2 - 1 2
CO 3 1 2 3 2 2 - - - 3 - 1 2
MODULE-I:
AN OVERVIEW ON INTERNET
The need for an Internet, The TCP/IP Internet, Internet services, Internet protocols and standardization, Review of
Networktechnologies.
INTERNETWORKING CONCEPTS
Architectural model introduction, Application level interconnection, Network level interconnection, Properties of
the Internet, Internet Architecture, Interconnection through IP Gateways or routers, Internet andIntranet.
MODULE-II:
INTERNET ADDRESS
Introduction, Universal identifiers, Three primary classes of IP addresses, Classless IP address, Network and
Broadcast addresses, Mapping internet addresses to physical addresses (ARP), ARP protocol format, Transport
Gateways and subnet addressing, Multicastaddressing.
MODULE-III:
INTERNET PROTOCOL
Internet Architecture and Philosophy, The concept of unreliable delivery, Connectionless delivery system, The
Internet Datagram, Routing direct and indirect delivery, Table driven IP routing, Protocol layering, Reliable stream
transport, TCP performance, Bootstrap protocol(BOOTP).
MODULE-IV:
ROUTING
The origin of Gateway routing tables, Original Internet Architecture and Cores, Core Gateways, Automatic route
propagation, Vector distance (Bellman-Ford), routing, Gateway to Gateway Protocol (GGP), Autonomous system
concept, Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP), Interior Gateway Protocol (RIP, OSPF, HELLO), Routing Information
Protocol (RIP), Combining RIP, HELLO, and EGP, Routing with partial information.
MODULE-V:
ENTERPRISE NETWORKING AND INTERNET SERVERS
Corporate networking, Broadband at the Metropolitan area level, High speed dedicated WAN services and
switched WAN services, ISDN, BISDN and ATM services, Frame relay technology and services, Virtual private
network concepts PPTP protocol. DNS, DHCP Servers, FTP, TELNET, E-Mail.
MODULE-VI:
FIREWALL & NETWORKING
Introduction, Implementation of Firewall, Activities of Firewall, Configuration of firewall, Firewalls & SSL, SSL
implementation, Bit implementation of SSL, Use ofSSL.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Computer Networks and Internets - Douglas E. Comer;PE.

2. Communication Networks - Leon-Garcia-Widjaja;TMH.
3. Internet working withTCP/IP -Douglas E.Comer;PE.
4. TCP/IP protocol suite- ForouzanBehrouz A;TMH.
5. Computer Networks – Andrew S. Tanenbaum;PHI.
6. Data and Computer Communication - William Stallings; PHI.
7. The Complete reference of Networking -CraigZacker;TMH.
8.
Code: Soft Computing L T P C

3 0 0 3
Course objective:
This course will cover fundamental concepts used in Soft computing. Soft Computing refers to a
partnership of computational techniques in computer science, artificial intelligence, machine learning and
some engineering disciplines, which attempt to study, model, and analyze complex phenomena. The
concepts of Artificial Neural Networks (ANNs) will be covered first, followed by Fuzzy logic (FL) and
optimization techniques using Genetic Algorithm (GA). Applications of Soft Computing techniques to solve
a number of real-life problems will be covered to have hands on practices. In summary, this course will
provide exposure to theory as well as practical systems and software used in soft computing.
Course outcomes:
At the end of the course students will be able to:
CO1 Present the feasibility of applying a soft computing methodology for specific
problem.
CO2 Identify and describe soft computing techniques and their roles in building intelligent
machines.
CO3 Apply neural networks to pattern classification and regression problems.
CO4 Apply fuzzy logic and reasoning to handle uncertainty and solve engineering problems.
CO5 Apply genetic algorithms to combinatorial optimization problems.
CO 1 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - 1 - 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
CO 3 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2
CO 4 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - -
CO 5 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2
Avg 3 2.6 2.2 2 2.25 2 1 2
Detailed Syllabus
MODULE-I:
INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING: Soft computing: Soft computing concepts, soft computing versus
hard computing, various types of soft computing techniques, applications of soft computing.
MODULE-II:
ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS: Neural Networks: History, overview of biological Neuro-system,
Mathematical Models of Neurons, ANN architecture, learning rules, Learning Paradigms- Supervised,
Unsupervised and reinforcement Learning, ANN training, Algorithms-perceptions; Training rules, Delta,
Back Propagation Algorithm, Multilayer PerceptronModel.
MODULE-III:
SPECIAL LEARNING NETWORK: Competitive learning networks, Kohonen Self-organizing networks,
Hebbian learning, Hopfield Networks, Associative memories, The Boltzman machine, Applications of
Artificial Neural Networks.
MODULE-IV:
FUZZY LOGIC: Fuzzy Logic: Introduction to Fuzzy Logic, Classical and Fuzzy Sets: Overview of Classical Sets,
Membership Function, Fuzzy rule generation. Operations on Fuzzy Sets: Compliment, Intersections, Unions,
Combinations of Operations, Aggregation Operations. Fuzzy Arithmetic: Fuzzy Numbers, Linguistic
Variables, Arithmetic Operations on Intervals & Numbers, Lattice of Fuzzy Numbers, Fuzzy Equations. Fuzzy
Logic: Classical Logic, Multivalued Logics, Fuzzy Qualifiers, Linguistic Hedges, Introduction & features of
membership functions.
MODULE-V:
FUZZY RULE BASED SYSTEM: Fuzzy rule base system: Fuzzy Propositions, implications and inferences, Fuzzy
reasoning, Defuzzification techniques, Fuzzy logic controller design, Fuzzy decision making & Applications
of fuzzy logic.
MODULE-VI:
GENETIC ALGORITHMS: Genetic Algorithms: An Overview of Genetic algorithm (GA), Evolution
strategies (ES), Evolutionary programming (EP), Genetic programming (GP); GA operators: Encoding,
Selection, Crossover, Mutation, schema analysis, analysis of selection algorithms; convergence;
optimization, of travelling salesman problem using genetic algorithm approach; Markov & other stochastic
models. Other Soft Computing Techniques: Simulated annealing, Tabu search, Ant colony-based
optimization (ACO),etc.
Text Book:
1. P. R. Beeley, Foundry Technology, Newnes- Buttterworths, 2001.
2. P. D. Webster, Fundamentals of Foundry Technology, Portwillis press, Red hill, 1980.
SupplementaryReading:
1. P. C. Mukherjee, Fundamentals of Metal casting Technology, Oxford IBH,1980.
2.R. W. Hein, C. R. Loper and P. C. Rosenthal, Principles of Metal casting, McGraw Hill, 1976.
Code: Information Retrieval L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To provide an overview of Information Retrieval systems. Expose them to various retrieval models
with emphasis on pros and cons of these models. Discuss mechanisms of web search along with the details of ranking
algorithms. Introduce basic concepts of text categorization and recommender systems.
MODULE-I
Introduction to Information Retrieval: The nature of unstructured and semi-structured text. Inverted index and
Boolean queries. Text Indexing, Storage and Compression Text encoding: tokenization; stemming; stop words;
phrases; index optimization. Index compression: lexicon compression and postings lists compression. Gap encoding,
gamma codes, Zipf's Law. Index construction. Postings size estimation, dynamic indexing, positional indexes, n-
gram indexes, real-world issues.
MODULE -II
Information Retrieval Models: Boolean; vector space; TFIDF; Okapi; probabilistic; language modeling; latent
semantic indexing. Vector space scoring. The cosine measure. Efficiency considerations. Document length
normalization. Relevance feedback and query expansion. Rocchio algorithm.
MODULE -III
Web Information Retrieval: Hypertext, web crawling, search engines, ranking, link analysis, PageRank, HITS.
Retrieving Structured Documents: XML retrieval, semantic web.
Performance Evaluation of IR systems: Evaluating search engines. User happiness, precision, recall, F-measure.
Creating test collections: kappa measure, interjudge agreement.
MODULE -IV
Text Categorization and Filtering: Introduction to text classification. Naive Bayes models. Spam filtering. Vector
space classification using hyperplanes; centroids; k Nearest Neighbors. Support vector machine classifiers. Kernel
functions. Boosting.
MODULE -V
Advanced Topics: Summarization, Topic detection and tracking, Personalization, Question answering, Cross
language information retrieval (CLIR). Recommender System.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will get:
CO1: The understanding of different Information retrieval models
CO2: To know about evaluation methods of the information retrieval model
CO3: Exposures of implementing retrieval models on text data
CO4: To know about text categorization and its implementation
CO5: To know the challenges associated with each topics on new domain of retrieval and classification
CO-PO mapping table

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5
CO1 3 2
CO2 1 2 3
CO3 3 2 2
CO4 3 2 3
CO5 2 3
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Manning, Raghavan and Schutze, “Introduction to Information Retrieval”, Cambridge University Press,
2009.
2. Baeza-Yates and Ribeiro-Neto, “Modern Information Retrieval”, Addison Wesley.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles L. A. Clarke, Gordon Cormack, and Stefan Büttcher, “Information Retrieval: Implementing and
Evaluating Search Engines”, MIT Press Cambridge, 2010.
2. Baeza-Yates / Ribeiro-Neto, “Modern Information Retrieval: The Concepts and Technology behind Search”,
Pearson Education India, 2010.
Code: Cloud Computing L T P C

3 0 0 3
The aim this course to understand the basics and importance of cloud computing. Cloud computing is a general term
for anything that involves delivering hosted services over the Internet. These services are broadly divided into
different categories: Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS), Platform- as-a-Service (PaaS) and Software-as-a-Service
(SaaS). The name cloud computing was inspired by the cloud symbol that's often used to represent the Internet in
flowcharts and diagrams. Cloud computing is the on-demand availability of computer system resources,
especially datastorageandcomputingpower,withoutdirectactivemanagementbytheuser.Thetermisgenerally used to
describe data centers available to many users over the Internet. Large clouds, predominant today, often have
functions distributed over multiple locations from central servers.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
To identify the appropriate cloud services for a given application and perform cloud- oriented
CO1 analysis.
CO2 To design the composition of a cloud services.
CO3 To analyze authentication, confidentiality and privacy issues in Cloud computing environment.
CO4 To Determine financial and technological implications for selecting cloud computing platforms.
CO1 2 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - -
CO2 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - - -
CO3 3 1 - 2 - - - - - - - -
CO4 2 - 2 - 3 - 2 - - - -
Detailed syllabus:
MODULE – I:
Introduction to cloud computing: Emergence of cloud computing in distributed computing; Cloud

computing Definition, Architecture, Cloud-Based Services, Benefits of using a Cloud Model, Key
Characteristics of Cloud Computing, Understanding- Public & Private cloud environments, The Evolution of
CloudComputing – Hardware & Internet Software Evolution, SPI framework.
MODULE – II:
Cloud services: Communication-as-a-Service (CAAS), Infrastructure-as- a-Service (IAAS), Monitoring-as-a

Service (MAAS), Platform-as-a-Service (PAAS), Software-as-a-Service (SAAS).
MODULE – III:
Cloud security challenges: Security Management People, Security Governance, Security Portfolio
Management, Security Architecture Design, Identity Access Management (IAM), Data Security. Cloud
computing threats, Case studies- Amazon EC2, Google App engine, IBM clouds.
MODULE – IV:
The MSP Model: Evolution from the MSP Model to Cloud Computing and Software-as-a-Service, The Cloud
Data Center, Basic Approach to a Data Center-Based SOA, Open Source Software, Service- Oriented
Architectures as a Step Toward Cloud Computing.
MODULE – I:
Virtualization concepts & Smartphone: virtualization benefits,Hardware & Software Virtualization,

Memory Virtualization, Storage Virtualization, Data Virtualization, Network Virtualization, Virtualization
Security Recommendations, Introduction to Various Virtualization OS VMware, KVM, Virtual Machine
Security, Smartphone, Mobile Operating Systems for Smartphone’s (iPhone, Windows Mobile),
Google(Android).
Course outcomes:
At the end of this course
1. Student will be able to identify the appropriate cloud services for a given application and perform
cloud-oriented analysis.
2. Students will be able to design the composition of a cloud services.
3. Student will be able to analyze authentication, confidentiality and privacy issues in Cloud
computing environment.
4. Determine financial and technological implications for selecting cloud computing platforms.
Text Book:
1. Toby Velte, Anthony Vote and Robert Elsenpeter, “Cloud Computing: A Practical Approach”,
McGraw Hill, 2002
2. Gautam Shroff, Enterprise Cloud Computing, Cambridge,2010.
Reference Book:
1. Tim Matherm, Subra Kumara swamy and ShahedLatif, “Cloud Security and Privacy: An
Enterprise Perspective on Risks and Compliance”, O’Reilly Media, 2005.
2. Ronald Krutz and Russell Dean Vines, Cloud Security, 1st Edition, Wiley

JUT Syllabus & Regulation 1st To 6th Sem

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JUT Syllabus & Regulation 1st To 6th Sem

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

JUT Syllabus & Regulation 1st To 6th Sem

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JHARKHAND UNIVERSITY OF TECHNOLOGY

(Established by State Act No. ……. of 2017)

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS FOR B.TECH.

With effect from

ACADEMIC YEAR 2018-19

Sl. No. Topic Page No.

9 RECORDS OF ACADEMIC PROGRESS 10

12 GRADE AFTER COMPLETION OF COURSE 12

13 GUIDELINES FOR ASSIGNMENT 12

1. Civil Engineering (CE)

3.2. There is no provision of Inter-College transfer of students.

The credit for the attendance will be calculated as follows:

Number of classes attended in a course

Total number of classes taken in that course

and the weightage of attendance would be as:

ii. Normally, subjects based on engineering or scientific principles or on thought-provoking

The registration process will have 3 components:

End Semester Examination 70 Marks

 The end semester examinations will be of 70 marks. It will comprise of seven

Two Mid Semester Exam each of 20 marks (Consider Best of two) 20

7.3. Practical / Viva – Voce examination marks (Total 50 marks)

 External examiner viva-voce examination marks 20 Marks

7.5. Marks for Seminar

 Minor project in 7th semester 50 marks (distribution of marks as in clause 7.3)

8. GRADING OF PERFORMANCE IN EXAMINATIONS

% of marks obtained with Letter Grade

9. RECORDS OF ACADEMIC PROGRESS

10. GRADUATION REQUIREMENT

11. AWARD OF DEGREE

2. End semester examination- 70 marks (3 Hours duration)

 Sessional/ Practical/ Minor Project Component: 50 marks

 Project ( Total marks 100)

70% and above First class with distinction

60% to 69% First class

40% to 59% Second class ( But CGPA not < 5)

13. GUIDELINES FOR ASSIGNMENT

14. CHANGE OF BRANCH

14.3. Change of branch is not applicable to following:

14.4. Further change of branch shall not be permitted.

ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY

Jharkhand University of Technology

Table 1: Branch/Course Common to all branches of UG Engineering & Technology

1 Basic Science BSC101 Physics I 3 1 0 4 30 70 100

4 Engineering ESC102 Engineering 1 0 4 3 25 25 50

Grand Total(A+B) 17.5 165 285 450

L-Lecture, T-Tutorial, P-Practical

IA- Internal Assessment, ESE-End Semester Examination

SEMESTER II (FIRST YEAR]

1 Basic Science BSC105 Physics II 3 1 0 4 30 70 100

COMMON BASIC SCIENCES COURSES

ENGINEERING SCIENCE COURSES &

Sl. No. Course Paper

1. ENGINEERING SCIENCE Programming for Problem Solving

Table 5: Physics Papers for different Engineering Discipline

Course Code BSC 103

Module 1: Calculus-I 6 Lectures

Module 2: Calculus-II 6 Lectures

Module 3: Sequences and series 10 Lectures

Module 4: Multivariable Calculus (Differentiation) 8 Lectures